PROCEEDINGS

OP THK

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

or

PHILADELPHIA.

18 8 6.

committee of publication:

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

John H. Redfield,

Editor : EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA:

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,.

LOGAN SQUARE,

18 87.

M^o^

Academy of Natural Scibnces op Philadelphia,

February 2, 1887.

I hereby certify that copies of the Proceedings for 1886 have been pre-
sented at the Meetings of the Academy as follows : —

Pages 9 to 24

25 to 56

' 57 to 104

' 105 to 120

' 121 to 136

' 137 to 152

' 153 to 168

« 169 to 200

' 201 to 248

' 249 to 264

' 265 to 280

' 281 to 296

' 297 to 312

' 313 to 328

' 329 to 336

' 337 to 352

' 353 to 368

' 369 to 384

March 23,

April 6,

May 18,

June 8,

June 1,

J'une 8,

June 15,

June 22,

July 13,

August 24,
September 21,

October 5,

October 1 2,

October 26,
November 2,

January 4,

January 25,

February 1,

1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1886.
1887.
1887.
1887.

EDWARD J. NOLAN,

Eecording Secretary.

PHILAUKLPHIA :
W. P. KILDARK, PRINTER.

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

With reference to the several articles contributed by each.

For Verbal Communications see General Index.

PAGE.

Aaron, S. Frank. On some new Psocidse 13

Arthur, J. C. History and Biology of Pear Blight 323

Eigenmann, Carl H. A review of the American Gasterosteidse 233

Everman , Barton W . and Seth E . 3Ieek. A revision of the American

Species of the Genus Gerres 256

Genth, F. A., Ph. D. On an undescribed Meteoric Iron from East

Tennessee 360

Hartman, W. D., M. D. New Species of Partula from the New

Hebrides and Solomon Islands 30

Heilprin, Angelo. Notes on the Tertiary Geology and Paleontology

of the Southern United States 57

Holmau, Lillie E. Observations on Multiplication in Amoeba} 346

Koenig, Geo, A., Ph. D. On Schorlomite as a Variety of Melanite. .. 355

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. Notices of Nematoid Worms 308

McCormick, Calvin. The Inclusions in the Granite of Craftsbury, Vt. 19

Meehan, Thomas. On the Fertilization of Cassia Marilandica 314

Morris, Charles. Methods of Defense in Organisms 25

Reverse Vision 302

Osborn, Henry F., Sc. D. Qbservations upon the Upper Triassic

Mammals, Droraotherium and Microconodon 359

Rominger, C. On the Minute Structure of Stromatopora and its Allies, 39

Vasey, George. Notes on the Paspali of Leconte's Monograph 284

IVachsmuth, Charles, and Frank Springer. Revision of the Palaeocri

noidea. Part III, Section II 64

»

/ (f- 2- V /

PROCEEDINGS

Oy THB

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF

PHILADELPHIA.

4

1886-

\ > \^

^'~

January 5, 1886.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-six persons present.

The death of J. B. Lippincott, a member, was announced.

January 12.
Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.

Fifteen persons present.

A paper, entitled " New Species of Partula from the New
Hebrides and Solomon Islands," by Wm. D. Hartman, M. D., was
presented for publication.

On the Morphology of superimposed Stamens. — At the meeting
of the Botanical Section on January 11, Mr. Thomas Meehan
remarked that Sachs teaches that stamens " must be considered
morphologically as foliar structures, and make it convenient to
term them Staminal Leaves," ^ and Dr. Asa Gray defines a stamen
to be " one of the elements or phylla of the androecium."^ So far

I Text Book, English ed., p. 473.
2

^ Structural Botany, p. 435.

10

PEOOEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OF

[1886.

as the speaker knew, no botanist regards the stamen as an axial
development, 3'^et there are occasional phenomena that seem to be
inexplicable on any other hypothesis. We have to admit that a
flower is not merely composed of modified leaves, but is a modified
branch ; — the branch, arrested in its development, produces sepals
and petals in the order and in the place where leaves might have
been. Occasionally, however, the usual order of phyllotaxis seems
broken. Stamens will spring from the base of petals, and oppo-
site, where we looked for them to alternate ; and then for the
sake of consistency with the phyllal hypothesis, we have to
assume that one theoretic whorl has proved abortive, or that there
has been a multiplication of whorls, the superimposed one being
the extra. This introduction of an extra series, immediately over
the lower, not provided for in the original phyllotaxy, has, I
think, never been seen in the normal condition of the branch,
and it is difficult to conceive how this could occur under the
arrestation of axial growth that transforms the branch into a
flower. On the other hand, if we take the petal to be the analogue
of the leaf on the elongated branch, there seems no reason why
there should not be, theoretically, an axial bud to the petal ; and,
should this bud develop, it would be the superimposed stamen.
Branching and articulated stamens are frequent in those families
that have these organs spring, as it were, from an axial bud at
the base of the petal, as in a diminutive or suppressed secondary
branch we might expect them to do.

The flowers of Mahernia verticillata Cav., a well-known Byttneri-
aceous plant from the Cape of Good Hope, common in cultivation,
which he exhibited this evening, seem to indicate that its super-
imposed stamens are really arrested branches. The genus is
separated from Hermannia chiefly by a cup-shaped gland at the
middle of the stamen (see Fig. 2). A comparison with the

axial development of the inflores-
cence shows the stamen to be formed
on precisely the same plan as the bi-
flowered peduncle (Fig. 1). Really
the flowers are axillary — a single
flower being produced from the axil
of each leaf. What appears to be
the " two-flowered jjeduncle " of
authors is simply a diminutive
branchlet. After forming one node
the longitudinal development be-
comes nearly arrested, and we have
only a shortly-pedicillate and slowly
developing flower, representing the
shorter of the two in the cut. The
bud in the axil of the bracteolate
leaflet, however, makes another and stronger attempt at growth,
and pushes up and over the one which terminates the first growth.

2.

Mahernia verticillata Cavanilles.
1.— Two-flowered branchlet.
2. — Stamen, magnified.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ' 11

Iq the development of the stamen we read in the same lan-
guage. The lower leaf from which the short though main
peduncle in the inflorescence appears, is typified by the petal.
The common peduncle is represented by the filament, and the
cup-like gland at the middle stands for the bracteole of the bi-
ped icels. Here one of the flower buds — probably the outermost
and weakest in the normal development — wholly disappears, the
innermost becomes the upper part of the filament, the next node
may be at the connective, and then the theoretical floral leaves
proceed to form the anther. The incised bract is reduced to
the fringed cup-like gland from which the stamen proper springs.

A close examination of the stamen gives some further facts in
support of this theoretical view. When a branchlet is produced
from a branch, it is necessarily more slender than the parent
branch. The upper half of the Maliernia filament is more slender
than the part beneath the gland, and, while the lower portion is
smooth and membranous, the upper is minutely hispid — variations
which we might only expect in distinct internodes. Only for its
actual office in supporting and appearing in the direct line of the
stamen, we might critically call the lower portion a peduncle, and
the portion above the gland the stamen proper.

And we may conclude, after a whole studj' of the subject, that
in many cases superimposed stamens are the development of
theoretical axial buds at the base of the petals, and not the result
of an interjection of an extra whorl of leaves for which there
would be no warrant in phyllotaxy.

January 19.
The President, Dr. Leidt, in the chair.
Fourteen persons present.

Mastodon and Llama from Florida. — Prof. Leidy directed
attention to some fossil bones, being part of a collection now at
the Biological Department of the IJniversity, recently received
for examination from the Director of the U. S. Geoloa-ical
Survey. The collection was made by Mr. W. H. Dall, near Archer,
Florida, in a locality discovered by Dr. J. C. Neal, who had pre-
viously sent specimens to the Smithsonian Institution, and others
directly to Prof. Leidy for identification. Some of these speci-
mens had been brought to the notice of the Academy, as indicating
a species of rhinoceros and of a horse, to the former of which
the name of R. proterus was given, and to the latter that of Hip-
potheriuni ingenuum. In the collection recently received are
numerous bones and well-preserved teeth of the rhinoceros, mostly
limb bones, among which are fourteen well-preserved astragali.

Some of the specimens exhibited are those of a mastodon,
apparently a previously undescribed form, although upwards of

12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

a half dozen distinct species have been characterized as pertaining
to North America. An unworn crown of a last inferior molar
tooth resembles most nearly that of the Mastodon angustidens of
Europe, but is much larger. It has the same number of crests,
but the fifth is proportionately much more developed, being
divided into two lobes, about two-thirds the size of those of the
fourth crest. It is also much larger than in M. andium, and has
its lobes proportionately more robust, and is provided with a
well-produced external basal ridge.

The following are comparative measurements of what appear
the most closely allied forms : —

Fore and aft. Transverse.

Florida mastodon, . . 9 inches. 3^

M. angustidens, . . ^^ inches. 3^

M. andium, ... 8 inches. 3

Small fragments of tusks indicate the possession of a band of
enamel, as in the M. angustidens. For the species, the name of
Mastodon (Trilophodon) floridanus was proposed.

Among the fossils are several isolated teeth, and bones appar-
ently indicating three species of Llama. Judging from the
asti-agali, one was about the size of the existing South American
species ; another, of which there are five astragali, as large or
larger than the camel, and a third of intermediate size. The
measurements of the astragali are as follows : —

Large species. Length, 100 mm. Breadth, 70 mm.
Medium do. " 65 " " 42 "

Small do. " 50 " " 35 "

The three species may be distinguished by the names of
Atjchenia major, minor and minimus.

Among the fossils is an astragalus of Megatherium.

January 26.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty-four persons present.

The following were presented for publication : —

" On a Giant Conorbis from the Oligocene Deposits of Florida,"
by Angelo Heilprin.

" Notes on the Tertiary Geology and Paleontology of the
Southern United States," by Angelo Heilprin.

Roland D. Jones, M. D., was elected a member.

Charles Wachsmuth, of Burlington, Iowa, and Alfred M. Mayer,
of Hoboken, N. J., were elected correspondents.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 13

ON SOME NEW PSOCIDffi.
S. FRANK AARON.

The several new species described here are in the collections of
the American Entomological Society.

Caecilius subflavus.

Almost entirely pale yellowish, or bright luteous, very sparsely
pilose. Antennae and palpi very pale, the former slightly fuscous
on the basal joints. Eyes black and yellow. Ocelli rufous brown,
small. On each side of the occiput, from and behind the eye, a
fuscous cloud or band, not joining in the middle. Thorax and
abdomen yellowish, the anterior lobe of the former with a faint
darker spot, and the latter with some fuscous markings ; appendages
brighter yellow. Feet pale, semitransparent. Wings hyaline,
very slightly clouded in the cells with pale luteous, and with a
nucleated darker spot directly below the posterior angle of the
pterostigraa. Veins luteous, and with the pterostigma, having a
few fuscous hairs, each springing from a black point. Length to
end of wings al5out 2-2'5 millim.

Southern Texas. I collected this species from live oak trees
along the river bottoms ; found only two specimens, male and
female. The male is smaller, eyes black and large, the thorax
fuscous (probably discolored by drying), and the clouds in the
wings pale brown.

Caecilius nubilis. Plate I, fig. 3.

Pale luteous. Antennae and palpi entirely pale. Nasus some-
what indistinctly clouded. Ocelli dark brown. An irregular
maculate pale brown line on each side of the head, extending
from within the margin of the eyes to the posterior central
portion of the occiput, and a double maculate paler brown line
dividing the occiput and almost reaching the ocelli. Eyes pale,
with a yellowish green reflection. Thorax pale, the lobes clouded
with pale brown. Abdomen paler, the sutures, in part, brown.
Legs very pale, the last tarsal joint fuscous. Wings hyaline,
pterostigma the same, not more opaque ; veins brown, the larger
ones, on the basal half of the wing, paler, and on the apical half,
wherever the}^ join the margin of the wing, they are, together
with the marginal vein at that point, black, or deep fuscous,

14 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

surrounded bj' a small pale brown clouded spot. Each cell in
the apical half of the wing has, midway between the veins, a pale
brown cloud, approximately taking the shape of its cell. At the
base of the pterostigma a small black spot, and another at the
junction of the cubitus and posterior margin. Length to end of
wings about 2 millim.

Southern Texas. One specimen discovered while beating a
live oak thicket on the prairies.

Csecilius impacatus.

Pale yellow and brown. Antennae much shorter than wings,
fuscous, the basal joints and the first long joint in part, pale ;
palpi fuscous. Nasus pale, somewhat clouded with brown ; rest
of head j^ellow with brown markings, the space before and
directly around the separated golden colored ocelli, brown ; a
brown band on each side bordering the inside margin of the ej^es,
and another on each side of the dividing occipital suture, reach-
ing each posterior ocellus. E^^es brown and pale, about con-
colorous with the other parts. Mesothoracic lobes brown, deeper
colored anteriorl}^, the sutures pale j'ellowish ; rest of thorax pale
yellow and brown. Abdomen pale, the sutures brown, and brown
markings at the apex. Legs pale, the apical tarsal joint darker.
Wings clear hyaline, the seemingl}^ delicate veins pale brown. A
small black spot at the base of the pterostigma, and another at
the junction of the cubitus and posterior margin. Otherwise the
wings are entirely unmarked. About 3'5 millim. long to end of
wings.

Penn. (near Philadelphia). — I beat one specimen from the
branches of a beech, and on account of its constant activity found
it very diflScult to capture, almost hopelessly mashing it in doing
so.

Fsocus campestris.

Luteous and pale brown. Antennae about as long as the
wings, fuscous, the basal joints luteous ; palpi pale, fuscous on
the extreme apex. Nasus short, lineated with brown, and
sparsely pilose ; rest of head luteous, a brown irregular patch on
the margin of nasus before the ocelli ; a narrow black line
dividing the occiput ; faint fuscous maculose markings on each
side, within the margin of the eyes. Ocelli black ; eyes brown,
with paler reflections. Lobes of the thorax brown, the sutures

1886.] NATURAL 80IEN0E8 OP PHILADELPHIA. 15

luteous. Abdomen pale brown, the sutures and underneath in
part pale. Legs pale, femora somewhat yellowish. Wings per-
fectly hyaline, the veins pale brown, semitransparent luteous in
parts ; pterostigma, a narrow space directly beneath it, and the
indication of a small spot at the junction of the cubitus and pos-
terior margin, pale brown. Length to end of wing about 2'5 mill.
Southern Texas. One specimen taken from the live oak trees
that compose the small groves (motts) on the prairies. It is
allied to Ps. quietus, of Hagen (many specimens of which I also
found in the same locality, but in different situations, viz. : on
yellow berry bushes), but differs from that species in being con-
siderably smaller, in having the nasus shorter, not reaching the
ocelli, and by having fewer markings on the head.

Psocus Leidyi. Plate I, fig. 2.

Pale yellowish and black. Antennae nearly as long as the
wings, subfuscous, the basal joints pale ; palpi pale, the apical
joint subfuscous. Head pale yellowish, deepest <Sn the nasus,
which is faintly lineated with paler ; a large shining black
rounded spot in the middle of the upper part of the nasus, bor-
dering the suture ; beneath the antennae, on each side, a small
black spot ; ocelli black ; occiput with a brown band on the
dividing suture containing a double row of darker spots almost
reaching the ocelli. Eyes black. Lobes of the thorax black,
shining, the sutures and the rest of the thorax pale yellow.
Abdomen pale yellow, the sutures black, merging into a longitu-
dinal row of irregular spots on each side of the dorsum ; a large,
irregular, shining black patch on the dorsum of the apical seg-
ment, with a smaller black spot on each side below it. Abdo-
men beneath partly fuscous. Apical appendages, yellow and
black. Legs very pale, the base of the tibia with a black spot
beneath, and the tarsi subfuscous, the apical joint black. Wings
clear hyaline, veins mostly fuscous, that enclosing the pteros-
tigma yellow, and the veins enclosing the discoidal cellule, with
certain of their branches, in part pale yellowish and light brown.
Pterostigma subopaque, a small black spot at its base, a rounded
clouded brown spot posteriorly within its apex, and another
brown spot directly below and contiguous to its posterior angle ;
at the basal angle of the discoidal cell a large rounded brown
spot, and another smaller at the junction of the cubitus and

16 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

inner margin. Hind wing immaculate. Length to end of wings
about 5 "5-6 mill.

Rhode Island and Pennsylvania. From two specimens col-
lected many years ago by Dr. Joseph Leidy in Rhode Island,
and two specimens taken by myself near Philadelphia, on the
trunks of chestnut trees, where they appeared to be solitary.
For some time I had, somewhat doubtfully, supposed this species
to be Pa. canadensis, of Prov., until I received a letter from Dr.
Hagen, referring canadensis to the genus Elipsocus.

Fsoous texauus.

Pale yellow, with brown markings. Antennae longer than the
wings, fuscous, pale at the base. Nasus lineated with brown ; rest
of head above with irregular markings, viz. : a horseshoe spot
before the ocelli, an irregular line on each side from near the
base of the antennae to the ocelli ; a line of spots within the
margin of the eye, occiput with a line of spots on each side of the
dividing suture that come together just behind the ocelli. Eyes
brown, with a slight golden tinge ; ocelli black. Lobes of the
mesotiiorax clouded with fuscous, the sutures pale yellow. Abdo-
men marked with fuscous, and the anal appendages yellow.
Legs luteous, the apical tarsal joints fuscous. Wings hyaline,
the veins brown ; pterostigma less clear, a fuscous spot within
its apical half, and another just below it ; a fuscous band crosses
the entire wing in the middle, its outer margin reaching from the
base of the pterostigma to the junction of the cubital and post-
costal veins and the posterior margin, passing through the basal
angle of the discoidal cell. Hind wings hyaline, no markings.
Length to end of wings about 4 mill.

Var. submarginatus. Plate I, fig. 1.

Characterized b}^ having the fore wings with additional mark-
ings in the form of a submarginal fuscous band or cloud,
reaching from the second apical nervule to the posterior apical
extremity of the discoidal cell, and with a few somewhat
rounded spots between the nervures bordering upon and beyond
the discoidal cell. Length about 3 mill. Otherwise like texanus.

Southern Texas. I took fifteen specimens of texanus and four
of var. submarginatus entirely by beating from yellow berry
bushes, black chaparral and live oak, over the prairies. It is
probably the commonest species in its locality.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17

ECHMEPTERYX no v. gen.

Head much as in Psocus, etc., the ocelli more widelj^ separated.
Antennffi with the two basal joints short and stout, the others rather
slender, each joint attenuated in its middle, swollen somewhat at
its apex. Dorsum of mesothorax entire, not divided into lobes,
extended into a projection posteriorly. Tarsi three-jointed.
Wings covered with scales of various forms. Apex of wings
pointed, and furnished somewhat densely with long hair. Neura-
tion peculiar, as shown in Plate I, figs. 5-6.

Belongs to a group with Amphientomum and Perientomum,
probably most closely allied to Dr. Hagen's Amph. (Syllysis) can-
datum ; differs in the neuration.

Eohmepteryx agilis. Plate I, figs. 4-9.

Antennae much shorter than the wings, pale fuscous ; palpi
fuscous. Nasus fuscous, pilose ; rest of head somewhat pilose,
pale, with dark brown markings, a bent brown line across the
head, transversely, separating the anterior from the posterior
ocelli; before the ocelli, in the middle, some irregular brown
markings and bands (varying in diff'erent specimens), and between
the ocelli, connecting with the transverse line, two convergent
brown lines, extending to a brown patch on each side upon the
occiput ; on each side, within the margin of the eyes, another
brown spot, becoming a line, and also joining the occipital patches.
Ocelli black, each one within a small brown spot ; eyes brown and
golden yellow. Thorax brown, portions pale luteous, dorsum of
mesothorax dark brown, somewhat scaled, and very pilose.
Abdomen pale yellowish or luteous (in some specimens fuscous,
probably discolored by drying), with some brown markings.
Legs fuscous, somewhat paler or luteous ; tarsi luteous, fuscous
towards base. Wings fuscescent or smoky when denuded, becom-
ing hyaline towards the apex ; veins darker, semitransparent.
Scales mostly fuscescent, paler towards the base; when upon the
wing seemingly fuscous, and when thickly placed appearing almost
black ; other scales luteous upon the wing. These scales cause
the wing to be covered with black, fuscous and luteous patches.
The long apical hair mostly fuscous, luteous in patches. Hind
wings hyaline, slightly infuscated, no scales, the long apical hair
fuscous. Length to end of wing about 3 millim.

Pennsylvania. I found this species on the trunks of beech

18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

trees in a woods near Philadelphia. It is very active, quick and
difficult to secure. I believe it represents a group entirely new
to our fauna.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I,

Fig. 1. Psocus texanus var. submarginatus.

2. " Leidyi.

3. Ccecilius nubilus.

4. Head.

5. Denuded fore wing and thorax.

6. " hind wing.

7. Fore wing covered normally with scales.

8. Tarsus.

9. Forms of wing scales greatly magnified.

of Echmepteryx agilis.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 19

THE INCLUSIONS IN THE GRANITE OF CRAFTSBURY, VT.

BY CALVIN Mccormick.

The inclusions usually found in granites are observed to vary
to a marked extent in outline, structure and mode of occurrence.
Yery often they resemble imbedded fragments of older rocks.
They are usually darker than the including granite, and are either
circular or angular. When rounded they resemble an enclosed
pebble ; when angular, a fragment of slate or mica schist. They
sometimes merge into the surrounding rock by thrusting out
minute connective particles. They are generally finer in texture,
and hence less easily decomposed by atmospheric agencies than
the enclosing granite.

A reference to the recorded observations on granitic inclusions
will doubtless assist materially in the study of the subject. In
1821, Dr. John Macculloch, in his "Geological Classification of
Rocks," p. 230, refers to inclusions as "irregular patches or veins
of a fine texture, spheroidal in arrangement, imbedded in coarse
granite." In 1858, Dr. Cavl F. Naumann refers to "pseudo-frag-
mentary concretions resembling sharp-angled fragments common
in crystalline siliceous rocks." (Lehrbuch der Geognosie, 2 Auf.,
Band I, S. 422, 560; B. II, S. 203.)

In the same year Dr. F. Hochstetter states that " the granites
of Billston Island contain micaceous fine-grained, dark, globular
enclosures." ( Jahrb. k. k. geolog. Reichsan., S. 285.)

In 1863, Dr. F. V. Andrian, referring to the hornblendic granites
of Central Bohemia, mentions " innumerable fine-grained enclos-
ures, sharply segi'egated from the surrounding rock, varying in
size from -^^ to 4 inches in diameter. These enclosures contain
small quantities of hornblende crystals. From their abundance
and identity of constituents they were produced during the solidi-
fication of the rock mass, by a process of segregation, the exact
nature of which is unknown." (Beit. z. Geolog. d. Kaur. Tab.
Krei. Bohmen, S. 166.)

In an article on the " Metamorphic Origin of certain Granitoid
Rocks and Granites in the Southern Uplands of Scotland," Prof.
James Geikie describes " nests of altered rock in a gray granite.
These are distinctly laminated, fine-grained, micaceous and
imparting a dark shade to the rock. They are irregular in shape,

20 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

and scattered indiscriminately througliout the mass." (Geo-
logical Magazine, 1861, vol. 3, p. 533.)

All of these observations relate to the external appearance of
these inclusions. No one of these writers has given us an intima-
tion of the microscopic or chemical nature of their internal
structure. In this respect Prof. J. A. Phillips has greatly sur-
passed his predecessors.

In the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, vol. 36, p.
1, this author describes granites and their inclusions from numer-
ous British localities. The Cornwall granites at Lamorna, Zennor,
and Luxulyan contain numerous black patches, angular, fine-
grained and composed of quartz and mica. The granite of Shap
in Westmoreland encloses numerous well-defined, dark, round
patches, fine-grained and varying in size from i to 15 inches in
diameter.

In Scotland, the Aberdeen granites (metamorphic, Haughton)
contain foliated, subangular inclusions of black mica.

In Ireland, the granite of Newry (metamorphic, Hull; igneous,
Kinahan) aflfords inclusions which are apparently concretions.
The Mourne granite (eruptive) contains ovoid and angular, fine-
grained dark masses of mica and quartz.

This author derives the following conclusions from these
observations:

These granitic inclusions are of two distinct kinds. The first
is the result of an abnormal arrangement of the constituent minerals.
The second represents the enclosed fragments of other rocks. Of
the first, the outline is more or less ovoid, and they are essentially
a part of the including granite. The dark color is due to the
quantity of mica and hornblende. A second nodule contained in
the first, is indicative of concretionary origin.

The formation of rounded inclusions in granites is believed to
be contemporaneous with the solidification of the mass, and
similar to that of the well known Napoleonite or orbicular
diorite of Corsica.

Of the second class, the inclusions are irregular in outline,
schistose in structure, traversed by quartz veins or divided by
strings of granite. They are frequently unaltered, and are easily
recognized as fragments of gneiss, hornblendic and micaceous
rocks.

In our own country, Professor Irving, in his report " On the

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 21

Copper-Bearing Rocks of Lake Superior " (TJ. S. Geol. Survey,
vol. V, p. 125), refers to a hornblendic granite containing an
augitic core, and the entire mass showing minute flakes of
biotite. Mr. Clarence King, in his " Systematic Geology " (U.
S. Survey, p. 120), graphically describes the remarkable granitic
wall of EI Capitan, in the Yosemite Valley. This presents a
vertical face 3200 feet high, dotted with irregular cloud-like
masses and lenticular bodies, apparently segregations of the
component minerals (brilliant black hornblende, quartz, biotite
and orthoclase). This segregation he considers to be the result
of mechanical accidents.

Having thus hastily glanced at observations relating to granitic
inclusions in other localities, we are better prepared to under-
stand those of the Craftsbury region. In the following consid-
erations we will observe, first, the including granite itself;
second, the included nodules, their external appearance and
internal structure, and the relation of the rock-mass to its
inclusions.

This nodular granite consists of the usual ingredients of a
true granite — quartz, feldspar and mica. The quartz is the most
abundant constituent. It possesses the properties of ordinary
quartz as to color, lustre and hardness. The feldspar is the
common orthoclase, every light in color — even resembling the
quartz in this respect. The mica is the black variety (biotite),
and is sparingly scattered through the mass. It is in striking
contrast with the white components, and gives the rock the
appearance of syenite. But no hornblende is present, nor have
accessory minerals been observed. These constituents are dis-
seminated irregularly throughout the rock-mass, and since they
occur in small dimensions, this mass is fine-grained in texture.
According to Prof. H. A. Cutting, State Geologist of Vermont,
this granite occurs in place like other granites, but south of the
beds it consists of numerous large bowlders.

Professor C. H. Hitchcock refers this granite to the Coos
group, which he places directly below the Lower Helderberg
division of the Upper Silurian.

The Incluaions. — These are spheroidal or elongated nodules of
biotite, from one-half to two inches in diameter, with the long
axis sometimes four inches. They ai-e more or less flattened, and
frequently consist of only a few plates. Their surface is smooth

22 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

or sometimes plicated, the folds corresponding to the long axis.
Then they resemble a dried butternut, stripped of its epicarp.
Several convex scales may be detached from a flat specimen,
placed on edge, with a sharp blow of the hammer.

Tliey are distributed irregularly through the rock-mass. In
some portions they are more abundant than in others. Some
parts of the Craftsbury beds are composed entirely of nodules,
slightl}' cemented by grains of quartz and mica. It appears
that there is no law as to their distribution. From this locality
to the Canadian line it is stated that these inclusions are very
rare, in the beds extending over this area of about forty miles.
(C. H. Hitchcock, Geology of Vermont, vol. 2, pp. 564, 721).

The Internal Structure. — But few microscopic sections of these
nodules have been prepared. In studying the lithology of New
Hampshire, Mr. G. W. Hawes, formerly of the Sheffield Scientific
School, made a section of the centre of a nodule, and observed
that the biotite is dichroic, that a small portion of muscovite and
some quartz are present. No nucleus was apparent, but a con-
centric arrangement of the mica scales, which he considered to
be the basis of the formation of the inclusion. (Geolog}^ of New
Hamp., vol. 3, pt 4, p. 203.) On account of the limited observa-
tions of this peculiar formation, I attempted to prepare some
sections of the internal structure. Of these, two were through
the centre, and parallel to the longitudinal axis. These show
that the biotite is in concentric layers, with grains of quartz scat-
tered irregularly through it. No feldspar is present. These
layers of biotite are made up of flakes or long bands. Along the
thin edges they are of a light brown color, while the thicker
masses are dark. The flakes are of different sizes respecting
length and width. They are arranged very much like the scales
on a fish. The biotite constitutes the greater part of the surface.
It forms fully four-fifths, and doubtless even more in some cases.
The quartz is remarkably translucent and \ery distinctly vitre-
ous. During the grinding process, frequent observations with a
lens indicated that the quartz increases in abundance towards
the centre.

Several transverse sections parallel to the lateral axis were
attempted, but the brittle nature of the biotite prevented success.
This, it is thought, may be accomplislied by hardening a specimen
in shellac dissolved in alcohol. Sections through other portions
of the nodule denote the laminated structure of the biotite.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23

The Relation of the Nodule to the Rock Mass. — The line of
contact between the inclusion and the including rock is not always
distinct. But it is possible to extract the former with compara-
tive ease. The remaining cavity, however, is usually lined with
biotite, which, adhering to it rather than to the nodule, indicates
that the inclusion was originally formed from the rock mass.
Sections across this line of contact, show considerable quartz and
a small quantity of biotite. These minerals are apparently inter-
locked, further denoting that the biotitic mass belongs to the
surrounding rock.

General Conclusions. — First, concerning the nodules : These
are not micaceous rolls, for their structure internally shows dis-
tinct bands. ^ or are they concretions, for no nucleus is observed.
But they are masses of flakes of biotite cemented with quartz,
abnormally segregated from the original granitic mass. These
flakes, although originally concentric, were afterwards arranged
radially, hence producing the nodular form. (Dr. Zepharowich,
Mineralogical Lexicon, Austria, p. 59.)

Second, concerning the granite : The presence of these nodules
indicates the igneous origin of the granite. Were the original
mass in aqueous solution, the material would have been evenly
distributed, and the nodules could not have occurred. Were it
of metamorphic origin, the nodules would scarcely be so uniform
in outline and microscopic appearance, but would be more or less
contorted. These nodules denote a state of fluidity of the entire
mass which resulted from igneous agencies. While in this fluid
condition, the nodules first formed, and were enclosed by the
surrounding mass. This is sustained by the wrinkled and folded
surface of the nodules, which doubtless was occasioned by the
contraction of the surrounding mass as it cooled.

The fact that biotite is a frequent constituent of igneous rocks,
has its influence in sustaining the igneous origin of this granite.
This is also sustained by the investigations of local phenomena.
(Geology New Hamp., vol. 1, p. 538.)

The inclusions at Craftsbury are unique in type, diff'ering from
those of all other localities.

These observations ma}' be modified by further investigations,
but it is hoped that they maj'^ elicit an extended interest in the
subject.

Appendix. — Since the preceding pages were written, my atten-

24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

tion was directed to inclusions in certain flaggings in Philadel-
phia, on Chestnut Street above Third Street, and on Filbert Street
above Thirteenth Street. It was desirable to trace the localities
of these rocks.

By the assistance of the City Commissioner of Highways, and
the dealer who furnished the stone for the Chestnut Street pave-
ment, the locality was ascertained to be Connecticut or Maine.

The doubt in the case arises from the fact that the stone was
furnished about twenty-five years ago, no record of its locality
was kept, and the dealer is unable to recall with any degree
of certainty the exact location. The granite in external charac-
ters closely resembles that of New London, Conn., as well as that
of Sullivan, Maine. Hence this feature is compai-atively valueless
in the determination. But the resemblance of the inclusions to
those in the Sullivan granite, favors the view that this location is
the home of the Chestnut Street flags.

These inclusions are not numei'ous, nor regular in size and
outline. They are made up of biotite, are elongated elliptically,
frequently terminating in acute points. The length is eight or
ten inches, and the width two or three inches. These masses
blend into the surrounding rock, without affording any distinct
line of separation, hence suggesting that their extraction would
involve considerable difficulty. That these were produced in a
way similar to those of Craftsbury, is apparent from external
observations, and doubtless sections of the internal structure
will sustain this supposition.

No evidence was obtained concerning the locality of the Filbert
Street rock. Its worn condition denotes a long period of service.
These inclusions tend to detract from the value of granites, as
they afford an easy access for destructive agents (moisture, frost,
heat), and hence such granites having a limited use, are not apt
to be seen along public thoroughfares.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 25

METHODS OF DEFENSE IN ORGANISMS.
BY CHAS. MORRIS.

Some weeks ago I presented a paper on this subject to the
Academy. I wish to add a few suggestions to the considerations
there taken, and particular!}^ to speak of the evolution of the
spOnge, considered from the point of view of defense. As is
well known, the sponge type of organism is one that it luis
proved difficult to classify, since it only partly conforms to the
type of the Coelenterates, while it is widely divergent from any
other animal type. I may briefly point out these divergent
features.

In all other animals above the Protozoans, except those para-
sitic forms which are destitute of an intestine, the mouth is a
single aperture, which constitutes the main opening into the
boiy. In the sponge type this single aperture is replaced by a
multitude of minute openings, in connection with a single large
anal opening. In one other respect the sponge is different from and
more simplified than other animal types. Its digestion is
entirely cellular. It has developed no organ answering to the
stomach of other types.

The sponge is, moreover, destitute of any organs of offense or
defense. Its nearest relatives, the polyps, have their tentacles
and thread-cells, in connection with a single aperture, which is
both oral and anal in function, and with a digestion which is
intermediate between the cellular and the stomachal methods,
and can be properly classed with neither.

The method of obtaining food, by the aid of water currents, is
not peculiar to the sponge. It may be found in other animal
types, such as the bivalve mollusks, the Tunicata, Amphioxus,
etc. But in the sponge it is far more simplified than in these
higher forms. In the case of the mollusks, the water current is
confined to the branchiae, and only its food particles are taken
into the intestine. In the Tunicates and in Amphioxus respira-
tion is intestinal, but the water current is confined to the
branchial half of the intestine, while its food particles enter the
stomachal half, where they undergo digestion. In the sponge
the water currents permeate every portion of the body, and
respiration, as well as digestion, is a function of the separate
3

26 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

cells. Thus the most interior regions of the organism are
visited by this water current and its contents.

Of all animal types, therefore, that of the sponge is least pro-
tected by defensive appliances. There is nothing in the make-up
of the organism to prevent enemies from entering and penetrat-
ing to every portion of the body. They cannot be confined to
an intestinal tube, and exposed to the action of its digestive
juices, as in most organisms, but the whole interior of the body
is open to assault.

Yet the evolution and long-continued existence of the sponge
type is evidence that it has possessed some defensive adaptation.
This adaptation, in its original phase at least, I take to be the
peculiar sj^stem of inhalent and exhalent apertures. It is evident
that the entrance of the water currents at the large aperture
would greatly facilitate the entrance of the foes of the sponge,
since they would be drawn from a distance and carried into the
body on these currents. As it is, the currents enter at minute
apertures, only adapted to the passage of microscopic food par-
ticles, and closing completel}'^ when not in use. The spicules
may also act defensively, to prevent any larger creature from
forcing an entrance at these oral apertures.

On the other hand, there is a strong current of outflow from
the large aperture, well adapted tO' drive away the foes of the
sponge, unless possessed of considerable swimming power. In
this fact we seem to have an explanation of the peculiar organi-
zation of the sponge. The primeval ancestors of the Coelen-
terates probably developed in two directions. In one t}' pe tenta-
cles and thread-cells appeared, the oral opening was defended,
and the internal cavity took on the function of an incipient
stomach. In the other type the simple gastrula form was
retained, and water was drawn in by ciliary action through pores
in its cellular wall, and discharged at the mouth opening, after
yielding its food particles to the individual cells. Thus a multi-
tude of minute currents were combined into a single protective
outflowing current of considerable strength.

This formation seems beneficial to the sponge from an aggres-
sive as well as from a defensive point of view. The extension of
the oral apertures over the whole surface of the body very con-
siderably increases the water space from which food particles are
drawn in, and thus may add materially to the food supply. As

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27

the microscopic creatures which serve the sponge for food are
somewhat thinly disseminated, this extension of the space swept
hy the inflowing currents is certainly an advantage.

These remarks, however, are intended to apply principally to
the primitive sponge. In the earliest stage of this type of
organism it probably lacked the spicular and fibrous defenses
now possessed, and was but a step above the simple gastrula. At
this remote era, however, it is probable that muscular action had
not yet been evolved, and that cilia formed the only agents of
animal motion. Against creatures swimming by aid of cilia the
water current of the sponge must have been fully efficacious as a
defense. The development of the fibrous framework, and of
the pointed spicules, was probably a subsequent adaptation to
meet new dangers, after muscular organs of motion had been
evolved. At present prowling animals have no difficulty in
making their way to the interior of the sponge. The spicule is
now probably its most efficient defense, and the continued exist-
ence of the sponge tj^pe shows that it is sufficiently defended
against such animals as might seek to prey upon its protoplasmic
substance.

I may oflTer, in conclusion, a further application of the hypoth-
esis presented in my former paper. The interaction of attack
and defense presents a feature of distinction between animals and
plants, in addition to those usually recognized. This distinction
I ma}^ briefly indicate.

If we consider the defensive appliances of animals from a
general point of view, they may be reduced to two categories.
They are either mechanical or motor. These exist together, but
to the extent that the one method is developed, the other remains
undeveloped. If we take such an animal as the oyster, for
instance, we find that its defense is almost wholly mechanical.
Its only defensive motion is one of withdrawal within the shell.
If we take man, the defence is almost wholly motor. Scarcely a
trace of mechanical defense exists. In my former paper I spoke
also of mentality as a defensive attribute. But the defensive
action of the mind yields really a motor effect. It simply pro-
duces more intricate and diversified motions, both in attack and
defense, than those displayed by unintelligent animals.

If we examine the whole range of the animal kingdom, we find
every phase of combination of mechanical and motor defense, the

28 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

motion growing more sluggish as the defensive avmor grows
more efficient. But in the whole kingdom, motion persists as one
of the defensive agencies. No animal exists without some power
of motion, by whose aid it withdraws or otherwise escapes from
danger.

In the plant kingdom, on the contrary, no defensive motion
exists. Mechanical defense exists alone. This does not apply to
those minute swimming organisms which lie near the root of the
plant and animal kingdoms. But in all the higher plants no
motion exists, so far as I am aware, that is useful as a protection.
Thus the possession of protective motions by all animals, and
the lack of them by all plants, serve as a point of distinction
between the two kingdoms.

In regard to aggressive motions, this rule does not so fully
hold good. All animals have aggressive motions. Nearly all
plants are destitute of them. Yet a few plants possess them. We
have instances of aggressive motions in the case of the creeping
Fungi, and of the Insectivorous plants. Yet apart from these
cases, the plant kingdom seems devoid of motions useful either
for attack or. defense, and trusts wholly to mechanical appliances.
With the mechanical, however, must be included chemical appli-
ances, as in the case of poisonous or disagreeable juices.

One more query remains. Wh}^, in the early days of the animal
kingdom, as known to us, was there such a marked tendency to
trust to mechanical defense, while in the later era the tendency
has been towards motion as the main protective agent ? If we
consider the early conditions of animal life, this is not difficult
to comprehend. There is every reason to believe that the various
organs of animals were very slowly evolved. In a former com-
munication I have advanced the h3qiothesis that the early animals
were for a long time naked forms, parti}', at least, through lack
of the evolution of glands necessary to produce hard coverings.
These early animals also moved by means of cilia only, if we can
trust the evidences from embryology, and from the lower existing
forms. The development of nerves and muscles was a very slow
process. The evolution of a form and of swimming organs giving
high efficiency to muscular action, was probabl}^ much slower.
The early animals possessed of muscles had probably a very
inefficient motor apparatus, and were very sluggish in their
movements. With the development of armor-producing power,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 29

therefore, this seems to have been very generally employed as a
defense of the sluggish against such swifter moving carnivorous
animals as may have arisen. One great superiority of the verte-
brate type has alwa3's been the superior suitability of its form
and motor organs to swift movement, and it seems quite likely
that the great variety of mechanically defended lower forms in
the earl}' fossiliferous beds, is due to the existence of swift-
moving antique vertebrates, which were themselves nearly or
quite destitute of hard parts, capable of preservation. Though
a later " struggle for existence," between vertebrates themselves,
caused the weakest and least active of these to develop armor,
yet it was succeeded by a general tendency in this type of life to
discard mechanical defenses, and trust to motion for protection.
The same has been the case with the actively aggressive members
of some of the lower tj^pes, such as the higher mollusks, which
have thrown off their armor, and developed other defensive appli-
ances.

Throughout the whole history of the organic realm one prin-
ciple holds good. There has been a continued evolution of more
rapid and varied powers of motion. To this, every advance in
organization has tended, while the hindrances to speed and flexi-
bility have been successively discarded by the higher forms of
life. In correspondence with this has been the development of
mentality, since mentality, as outwardly displayed by the animals
below man, is indicated by a greater intricacy of motions, in
combination with ambush and concealment. For the attainment
of the highest possible speed and strength, little mentality was
requisite, and brain development is manifested rather by intricac}'-
than by speed of motion — or rather by that well-ordered correla-
tion of rest and diversified motion suited to the best good of
the organism. Yet we must regard mentality as rather the effect
than the cause of motor evolution. Probably the power of diver-
sified motion appeared first, while the exercise of any new power
of this kind acted as an agent in the development of the brain.
In other words, the evolution of the brain is a consequence of
that of the body — not the reverse.

30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY Of [1886.

NEW SPECIES OF PARTUL&. FROM THE NEW HEBRIDES AND SOLOMON

ISLANDS.

BY W. D. HARTMAN, M. D.

The new species of Partula herein described, are almost all of
one type. The shells of most species from the Solomon Islands
are thin, and more or less translucent, with numerous waved spiral
strife, a compressed umbilicus, a moderately reflected and concave
lip, and (when viewed through a glass) the embryonic whorls of
the apex are rounded or dome-shaped. Like other Partulte, indi-
viduals of the different species are often variable, especiall^'^ in
the greater or less obliquity of the aperture. These thin shells
possess so many features in common, that it is often difficult, in
the absence of illustrations, to frame a diagnosis sufficiently dis-
tinctive to enable the reader to recognize a species from the de-
scription alone. I have embraced the present opportunity to
figure a few species not heretofore delineated, amongst which is
the lost species, P. rufa, Lesson.

This shell has been found on the banks of the Leila River,
Chabroul Harbor, Uhalan or Strong's Island, by Capt. Brazier, C.
M. Z. S. I have seen three examples. It is very distinct from P.
Guamensis, Pfr., with which it has been confounded ; the latter is
an arboreal species from Ponape, one of the Caroline group.
P. rufa, Less., is a much smaller species than P. Guamensis^ Pfr.,
which it resembles in color, contour and texture. Farther explo-
rations in the New Hebrides and Solomon Islands will doubtless
reveal many new species of Partula.

P. similaris, nobis. Plate II, fig. 1.

Shell dextral, oblong ovate, thin and translucent; whorls 5,
convex, spire half the length, oblique lines fine and decussated
by coarse spiral striae, umbilicus compressed ; aperture rounded
ovate ; lip white, color yellowish white, with the apex very pale
rose. Length 17 mill., diameter 9 mill. ; length of aperture 6 mill.,
diameter 4 mill.

Hab. — Woodlark Island, near New Guinea (Capt. Brazier).

Ohs. — For size and contour this shell is near P. Car-teriejisis,
Pfr. ; it is thinner and less solid, with a more rounded aperture,
and concave lip.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31

P. perlucens, nobis. PLate 11, fig. 2.

Shell dextral, oblong, ovate, very thin and pellucid ; whorls 5,
well rounded, bod^' -whorl somewhat inflated, spire more tlian half
the length. Suture well impressed, spiral striiE numerous and
fine, umbilicus compressed, nperture ol)l ([Ue, round oval, lip
white, concave and moderately reflected. Color a very pale
green. Length 18 mill., diameter 9 mill.; length of aperture
9 mill., diameter 4 mill.

Hab. — Uji or Golfe Island^ Solomon Islands (Arboreal).

Obs. — Compared with P. similaris, herein described, it is a
larger, thinner and more inflated shell. Capt. Brazier sent me
two examjDles, the smaller measured : length 14 mill., diameter 8
mill.

P. incurvum, nobis. Plate II, fig. 3.

Shell dextral, ovate, elongate, thin and translucent, spire
slender, elongate, more than half the length; whorls 5, rounded,
suture impressed, spiral striae numerous, subperforate, with the
umbilicus slightly compressed, columella slightly nodose. Aper-
ture ovate, very oblique, lip white, moderately reflected and
concave. Color yellowish white. Length 18 mill., diameter,
8 mill. ; length of aperture t mill., diameter 4 mill. Arboreal.

Hab. — Rubiana Island, Solomon Islands (Capt. Brazier).

Obs. — This is a distinct species, with a very oblique aperture,
giving the shell a bent appearance at the middle.

P. regularis, nobis. Plate II, fig. 4.

Shell dextral, ovate elongate, thin and translucent; spire half
the length; whorls 5, rounded, suture impressed, spiral striae
numerous, waved and very fine, umbilicus compressed, aperture
direct, lip white, concave and slightly expanded, margins of the
peritreme connected by a very thin callus. Color yellowish
white. Length 1*7 mill., diameter 8 mill.; length of aperture
8"5 mill., diameter 5 mill. Arboreal.

Hab. — Savu, Galeria Island, Solomon Islands (Capt. Brazier).

P. minor, nobis. Plate II, fig. 5.

Shell ovate, somewhat oblong, tliin and feebly translucent,
spire as long as the aperture ; whorls 5, slightly rounded, suture
impressed, oblique striae coarse, spiral striae obsolete, umbilicus
compressed, lip white, flat and moderately reflected, aperture
direct, margins of the peritreme connected by a stout callus.

32 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Color a soiled white, apex rufous. Length 16 mill., diameter
8 mill. ; length of aperture 6 mill., diameter 3^ mill.

Hab. — Erromango Island, Solomon Islands.

Obs. — I possess two examples of this species from Dr. Cox, of
Sydney, Australia. They were collected by Dr. Turner at the
above island ; it differs from Carteriensis especially in the
margins of the peritreme approximating more closely than in
that species.

P. corneola, nobis. Plate II, fig. 6.

Shell dextral, ovate conic, smooth and polished, corneous,
translucent; whorls 5, slightly rounded, spire half the length,
spiral striae numerous, waved and very fine, umbilicus compressed,
aperture ovate, with a rounded pillar tooth, and a small tubercle
on the columella, lip thick, white, and almost flat, with the
margins connected by a callus. Color pale horn, with the apex
pale rufous. Length 17^ mill., diameter 9 mill. ; length of
aperture 7 mill., diameter 4 mill. Smaller example : Length,
16 mill. ; diameter, 8 mill.

Eab. — Eimeo, Morea? (Mr. Geale).

Obs. — Several years ago I obtained two examples from Mr.
Geale, who accompanied Hugh Cuming. This shell is not found
in the British Museum, or the Jardin des Plantes, and I have
only met with it twice in private collections. It differs from all
the Marquesas species with which I am acquainted, and it pos-
sesses the dome-like apex of the Solomon Island group.

P. Coxi, Angas MS. Plate II, fig. 7.

Shell dextral ovate, slightly elongate, thin and translucent
whorls 5, rounded, suture impressed, oblique lines of growth fine
and sparsely decussated by waved spiral striae ; aperture ovate
direct, umbilicus compressed, lip reflected, white and concave
color 3'ellowish white; apex slightly rufous. Length 15 mill,
diameter 7 mill.; length of aperture 5 mill., diameter 3 mill.

Hab. — Ysabel Island, Solomon Islands (Capt. Brazier).

Obs. — This shell was collected at the above locality by Captain
Brazier, and he has kindly given me a number of examples. In
1867, Dr. Cox sent me examples of P. pellucida, Pse., for Coxi.
These were pronounced micans, Pfr., at the British Museum,
causing the error in my Bibliographical Catalogue. F. micans
is a much larger shell.

188G.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHiA. 83

According to the observations of Capt. Brazier, P. pellucida
and P. Coxi are arboreal species. My examples were pronounced
Goxi by Mr. Angas ; it is a larger shell than P. pellucida.

P. Woodlarkiana, nobis. Plate II, fig. 8.

Shell dextral, ovate, thin and translucent ; bodj'-whorl inflated ;
"vvhorls 5, rounded, suture impressed, lines of growth decussated
by numerous waved spiral strire, spire short, columella slightly
arcuate, wide and smooth, compressl}^ umbilicate, aperture round
ovate, lip concave, white and moderately reflected ; color yel-
lowish, apex very pale rose. Length 19 mill., diameter 11 mill.;
length of aperture 9 mill., diameter 6 mill.

Hah. — Woodlark Inland near New Guinea (Capt. Brazier).

P. hastula, nobis. Plate IT, fig. 9.

Shell dextral, elongate, oval, hastulate, thin and pellucid ;
spire acute, half the length; whorls 5, slightly rounded, suture
moderately impressed. Oblique strife prominent, and crossed
by numerous minute spiral lines. Umbilicus compressed, aper-
ture oval, more or less oblique, margins of the peritreme con-
nected by a very thin deposit, lip white, reflected and concave.
Color 3^ellowish. Length 19 mill., diameter 9 mill.; length of
aperture 8 mill., diameter 4 mill.

Hah. — Erromaago Island, Solomon Islands.

Ohs. — I am indebted to Captain Brazier for several examples.
He informs me that Mr. Pease considered it identical with P.
spadicea, Rve., from which it is certainly distinct ; it is more
elongate and thinner than any known species from this island.

P. eburnea, nobis. Plate II, fig. 10.

Shell dextral, ovate, very elongate, solid. Spire half the
length ; whorls 5^, oblique striae coarse, spiral strise obsolete,
aperture a wide oval, more or less oblique ; umbilicus compressed.
Columella wide above, lip reflected, white and flat, margins of
the peritreme connected by callus. Color ivory-white. In fresh
examples sometimes the whole shell is tinged with pale rose.
Length 26 mill., diameter 13 mill.; length of aperture 11 mill.,
diameter 6 mill. Hab. unknown.

Ohs. — Captain Brazier sent me two examples of this shell,
given him by a friend ; it is larger and more solid than Pfeifferi^
Crosse.

si i»ROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY Of [l88d.

P. proximS,, iaobis. Plate IT, fig. 11.

Shell dextral, thin, ovate, very elongate, spire half the length ;
■whorls 5^, surface smooth, oblique lines of growth tine; spiral
strise obsolete, aperture ovate, oblique, umbilicus compressed ;
columella wide above, and slightly nodose, lip white and slightly
concave, margins of the peritreme connected by a thin callus ;
color white. Length 23, width 10 ; length of aperture 12, width
6 mill.

Hab. — Vanna Levu Island, Banks Islands, near the New
Hebrides.

Obs. — Capt. Brazier sent me two examples (weatherbeaten) col-
lected at the above island by himself in 1865 ; it has the outline
of eburnea, nobis, but is a smaller, thinner and more slender shell.

■f P. pyramis nobis. Plate II, fig. 12.

Shell dextral, solid, perforate, spire elongate, acute, longer than
the aperture ; whorls 5^, rounded, suture well impressed, surface
smooth, obliquely striate, fine spiral striae almost obsolete, aper-
ture a wide oval, slightlj' oblique, lip white, moderately reflected
and flat, margins of the peritreme connected by a thin deposit ;
color pale yellow. Length 25, width 13; length of aperture 10,
width 5^ mill.

Hab. — Vate, Efate, or Sandwich Island, Neio Hebrides.

Obs. — I have three examples from Mr, Layard and Captain
Brazier. They are the size of Ilacgillivrayi, from Tanna, but
the spire is more elongate and acute, the whorls more rounded,
the sutures are deeper, and they want the dark band at the peri-
pher}^ of that species.

P. Newcombianum, nobis. Plate II, fig, 13.

Shell dextral, ovate, rather thin; spire acute, half the length ;
w'horls 5, rounded; suture deeply impressed ; body-whorl some-
what inflated ; oblique lines of growth fine and crossed by
numerous waved spiral strioe, compressly umbilicate ; aperture
very oblique, rounded, ovate; lip white, moderately reflected
and concave; the outer margin partaking of the color of the
epidermis ; columella wide above ; margins of the peritreme
connected by a thin vitreous deposit ; a broad, flat, pillar tooth
far within the aperture. Color light fawn, with dark brown
oblique striae, apex dark brown. Length 17 mill., diameter
ir5 mill. ; aperture, length 7 mill., width 4 mill.

1886.] NATURAL SCTEisrcfeS OF PHILAbiELPHTA* 35

Hah. — Island of Salisbaboe^ one of the Falow Inlands, between
Gilolo and Mindanao.

Obs. — I received this shell from Mr. Layard, through Mr. A.
Garrett ; in outline and general appearance it resembles some
varieties of P. varia. I have named it in honor of Dr. Wesley
Newcomb, one of our oldest American conchologists, well known
for his writings on the allied genus Achatinella of the Sandwich
Islands.

P. eximia, nobis. Plate II, fig. 14.

Shell dextral, ovate, elongate, solid ; spire elongate, half the
length ; body - whorl large, sutures well impressed ; whorls
rounded, oblique lines fine, .and decussated by almost obsolete
spiral striae ; umbilicus slightly compressed ; aperture direct,
oval ; lip white, moderately reflected and flat ; columella wide
above ; margins of the peritreme connected by a thin deposit.
Color of the epidermis a soiled pale green, when separated
leaving the shell white. Length 23 mill., width 11 mill. ; length
of aperture 11 mill., width 5 mill.

Hab. — Aneiteum Island^ New Hebrides.

Obs. — I received one example of this fine species from Mr.
Layard, through Mr. Jno. H. Thomson.

Partula rufa, Less. Plate II, fig. 15.

Partula concinna, Pease. Plate II, fig. 16.

Partula pellucida, Pse. Plate II, fig. 17.

Partula Layardii, Braz. Plate II, fig. 18.

Partula (Diplomorpha) De la Touri, nobis, Plate II, fig. 19.

Shell dexti'al, solid, short conic ; whorls 4|^, rounded, suture
deep, body-whorl inflated, almost two-thirds the length, surface
with coarse oblique strife, umbilicus wide, aperture perpendicular,
lip white, moderatel}' reflected and revolute, the external margin
slightly indented, encroaching on the aperture ; color of the
epidermis light brown, color of the aperture dark orange. Length
20, diameter 14 ; length of aperture 12, diameter 8 mill.

Hab. — Au7^a Island, in the Halo Bass, Santo Espirito Group.

Obs — This shell has recently been discovered by Mons. De la
Tour, an enthusiastic young naturalist, who writes that this little
island teems with molluscan life. But one other species is known ;
P. {Diplomorpha) Layardii, Brazier, herein figured. It is found
at Yate or Sandwich Island, New Hebrides. The habits of the
animals are terrestrial.

3^ Proceedings of the academy oi* [1886.

February 2.
Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.

Twenty-six persons present.

On a Post-tympanic Ossicle iyi Ursus. — -Dr. Harrison Allen
called attention to an ossicle in the skull of the bear. It is
situated over the point of junction of the squama and the opis-
thotic elements as these bones enter into the formation of the
mastoid. The bone was seen in the skull of young individuals
only. The species examined were Ursus Americanus, Ursus
horribilis, and Ursus maritimus.

The posterior prolongation of the tympanic elements which
are so conspicuously developed in 3Iephitis and Taxidea are
absent in Ursus. It is every way probable that the new element
described is a member of the tympanic series, but instead of
being found in the space between the mastoid and the paramastoid
it is placed at the tip of the bones which enter into the composi-
tion of the mastoid. The name post-tympanic is accordingly
proposed for this bone.

February 9.
Mr. Edw. Potts in the chair.
Seventeen persons present.

February 16.

Mr. Thos. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.

Nineteen persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —
" On the Minute Structure of Stromatopora and its allies," by
Dr. C. Rominger.

" On the Problem of Reversed Vision," b}' Charles Morris.

February 23.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty-four persons present.

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA.

37

An Extinct Boar from Florida. — Prof. Leidy exhibited a spe-
cimen consisting of t^o fragments of a tooth, "which together are
over three inches long, and form the greater portion of the worn

extremity of a
lo\vertusl<:,with
the point bro-
ken off, appar-
ently of a huge
suilline animal.
The fragments
were mingled
with other small
ones of tusks of
Mastodon fiori-
danus, recently
collected in Flo-
rida. The spe-
cimen nearly ac-
cords in shape
with the corres-
ponding part of
the tusk of the
hog, but approx-
imates in pro-
portionate size
that of the hip-
popotamus. The
worn surface in
the entire tooth
has been about
three inches
long, and is an
inch wide. Thin
enamel invests
the tooth, ex-

FiQ. 1 —Posterior view of the right lower canine tooth; a, worn ceptino" on the

surface ; 6, broken surface ; c, enamel. ' i^osterior SUr-

FiG. 2.— Transverse section of the same. face aS in the

hog. Near the broken base of the specimen in one position, extend-
ing a short distance from the post-external border, the enamel is
defined by a sinuous edge, and appears to show that it ceased
about four inches from the point of the tooth, instead of extend-
ing the whole length of the tusk as in the hog. The anterior or
internal, and the posterior surfaces of the tooth are transversely
convex, and the external surface is convex and slightly flattened.
In transverse section the tooth is ovate, instead of triangular as
in the hog, the inner pole forming the sharp edge of the worn
surface. The surfaces of the tooth are smoother even than in
the hog, being less marked by longitudinal striae and transverse

38 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

lines of growth. They show no trace of the fluting in the tusk
of the hippopotamus, nor of the strong external ridge of the
peccary. The specimen is nearer in character to the tusk of the
hog than that of any other related animal, but is sufficiently dif-
ferent to render it probable that it may pertain to another genus.
No undoubted remains of the genus Sus have yet been discovered
in America, and the same is the case with the genus Hippopot-
amus. The peccary appears to be the American representative
of the hog. The fossil may provisionally be referred to a new
genus, related with the latter, with the name of JSusyodon, dis-
tinuuishing the species as Eusyodon maximus.

The transverse diameter of the section of the tusk, about three
inches from the point, is an inch and two-thirds ; and the fore and
aft diameter an inch and a quarter.

Caries in the Mastodon. — Prof. Leidy directed attention to a
specimen consisting of the posterior portion of a last upper
molar tooth of the Mastodon, which he had attributed to a spe-
cies under the name of M. Jioridanus. It is remarkable from
the circumstance that it apparently exhibits the result of caries,
a condition of which he had never previously observed an instance
in extinct animals. The supposed caries appears as an irregular
excavation immediately above the crown of the tooth, about four
lines in depth. The mouth of the cavity is elliptical, extending
one and one-fourth inches transversely, and one-fourth of an inch
vertically. The surface of the cavity appears irregularly eroded.

F. L. Harvey and Miss Mary A. Campbell were elected
members.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 39

ON THE MINUTE STRUCTURE OF STROMATOPORA AND ITS ALLIES.

BY DR. C. ROMINGER.

I had only recently the opportunity of reading the joint essay
by Prof. Alleyne Nicholson and Dr. F. Mnrie on the structure
of Stromatopora, published in 1879, in the Journal of the Linnsean
Society of London. The communication treats for the most part
to the structure of the Stromatoporas found on the American
continent.

As I had paid attention for a number of years to the study of
Stromatopora and had gathered extensive collections of them in
most of the localities from which the tj'pe specimens described
by these authors came, I had no difficult}" in identifying the forms
they had under consideration. While I was enabled in this way
to confirm the cori'ectness of some of their observations, I found
that in other instances they labored under erroneous conceptions,
parti}' because their material was insufficient, partly because they
did not recognize the things as they actually were.

Of most of the forms described by them and of a number of
others I had over fifteen years ago worked out descriptions,
accompanied by sixteen plates of magnified photographic figures,
intending to have them published under the auspices of the
Smithsonian Institution. Those to whom the paper was referred
for examination, however, reported adversely, in view of the recent
publication of Baron v. Rosen's monograph on Stromatopora and
the undesirability, as they believed, of issuing so manj'' plates
with such a comparatively small amount of text.

Messrs. Nicholson and Murie commence with an historical expo-
sition of the different opinions held by writers on the nature and
affinities of Stromatopora^ and after discussion of the arguments
for and against such opinions, they declare themselves with some
reserve in favor of the most popular of them, which was also held
by Goldfuss, the founder of the genus, that is to say, they think
the nearest relationship of Stromatopora is with the s})onges having
a calcareous skeleton. The authors think they have recognized
in Stromatopora systems of channels destined for the circulation
of water to and from the organism, analogous to those permeating
the mass of sponges ; but we shall see hereafter that these supposed

40 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

water-channels are not a part of the organism, and prove on
accurate examination to be either accidental perforations of the
skeleton by boring animals, or else, are the stems of certain corals,
particularly of Syringopora^ which have grown up simultaneously
with the Slromatopora, parasitically enveloping them.

At the time I wrote the before-mentioned manuscript I also
believed a close affinity existed between the sponges and Stro-
matopora, but since Carter and others have pointed out the simi-
larity existing between the calcareous skeleton of Hydractinia
and Stromatopora I am convinced that the similarity between the
calcispongiae and Stromatopora is merely an external one. The
mode of gi'owth and organization of the sponges essentially differs
from that of Stromatopora. The sponges are through their entire
mass permeated by a system of channels systematically arranged
so as to make it evident that all parts of the sponge are destined
to perform simultaneously a vital function in the compound organ-
ism. There is nothing in their structure which could with pro-
priety be compared with the uniform periodicitj^ in the growth of
a Stromatopora, which forms layer after la3'er in endless succes-
sion, one being the exact analogue of the other. The layers in
many instances are almost entirely shut off from communication
with the subjacent portion of the laminated skeleton. We have
to infer, therefore, that the live portion of a Stromatopora was
confined to the uppermost superficial strata, while the iuterlaminar
cell-spaces towards the interior gradually were abandoned and
became dead portions of the skeleton, as is the case with the skel-
etons of Hydractinia, and generally with all true corals produc-
ing a calcareous ston}' skeleton.

In a second chapter the authors give the characteristics of
Stromatopora, considering as type of the genus the Goldfussian
species Str. concentrica and polymorpha, both found in the Eifel,
Germany.

Their description reads : " Stromatopora is composed of a suc-
cession of thin, close-set laminae, arranged concentrically round
one or more imaginary centres. These concentric fundamentally
horizontal laminae are separated by interspaces, which are crossed
by more or less numerous vertical pillars ; hence tlie vertical sec-
tion of a Stromatopora exhibits a number of approximately hori-
zontal layers and intervening spaces, the latter divided by upright
pillars into a number of vesicular compartments. The entire lami-

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41

nated mass has sometimes grown as an incrustation of a central
nucleus, a shell or coral ; other times it forms a more or less thick
expansion with a small point of attachment, and otherwise a free
underface covered b}^ a wrinkled dense epithelial crust."

After this, in a general way correct description, they discuss
the original nature of the hard structures of Stromatoporoids,
which in fossilized condition are found calcareous, other times
siliceous, or partially calcareous and partially siliceous ; and demon-
strate the originally calcareous nature of the ske.eton of Stroma-
topora particularly by the circumstance that the specimens of
Stromatopora are always found in a calcareous condition, when
the associated fossils are likewise calcareous ; but if the associated
primitively calcareous fossils are to any large proportion silicified,
then also the skeletons of StromatojMra are found more or less
completely silicified. The various modes of preservation are
then enumerated : a, skeleton wholly calcareous ; 6, skeleton
calcareous, interlaminar spaces infiltrated with silica ; c, skeleton
silicified but the interlaminar spaces infiltrated with calcite ; d,
both former conditions of preservation represented in one and the
same specimen ; e, both skeleton and interlaminar spaces trans-
formed and filled with silica.

Entering into description of the more minute particulars of the
structure of Stromatopora the writers state that of the before-
mentioned pillars not all reach from lamina to lamina, but that
rudimentary shorter ones occur between. The pillars and laminae
are represented as composed of granvilar carbonate of lime, which
shows no structure, except occasionally an indistinct indication
of reticulation. According to my own observation, in all well-
preserved calcareous specimens of Stromatopora, the substance
of the laminae and of the pillars, being composed of a network of
interwoven delicate fibres, can be recognized with the greatest
distinctness, with a good simple lens, although not so distinctly
with the higher powers of a microscope, both the organic structure
and the crystalline mineral structure then becoming visible, thus
causinsr a blurred image.

The pillars are described as either simple rounded prominences
or else as vermicular and anastomosing crests which are imperfor-
ate, solid, not tubular. The writers, however, observed on the
surface of weathered silicified specimens sometimes a part of the
exposed pillars perforated by a central opening, which they try

42 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

to explain by an incomplete silicification of the central portion
of these pillars and by subsequent lixiviation of the unchanged
calcareous centre on exposure to atmospheric influences.

I have, likewise, frequently observed a central perforation of
cross-fractured pillars in calcareous, as well as in silicified speci-
mens, but while I perfectly agree with their representation of the
pillars as generally being solid, not tubular, I do not think that
the central perforation of the pillars in the mentioned cases is
the result of weathering of the imperfectly silicified skeleton
substance. I believe it is caused b}^ funnel-shaped inflexions of
the laminae at the base of these pillars, which excavation shows
itself as a central opening, if the apical part of the pillars which
is solid is broken off.

The laminae of some forms of Stromatopora, such as tuberculafa,
and granulata of Nicholson, are described as continuous leaves,
without any visible perforations placing the superimposed inter-
laminar spaces in communication. It may be suggested that sucli
openings of communication may exist. I had frequently occasion
to observe this to be the case, although, in many instances, the
laminae of these species of Stromatopora appeared perfectly free
of larger perforations than the minute pores of the tissue itself.

In other forms, such as Strom, nodulata, and densa, the exist-
ence of such larger openings for communication between the
superimposed interlaminar spaces has been ]"ecognized by the
writers.

According to m}" own observations, a part of these pores of
communication, and at the same time the largest ones, can be deter-
mined to be portions of the ramified horizontal channel expansions
radially converging towards certain centres, and uniting there in
one larger central canal, ascending vertically. These horizontal
canals in their extension slowly ascend from one interlaminar
space into another. They have, as Messrs. Nicholson and Murie
correctly observed, no proper walls, and cannot be considered as
canals horizontally intersecting the substance of the laminae, but
with more propriety are described as furrows on the surface of
the laminae, which, finally, by the formation of a new lamina above
the older one, become roofed over and are transformed into closed
tubular spaces. This opinion I fully indorse.

All Stromatoporas do not exhibit such radical channel expan-
sions well developed, but faint indications of radially arranged

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43

furrows converging to certain centres can be discovered in almost
every form of Stromatopora if we examine a sufficient number of
well-preserved specimens. Certain forms show them always most
beautifully, particularl}^ those in which the tissue of the lamellae
and tlie i)illars has an open porous texture, which increases their
bulk, and diminishes the size of the interstitial spaces propor-
tionately. These forms have been pointed out by Winchell under
the generic name of Goenostroma, which distinction is not accepted
by Messrs. Nicholson and Murie, as the principal generic charac-
ter of Ccenostroma is said to be the occurrence of the radial
channel expansions which, being present in forms of ver}' different
affinitives, cannot, in their opinion, be used as a generic mark.
This is, in one way, true ; but if we consider that the forms com-
prehended under Ccenostroma are distinguished not only by their
radiated surface, but by the before-mentioned bulkiness of their
lamina; and pillai'S, and the minuteness of the interlaminar cavi-
ties, from the ordinary typical forms of Stromatopora, which have
compact, well-defined laminte and pillars, I think these two
characters combined allow a subdivision of Stromatopora into
two groups, which at the first glance are distinguishable by even
an inexperienced observer, although, as I admit, numerous tran-
sitory grades from one group to the other exist, which make it
difficult to draw a line of demarkation between them.

The characters by which Prof. Nicholson distinguishes Stylo-
diclyon from Stromatopora most assuredly stand on a weaker basis
than those of Winchell's Ccenostrovia, as I will demonstrate here-
after when Messrs. Nicholson and Muvie's newly created genera
are reviewed.

After having described these radiating horizontally expanded
channels, the authors give a description of certain so-called
vertical water canals, observed in many different forms of Stro-
matopora.

There are two essentially difl["erent kinds of such canals verti-
cally traversing the laminated masses, and considered by the
authors as parts of the organism. In one of the cases we find
the mass of the Stromatopora perforated by comparatively large,
generally round, but sometimes elliptical canals, which have no
walls for themselves, and are evidently perforations by boring
animals. The nature of the channels and their totally irregular
distribution in the masses, proves this in a large number of spe-
cimens examined by me.

44 JPROCEEDINGS OF THfe ACADEMY OF [1886.

As representing this kind of channels, or oscula, as they term
them, the authors mention the following forms : Stromatopora
striatella^ Hindei^ tuherculata^ ponderosa, and ostiolata. In the
first four mentioned forms, the true nature of these perfora-
tions is without difficulty demonstrable. In St. ostiolata^ of which
specimens from Guelph, Canada, are transformed into a coarsely
crystalline dolomite, the organic structure of these masses can
scarcely be ascertained, and it is impossible to decide definitely
on the nature of the tubular casts traversing them. One of the
other examples mentioned, the so-called Stromatopora Hittdei, is
unfortunately selected, as it is in reality an Alveolites^ perforated
by some boring animal. The figures and description given leave
no doubt as to this point. Similar silicified specimens are, more-
over, not rarely met with in the Niagara group of Michigan.

The second kind of vertical tubular channels supposed to have
the function of conducting water through the organism of Stro-
matopora has distinct walls with imbricating wrinkles of growth
on the outside, and frequently from their interior a circle of
longitudinal rows of spinules projects ; more rarely invaginated
funnel-shaped diaphragms interrupting the tube-channels can be
observed, all of which proves that we have before us inclosed
stems of a Syringopora and not canals making part of the skele-
ton of the associated Stromatopora. Specimens of each are quite
abundant in the Devonian strata of Michigan, Ohio, Kentucky,
and Canada. Some pebbles found on the shore of Lake Superior
represent the same parasitical investment of clusters of Syringo-
pora stems on Stromatopora.

In the Niagara group we also find various kinds of Stromato-
pora similarly intergrown with stems of a delicate Syringopora,
which I have described in the Michigan Geological reports under
the name Syringopora filiformis. In other cases we find colonies
of Diphyphyllum multicaule invested in the same way by Stroma-
topora.

In this connection also Stromatocerium of Hall is cited by the
authors as an example of the first class of vertical water canals,
without any proper walls. In a chapter headed '•'■ Departures from,
the Ordinary Type of Stromatopora,^'' as the first of these, Stroma-
tocerium, is enumerated, and the following description given : "It
has the general aspect of Stromatopora, and possesses crowded con-
centric laminae characteristic for Stromatoporoids. The laminae are

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45

of considerable thickness, and are separated as usual by well-
marked interlaminar spaces, but the latter are quite open, and
there is a total absence of the vertical calcareous pillars which
occur in the normal Stromatoporoids; but the whole mass is per-
forated by innumerable vertical canals, which are destitute of
walls, and open directly into the successive interlaminar spaces
which they penetrate, as well as into open irregular laminae in
the general laminated skeleton."

This is an erroneous conception of the structure of that famil}^
as these supposed tubules are in reality casts of actual solid
tissue pillars which vertically intersect the laminated mass, some-
times without interruption in the different intersected layers,
sometimes in each band (consisting of a group of subordinate
delicate layers), these pillars start anew from a fresh basis.

The ordinary mode of preservation of the fossil has generally
impaired the original organic texture of the skeleton, which
became almost totally destroyed, and the space occupied by tissue
mass filled with transparent crystalline carbonate of lime, while
the former vesicular interlaminar interstices were replenished
with turbid, milky dolomite. Sections through such specimens
in vertical direction, show the transparent casts of the tissue
pillars as tubular channels, and in horizontal sections the same
appear to be circular orifices surrounded by a massive interstitial
wall substance.

Silicified specimens occasionally occur in which the interlaminar
spaces filled with silica are the only part preserved, while the
actual skeleton has been removed by solvents, and the space once
occupied by it remaining hollow, we then see the mass intersected
b3^ innumerable small circular channels.

I had the good fortune to find in the drift of Ann Arbor some
calcareous specimens in which the original tissue mass is pre-
served, represented by a non-transparent, dull, calcareous matter,
while the cellulose interlaminar interstices are replenished with
clear, transparent carbonate of lime.

They consist of a succession of thick, concentrically superim-
posed, undulating and monticulose layers from two to six milli-
meters in thickness, which are generally demarkated from
one another by darker colored division lines of greater density
than the remainder of the lamina. Each such larger lamina
represents a certain uninterrupted period of growth during

46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

which, beginning from a solid basal leaf, densely crowded with
papillose prominences, delicate versiculous plates are formed at
short intervals, connecting into a floor which bridges over
the tops of these papilli, which are prolonged until another
floor spreads over their apices, and until from six to twelve of
these subordinate laminse had formed, inclosing between them
versicular cell-spaces. Then after an evident interruption in the
uniform progress of growth, a new one of the larger layers com-
posed of subordinate laminte, commenced to form on top of the
other. The pillars intersecting the laminae subordinate to a larger
bandlike layer form uninterrupted columelles which usually
correspond with those of the next succeeding layers or bands.
In other cases, however, the columellse or pillars of each one of
the thicker compound lamince are independent in their position,
and do not correspond. Some of these pillars are often much
stouter than the others, and divide into several mammiform side
branches. The majority of them are simple, rounded, or later-
ally compressed into vermicular crests, particularly so in the
circumference of the monticulose prominences of the surface,
where these crests radially converge towards the centre, resem-
bling the horizontal radially converging channel expansions of an
ordinary Stromatopora^ but in this case it is the tissue-mass, and
not the intervening furrows, which produces the vermicular
radiating converging lines. The interstitial cell-spaces inclosed
between the convex transverse leaflets bridging over the space
from pillar to pillar, are very similar to the convex vesicules in
a vertical section of a CystiphyUum. As above stated in the
majority of specimens occurring abundantly in the Trenton
group of Escanaba River, and at Nashville, Tennessee, and
also in the drift of Ann Arbor and in the upper part of the
Cincinnati group at Madison, Indiana, the actual skeleton sub-
stance is almost completely destroyed, and its place filled with
crystalline carbonate of lime. It often occurs that several of the
thick bandlike layers are composed of a succession of vesiculose
layers twice or three times the size of the vesicules composing
other layers of the same specimens. In this case the vertical
pillars become very obscure, so that the whole appears as an
indiscriminate accumulation of vesicules as large as those of an
ordinary CystiphyUum.
The surface of Stromaiocerium was not known to Messrs.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47

Nicholson and Murie. I have seen many specimens with a sur-
face covered by rounded monticules similar to those of Stromato-
pora monticulifera, Winchell, and the tops of these monticules
radiated by the convergence of the before-mentioned compressed
vermiform crests representing the pillars of an ordinary Stro-
matopora. I had photographic representations of such natural
surfaces on the plates pertaining to my old manuscript essay on
Stromatopora, besides figures of vertical sections which exhibit
the structure better than any description can do it.

As a second aberrant form of Stromatoporoids the authors
pointed out a form to which they gave the name Pachystrovia.

The tj^pe form occurs in the Niagara group and is described as
consisting of subhemispherical masses formed of a concentric
succession of very thick laminae from one to two lines in diameter,
which are in direct contrast, not separated by inter-laminar
spaces except occasionally by narrow irregular intervals, conse-
quently there are also no radial pillars. Under the microscope
the great laminse are formed of an indistinct porous calcareous
tissue principally composed of irregular vertical fibres placed at
some distance from one another, and only clearly brought to view
by the use of polarized light. Numerous delicate but irregular,
generally remote vertical vermicular tubules without distinct
walls are said to perforate the mass, but such poi'es could not be
discovered on fractured surfaces by the use of a simple lens.
The surface of weathered specimens also shows radiating branched
subdermal canals placed round numerous independent centres,
precisely as in the so-called Ccenostroma.

Several figures of sections through Pachystroma are given,
which, together with the above description, convince me that the
authors had under observation imperfectly preserved specimens
of Stromatopora, which occur abundantlj'^ in the Niagara group ;
those found in the vicinity of Lockport in calcified condition,
particularly correspond with the given descriptions. They have
generally lost the finer structure, but exhibit distinctly a compo-
sition of concentrically superimposed bands consisting of an
almost structureless, compact, calcareous mass, cut into thin
slices, showing under the microscope the above described fibrous
texture.

On examination of a good many specimens exceptionally a spot
may be found in which the structure is better preserved, and in

48 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

those I can see that each one of the described large, thick laminae
consists of a number of delicate subordinate laminae, separated as
usual by minute interlaminar spaces, intersected with pillars.
In my opinion, therefore, the so-called Pachystroma merely repre-
sents a certain imperfect state of preservation of several of the
ordinary species of Stromatopora found in the Niagara group.
The grouping of the smaller structural elements into broader
bands is almost universally the rule in Stromatopora. Any ver-
tical section almost, in which the delicate laminae and interstitial
spaces alternate through the whole thickness of the mass with
great uniformity, will, if we direct our attention to it, show a
grouping of a number of such laminae into one broader, occa-
sionally narrower bands, discernible by a darker shade of color
on the junction line of two of such bands. It indicates tempo-
rary short interruptions in the regularity of the progressing
growth, as I have intimated previously, while giving a description
of the structure of Stromatocerium.

Prof. Nicholson considers also Stromatopora densa of the Hel-
derberg group as a representative of his Pachystroma, but of this
form I can most positively assert that its structure does not differ
in any respect from the typical forms of Stromatopora.

The specimens before me allow the recognition of the regular
superposition of laminae, supported by galleries of short, stout
pillars with greatest distinctness ; the orifices of the horizontal
channel expansions are in vertical sections, rather large, and the
ordinary interlaminar cell-spaces unusually small, which causes
the compactness and apparent density of the mass, as compared
with the open porous appearance of sections of other associated
forms of Stromatopora, the commonest of which is Stromato-
pora ponderosa, Nicholson. This latter form I had years ago dis-
tributed among my scientific friends under the name of Stroma-
topora tentilis, on account of its most elegant reticulated
appearance in vertical sections. In this respect it exceeds in
distinctness any other form of Stromatopora known to me.

A third group of Stromatoporoids, aberrant from the ordinary
type, Mr. Nicholson named Clath.rodictyon. It is distinguished
from the type form by the flexuose course of the lamellae com-
posing the laminated section. They are continually turned up
and downward, the upturned portions representing the vertical
pillars of ordinary forms of Sti^omatopora, The interlaminar

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 49

spaces, therefore, appear as layers of rounded or elongated vesic-
ules somewhat resembling the tissue of Gystij^hyllum on a minute
scale. Forms of this structure occur abundantly in the Niagara
group and some in the Devonian strata.

A generic distinction of these forms, represented in many dif-
ferent modifications, can, in my opinion, be made with propriety,
but as intermediate forms occur, in which the lamellae are only
little disturbed in their straight course by the inflexions repre-
senting the interstitial pillars, it is difficult to draw a line separ-
ating Clathrodictyon from Stromatopora.

Prof. Nicholson's type form of Glathrodictyon^ occurring in
the Niagara group, is described as forming large cake-like expan-
sions from one to two inches in thickness centrall}^, but thinning
out near the margins. Upper face irregulai'ly undulating and
exfoliating concentrically round elevated points. Surface smooth.
Internal structure exceedingly delicate, formed of fine close-set,
horizontal or slightly undulating laminae, of which about twenty
to twenty -five occupy the space of one line. Interlaminar spaces
divided into minute lenticular cells formed by curved inflexions
of the horizontal laminae.

Specimens to which, in a general way, this description is ap-
plicable, are common in the Niagara group of Michigan, Kentucky
and Iowa, but although a good many hundreds came under my
observation I could never find one whose structure was so minute
as to exhibit from twenty to twenty -five laminae on the space of
one line. The most delicately built among my specimens had not
over sixteen within the space of a line.

The form having this delicate structure I had, in my above-
mentioned essa}- on Stromatopora, described and figured under
the name Stromatopora minuta. Its structure does not repre-
sent the character of Clathrodictyon in its most perfect develop-
ment, as the lamellae, which by their inflexion form the pillars,
are not much twisted out of their rectilinear general direction, and
as a number of pillars are observable in such sections which are
papillose prominences of the surface of the lamellae, not showing
any inflexion of the latter at their base.

Associated with this form are several other forms of much
coarser structure with from six to eight lamellae within the space
of one line, which exhibit the clathrodictyon character in much
more ideal perfection than the type form does. These had been

50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

described in my before-mentioned essay under the name of Stro-
matopora vesiculosa, as their vertical sections appear as an accu-
mulation of layers of cystose cells, rather than as a succession of
continuous laminae, separated by interstitial spaces. The demar-
kating walls of the cells appear in vertical sections as the meshes
of a net-work bounded by lines diagonally intersecting the direc-
tion which the laminae should have if they formed continuous
leaves. In some of these specimens a banded structure is ol)serv-
able, whereby from five to eight layers of vesicules are grouped-
together to form a broader band, which then is sharply defined by
a straight continuous division line from the adjoining similar
bands above and below it.

Other specimens of this vesiculose species of Stromatopora
are found intergrown with stems of Syringopora /ilifo7^mis,
sometimes also with stems of Diphyphyllum multicaule, exactly
in the same manner as in the previousl}' mentioned Devonian
forms, which have been subordinated by the authors to Gauno-
pora, supposing the enveloped stems to be part of the skeleton
of Stromatopo7'a.

Among the Devonian representatives of his genus Glathro-
dictyon, Mr. Nicholson describes, under the name G. cellulosum,
a form which I had in my paper named Stromal, cellulifera. It
occurs in the corniferous limestone of Port Colborne and else-
where, in association with another form which I called Str.
invoxjinata, but which, it seems, did not come under his observa-
tion. C. cellulosum is described as growing in irregular expan-
sions of considerable size, formed of a succession of horizontal
lamelhie, about four occupying the space of one line, and so
inflected as to form complete or incomplete partitions, which
divide the interlaminar spaces into a number of irregularly oval
vesicules, about three occup3ang one line. Surface tuberculated.
or granulated ; the tubercules occasionally perforated. In the
specimens found in the same locality the surface, instead of
being tuberculated or granulated, as above described, is covered
with roof-like, elongated, laterally uniting crests, forming in this
way a network, enclosing shallow subpolygonal cell-pits, some-
what similar to the shallow pits of a minute compound star-coral,
as the margins of these crests on weathered silicified specimens,
being of porous texture, appear sometimes crenulated, which
crenulation increases the resemblance. The other form allied to

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 51

Clathrodictyon which is not described by Prof. Nicholson, pre-
sents the weathered surfaces of the silicitied specimens, covered
with very stout rounded conical papilli of almost uniform size,
about half a millimetre in diameter and twice that distance apart.
Apices of the not cross-fractured papilli imperforate. In a
vertical section four or five well-demarkated stout lamellae occupy
the space of two millimetres, which is approximately the same
as one line. The interlamellar pillars are formed by upward
flexions of the lamella, and therefore we see the base of each
one excavated by an inverted funnel-shaped sinuosity ; and as
the pillars of the successiv^e laminae correspond, the apices of the
pillars of the inferior laminae become invaginated into the basal
funnel-shaped excavation of the next ones above, which being
the case through the whole thickness of the laminated mass,
makes it appear as if so many vertical columns intersected it
transversel}'. This structure was observed b}^ Mr. Nicholson in
another species of Stromatopora, and induced him to propose for
it the generic name Stylodictyon.

The space between these pseudo-columns is bridged over by a
gentl}' downward curved portion of the lamellae, leaving corres-
pondingly large elongated interlaminar spaces between them, which
often are subdivided by arched vesicular plates obliquel}' and
irregularly traversing them. The mode of growth of this form
is the same as that of the former species ; it occurs in thick undula-
ting expansions, covered by an epithecal crust on the under side.

An associate of these two forms, which I had named Stroma-
topora explanata, has been described by Prof. Nicholson under
the name of Stromatopora tuberculata. Its surface is crowded
with rather close-set, rounded papilli, somewhat differing in size.
Occasionally an arrangement of somewhat compressed, elongated
papilli, in radial order towards certain centres, is faintly indi-
cated, but rarely becomes obviously developed. The lamellte are
stout, formed of a compact tissue-mass, in which distant perfora-
tions are observable, maintaining communication between the
superimposed interlaminar spaces. Five or six lamellae occupy
the space of one line, interstitial cell-spaces comparatively large,
oval or elongated to twice the amount of their height. The
course of the laminte is generally in straight parallel lines, but
we can often observe their upward inflection at the base of some
of the pillars. This produces in vertical sections of this form a

52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

considerable resemblance to sections of Glathrodictyon cellulosum,
whose structure is somewhat coafser, having only four or five
lamellae within the space of a line, and more conspicuously
inflected in order to form pillars.

As a fourth aberrant form of Stromatoporoids, a single speci-
men found in the upper Cincinnati group of Ohio is described
by the authors, about which I am unable to give an opinion of
my own, as from the rather vague description I cannot say that
anything similar ever was under my observation.

After these expositions, a classification of the different tj^pes
of Stromatoporoids is attempted, and seven generic cadres are
proposed, most of which had been sketched already iu the
previous chapters.

These proposed genera are: (1) Stromatopora Goldfuss, com-
prising all those forms consisting of concentrically superim-
posed laminae, each lamina separated from the other by a
distinct interlaminar space, which is crossed by numerous ver-
tical pillars. In some of these forms are radial, subhorizontal
canals or surface grooves placed round minor centres, which,
according to my own experience, are present in almost every
form of Stromatopora — at least, in rudimentary development.
In addition to these characters, large vertical canals intersecting
the laminated masses are described by the authors, which they
believe to be analogous to the oscula of sponges. I have to
reject this opinion as erroneous.

(2). Caunopora Phillips. Type, Caunopora placenta. Repre-
sentative form of the authors' Stromatophora perforata. I need
not enter again into a discussion of the value of this generic
distinction, as I have previously proved that these forms do not
represent one organism, but are coral stems, parasitically invested
with various kinds of Stromatopora, which in the same localities
grew perfectly free of such enclosed stems, erroneously believed
to be parts of the organism.

(3). Glathrodictyon Nicholson, likewise, has been sufficiently
taken into consideration.

(4). Stylodictyon Nicholson, is represented by two species, St.
columnare and St. retiforme. Besides the general structure of
Stromatopora, as special character of this genus, it is asserted
that a s^^stem of vertical columns of dense calcareous tissue per-
vades the laminated skeleton. The concentric arrangement

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. feiJ

of the successive laminae and their interstices round these
vertical columns, is also brouglit forward as a noteworthy
circumstance. It is likewise stated that radiating channel
expansions may be present or not. I had described and figured
these two forms in my paper, under the name Stromatopora
Wortheni^ thinking a division into two species superfluous, as
insensible gradations from one form into the other exist.

The columellar streaks, seen to intersect the mass of this other-
wise typical form of Stromatopora in vertical sections, are pro-
duced by the repeated abrupt flexions of the lamellae imo
papillose prominences which cover the surface, similar to those
we observe in many other forms of Stromatopora, as for instance,
in Str. pustulifera Winchell.

As in this latter form, the prominences are somewhat larger
and consequently the flexions are not so abrupt, and as the tissue
of this form is throughout more compact, we do not observe an
obvious contrast between the density of the parts corresponding
with the papillose prominences and the broader downward-curved
intermediate portions of the skeleton, while in the so-called
Stylodictyon, the abrupt flexions of the lamellae in the papilli
into an almost vertical direction, cause the closer approxima-
tion, and consequently greater density, of these parts than of
the intermediate gently downward -curved portions of the
laminated skeleton which have comparatively open, well-defined
interlaminar cell-spaces conti'asting with the denser portions, so
as to let them appear under the form of vertical columns.
Examining transparent vertical sections of such specimens, we
see that the lamellae are not interrupted in their continuity while
passing across these columellar streaks, and that no additional
tissue element comes into play, which could be claimed as con-
stituting the substance of the columelles. On the contrary,
every portion of these columellar streaks is identifiable either
as a normal part of the lamellae or of the intermediate system
of pillars. To mention among the generic characters the
concentric arrangement of the lamellae and their interstices
round these columellar centres, appears to me rather superfluous,
as it is a necessary consequence of the monticulose prominences
into which the surface is raised. I could invariably observe in
all specimens of this tribe which came under my observation,
radial horizontal ducts, which, by the Authors, are said to be
sometimes developed and sometimes not.

64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [188^.

The structure of the form called Stylodictyon columnare, found
in the Helderberg limestones of Kelley's Island, etc., is somewhat
more compact than we find it in the specimens of the Hamilton
group named retiforme^ but there occur numerous transition
forms from the compact to a more open, porous structure. In
the size of the papillose prominences, also, a great variation of
forms exists. I think, therefore, we could well spare one specific
name and retain the one I had selected for both varieties jointly,
Stromatopora Wortheni.

In the Helderberg limestones of Vernon, Indiana, and at the
Falls of Ohio, occurs a form of Stromatopora very similar in
structure with the former, but with columellar streaks much
smaller than in these, measuring only half a millimetre in
diameter, or little over. Its tissue mass is also more bulky, of
open reticulated spongious texture plainly' recognizable with a
common hand magnifier. I had given in my manuscript descrip-
tion and figures of it, under the name Stromatopora granidifera,
as the papilli on its surface give it rather a granulated than
papillose aspect, on account of their smallness. Horizontal
radial ducts are well developed in this form. In it and in the
former species these ducts unite in more or less distant centres,
which are totally independent of the papillose prominences of
the surface, while in many other forms of Stromatopora^ as for
instance, in monticulifera and piistulifera Winchell, the apex of
each of these monticulose elevations is also the centre of conver-
ffence for such channels.

Under Nos. 5 and 6, generic descriptions of Stromatocerium
and of Pachystroma are given, which require no further critical
comment, as I have on a previous page sufficiently expressed my
views on the correctness of the emended characteristic of Stro-
matocerium and of the merits of the distinction of Pachystroma.

As a seventh generic form of Stromatoporoids a certain con-
centricall}' laminated fossil found in the Niagara limestone of
Louisville, Ky., has been described by Mr. Nicholson under the
name Dictyostroma, which has nothing in common with the
Stromatoporoid tribe, excepting an external resemblance, being
composed of a succession of laminte separated by large inter-
stices. The upper surface of these laminae is covered with
spiniform prominences, part of which are long enough to reach
the bottom of the superincumbent lamella ; others are shorter.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP I'HILADELPHIA. 56

These numerous processes vertically intersecting the inter-
lamellar spaces increase the resemblance of these fossils to
Sti'omatopora. Each of the undulating superimposed laminae,
of not quite one millimetre in thickness, and about from one to
three millimetres distant from one another, is composed of a
layer of horizontally prostrate tubules with solid intimately
united walls, which after some extent in the horizontal position,
abruptly bend upward and open on the surface of the laminae
with oblique compressed orifices bordered on the outside either
by a sharp lip, or by a vertically rising strong proboscidal pro-
longation, similar to the pillars on the surface of the lamellae of
a Stromatopora. The underside of each one of these lamellae in
the concentric succession, is covered by a wrinkled epithecal
crust, through which the outlines of the single tubules compos-
ing the lamella are plainly visible, just as we see it on the under-
side of foliaceous expansions of Alveolites, and indeed, the
structure of this fossil in every respect corresponds with the
structure of Alveolites or Limai'ia, and has no analogy whatever
with Stromatopora.

As the numerous specimens I possess of this fossil were not
only found in the same locality from which Prof. Nicholson's
type specimen comes, but were collected at the same time when
Rev. Mr. Herzer picked up the specimen now in possession of
Prof. Orton, of Ohio, I am positive that the objects I have under
consideration are identical with Prof. Nicholson's type specimen.
A very similar concentrically laminated fossil, but on the
whole of coarser structure, with interlaminar spaces from three
to five millimetres in width and with very stout intervening
pillars is not rare in the drift deposits of Ann Arbor. The
specimens are silicified and the structure of tlie lamime, as
being composed of a layer of prostrate tubules, is no longer
recognizable. The wrinkled epithecal crust on the underside of
each lamina is, however, still well preserved. The pillars, if
broken through, exhibit sometimes a central channel ; the shorter
ones, not injured, are imperforate at the apex ; some of the larger
pillars divide into mammiform side branches. There remains
no doubt in my mind that this and the former Dictyostroma of
Nicholson belong to the tribe of Alveolites^ Limaria, etc. I pro-
pose, therefore, for them the name of Alveolites stromatoporoides.
A genuine Stromatoporoid which in its external aspect has

66 tROCEEDINQS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

some resemblance to Mr. Nicholson's Dictyostroma, is found at
the same locality at Louisville, but the descriptions given by
Nicholson, and his figures, sufficiently prove that it was not this
form which served him as a type for Dictyostroma. The rather
closely approximated laminte are inflected upwards to form stout
conical pillars with a funnel-shaped excavation at their base,
as in Clathrodictyon and in Stylodictyon of Nicholson. The
pillars of the superimposed laminae correspond, and the
apices of the lower pillars become invaginated into the basal
cavities of those above, whereby a sort of pseudo-columns are
formed which vertically intersect the entire thickness of the
masses, growing in flat expansions and covered with an epithecal
crust on the underside. A number of other interesting forms of
Stromatopora occur in the Niagara group, but as my present
intention is only a review of Messrs. Nicholson and Murie's
work, I abstain from their description on this occasion.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 67

NOTES ON THE TERTIARY GEOLOGY AND PALEONTOLOGY OF THE
SOUTHERN UNITED STATES. .

BY PROF. ANQELO HEILPRIN.

Eocene of Texas. — In a limited collection of fossils from near
the northern border of San Augustine Co., Texas, transmitted to
me for examination hy the Texas State Geological and Scientific
Association, I have been able to determine the following species : —

Ostrea Alabamiensis. Cardita Blandingi (aUicosta).

Ostrea sellaformis. Crassatella antestriata.

Ostrea divaricata. Corbula Texana.

Pecten Desliayesii. Buecitriton altile? {Texana).

Anomia f Scalaria sp. indet.

The horizon represented is evidently the " Claibornian," the
deposits probably occupying a position in the " Jacksonian "
area.

The Nummulitic of Florida. — Prof. G. A. Wetherby, of Cin-
cinnati, has furnished me with a number of rock fragments ob-
tained at a locality some six miles southwest of Gainesville, Fla.
They are interesting as containing, in addition to one or more
species of Orbitoides, several nearly perfect individuals of Num-
mulites Floridanus Heilprin, which, therefore, represent the most
northern locality in the State where the members of this group
of Foraminifera have thus far been found. They lend further
confirmation to the views already advanced by the writer as to
the broad extent of the southern Nummulitic formation, and to
the relative antiquity of the Floridan peninsula. One consider-
able fragment of a Heterostegina is also represented in the rock.

Since the receipt of Prof. Wetherby 's specimens I have been
favored, through Mr. Joseph Willcox, of this cit}'', with other
fragments from approximately the same locality, Arredonda,
Alachua Co., which also contain Nummulites Floridanus, Orbi-
loides, and Operculina rotella ( 0. complanata ?).

Eocene of Kentucky. — Mr. R. H. Loughridge has kindly for-
warded to me for determination a number of fossils collected by
the Geological Survey of Kentucky, from the immediate neigh-
borhood of Paducah. They are mainly in the form of casts in a
highly ferruginous and fairly micaceous yellow-white sandstone,
5

58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

and in the most part recognizable only in so far as the determina-
tion of genera is concerned.

The species are referable to the following genera : —

Mysla — species probably M. unguUna.
Leda — species probably L, protexta.
Leda — species indet.
Nucula — species probably N. ovula.
Turritella — species Turritella Mortoni.

This is, as far as I am aware, the first notification of the dis-
covery of marine fossils in the Tertiary deposits of the State.
The presence of the strongly carinate form of Turritella Mortoni
fixes pretty definitely the horizon, the Lower Eocene, or that of
the older Tertiaries of Maryland and Virginia. This is what we
should have expected to find from the position of the strata.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 59

March 2.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty-four persons present.

March 9.

Mr. Edw. Potts in the chair.

Seventeen persons present.

The deaths of Jesse W. Starr, and of Ward B. Haseltine,
members, were announced.

Botanical Notes : — Secretion of Nectar in Lihonia. — At the
meeting of the Botanical Section, on the 8th instant, Mr. Thomas
Meehan remarked that the Brazilian Acanthaceous plant, Lihonia,
secreted an enormous amount of nectar at the base of the flowers.
As the corollas faded, and dropped from the receptacle, the nectar
would be drawn over the still fresh pistil, and leave it with a
succession of small globules, the whole shining like a necklace of
diamonds in the sun. In a state of nature, honey-collecting insects
would doubtless not permit it to accumulate to this extent.

Production of Nectar in Ornithogalum coarctatum. — This pretty
species is distinguished by the development of broad sheathing
stipular appendages at the base of the inner series of three stamens,
stipular appendages as, following Mr. Worthington G. Smith,
in a paper contributed to the Horticultural Congress in London
in 1865, we must feel bound to term them. These appendages
were closely appressed against the ovarium. Noticing little
brownish globules projecting above the edges of these appendages
he was led to examine, and found that nectar was secreted only at
the base of the stipulate stamens. It was produced in such quan-
tity as to press upwards and above the edges, as already noted.
It was of thick consistence, and with the exact odor of honey.
Above or near the apex of the ovarium — at 'the base of the short
style — nectar exuded in limited quantity, and this suggested an
analogy between the morphology of the carpellary leaves and the
stipular filaments.

Mr. Meehan further remarked on the production of stipular
appendages by the petals of flowers as accounted for by Mr.
Worthington Smith. In one of his earliest contributions to the
Proceedings of the Academy he had shown that in Magnolia the
petals were formed by the suppression of the laminal portions
and the development of the stipules. The petals were indeed

60 PROCEEDINQS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

modified stipules, not true leaves. The petals of roses were cer-
tainly modified stipules, and tliis process of development could
be traced in many plants. In this species of Ornithogalum there
is but a slight dilation at the base of the outer whorl of stamens.
A great advance is made in the stipular development in the
inner whorl of stamens, where the appendages extend half-way
up the filament. The three carpellary leaves formed the next
whorl, and we might reasonably imagine a greater development
of the stipular energ}^ in a succeeding whorl, and therefore that
these carpels were also enlarged stipules. An absolute proof of
this was afforded by one plant, which had the habit of producing
some flowers with an union evident from the ph3'llotax3', of an
outer petal (or sepal) with a stamen of the inner verticil. In this
case the staminoid petal took the shape of the stipule, that is to
say, it was emarginate, or inversely saggitate at the apex, the fila-
ment being wholly wanting, and with the anther in the sinus.

An additional fact of interest connected with this species is,
that a large number of plants among seedlings, though with sta-
mens apparently perfectlj'' formed, have wholly sterile anthers.

Seeds on Depauperite Plants. — A specimen of a grass, Setaria
viride, was exhibited, not over half an inch high, but which had a
large number of perfect seeds nearly mature. It was exhibited
to show that such minute plants might grow and produce seed
annually for many successive j^ears, the plants each year repro-
ducing themselves among other vegetation, without any one being
aware of their existence. When such tracts were ploughed up, and
plants like this grass get a good chance to develop themselves
fully, it would appear that there had not been any plant of the
species growing for years, and the fact used to illustrate the long
vitality of seeds in the earth. It might be that there was good
evidence that cases of long vitality were undoubted ; but it served
a good purpose to point out where error may creep in.

Of Bracts in Gruciferee. — It was an axiom that no true cruci-
ferse had bracts to the flowers. The double Sweet Al3'ssum of
gardens, Koniga maritima, seemed an exception to this rule. The
lower flowers were always solitary in the axils of the leaves, and
the leaves were often reduced to mere bracts for a long distance
up among the flowers. Branches but not flowers in cruciferse
would spring from the axils of the leaves. An examination of
these double flowers sliowed that man}' had not followed the rule
in double flowers, by transforming stamens to petals. Some, in
fact, showed thej^ were arrested branches, with depauperite leaves,
a solitary petal being produced in the axil of each little leaf. The
sepals seemed united, and formed a sort of sheath-like bract, above
which the petal emerged. In this form they appeared as arrested
spikes.

The Coronal Disk in Spiraea. — Exhibiting some flowers of
Spiraea Reevesiana^ Mr. Meehan called attention to the elevated
disc which rose on the inner face of the line of filaments, and

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61

pointed out the correspondence in outline of each division with
the form of the two-celled anther. The inner line of stamens
were alternate with these divisions, and the whole study led to
the conclusion that this little crown was composed of the imma-
ture anthers of abortive stamens. He referred to Acer ruhrum,
and other plants, where, in the abortion of stamens the anthers
were generally almost fully formed before the development of the
filament, and remarked that in trul}^ female flowers of this maple
there was a course of sterile anthers as in this Spirsea.

March 16.
Mr. Thomas Meehan, Yice-President, in the chair.
Sixteen persons present.

March 23.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.

Fermentation in Perevji^s Fluid.— Dv. Benjamin Sharp re-
marked that in a bottle of Perenji's fluid (nitric acid 10 per cent,
sol. 4 pts., Chromic acid ^ per cent. sol. 3 pts., 95 per cent.
Alcohol 3 pts.) effervescence was noticed. On shaking the bottle
and removing the cork the fluid frothed violently, resembling
very active beer ; when the frothing had to a certain extent sub-
sided, another shaking produced another violent frothing. The
fluid had been used for hardening chick emlnyoes,and the portion
used had been turned back so that a slight sediment was in the
bottom of the bottle, and from this sediment the frothing seemed
to originate. The sediment was examined with a high power
lens, and Bacteria were found in great numbers. Thej^ were
probably introduced with the sediment caused by the hardening
of the organic tissues upon which thej' lived.

On the Eye of Pecten. — Prof. Sharp further called the atten-
tion of the members to the eye of Pecten. In one of his articles
(On the Yisual Organs of the Lamellebranchiata, Mitth.
Zool. Stat. Neapel, 1884, p. 457), he makes the following asser-
tion : " The question as to the function of this organ (the so-
called eye of Pecten) is one of considerable interest. Hickson
states that a few experiments have been made on this subject,
concerning the visual power of this animal ; he says ' It is very
doubtful whether they (the so-called eyes) are of much value to
the animal in avoiding its enemies. The most reasonable theory
of their function seems to be that when in the ebbing tide, a

62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

probability arises that they will be left high and dry on the shore,
the}^ can appreciate the fact b}'' the growing intensity of the light,
and by that peculiar flapping motion of the valves the Pectens
are so remarkable- for, move away into deeper water.' This
theory may at once be set aside when we consider that the Pec-
tens of the Mediterranean, where we have practically no tide at
all, a state of affairs that has existed for an exceedingly long
period of time, have as well developed eyes as those found on
shores where tides do exist ; and further, it seems hardly probable
that such a complicated organ would have developed to detei'-
mine for the animal whether it be out of water or not. . . . As
regards the complicated organ known as the eye, I might suggest
that, if this be an eye, it is one where we have no true pigmented
laj^er in any direct relation to either the nerve or the retina. The
mass of red pigment and the metallic-like tapetum would hardly
answer the place of the black choroid coat so essential to the
eye."

Dr. Sharp stated that at the time the above was written, he
was under the impression that the organ was probably a phos-
phorescent organ, but he had no proof of it. At Nantucket he
obtained many specimens of the animal and. found that the edge
of the mantle was phosphorent, and on questioning Dr. Kite,
formerly of the " Fish-Hawk," who had often seen Pecten dredged
at night, he was informed that the phosphorent condition of Pec-
tens had often been observed. He thought it was not unreasona-
ble to suppose that organs for the emission of light should be
formed upon the same general principles as organs for the admis-
sion of light, hence the similarity of these organs to eyes. He
further stated that this function (phosphorescence) would be of
great use to the animal in obtaining its food.

On Amia and its probable Taenia. — Prof. Leidy stated that in
our market on Saturday last, three Mud-fishes, Amia calva, had
been given to him. They came in a barrel of shad from North
Carolina. One was a female about two feet long, the others male,
of which the smallest was eight inches. Protruding from the
vent of the latter was a little tape-worm, which, on disturbance,
retreated into the rectum. Three other worms of the same kind
were found in the mouth, but none were in the intestine of this or
the other fishes. The worms accord with the description of the
Tsenia filicolis, infesting Sticklebacks, Gasterosteus, and is prob-
ably the same species. They range from 1^ to 3 inches long,
gradually widening from the delicate thread-like neck to the pos-
terior rounded extremity where thc}^ measure from !• to TS mm.
wide. The head is spheroidal, variably broader or longer, and
about 0'625 mm.; with the summit slightly prominent and
unarmed, and with four hemispherical, lateral bothi'ia 0'25 mm.
in diameter. Neck variable ; when extended, long and narrow and
usually about half the width of the head. Anterior segments,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63

transversely linear, about an eighth the length of the hreadth ;
graduall}^ becoming inverted saucer-shaped or scutellate, and
about one-fourth the length of the breadth. Posterior segments
more quadrate, slightly widening behind, about 0'75 mm. long and
from 1- to 1-5 mm. broad. Last segment longest and rounded.
Genital apertures marginal.

March 30.

Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.

Twelve persons present.

Prof. J. C. Arthur was elected a correspondent.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

64 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

REVISION OF THE PAL^OCRINOIDEA.
BY CHARLES WACHSMUTH AND FRANK SPRINGER,

Part III — Section II.
SuBOKDEK ARTICULATA.

The Articulata include the group formerly defined by us under
the family name Ichth3'ocrinid{e, with the addition of Grotalo-
crinus and Enallocrinus, which possess in a remarkable degree
some of the most characteristic features of the group. We have
elsewhere shown that our former definition of the structure of
the ventral surface in the Ichthj'ocriuidae was faultj'^ in the use of
the word " soft," in which we did not have in mind the idea of
membranous as opposed to calcareous, or of disk as opposed to
vault, but simply employed the word to express more stronglj^ the
notion that the vault was not rigid. We maintain, however, that
the outer test of the ventral side in this group was a continuous
integument, composed of calcareous plates, united by ligament
and not by a close suture, and that by reason of this structure and
the articulation among the plates of the dorsal side it must have
been pliant or flexible. The exact nature of this integument we
do not know. The plates may have been arranged in various
waj^s ; they may even have been imbricated in some types — like
the interambulacral plates in some Periechocrinidae, and even in
some of the true Echini — these are points we may perhaps never
be able to settle. That there was an inner integument roofed in
and covered by the flexible vault we have mentioned, and that it
contained the summit plates and " covering pieces " we know to
be true in the Crotalocrinidae, and we think it altogether probable
that the general plan of the ventral structure for the Articulata
generally is expressed in that of Grotalocrinus.

The eflfect of the patelloid plates, observed in Forhesiocrinus^
in permitting mobility in the whole skeleton, has been heretofore
mentioned. The suggestions we then made are confirmed by the
discovery of the remarkable articulation not onl}'^ among the
radials themselves, but also between the radials and interradials
(PL 6, figs, 3-5). This articulate structure, and the consequent
mobility in the test, and flexibility^ of the vault, we consider

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 65

chavacteristic of the whole group, though it may vary in degree,
and is probably far less perfect in some genera than in Forbesio-
crinus and Onychocrinus.

Zittel (Handb. d. Palseont., i, p. 353-5-6), has separated the
genera which belong to this suborder into three families, viz.: =
Taxocrinidae, including: (A), Taxoc7'inus, Forbesiocrinus, Ony-
chocrinus, Gissocrinus, 3Iyelodactylus ; (B), Lecythocrinus (?),
Dactylocrinus {Dimerocrinus Pictet); Ichthyocrinidae, includ-
ing : Bomalocrinus, Lecanocrinus, Clidochirus, Mespilocrinus,
Ichthyocrinus, Anisocrinus and Pycnosaccus; Crotalocrinidse,
including Crotalocrinus, Enallocrinus, Gleiocrinus. Angelin
refers Taxocrinus, Forbesiocrinus, Gissocrinus and Myelodactylus
to the Taxocrinidse ; Ichthyocrinus and Pycnosaccus to the Ich-
thyocrinidffi ; Crotalocrinus to the Crotalocrinidse and Enallo-
crinus to the Enallocrinidae.

The so-called genus Myelodactylus may be left out of consider-
ation. It was founded upon columns only, and, if correctly
identified by Angelin, which is improbable, it would not belong
to the Articulata at all. A separation of the genera included by
us in the Ichthyocrinidse into two families is desirable, but all
attempts to define satisfactory characters for such families have
so far failed. We have tried to arrange them according to Zittel's
definition as well as various plans of our own, but without success,
and we have come to the conclusion that the separation must be
based upon characters as yei undetected. It is a remarkable and
perplexing fact that in this whole group such characters as the
presence or alisence of interradials dorsally, the number of pri-
mary radials, or the position of the anal or azygous plate, whether
resting on the basals or not, seem to be of little value.

Until some new light shall be obtained we see no other course
than to leave the family Ichthyocrinidse as we have already
defined it.

Gissocrinus, which is placed by Angelin and Zittel among the
Taxocrinidse on account of having three underbasals, belongs to
the Fistulata, and has been referred by us to the Cyathocrinidae,
as have also Lecythocrinus and Dactylocrinus. In addition to
the genera formerly included by us, we refer C yrtidocrinus to
the Ichthyocrinidse.

Gleiocrinus was independently referred by Zittel to the Crota-
locrinidse, and by us to the Ichthyocrinidffi. It differs from all

66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADExMY OF [1886.

other Articulata in the position of the interradials and may prove
to be the type of a distinct family.

F. Roemer established the family Anthocrinidae to receive
Anthocrinus and Crotalocrinus, and Pictet, as Dnjardin and
Hup^, recognized the family Anthocrinidffi, but referred to it only
Anthocrinus. As Anthocrinus proves to be a synon3"m, the
family name will fall with it, and we shall distinguish the family
as Crotalocrinidae, and follow Zittel in referring to it Crotalo-
crinus, Enallocrinus, but not Gleiocrinus.

The Crotalocrinidae are distinguished by the possession of a
ventral tube or anal appendage, located ventrally near the per-
iphery. In Crotalocrinus it consists of a tube composed of eight
A^ertical rows of heavy quadrangular pieces. In Enallocrinus its
form is unknown. The famil}^ differs from the Ichthyocrinidse
in a similar way as Platycrinidae from Actinocrinidie in that the
higher radials are imperfectly developed.

The Articulata, therefore, fall into two families, which are
defined as follows :

A. IcHTHYOCRiNiDiE. Basc dicyclic. Underbasals unequal,
proportionally very small, rarely visible externally. Basals gene-
rally small. Dorsal cup chiefly built up of radial plates of differ-
ent orders, abutting laterally against each other or separated by
interradials. Number of radials variable in genera, species and
individuals. Radial and arm plates decreasing in size in the suc-
cessive orders, each division being about half as wide as the
preceding one, and of uniform size in corresponding divisions of
the ray, but the plates of adjacent raj'^s generally alternate with
each other. The line of articulation between radials and arm
plates is frequently undulating, and there are sometimes additional
patelloid pieces. Arms uniserial, bifurcating, generally touching
laterall}^ so as to form a wall continuous with the calyx. Arm
plates with straight sides and very deep ambulacral grooves.
Pinnules apparently wanting.

Interradial system chiefly developed on the ventral side. Spe-
cial anal plate sometimes resting on the basals, sometimes upon
the radials, and sometimes wanting dorsally. Anus unknown in
most of the genera. The radials are united longitudinally by
articulation, laterally b}^ ligament, the interradials among each
other and with the radials by a loose suture, admitting of motion
and producting flexibility in the calyx and vault.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 61

B. CrotalocriniDuE. Base dicyclic. Underbasals unequal,
small. Basals generally large. Radials so far as known, 2X5.
Arras nniserial, with numerous branches, spreading broadly. The
branches of each raj' partly or completely connected by lateral
projections or direct union. When completely connected, they
form reticulated leaves overlapping when folded. Pinnules
wanting. Ambulacral fui'row deep, ramifying with the arm
branches, covered by alternating plates and bordered by side
pieces. The first anal plate rests on the basals ; it is followed by
others which form the base of a ventral tube. Interradials
numerous, covering the entire ventral surface, but not more than
one or two — sometimes none — are exposed dorsally. Calj^x roofed
over by a pliant integument of irregular plates, extending over
the arm bases, and enclosing the summit plates and covering
pieces of the disk. Ventral tube lateral.

Family XI. -ICHTHYOCRINIDJE W. and Spr.

We are of the opinion that some of the genera described by
Angelin are founded upon characters of specific value only, but
as the original specimens are unique and inaccessible to us, we
cannot, at present, undertake to review them.

ICHTHYOCRINUS Conrad, Ecv. i, p. 33.

No new species of Ichthyocrinus have been described since our
first list, in which, however, we omitted to notice Ichthyocrinus
arthriticus (d'Orbigny), mentioned in Prodr. i, p. 46, which is a
Gissocrinus, and also Ichthyocrinus capillar is and /. goniodac-
tijlus (d'Orbigny), which Phillips had correctly referred to
Gyathocrinus.

HOMALOCRINUS Angl., Rev. i, p. 35.

ANISOCRINUS Angl., Rev. i, p. 37.

CALPIOCRINUS Angl., Rev. i, p. 38.

LECANOCRINUS Hall, Rev. i, p. 39.

1882. L. Soyei Oehlert. Bull. Soc. Geol. tie France (ser. 3), vol. x, p. 354, PI. 8, fig. 2.
— Lower Devonian. Near Sabre, France,
Lecanocrinus elegans Billings, see Taxocrinus elegans Billings; Lecano-
criuus laevis, Taxocrinus laevis.

68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

CYRTIDOCRINUS Angl., Rev. i, p. 145.

Cyrtidocrinus was placed by xis among the " imperfectly known
genera," but should be referred to the Ichthyocrinidse, as it is
closely allied to Lecanocrinus, from which it differs only in having
four in place of three underbasals. Like that genus it has a small,
quadrangular azygous piece, placed obtusel}^ against the posterior"
basal, and between it and the right posterolateral radial. The
upper radials are extremely narrow.

The only known species is Cyrtidocrinus fascietatus Angelin.

PYCNOSACCUS Angl., Rev. i, p. 41.

MESPILOCRINUS De Kon and Leh., Rev. i, p. 41.

TAXOCEINUS Phill., Rev. i, p. 4.3.

Additional species : —

*1884. Taxocrinus Beyrichi (Dewalque MS.) Fraipont, Zeacrinus Beyrichi ; Extr.
des Ann. de la Soc. G^ol. de Belg., Tome xi, p. 112, PI. 1, fig. 5.— Dev. supe-
rieur. Senzeille, France.
1882. T. curtus Williams, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phi.'a., p. 30. — Portage group.
Ithaca, N. Y.
*1856. T. elegans (Billings), Lecanocrinus elegans Rep. gfeol. Surv. Canada, p. 278;
also 1859, Decade iv, p. 47, pi. 4, fig. 4 a h. — Trenton limest. City of Ottawa,
Can. We consider this species, and also Lecanocrinus laevis E. Billings, to
be Taxocrinus. They evidently possess no azygous plate, as they should
have if they belonged to Lecanocrinus.
Taxocriaus Egertoni ( Poteriocrinus Egertoni Phill. ^= Cladocrinus Eger-
toni Aust.), Rev. i, p. 48, is probably an Onychoorinus having 6-7 radials.
1882. Taxocr. Fletcheri, Bull, i, Illinois St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 31 ; also Geol. Rep.

Illinois vii, p. 308, PI. 30, fig. 2. — Kinderhook gr. Marshall Co., Iowa.
1882. T. ithacensis Williams, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 29, PI. 1, fig. 10.—
Portage gr. Ithaca, N. Y.
*1856. T. laevis (E. Billings), Lecanocrinus laevis, Rep. Geol. Surv. Canada, p. 278;
also 1859, Decade iv, p. 47, PI. 4, fig, 3 «. — Trenton limestone. City of
Ottawa, Can.
*1836. T. nobilis (Phill.), Poteriocrinus nohilis Geol. Yorkshire, p. 205, PI. 3, fig.
40. — This species has been regarded by some authorities as identical with
Forbesiocrinus nobilis De Kon. and Lehon ; but is in our opinion not
only specifically distinct, but in all probability a Taxocrinus. — Mountain
limest. Bolland, Engl.
1852. T. oligoptylus (Pacht.). — Dimerocrinus oligoptylus Beitr., x. Kenntniss der
Gattung Dimerocrinus, St. Peter^^burg, p. 8, with 3 plates. — Devonian.
Costijitsi, Russia.
Syn. Dimerocrinus aptilis Pacht.

N. B. — Taxocrinus priscus (Schnur.) Steinninger, 1853, Geogr.
Beschr, d. Eifel, p. 37, is not sufficiently defined for identification.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69

GNOKIMOCRINUS W. and Sp., Rev. i, p. 50.
FORBESIOCEINUS De Koninck, Rev. i, p. 51.
Additional species : —

1859. Forbesiocrinus Saffordi Hall, Suppl. Geol. Rep. Iowa, p. 87.— Keokuk lime-
stone. AVhite's Creek, Tenn.

1879. F. parvus Wetherby, Jour. Cinein. Soc. Nat. Hist. (October number), p. 5, PI.
11, tigs. 4 a h. — Kaskaskia gr. Pula.ski county, Ky.

N. B. — Forbesiocrinus Whitfieldi Hall, which has been referred
to the genus Taxocrinus, according to Meek and Worthen (Geol.
Rep. Illinois, vol. v, p. 553), came from the Kaskaskia group, of
Randolph Co., 111., and not from the Keokuk limestone, as
stated by Hall. It also occurs at that horizon in Pulaski
Co., Ky.

LITHOCRINUS W. and Sp., Rev. i, p. 52.

ONYCHOCRINUS W. and Sp., Rev. i, p. 53.

1882. Onychocrinus distensus Worthen, Bull. 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist , p. 31, also
Geol. Rep. 111., vii, p. 307, PI. 29, fig. 5.— Kaskaski gr. Monroe Co., 111.
(AVe are unable to distinguish this specimen from 0. cxsciilptus Lyon and
Cass.)

NIPTEROCRINUS Wachsm., Rev. i, p. 55.

Zittel (Handb. der Pal., p. 352) refers this genus to the Cyatho-
crinidse^ probably on account of its three small underbasals.
The presence of interradials clearlj^ removes it from that family,
and its waving sutures leave no doubt that it was properly
placed by us among the Ichthyocrinidse.

Family XII.— CROTALOCRINID^.

CROTALOCRINUS Austin,

1843. Austin, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. I, vol. xi, p. 198.

1848. Moiris, Cat. Brit, Foss., Ed. 1, p. 50.

1854. Salter, apud Murchison, Siluria, Ed. 2, p. 219.

1855. McCoy, Brit. Pal. Foss., p. 55.
1873. Salter, Cat. Mus. Cambr., p. 123.

1878. Angelin, Icon. Criu. Suec, p. 36,

1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Pal,, i, p. 356.

1882. De Loriol, Pal. d. France, tome 11, Crin., p. 51.

Syn. Anthocrinus, 1853, Miiller, Abliandl, Aka. Berlin, p. 192 ;
1857. Pictet Traite de Pal., iv, p. 312 ; 1862. Dnjardin and Hupe,
Hist. Nat, Zooph. Echin., p. 117 ; 1855. Quenstedt, Handb. d.
Petref., iv, p. 943.

*10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Grotalocrinus was established by Austin in 1843 (Ann. and
Mag. Nat. Hist., p. 198), for the reception of a single species,
which was described by J. S. Miller, in 1821, as Gyathocrinus
rugosus, from a calyx without the arms. He had previously
used the name Grotalocrinites rugosus (1842, Ann. and Mag.,
vol. X, p. 109), in his list of the class Pinnastella, and he referred
it to the Marsiqnocrinoidea. His original definition of the genus
is as follows :

" Dorsocentral plates, 5 ; first series of perisomic plates, 5 ;
second series, 5. On the latter are a series of wedge-shaped
plates, which bear the rays ; the exact number of these plates is
unascertained. Column with a pentapetalous perforation."

" C. rugosus. The plates surrounding the body agree with the
generic characters. Rays numerous, probably amounting to one
hundred. Column composed of thin joints, articulating into
each other by radiating strife. The columnar canal is penta-
petalous. The raj's are remarkabl}- small m proportion to the
size of the animal."

McCoy, in 1854 (Brit. Pal. Foss.,p. 54),redescribed the genus,
but gave little additional information regarding it. He men-
tions the presence of an interradial plate in the " second peri-
somic row," and saj'S that above, and alternating with the
primary radials, are five large pentagonal secondary radials
(scapulae), completing the cup, on each of which rests a series of
small pentagonal plates, supporting for the width of each plate
a large number (? 15 or 16) of very slender long ra3's. Accord-
ing to McCoy, the genus "differs from Gyathocrinus in the vast
number of its rays."

Hisinger (Leth. Suec. Supp., II, p. 6) described under the name
Gyathocrinus pulcher a specimen without arms which afterwards
proved to be of this genus.

Johannes Miiller was the first to call attention to the remark-
able characters of this type exhibited in the brachial parts. In
1853 (Abh. Ak. Wiss. Berlin, p. 187, et seq.), he described, under
the head of " Crinoiden mit netzfdrmigen Handen," some speci-
mens from Gothland in which the arm structure was well shown.
He says he could not identify Hi singer's species because his
figure was too imperfect, although he thinks it may have belonged
to the same group. He also says that a specimen with arms and
branches somewhat resembling the net-form had been obtained

ISSr),] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Tl

from Dudley, which he acknowledges to be Gyathocrinus rugosus
Miller, but he expresses the opinion that the arms in the English
form are not laterally connected and that it must have had more
than five arms. Regarding, therefore, the English form as de-
scribed by Miller, Austin and McCoy as distinct from the Goth-
land form with reticulated arms, Miiller proposed for the latter
the genus Anthocrinus, of which there was but a single species,
A. Loveni.

Angelin (Icon. Crin. Suec, p. 26), with the whole of the excel-
lent material from Gothland before him, finds that Anthocrinus
Loveni is a synonj^m of Hisinger's Gyathocrinus pulcher, and
that it belongs, along with G. rugosus, to Austin's genus Grotalo-
crinus, of which he also describes and figures a third species, G,
superbus. According to his definition of the genus, there are
five arms, connected at their bases by branches and pinnules, and
the pinnules, reticulatel^^ connected by narrow transverse joints,
form a broad plicatecf net. This reticulate structure, by which
all the ramifications of each ray throughout their entire length
are united into a net-work, seems to be the principal distinction
between this genus and the closely allied Enallocrinus, in which
the arm branches are transversely connected for a short distance
near the base, but are free for the greater part of their length.
Angelin uses the word " pinnules " carelessl}^, and it is evident
that in this case it means simplj- the ultimate divisions of the
arms. The character intended to be described by Angelin is
much better stated by Zittel (Handb, d. Pal., i, p. 356), and Jo-
hannes Miiller (1853, Berl. Akad., pp. 187-192).

Generic Diagnosis. — The calyx is constructed very similar to
that of the Cyathocrinidas. Its form is subglobose ; its sym-
metry bilateral. "With arms closed, the Crinoid resembles an
elongated bud with folded leaves. With outspread arms its
figure is that of a flattened disk with five deep, narrow, lanceolate
areas, which separate the rays.

Base dicyclic, TJnderbasals 5, small, pentangular. Basals 5,
large, hexagonal and octagonal. Primary radials 2X5 ; the first
wider than high, excavated in the middle of the distal face for
the reception of a very small trigonal, bifurcating second radial,
upon which the arms originate and bifurcate in much the same
manner as in Marsupiocrinus. The lateral margins of the first
radials are very deeply incurved, extending between the arm

12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

bases until they meet the tegminal plates on the ventral side.
The arms divide into numerous branches, which are connected
throughout their entire length, in such a way that the brachial
apparatus of the whole animal is included in five broad, net-like
leaves with inroUed edges, which when closed overlap each other.
These leaf-like arms are separated by very prominent, deep peta-
loid areas, whose margins are formed by the deeply incurved
lateral faces of the peripheral arm joints, and the radials which
are enormously thickened. When spread out, these connected
ra3'S would be free from contact with one another, and would
resemble the outstretched leaves of a pentapetaloid flower, but
folded together they overlap just as the closed leaves of a bud or
flower. The arm joints are disposed in regular dichotomizing
longitudinal rows, and also in regularly concentric transverse
rows, the alternate arrangement of joints of adjacent branches
being absent here. The arm branches are transversely com-
pressed and flattened, very deep in proportion to their width,
meeting throughout their entire length by their lateral surfaces.
Upon the dorsal side, the branches are laterally connected by
points of attachment projecting from the middle of each point, or
by direct contact of the sides of the joint, in such a way as to
produce a reticulated structure composed of numerous small
meshes. The projection of the points of attachment from the
middle of the joints gives them the appearance, when seen from
the dorsal side, of a cross with short arms, and the network ap-
pears to have regular cross-shaped meshes. At the lower part of
the arms the joints are not cross-shaped, but meet directly by
their sides, and the reticulate appearance is not so marked as
higher up. The whole structure of these leaf-like ra^^s is adapted
to the greatest flexibility in all directions, and we think it prob-
able that the meshes of the network were occupied by elastic
connective substance of some kind. The joints are flat on the
dorsal side ; near the calyx they are extremely thick from the
dorsal to the ventral side, the thickest being those which rest
upon the radials, and they decrease rapidly toward the extremities
of the rays. The articular faces at the ends of the joints are
provided with an axial canal. Along the ventral side the joints
are deeply excavated for the ambulacral furrow, which ramifies
with the arm branches throughout their length. The furrow is
lined at each side by a row of small side pieces, three to foiir to

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPmA. *IB

each arm joint, which inclose in the middle two rows of covering
plates, alternately arranged, of equal number with the side pieces.

The dorsal cup is roofed over and covered by an integument of
comparatively heavy interradial plates of irregular arrangement,
which extend out some distance over the rays and enclose the
bases of the arms, but in no sense constitute or include covering
plates of the arms, as Angelin's figure (PI. xxv, fig. 15) clearly
shows. The plates at the margin of this integument meet and
connect with the incurved edges of the radials and peripheral
row of arm joints, which are proportionally much thicker than
those of other parts of the ray. The arms, with their covering
plates, which are laterally connected without the interposition of
interradlals or interaxillaries, emerge from underneath this
integument, which must have been pliant to admit of the varieties
of positions assumed. Also the summit plates — oral and proxi-
mals — must have been located beneath this integument, or we
could not understand their position and relation to the covering
pieces which are represented by Angelin's figure on PI. xvii, fig.
3 a. Only occasionally the first interradial is visible dorsally;
the dorsal cup, however, includes always a comparatively large
subquadrangular anal plate, which rests between the radials and
upon a hexagonal basal. This supports a very long, tapering,
lateral ventral tube, which rises between the arms. It is com-
posed of vertical rows of short, transverse pieces, and its walls
are pierced by numerous pores.

The calyx plates appear to be united by syzygy, in part at
least, and the lines of junction are marked by pits and clefts
which penetrate deeply into the walls, as shown in fig. 4, PI. viii,
of Angelin,

Column heavy, round, composed of thin joints, whose articular
faces are traversed by small radiating canals, which form pores
on the external surface. Axial canal large, pentangular.

Geological Position, etc. — Upper Silurian of Gothland and
England.

These species have been described :

1821. Crotalocrinus rugosus Miller, Cyathocrinus rugosus Nat. Hist. Crin., p.
Sy, pts. 1 A — 4 B. — 1808. Parkinson, Turban or Shropshire Encrinite,
Org. Rem., Vol. ii, p. 19.3, PI. 15, figs. 4, 5.— 1837. Hisinger, Cyathocrinus
rugosus, Leth. Suec, p.89, Tab. xxv, fig. 3a; also Antekni, Heft iv, p. 217,
Tab. vii, fig. .3. — 1839. Phillips, Cyathocrinus rugosus Phillips, apud
Murchison's Sil. Syst, p. 672, Tab. 18, fig. 1.— 1843. Austin, Ann. and Mag.

6

14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Nat. Hist., Ser. 1, Vol. xi, p. 198.— 1S4.3. Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss., Ed. 1, p.

50. — 1850. D'Orbigny, Cyathocrinus rugosus, Prodr. d. Pal., Vol. i, p. 46.

—1854. Salter, apud Murchison, Siluria, Ed. 2, p. 219, figs. 4-7, Tab. 13,

fig. 3.— 1855. McCoy, Br. Pal. Foss., p. 55.— 1873. Salter, Cat. Mus. Cambr.,

p. 123.— 1878. Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec, p. 26, Tab. vii, fig. 4; Tab. xvii,

figs. 3, Sa-b, 8, 8a.— 1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Pal., i, p. 357, fig. 244.— 1885.

Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petref., iv, 942, Tab. 75, figs. 2, 3.— Upper Silurian.

Gothland, Sweden, and Dudley, England.
1840. C. pulcher Hisinger, Cyathocrinus pulcher, Leth. Suec. Supp. ii, p. 6, Tab.

xxxix, figs. 5 a, h. — 1878. Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec, p. 26, Tab. vii, figs.

6-7, 7a-b; Tab. viii, figs. 1-9 a; Tab. xvii, figs. 1, 1 a-d ; Tab. xxv, figs.

8-20.-1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Pal., i, p. 357, figs. 2, 4. 4 a-d. Syn.,

Anthocrinus Loveni Job. Miiller, 1853, Abh. d. Berl. Akad., p. 192, Tab.

viii, figs. 1-11.— Pictet, 1857, Tr. d. Pal., iv, p. 312, PI. c, fig. 8.— Dujardin

& Hupe, Hist. Nat. Zooph. Echin., p. 117. — Quenstedt, 1885, Handb. d.

Petref., iv, p. 943, Tab. 75, figs. 4, 5 ; Petref. Deutschl., iv, p. 508, Tab. 108,

fig. 13. — Upper Silurian. Gothland, Sweden.
1878. C. superbus Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec., p. 26, Tab. xvii, figs. 2, 2 a-h. — Upper

Silurian. Gothland, Sweden.

ENALLOCRINUS d'Orbigny.

1850. D'Orbigny, Prodr. de Pal., Vol. i, p. 46 ; Cours Elem., ii, p. 143.

1854. Salter, apud Murchison, Siluria. Ed. 2, p. 218.

1857. Pictet, Traite de Pal., iv, p. 320.

1862. Dujardin and Hupe, Hist. Nat. Zooph. Echin., p. 134.

1878. Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec, p. 25.

1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Pal., i, p. 356.

Syn., Apiocrinites (Hisinger) in part ; Millcricrinus (d'Orbigny) in part.

In 1850 d'Orbigny established this genus to receive two
species, which had been noticed and figured by Hisinger as
Apiocrinus scriptus and A. punctatus. Only the calj'x was then
known, and the generic definition simply stated that this was
composed of five depressed basals, five large " subradials " and
five "brachials." He placed the genus in the family Melocrinidae,
while Pictet, and also Dujardin and Hupe, referred it to the
Cyathocrinidae. Angelin makes it a distinct family, and Zittel
considers it as belonging to the Crotalocrinidffi. It is clearly
separated from the Inadunata by the fact that its radial divisions
are connected either by direct union or by interradial plates
between the secondary radials. Although Angelin, in his defini-
tion of the genus (Icon. Crin. Suec, p. 25), states " interradialia
nulla," his figures demonstrate their undoubted presence both on
the dorsal and ventral side (PI. xv, figs, la, 3a; PI. xxv, figs. 4, 4a).
It appears from these illustrations that in some cases the corres-

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. T5

ponding radials of adjacent rays meet again above the inter-
radials, just as in some species of Ichthyocrinus and Batocrinus.

The genus differs from GrotalociHnus^ its nearest ally, in the
absence of the reticulate arm structure, although there is a
lateral connection between the arm branches for some distance
above their bases ; also in the alternate arrangement of adjacent
rows of arm joints. The construction of the ventral covering is
apparently the same in both forms. There is, however, a differ-
ence in the mode of union of the calyx plates, the lines of
junction in Enallocrinus, showing strong indications of an artic-
ulation, as we judge from Angelin's figs. 1, 4, and 4 a, of PL xxv.
Angelin united the two types of Hisinger under his first species
U. scriptiis^ and described one new species.

Generic Diagnosis. — The calyx differs but little from that of
Grotalocrinus, and when the arms are spread this produces a
similar discoid figure, and lanceolate areas similar to those of
that genus. The calyx is depressed, broadly expanding, com-
posed of thick plates with deeply beveled sutures, indicating a
union by articulation. Base dicyclic ; symmetry bilateral ; under-
basals 5, depressed, linear; basals 5, large, hexagonal, angular
above, except on the anal side ; radials 2X5, the first one wide,
with its distal face occupied by a deep lunate excavation, which
is filled by the second radial and the two first arm joints. Lateral
faces of first radials deeply incurved between the arm bases, and
meeting tegminal plates on the ventral side. Second radial
trigonal or pentagonal, and on its superior sloping margins the
arms bifurcate as in Marsupiocrinus. The first arm-joint small,
linear, sometimes coalesced with the second ; the second small,
axillary ; arms broad, thick, composed of short uniserial joints,
dichotomizing frequently. The branches are laterally connected
near their bases, but throughout the greater portion of their
length are free. Arm joints alternating with those of adjacent
rows. As in Grotalocrinus, the outer sides of the peripheral rows
of the rays are the thickest, and the deep inward curvature of
their exterior lateral faces leaves similar large petaloid or lanceo-
late areas. The exterior ventral margins of the incurved radials
of the first and higher orders, and some of the lower arm joints,
connect with the plates of the ventral covering, which is of a
similar nature as that of Grotalocrinus. Ambulacral furrow deep,
dichotomizing with the arm branches, bordered by two rows of

T6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

small alternating side pieces, and covered along the median line
by two rows of saumpliittchen.

Anal plate one, in line with first radials. Of the numerous
interradials only one or two are exposed dorsally, and these are
succeeded veutrally by an indefinite number of other vault plates.
Ventral tube lateral, its construction unknown. Column strong,
round, with short joints; axial canal large, round or obtusely
pentangular.

Geological rosition, etc. — Upper Silurian ; known only from
Gothland, Sweden.

Two species have been recognized :

3828. Enallocrinus scriptus Ilisinger (Cyathocrinites?), Anteckn iv, ji. 217: Tab.
V, fig. 9; Tab. vii, fig. 1. — 1831. (Apiocrinites (?) scriptus), Anteckn v, p.
123, Esquisse d. tab. petrif. d. Swede, p. 23.— 1837. Leth. Suec, p. 89, Tab.
XXV, figs. 1 and 2. — D'Orbigny, 1840 (Millericrinus scriptus), Hist. Nat.
Crin., p. 94, PI. xvi, fig. 29.— 1850. Prodr. d. Pal. i, p. 46.— Angelin, 1878, Icon.
Crin. Suec,, p. 25, Tab. vii, figs. 1-3 a; Tab. ix, figs. 18 and 19; Tab. xxv,
figs. 1-7; Tab. xxvii, figs. 17-20 a. — Upper Silurian. Gothland, Sweden.
Spi. — Enallocrinus punctatus Hisinger, Leth. Suec, p. 89. — Millei'icrinus
punctatus d'Orbigny, Hist. Nat. Crin., p. 94, Pi. xvi, fig. 30. — Enallocrinus
punctatus Salter, apud Murchison, Siluria, Ed. 2, p. 218. — Anthocrinus
scriptus and A. punctatus, Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petref. iv, p. 944, Tab.
75, tigs. 6, 7.

1878. E. assulosus Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec, p. 26, Tab. xv, figs. 1-4. — Upper

Silurian. Gothland, Sweden.

CLEIOCRINUS Billings.

1856. Geol. Surv. Canada, p. 276.
1859. Ibid, Decade IV, p. 52.

1879. "Wachsm. and Spr., Rev. i, p. 35.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Pal., i. 357.

Cleiocrinus in its general habitus has close aflfinities with the
Ichthyocrinidse and Crotalocrinidse^ and this has induced us to
place it provisionally with the Articulata, without assigning it to
any special family, although it diff'ers in two important points.
Cleiocrinus^ contrary to all other Articulata, has an interradial
in lateral contact with the first radials, forming a ring Avith them,
and the plates of the calyx apparently were not articulated in a
strict sense. Zittel has referred the genus to the Grotalocrinidse^
while we placed it in Part I with the Ichthyocrinidse. If certain
parts were better known, we should make it the type of a new
family, but at present, having no positive knowledge of the

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. TT

basal regions, nor even of the arms, we are not in a position to
give a satisfactory definition of the group.

In order to obtain some additional information, we applied to
our friend, Walter R. Billings, who, with his usual kindness, has
furnished us the diagrammatic sketch of the type-specimen,
which is reproduced on Plate 9, fig. 5. The suture lines of all
plates above the primary radials, vertically and horizontally, are
provided with a kind of minute pores ; which, it seems to us,
indicates a union by syzygy, and not by articulation, and that
the arm structure was altogether different from that of the other
Articulata. Mr. Billings informs us that " the plates are all
joined together, but where the strain in crushing has acted upon
the specimen, the cracks or gaping sutures are preferably on the
lines of the grand divisions, i. e., the lines dividing the arms
from one another and from the anal series." This parting of the
plates, however, does not indicate necessarily a leaf-like struc-
ture of the rays, as in the case of Grotalocrinus^ for all plates
united by syzygy, as a rule, come easily apart.

Mr. Billings informs us that tlie ridges of the column are inter-
radial in position, which confirms the supposition made by us
(Part I, p. 36 \ that Gleiocrinus possesses underbasals, and that
the so-called basals of E. Billings are interradials. He also states
that the lowest visible circlet of plates " apparently overlaps the
column, instead of passing under it," which shows that the base
must have been concave, with ample space for the basals and
underbasals to lie concealed from view. We have indicated the
basals and underbasals in the diagram by dotted lines.

It will be useful to give an amended —

General Diagnosis. — General form obconical ; with bilateral
symmetr3^ Base dicyclic. Underbasals probably 3, minute or
rudimentary. Basals probably 5, small and hidden by the
column. Primary radials 3X5, increasing in width upwards,
supporting several superior orders of radials, dichotomizing
frequently and uniformly, and interlocking with those of
adjoining rows.

The rays and their divisions are laterally connected, without
the intervention of interradial plates, except at the anal side
and along the first primary radials. The first radials are much
smaller than the succeeding ones, and separated from one another
by a comparatively large pentangular interradial. The inter-

78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

radial of the posterior side is quadrangular, and supports a longi-
tudinal row of anal plates, which extend to the full length of the
calyx, and in their form closely resemble the radials. Arms
apparently recumbent. Column more or less obtusely pen-
tagonal ; axial canal large.

Geological Position, etc. — Lower Silurian, Canada. No addi-
tional species have been described.

SuBORDEK INADUNATA.
a. Branch, Larviforviia.

The Larviformia comprise the families : Haplocrinidse , Sym-
hathocrinidse, Gupressocrinidee and Gasterocomidse.

The Haplocrinidse are the simplest brachiate Crinoids and
may be regarded as representing the larva, not only of the
Inadunata but of the Palaeocrinoidea generally. Even the most
complicated Platycrinoid or Actinocrinoid must have passed in
its early life a stage in which radials and interradials consisted of
but a single ring of plates when we think the interradials covered
the entire ventral surface. This stage is probably represented by
the young Allagecrinus. In Haplocrinus the conditions are essen-
tially the same, but here the interradials already began partly to
open out, and the oral plate made its appearance upon the surface.
It is very possible that also the growing Allagecrinus before
reaching maturit}' attained this condition, or perhaps even the
condition of Symbathocrinus, hut in default of any such evidence,
we refer the genus for the present to the Haplocrinid?e.

The Haplocrinidse are very closely allied to the Sj'mbatho-
crinidse, and it is a question with us, whether it would not be
better to unite them under one family. Both are built essentially
on the same plan, but the S3'mbathocrinidie — at least their
typical genus — had proximals, and, as a rule, a somewhat higher
developed mode of articulation. The articular facet in the
Symbathocrinidae forms a straight horizontal line, it is extended
into a large muscle-plate, and this covers the greater part of the
ventral cavity, leaving only a small median space, which is covered
either by the interradials and an oral plate as probably in Fiso-
crinus, or by interradials and a full set of summit plates as in
the case of Symbathocrinus. In the Haplocrinidse the inter-

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP THILADELPHIA. 79

radials ^ are comparatively large, and rest upon the upper face of
the main part of the radials ; in Synibathocrinus small, placed
against the distal ends of their limbs, and separated by radial
dome plates. In the Haplocrinidoe the anal opening penetrates
one of the interradials, and also probably in Pisocrinus, Stor-
thingocrinus and Stylocrinus ; in Symbathocrinus and Fhimo-
crinus it is placed along the suture of two adjacent muscle-plates.
This position of the anal opening between the muscle-plates is a
peculiarity found exclusively among the Larviformia ; we meet
with it again in Cupressocrinidse, and in a somewhat different
form among Gasterocomidse.

The Cupressocrinidse and Gasterocomidae are dicyclic Crinoids,
containing within their basal ring an undivided plate in form of
a disk. The disk is pierced by sevei'al large openings, a central
one which represents the axial canal, and by four (exceptionally
three or five) peripheral ones, which are continued to the whole
length of the column. The other two families have only a central
opening, which is small. Dr. P. H. Carpenter, whom we consulted
as to the functions of these openings, thinks it " very probable
that the periplieral ones represent downward extensions of the
body cavity in which water circulated ; while there was an exha-
lant or outgoing current through the interradial (so-called anal)
opening with which the intestine was related, so that faecal matter
could be carried away from the creature, very much as it is by the
circulation through the dorsal and ventral siphons of a Solen or

The specimens for which Hall (18G2, 15th Rep. N. Y. St. Cab.
Nat. Hist.) proposed the name Ancyrocrinus are evidently
crinoidal stems with four peripheral canals, and as such may
belong to Myrthillocrinus or some other genus of this family.
There are at the lower end four lateral appendages, which in our

^ If the five ventral plates in Haplocrinus and the allied Allagecrinus
were orals, as Dr. P. H. Carpenter suggests, it would follow that these
two genera exceptionally had no interradials, and vary on this point from
all other Palseocrinoidea. To this we had reference on p. 72, but in place
of stating, as we intended, "Carpenter denies the interradials to he present
always in Palseocrinoids," we made the erroneous statement: "C. denies
that interradials are present as a rule in Palaeozoic Crinoids." The correc-
tion was made throughout our own edition, but we discovered the error
too late to rectify it in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy.

80 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [188G.

opinion are a kind of radicular cirrlii. In a specimen from tlie
Canada Survey Museum of Ottawa we found tlie lower face of
the stem covered by a calcareous deposit closing the canals.
This deposit appears to have been of a similar nature to that
which closes the centro-dorsal of Comatula and the nodal stem
joints of the Pentacrini, which, according to Wyville Thomson
and Carpenter (Chall. Rep., pp. 18, 19), occasionally break their
stems at a syz^'gy so as to become free. In the case of Ancyro-
crinus, however, the stem may have become detached and the
free state been the rule in the adult, as those stems with their
anchor attached are found in great abundance.

The bottom plate in the calyx of the Gupressocrinidse and Gas-
terocomidas^ which we take to be a coalesced underbasal disk, has
been described heretofore as representing the upper joint of the
column, because the plate, at least in the adult, is undivided.
It is, however, well known that a fusion of one or more plates
takes place not only among basals, but also among unclerbasals ;
while, on the other hand, the columnar joints, which in most of
the Grinoidea are undivided, sometimes are tri- and quinque-
partite. The plate of Gupressocrinus unquestionably has the
position of the united underbasals ; it forms, like them, a part of
the calyx, as much so as the basals of Dolatocrinus and Stereo-
crinus, in which, as a general rule, the sutures are totally
obliterated, and in which the basal disk resembles most remark-
ably the underbasal disk in this family. It is to be regretted
that neither the central canal nor the angles of the column in
Gupressocrinus give any light on this question, the former being
circular, the column quadrangular ; but it seems to us that the
plate, if really representing a stem-joint, should be quadrangular,
in accordance with the other stem-joints in this genus, and not
pentangular, as we always find it.

The muscle-plates of the Gupressoc7nnidee have a more hori-
zontal position than in the Symbathocrinidse^ and those of
different rays are laterally anchylosed, so as to form an annular
plate with a central opening. There is, besides, an interradial
lateral opening, and five pairs of radial ones. The central space
was probably covered by interradial and summit plates, but these
occupied a comparatively small space of the ventral surface, the
larger portion being covered by the muscle-plates. The inter-
radial opening represents the anus, the outer radial ones the

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 81

axial canals, tlie inner and larger ones are probably ambulacral
openings.

The arms of the Gasterocomidse have similar axial canals as
those of the Gupressocrinidse^ but these face outward, while the
others are directed upward. This is readily explained b}' the
condition of their articular facets, which are lateral, horseshoe-
shaped, and do not extend over the whole width of the plates.
The articular facets of the radials throughout this family,
instead of bending over to the ventral side, stand erect as in
Platycrinus, and their outer ends support the interradials in a
similar manner as in that genus. In accordance with this struc-
ture, it is evident that, if the anal opening was to occupy a posi-
tion corresponding to that of Symbathocrinus and Cupressocrinus,
it had to be located, as it is throughout this group, dorsally
between the upper portions of the radials, which resemble struc-
turally, if not quite functionally, the extensions of the muscle-
plates in the other groups. The radials of the Gasterocomidse
have limb-like extensions, they are simply notched for the ambu-
lacral canal, and their axial opening penetrates the median por-
tions of the plates.

The Larviforniia agree with the Blastoids as to certain condi-
tions of their arm structure (see our notes on Gupressocrinus) ,
and probably possessed hydrospires and hydrospire pores to
connect with the ambulacra ; Gupressocrinus even had similar
pinnules. The arms are simple throughout, but some of the
radials, exceptionally, support two arms. The arms were united
with the radials by strong muscles; but the arm-plates among
each other, so far as known, were suturally connected and moved
in a body.

We give the following definitions of the four families : —

A. Haplocrinid^. Dorsal cup small, composed of basals and
radials ; covered ventrally by five large single interradial plates,
which form a pyramid. These plates are supported upon the
outer ends of two adjoining radials, and are united with one
another, leaving only a small ambulacral opening. There is no
anal plate; the anal aperture, so far as known, penetrates the
upper part of one of the interradials. Column with small
central canal.

B. Symbathocrinid^. Dorsal cup small ; composed of basals
and radials only. The latter are provided with large muscle-

82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

plates, which are connected by suture, except at their inner
ends, where they leave generally a slit-shaped opening. The
muscle-plates extend over the greater part of the ventral surface,
and constitute a more or less elevated pyramid, with an open
space in the centre. The central space is closed by cornpara-
tivel}' small interradials and the summit plates ; the latter, as a
rule, are more extensively developed than in the Haplocrinidse.
The arms are extremely long, closely folded together. They are
composed of quadrangular joints, suturally connected, and
moved upon the radials by means of strong muscles. The anal
opening, where it has been observed, is intermediate between two
muscle-plates. Column round, with a small central canal.

(7. CuPRESsocRiNiD^. Calyx large. Base dicyclic. Theunder-
basals are anchylosed, and form a solid disk, which is succeeded
by five basals. The radials are provided with large muscle-plates,
which are laterally anchylosed, and form a continuous plate cov-
ering a large portion of the bod}^ It stands on a level with the
upper faces of the- radials, and is pierced by the anus and the
ambulacral openings. The arms are simple, closely folded to-
gether, and composed of massive, wide, quadrangular pieces,
which, being connected by suture, moved in a body upon the
radials. Column strong, containing a large central canal sur-
rounded by peripheral ones.

D. Gasterocomid.e. Base dicyclic ; basals and underbasals as
in the Cupressocrinidte. Radials large; their articular facet
lateral, horseshoe-shaped, covering almost the whole outer face of
the plates. They are provided with large axial openings, which
occupy the median portions of the facets, and are notched at their
upper end to pass in the ambulacral canal. The anal opening is
dorsal, placed between two radials, and either succeeds the anal
plate, or this succeeds the opening. The interradial plates are
small occupying the equatorial zone. The oral plate is very
large, excentric, and surrounded by four large proximals, its pos-
terior side resting against the radials. Arms recumbent or widely
divergent.

Family XIII.— HAPLOCRINIDtE.

Under this family we place only the two genera Haplocrinus
and Allagecrinus. Roemer referred to it Haplocrinus and Gocco-
crinus, in which he was followed by Zittel and S. A. Miller.
Schultze, like us, referred Goccocrinus to the Platycrinidse, but

188G.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83

added Triacrinus, which Zittel, Angeliii and Miller made the type
of a distinct family. We admit there are close affinities between
Haplocrinus, Triacrinus and Pisocrinus, but we believe the last
.two are closer allied to Symbathocrinus (see our notes on the
SymbathocrinidiB). Pictet refers to the Haplocrinidae : Haplo-
crinus, Goccocrinus^ Myrtillocrinus^ Ceraviocrinus, Ej)a,ctocrinus
and G aster ocoma ; Dujardin and Hupd: Haplocrinus, Gocco-
crinus, Myrtillocrinus and Stephanocrinus. D'Orbigny arranged
his " Aplocrinidse " between the Pentremitidse and Cupresso-
crinidae.

In Troost's catalogue of 1850 we find the following names:
Haplocrinus granulatus^ H. hemisphericus, H. maximus and H.
ouaZis, which have not been defined, and are species of Pisocrinus
and Triacrinus. Haplocrinus anmilaris and H. monile were
defined by Eichwald from pieces of the column.

HAPLOCRINUS Steininger.

(PI. 5, figs. 1, 2.)

1834. Steininger, Bull. Soc. geol. de France (Ser. i), vol. viii, p. 231.

1844. F. Roemer, Rhein. Uebergangsgebirge, p. 63.

1849. Steininger, Versteinerungen der Eifel, p. 20.

1853. Steininger, Geognostische Beschr. d. Eifel, p. 36.

1852. Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petrefactenkunde, p. 624.

1855. J. Mtiller, Verb, naturh. Verein, Jahrg. xii, p. 21.

1855. F. Roemer, Lethaea Geogn. 1855 (Ausg. 3), p. 260.

1857. Pictet, Traite de Paleont., iv, p. 308.

1862. Dujardin & Ilupe, Hist, natur. des Zoophytes Ecliin., p. 105.

1862. Hall, 15th Rep. N. Y. St. Cab. Nat. Hist, p. 143.

1866. Scbultze, Echin. Eifel Kalk., p. 103.

1868. De Koninck, Bull. d. I'Acad. Roy. d. Belg. (Ser. 2), Tome iii (Extr.

p. 63).
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palseont., i, p. 347.

1882. Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petrefactenkunde (Ausg. 3), p. 964.
1885. P. H. Carpenter, Chall. Rep. Crinoidea, p. 158, etc.

Syn. Eugeniacrinites Goldfuss (in part), 1826, Petref. Germ, i,
p. 213.

Syn. Aplocrinus d'Orbigny, Prodr. i, p. 102.

Syn. (?) DimorpJiocrinus d'Orbigny (Zittel).

The first species of this genus was described by Goldfuss under
Eugeniacrinites mespiliformis. Goldfuss did not know the con-
struction of the plates, nor did Steininger who described the
same species under Haplocrinus spaeroideus. F. Roemer, in 1844,
gave a good description of the plates, but his way of interpreting

84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

them was rather peculiar. According to his diagnosis, the calj'x
of Haplocrinus is composed of five basals. These, as he states,
alternate with five " para-basals," of which three are separated
from the basals by intervening plates (Costalglieder). H&
states further that, placed upon the sutures of two adjoining
" para-basals," there are five simple arms, which in their closed
condition form a pentamerous " Scheitelpjn-amide." If it were
true that the latter plates, which at their lateral union form con-
spicuous grooves, were arras, this Crinoid would have no radials,
and the basals would be radially disposed, contrarj^ to the funda-
mental rules of the class. The ventral pyramid had been errone-
ously described by Goldfuss as composed of five series of eight
to ten pieces longitudinally arranged, and it was this, likely,
which misled Roemer. The fact, however, is that the ventral
surface is covered by five single trigonal pieces, arranged alter-
nately with the upper ring of plates in the dorsal cup, and that
the latter plates, as Goldfuss correctly stated, are provided with
an articular facet upon which the arms moved. This was con-
firmed by Miiller's observation, who, in 1855, discovered in one of
his specimens, resting upon the facet, a small brachial.

Allman was the first writer who undertook to homologize the
five ventral plates of Haplocrinus, Goccocrinus and Stephanocri-
nus with the orals of recent Crinoids. It seems, however, that he
was not aware of Miiller's discover}^ of arm joints, for he supposed
that all those genera possessed recumbent ambulacra. A similar
view was held by d'Orbigny, Schultze calls the ventral plates
" interradiale Pyramidenstiicke." Zittel describes the " Kelch-
decke " to be composed of " fiinf grossen, im Centrum zusammen-
stossenden, dreieckigen Oral-platten, welche eine Pyramide bilden,
und zwischen sich fiinf breite, gerade, durch die abgeschragten
Seitenflachen begrenzte,nach unten geschlossene, nach oben oflfene
Ambulacralfurchen bilden." There is nothing to confirm this
view, and, in fact, we do not know how this could have been
possible. It is difficult to see what office the so-called " open
ambulacral groove " could have had, especially if Haplocrinus
possessed arms, as Prof. Zittel admits. The grooves, evidently,
are mere compartments for the reception of the arms, and served
for their protection. Carpenter agrees with Zittel that the ven-
tral plates are orals, but opposes his open ambulacra. He regards
the o-enus to be " permanently in the condition of a Pentacrinoid
larva with a closed tentacular vestibule." We fully agree with

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 85

liim that Haplocrinus is a persistent larval form, but do not
understand how the five large plates, which occupy almost the
entire ventral surface, and as much as one-half of the whole test,
possibly can represent the orals in a Paloeocrinoid, as all other
genera of this group in which the ventral covering has been
observed, have largely developed interradials, and these, whether
composed of one or a series of plates, extend up invariably to a
comparatively small area surrounding the peristome. We, there-
fore, regard the small central piece as the homologue of the orals,
and not the five large plates which we take to be interradials.

The basals of Haplocrinus were described by Dujardin and
Hupe to be composed of three pieces in place of five. The three
small plates alternating with the basals, the " Costalglieder " of
Roemer, which are radial in position and support three of the
arm-bearing plates, were called b^' Schultze " parabasalia," by De
Koninck " subradials," while Miiller, Pictet and Zittel called them
"first radial plates." The term parabasals was used by Schultze
for basals in dicyclic Crinoids, and, therefore, cannot be applied
to radial plates, neither can the name " subradials," as also this
term has been used in the same sense. We regard the three plates
as representing mere sections of the radials, which, jointly with
the arm-bearing part above, are equivalent to one of the undi-
vided radials of the other two rays.

Generic Diagnosis Of very small size. Form of calyx sub-
globose, sometimes biturbinate, extending almost over the whole
A^entral surface. The summit pieces are represented only by a
small oral plate.

Basals five, small, pentagonal, forming a shallow cup with
slightly acute angles. Radials very irregular, two of them
consisting of single pieces, the other three of two plates each,
connected by suture. The two single plates, which agree in
size — but not in form — with the compound ones, belong to the
anterior ray and left postero-lateral one ; they are heptagonal
and almost of the same form and size. The three compound
ones difl"er from one another ; two of the lower segments are pen-
tagonal, that of the right anterior ray hexagonal, its left lateral
face being angular. The upper segments are quadrangular,
except the one of the right postero-lateral ray, of which the
lower corner is slightly truncated. The articular faces form a
straight line, and occupy about one-third the width of the radials.
They enter deeply the upper surface of the plates, and form at

80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

each side of them a rather conspicuous upright projection, which
is truncated at the upper face. These projections are laterally
connected in pairs, and eacli pair supports a large interradial
plate, which almost covers the whole ventral surface. The five
interradials join with one another; they are subtrigonal, their
angles truncated ; the upper angle so as to admit a small oral
plate, the other two to make space for the articular facet. The
sides of the plates along their suture line are beveled, thereby
producing along the suture line, in a radial direction, a deep
groove, which, evidently, was occupied by the arms in their
closed condition. Beneath these grooves there is an opening in
the test, at which the ambulacra enter the cal3'x. The openings
contain along their median line the ambulacral passage, which is
oval in form. At each side of it there is apparently another
opening, which Schultze described as " kleine grubenartige Ver-
tiefungen," whose functions we cannot understand unless they
are in connection with the respiratory apparatus. There is no
anal plate ; the anal opening is small, and penetrates the upper
part of the interradials close to the oral plate.

The arms are imperfectly known, but they probably were long,
simple, and composed of long joints, like those of the Larvi-
formia generally. The articulation upon the radials was by
muscles, the axial canals being plainly visible. Column cylin-
drical.

Geological Position^ etc.—Haplocrinus seems to have had a
wide vertical range, three species being from the Devonian, the
fourth one, according to De Koninck, from the Carboniferous (?).

The following species have been described : —

1862. Haplocrinus clio Hall, 15th Rep, N. York State Cab. Nat. Ilust., p. 14:'., PI. 1,
figs. 5-9. — -Maroellus Shale. Onondago Co., N. Y.

1868. H. granatum De Koninck, Bull. d. I'Acad. Roy. de Belg. (Ser. 2), Tome iii,
No. 4, PI. 5, figs. 6-10.— (?) Mountain limcst. Eolland, Yorksh., England.

1826. H. mespiliformis (Goldfuss), Eugeniacrinites mespiliformis, Petref. Germ.,
i, p. 2\?>, PI. 64, fig. 6. — Haplocrinus spaeroideus, 1834, Steininger, Bull.
Soc. Geol. de Prance, Tome viii, p. 2:i2. — Haplocrinus mespiliformis F.
Roemer, 1844, Rhein. Uebergangsgeb., p. 16; also Leth. Geogn., 1855
(Ausg. .3), p. 26L— Pictet, 1857, Traite de Pal6ont., iv, PI. c, fig. 2.— Bronn,
1860, Klassen d. Thierreichs (Actinozoa), PI. 28, fig. 4 A-C— Dujardin and
Ilupe, 1862, Hist. Nat. des Zoophytes Echinod., p. 105, PI. 5, fig. 9.—
Schultze, 1866, Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 104, PL 12, figs. 10, 11.— Devonian.
Eifel, Germany.

1844. H. stellaris Roemer, Rhein. Uebergangsgeb., p. 6;'., PI. ?>, fig. 5 ; also Sand-
berger, Jahrbuch,.1845, p. 777. — Roemer, 1855, Lethaea Geogn. (Ausg. 3),
p. 261. — Devonian. Nassau, Germany.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. ST

ALLAGECRINUS Ether. & Carp.

1881. Ann. and ]\rag. Nat. Hist. (April), pp. 281-298.

1884. De Loriol, Paleont. Francaise (Serie i), Tome xi, p. 46.

Allagecrinus was made by Etheridge and Carpenter the type
of a distinct family, and this was accepted by De Loriol. In
our opinion it is either a Haploerinoid or no Palaeocrinoid at all.
If the five ventral plates, as E. and C. assert, are orals, which in
the younger specimens extended to the radials, closing in the
tentacular vestibule, but in their subsequent stages were "rela-
tively carried inwards, away from the radials, and separated
from them by perisome," we should regard Allagecrinus a
Neocrinoid. If, however, it is a Palaeocrinoid, we think the five
ventral plates are interradials, which in the young Crinoid were
closed, and gradually opened out so as to expose the summit
plates. In this case, Allagecrinus was in its earlier life morpho-
logically in a similar condition as Haplocrinus^ but may have
attained in the adult a somewhat higher degree of development.

Messrs. Etheridge and Carpenter state on p. 284 of their paper
on Allagecrinus^ that the mouth in the larger specimens could
not have been " roofed over or closed by a dome or vault of any
kind," for " if such a structure had existed within the circle of
radial plates, it would assuredly have been preserved." To this
we reply, that the summit structure of Symbathocrinus which is
comparatively solid was discovered after hundreds of the most
perfect specimens had been examined, and until then it was
regarded as membranous ; the same was the case in Cyathocrinus.
Allagecrinus in its more advanced stages, may have attained the
conditions of Haplocrinus or Symbathocrinus, or even of Cyatho-
crinus^ and passed perhaps through all those phases successively;
but there is not the least evidence that the Scheitelplatten in any
Palfeocrinoid were carried inward by perisome as in the Neo-
crinoidea.

The same writers remark on p. 286, that " in none of the
smaller specimens is there Siny trace of an anal opening, either
directly piercing an oral plate, or at the margin of the dome
between the orals and radials." And they state further, that
" the central end of one or more of the former may be marked
by tubercles, but we cannot suggest any explanation of these."
If E. and C. had regarded these tubercles as mere ornamentations,
they certainly would have stated so. We judge from their figs.

88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

5 and Y 6, on PI. xvi, that one of the tubercles was larger than
the others. The larger one may have been pierced by the anal
opening, for it occupies relatively the same position as the anal
opening in Haplocrinus.

We cannot agree with Etheridge and Carpenter that Poterio-
crinus isacobus Austin, which we referred (Rev. I, p. 113) to
Scaphiocrinus, is an Allagecrinus. The little cup, which Austin
figured on PI. 8, fig. 4, of his Monograph, is evidently a ring of
underbasals, with a few stem-joints attached to it, and not basals.
To judge from the figures, there is in our mind scarcel}'' a doubt
that, in some way or another, the caly:s. in the type-specimen
became detached, that the basals and radials were lost, and the
underbasals temporarily fastened to the arms for safe-keeping.
Similar detached cups are frequently found in the Burlington
limestone, and we doubt if there will ever be found a species of
Allagecrinus with branching arms.

Generic Diagnosis. — Crinoid minute. Calyx p^'riform or
cylindro-conical. The dorsal cup composed of two rings of five
plates each ; the ventral surface, so far as known, of five single
pieces. There are no anal plates, neither dorsally nor ventrall3^

Basals five ; suture-lines rarely visible. Radials five, elongate,
variable in form and size ; they are either axillaries and support two
simple arms, or truncate above and bear a single arm, but neither
one of them is branching ; when axillaries, they are considerably
wider. The articular facets for the attachment of the arms are
large and distinct, and nearly horizontal in position, so as to
give a projecting lip-like appearance to the upper and outer
edges of the radials. There is a transverse articular ridge
around the opening of the central canal, which is large. The
arms are strong, cylindrical, and probably without pinnules.
The first arm-joint is much shorter than the others, cuboidal,
with a nearly circular distal face, the succeeding ones elongate,
three and four times as wide as high.

The construction of the ventral surface is only known in the
younger specimens, in which it consists of five interradial plates,
which form a closed pyramid, the relative size of which is
greater the smaller the specimen. The plates are trigonal, but
the lower angles slightl}^ truncate to form the arm-opening. In
the smaller specimens, the plates are so closely united, that there

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF I'HILADELPHIA. 89

is no trace of sutures between them ; but the sutures gradually
become more marked, and turn in the larger ones into rather
distinct grooves. No central plate has been observed as in
Haplocrinus, and nothing is known of the ventral surface in any
of the larger specimens. Column short, of vermiform appear-
ance ; composed of small, low, rounded joints, with a circular
central canal.

Geological Position, etc. — Restricted, so far as known, to the
top of the Carboniferous limestone of Scotland and America.

1881. Allagecrinus Austin! Ether, and Carp. Type of the genus. Ann. and Mag.,

vol. vii, p. 289, Pts. 15 and 16. — Upper Carboniferous limestone of Scotland.

1882. A. Carpenteri Wachsm., Bull. I, State Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 40; also Geol. Rep.

Illinois, vol. vii, p. 341, PI. 29, fig. 14. — Kaskaskia group. Monroe Co., 111.

Family XIV.-SYMBATHOCRINID^, W. and Sp.

We refer to this family the genera : Symbathocrinus^ Phimo-
crinus, Stylocriniis, Stortingocrinus, Pisocrinus, Triacrinus and
Lageniocrinus. Zittel made of these genera two families ; he
placed Symbathocrinus, Phimocrinus and Lageniocrinus, to which
he added Cupressocrinus, under the ^^ Cupressocrinidae,^^ and
Pisocrinus, Triacrinus, with Catillocrinus, under the "Piso-
crinidae.^'' These groups were adopted by De Loriol and S. A.
Miller. We willingl}'- admit that Cupressocrinus agrees with
Symbathocrinus and Phimocrinus very closely in the mode of
articulation and in the arm structure ; but they differ essentially
in other points. Cupressocrinus has a large dorsal cup, basals and
underbasals, and three or four large peripheral canals, which fol-
low the column. Nothing of this has been found either in Sym-
bathocrinus or Phimocrinus, which both have a very small dorsal
cup, and a small central opening along the column. After sepa-
rating Cupressocrinus, and making Symbathocrinus the type of
the group, it is extremely difficult to establish family distinctions
between Symbathocrinus and Zittel's Pisocrinidae. Not even the
irregularity in the construction of the calyx will hold good, as
also in Symbathocrinus the symmetry is disturbed by the
presence of an anal plate. Gatillocrinus, which also had been
identified with these groups, has a ventral sac, and has been
referred by us to the Fistulata.

7

90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

SYMBATHOCRINUS Phillips.

(PI. 4, figs. 8 to 11, and PI. 5, figs. 12 to 14.)

183G. Phillips, Geol. Yorksh., Pt. ii, p. 20G.

1843. Austin (in part), Monogr, Rec. and Foss. Crin., p. 93.

1850. D'Orbigny, Prodrome de Paleont., i, p. 156.

1853. Owen and Shumard, Geol. Surv. la., Wise, and Minns., p. 597.

1854. McCoy, Syn. Brit. Palaeoz. Toss.

1858. Hall, Geol. Rep. Iowa, Vol. i, Pt. ii, p. 559.
1868, Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 324.
1873. Meek and Worthen, Geol. Rep. 111., Vol. v, pp. 324 and 437.
1875. Meek and Worthen, Geol. Rep. 111., Vol. vi, p. 514.

1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palaeontologie, i, p. 349.

1880. Wetherby, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist. (Extr., p. 7).

Not SymbatJiocrinus Roemer 1855, Mi'iUer 1855, Schultze 1866 =
Stylocrinus Sandberger.

The genus Symbathocrinus, as it is now recognized, contains
two distinct generic types. The one which occurs in the Car-
boniferous and upper Devonian has a large anal plate, and this
supports a long tube which extends to nearly the whole length
of the arms. The other form, which is restricted to the lower
Devonian, has no anal plate, nor does it show an anal opening.
The Carboniferous form will be recognized by us as Symbatho-
crinus, the other as Stylocrinus.

When Phillips proposed the name Sijmbathocrinus he gave no
description, he only stated that the " pelvis " was " anchylosed."
The two Austins described Phillips' species, but they also took
the base to be undivided, and nothing was said by them about an
anal plate, although they indicated it in one of their figures
(Monograph, PI. 12, fig. 4 6). Their fig. 4 a is a totally different
thing, and represents either a Graphiocrinus or Scytalocrinus.
Owen and Shumard discovered the base of Symbathocrinus to be
tripartite, and Prof. Hall was the first to desci'ibe the anal plate.
The muscle-plate was taken by Zittel, and formerly by us, for a
so-called consolidating apparatus, like the similar structure in
Cupressocrinus, and homologous with the oral plates. It was
also the general belief that the central space was not closed, and
represented the mouth.

Symbathocrinus granulatus and S. Tennessece Troost are cata-
logue names, S. tabulatus (Goldfass) a Scytalocrinus, and S.
tennesseensis E-oemer a Pisocrinus.

Qeneric Diagnosis. — Calyx small. Dorsal cup obconical or

1886.J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91

basin-shaped. Basals three, forming a shallow cup, which is
slightly excavated for the reception of the column. They are
composed of two larger equal pieces which are pentangular, and
a smaller quadrangular one ; the latter placed to the left of the
anterior interradius as in Platycrinus.

Radials nearly equal, subquadrangular ; the basi-radial suture
sligbtl}^ angular ; width much wider above than below. Their
upper side forms a straight, horizontal line, except at the right
postero-lateral radial, of which the left upper end is sloped off
for the reception of an anal piece. The anal plate rests com-
pletely upon this one radial, occupying about one-fourth of its
upper width. The radials are provided with large articular facets,
which, extending inwards and upwards, form jointly at the ventral
side of the calyx a sharply angular pyramid with re-entering
angles. The upper end of this pyramid is truncated, and con-
tains a good-sized opening in the centre, which in perfect speci-
mens is completely covered by the interradial and summit plates.
The lateral margins of the facets meet at their lower ends, except
at the azygous side, where they are separated by the anal plate ;
along their upper ends, however, they stand apart, and form
rather conspicuous clefts. Each facet is divided vertically by a
narrow sinus, ^ and the two halves of the plates or the limbs, as
they might be called, at their upper end form an ambulacral
opening.

The interradials are unusually small, wider than high ; those
at the four regular sides resting against the upper face of two
limbs of adjoining radials. The number of interradials at the
azygous side cannot be ascertained in our specimens, as the parts
connecting the anal plate with the ventral surface of the calyx
were not preserved. The anal plate stands in line with the first
brachial, it has the same height but not its width, and is suc-
ceeded by a slender tube which follows the whole length of the
arms. Hall has figured a second anal plate, triangular in form ;
this, however, constitutes the lower portion of the first plate of
the tube, which always takes a sharp inward turn, leaving only a
small triangular space exposed externally between the arms.
The tube is composed of five rows of quadrangular, rather

1 These sinuses, wtiicli look somewhat like suture lines, give to the
muscle plates the appearance of representing separate pieces, interradially
disposed, and this led us at first to regard them as oral plates.

92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

delicate jDlates, which are bent longitudinally so as to form an
angle, and each plate extends to, and forms a part of, two of its
sides. The interradials alternate with radial dome plates, which
are even smaller, angular above.

The summit is closed by the proximals and oral plate, all of
which are much larger than the interradials. The proximals con-
sist of four comparatively large, nodose plates, which enclose
toward the azygous side three scarcely convex, smaller ones.
The oral plate is the largest piece of the ventral side, it forms
an inverted cup, containing radiating grooves along the inner
floor, which lodged the ambulacra.

Arms five, long, simple; closely folded together and forming a
narrow, cylindrical body. They are composed of a large number
of quadrangular joints, with parallel sutures, and are provided
with a deep ventral furrow, but apparently have no pinnules.
The first brachial differs somewhat in form from the others ; it is
always higher, extending to the level of the oral plate ; also wider,
but not quite as deep. Its proximal face is provided with a
muscular appendage, which corresponds with that of the radials;
its distal end, however, shows neither ridge nor fossae. The
higher brachials in all probability were united by suture, and the
arms moved as a body upon the radials. The articular faces of
the latter are provided near their outer margin with a transverse
ridge (PI. 5, figs. 12, 13), extending to the whole width of the
plate, with a transverse axial canal. The ventral furrow is deep,
has a longitudinal groove along the inner floor, and rib-like pro-
jections alternating with grooves along the inner walls. The
sides of the furrow are lined by two rows of short transverse
side-pieces — about eight to each side of the arm joint — alternately
arranged, which leave a zigzag median opening along the whole
length of the arms. There are also lateral pores, one to every
side-piece, and these connect with, and form the upper end of,
the lateral furrows at the inner walls of the arm grooves to which
we alluded. The lateral faces of the arm joints are provided
along their outer side with shallow slanting grooves (PI. 5, figs.
12, 13), and these agree in number with the pores. It seems to
us very probable that, b}' means of these grooves, the ventral
furrow was brought in contact with the surrounding element, as
the arms in this genus are so closely folded together, that with-
out them no communication was possible.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 93

Column long, cylindrical ; with small central canal.

Geological Position, etc. — Symbathocrinus, commenced in the
Hamilton group, attained its greatest abundance in the two Bur-
lington formations, and disappeared at the termination of the
Keokuk period.

1869. Symbathocrinus brevis Meek & Worthcn, Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p.

68; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vol. v, p. 439, PL ii, fig. 6.— Lower Burlington

limestone, Burlington, Iowa.
1836. S. conicus Phillips, Geol. Yorkshire, p. 206, PI. 4, figs. 12, 13; Austin, Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist., x, p. 108; also Monog. Rec. and Foss. Grin., p. 93, PI. 11,

figs. 5 &, c (not 5 a, which is a Poteriocrinoid); d'Orbigny, 1850, Prodr. i, p.

156; McCoy, 1854, Syn. Brit. Palaeoz. Foss., p. 118.— Mountain limest.,

Ireland and England.
1852. S. dentatus Owen & Shuin., Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (new sen), vol. ii, p.

93, PI. II, fig. 7; also 1852, Geol. Rep. Iowa, Wise, and Minnesota, p. 597,

PI. 5 R, figs. 7 « b. — Upper Burlington limest., Burlington, Iowa.
1880. S. granuliferus Wetherby, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist., PI. 16, figs. 3, 3 a.

— Kinderhook gr., Kentucky.
1858. S. matutinus Hall, Geol. Rep. Iowa, vol. i, p. 483, PI. i, fig. 2. — Hamilton gr.,

New Buffalo, Iowa.

1860. S. Oweni Hall, 13th Rep. N. York St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 111.— Kinderhook

gr., Rockford, Indiana.

1861. S. papillatus Hall, Descr. New Crin. (Prelim. Notice), p. 18. — Upper Burling-

ton limestone, Burlington (a mere variety of S. dentatus).

1865. S. robustus Shumard, Trans. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., vol. ii (Palaeozoic Foss.

America), p. 397. — Meek and Worthen, 1885, Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 514,
PI. 29, fig. 4. — Keokuk limestone. Button-Mould Knob, Ky., and Sulphur
Springs, near Nashville, Tenn.

1858. S. Swallovi Hall, Geol. Rep. Iowa, vol. i, Pt. II, p. 672, PI. 17, figs. 8 and 9.—

(?) St. Louis limestone. Missouri.
1869. S, WachsmutM Meek and Worthen (not 1866== Catillocrinus Wacbsmuthi),
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 67 ; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, v, p. 437, PI. 2,
fig. .5. — Lower Burlington limestone. Burlington, Iowa.

1859. S. Wortheni Hall, Geol. Rep. Iowa, vol. i, Pt. ii, p. 560, PL 9, fig. 9.— Upper

Burlington limestone. Burlington, Iowa.

PHIMOCRINUS Schultze.

1866. Schultze, Monogr. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 29.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palaeoutologie, i, p. 350.

1882. Oehlei-t, BuU. Soc. Geol. de France, Ser. 3, x, p. 353.

Phimocrinus agrees almost completely with Symbathocrinus,
but it has five basals in place of three. It also has similar arti-
cular facets, which, in a like manner, form a stelliform pyramid,
of which, however, the summit plates have not been observed.
The anal opening is situated between two muscle-plates, and

94 PROCEEDTNQS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

evidently was extended into a tube, as in Symbathocrinus. The
form of the arms is not known. Column pentagonal, with a
small pentalobate central canal.

Geological Position, etc. — Phimocrinus is restricted to the
lower part of the Devonian.

1882. Phimocrinus Jouberti Oehlert, Bull, de la Soc. G^ol. de France, Ser. 3, tome

X, p. .352, PI. 8, fig. 1. — Devonian. Sabr6, France.
1866. Ph. laevis, Schultze (Type of the genus), Monogr. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 29,

PI. 3, fig. 6. — Devonian. Eifel, Germany.
1866. Ph. quinquangularis Schultze, Monogr. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 30, PI. 3, fig. 7.

— Devonian. Eifel, Germany.

STYLOCRINUS Sandberger.

(Re-defined by "W". and Sp.)

1850. Versteinerungen Nassau's, p. 400.

Syn. Platycrinus (partim) Goldfuss, 1838. Nova Acta Leop. XIX,
i, p. 345 ; also Quenstedt, 1852, Handb. d, Petrefactenk., Ed. 1,
p. 618.
Syn. Symbathocrinus (partim) Miiller, 1855, Verb, naturb. Verein
fiir Rbeinlande, xii, p. 19 ; also Neue Ecbin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 257 ;
Scbultze, 1866, Monogr. Eifl. Kalk ., p. 26 ; Zittel, 1879, Handb.
d. Palseont., i, p. 349.

Stylocrinus has been generally regarded as identical with
Symbathocrinus, and Sandberger, when he proposed the name,
failed to point out the generic differences. He applied the name
to a species from Vilmar, which afterwards was found to be
specifically identical with " Symbathocrinus " tabulatus, from the
Eifel. The absence of an anal plate, and even of an anal opening in
the Eifel species, was overlooked or disregarded by all European
writers. Zittel described the ventral side of Symbathocrinus as
plated, and containing an anal tube reaching to the tips of the
arms ; he also spoke of oral plates, which were said to form
beneath the vault a concealed consolidating apparatus. This
description, incorrect as it is, was evidently made from the
Carboniferous form, as in the Eifel species nothing is known of
the calyx beyond the radials. In Symbathocrinus the anal
opening is located between two of the muscle-plates ; but in the
Eifel species, which we make the type of Stylocrinus, the mus-
cular appendages of all the radials are suturally united. This
suggests that the opening probably penetrated the interradials, as
in Haplocrinus, and it may have had, like that genus, only an
oral plate and no proximals.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 95

In the construction of the dorsal cup, Stylocrinus agrees with
Symbathocrinus. The two genera, however, differ in the articular
extensions of their radials, which extend only inward, not
upward, and form a level with the outer edges of the radials.
The arms are composed of quadrangular joints, with parallel
sutures, and they possess a deep ventral furrow. The column is
circular, and consists of thick joints, those at the upper end
being comparatively strong, but they are reduced very soon to
less than one half of their greatest width.

The only known species is : —

*1838. Stylocrinus tabulatus (Goldf.), Platycrinus tabulatus, Nova Acta. Leopold.

xix, i, p. 345. Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petrefactenk. (Ed. 1), p. 618, PL 54,

fig. 25.— Symbathocrinus tabulatus, Miiller, 1855, Verb, naturh. Verein f.

Rheinl. xii, p. 19, PI. i, figs. 4, 5 ; Schultze, 1866, Monogr. Eifl. Kalk., p.

27, PI. 3, figs. 4, 5. — Devonian. Eifel, Germany.
Var. alta Miiller, Verein f. Rheinl. xii, PI. 4, fig. 5; Schultze Monogr., PL 3,

fig. 4.
Var. depressa Miiller, ibid., PI. 4, fig. 4; Schultze, ibid., PI. 3, fig. 5.
Si/n. Platycrinus laevigatus Goldf.; P. alutaceus, P. scrobiculatus, P. nodu-

losus. — These names were applied by Goldfuss to specimens in the Museum

of Bonn to mere variations of Stylocrinus tabulatus, but have never been

published (Schultze).
Syn. Stylocrinus scaber Sandberger, Versteinerungen Nassau's, p. 400, PI.

35, fig. 12.
Syn. Platycrinus gerolsteiniensis Steininger, Geogn. Beschreib. d. Eifel,

p. 37.

STORTINGOCRINUS Schultze.

1866. Monogr. Echin, Eifl. Kalk., p. 69.

Syn. Platycrinus (partim), Goldfuss and Wirthgen and Zeiler.

Stortingocrinus agrees in the lower portions of its calyx with
Platycrinus^ to which it was referred by Goldfuss and Miiller.
That it does not belong to the Camarata, and hence is no Platy-
crinoid, is shown by the mode of articulation, which is like that
of HaplociHnus, and by the form of the radials, which, in the
place of being notched, are extended upward, and support upon
their limbs a sing-le interradial as those of the Blastoids.

Generic Diagnosis. — Basals three, unequal; two of them twice
the size of the third one, which is rhomboidal. Radials large,
subquadrangular ; their articular facets deeply inserted, forming
a depression with a slightly concave upper face. Their lateral
margins of adjoining radials are connected by suture, they extend

96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

upwards and inwards, forming partitions between the arm bases,
leaving but a small space for the reception of the arms.

Column round, with a stellate central canal, its angles directed
radially.

Geological Position, etc. Stortingocrinus is restricted, so far
as known, to the lower beds of the Devonian of Europe.

*1838. Stortingocrinus decagonus (Goldfuss) Platycrinus decagonus, Nova Acta
Ac. Leopold, xix, i, p. 345.— Schultze, Platycrinus (Stortingocrinus) deca-
gonus; Monogr. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 70, PI. 10. — Devonian. Eifel,
Germany.

*1S55. St. fritillus, (Wirthgen and Zeiler), Type of the genus. Platycrinus fritillus,
Verb, naturh. Verein f. Rheinl., Jahrg. xii (n. sen), p. 80, PI. 10, figs, i and
5. — Schultze, Platycrinus (Stortingocrinus) fritillus, Mon. Echin. Eifl.
Kalk., p. 69, PI. 10, figs. 8-8 f.— Devonian. Eifel, Germany.
Syn. Platycrinus asper, P. pusillus, P. rugosus, P. scobiculatus and P.
scaber Goldfuss, and P. minutus Schurr.

*1866. St. trifidus (Schultze), Platycr. (Stortingocr.) trifidus, Monogr. Echin. Eifl.
Kalk., p. 70, PI. 10, figs. 8a-g. — Devonian. Eifel, Germany.

PISOCRINTJS De Koninck.

1858, De Koninck. Bull, de 1' Acad. Roy. de Belgique (Ser. 2), iv, p. 104.

1873. Salter, Cat, Cambr. Museum, p. 128.

1879. Handb. d. Palseontologie i, p. 348.

18T8, Angelin, Iconogr. Crin. Suec, p. 20,

1879. S. A. Miller, Joum. Cincin. Soc. Nat, Hist. (July).

Syn, Symbathocrinus (in part), F, Roemer, Silur. Fauna, "West

Tenn., p. 55,
Syn. (?) Triacrimts, Miinster, 1839 (in part), Beitrage zur Petre-

factenkunde, p, 4.
Syn, Symhathocrinus (in part), Roemer, 1860, Silur,, Fauna West.
Tennessee, p, 55.

Pisocrinus is closely allied to Triacrinus, but the latter is said
to have three basals; Pisocrm us has five. The arrangement of
the other calyx plates is identical, and also the arm structure.
Schultze, who observed in the Eifel species only three basals,
postulated from this that the Silurian species from Sweden, for
which De Koninck had established the genus Pisocrinus, also
consisted of but three plates, Angelin, who succeeded Schultze,
and who had at his command the extensive collections of the
Stockholm Museum, describes the genus with five basals, and all
his figures show five plates. We also examined from the same
horizon in America several hundred specimens of at least three
species from Western Tennessee, all of which have five basals and

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 97

not three ; but in one of those species the basals are so small that
they were almost completely covered by the column, and it appears
as if the sutures between the plates of the second ring, of which
only three touch the basals, were the sutures between the plates
of the first ring. A similar structure is found in Pisocrinus
pilula (Iconogr., PL 4, fig. 4 6), a species which in its general
aspect is closely allied to Triacrinus depressus MUller. We do
not pretend to say, however, that this species had five basals ; it
is very possible that two of these plates became anchylosed, and
that the genus made its reappearance in the Devonian with only
three basals.

Generic Diagnosis. — Calyx in its general aspect clove-shaped,
its form subconical, sometimes pyriform.

Basals five, unequal; three of them larger and trapezoidal, the
two smaller ones trigonal, which combined form an irregularly
triangular cup.

The radials are extremely irregular, only the two anterolateral
ones touching the basals. These two are more than twice as
large as the other three plates ; they are hexagonal, and have the
same form and size. The anterior radial is triangular, with con-
vex sides, and rests with its lower angle half way between the
two larger ones. At the posterior side, the basals do not support
a radial, but are succeeded by a pentangular azygous plate, which
shares with the two large radials an equal part. The plate has
the form of an axillary, is broadly truncate below, with short
lateral faces, and is sharply angular above. The two postero-
lateral radials meet above the azygous plate, resting upon its
sloping upper sides, and against the upper half of the two larger
radials. Their width is identical with that of the larger ones,
and in a ventral aspect the radials appear to be perfectly
sj^mmetrical.

Pisocrinus has similar articular appendages as Symhathocrinus,
which cover a good part of the ventral surface. The articula-
tion, however, does not occup}' the whole width of the radials;
there is at each side of the plates an upright extension, which
together with that of adjoining radials produces interradially,
between the arms, a conspicuous projection, similar to that of
Haplocrinus^'but more prominent. The construction of the ven-
tral side is not known, the space beyond the articular faces is

98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

open in all onr specimens, but probably was covered in a similar
manner as in Si/mbathocrinus.

The arniJ^ are long, simple, rounded along the outer face, and
less closely fokled than in SinnbotJiocrinus. They are composed
of extremely long, single joints with parallel upper and lower
faces. The column is circular and has a stellate central canal.

Geological Positioyi, etc. — Pisoci-imis is restricted to the Upper
Silurian, and occurs in Europe and America.

Pisoci'inus Dixoni Troost is a catalogue name.

1S78. Pisoorinus flagellifer Angclin, loonogr. Crin. Suec, p. 21, PI. 4, figs. 1 a-e.

— Upper Silur., Gothland, Sweden.
1S7P. P. gemmiformis ?. A. Miller. Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist. (,July), PI. 9,

lii;s. (i (!-<-. — Niagara gr.. Kiply Co., Indiana.
1S7S, P. oUula Angelin, Iconogr. Crin. Suec., p. 21, PI. 4, figs. 4 a-rf.— Upper Silu-
rian, llothland, Sweden.
ISoS. P. ornatus I>e Konim-k. Hull, de TAcad. Roy. de Bolg. (Ser. 2), Tome 4 (Extr.

p. 27), PI. 2, figs. 12, 13.— Upper Silurian, Dudley, England.
ISoS. P. pilula De Koninek (Type of the genus). Bull, de I'Aoad. Koy. de Belg.

^Ser. 2), Tome 4 (Extr. p. 2ti), p. lOt^, figs. S-11 : Angelin, lS7v^, loonogr.

Crin. Suec.. p. 21, PI. 4, figs. 4 <i, ft.— Upper Silurian, Dudley, England,

and l<othland, Sweden.
1S7S. P. pooillum Angelin, loonogr. Crin. Sueo., p. 21, PI. 4, figs. :i, ."^ <i. — Upper

Silurian, Gothland, Sweden.
*lSiUi. P. tenuesseensis (Koouier). Symbathoorinus tennesseensis. Silur. Fauna,

West. reuu.,p. .'>'>, PI. 4, figs. t> o. />. — Niagara gr. Dooatur Co., Teun.

TRIACRINUS Miinster.

ISr^O. 3Tunstor, Boitnige ?.. Potrefiu-tonk., p. 8.
1S50. D'Orbigny, Prodr. do Valeont., i, p. 104.
1866. Schnltze, Monogr. Eehin. Eifel Kalk., p. 106.
1879. Zittol, llaudb. d. Pahvont., i, p. 348.

Syn. 2'richocnnus Miillor. ^Monatsbor. ISoO. p. 3o4., and Xouo Ecbin.
d. Eitl. Kalk., p. 04?.

Triacrinus ditVer^s from Pisocrinus in having three basals in
place of five, in all other eharaoters the two forms are identical.
"We have some doubt whether the few species which have been
referred to TriacHnus have not really five basals instead of
three. In this case the genus would take the name Pisocrinus
and not 'Triacnnus, although the latter has priority. Miinster
described the base as tripartite, making this the name-giving
character, and Pe Koninok, who found five basals in his species,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 99

was in our opinion perfectly justified in establishing for it a new
genus.

1857. Triacrinus altus (Muller), Tricliocriinis altus, Neue Echin. Eifl. Kalk.. p. 249,

PI. 2, figs. S-11.— Schultze, 1SG6, Triacrinus altus, Echinod. Eifl. Kalk., p.

109, PI. 12, fig. 9. — Devonian. Eifel, Germany.
1857. T. depressus (Muller), Trichocrinus depressus, Xeue Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 249,

PI. 2, tigs. 12-17.— Schultze, 1866, Triacrinus depressus, Echin. Eifl. Kalk.,

p. 108, PI. 12, fig. 8.— Devonian. Eifel.
1839. T. granulatus Miinster, Beitr. z. Petrefactenk., p. 4.— Upper Silur. (?).

Schiibekammer, Germany.
1839. T. granulatus Jliinster, type of the genus, Beitr. z. Petref., p. 3, PI. 1, figs.

4 a, b, c. — Devonian. Benitzlosau, near Hof, Germany.

LAGENIOCRINUS De Kon. & Lehon.

1853. De Kon. and Lehon., Recherch. snr les Crin. Carbon, de la Belg.,

p. 1S7.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palseontologie, i.. p. 350.

Zittel has placed Lageniocrinus along with Symbathocrinus and
Phimocrinus, and we think for good reasons. We also agree
with him that the five plates, which in the specimens cover the
ventral surface, represent the arms and not radials as was sup-
posed by De Koninck. These plates evidently could be opened,
and there were plates underneath covering the calyx. Lagenio-
crinus represents in our opinion an embryonic form, and may
possibly be the young stage of Symbathocrinus. Of this genus
we found a verv minute specimen, in which the arms consisted of
but three successive joints, forming jointly a pyramid : while
adult specimens sometimes have as many as a hundred.

Generic Diagnosis. — General form flagon-shaped ; that of the
dorsal cup funnel-shaped. Basals three, elongate, two of them
larsrer and pentangular, the smaller one rhomboidal, which
together form a tubular body which is slightly wider above. The
radials are quadrangular, wider above than below. Two of them
rest upon the truncate upper faces of the two larger basals, the
three others against their sloping sides and against the upper
s.AcS of the smaller basaL There is no anal plate. The arms
consist of single joints, which, folded together, form a pyramid.
The ventral surface of the calyx is not known.

IS'AS. Lageaioeriftms seMisolas I^ Koa. asd Leltoa, Bediereli. car ks Ciim. CariMB.
4elkB^.,p.lS9, PL4»fs.l«-e.— MooitaiB loMst. Tm^

100 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEIVIT OP [1886.

(1) RHOPALOCRINUS W. & Sp., Rev. i, p. 57.

This genus was referred by us provisionall}^ to the Ichthyo-
crinidge, where it cannot remain, as it has not the articulate
structure so characteristic of that group. We now place it with
the Inadunata, as the arms were evidently free from the first
radials ; but we are yet in doubt if it should go with the Sym-
bathocrinidae, Cupressocrinidae, Gasterocomidae, or be made a
distinct group.

Family XV.— CUPRESSOCRINID-E Roemer.

The Cupressocriuidse in our classification consist only of the
genus C2ipressocrinus. Schultze, Zittel and De Loriol, however,
added Symbathocrinus and Phimocrinus, which unquestionably
differ from Gupressocrinus more than Pisocrinus and Triacrinus,
for which they proposed a separate group.

GUPRESSOCRINUS Goldfuss.
(PI. 4, fig. 1.)

1826. Goldfuss, Petref. Germaniae, i, p. 330.

1835. Agassiz, Memoir Soc. des Sci. natur. d. Neuchatel, i, p. 198.

1838. Goldfuss, Nova Acta. Ac. Leopold. XIX, i, p. 330.

1839. Miinster, Beitrage z. Petref., p. 3.

1845. F. Roemer, Leonh. and Bronn's Jahrbuch, p. 291.

1850. D'Orbigny, Prodrome de Paleont., i, p. 103.

1852. Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petref. (Ed. 1), p. 623.

1855. Sandberger, Versteinerungen Nassau's, p. 401.

1855. F. Roemer, Lethsea Geognostica (Ausg. 3j, p. 230.

1857. Pictet, Traite de Paleont., vol. iv, p. 306.

1862. Dujardin and Hupe, Hist, natur. des Zooph. Echin., p. 110.

1866. Schultze, Monogr. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 14.

1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palaeontologie, i, p. 348.

1880. Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petref., -Ed. 3, p. 962.

1882. De Loriol, Paleontologie Franc, tome xi, p. 47, not Ad. Roemer,
Harzegebirge, p. 8 ; nor McCoy, Syn. Brit. Palseoz. Foss., p. 117.
Syn. Halocrinites Steininger, 1831, Mem. Soc. Geol. de France, i,

p. 349.
Syn. Cyprensocrinites Steininger, 1849, Verstein. Uebergangsgeb.

d.Eifel, p. 20.
^yn.CypeUocrinites^tQ\m\\ge.Y, 1853, Geogn. Beschr. d. Eifel, p. 36.

Goldfuss, in 1826 (Petrefacta Germania), gave a good descrip-
tion of this genus, to which he made additions in 1838 (Beitrage
zur Petrefactenkunde, p. 334). At both times he expressed the
conviction that the ventral covering was probably membranous.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101

The arms he described as bearing " siibelformige Teiitakeln "
(pinnules), and in the description of Cupressocrinus gracilis he
gave a grapliic account of the articular facets of the radials.
These, according to his statement, extend deeply inward, so as
to diminish largely the width of the visceral cavity, which at the
upper end is reduced to one half the depth of the facet. Behind
the " Nahrungscanal " (axial canal), he says, there extend out
two diverging muscular extensions, which connect by a cross-
piece, abut against their fellows of adjacent radials, and form
together a star-shaped figure, composed of five pairs of leaves.
The ventral surface, therefore, according to Goldfuss, consists of
five coalesced muscle-plates, and not, as was supposed by
Roemer, Schultze and Zittel, and heretofore by ourselves, of an
independent plate or appai'atus, peculiar to this genus. F.
Roemer described it as a cribriform calcareous plate, in form of a
five-leaved flower. Schultze speaks of it as five delicate plates,
which join radially, four of them equal, the fifth one different
and containing the anal opening. He calls it a consolidating
apparatus, constituting a part of the inner body, and not portions
of the outer test; pierced by various openings, through which
the blood-vessels, axial canals and genital organs passed into the
arms. A similar view was held by Zittel, who stated : " There is
in the interior of the calyx, at the base of the arras, a peculiar
annular, so-called consolidating apparatus, composed of five
large interradial (oral) plates, with a round (mouth) opening at
the centre." Also, De Loriol mentions a peculiar " Consolida-
tions-apparat, qui a ete rapproche des hydrospires."

The views expressed by us, Rev. I, p. 12, to which De Loriol
alludes, differ from those of our co-laborers. We held that the
so-called " consolidating apparatus " was composed of five oral
plates, which we thought stood in connection with five pairs of
h3^drospires. To this interpretation we were partly led by a cer-
tain superficial resemblance, but principally by the fact that
Roemer, Schultze and Zittel, who had access to the splendid col-
lections fi'om the Eifel, all agreed that the plates in question were
interradial in position. If this had been true, nothing could
have been more natural but that these plates should be struc-
turally identical with the deltoids of the Blastoidea, and the
interradials of the Gyathocrinidae, which were then held by us to
be oral plates.

102 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

A very different interpretation of the so-called consolidating
apparatus has been given to us by Dr. P. H. Carpenter, who
regards it as representing the united muscle-plates of the radials.
He wrote to us as follows : " I look upou the consolidating
apparatus as offering a surface for the attachment of muscles by
which the arms were moved on the calyx. The successive arm-
pieces — I will not call them 'joints ' — were suturally united and not
movable upon one another, so that the arms were moved en masse
upon the calyx, and this must have required very strong muscles
between the calyx and first brachials. All that is ordinarily
supposed to represent the articular face of the radials is shown
in Schultze's Taf. II, fig. 5 a, while that of the arm-base appears
on fig. 7 b. Now, it appears to me improbable that the heavy,
massive arms of Gupressocrinus were moved by muscles which
had no further surface of attachment — at their proximal end, at
any rate — than is shown in Fig. 5 a. Symbathocrinus has large
muscle-plates, but there is nothing of this kind in Gupressocrinus,
without the consolidating plates. The calyx of Phimocrinus Isevis
(Schultze, Taf. Ill, fig. 6 a), corresponds to that of Gupresso-
crinus, with the consolidating plates in situ. There is the same
arrangement round the anal opening, of which there is absolutely
no trace in Gupressocrinus, without the consolidating plates, and
yet it is clear from Schultze's description that he regards (rightly
as I believe) the top of the calyx to be formed of the ' Gelenk-
flachen der Radialia,' with the anus between two of them. I
cannot, therefore, help regarding the consolidating apparatus of
Gupressocrinus as consisting of the united muscles-plates of the
radials, from the lower portions of which they are apt to
separate." This seems to us a very reasonable solution of the
question, and we fully agree with Carpenter. We have since
found that the plates are not interradially disposed, nor do they
form separate pieces ; the sutures which we thought we observed
are evidently radial sinuses, similar to those which we described
in Symbathocrinus.

The arm structure of Gupressocrinus was also poirvted out
more accurately by Goldfuss than b}^ most of the succeeding
writers. The outer and inner " Querbalken " of Schultze (Mon.,
PL l,figs. 1 /i, a, 13), are obviously the basal portions of incurved
pinnules, and as such they were described and figured by Zittel.
These pinnules, however, in the opinion of Carpenter, are not

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 103

homologous with those of other Crinoids, there being six or
more of them to each arm plate, given off from each side, in
place of one alternately arranged, a structure similar to that of
the so-called pinnules of the Blastoids. Also their ambulacra,
aside from not being recumbent and forming no part of the calyx,
resemble closely those of the latter group. By removing the
lancet piece and side pieces in Pentremites, and exposing the
sinus, it will be found that the inner sides of the limbs are con-
structed almost exactly as the inner walls of the arm-grooves in
Cupressocrinus, as seen by a comparison with Schultze's figure in
his Monograph, PL ii, figs. 7 and 11. There are in both struc-
tures deep, rounded transverse grooves, alternating with ridges
which are truncate above, and each one of them is provided
lengthways with a small furrow at the top. These furrows do
not extend to the full length of the ridge, but are provided at
their outer end with an articular facet for the attachment of a
pinnule. The pinnules at their base do not touch laterally, but
leave a small open space in the direction of the lateral grooves.
These grooves form the outer half of a pore, similar to the
hydrospire pores of the Blastoids, and like the latter probably
are communicating in a similar manner with hydrospires, lodged,
however, within the arm grooves and not within the calyx.
Schultze's figures 1 h and 1 i, in our opinion, are incorrect.
Cupressocrinus certainly had no such " Tentakel-Furche " as
here represented, and we doubt if the genus possessed such
minute irregular covering plates, either along the perisome or
within the arms.

Generic Diagnosis. — Dorsal side of the calyx basin-, cup- or
bell-shaped, composed of rather large, heavy plates; when the
arms ai-e attached and closed, the form is ovoid or pyramidal.

The basals consist of five equal, pentagonal pieces, which
enclose an equilateral, undivided disk, formed by a coalescence
of the underbasals, or, according to others, by the upper stem
joint which became enlarged and as such took the place of the
underbasals in other genera.

Radials five, of similar form, wider than high, pentangular ;
the upper margins truncate, and forming a horizontal line. They
are succeeded by five very short pieces, of the same width, which
Schultze designated as " articularia " and as parts of the calyx.
The arms are wide, simple, closely folded together, and composed

104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

of a single row of from 2 to 20 heavy, transverse pieces, of which
the upper and lower sides are parallel. The arm plates grow
narrower and shorter at their upper ends, they are suturally con-
nected, and sometimes so closely anchylosed that no suture lines
can be distinguished along the lateral margins of the arms.

The radials are connected with large muscle-plates (PL 4, fig.
1), which are laterally anchylosed, and together form one con-
tinuous plate. This covers the greater part of the ventral
surface, leaving in the centre but a comparatively small, irregu-
larly pentagonal open space, which, as we suppose from analogy
with allied forms, was covered in the animal by interradial and
summit plates. The median portions of each radial is pierced by
two successive, rather large openings, of which the outer ones
penetrate the upper margin of the plate, and serve as passages
for the axial cords ; the inner ones, which pass through the
muscle-plate, probably are ambulacral openings. The muscle
plate in its outer form is stellate, having five pairs of leaf-like
extensions, two to each radial. They contain upon their outer
faces indistinct striae, which from both sides concentrate toward
the axial opening. The leaves become more delicate toward
the periphery, especially interradially, where they are frequently
broken, and the spaces, thus formed, appear in the specimens as
if constituting natural openings.

The articulation of the arms with the calyx was facilitated
b}^ the axillaria, which, like the radials, have an axial canal,
and, according to Schultze, similar muscular processes. The
articular face of the arms is truncate, sloping toward the inner
side, and corrugated for the reception of ligament. The arm
furrow is deep and wide, and contains along the inner floor an
unusually large axial canal, which, to the extent of the proximal
arm piece, is partitioned off from the ambulacral groove. The
exact construction of the ambulacra is not known, but we judge
they were plated in a similar manner as those of Symhathoc7Hnus,
and not membranous as described by Schultze. They probably
also were provided with lateral pores, and these were alternately
arranged with incurved, articulated pinnules, resembling in form
those of the recent genus Holopus, but arranged like those of the
Blastoids, there being four or more to each arm joint.

Gupressocrinus has been described to possess no anal plate,
only an anal opening, located between two of the muscle plates.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105

It has been overlooked, however, that in the two radials adjoining
the anal opening the passages of the axial cords are placed con-
siderably to one side, leaving sufficient space for an anal plate
such as we find in Symhathocrinus^ and whose presence we postu-
lated in Phimocrinus. That such a plate really existed, is more
probable since we find in G. gracilis the margin which forms the
anal opening at one side considerably raised, and there are
irregular upperedgesas if these had formed the baseof an anal tube.

The column is circular, triangular or quadrangular, composed
of short joints. It contains four large peripheral canals, rarely
three or five, and a central one, which is either confluent with the
others or isolated. It is frequently provided with cirrhi, which
have two canals, vertically arranged, and these also are frequently
confluent.

Geological Position, etc. — Gupressocrinus is only known from
the lower portions of the Devonian of Europe.

N. B. — Gupressocrinus duhius and G. teres A. Roemer, and G.
jientaporus Eichwald, were described from pieces of column ; G.
calyx McCoy = Hydreionocrinus calyx (Rev. ii, p. 131); G. im-
pressus McCoy probably is Eupachycrinus.

]8;i8. Gupressocrinus abbreviatus Goldf., Nova Acta Ac. Leopold, xix, Pt. i, p. 383,
PI. 30, fig. 4.— D'Orbigny, Prodr. i,p. 102.— Roemer, 1855, Leth. Geogn. (Ed.
3), i, p. 232.— Schultze, 1866, Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 19, PI. ii, fig. 1, and PL
iii, fig. 3. — Dujardin and Hupe, 1862, Hist. nat. Zooph. Echin., p. 112. —
Devonian. Eifel, Germany.

Schultze recognized the following varieties : C. alta, C. granulosa, C. hybida
and C. minor.

Syn. Halocrinites Schlotheimii Steininger, Mem. Soc. geol. de France i, p. 349,
PI. 21, fig. 1.

Syii. Gupressocrinus Schlotheimii Steininger, Geogn. Resch.reib. d. Eifel, p.
36, and Versteiu. der Eifel, 1849, p. 21.

Syti. C. pyrimidalis Stein., Bull. Soc. geol de France (Ser. i), ix, p. 295, PI. 4.

Syu. G. nodosus Sandberger, Versteiner. Nassau's, p. 401, PI. 35, fig. 5.

Syn. C. Urogalli Roemer, Palaeontgr. iii, p. 9, PI. 2, fig. 7.
1826. C. crassus (ioldfuss (Type of the genus), Petref. Germanite i, p. 212, PI. 64, fig.
4 ; also 1838, Nova Acta Ac. Leopold, xix, Pt. i, p. 331, PI. 30, fig. 1, — Agassiz,
1835, Soc. de Neuchat. i, p. 198.— D'Orbigny, 1850, Prodr. i, p. 102.— Bronn.,
Lethaea Geogn. 1 and 2.— F. Roemer, Leth. Geogn. i, 1855 (Ausg. 3), p. 232, PL
4, figs 9 a, b, c. — Bronn, 1860,Classen dee Thierreichsii,Pl. 28, fig. 1. — Dujardin
and Hupe, 1862, Hist. nat. Zooph. Echin., p. 112, PI. 5, fig. 12.— Schultze^
] 866. Men. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 23, PI. 3, fig. 1.— Devonian. Eifel, Germany.

Si/ii. Cypressocrinus crassus Steininger, Geogn. Beschreib. d. Eifel, p. 36 and
Versteiner. d. Eifel, p. 20.

Si/ii. Gupressocrinus ^tetragonus GoIdfu.ss, Nova Acta Ac. Leopold. .\ix, Pt, i,
p. 332, PI. 30, fig. 3.

8

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

1838. C. elongatus Goldfuss, Nova Acta Ac. Leopold, xix, Pt. 1, p. ^?il, PI. 30, fig. 2.
— Miinster, 1839, Beitr. d. Petrefactenk., p. 3, PI. i, figs. 1 a, b. — D'Orbigny,
1850, Prodr. i, p. 102.— Schultze, 1866, Mon. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 23, PI. r^,
fig. 1. — Dujardin and IIup6, Hist, natur. Zooph. Echin., p. 112. — Devonian.
Eifel, Germany.
Syn. C. gerolsteinensis Stein, 1849, Verst. d. Eifel, 1849, p. 20.
St/n. C. prismatious Stein, 1849, ibid., p. 20.
Syn. C. elongatus Stein, Geogn. Beschreib. d. Eifel, p. .">6.
1826. C. gracilis Goldfuss, Petref. Gernaaniae, i, p. 213, PI. 64, fig. 5 : also Nova
Acta Ac. Leopold, xix. Pt. I, p. 334, PI. 30, figs. 5 or, ft, c (not b d). — Steininger,
1849, Versteiner. d. Eifel, p. 20.— D'Orbigny, 1850, Prodr. i, p. 1 02.— Dujardin,
and Hupe, 1862, Hist. nat. Zooph. Echin., p. 113.— Schultze, 1866, Mon.
Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 23, PI. 3, fig. 2.— Devonian. Eifel. Germany.
1866. C. hieroglypMcus Schultze, Mon. Echin. Eifl. Kalk;, p. 25, PI. 1, fig. 3.—

Devonian. Eifel, Germany.
1866. C. inflatus Schultze, Mon. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 24, PL 1, fig. 2.— Devonian.

Eifel, Germany.
1866. C. scaber Schultze, Mon. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 25, PI. 1, fig. 4.— Devonian.
Eifel, Germany.

Family XVI.— GASTEROCOMIDJE.

The Gasterocomidse embrace the following genera : Gastero-
coma, Nanocrinus and Myrtillocrinus. They were united by
Pictet and by Dujardin and Hup^, with the Haplocrinidse ; Roemer,
Schultze, Zittel and De Loriol, however, treated them as a sepa-
rate family.

GASTEROCOMA Goldfuss.

1838. Goldfuss, Nova Acta Ac. Leopold, xix, 1, p. 350.

1853. Steininger, Geogn. Beschreib. d. Eifel, p. 38.

1857. Miiller, Neue Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 257.

1857. Pictet, Traite de Paleont., iv, p. 314.

1862. Dujardin and Hupe, Hist, natur. des Zooph. Ecliin., p. 109.

1866. Schultze, Mon. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 95.

1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palseont., i, p. 863.

Syn. Ceramocrimcs Miiller, 1855, Verb, naturh. Virein f. Rheinlande,
xii (n. ser.), p. 83.

Syn. Epactocrinus Muller, 1855, ibid., p. 84.

Gasterocoma was described by Goldfuss to be composed of five
basals and five radials, the latter as enclosing laterally an anal
plate, and the anal opening as being located next to the posterior
basal. This definition, although substantially correct, was after-
wards modified by Schultze. He found that among species, and
even among individuals of the same species, the construction of
the azygous side undergoes most remarkable variations ; such as
in other groups would be sufficient for generic separation. The

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 107

anal opening in this genus, as a rule, is located between the
radials. It either lies directly above the posterior basal, and is
followed by a quadrangular or triangular anal plate, or the open-
ing is situated above the anal plate. In the former case the two
posterior radials may close above the opening, or be separated
from one another by additional plates ; the opening may even
penetrate exceptionally the posterior basal. Miiller's genus
Ceramocrinics, according to Schultze, was founded upon a speci-
men in which the anal plate was placed above the opening, con-
trary to the typical form of Goldfuss, in which it was below. The
name Epactocrinus was proposed for a specimen with very irreg-
ular basals, portions of which evidently had been destroyed or
fractured, and were restored by the animal, and this ma}^ have
produced the irregular form. The construction of the ventral
side cannot be satisfactorily ascertained from Schultze's figures.
His figs. 1/, and 1 1, on PI. xii, which are said to represent the
ventral surface of Gasterocoma antiqua, are so different from one
another, that we believe there is a mistake in the figures. These
figures diflfer again essentially from fig. 5 6, which is said to
represent the same parts in Gasterocoma gibbosa.

Generic Diagnosis. — The lower disk has the form of a
pentagon, and extends somewhat beyond the column. It is
surrounded by five basals, four of them equal, pentagonal; the
fifth larger, hexagonal, truncate above.

Radials five, pentangular ; three of them are equal, the two
next to the az3'gous side irregular. The two latter enclose later-
ally not only the anal plate, but also the anal opening, which is
surrounded by a single ring of small plates, and either rests upon
the truncated upper face of the larger basal, or is separated from
the latter by an anal plate. In either case the anus, as a general
rule, is succeeded by one or more anal pieces, which, however, in
some specimens do not extend to the upper end of the radials,
and in tliis ease the radials meet above the anal plates. The
radials have a lateral articular facet of the horseshoe form, which
extends deeply into the plate. It is notched above for the arm
furrow, and pierced by a large axial canal, which is removed far
off from the outer edge of the plate. The arms evidently were
heavy, and, to judge from the facets, were probably pendent.

The mouth of Gasterocoma, according to the position of the
central piece, was excentric. This central — or, as we call it, oral —

108 PROCEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OF [188fi.

plate al)iits against the two posterior radials; it is large,
heavy, somewhat elongate, and surrounded anteriorly and later-
ally by what may prove to be four proximals (?). The' inter-
radial plates appear to be small, but may be pai'tly hidden from
view by the large covering plates.

The form of the column is not known, but it was, like in
Cupressocrinus, perforated with a central canal and four per-
ipheral ones, which were confluent at the centre.

Geological Position, etc. — Confined to the Devtmian of the
Eifel.

The following species have been described : —

18;i8. Gasterocoma antiqua Qoldf. (Type of the genus), Nova Acta Ac. Leopold. XIX,

i, p. 96.— Pictet, 1867, Traite de Pallont., iv, PI. C, fig. 7.— Schultze, 1866,

Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 96, PI. 12, fig. 1.— Devonian. Eifel, Germany.

Si/n. Epactocrinus Irregularis Mliller (Wirtgen and Zeiler), 1855, Verb,
naturh. Verein. f, Eheinl., xii, p. 85, PI. 12, figs. 5-8.
1866. G. gibbosa Schultze, Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 98, PI. 12, fig. 5.— Devonian.

Eifel, Germany.
1866. G. MuUeri Schultze, Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 99, PI. 12, fig. 2.— Devonian.

Eifel, Germany.

Si/ii. Ceramocrinus eifliensis Miiller (Wirtgen and Zeiler), Verb, naturh.
Verein f. Rheinlande, xii, p. 83, PL 12, fig. 2.
1866. G. reticularis Schultze, Echinod. Eifl. Kalk., p. 99, PL 12, fig. :L— Devonian.

Eifel, Germany.
1866. G. Stellaris Schultze, Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 10(1, PI. 12, lig. 1.— Devonian.

Eifel, Germany.

NANOCRINUS Miiller.

1856. Miiller, Moiiatsber. d. Berl. Acad., p. 355.

1857. Miiller, Neue Echinod. Eifl. Kalk., p. 249.
1866. Schultze, Monog. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 102.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palaeontologie, i, 364.

Nanocrinus is very closel}' allied to Gasterocoma, and had not
Schultze found six specimens which all have the same irregular
structure, we should feel inclined to regard it an abnormal form
of that genus. According to Schultze, the genus has five basals,
but only four radials ; the place of the fifth one is said to be
occupied by an interradial. The latter is strictly radial in [)Osi-
tion, and as such should be designated as a non-arm-bearing
radial.

Generic Diagnosis. — Basal cup as in Gasterocoma, but the
plates less regular; four of them pentagonal, the posterior one
considerably higher, hexagonal, truncate above.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 109

Radials five, large, irregular in size, four of them arm-bearing,
the fifth one not. The articular facet is lateral, horseshoe-shaped,
and occupies almost the whole outer face of the radials. Three
of the plates have a single facet, but the fourth, which is an
axillary, has two, somewhat smaller than those of the others.
The non-arm-bearing radial is smaller by more than one-half than
any of the rest; it is hexagonal or trapezoidal, and sometimes
altogether absent. The anal plate is placed between the lateral
faces of two radials, and rests upon the truncate upper face
of the larger basal. It is subquadrangular, somewhat excavated
for the anal opening, which generally occupies the upper portion
of the anal plate, occasionally, however, as in Gaster'ocoma, tire
lower side of it. The form of the arms is unknown.

The interradials appear to be small, but probably are partly
hidden from view by the unusually large covering pieces, which
occupy the greater part of the ventral surface, and rest against
the oral plate, which is extremely large, there being no proximals.
The column, like that of Gasterocoma, is provided with a central
canal and four peripheral ones.

The only known species is : —

1856. Nanocrinus paradoxus Muller, Monatsher. d. Berl. Acad., p. 355; also Neue

Echin. d. Eifl. Kalk.. 1857, p. 249, PI. 2, figs. 18-21.— Schultze, 1866, Echin.
Eifl. Kalk.. ).. 102, PI. 12, fig. 7.— Devonian, Eifel, Germany.

MYRTILLOCRINUS Sandberger.

1855. Sandberger, Versteiner. Nassau's, p. 388.

1857. Pictet, Traite de Paleont., iv, p. 311.

1862, Dujardin and Hupe, Hist, natur. des Zooph. Ecliinod., p. 108.
1862. Hall, 15th Rep. N. York St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 142.
186G. Schultze, Moii, Echin. Eifi. Kalk., p. 96.

We have not seen the original description of this genus, but
we infer from the notes of Pictet, Schultze and Hall, that Sand-
berger described it to possess a quinque-partite, quadri-canalicu-
late base. In his figure it seems the central part was represented
as undivided, and, curiously enough, the same is the case with
Hairs figure of the American species, although he mentions in
the description " five basals and five subradials." We cannot
understand how a base like this could have been divided into five
parts — not four — aud, therefore, prefer, in default of further evi-
dence, to regard it as undivided, although we are well aware that,
if any such division did exist, it would prove most satisfac-

110 l»ft,0CEEUING8 OF THE ACADEMV Of [1886.

torily that also the lower plate in the allied genera is under-
basal. Myrtillocrinus, in our opinion, is closely allied to Gas-
terocoma, if not identical with it, but it is possible that the anal
opening which has not been observed was subcentral, in place of
lateral. It also appears from Hall's figure, as if it had two arms
from each ray , although there is but one axial canal, which occupies
the central space of the facet. The facet in Hall's species is oval
and strictly lateral, thus indicating that the arms were pendent.
Geological Position, etc. — Only two species are known, the
one from Europe, the other from America, both coming from
lower Devonian beds.

1S62. Myrtillocrinus americanus Hall, 1 Jth Rep. N. York St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p.
142, PI. 1, figs. 2-4. — Upper Helderberg group. Livingston Co., N. Y.

1855. M. elongatus Sandberger (type of the genus), Verstein. Nassau's, p. .'588, PI.
35, fig. 6.— Pictet, Traits de Paleout., iv, p. 311, PI. c. fig. 4.— Dujardin and
Hupe, 1862, Hist, natur. d. Zooph. Echinod., p. 108.— Miiller, 1857, Neue
Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 257. — Devonian. Nassau, Germany.

b. Branch, FISTULATA, W. and Sp.

The Fistulata embrace the Cyathocrinidse as they were defined
by us heretofore, but which we now subdivide into Hybocrinida?,
Heterocrinidse, Anomalocrinidae, Cj^athocrinidse and Poterio-
crinidiB. To these we add the Belemnocrinid.ne, Astylocrinidae
and Encrinidse.

Zittel defined his Hybocrinidse as follows : Calyx irregular ;
basis monocj^clic ; basals 5 ; radials 5 ; arms slender, single-
jointed ; pinnules wanting ; and he placed in the family : Hybo-
crinus and Anomalocrinus. His definition is deficient and not
quite correct. It would admit Pisocrinus and Rhopalocrinus,
which we recognize as members of very different groups ; and it
actually excludes Anomalocrinus, which has seven plates in the
radial series and not five, and strong pinnules, which are wanting
in Hybocrinus.

Hybocrinus represents a very peculiar form. No other palaeo-
zoic Crinoid deserves in so high a degree the designation embry-
onic type as this genus, Hybocystites and the allied genera
Hoplocrinus and Baerocrinus, which Zittel took to be synonymous
with Hybocrinus. These four genera, which are easily recog-
nized by their monocyclic base, large body, imperfectly developed
radial plates, small ventral sac, the embryonic state of their arms.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. Ill

and the absence of pinnules, will be recognized by us as Hybo-
crinidse.

Among the Heterocrinidae Zittel placed Heterocrinus^Oraphio-
crinus, Erisocrinus, Philocrinus and Stemmatocrinus.

The family was defined as follows : Calyx regular ; base mono-
cyclic or dicyolic (five underbasals and five basals, or the latter
only); five radials ; arms long, simple, rarely bifurcating. The
qualification " calyx regular " cannot be applied to Heterocrinus,
which is one of the most asymmetrical forms of the Palaeo-
crinoidea, and this want of symmetry extends not only to the
interradial series but also to the radial plates, and forms its best
generic distinction.

Neither does that term apply to Graphiocrinus, which is
bilateral, nor Philocrinus, which we think is decidedly irregular.
Only Stemmatocrinus and Erisocrinus have a pentamerous calyx,
but these agree in other respects with the Poteriocrinidae.
Heterocrinus, in its general asymmetry, in arms and pinnules,
and in its azygous side, closely resembles Anomalocrinus, which
for other reasons we refer to a distinct family. We add to the
Heterocrinidse the two genera Stenocrinus and Ohiocrinus, ^vhich
are founded upon species heretofore ranged under Heterocrinus,
and unlike Zittel, place Graphiocrinus, Philocrinus, Stemmato-
crinus and Erisocrinus under the Poteriocrinidae.

Anomalocrinus, which we make the type of a distinct famil}^,
stands closer to the Heterocrinidae than to the Hybocrinidae, but
differs from either of them very essentially in the relative size of
the calyx, which is comparatively large, and low-cup or saucer-
shaped in place of subcylindrical or narrowly turbinate. It
further differs from all known Crinoids, recent or fossil, in the
arrangement of its pinnules, which are not given off alternately
from opposite sides, but from every successive joint on one side
at a time from one bifurcation to the next, where they change on
both rami to the opposite side. In the arrangement of the anal
plates, and in having no underbasals, the Anomalocrinidae agree
with the Heterocrinidae.

The Belemuocrinidae, which only contain Belemnocrinus and
the imperfectly known genus Holocrinus, differ from the preced-
ing families in having no underbasals ; they have, however, large
basals, cylindrically arranged, but even these take little or no
part in forming the visceral cavity. In this regard Belemno-

112 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

crinus resembles Rhizocrinus^ but it differs from that in having
a strong porous ventral sac.

Zittel's C3^athocrinidjie include Ci/athocrinus, Nipterocrinus^
Barycrinus, Euspirocrinus, Ophiocrinus, Botryocrinus^ Palseo-
crinus^ Garabocrinus, Sphserocrinus and Pachyocrinus (Billings,
not Eichwald). with the following famil}^ diagnosis : Calyx
globose; basis dicyclic, composed of five underbasals and five
basals ; anals 1-3; arms strongly developed, single-jointed, long,
branching, without pinnules ; ventral side covered by " oral
plates." From his list must be excluded Nipterocrinus, which
has interradials and only three underbasals, and Pachyocrinus,
which is too imperfectly known to determine its position. There
are besides Sicyocrinus, Ophiocrinus, Botryocrinus and Bary-
crinus, in which the arms, throughout their whole length, give
off armlets at intervals, which evidentlj^ take the place of pin-
nules if they are not true pinnules themselves. We direct atten-
tion to this point, as both Zittel and De Loriol make the absence
of pinnules in the Cyathocrinidae the sole distinction between
this family and the Poteriocrinidse.

The presence or absence of pinnules has been considered by
us heretofore as a doubtful character for distinguishing families.
The pinnules are extensions of the arms, and in their organiza-
tion, both morphologicallj^ and physiologically, almost identical
with the arms. They are short branchlets given off along the
sides of the arms, but ordinarily'- not extending to their tips.
The pinnules differ from arms only by their containing the fertile
portions of the genital glands, while the arms lodge the genital
cord. The branches of the arms may be said to be modified
pinnules, which differ from true pinnules in their greater length
and thickness. They are usually called arms when attaining the
form and length of the primary arms, but armlets when shorter,
less robust, and given off at regular intervals. Frequently the
branches are pinnule-bearing again, and this is the case in the
Poteriocrinidae, in which all arms, whether branching or simple,
main arms or side arms, are fringed with true pinnules. The
presence or absence of pinnules would prove to be a much better
character for distinguishing the two groups, were it not that
Barycrinus and allied genera represent a most perplexing transi-
tion form in having short side branchlets, given off at regular
intervals, and these branching off once or twice again in a similar

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 113

manner. In these genera it is exceedingly difficult to determine
whether the branches are armlets or pinnules, a question which
cannot be decided definitely until we know where the genital
glands are located. It is probable that in the genus Cyathocrinus,
at least in its Carboniferous form, all branches were artos. We
found in G. multihrachiatus^ along the three or four proximal
arm joints, outside the adambulacral or side-pieces, small plates
in rows of from four to six pieces (PI. 4, fig. 7 a, 6), succeeding
each other longitudinally, which perhaps took the place of the
genital pinnules. No such plates, however, were represented in
Baryc?'inits^ in which the ventral grooves are comparatively
narrow. Cyathocrinus longimanus has no regular pinnules, but
certain sabre-shaped appendages, composed of five segments,
which from each side infold over the ventral furrow, covering it
completely. These appendages which we (Rev., i, p. 25) erro-
neously took to be rudimentary pinnules, ^ perhaps correspond
with the so-called " pinnules " of the Cupressocrinidte and Blas-
toidea.

Another good distinction between the Cyathocrinidae and
Poteriocrinidae is offered by their mode of articulation. The
radials of the former have horseshoe-like facets for the brachials ;
in the Poteriocrinidae they are more or less truncate along the
upper margin, and united with the brachials by a transverse ridge,
occupying a median line and frequently their entire width. The
middle part of this ridge is pierced b^^ an axial canal, and there
is a kind of muscle plate with more or less conspicuous fossae.
The outer edge of the plate is dentated and evidently was occu-
pied by ligamentous bundles. In the Cyathocrinidae the arms
are always bifurcating, and their branches are given oflf at close
intervals ; those of the Poteriocrinidae are frequent!}' simple from
the brachial bifurcation upwards, but when bifurcating, the
divisions are o;iveu off irregularlv, and branches and main arms
bear pinnules alternately from every joint ; there being no S3'zy-
gies. The arm joints of the former, with the exception of Bary-
crinus, are composed of long, slender joints with almost parallel
sutures ; those of the latter are shorter, heavier and strongly
wedge-shaped, even interlocking. The same mode of articulation

^ A similar interpretation at that time was given by us of the anibulacral
plates covering the arm furrows of Cyathocrinus iowensis, a mistake which
w as rectified by Carpenter (Chall. Rep., pp. 63-GG).

Il4 PROCEEDINGS OJ" THE ACADEMV OF [1886.

that unites radials and brachials, extends to all bifurcating
plates of the Poteriocrinidap. In Urisocrinus, Eiipachycrinus
and Graphiocrmus, species with ten arms, it is found also among
the proximal arm plates, not, however, in the allied Scytalocrinus
and Decadocrinus, in which all arm plates above the brachials
are united by suture or elastic ligament. The same was prob-
ably the case in species with branching arms, in which all inter-
mediate joints between the axillaries are without either ridges or
fossae. A sutural union also connects the brachials in cases
where they consist of more than one plate, the apposed faces
showing no traces of a syzygy or fossae. In the arms of the
Cyathocrinidse there are, so far as observed, no articular ridges
nor axial canals, and no ligamentous fossfe, not even between
radials and brachials, nor upon the axillaries. The apposed
faces of all their joints fit closely together, the distal end being
slightly concave, the proximal to the same degree convex, so
that we may assert that their mode of union has been either by
suture or of a somewhat similar nature, and that the arms were
either immovable or their motions limited, and probably of a
mere passive character. This difference in the articulation of tlie
two types was noticed by J. S. Miller when describing the t3^pical
genera, for he placed Cyathocrinus separately among Inarticulata,
and Foteriocrinus among Semiarticulata. These names, as
applied to the rays, are very characteristic of the two groups,
for the Poteriocrinidae are in their articulation much more highly
differentiated, approaching in some cases the Neocrinoidea,
Miller's Articulata.

In none of the Poteriocrinidtie has the ventral covering, with
the exception of the so-called ventral sac, ever been observed,
while that of the Cyathocrinidae is comparatively well known.
This, however, is parti}' explained by the condition of the radials,
which in the Cyathocrinidie had ample space for the reception of
interradials, contrary to the Poteriocrinidae, in which the articu-
lation extends over the whole width of the radials, and the inter-
radials, partly or wholly, had to rest against the muscle plates as
in the Symbathocrinidae. In the Cyathocrinidae the interradials
were persistent through life, but they may have become resorbed
in the Poteriocrinidae before reaching maturity. The condition
of the ventral side among the Cyathocrinidae varies considerably,
and even among the species now referred to the genus Cyatho-

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115

crinus there are several which range infinitely lower than others,
and these should be placed under new genera.

The azygous side of the Cyathocrinidae consists rarely of more
than two plates in the calyx — the azygous plate and the anal
piece ; but the Poteriocrinidte generally have three, owing to the
fact that the first plate of the ventral tube extends often into the
calyx. The ventral sac is perhaps more club- or balloon-shaped
in the Poteriocrinidae, more cylindrical in the Cyathocrinidae.
We subdivide the C3'athocrinid8e into :

Dendrocrinites, genera with a large azygous and well-developed
anal plate, embracing : Merocrinus, Carabocrinus, Dendrocrinus,
Homocrinus, Ampheristocrinus and Farisocrinus.

BoTRYOCRiNiTES, genera having no special azygous plate or
occasionally a rudimentary one, and armlets in place of pinnules:
Atelestocrinus, Vasocrinus, Botryocrinus, Sicyocrinus, Streblo-
crinus and (?) Barycrinus.

Cyathocrinites, genera without azygous plate, with branching
arms without pinnules : Gyathocrinus, Arachnocrinus, Gisso-
crinus, Sphaerocrinua^ Achradocrinus^ Godiacrinus and (?)
Lecythiocrinus.

Zittel placed Gissocrinus among the Taxocrinidae, tlie perfectly
symmetrical Godiacrinus among the most unsymmetrical Gastero-
comidae, and Ophiocrinus, Dendrocrinus and Homocrinus, which
are devoid of true pinnules, among the Poteriocrinidie.^
We subdivide the Poteriocrinidae as follows :

PoTERiocRiNiTES, genera having an azygous plate, a regular anal
piece, and the first plate of the ventral sac enclosed in the calyx :
Foterioo'inus, Scaphiocrinus, Scytalocrinus, Decadocrinus, Woodo-
crinus, Zeacrinus, Hydreionocrinus, Gceliocrinus, Eiipachycrinu:<,
Gromyocrinus and Tribrachiocrinus.

Graphiocrinites, genera without azygous or anal plate, but
the first plate of the sac within the limits of the calyx : Graphic-
crinus, Bursacrinus^ Phialocrinus and Geriocriniis.

Erisocrinites, genera without azygous or anal plate dorsally :
Erisocrinus and Stemmatocrinus.

^ Prof. Zittel figures, Handb. d. Palaeont., i, p. 359, as type of the Poterio-
crinidae a species devoid of pinnules. Poteriocr. curtus Miiller, is evidently
a Hornocrinus.

11 a PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Our Poteriocrinidie contain essentially the same genera as those
of Zittel, but we except from his list Homocrinus, Dendrocrinus,
Agassizocinnus and Belemnocrinus. For the two latter we pro-
pose distinct families.

The Encrinidae are closel}^ allied to the Poterocrinidae, and we
think will ultimately be consolidated with them. Nothing, as yet,
is known of their ventral structure, but neither of that of the
Poterocrinidfe except their ventral tube. There is nothing which
proves that the ventral surface of Uncrimis was composed of soft
parts, or that it was exclusively perisomic or diffei-ed from that
of the Poteriocrinidse which are universally regarded as Palaeo-
crinoids. The only difference which we have discovered is that
in the Encrinidaj the brachials are united by syzygy and also
the proximal arm plates ; contrary to the Poteriocrinidffi in which
syzygies, so far as known, do not occur.

Among Astylocrinidae^ which represent the free floating Palaeo-
crinoidea, we include Agassizocrinus and Edriocrinus, the former
with underbasals, the latter with basals only. It is very possible
that Edriocrinus will prove to be the type of a distinct family.

The Catillocrinidae contain : Catillocrinus and Mycocrinus.
The allied Calceocrinidse only the genus Calceocrinus.

These ten families are defined by us as follows : —

A. Hybocrinid^. Base monocyclic ; calyx large compared
with the arms. Basals 5, unusually large. Kadials irregular, the
posterolateral one either unrepresented or very much smaller, and
sometimes non-arm-bearing. Arms frequently undeveloped in
one or more rays, or recurrent and appressed onto the outer
surface of the calyx; simple, and without pinnules. Azygous
side composed of a single, large azygous plate, and frequently an
anal piece, which in form resembles the right posterior radial.
Ventral sac very small, consisting of a mere tumor-like protu-
berance.

B. Heterocrinid.e. Base monocyclic. Calyx small ; plates
irregular. Basals 5, variable. Radials irregular, frequently com-
pound in one or more rays ; the right posterior radial smaller,
resting upon the azygous plate. Brachials consisting of two or
more pieces, united by syzygy. Of the succeeding arm joints
only every second, third or fourth one pinnule-bearing. Azygous
plate large; anal plate consolidated with the right posterior

I

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELrHIA. Ill

radial, which toward the left supports a series of anal plates;
toward the right the brachials. Arms long ; the pinnules some-
times take the form of arms, and attain the same general height.
Column tri- or quinque-partite.

G. Anomalocrinid^. Base monocyclic. Form irregular. Calyx
cajjacious. Azygous plate large ; supporting the right posterior
radial, which toward the right is succeeded by a row of brachials,
and toward the left by the ventral tube. Arms composed of large
quadrangular joints, giving off pinnules from one side only, from
one bifurcation to the next, when all pinnules change to the oppo-
site side. Column strong, central canal wide, stelliform, its pro-
jecting angles directed inter radially.

D. Belemnocrinid^. Base monocyclic. Basals large ; cylin-
drical ; solid, only pierced b}^ a narrow central canal with a shal-
low concavity at its npper end, Eadials small, quadrangular,
enclosing an anal plate of the same form. Ventral sac large,
club-shaped. Arms long with numerous sj'zygies, only every
second or third joint pinnule-bearing. Pinnules long, often
bifurcating. Column round or pentangular, frequently with long
cirrhi given off interradially.

E. CYATHOCRiNiDiE. Base dicyclic. Calyx globose, rarely
turbinate. Radials with horseshoe-like lateral facets supporting
at least two, but frequently several more brachials. Arms without
true pinnules, but with branches in regular succession to their
tips. Arm joints with a few exceptions long and narrow ; quad-
rangular with almost parallel sides ; united either by suture or
ligament, apparentl}^ not by muscles. Ventral sac large, C3din-
drical. Column round or pentagonal ; central canal rather above
medium size, pentagonal, the projections directed radially.

F. P0TER10CRINID.E. Base dicj^clic. Calyx deep and turbi-
nate, or shallow and disk-like, owing to the form of the under-
basals, which are either extended into a cup, or are turned inward
and concave. Radials somewhat irregular, of variable size, the
right posterior one generally smaller ; all truncated at the upper
face. Brachials one or two, connected by suture ; the lower or
l)roximal face truncate. Arms simple or branching, with pinnules
alternately arranged from every joint ; without syz^^gy. Arm
joints cuneate or interlocking. Articulation between brachials
and radials by muscles and ligament, and also between the upper

118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

faces of all axillaries and succeeding plates. Ventral sac large,
frequently inflated. Column more or less pentagonal, its outer
angles placed interradiall}', the cirrhi radiall3\

G. Encrinid^. Dicyclic. Closely allied to the Potei'iocrinidsp.
but, as a rule, without anal plates. Basals with well-developed
axial canals proceeding to the radials. Their brachials com-
posed of two pieces, united by syzygy, frequently with other
syzygies in the higher portions of the arms. Arms biserial or
uniserial.

H. AsTYLOCRiNiD^. Pedunculate in earlier life, detached from
the column and free-floating in the adult, but not cirihus-bearing.
Plates of the calyx massive, and hence the visceral cavity com-
paratively small. Underbasals present or absent, and also the
azygous piece is sometimes wanting ; while the anal plate is
always well developed.

I. Catillocrinid^. Base nionoc3'clic. The pentamerous sym-
metry greatl}' disturbed by the unequal size of the radials. Those
of the antero-lateral rays much larger and supporting many more
arms. Arms simple; composed of single joints resting directly
upon the radials, with a separate socket for each arm, and a furrow
for each ambulacrum. Anterior ray, and both posterior rays
rarely with more than one arm each. There is no azygous nor
special anal plate, one of the posterior radials supports towards
the left a large ventral tube, composed of a single row of heavy
curved plates, longitudinally' arranged, with an open furrow along
their inner, i. e., ventral side. Column circular.

J. Calceocrinid^. Base monocyclic. Calyx laterally de-
pressed ; hanging downward from the column ; composed of
three unequal basals, three arm-bearing radials, and two azygous
radials without arms. Basals and radials united by ligament,
and toward the anterior side by muscles also. In the normal
position of the crinoid, the basals are located posteriorly,
and the three radials at the opposite side. Anterior radial
smaller, compound ; composed of two pieces, which frequently
are separated by the overhanging sides of the two lateral radials.
Arms of the lateral rays more numerous and branching ; anterior
ray with a single arm, which sometimes dichotomizes toward the
upper end. Anal tube as in the Catilloci'inidee.

188fi.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119

Family XVII.— HYBOCRINIDJE Zittel.

(Emend. W. and Sp.)

BAEROCRINUS Volborth.

1864. Volborth, Eine neue Crinoideen Gattung. (Author's copy, p. 85).

1865. Volborth, Bulletin St. Petersb. Acad., vol. viii, p. 178.

1866. Volborth, Bulletin Soc. Imp. de Nat. de Moscow, ii, p. 442.

1867. Grevingk, Archiv. f. Naturkunde Liv.-Ehst. und Kurlands, Ser. I,

vol. iv, p. 110.
18G7. Grevingk, Uber Hyhocrinus dipentas and Buerocr. Ungarni, Dorpat,

p. 14.
1883. P. Herb. Carpenter, Quart. Jouru. Geol. Soc. London, Augu.-t,

pp. 298 312.
1883. W. and Sp., Amer. .Jour. Sci., vol. xxvi, November, p. 365.

Syn. Homocrinus Eicbwald (in part), 1865-66 ; Hyhocrinvt
Schmidt (in j.art), 1874 ; Zittel (in part), 1879.

The genus Baerocrinus has been a subject of much controversy
ever since 1864, owing to doubts whether the genus should be
admitted or rejected. It is unnecessary to give again a full
history of these controversies, for which we refer to Dr. P. H.
Carpenter's paper " On the Relations of Hyhocrinus, Baerocrinus
and Hybocystites,^' and to our notes " On Hyhocrinus, Hoplo-
erinus and Baerocrinus,^'' in the American Journal, of 1883.
Carpenter agrees with us and with Volborth and Grevingk that
Baerocrinus is a good genus, and not, as suggested b}' Eichwald
and Schmidt, an abnormal specimen of Hyhocrinus dipentas.
There has been also much difference of opinion as to the meaning
of certain plates. The type specimen has on its surface, along
the basi-radial suture, and between two of the plates within the
second or so-called radial ring, a peculiar structure, composed of
numerous, irregular pieces, and upon this, principally, Volborth
founded the genus. He took this structure to be a madreporic
body ; while Grevingk, Eichwald and Schmidt held it to be an
accidental break in the test, due to mechanical agencies. Car-
penter considered it to be the regular anal opening. He pointed
out that it had the position of the anus in the Pentacrinoid larva
at its earlier phases.

We stated in our paper that we did not agree with any of those
views. We think it possible that this structure may have served
as an anal opening, but as an abnormal one, which had opened
out when the regular opening became functionally defective.
We also differ from other authors in our interpretation of the

120 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

plates. Those of the second circlet have been regarded all five as
radials, and the calyx to the top of the radials as being perfectly
symmetrical. It looks to us unreasonable, when we compare
Baerocrinus with Hoplocrinus and Ryboc7'inus, and finding their
structure in other essential points almost identical, that. the one
genus should be almost perfectly symmetrical, the other e'x-
tremely irregular. And, therefore, it is probable that one of the
nyn-armbearing so-called radials represents an azygous plate, such
as we find in most of the Fistulata, that the right posterior radial
and the anal plate were as yet undeveloped, and that Baerocrinus
had but four radials. This interpretation of the plates, it seems to
us, is corroborated by the gradual ^disappearance of the azygous
plate among allied forms in pala^ontological times, and b}^ the
contemporary increase in the dimensions of the right posterior
radial and the anal plate. The two latter pieces probably were
absorbed from the azygous plate : at first the posterior radial,
which in Hoplocrinus took the right upper corner, the left side
remaining intact ; afterwards in Hybocrinus the anal piece, which
absorbed the left corner of the plate also.^

All this goes to prove that Baerocrinus represents a very low
organization, or is, according to P. H. Carpenter, " a permanent
larval form."

Revised Generic Diagnosis. — Form of the calyx cup- or goblet-
shaped. Underbasals wanting. Basals five, subequal and com-
paratively large,

Radials large, irregular, only four of them developed, the right
poster o-lateral one absent. Three of the plates equal, the fourth
one narrower. A large az3'gous plate occupies the same range
with the radials and, like these, rests alternately^ upon the basals.
It is undivided, and resembles the radials in form. In the type
specimen onlj' three of the radials are arm-bearing, the smaller
one not having even an arm-facet. Arms five, simple throughout,

^ In our paper on Hyhocrinus, Hoplocrinus and Baerocrinus, we stated
that probably the azygoiis plate of the latter was liomologous with the
anal plate as represented in the larva of Aniedon. In making this state-
ment we had overlooked the fact that the latter plate is simply an inter-
radial with special function, while the azygous plate in Baerocrinus is as
much radial as interradial. They both agree, however, in being absorbed
by other plates ; the azygous plate palseontologically by the right posterior
radial and anal plate, the other in the growing animal over the whole
surface.

188(1.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121

composed of single quadrangular joints and destitute of pin-
nules ; the ventral grooves lined by alternate plates. Form of
the anus, ventral covering and length of arms unknown.

Remarks. — In our analysis, we have taken the absence of the
right posterior radial to be a fixed character. It is, however,
possible that this plate was exceptionally undeveloped in the
t^-pe specimen, and in this case Baerocrinus Ungerni^ the only
known species of the genus, must be placed under Hoplocrinus.

18fi4. Baerocrinus Ungerni Volborth, Bull, de I'Acad. des Sci. de St. Petersburg of
1865, tome viii, p. 178, with plate (adv. sheet), November, 1864, p. :i7. —
Eiehwaid, 1859, described and figured under the name of Homocr. dipentas
Lethieca Ross., v, p. 183; and 1865, Bull, de Moscou, iii, p. 160. — Volborth,
1865, Baerocr. Ungerni, Bull, de Moscou, iv, p. 442. — Eiehwaid, 1866,
Homocr. dipentas, Bull, de Moscou, i, pp. 149-161, PI. 8, fig. h. — Grevingk,
1867, Baerocr. Ungerni, Ueber Hoplocr. dipentas and Baerocr. Ungerni,
with plate; also Arch. f. Naturk. Liv. Ehst. and Kurlands, Ser. I, vol. iv, p.
110. — Schmidt, 1874, Hybocrinus dipentas, Memoires de I'Acad. Imp. des
Sci. de St. Petersb., Ser. vii, tome xxi. No. 11, p. .3, PI. 1, Figs. 1-2.— P.
Herb. Carpenter, 1882, Baerocr. Ungerni, Quart. Jour. Geol. See. London
(August), pp. 298-312. — W. and Sp., 1883, Baerocr. Ungerni, Amer. Jour.
Sci., vol. xxvi, November, p. 365. — Brandschiefer, Lower Silurian. Erras,
Kussia.

HOPLOCRINUS Grevingk.

1867. Grevingk, XJehev Hoplocr. dipentas a,nd Baerocr. Ungerni, p. 9,
1867. Greviogk, Arch. f. Naturk. Liev.-Ehst. und Kurlands, Ser. I, vol.

iv, p. 110.
1883. W. and Sp., Anier. Jour. Sci., vol. xxvi, November, p. 365.

Syn. Apiocrinus, 1843, Leuchtenberg ; 1856, Eiehwaid. — Ilomo-
crinus, 1859, ^ichw&ld.—Eybocrinus, 1864, Volborth ; 1874, F.
Schmidt ; 1879, Zittel ; 1882, Carpenter.

Volborth, F. Schmidt, Zittel and Carpenter have made Hoplo-
crinus a S3'nonym of Hybocrinus, although they admit that the
two forms differ in the construction of their azj'gous side. We
have heretofore directed attention to the fact that the differences
in the number and arrangement of the azygous and anal plates
have been generall}^ regarded as good characters for distinguish-
ing genera, and especially among the Cyathocrinidde and allied
families in which those plates frequently form the only means
for generic separation. That the one azygous plate in Hoplo-
crinus is equivalent to the two in Hybocrinus^ which we have
fully admitted, does not warrant an exception in this case, as the
differences in the arrangement of the respective plates are
evidently the result of modifications from one to another. We,
therefore, accept Grevingk's genus, and give the following — .

122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Generic Diagnosis. — General form pja-iform, more protuberant
upon the azygous side. Calj^x composed of five basals, four
large radials, and a large azygous plate. The latter with its left
side extending to the upper margins of the four large radials, its
sloping right side supporting the fifth radial, which is small and
triangular, and, taken jointly with the azygous piece as one plate,
the two resemble in form the four large radials, only that the
arm-facet is pushed to one side.

Basals large, pentagonal, nearly equal in size. Four of the
radials pentagonal, the smaller one subtriangular, resting upon
the right sloping upper side of the azygous plate, which is
irregularly pentagonal. Arm-facets occupying scarcely one-third
of the width of the radials. Arms simple, without pinnules ;
composed of quadrangular joints, arranged parallel to each other.
Column cylindrical.

The onl}^ known species is :

1843. Hoplocrinus dipentas Leuchtenberg (Apiocrinus dipei.tas), Buschreibung
neuer Thierreste d. Urwelt von Zarskoje. Selo, yi. 17, Tab. ii, figs. 9-10;
also Eichwald, 1856, Bull, de Moscow, i, p. 115. — Homocrinus dipentas,
1859, Eichwald, Leth. Ross., v, p. 583, Tab. 31, figs, a-c (excl. specimen
from Erras). — Hybocrinus dipentas, 1864, Volborth, Bull. d. I'Acad. de. St.
Petersb., Tome viii, p. 178. — Homocrinus dipentas, 1865, Eichw., Bull. d.
Moscow, No. ill, p. 159.— Hybocrinus dipentas, 1S65, Volborth, Bull, de
Mosc, No. iv, p. 443. — Homocrinus dipentas, 1866, Eichwald, Bull, de
Moscow, No. 1, pp. 149-161, Tab. 8, figs. 2, 3, 4.— Hoplocr. dipentas, 1867,
Grevingk, Tiber, Hoplocr. dipentas and Baerocr. Ungerni, p. 10, figs. 1 a-f;
also Arch, fiir Naturk. Liv. Ehst. uuJ Kurlauds (Ser. i), Vol. iv, p. 110. —
Hybocrinus dipentas, 1884, Schmidt, Memoires do I'Acad. Imp. des Sci. de
St. Petersb., Tome xxi, No. 11, p. 3, PI. i, figs. 4, 5, 6 ; also Carpenter, 1882,
Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London (August), pp. 298-312.— Hoplocr. dipentas,
1883, W. and Sp., Amer. Journ. Sci., Vol. .\xvi (November), p. 365. —
Vaginaten Kalk., Low. Silur. Pulkowa, Russia.

HYBOCRINUS Billings.

1857. E. Billings, Geol. Surv. Can. for 1853-56 (Rep. of Progr.), p. 275.
1859. E. Billings, Geol. Surv., Decade iv, p. 23.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palieont., i, p. 350.

1879. W. and Sp., Rev. of the Palaeocr., i, p. 74.

1880. Wetherby, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist. (July).

1882. Carpenter, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London (Aug.), pp. 298-312.

1883. W. and Sp., Amer. Journ. Sci., Vol. xxvi, p. 365.

When we defined Hybocrinus., Rev., Pt. i, p. 74, we regarded it as
synonymous with Hoplocrinus and Baerocrinus, wliich, we have
since shown, are generically distinct. However, in our late
paper in the Amer. Journal we made some remarks upon the

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 123

azygous side, which must be modified. We asserted that the
upper end of the anal plate possessed a peculiar crenulated sur-
face, a structure which Wetherby had previously described, and
which we thought we had observed also in some of his specimens.
The fact that the so-called " crenulation " was visible, more or
less, in every specimen which Wetherby had sent us for com-
parison, led us to believe that it was an organic structure, prob-
ably of a similar nature as the pectinated rhombs of the Cystidea.
We are now satisfied that we had not sufficiently taken into con-
sideration the peculiar state of preservation of Wetherby's
specimens, which are not only highly silicified, but the surface
of the plates is badly weathered, and more or less destroyed.
Through the kindness and liberality of Mr. Walter Billings we are
now enabled to give a more satisfactory interpretation of these
parts. On receiving our paper he promptly informed us that in
the Canadian species of Eybocriniis the azygous plate was not
crenulated, but crowded by numerous, very small pieces, forming
a short pyramid. He accompanied his description with good
figures, and offered us his specimens for examination. In these
we found, resting upon the upper side of the anal plates, several
rows of minute subquadrangular pieces, about six to the width
of the plate, which together form a tumular protuberance without
any visible opening. There appear, however, minute pores along
the sutures, and it is evident that the protuberance represents a
ventral sac, reduced to its minimum size. The crenulated
appearance in Wetherby's specimens is evidently the result of
weathering, the apparent grooves representing the sutures
between the small plates. A similar short protuberance has been
observed in Eybocystites, and in all probability was present in the
two other genera.

No new species of this genus have been described since our
first discussion. We found several specimens in the Trenton
limestone, near Knoxville, Tennessee, but none of them perfect
enougli for specific identification.

HYBOCYSTITES AVetherby.

(Revised by W. and Sp.)

1880. Wetherby, Cincin. Joum. Nat. Hist. (July).

1882. P. Herb. Carpenter, Quart. Joum. Geol. Soc. London, pp. 298-312.

Hxjhocystites combines, in a remarkable degree, some of the
characters of Palaeocrinoidea, Cystidea and Blastoidea. Wetherby

124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

describes it as a Cystid, Carpenter was more inclined to place it
with the Blastoids ; while we take it to be a Palseocrinoid of low
organization.

There arie several points in Wetherby's description with which
we cannot agree. He describes the mouth or ambulacral orifice
as situated nearly centrally upon the upper surface. We had
several of Wetherby's best specimens for comparison, but were
unable to observe in any of them an external oral orifice, and
doubt if such an orifice existed in this Lower Silurian genus
" upon the surface." Neither can it be ascertained from tiie
specimens whether there were proximals surrounding the oral
plate. Wetherby further speaks of " a valvular anal opening,
placed between the upper azj^gous plate and the mouth," and he
mentions " a proboscis or ventral sac " which was said to be
" indicated by the presence of the upper azygous plate." If it is
meant that the so-called " valvular opening " is separated from
the ventral sac, and we infer it from fig. 1 on Plate 5, which shows
an irregular break upon the ventral surface in the direction to
which he alludes, he is certainly in error. Even if an opening
did exist, we doubt if he could have observed small, valvular
pieces in specimens in which even the larger ventral plates cannot
be distinguished. If he means that the anal opening is connected
with the ventral sac, placed along its inner or ventral side, we
can partly agree with him.

Wetherby described the genus as having in three of its rays
arms like those of the Crinoidea, in the other two raj^s appressed
ambulacra, such as occur in the Cystidea. He does not say any-
thing about the length of the three arms, leaving it in doubt,
whether he took the three projections to be only the stumps of
the arms, or as representing their full length. He only mentions
that the arms are composed of a single row of plates, that they
are very deeply excavated at the inner side by the ambulacral
furrows, and that the latter are covered by a closel}^ interlocking
series of small plates, having the same arrangement as those of
the two appressed ambulacra. He mentions further a more or
less obscure furrow upon the outer surface, " of which nothing
further is known."

Carpenter, in his paper on Hybocrinus and Hyhocystites^ called
attention to the fact, that in Wetherby's figures, and in the speci-
mens which he had examined himself, only one or two so-called

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125

arm joints were shown, that from appearances there had been no
others, and that these formed, in all probability, " merely upward
prolongations of the radials." He states further that the " more
or less obscure furrow," seen by Wetherby upon the outer surface
of each arm, was in reality a recurrent ambulacrum, and that in
his opinion the relations of Hyhocystites are rather with the Blas-
toids and " Crinoids than with the Cystids." Upon the latter
point we cannot agree with him, although we admit that there are
recurrent ambulacra in all five rays. We think, like Wetherby,
that the ambulacra resemble decidedly those of the Cystids, and
not those of the Blastoids. Hyhocystites evidently had no hydro-
spires and no hj'drospire pores, and the ambulacra, contrary to
any of the Blastoids, extend beyond the radials down into the
basals. Neither has it calicine pores, nor pectinated rhombs, and
hence cannot be a Cystid, even if it has appressed ambulacra,
which, we think, take the place of true arms.

Among the specimens from the Canada Survey Museum, which
we had the good fortune to examine through the kindness of Prof.
Whiteaves, we examined the type of Lecanocrinus elegans Billings
( Taxocrinus elegans W. and Sp.), one of the earliest of all known
Crinoids, and which seems to be destined to throw light upon the
peculiar ambulacra of Hyhocystites. This beautiful and well-
preserved specimen has upon the outer or dorsal surface of its free
arms, upon each one of them, from their tips as far down as the
top of the secondary radials, in addition to their regular ventral
farrows a recurrent dorsal furrow, such as is found in Hyhocys-
tites upon the calyx, and dorsally and ventrally upon the two arm
joints. These dorsal furrows are indistinctly represented by
Billings in Decade iv, PI. 4, fig. 4 a, although in the specimen
they are well defined, and it appears as if they had been lined by
a double series of alternating plates. Such dorsal furrows have
since been identified also in the tj^pe of Taxocrinus Isevis by
Walter R. Billings. That these furrows are continued from the
ventral side, and as such form a part of the ambulacra, cannot be
doubted, and is further proven by the fact that the furrows
diminish in width as they descend the surface of the arms. In
these species the regular furrows of the arms probably were not
sufficient to supply the animal. This was certainly the case in
Hyhocystites, which in two of its ra3^s has no brachial appendages
whatever, and these consist in the three other rays of but a few

12G rROCEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OF [188G.

joints, the ambulacra resting almost exclusively against the dorsal
side of the calyx.

Eybocystites is one of the earliest and lowest forms of the
Palseocrinoidea ; it may be regarded as a permanent larval form
of Hybocrinus, which had no arms, but in their place food grooves'
upon the dorsal side of the calyx. It is interesting that in this
case as in that of Baerocrinus, which has similar relations to
Hoplocrinus as this has to Hybocrinus, three of the rays are some-
what higher developed than the two others.

We propose the following : —

Revised Generic Diagnosis. — Eybocystites agrees with Hybo-
crinus in its general form, the arrangement and proportions of
the plates in the calyx, in the ventral covering, and in the form
and size of the ventral sac, but differs from that genus essentially
in the arm structure. It has no underbasals ; five large subequal
basals, five radials, one of them much smaller and resting upon
the right sloping upper side of the large azygous plate. The
latter supporting at its left sloping side an anal plate, in form
resembling the adjoining small radial. Arms rudimentary, of
the most primitive kind, restricted to the two posterior raj's and
the anterior one. They consist, so far as known, of two quad-
rangular joints, which are united with the radials by close suture.
The joints are provided with an ambulacral furrow, which enters
the calyx apparently at the top of the radials as in Hoplocrinus.
This furrow passes from the ventral side of the two arm joints,
over the top of the upper one, and follows the dorsal side of the
plates until reaching the calyx, whence it extends upon the sur-
face of the radials to the basals, either entering them or terminat-
ing close to the basi-radial suture or along the face of the large
azygous plate. The two antero-lateral rays have no arm plates
whatever, but each is provided with an ambulacral furrow, pass-
ing out from near the top of the radials, traversing these plates,
and entering the basals. There is considerable irregularit}^ in
their position and length, but as a rule these latter furrows enter
deeper into the basals than those of the three other rays. The
furrows are provided with two rows of side pieces which are
arranged in the usual way.

Ventral sac short, as in Hybocrinus^ provided along its ventral
gide with a small anal opening. Column circular, small.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121

The only known species is : —

1880. Hybocystites problematicus Wetherby, Cincin. Joum. Nat. Hist. (July).
P. Herb. Carpenter, 1882, Quart. Journ. Gcol. Soc. London (Aug.).— Trenton
gr. Mercer Co., Ky.

Family XVIII.— HETEROCEINIDJE Zittel.
(Emend. W. and Sp.)

Zittel and S. A. Miller included among tlie Heterocrinidse the
genera GrapMocrimis and Erisocrinns, which both have iinder-
basals, and which differ essentially in the plates of the azygous
side. We place in this family only Heterocrinus, locrinus and
our new arenera Stenocrinus and Ohiocrinus.

The Heterocrinidae differ from the Cyathocrinidae and Poterio-
crinidae in the absence of underbasals, in the arm structure, and
the arrangement of their azygous plates.

In 1866, Hall thought he observed in Heterocrinus two rings
of five pieces beneath the radials, and he adopted the term basals
for those of the proximal ring, and that of subradials for those
of the succeeding one. Afterwards, it was proved by Meek, Ohio
Paleont., i, p. 2, that the so-called " basals " — proximal ring —
were not plates of the calj'x but parts of the column. He de-
scribed the stem to be divided longitudinally, and the so-called
" basals," which in their vertical range were said to correspond
with the five segments of the column, as constituting the imper-
fectly developed uppermost stem joint. Meek proposed for these
plates the name " subbasals," and called those of the next ring
basals, while we used on Pt. I of the Revision the terms under-
basals and basals, respectively, as we took all of them to be
integral parts of the calyx.

We have lately given this subject careful consideration, and
found by grinding the column in various species, that important
differences exist among the species originally referred to this
genus. We found that most of them have a pentapartite column,
of which the five sections alternate with the basals without form-
ing a part of the calyx, but that the column of Heterocrinus
simplex^ Hall's typical species, is tripartite, composed of three
equal sections.

We have elsewhere shown that whenever the column is divided,
its sections alternate with the proximal ring of plates in the
calyx. They are placed interradially when those plates are under-

128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [188G.

basals, radially when thej' are basals, and as they have in Hetero-
crinus and allied genera a radial position, we may assert that these
genera had no underbasals. The Heterocrinidae occupj'^, owing to
the absence of underbasals, relatively, the same position toward
the C^^athocrinidse and Poteriocrinidae as the Actinocrinidse and
Platycrinidse hold toward the Rhodocrinidse. They agree with
the Cyathocrinidse and Poteriocrinidae in having the azygous
interradius extended into a porous ventral sac.

The arms consist of single joints, are comparatively strong,
and either bifurcate or remain simple from above the brachials.
The pinnules are given off not from alternate joints, but alter-
nately from each second, third or fourth joint. The}- are heavy
and long, and sometimes bifurcate near their tips. In the
typical form of Eeterocrinus alwa3S two joints are connected b}^
syzygy, but we are unable to prove the syz_ygy in species referred
by us to Stenocrinus and Ohiocrinus, unless by the pinnules
which are given off regularly from .every third or fourth joint.
Most probably in locrinus and Stenocrinus the pinnules, and
sometimes even their branches, were developed into regular arms,
for the divisions follow each other alternately and at regular
intervals, and the branches have no further pinnules.

The Heterocrinidae agree with the Hybocrinidae in the absence
of underbasals, but differ essentially in the proportions of the
calyx and ventral sac. In the former the calyx is extremely
small, the ventral tube large ; in the Hybocrinidae, on the con-
trary, the calyx comparatively large and the sac small. They
also differ in the structure of the arms, which in the Hetero-
crinidae are more highly developed.

The structure of the ventral side has been observed only in
^'■Eeterocrinus juvenis,^^ where it is composed of five compara-
tively large plates, which enclose a small oral plate. The ventral
sac throughout the whole family is much stronger than in the
Hybocrinidae, reaching sometimes the tips of the arms, and it is
profusely perforated.

Position, Locality, etc. — Confined to the Lower Silurian of
America. The Heterocrinidae, although forming a neat little
group by themselves, may be considered as the forerunners of
several types which afterwards became distinct families. Eetero-
crinus foreshadows the Belemnocrinidae, locrinus the Poterio-
crinidae, while Anomalocrinus is a prophetic type for the Cyatho-
crinidae.

ISST).] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129

I. HETEROCRINUS Hall (not Frass).
(Restricted and redefined by W. and Sp.)

1879. Revision Palseocr., Pt. i, p. 68.

1880. Wetherby, Cincin. Journ. Nat. Hist , July number.

1881. Wetherby, ibid., April number.

EeterocrinuSj as defined by Hall and revised by Meek, contains
so widely different species that a subdivision becomes necessary.
This has been conceded by previous writers. Wetherby, in
describing his H. Milleri, expressed the opinion that in the com-
parative size of the column, and in the plates of the calyx, that
species differed sufficient!}' from Heterocrinus simplex to be sep-
arated at least subgenerically. And a year later, he directed
attention to his E. Vaupeli, which he thought to be very distinct
in the structure of its arms. H. Vaupeli, if it is a good species,
which we doubt, agrees in its arms and pinnules closely with H.
constrictus and IT. laxus, with either of which it may be identical,
but not with H. simplex, as suggested by S. A. Miller. The
species heretofore referred to Heterocrinus vary in the composi-
tion of their radials, in the structure of arms and pinnules, and
in the column. Heterocrinus simplex, Hall's type, has five basals
of varying form, owing to irregularities in the radials. The
radials in two of the rays consist of a large single plate, two
others are divided into two sections, and the fifth one rests upon
the azygous plate, which agrees in size with the lower half of
the compound radials. The compound i^lates consist of two
pieces each, which together, agree closel}- in form and size with
the two single plates. The brachials are large ; they consist of
two nearly equal plates, united by syzj^gy, and support ten heavy,
simple arms. The arms, to their full length, are composed of
syzygial joints, which, as we think, were connected by suture and
not by articulation. The epizygal or pinnule-bearing pieces are
slightly wedge-shaped, and alternate with one another; the lower
or h3'pozygal ones rhomboidal, and their upper and lower sides
are parallel. Pinnules stout and comparatively long.

All other species heretofore referred to this genus, with the
exception of ^. canadensis, which may be identical with H. sim-
plex, have a somewhat different arm structure. Not only are the
pinnules given off at greater intervals, but they attain the size
and form of arms or armlets, which sometimes branch again, and
extend to the general height of the primary arms. The latter
agree also in having a stricth' pentagonal and pentapartite

130 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY Of [1886.

column, contrary to H. simplex^ in which the column is stouter,
almost circular, and regularly tripartite. The species with a
quinque-partite column are divisible again into two groups, the
one with a straight, comparatively small ventral tube, the other in
which the tube is thread-like, convoluted, and even in its coiled
state extending beyond the limits of the arms. We hold these
differences important enough to malvc them the basis for another
separation, proposing for the latter the genus OhiociHnus, with
H. laxus Hall = Ohiocrinus laxus as type, and for the other
the genus Stenocrinus with H. heterodachjlus JisiW ^= Stenocrinus
heterodactylus as type.

Heterocrinus inaequalis and H. arficulosus Billings have been
referred by us to Calceocrinus ; H. crassiis and sitbcrassus
to locrinus.

The genus Heterocrinus thus restricted may be defined as
follows : —

Revised Diagnosis. — Calyx small ; subcylindrical ; tapering but
slightl}' from the column upwards.

Basals five, more or less unequal, without underbasals ; the so-
called subbasals of Meek representing the upper stem joint.

Radials very irregular, and varying among the rays in number
as well as in size. There are two segments in the two antero-
lateral rays, while the three remaining rays have but one, this,
however, nearly as large as the two in the other rays. The two
plates at the right postero-lateral side consist of the az3gous
piece — the lower one — and of the radial, which upon its upper
side supports the brachials, giving off laterally a small ventral
tube. Arms ten, composed of single joints, alternately united bv
syz3^gy, with strong pinnules from every second joint.

Column tripartite, almost circular ; axial canal large, pentalo-
bate, the lobes directed interradially.

Locality.^ Position^ etc. — Trenton and Hudson River group of
America,

1859. Heterocrinus canadensis Billings, Geol. Rep. Can., Decade iv, p. 48, PI. 4,

fig. 5. -.-Trenton limest. Ottawa and Montreal, Canada.
184;i. H. simplex Hall, Geol. Repr. N. York,' vol. i, p. 280, PI. 76, figs. 2a-d; also

Geol. Surv. Ohio, Paleont. i, p. 7, PI. 1, figs. 4 a-c, 5 a-b, 6 a-b. — Hudson

River gr, Cincinnati, Ohio.
*1S7;'. H. grandis Meek, described as H. simplex var. grandis, Geol. Surv. Ohio,

Paleont. i, p. 9, PI. 1, fig. 6, and figured by Hall as H. simplex in the 24th

Rep. N. Y. State Mus. Nat. Hist. PI. .3, fig. 11.— Hudson River gr.

Cincinnati, Ohio. H. grandis occurs at a higher horizon, is more robust and

has shorter arm joints than H, simplex.

188G.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 131

STENOCRINUS, nov. gen.
(Syn. Heterocrinus in part).
{arci'6rT, nari'ow ; Kpivov, a lily).

Generic Diagnosis. — General form subcylindrical ; cal3x small;
arms long.

Basals five ; of a more regular form than in Heterocrinus,
angular at their superior margins. They form a cup, which
spreads but little from the column upwards.

Radials irregular, consisting of one or two plates ; two of the
rays — sometimes three — being composed of two segments each,
the others of only one. The single plates are almost as large as
any of the compound ones. Only four of the radials supported
upon the basals ; the fifth one smaller, resting upon the truncate
upper side of the azj-gous plate, and occupying toward the latter
a similar position as the two sections of the compound radials
toward each other. The smaller radial is transversely penta-
gonal, and resembles in outline a bifurcating plate. It supports
upon its sloping right side the brachials ; toward the left the
ventral sac as in locrinus. Brachials generally four to each ray,
the upper one axillary, and supporting the two main arms, which
sometimes branch again, and give off at regular intervals, from
alternate sides, strong, arm-like pinnules. All arm joints which
have no pinnules are strictly quadrangular, while the pinnule-
bearing joints have almost the form of bifurcating plates.

Axygous plate pentagonal, shorter than adjoining radials.
Ventral tube, near the base composed of qnadrangular, heavy
plates, generally longer and narrower than the brachials. The
structure of the tube in its upper portions not known. The plates
of the ventral side have been observed only in H.juvenis, in which
they are composed of five comparatively larga interradial pieces,
enclosing a small oral plate as in Haplocrinus. Column large,
pentagonal, pentapartite, the sutures directed interradially, giving
to the segments a radial position. Axial canal large, pentagonal ;
angles interradial.^

Geological Position^ etc. — Stenocrinus is known only from the
Silurian of America.

We refer to Stenocrinus the following species, all previously

1 The columnar canal of Stenocrinus is correctly represented in fig. 12 of
PI. vi, not, however, in fig. 13, in wliich the rays should be directed inter-
radially. «

132 PROCEEDINGS QP THfi ACADEMY OP [1886.

described under HeterocrinuSj and noted under that genus in

Rev. I, p. 70 :—

*Stenocrinus heterodactylus, the U'pe of the genus, and its variety prophi-
qnut ; *S. exilis Hall (not Meek): •'S. juvenis; ■S, Milleri, and perhaps
Heterocrinus tenuis Billings.

To these we add : —

*1883. Stenocr. bellvillensis (W. R. Billings), Heterocr. bellvillensis, Ottawa
Field Naturalist's Club. Trans. No. 4, p. 49 with plate. — Trenton liniest.
Bellville, Ont.

*(?)1879. S. genioulatus (Ulrich), Heterocr. geniculatus, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat.
Hist. (April), PI. 7, fig. V^. — Utiea Shale. Cincinnati, Ohio. This species
differs too much from the other species to be left under Stenocrinus, but the
only specimen which we examined was not sufficiently perfect to warrant a
satisfactory generic description.

*1882. S. pentagonus (Ulrich), Heterocr. pentagonus, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat.
Hist., p. 176, Pi. 5, figs. 10, 10((. — Hudson River gr. Cincinnati, Ohio.

OHIOCRINUS, nov. gen.
(Heterocrimis Hall, in part.)

This form is closely allied to Stenocrinus^ but differs from that
in two points : the form of its arm appendages, and in the con-
struction of its ventral sac.

The plates of the calyx are arranged as in Stenocrinus, and
also the column is strong, pentangular and pentapartite. The
arms, which are ten, do not bifurcate, and are provided with stout
pinnules, given off alternately from every fourth or fifth plate. The
pinnules are long, bifurcating, and extend to the tips of the arms.

The ventral tube rests upon the left sloping side of the right
posterior radial; it ascends spirally, and in such a manner that
adjoining convolutions touch each other, being perhaps suturally
connected. It is composed of numerous hexagonal pieces,
arranged alternately, and in longitudinal rows.

Column strong ; indistinctly pentangular ; pentapartite. The
older stem joints are rather long pieces which have a well-marked
pentapetaloid concavity upon their articular faces. The j^ounger
joints consist of five small convex leaflets, disconnected laterally,
which fill the concavity of the older joints, exposing to view along
the lateral face of the column a small trigonal piece. A similar,
if not the same, columnar structure is found in Stenocrinus.^

' Ohiocrinus resembles Stenocrinus very closely, and can only be upheld
by the form of the ventral tube. We never saw the appendage of Steno-
crinus, but Mr. S. A. Miller claims it to be distinct, and this induced us to
make the separation.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 133

Geological Position, etc Restricted to the Lower Silurian of

America.

We place in this genus the following species :

*iS(i«. Ohiocrinus constrictus (Hall), Heterocrinus constrictus, 24th Rep. N. Y.

St. Cab. Nat. Hist., ]>. 210; also Geol. Surv. Ohio, Paleont., vol. i, p. 3, PI.

i, figs. 10 a h; W. k Sp., Rev. I, p. 15.— Hudson River gr. Cincinnati,

(Ihio.
»I8t5(). 0. laxus (Hall). — Type of the genus. — Heterocrinus laxus, 24th Rep. N. Y.

St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 211, pi. 5, fig. 15; also Greol. Suiv. Ohio, Paleont.,

vol. i, p. 14. PI. i, figs. 8« h.—\N. & Sp., Rev., I, p. 70.— Hudson River gr,

Cincinnati, Ohio.
*1882. 0. Gehanus (ririch), Heterocr. (locrinus) oehanus, Journ. Cincin. Hoc. Nat.

Hist., vol. v, p. 175, PI. 5, fig. 9.— S. A. Miller, 1883, Heterocr. oehanus,

Cat. Amer. PalaMiz. Foss. (Edit, ii), p. 283. — Hudson River gr. Cincinnati,

Ohio.

lOCRINUS Hall.

1879. Revision of the Palseocr., Pt. I, p. 70.

1882. P. Herb. Carpenter, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London, p. 306.

1883. W. & Sp., Amer. Joiim. Sl-i., vol.xxvi (Novbr.), pp. 370, 370.

The genus locrinus must be slightly modified, as stated in our
recent notes " on Hybocrinus, Baerocrinus and Hoplocrinus.^''
In that paper, to which we refer for further particulars, we gave
at some length the reasons which impelled us to regard the large
plate, which we had formerly called a radial, as representing the
azj^gous plate, and the smaller pentangular plate above, as the right
posterior radial.

Walcott discovered lately a new generic form,- for which he pro-
posed the name Merocrinus. It agrees with locrinus in the
structure of the azygous side, and would probably be identical
with that genus if it had not well-developed underbasals. That
underbasals are entirely absent in locrinus is plainly shown by
its strictly pentagonal column, in which the angles have a radial
position.

Revised Diagnosis. — Dorsal cup broadly spreading and per-
fectly sj'mmetrical to the top of the second circlet of plates ; it
is short, and resembles an inverted pentagonal pyramid with the
five sides deeply concave.

Basals small, nearly equal. Radials five, four of them of equal
form and height, comparatively large, strong and pentagonal ;
their upper sides truncated throughout their entire width for the
reception of the brachials. Adjoining these radials, in the same

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

ring, is the azygous plate, which has not only the form but gene-
ral appearance of the four radials. It supports upon its truncate
upper side the fifth radial, that of the right posterior my. The
latter, which resembles in form a large bifurcating plate, sup-
ports upon its right upper side the brachials, and toward the
left the first plate of the anal tube, being thus a radial, but partW
with interradial functions. The radials in all five rays are fol-
lowed by five to six brachials, the upper one bifurcating, the
others quadrangular, all wider than long, and those of adjoining
rays meeting laterall3^ Tiiese are succeeded by the regular arm
plates.

Arms long, gradually tapering to the tips ; bifurcating at regu-
lar intervals, and most of their branches bifurcating once or
twice again ; each division extending to the general height of the
arms. Arm joints quadrangular, resembling those of the brachi-
als, but somewhat narrower.

The ventral sac, at its posterior side, consists of a single row
of rather large and strong plates, extending up to the full length
of the sac, and forming all the way up a keel-like projection.
In general appearance, these plates, which rest against the sloping
side of a radial, resemble the brachials and arm plates, although
they are somewhat higher and not as wide. Both sides of the
ridge-like projection are indented for the reception of other plates.
At each side there are two pieces connected to each median plate,
one abutting against the middle part, and the other placed oppo-
site the suture. These plates are A^ery short and wide, longitu-
dinally arranged ; they are curved so as to form a deep transverse
groove, their lower sides turned up and forming a transverse
ridge. The plates do not meet horizontally, but have a narrow
open space at the top of the ridge, which in perfect specimens is
covered by a row of minute pieces, apparently with a pore or
small opening at the place of juncture with the larger plates.
The sac is composed of five rows of these plates, which are con-
nected laterally by a straight suture all the way up.

Column strong, sharply pentagonal, its angles in a line with
the radial plates.

We add the following species to our former list: —

ISSy. locrinus trentonensis Walcott, Adv. sheets of 35th Rep. N. Y. St. Cab. Nat.
Hist., p. 4, PI. 17, tigs. 7, 8.— Trenton limest. Trenton Falls, N. Y.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135

Family XIX.— ANOMALOCRINIDJE W. and Sp.

ANOMALOCRINUS Meek and Worthen.

1879. Revision Palseocr., Pt. i, p. 72.

1879. S. A. Miller, Journ. Cincin. Soc, Xat. Hist. (Decbr., ]). G).

1882. S. A. Miller, ibid. (April, p. 14).

This senus differs from the Heterocrinidse in the form of the
calyx, which is depressed and not obconical, and in the arrange-
ment of the pinnules. It agrees with them in the plates at the
azygous side, which we misunderstood in our former description, .
and this renders a redescription necessary, which we substitute
in place of our former one.

Bevised Diagnosis. — General form depressed, calj'x compara-
tively large, rather shallow, subglobose ; arrangement of plates
extremely irregular, scarcel}' two plates being of equal size.

Basals five, small, subequal, parti}' hidden by the column.

Radials irregular, all differing in size and form ; simple or com-
pound ; sometimes divided vertically. The left antero-lateral
radial is compound, composed of two pieces ; that of the opposite
side and the anterior radial are simple. The left postero-lateral
radial is the largest plate in the calyx, and either simple or
bisected verticall}^ composed of two nearly equal parts. The
lower segment of the left antero-lateral radial is subquadrangular,
the angle along the basi-radial suture being so obtuse as to form
almost a straight line ; upper side truncate and slightly convex.
The upper segment is irregularly hexagonal, truncate above and
below, much wider at the lower than at the uj^per side, widest
across the lateral angles. The two together have almost the
dimensions of the single radials, but, in place of being wider than
high, they are higher than wide, with a narrow concavity for the
reception of the brachials. The fifth radial — the right postero-
lateral one — rests against the truncate ui:)per side of a large
az3'gous plate, and as this stands in line with, and has nearly- form
and proportions of the lower section of the compound radial, and
the radial plate the form of its upper segment, the two appear in
the specimen as if forming jointly another compound radial.
(See Diagr. Rev. i, PI. ii).

There is also among the rays a great diversity in the number
of brachials, and this gives to the specimen that abnormal, irregu-
lar outline which is so characteristic of the genus. Some of the
rays have two, others three brachials, while the right posterior
ray has generally four or more.

136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Arms long ; bifurcating at regular intervals ; widely divergent,
rather stout at their origin ; tapering upward. They are composed
of a succession of rather long, quadrangular pieces, interrupted
only by the axillaries which are pentangular, and which divide
the main arm, and each division of the arm, into two equal parts.
The pinnules are slender, composed of long pieces, given off from
every arm joint, but at one side only in succession — not alter-
nately— until the next bifurcation of the arm, when on both
divisions they all change to the opposite side. By this an-ange-
ment there are always 8 to 10 pinnules in succession, first on one
side, then on the other. The first pinnule occurs on the second
arm plate, not on the first, but every succeeding plate is pinnu-
lated with the exception of the bifurcating ones. The proximal
pinnule after each bifurcation is considerably heavier and longer,
almost arm-like, and bifurcating, the others are simple. The arm
furrows are shallow but wide, only one side having sockets for
the reception of pinnules.^

The ventral sac is tubular, and rests upon the left side of the
posterior radial as in the Heterocrinidse. The proximal plate of
the tube is large, subquadrangular, and is succeeded by other
apparently large pieces. Of the plates at the ventral side little
is known. S. A. Miller mentions two rows of small pieces near
the ventral tube, but, as nothing is known as to their arrangement,
they may be covering plates.

Column very large, almost circular, pentapartite, highly orna-
mented ; central canal large, star-shaped, the projections located
interradially. The structure of the column along the axial canal
resembles that of Barycrinus and Vasocrinus, with which
Anomalocrinus agrees also in the form of the calyx.

Geological Position^ etc. — Lower Silurian of America. The
only known species are : Anomalocrinus caponi/ormis Lyon, and
A. incurvus Meek and Worthen, which have been previously
noted.

Family XX.— BELEMNOCRINID^ S. A. Miller.

S. A. Miller has proposed for the genus Belemnocrinus a
separate family, in which we fully agree. It cannot be placed in
any of the other groups, without depriving them of their best
distinctive characters. It forms a link between Heterocrinidse

1 Our descriptions of arms and pinnules in this interesting genus were
made from a most beautiful specimen in the collection of J. H. Harris, Esq.,
of Waynesville, O., who had the kindness to send it to us for description.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 137

and Cyathocrinidae, resembling the former in the absence of
underbasals and in the arm-structure, the Cyathocrinidae in the
arrangement of plates at the azygous side and of the ventral
tube. As the most characteristic features we mention the
extremely small visceral cavity, in which the genus resembles
Apiocrinus of the Neocrinoidea ; the comparatively large size of
the basals ; the absence of underbasals ; the position of the
azygous plate in line with the five radials; the large porous
ventral tube, and the condition of the pinnules, which are given
off regularly at certain intervals, not alternately from every joint.

Belemnocrinus was referred by White to the Cyathocrinidae,
and he described the calyx to be composed of three rings of
plates. We have shown in 187T that the part which he took to
be the " basals " is the upper stem-joint, and that the dorsal cup
consists of only two rings of plates. We further directed atten-
tion to the affinities between Belemnocrinus and the recent genus
Rhizocrinus, which had been pointed out also by Pourtales, in
the Memoirs of the Museum of Comp. Zoology, vol. iv, No. 9,
p. 29. The construction of the dorsal cup in the two genera is
very similar, however, in Bhizocrinus, the sutures between the
basals are fused together; while in Belemnocrinus they are
plainly visible, and the former has no anal plate and no ventral sac.

Belemnocrinus was placed by Zittel among the Poteriocrinidas,
although it has neither the arm structure nor the pinnules of that
family, nor the azygous plate, and not even underbasals.

The name Belemnocrinus was used in 1876 by Munier-Chalmes
(Jour. Conch., Ser. 3, vol. xvi, p. 102) for certain basal plates,
evidently of a Blastoid, and changed by Oehlert to Belocrinus,
1882 (Extr. du Bull. Soc. Geol. de France, Ser, 3, p. 362).

BELEMNOCRINUS White.
(PI. 5, figs. 10 and 11.)

1862. White, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. ix, p. 14.
1866. Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 251.
1868. Meek and Worthen, Geol. Rep. Illinois, iii, p. 463.
1877. W. and Sp., Amer. Jour. Sci. (April), p. 253.
1879. Zittel, Handbuch der Palseont., i, p. 362.

(Not Belemnocrinus Mun.-Chalmes =^ Belocrinus Oehlert.)

Generic Diagnosis. — Dorsal cup small, narrow, sometimes
almost tubular.
10

138 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Basals five, very large, long, narrow, of somewhat irregular
shape, forming an ovoid to cylindrical cup. The cup is nearl}^
solid, having only a small central canal, and a shallow subconical
excavation at its upper end, the latter forming a part of the
viscei'al cavity.

Radials five, always smaller than the basals, enclosing an anal
plate. They are subquadrangular, slightly excavated at their
upper side, and support four (exceptionally five) brachials, of
which the upper one is bifurcating and gives off the arms. Arms
two to each ray, simple throughout, composed of compound
joints, with one or two syzygies in each joint ; the upper segment
giving ofi" a strong pinnule. The oblique upper faces of the
epizjgal or pinnules-bearing joints are arranged alternately, and
this gives to the arms a strongly waving, zigzag outline. At the
extremities of the arm the pinnules are generally given off from
every joint. Pinnules long, arm-like, bifurcating once or twice,
like arms. With the arms the pinnules also correspond in length,
all of them extending to the same height.

Anal plate resting between two of the radials and upon one of
the basals. This plate, which resembles the radials in form, sup-
ports a large ventral sac, composed of numerous hexagonal
plates, alternately arranged, with slit-like openings along their
lateral edges, which meet with corresponding slits in the adjoin-
ing plates.

Other parts of the ventral side unknown. Column with or
without lateral cirrhi ; more or less sharply pentangular, the
outer angles radial, the rays of the central canal and the columnar
cirrhi directed interradially.

Geological Position^ etc. — Known only from the two divisions
of the Burlington limestone.

1877. Belemnocrinus florifer W. and Sp., Amer. Journ. Sci. (Ser. 3), Vol. xiii, p.

256. — Upper Burlington limestone. Burlington, la.
1877. B. Pourtalesi W. and Sp., Amer. Journ. Sci. (Ser. 3), Vol. xiii, p. 258. — Lower

Burlington limest. Burlington, Iowa.
1862. B. typus White (type of the genus), Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. ix, p.

14.— "W. and Sp , 1877, Amer. Journ. Sci. (Ser. 3), Vol. xiii, p. 254.— Upper

Burlington limest. Burlington, Iowa.
1866. B. Whitei Meek and Worthen, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 251 ; also Geol. Rep.

Illinois, iii, p. 463, PI. 18, figs. 4 a, h, c. — Lower Burlington limest. Bur-

lingtoD; Iowa.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 139

(■?) HOLOCRINUS W. and Sp.
(iiXui solid, Kpifui/ a lily.)

The above name is proposed to include a species whicb was
lately described from rather imperfect specimens by Mr. Picard,
under the name of Encrinus Beyrichi, but which certainly is no
Encrimis. We entertain little doubt that the species must be
referred to the Belemnocrinidse ; we are, however, not quite so
sure that it is generically distinct from the typical form, which
depends upon the presence or absence of the anal plate. No
anal plate has been described in this species, and it is more than
probable that none was present. It perhaps represents one of
those transition forms, which in their earlier life were good Palaeo-
crinoids, but by resorption of the interradial plates attained, to
some extent, the characteristics of the earlier Neocrinoidea.

Generic Diagnosis.^ — Dorsal cup strictly pentahedral ; con-
stricted above the basals. Basals large, forming an almost solid
subglobular body, without underbasals. Radials very small,
quadrangular, supporting three to four narrow brachials, the
upper one bifurcating. There are two arms to each ray which
remain simple. Arms thin, composed of short, cuneate joints,
with rather stout pinnules.

Column pentangular, and, as in Belemnocrinus Jlorifer, pro-
vided with long cirrhi, given off at intervals in whorls from the
nodal joints, and extending up, and partly covering, the calyx
and the lower portions of the arms.

The only known species is :

»1SS4. Holocrinus Beyrichi (Picard), W. and Sp., Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. geolog.
Gesellsch., Jabrg. 1883. — Mufchelkalk. Sondershausen, Germ.

Family XXI.— CYATHOCRINID.S1 Roemer.

(Emended Zittel, emended W. and Sp.)
a. Dendrocrinites.
MEROCRINUS Walcott.
1883. Adv. sheet 35th Rep. N. Y. State Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 2.

In the arrangement of the plates at the azygous side and in
the construction of its ventral tube, this genus has close affinities
with the Heterocrinidse, but differs from them in having under-

^ Our diagnosis is made from the figure of Mr. Picard' s imperfect
specimen.

140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

basals. In addition to Walcott's typical species, we refer to
3Ierocrinus: Dendrocrinus curtus Ulrich.

Generic Diagnosis. — Dorsal cup very small ; short and extend-
ing laterall}^ but little beyond the periphery of the upper stem
joint.

Underbasals five, comparatively large, seen distinctly in a side
view. Basals short, all hexagonal ; alternating with four of the
radials and the az3'gous plate, which all are of similar form, pen-
tangular, wider than long. The four radials support upon their
truncate upper face a row of brachials, the az3'gous plate from
the same level the fifth radial. The right posterior radial has
the same form as the azj'gous plate, but, while the latter is
angular below, the radial has an angular upper side, giving off
toward the left the ventral tube, and toward the right a row of
brachials. There are generally six or more brachials to each
ray, composed of short quadrangular pieces, except the upper
which is axilla^3^ Arms long, bifurcating ; without pinnules ;
tapering toward the tips ; composed of quadrangular joints.
The bifurcations take place at regular intervals, and both arms
of the same division are of equal size.

Column round, very strong, composed of unusually narrow
joints.

Locality^ Position, etc. — Lower Silurian of America.

*1879. Merocrinus curtus (Ulrich), Dendrocrinus curtus, Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist.,
vol. ii (April), PI. 7, fig. 14. — Utica shale. Cincin., 0.

1883. M. corroboratus Waleott, Adv. sheet 35th Rep. N. Y. St. Cab. Nat. Hist.,
p. 4, PI. 17, fig. 6.— Trenton limest. Trenton Falls, N. Y.

1883. M. typus Waleott, Ibid., p. 3, PI. 17, fig. 5.— Trenton limest. Trenton Falls,
N. Y.

CARABOCRINUS E. Billings.
(Revised by W. and Sp.)

1856. E. Billings, Rep. Geol. Surv. Canada, p. 275.

1859, E. Billings, Ibid., Decade iv, p. 30.

1879. W. and Sp. Revision I, p. 143.

1881. Walter R. Billings, Trans. Ottawa Field Natur. Club, p. 34.

In Part I of this Revision we placed Garabocrinus among the
doubtful genera. It was founded by E. Billings upon certain
peculiarities among plates of the azygous side, resembling other-
wise closely Gyalhocrinus. When Billings proposed the genus,
the azygous side had been observed only in a single specimen,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141

and as the plates were arranged very differentl}'' from those of
other genera, we suspected that the type specimen was a mal-
formed or recuperated Gyathocrinus. This view, however, must
be given up, since other specimens have been found which show
the plates under similar conditions. Mr. Walter R. Billings
informed us, in 1880, of the discovery of two more specimens in
which the azygous plates were arranged as in E. Billings' type.
These specimens were afterwards noticed by him in the Trans-
actions of the Ottawa Field Naturalist's Club of 1881, p. 35.

Carabocrinus was described by E. Billings— using our termin-
ology— to be constructed of five underbasals, four of them penta-
gonal, the fifth hexagonal ; five basals, three of them hexagonal,
one heptagonal and one pentagonal, the latter smaller than the
others ; of five radials ; three azygous plates, one of them sup-
ported upon the hexagonal underbasal, a second upon the small
pentagonal basal, the third between two radials. Consulting the
generic diagram, Decade iv, p. 30, we find that the smull, penta-
gonal basal (subradial plate of Billings) has scarcely half the
size of the other basals, and the first azygous plate is placed at
its left side, contrary to all other Cyathocrinidte. This structure
seemed to us so improbable that before accepting it we applied
to Prof. Whiteaves of the Canada Survey Museum for the type
specimen. We now found that in Billings' diagram the plate in
question is represented considerably larger than it is in the
specimen, the so-called " azygous plate," to the left of the former,
smaller, that the basals at their lower sides form in the specimen
a much more obtuse angle, almost a straight line, and that the
underbasals are comparatively smaller.

From our diagram it will be seen, that the second or basal ring
really consists of six plates, four of them equal, the fifth one nearly
as high but somewhat narrower, the sixth subquadrangular, small,
not more than half the size of the former. That the laiter piece
which is united with the az^-gous plate by a horizontal suture is
a basal — subradial of Billings — seems to us exceedingly doubtful,
the more as the adjoining plate meets all the requirements of a
basal. This plate, which Billings called the first azygous piece,
and which we take to be the posterior basal in conformit}^ with
other Cyathocrinidge, has an azygous plate at its right side,
and this supports with its right upper sloping side a special anal
plate. The small plate within the basal ring, which is only known

142 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

in this genus, is, we think, a supplementary azygous plate of no
fundamental importance, a plate bearing to the regular azygous
.plate similar relations as the small accessor}^ interradials in some
specimens oi Aychaeocrinus sculjjtus to the regular interradials.

We offer the following : —

Revised Generic Diagnosis. — TJnderbasals five, of vai'iable form
and size ; four of them quadrangular, but only three equal ; the
fourth one, that facing the azygous side, narrower ; the fifth pen-
tagonal, truncate above. Carahocrinus is closely allied to Den-
docriniis and Homocrinus, but differs from both in the number
and arrangement of its azj^gous plates.

Basals five, four of them hexagonal ; the one toward the right
of the azygous plates heptagonal ; that on the left side somewhat
smaller, truncate below, and occupying the full width of the upper
side of the pentagonal underbasal.

Radials heptagonal, the upper side excavated for the reception
of the brachials, which occupj' about one-third the width of the
plJite. The brachials, so far as known, consist of two or some-
times three pieces, the upper one sharply wedgeform. Arms,
compared with the size of the calyx, remarkablj^ short ; composed
of quadrangular joints with parallel sutures ; bifurcating; tapering
gradually to their tips. The branching is similar to that of Cya-
thocrinus, and the arms throughout, as in that genus, are devoid
of pinnules.

Plates at the azygous side three. A supplementary azygous
plate rests between the basals and extends to half their height.
The regular azygous plate is placed between the upper lateral
portions of the five basals, and upon the supplementary piece ;
supporting with its left upper side the anal plate, with its right
side the right postero-lateral radial. The anal plate resembles the
radials in form and proportion, but its upper face is irregularly
convex, and is bordered by a row of small pieces which form
a part of the ventral tube.

Column comparatively small, obscurely pentangular, with a
large, sharply pentagonal canal. The column is quinquepartite,
the sutures arranged alternately with those of the underbasals.

Locality, Position, etc. — Known only from the Trenton lime-
stone of Canada, but we found detached plates, apparentl}' of this
genus, in rocks of the same age near Knoxville, Tonn.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 143

The following species have been described : —

1856. Carabocrinus radiatus Billings. Type of the genus, Geol. Surv. Canada, p.
276; also 1859, ibid. i>ecaueiv, p. 30, PI. 2, figs. .3 a-c ; also W. and Sp., Re-
vision i, p. 144. — Trenton limest. Ottawa, Can.

1859. (?) C. tuberculatus Billings, Geol. Surv. Can., Decade iv, p. 3.3, PI. 10, figs.
2 a-c. — Hudson River.gr. Island ofAnticosti.

1859. C. Van Courtlandti Billings, Geol. Surv. Can., Decade iv, p. 32, PI. 2, fig. 4.—
Trenton limest. Township of McNab, Can.

EUSPIROCRINUS Angl., Rev. I, p. 143.
AMPHERISTOCRINUS Hall.
1882, 11th Geol. Rep. Indiana of 1881 by Collett, p. 278.

This is one of the few genera of the Cyatliocrinidae which have
only three underbasals, and this distinguishes it readily from
Homocriniis , with which it agrees in the plates of the azygous
side.

Generic Diagnosis. — Underbasals three, two equal and with
truncate upper sides ; the third one-half smaller, angular above.
Basals five ; two of them resting entirely upon the two large
underbasals ; pentagonal ; the two alternating with them hexa-
gonal ; the posterior one, which has a truncate upper side, hep-
tagonal. The latter is larger and supports toward the right a
pentangular azygous plate ; at its truncate upper side a large anal
piece ; along the left side a radial. The azygous plate is followed
b}^ the anal plate, which is laterally connected with the right pos-
terior radial. The radials are pentagonal, with a small semi-
circular excavation for the reception of the arms. Onl}' one
brachial is known, which is quadrangular and extremely small.
All other parts are unknown.

The only known species is : —

1882. Ampheristociinus typus Hall, Uth Ann. Geol. Rep. Indiana by Collett, p.
278, PI. 15, figs. 17-18. — Niagara gr. AValdron, Indiana.

DENDROCRINUS Hall, Rev. I, p. 75.

The following species must be added to our list : —

*1856. Dendrocrinus angulatus (Billings), Palaeocrinus angulatus, Geol. Surv.
Canada, p. 269: also Decade IV, PI. 3, figs. 6 « A. — Cyathocrinus angu-
latus, Rev. I, p. 85. — Trenton limestone. Ottawa, Canada. — In examining
the tvpe-speciuien in the Canada Survey Museum, we found it to be a good
Dendrocrinus. Toward the right of the basals, underneath the postero-
lateral radial, it has a good-sized azygous plate, which at its left sloping
upper side supports an anal piece, exactly as in Dendrocrinus. The s[iecieg
has a strong ventral tube, of which only the transverse section is seen,

144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

1881. D. erraticus S. A. Miller, Joum. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist. (December), 1881. —
Hudson River group. Cincinnati, Ohio.

1880. D. navigiolum S. A. Miller, Joum. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist. (October), p. 4,
PI. 7, figs. 5, 6 a. — Utica slate. Cincinnati, Ohio.

1883. D. retractilis Walcott, 35th Rep. N. Y. St. Mas. Nat. Hist. (Extr. p. 5), PI.
17, fig. 4.— Trenton limest. Trenton Falls, N. Y.

HOMOCRINUS Hall, Rev. I, p. 77.

This genus has been lately so often confounded with Poterio-
crinus, that for better information, we point out their distinctive
characters. Homocrinus differs from Poteriocrinus in the more
slender form of the calyx, in having no plates of the ventral tube
within the line of the first radials, in being provided with horse-
shoe-shaped articular facets, pierced by a round dorsal canal, and
in having at least three brachials. Contraiy to Poteriocrinus^
the arms are not pinnulated, and they are composed of quadran-
gular joints with parallel lines of union. Its relations are much
closer with Parisocrinus^ which, however, has no separate dorsal
canal, and the first plate of the tube rests within the calyx.

We add the following species : —

*1879. Homocrinus ancilla (Hall), Dendrocrinus ancilla, Trans. Albany Inst., vol.
X (Abstr. p. 9); also 11th Geol. Rep. Indiana by Collett, p. 271, PI. 15, fig.
19. — Niagara gr. Waldron, Indiana.

*1858. H. curtus (Miiller), Poteriocrinus curtus, Verb. d. naturh. Verein f. Rhein-
lande xii, p. 80, PI. 10, figs. 2-3 ; also Neue Echinod. Eifl. Kalk., p. 230, PI.
2, fig. 3.— Schultze, 1866, Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 46, PI. 5.— W. and Sp.,
Parisocrinus curtus, Rev. 1, p. 115. — Devonian. Eifel, Germany.

*1882. H. davisanus (S. A. Miller), Poteriocrinus davisanus, Journ. Cincin. Soc.
Nat. Hist., p. 226, PI. 9, figs. 4, 4 a-b.— Upper Helderberg gr. Deputy,
Indiana.

*1882. H. nettelrothanus (S. A. Miller), Peteriocrinus nettelrothanus, Journ.
Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist., p. 227, PI. 9, figs. 5, 5 a.— Upper Helderberg gr.
Deputy, Indiana.

*1876. H. nucleus (Hall), Dendrocrinus nucleus, 1st Edit. 28th Rep. N. Y. St. Mus.
Nat. Hist. PI. 15, figs. 7-9.— Cyathocrinus nucleus, 2d Edit, ibid., p. 136.
— Niagara gr. AValdron, Indiana. The arrangement of the plates at the
azygous interradius are not like in Cyathocrinus as Hall suggested, but
exactly like in Homocrinus.

*1863. H. polyxo (Hall), Cyathocrinus polyxo, New Sp. Foss. Niagara group, p. 5;
28th Rep. N. Y. St. Cab. Nat. Hist. 1st Edit., PI. 15, figs. 10-17.— Ibid. 2d
Edit. p. 135; also W. and Sp., Rev. i, p. 87; 11th Rep. Indiana by Collett,
1882, p. 264, PI. 14, figs. 10-17.— Niagara gr. Waldron, Indiana.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 146

PARISOCEINUS W. and Sp., Rev. i, p. 115.

Closely allied to Eomocrinus is Parisocrinus, which we made
a subsection of Poteriocrinus. In doing so, we were not aware
that this form is devoid of pinnules. In our descriptions we
only pointed out the great resemblance which it has to Gyatho-
crimis, especially in the branching of the arms, but finding the
azygous side constructed as in Poteriocrinus, we placed it with
that genus. More perfect specimens which have since been dis-
covered leave not the least doubt that it is very distinct from
Poteriocrinus J and a true Cyathocrinoid.

Revised Generic Diagnosis. — General form turbinate. Under-
basals large, equal. Basals five, three of them hexagonal; the
two connecting with the azygous side heptagonal. The radials
are rarely larger than the basals ; four of them are equal, the fifth
one has an additional side for the reception of the lower plate of
the ventral tube. Articular face horseshoe-shaped, supporting a
row of three brachials, of which the upper one is axillary. Arms
composed of long slender joints, branching like those of Gyatho-
crinus and without pinnules. The azygous side is arranged as
in Poteriocrinus, with three plates in the calyx. Yentral tube
long, cylindrical, composed of alternately arranged rows of hexa-
gonal pieces, with a pore at each angle. Column round.

Geological Position, etc. — Subcarboniferous. America and
England.

We place here Parisocrinus intermedius, P. nereus, P. per-
plexus, P. tenuibrachiatus, P. quinquangularis, P. radiatus and
P. salignoideus ; but Poteriocrinus curtus, which we referred to
it in Pt, I, p. 115, is a Eomocrinus.

b. Botryocrinites.

ATELESTOCRINUS, no v. gen.

'aTc\c(TTOs, incomplete ; Kplvov, a lily.

PI. 6, fig. 4, and PI. 9, fig. 4.

We have had, for several years, a very remarkable Crinoid
from the Burlington limestone, which could not be placed in any
of the established genera. At first we took it to be an abnormal
specimen, with only four radials, and a small non-arm-bearing

l46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

plate at the anterior side, and therefore did not describe it. It
resembles Belemnocrinus in its general appearance, but differs in
having underbasals, and euriousl}' enough, these have a similar
cylindrical form, and are as solid as the basals in that interesting
genus.

We have since obtained from the Burlington and Keokuk transi-
tion bed near Burlington, and from the lower part of the Keokuk
limestone proper of Tennessee, two additional specimens, clearly
of the same genus, but of a different species. Both specimens
show the same irregular structure, i. e., four arm-bearing radials,
and in line with them a small azygous, non-arm-bearing plate,
thus proving that the apparent irregularity is a persistent char-
acter.

Generic Diagnosis. — Form of calj^x elongate, bell-shaped, the
sides concave, constricted along the suture between basals and
underbasals. Underbasals five, large, forming an almost solid
ovo-cylindrical body, pierced onl}^ by a longitudinal canal. Basals
long and narrow, widening above, irregular in form ; three of
them hexagonal, two heptagonal. Radials four, of nearly equal
size, with an obtuse facet covering the greater part of the width
of the plate. Anterior radial non-arm-bearing. Like the regular
radials, it alternates with the basals, has the same general height,
but less than half their width. Brachials from two to four, ex-
ceptionally five ; comparatively strong ; with parallel articular
lines, except the upper one, which is axillary. Main arms eight,
which from every second joint, alternately, give off armlets, or
arm-like pinnules of less than half the size of the main arms, but
extending to the same height and branching. The arm joints,
from which the branches are given off, are formed almost like
axillary plates, one side, however, being shorter and slightly more
obtuse. The alternate joints are quadrangular. Whether these
and the axillaries are united by sj^zygy, could not be ascertained
from the specimens.

Azj^gous plate large, resting between the upper sloping sides of
two basals, and against the right posterior radial. It supports
towards the left the anal plate, and at its truncate upper side the
first plate of the tube. Nothing is known of the ventral side.
Column obtusely pentangular, with a medium-sized central canal.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. I4t

Attelesocrinus delicatus, nov. sp

Calyx bell-sbapecl ; twice as high as wide, greatly constricted
along the sutures between basals and underbasals. Underbasals
forming a comparatively long ovo-cjdindrical body. Basal cup
funnel-shaped, resting upon the underbasals as if proceeding from
their inner cavity. The basals are delicate plates, elongate, gradu-
ally increasing in width. Arm-bearing radials wider than high ;
each one supporting two brachials. The latter fill nearly the
entire width of the preceding plate, and are twice as wide as the
true arm plates. Anterior radial narrow, less than half the width
of the arm-bearing radials. Arms two to the ray, tapering
gradually to their tips, where they become extremely delicate;
they have a waving outline, are composed of long joints, and
give off armlets alternately from every second plate. All armlets
extend to the tips of the arms, and branch once or twice. Their
size along the lower part of the arms is only half that of the main
arms, but higher up they are of almost equal thickness. Column
obtusely pentangular.

Geological Position^ etc. — Lower Burlington limestone. Burling-
ton, Iowa.

Atelestocrinus robustus, nov. sp., PI. 9, fig. 4.

Larger and much more robust than the preceding species ; less
constricted between basals and underbasals ; the form of the
latter, taken together, more oblate. Basals twice as long as wide.
Arm-bearing radials heavy, wider than high ; the anterior radial
less than one-third the size of the others, hexagonal. Azygous
side with four plates in the calyx, two of them constituting parts
of the ventral tube ; alternately arranged. Brachials four ; three
of them quadrangular, the upper one axillarj^ ; all rather large,
but decreasing in size upwards. Arms long, comparativel}^ heavy
at the base, but tapering rapidl}^ to the tips, where they become
very delicate. They are composed of quadrangular, rounded
joints, with parallel sutures, giving off armlets alternately from
every second joint. The armlets are much thinner, and more
pinnule-like than in A. delicatus, but extend like those to the
height of the arms, and bifurcate in a similar manner.

Geological Position, etc. — Burlington and Keokuk Transition
bed near Burlington, Iowa, and at the base of the Keokuk
limestone, White's Creek Spring, near Nashville, Tennessee.

148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

VASOCRINUS Lyon, Rev. i, p. 97.
STREPTOCRINUS W. and Sp.

(TrpcTTTds, twisted ; Kpivov, a lily.

Ophiocrinus Angelin, 1878. Rev. i, p. 97.

The name Ophiocrinus is preoccupied by Salter, who proposed
it in 1856 for a Rhodocrinoid from Southern Africa, which, how-
ever, is not properly defined. Semper also used the name in
1868 for a Neocrinoid, and again Charlesworth, but without pub-
lishing the description. The Swedish form, therefore, requires a
new name, for which we adopt Streptocrinus, in allusion to the
convoluted state of the ventral tube.

-'■Streptocrinus crotalurus (Angelin), Ophiocrinus crotalurus, Iconogr. Crin. Suec,
p. 24, PI. 4, figs. 8 a-c. — Upper Silurian. Gothland, Sweden.

BOTRYOCRINUS Angelin, Rev. I, p. 97.

SICYOCRINUS Angelin, Rev. I, p. 99.

BARYCRINUS Wachsmuth, Rev. I, p. 99.

The genus Barycrinus differs from other Cyathocrinidge in
having a shallow cal3'x, constructed of heavy plates, arms massive,
and composed of short joints. These differences are so marked
that we have strong doubts whether it ought to be placed in this
famil3^

The diagram of Barycrinus^ PL I, fig. 3, in Part I of this
Revision, is incorrect as to the axial canal, which should have
shown the processes radzai, instead of interradial. On page 101,
of Part I, we were made to say that the sections of the column
of Barycrinus are radial and the sutures interradial, whereas it
should be that the sections of the column are " interradial and
the sutures radial ; the opposite of Heterocrinus, in which they
are interradial."

No new species have been described since our list, but Arach-
nocrinus bulbosus (Hall), W. and Sp., was referred by S. A. Miller
erroneously to Barycrinus.

Cyathocrinus subtu^nidus M. and W., which we took to be a
Barycrinus, must be changed back to Cyathocrinus. The species
is closely allied to Cyathocrinus barydactylus W. and Sp.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 149

c. Cyathoerinites.
CYATHOCRINirS J. S. Miller, Rev. I, p. 79.

Through the kindness of Prof. Whiteaves we had an oppor-
tunity to examine E. Billings' tj'^pe specimens of Palseocrinua in
the Canada Surve}^ Museum. The specimen of P. striatus, upon
which the genus was proposed, is very imperfect, and may be a
Garabocrinus, Dendrocrinus, or a new genus. The construction at
the ventral side, to which E. Billings attached so much weight, is
that of the C_yathocrinidj3e generally. The^' nearly all have ventrally
five interradial plates resting against the radials, and alternate
rows of covering plates. Heretofore we have placed Palseocrinus
angulatus Billings under Cyathocrinus, but we satisfied ourselves
from the original specimen that it is a true Dendrocrinus. — Gyatho-
crinus fasciatus Hall, is a synonym of Macrostylocrinus Meeki ;
Gyathocrinushamiltonen.ns Worthen, a s^monymof Gyathocrinus
parvibrachiatus Hall. G. nucleus and C. polyxo Hall are now
referred by us to Homocr inus ; G. waldronensis to Macrostylo-
crinus. — Gyathocrinus graphicus Blgshy (not Hall) is Platycrinus
graphicus.

1879. (?) Gyathocrinus Harris! S. A. Miller, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. ii,
PL 13, fig. 2. — Keokuk liinest. Crawfordsville, Ind.

We leave this species for the present under Gyathocrinus, al-
though aware that it represents a very different generic form. In
some respects the species closely resembles Belemnocrinus
Jlorifer, and might almost be considered identical with it, if the
column did not indicate a dicyclic base. The column of both
species is sharply pentagonal, and beautifully fringed with whorls
of cirrhi, but while in Belemnocrinus Jiorifer the outer anoles of
the column are directed radially, the cirrhi interradially, the very
opposite is the case in Gyathocrinus (?) Harrisi. Neither can
the species be referred to our genus Atelestocrinus, as this is
remarkable for its large underbasals, nor in fact to any other
known to us, and we should make it the tj'pe of a new genus if
the two specimens which we examined were more perfect. The
specimen in the collection of Mr. Harris, which he had the kind-
ness to send us for examination, leaves us in doubt whether the
so-called azygous plate of Miller does not represent the anterior
radial. Among the Fistulata the anterior ray very frequently
supports a single arm, which either remains simple or branches

150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

on a level with the second bifurcation in the other rays, and this
may be the case here. Miller in describing the species, we think,
had in mind the Silurian genus locrinus^ in which the plates of
the ventral sac take the form of arm plates, but these are given off
laterall^^ from the azygous plate and not, as it would be here,
from the truncated upper side of the anal piece.

1869. Cyatbocrinus inspiratus {'!) Lyon, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, vol. xiii, p. 4.j7,

PI. 27, fig. k. — Keokuk gr. Crawfordsville, Ind. The description is not

snffioient for sjiecific identification.
1882. C. marshallensis Worthen, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. .33, Geol. Rep.

111., vol. vii, p. 310, PI. 30, fig. 4. — Kinderhook gr. Marshalltown, la. (A

connecting link with Parisocrinus.)
*1S44. C. Milleri McCoy (Atocrinus Milleri), Synops. Garb. Foss. Ireland, p. 123,

PI. 25; F. Roemer, 1855, Leth. Geogn. (2d Ed.), p. 246, PI. 4, fig. 12 ; Bronn's

Klassen d. Thierreichs, PI. 28, fig. 6.— Subcarb. Ireland.
(?)IS80. C. (?) stillativus White, Proceed. Nat. Mus. for 1879, p. 25S, PI. 1, figs. 9, 10;

12th Ann. Rep. Terr, for 1878, by Hayden (Author's Ed., p. 125, PI. 36, figs.

3 a, b). — Carboniferous. Collected 30 miles west of Humboldt, Kansas.

This is no Cyathocrinus ', it evidently belongs to the Poteriocrinidje, but

the specimen is too imperfect to be referred properly.
*1865. C. subtumidus Meek and Worthen. Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 151 ;

Barycrinus subumidus Meek and Worthen, 1868. ibid., p. 340; also Geol.

Rep. III., vol. V, p. 487, PI. 13, fig. 3; W. and Sp.; Barycrinus subtumidus,

1879, Rev. i, p. 87. — Keokuk limest. Green Co., 111., and White's Creek

Springs, Tennessee.
1881. C. Van Horni S. A. Miller, Journ. Cinein. Soe. Nat. Hist., vol. iv (October),

PI. 6, fig. 3. — Niagara gr. Chicago, Illinois.

(?) SPH^EROCRINUS Roemer.

In referring Sphserocrinus to the genus Cyathocrinus (Rev. I,
p. 83), we overlooked the fact that Roemer's type has separate
dorsal canals piercing the radials. Whether this character is
sufficient for generic distinction is a question which has never
been brought up for discussion. It is in this regard worthy of
notice that this structure occurs exclusively in species from the
Silurian and Upper Devonian, never in the Carboniferous, neither
in Cyathocrinus nor other genera. Whether all species of Cyatho-
crinus from Gothland and Dudley possess this structure, cannot
be ascertained from the figures, but if they do, it may form tlie
basis of a separation which seems to us very desirable. If the
genus Sphserocrinus is accepted, it will probabl}' include not only
Sphaerocrinus geometricus Goldfuss, Roemer's typical species,
but many others.

1886.'] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 151

ARACHNOCRINUS M. and W., Rev. I, p. 92.

In our former list we erroneously placed Poteriocrinus |)m-
formis Roemer under Arachnocrinus. From specimens which we
obtained lately in western Tennessee, and in which the azygous
side and also the brachials are preserved, we are convinced that
it is a Lecanocrinus.

GISSOCRINUS Angelin, Rev. I, p. 89.

ACHRADOCRINUS Sclmltze.

1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palaeont,, i, p. 364.
1866. Schultze, Ecliin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 101.

Schultze in defining this genus thought it to be closely allied
to Gasterocoma, and Zittel and de Loriol place it among the
Gasterocomidoe. In our opinion, the similarity between Gastero-
coma and Achradocrinus is more superficial than real. Gastero-
coma has five underbasals, and the column in addition to the
axial canal is provided with four peripheral vessels, which are
altogether unrepresented in the other form. The two agree only
in the position of the anal aperture. The affinities of Achrado-
crinus are much closer with Sphaerocrinus, from which it differs
only, as far as known, in the position of the anal plate.

Generic Diagnosis. — Dorsal cup deeply cup-shaped ; symmetry
decidedly bilateral. Underbasals five, equal, of medium size,
extending beyond the column, and visible in a side view. Basals
five, four of them angular above, the posterior one truncate, and
supporting an anal plate. Radials all meeting laterally, three of
them equal ; the two postero-lateral ones deeply excavated for the
reception of the anal plate, which they inclose on three sides by
meeting above. The radials are slightly notched at their upper
margin, and have upon the outer side of the plate a narrow,
horseshoe-like articular facet, pierced by a small dorsal canal,
which is located at some distance from the notch. At the azj-gous
side there is only an anal plate, which is subquadrangular, its
lateral margins arched, its upper face narrower and excavated for
the ventral sac, which is cylindrical and placed between this plate
and the lateral extensions of adjoining radials. The tube has a
ventral position owing to the strongly inflected upper portions of
the radials. Arms unknown. Column circular ; with a small
central canal.

The only known species is :

1866. Achradocrinus ventrosus Schultze, Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 101, Pi. 12, fig. 6.—
Devonian. Eifel, Germany.

152 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

CODIACRINUS Schultze.

18GG. Schultze, Mouogr, Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 31.

1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palseout., i, p. 364.

Godiacrinus is closely allied to Achradocrinus ; the anal plate,
however, is here, we think, fully resorbed b}'^ the radials, and the
basals consist only of three plates.

Generic Diagnosis. — Of small size ; in the form of a poppy-head,
reversed boll-shaped, or subovoid. Plates thin. Symmetry
strictly pentamerous.

Underbasals three, forming a pentagon; two of them larger
and hexagonal, the third smaller and rhomboidal. Basals equal,
pentangular, Radials equal; all touching laterally; upper face
concave, with a narrow semicircular lateral articular facet for the
reception of the brachials, and with a separate dorsal canal.
There is no anal plate in the dorsal cup. Nothing is known of
the ventral side, nor of the arms.

The only known species is :

1866. Godiacrinus granulatus Schultze, Monogr. Echin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 31, PI. .3, fig.
9. — Devonian. Eifel, Germany.

LECYTHIOCRINUS White.

1880. White, Proceed. Nat. Mus., p. 256.

1880. White, 12th Ann. Rep. Terr, for 1878 by Hayden, p. 122.
1880. Worthen, Bull, i, Illinois St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 37.
1880. Worthen, Illinois Geol. Rep., vol. vii, p. 317.

This name must not be confounded with Lecythocrinus^WaWQX^
which represents a yevy different generic form. The adoption of
such similar names, even if permitted by the generally accepted
rules, should be avoided. The species for which it was proposed
agrees in the arrangement of its calyx plates with Godiacrinus,
except the articular facet of the radials, which is wider, directed
upwards (not obliquely as in that genus), and it has distinct liga-
mentous fossae, but apparently no central canal.

1882. LecytMocrinus Adamsi Worthen, Bull. I, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 37; also
Geol. Rep. 111., p. 817, PI. 30, fig. 8. — Coal measures. Peoria Co., 111.

1880. L. olliculaeformis White, Proc. Nat. Mus. for 1879, p. 256, PI. 1, figs. 4, 5.—
12th Ann. Rep. Terr, by Hayden, for 1878, p. 12-1, PI. 35, figs. 2 a, 6.— Coal
measures. Near Humbold, Kansas.

Proc Acad. Nat. Sc .Philad^ 1886 .

Plate

^^-~;:.-...i;y>«-

S.F.^.

AARON ON NEW PSOCIDAE

I

Proc.A.N. S.Phnada.l886.

PL n.

m !

15

17

Hartman on New Species of Parlula.

i

I

t

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 153

Family XXII.— POTERIOCRINIDJE.

It has been stated that the distinction between Poteriocrinidse
and Cyathocrinidae is based principally upon their different mode
of articulation. The articulation, however, in the Poteriocrinidse
undergoes certain modifications, and toward the close of the Car-
boniferous even the calj'x begins to show signs of being capable
of slight expansion, if not mobilit}^, the plates being frequently
provided with a fossa along their margins ; while in others the
plates are united by syzygy. Those fossae which extend over the
whole surface of the opposed faces not only occur between the
radials, but extend in a vertical direction to the basi-radial suture.
That they lodged bundles of ligament is almost beyond doubt,
and Dr. P. H. Carpenter, whom we consulted on this subject,
regards this union as a suture, but "less close, with longer liga-
ments, and therefore more expansible and movable, than in an
ordinary suture." A syzygial union is found among the species
which Trautschold referred to the genus Gromxjoci'inu:,^ and
seems to extend in some of them even to the suture between
basals and underbasals, the striation being plainly visible along
the suture lines. In some of these genera the articulation between
brachials and arm plates is as highly differentiated as in most of
the Neocrinoidea, and much more so than in some of them.

The progressive development in the mode of articulation that
takes place from the earlier to the later Poteriocrinidae is, no
doubt, of some classificatory value, but we have not been able,
as yet, to separate them on this ground, as the respective parts
are generally in an imperfect state of preservation, and there
appear to be no other distinguishing characters. Moreover, a
comparison of the earlier Poteriocrinidae, such as Scytalocrinus,
Scaphiocrinus, Pachylocrinus, Cteliocrinus and Graphiocrinus^
with the latter genera E upachycrimis, Zeacrinus^ Hydreionocri-
nus, Geriocrinus, Erisocrinus, and of the latter with Encrinus,
shows that the two sections shade into one another by such easy
gradations, that in many cases it is absolutely impossible to draw
a dividing line.

The genera of the Poteriocrinidae are principall}^ based upon
the arrangement of the plates at the az3^gous side, the form of
the cal3'x, the proportionate size of the ventral sac, and the
branching of the arms. Some of the genera have a well-developed
azygous plate, a special anal piece, and one of the plates support-

11

154 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

ing the ventral sac enclosed within the cal3^x. Others, such as
Graphiocrinus and Geriocrinus, have no azygous plate, but only
an anal piece ; while in Erisocrinus^ Stemmatocrinus and Encri-
nus no such plate is found, either within the ring of radials or
below. In the same degree as palaeontologically the calyx grows
more symmetrical, the ventral sac decreases in size, and probably
disappeared entirely in Encrinus, which is closely allied to the
Poteriocriuidse. Along with these modifications, others are going
on which take place in the arms. Throughout every genus, a
development goes on from the uuiserial to the biserial arm struc-
ture, a feature which has not been observed in anj^ other family
of the Fistulata, and which has no parallel throughout the Neo-
crinoidea if we exclude Encrinus, which we regard as a somewhat
higher developed Poteriocrinoid. Encrinus^ especially, offers in
its arm structure a very striking example. Among its species
are found arms in all stages of development, some having single
quadrangular joints, others two rows closely arranged. The
same variations are found in the arms of EupachyciHnus, Gerio-
crinus and Erisocrinus ; while in the earlier Poteriocrinites the
arms never pass beyond the interlocking stage. That the biserial
arm structure was developed from single cuneate joints, and not
only palaeontologically, but also in the growing animal, we had
op[)ortunity to observe in a very 3'oung Encrinus liliifortnis, in
which the arms, to about two-thirds their height, are composed
of single joints, which gradually become more cuneate, and
toward the tips are interlocking. This one case, we think, alone
would be sufficient evidence to prove that the biserial arm struc-
ture is the higher form, if it was not confirmed by other speci-
mens of this and other groups. If Encrinus were a Neocrinoid,
as supposed by Zittel, De Loriol and Carpenter, the Neocrinoidea
would begin their existence with the highest differentiated arms
known to us, and the arms of all other iSTeocrinoidea up to the
Comatulffi of the present seas, would appear to have remained
persistently in their larval state. This does not seem to us to
favor the idea, -of Encrinus being a Neocrinoid.

Comparing Erisocrinus with Encrinus^ the only noticeable
difference in their fossil state is the presence of a single brachial
in the former, and two in the latter. To this P. H. Carpenter
alluded (Chall. Rep,, p. 154), admitting it to be "the only point

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155

of difference about which we are enabled to speak with certainty."
This character, however, is not restricted to Encrinus; we find it
more or less among all Poteriocrinidffi, but exclusively there and
in the Encrinidae. The two brachials are alwa3'S joined by suture,
not by articulation, and this is the case in Encrinus, in which the
two pieces are united by s^'zj^gy and form actually one plate.
The compound brachial is scarcely more than a specific character,
and hence has no value as a distinction between two orders.

Carpenter takes not only Encrinus, but also Erisocrinus and
Stemmatocrinus to be Neocrinoidea, because they have no anal
plate. Anal plates, he states, " are absent in Erisocrinus as in
Encrinus, and since a ventral tube or sac like that of Cyatho-
crinus is always found associated with a system of anal plates,
the lowest of which is intercalated between two radials, it seems
rash to postulate its presence in the symmetrical Erisocrinus.''^
That our conclusions were not so " rash " as Carpenter suggested
is emphatically proved by the fact that an anal plate has actually
been discovered by Dr. White in Erisocrinus. It is located above
the radials, being enclosed among the interradial plates, where we
should have expected it from analogy with other groups. Anal
plates are absent also in two genera of the Cyathocrinidse, in
Godiacrinus Schultze, and Lecythiocrinus White, which both
have a perfectly symmetrical dorsal cup. But does that make
them Neocrinoidea ? What more do we know of the ventral struc-
ture of the Poteriocrinidse than of Encrinus and Erisocrinus?
If Encrinus is a Neocrinoid, why not all Poteriocrinidae ? No-
body ever saw the ventral covering in any Poteriocrinoid — we
have only found the ventral sac. Yet from analogy with Gyatho-
crinus and allied forms in which a vault has actually been ob-
served, it was generally supposed that vault plates were present
also in the Poteriocrinidse. We think the width of the brachials,
which in this family frequently occupy the entire width of the
radials, gives a satisfactory explanation why the vault plates are
not preserved in forms like these. The plates either rested against
the sloping edges of the radials as in Stemmatocrinus Traut-
scholdi, or only against their articular extensions as in Symbatho-
crinus. It is even very possible that the interradials were par-
tially or wholly resorbed by the muscular processes of the
radials, as these became developed in the growing Crinoid.

The subdivisions of Poteriocrinus, which we proposed, have

156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [188G.

been accepted by Wetherby and Williams, but ignored b}'^ S. A.
Miller and Prof. Worthen.'

Extensive collections made by us during the last two years,
enable us to give additional information respecting these divi-
sions. Farisocrinus proves to be not only a good genus, but,
moreover, is a Cyathocrinoid, having no pinnules. Pachylocrinus
is closer allied to ZeacrinuH than to Poteriocrinus, and is proba-
bly identical with Philocrinus. De Koninck described this genus
with a monocyclic base, and the calyx strictly pentahedral, but
from appearance it had underbasals and az3'gous plates, and is
identical with Pachylocrinus. We have redefined Scytalocrinus
and Decadocrinus, which should both be ranked as subgenera
under Poteriocrinus, and likewise Scaphiocrinus.

Mr. Percy Sladen, in a paper " On the genus Poteriocrinus and
allied forms " (read before the Geol. and Polyt. Soc. at Yorkshire
in 1877), separated the English Carboniferous Poteriocrinites
into four groups : Poteriocrinus^ Dactylocrinus, Scaphiocrinus
and Zeacrinus. To the typical form he referred: P. crassus, P.
spissus, P. conicus. P. plicatus^ P. impressus, P. radiatus and P.
quinquangularis. We agree with him as to the first four species,
but we think the last three are C^^athocrinidffi and should be
referred to Parisocrinus. Mr. Sladen, unfortunatel}^ figured

' S. A. Miller, in the 2d Ed. of his Catal. of Pal. Poss., called them
"subgenera of doubtful utility." Prof. Wortheu gives the following rea-
sons for refusing their acceptance (Bull, i, Illinois St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p.
4): "First, I see no beneficial result that is likely to come from cumbering
the nomenclature of paleontology with such terms, and secondly, because
any proposed subgeneric formula that groujjs together such diverse forms
as Zeacrinus maniformis Y. and Sh., and Poteriocrinus Biselli Worthen,
can be of no practical advantage in the study of this group of Criuoids, and
hence, until some satisfactory generic cliaractei's can be pointed out by
which they may be separated, it seems advisable to include them all under
the generic name originally j)roposed by Miller for them." If our good
friend had read our paper more carefully, he would have observed that we
proposed our six subdivisions of Poteriocrinus with the distinct statement
that we "scarcely deemed the characters upon which they are based suffi-
ciently important even for subgeneric separation," and that we alluded in
detail to the difficulty of referring the " Zeacrinus " maniformis to any of
the sections. In proposing these subdivisions, however, we only followed
the suggest'on of Meek and Wortheu in 1869 (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
p. 138 and note), where, after defining Scaphiocrinus, Zeacrinus and Ccdio-
crinus as subgenera under Poteriocrinus, they add, under the head of Scaphio-
crinus : "The group, however, has been extended by Prof. Hall and others
so as to include species presenting all the characters given above, and might
be divided into several sections, distinguished from each other and from the

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15T

Parisocrinus radiatus to illustrate the genus Poteriocrinus, a spe-
cies without pinnules, with the arms of a Cyathocrinus, but with
a PoteiHocrinus arrangement of azygous plates. Under Dactylo-
crinus he included P. tenuis, both of Miller and Austin, T. isaco-
bus and P. rostratus^ Austin (pars), Monogr. Rec. and Foss. Crin. *
PL 9, figs. 2 b, c (non 2 a, d). Comparing Austin's P. tenuis,
which Sladen redescribed as Dactylocrinus loreus, with " Poferio-
crinus " radiatus, there appears to be considerable difference
between the two forms, but comparing it with P. crassus, Miller's
typical species, the difference is not so very great. Austin's figure
apparently was made from a verj' j-oung specimen, as indicated by
the unusuall}?^ long arm joints, and it may be a somewhat aber-
rant form of Scytalocrinus. Sladen 's name Dactylocrinus would
have priority over Scytalocrinus, had not Quenstedt in 1876 used
the same name for a different form. P. isacobus is, in our opinion,
a good Poteriocrinus. Sladen refers to Scaphiocrinus: P. latifrons,
Austin, which we take to be a Pachylocrinus ; and to Zeacrinus :
Gupressocrinus impressus {Cupressocrinus calyx ^ McCoy) ; Pote-
riocrinus llcCoyanus, a,nd Zeacrinus Phillipsi. We agree with
him as to the latter species, but we doubt if the other three are
sufficiently known to assert whether the calices belong to either
Zeacrinus, E upachy crinus or Hydreionocrinus.

typical form, on quite as good characters as those distinguishing the latter
from Zeacrinus.'''' At the time of J. S. Miller the genus Poteriocrinus was
fully sufficient to hold every species then known, but for each species then
known one hundred have been discovered since.

When we attempted to revise the Poteriocrinites we found .a confusion
such as existed in no other group of the PaliBocrinoidea. The subdivisions
that had been proposed were so indistinctly defined, and contained such
diverse elements, that they rather increased tlie difficulty instead of diminish-
ing it. As a temporary remedy we proposed our subdivisions, and expect-
ing they would eventually prove to be distinct genera, we applied to them
at once generic names. It was at the option of Prof. Worthen to accept
these divisions or not, but in adding some fifty or more species to the three
hundred already described, he surely would have aided in the identification
of his species, and science generally, by referring them to those groups.
This would have lightened the labors of others, who are now compelled to
look up for comparison every one of his species. Besides, if Prof. Worthen
had consulted the Revision, he might have avoided a number of synonyms,
which "cumber the nomenclature of paleontology " more seriously than
those few systematic names. It is somewhat curious that after refusino-
to accept the subgenera proposed by us and Prof. Hall, Prof. Worthen
repeatedly employs the specific names which had already been used by
previous writers in one or the other of those subgenera.

158 PEOCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

a. Poteriocrinites.

POTERIOCRINUS J. S. Miller.

Rev. I, p. 111.

Dorsal cup obconical ; plates delicate and frequently covered
with wrinldes or radiating plications. Radials with a semicir-
cular scar, facing outward, and provided with a transverse artic-
ular ridge. Brachials one ; laterally constricted ; sutures gaping.
Arms long and branching ; composed of wedge-formed plates.
Ventral sac long, constructed of six longitudinal rows of short
transverse plates forming a tube ; one of these rows resting upon
the anal piece, another upon the third azygous plate. The plates
of the tube, which are heavier along their median line, are pro-
vided laterally with transverse ridges or plications, which all have
long open slits along their margins. Column circular.

We add the following species to our list :

1882. Poteriocrinus Clarkii Williams, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliila., p. 21, PI. 1, fig.

4. — Chemung gr. Steuben Co., N. Y.

Var. alpha, ibid., p. 22, PI. 1, fig. 5. — Chemung gr. Ithaca, N. Y.
1882. P. cornellianus Williams, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 18, PI. 1, figs, 1, 2,

3. — Chemung gr. Ithaca, N. Y.
1836. P. impressus Phill. (not McCoy, 1854 = Hydreionocrinus McCoyanus, nor

Richter and linger, 1860). Geol. Yorkshire, p. 205, PI. 4, fig. 1.— Austin,

1843, Rec. and Foss. Crin., p. 10, fig. 6.— W. and Sp., Rev. i, p. 120.— Sladen,

1877, On the Genus Poteriocrinus, p. 8. — Bristol, England.
1882. P. otterensis Worthen, Bull, i. 111. St. Mas. Nat. Hist., p. 14 : also Geol. Rep.

Illinois vii, p. 283, PI. 28, fig. 4.— Otter Creek, Jersey Co., III.

Species having the characters of the Poteriocrinites, but not sufficiently known
to be referred to the proper genus :

P. aemulus Hall, 1879, Eleventh Indiana Rep., p. 266, is probably a Homo-

crinus (■?).
1880. P. anomalos Wetherby, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist. (July), p. 15, PI. 5, fig.

6. — Kaskaskia gr. Pulaski Co., Ky.— This is one of the most perplexing

species of this group. It agrees neither with Grapliiocrinus, nor Decado-

crinus, nor ScapMocrinus, nor Eupachycrinus, and really shades into all

of them.
1882. P. araclinaeformis Worthen, Bull, i. III. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 13, PI. 28, fig.

12: also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 281, PI. 28, fig. 12.— Keokuk limest.

Warsaw, 111.

P. Bockschii Geinitz. Only known to us from quotations.

P. calyx Hall, 1879 (non De Koninck, 1853), is only defined from basal

plates. — Niagara gr.
1882. P. clytis Worthen, Bull. No. 1, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., P. 16 (not P. clytis on

p. 25); also Geol. Rep. 111., vii, p. 294, PI. 30, fig. 10.— St. Louis limest. Monroe

Co., 111. — A very young specimen, as seen by the form of the brachials and

arm joints j it probably had 10 arms in its adult state.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 159

1849. P. crassimanus McCoy (not P. crassimanus Eichw.), Ann.and Mag. Nat. Hist.

(Ser. ii),vol. iii, p. 245.— Contrib. Paliuont., p. 106. — Carboniferous, Derbyshire.
1882. P. illinoisiensis Worthen, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 10 ; also Geol,

Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 289, PI. 28, fig. 17— Warsaw limest. Warsaw. 111.
1844. P. inequidactylus McCoy, Carboniferous Foss. Ireland, p. 179, PI. 26, fig. 8. —

Carboniferous. Ireland.
P. minimus Austin (not Ad. Roemer) is probably a synonym of Scaphio-

crinus isacobus.
1882. P. similis Worthen, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 23; also (Jeol. Rep.

Illinois, vii, p. 295, PI. 30, fig. 12. — Kaskaskia limest. Monroe Co., 111.

This is evidently a young specimen, probably of one of the other species.
1882. P. validus Worthen, Bull, i. 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 18 ; also Geol. Rep.

Illinois, vii, p. 287, PI. 28, fig. 16. — Warsaw limest. Warsaw, 111.

SCAPHIOCRINUS Hall, Rev. I, p. 112.
(Emend. W. andSp.)

Dorsal cup obcoiiical to semi-ovoid ; all its plates closel}' united
by suture. Radials truncate above, the articular ridge filling
almost the entire width of the upper face. Brachials long, simple
or compound, similar in form to the radials but truncate below;
line of articulation gaping. In species with compound brachials,
the two segments have the form and proportions of the one plate
in the others, and are joined by suture. Arms long, branching;
arm joints rather long, wedge-form. Azygous side as in Poterio-
crinus. Column obtusely pentagular.

Poteriocrinus Jesupi Whitfield, Amer. Mas. Nat. Hist. N. Y.,
Bull, i (Decbr., 1881), is evidently a synonym of P. Swallovi M.
and W. (compare 111. Rep., ii, PI. 16, fig. 4), although Whitfield
thinks it distinct in the bifurcation of the arms, and in the number
and arrangement of the anal plates. In the type specimen of P.
Swallovi only two bifurcations of the arms were preserved, and
Meek and Worthen remarked on p. 84, that the arms in the upper
parts " seemed to be simple " in this species. The latter is not
confirmed by our specimens, of which many have arms and ven-
tral sac beautifully preserved ; they all show essentially the same
bifurcations as Whitfield's specimen. Slight variation in the num-
ber of arm joints in one of the bifurcations cannot be regarded
as a good specific character, and even an additional division
of the arms may take place in the same species. The apparent
variation in the number of " anal " plates is explained by the fact
that in the type of P. Swallovi the arms accidentally cover the
lower portion of the ventral sac, exposing to view only four plates ;
while in Whitfield's specimen a much greater portion of the ven-
tral sac is visible.

160 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

The following species are to be added to our former list :
a. With simple brachials.

*1882. Soaphiocrinus kaskaskiensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus kaskaskiensis,

Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 27; also Gool. Rep. 111., vii, p. 300, PI.

30, fig. 15. — Kaskaskia limest. Near Chester, 111.
*1882. S. latidactylus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus latidactylus, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus.

Nat. Hist., p. 8; also Geol. Rep. 111., vii, p. 275, PI. 28, fig. 6.— Keokuk

limest. Hamilton, 111.
*1884. S. obscurus W. and Sp. (Poteriocrinus tenuidactylus Worthen), Bull, i, of

the 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 6 (not p. 10 ; nor Pot. [Scaph.] tenuidactylus

M. and W., 1865) ; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 271, PI. 28, fig. 13.— Keokuk

limest. Keokuk, Iowa. The specific name tjeing preoccupied by M. and W.

in Geol. Rep. 111., iii, p. 490, PI. 18, fig. 10, we propose for this species the
. above name.
*1882. S. occidentals (Worthen), Poteriocrinus occidentalis Worthen (not Shum.),

Bull, i. 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 10; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 278,

PI. 29, fig. 2.— Keokuk limest. Hamilton, 111. The name Pot. occidentalis

was preoccupied, in 1852, by Owen and Shum., Geol. Rep. of Wise, Iowa

and Minnesota, p. 596, PI. 5 b, fig. 5 ; but, as it has since been referred to

Agassizocrinus, we propose retaining Worthen's name for the above species.
*18S2. S. okawensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus okawensis, Bull, i. 111. St. Mus.

Nat. Hist., p. 24; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 296, PI. 29, fig. 2.— Kas-

kaskia gr. Okaw River, 111.
*1882. S. Orestes (Worthen), Poteriocrinus Orestes, Bull, i. 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist.,

p. 7; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 273, PI. 27, fig. 3.— Keokuk limest.

Keokuk, Iowa. (Compare with Scaph. Coreyi M. & W.)
*1882. S. popensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus popensis, Bull, i. 111. St. Mus. Nat.

Hist., p. 23; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, p. 290, PI. 29, fig. 12.— Kaskaskia gr.

Pope Co., 111.
*1882. S. propinquus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus propinquus, Bull, i, HI. St. Mus. Nat.

Hist., p. 26 ; Geol. Rep. 111., vii, PI. 29, fig. 9.— Kaskaskia gr. Monroe Co., 111.
*1882. S. Salteri (Worthen), Poteriocrinus Salteri, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist.,

p. 21 ; Geol. Rep. 111., vii, PI. 29, fig. 18.— Kaskaskia gr. Chester, 111.
1880. S. spinifer Wutherby, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist. (July), p. 13, PI. 5, fig.

5. — GrapMocrinus spinifer S. A. Miller, 1883, Catalogue Amer. Pal. Foss.

Ed. ii, p. 287. — Kaskaskia gr. Pulaski Co., Ky.
*1882. S. spinobracMatus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus spinobrachiatus (not Hall),

Bull, i. 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 20; also Geol. Rep. 111., vii, p. 290, PI.

29, fig. 1. — Kaskaskia gr. Monroe Co., 111. Hall described in 1861 a

species under P. (ScapMocrinus) spinobrachiatus, which we referred in

Rev. i, p. 123, to Graphiocrinus.
*1882. S. varsoviensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus varsoviensis, Bull, i. 111. St.

Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 20; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii. p. 290, PI. 28, fig.

15. — Warsaw limest. Warsaw, 111.
*1882. S. venustus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus venustus, Bull, i, HI. St. Mus. Nat.

Hist., p. 24; also Geol. Rep. 111., vii, p. 297, PI. 29, fig. 13.— Kaskaskia gr.

Monroe Co., 111.
%». P. peculiaris Worthen, (described Bull, i. III. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 26, as

Pot. clytis), Geol. Rep. 111., vii, p. 298, PI. 29, fig. 10.— The specimen from

■which the species was described has an anomalous arrangement of anal plates.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 161

b. With compound brachials.

*1882. S. briareus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus briareus, Bull, i, III. St. Mus. Nat.

Hist., p. 12; also Geol. Rep. 111., vii, p. 279, PI. 27, fig. 4.— Keokuk limest.

Keokuk, la., and Bono, Ind. The specific name is given at all places as

P. briaerius, but evidently was intended for Pot. briareus.
«1882. S. Burketi ( Worthen). Poteriocrinus Burketi, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist.,

p. 5; also Geol. Pi,ep. Illiuuis, vii, p. 270, PI. 28, fig. 8.— Keokuk limest.

Hamilton, 111.
*1882. S. coxanus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus coxanus, Bull, i, III. St. Mus. Nat.

Hist., p. 4; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 269, PI. 27, fig. 1.— Keokuk

limest. Keokuk, Iowa.
S. cultidactylus Hall, 1859, was redescribed and figured Geol. Rep. Illinois,

vii. p. ;iUl, PI. 30, fig. I.
»18S4. S. extensus W. & Sp., Poteriocrinus asper Worthen, not Pot. (Pachylocr.)

asper (W. & Sp., Rev. i, p. 116), Bull, i, III. St. Mus. Nat. Hist, p. 11 ; also

Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 278, PI. 27, fig. 8.— Keokuk limest. Keokuk, Iowa.
Poteriocrinus asper being preoccupied, we propose the above name in place

of it.
*18S2. S. iowensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus iowensis, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat.

Hist., p. 6 ; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 272. — Keokuk limest. Hamilton,

111.
*1S44. S. macrocbeirus (McCoy), Cyatbocrinus macrocheirus, Synop. Garb. Foss.

Ireland, PI. 25, figs. 8, 10.— Subcarboniferous, Ireland. (This species has

three brachials.)
*187;]. S. montanaensis (Meek), Poteriocrinus montanaensis, Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol.

Rep. Terr, for 1872, p. 469; also White, 12th Ann. Rep. of the Terr., by

Hayden, for 1878, p. 128, PI. 3.3, fig. 6 a.— Carboniferous. Virginia City

Montana.
*1882. S. nauvooensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus nauvooensis, Bull, i, III. St. Mus.

Nat. Hist., p. 13; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 282, PI. 28, fig. 10.—

Keokuk limest. Nauvoo, III.
*1882. S. pikensis (Worthen), Zeacrinus pikensis, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist.,

p. 304; Geol. Rep. 111., vii, PL 30, fig. 3. — Burlington limest. Pike Co.,

Illinois.
•S1882. S. sculptus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus sculptus, Bull, i, III. St. Mus. Nat.

Hist., p. 21 ; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 292, PI. 29, fig. 8. — Kaskaskia

gr. Monroe Co., III.
(Poteriocrinus subramulosus AVorthen, III. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 14; Geol.

Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 284, is a synonym of Pot. (Scaphiocrinus) Swallovi

M. <fc W. This species passes from the upper part of the Upjier Burlington

into the Keokuk limestone).

SCYTALOCRINUS W. and Sp., Rev. I, p. 116.

Syu. Dactilocrinus Sladen, 1877 (not Quensteclt), in pai-t (Ou the genus
Poteriocrinus, p. 4).

General form, including arms, slender, almost cylindrical.
Dorsal cup obconical or bell-shaped ; plates strong but not mas-
sive, connected by close suture. TJnderbasals well developed,

162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

bent upward and forming a conspicuons part of the calyx. Radials
and brachials of nearly the same form, apposed faces truncate, with
a transverse articular ridge and somewhat shallow fossae ; line of
articulation gaping. The brachials either single or compound,
generally elongate, constricted along the middle. They support
two simple arms each, except in the anterior ray, which some-
times has but a single arm. Arms long, rather heavy, composed
of quadrangular or slightl}^ cuneiform joints ; pinnules of mode-
rate size. Azygous side as in Poteriocrinus ; ventral sac tubular,
with slit-like openings, and frequently spiniferous at the distal end.
Column circular or obtusely pentagonal.
Additional species : —

a. With single brachials.

*1877. Scytalocrinus loreus (Sladen), Dactylocrinus loreus (Poteriocrinus tenuis
Austin, non Miller), Mon. Rec. and Foss. Crin., PL 10, fig. 5. — On the genus
Poteriocrinus, etc., p. 5. — Subcarboniferous. England.

*1821. S. tenuis Miller, Nat. Hist. Criu., p. 71, PI. 21-23. Dactylocrinus tenuis
Sladen, 1877, "On the genus Poteriocrinus, p. 5."

*1880. S, Wachsmuthi Wetherby, Journ. Cincin. Soe. Nat. Hist. (July), p. 12, PI. 5,
fig. 4. — Kaskaskia limest. Pulaski Co., Ky.

b. With compound brachials.

(Poteriocrinus hamiltonensis Worthen, 1882, Bull, i. 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
p. 7; Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 273, PI. 28, fig. 9, Syn. of Poteriocr.
(Scytalocr.) robustus Hall).
*1882. Scytalocrinus Talboti (Worthen), Poteriocrinus Talboti, Bull, i. 111. St. Mus.
Nat. Hist., p. 17; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 287, PI. 30, fig. 7. — St.
Louis limest. Monroe Co., 111.

DECADOCRINUS W. and Sp., Rev. I. p. 119.

Arms ten, rarely nine, the anterior ray sometimes undivided.
Dorsal cup depressed, saucer-shaped, with a deep concavity along
the basal regions. TJnderbasals small, not seen in a side view,
and frequently covered almost entirely by the column. Form of
radials and brachials and articulation as in Scytalocrinus ; brachi-
als simple or compound. Arms composed of single wedge-form
joints, with keel-like projections at alternate sides, and with
strongly waving or zigzag outlines. Pinnules unusually strong,
placed far apart, and resembling armlets ; composed of short
cuneate joints, with spurs or keels upon theirbasal joints. Azygous
side as in Poteriocrinus. Yentral sac more or less club-shaped ;
constructed of numerous rows of regularly arranged hexagonal

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163

pieces, with a pore at each angle. Column pentagonal, with
rounded angles.

Decadocrinus agrees closely with Graphiocrinus, but the latter
has no azygous plate, only an anal piece.

Additional species : —

a. With simple brachials.

*1882. Decadocrinus columbiensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus columbiensis, Bull.

i, 111. 8t. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 22; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 293, PI. 19,

fig. 6. — Kaskaskia limest. Monroe Co., 111.
*1882. D. fountainensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus fountainensis, Bull, i, 111. St.

Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 17; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 286, PI. 30, Fig.

11. — St. Louis limest. Monroe Co., 111.
*18S1. D. Milleri (Wetherby), Poteriocrinus Milleri (not Worthen), Journ. Cincin.

Soc. Nat. Hist. (January), PI. 9, figs. 12, 13. — Kaskaskia gr. Pulaski

Co., Ky.
*18S2. D. penicilliformis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus penicilliformis, Bull, i, 111. St.

Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 8; also Geol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 276, PI. 28, fig. 9.—

Keokuk limest. Hamilton, 111.
1882. D. zethus Williams. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 27, PI. I, fig. 9.— Port-
age gr. Ithaca, N. Y.

b. With compound hracMals.

1882. D. gregarius Williams. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 22, PI. 1, figs. 6, 7, 8.—
Chemung gr. Ithaca, N. Y.

WOODOCRINUS De Koninck. Rev. i, p. 124.

(Emended W. and Sp.)

Syn. Parisocrinus W. and Sp. Rev. i, p. 115.

Syn. Zeacrinus Hall (not Troost) in part. Geol. Rep. la., vol. i, p. 544.
Syn. Zeacrinus Sladen, 1877. On the genus Poteriocrinus, etc., p. 7.
Syn. (.?) Philocrinus De Koninck, 1862. Quart. Joum. Geol. Soc, London.

The ventral side of Woodocrinus has not been observed, but
we may suppose from the spreading of the arms that its sac was
rather bulk3^ This is further suggested by the great width of
the azygous side, which, however, is composed of the same
elements as in most Poteriocrinites, and is not structurally dis-
tinct as has been generally supposed. It has, like Poteriocrinus,
within the calyx three azygous plates — the succeeding pieces
forming the abactinal parts of the ventral sac — which for some
distance, are exposed between the arms. It differs from Scaphio-
crinus in the shortness of its arm joints and arms generally.
This it shares, however, with Pachylocrinus as defined by us, and
with Zeacrinus Troost.

164 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

In our description of Zeacrinus (Rev. i, p. 125), we stated the
difficulty of separating it from Woodocrinus. The only ditfer-
ence, there noted, was the folding up and the smaller size of the
arms in the former, and upon this distinction almost exclusively
we based the separation. We also stated that the calyx in
Woodocrinus was generall}' more turbinate, in Zeacrinus de-
pressed with concave basal regions, but also to this rule we
found exceptions among the species which had been referred
to the latter. Equally impracticable would be a separation
upon the arm joints, although these vary considerably among
the typical species. The arms of Zeacrinus magnoliaformis are
dorsally perfectly flat, those of Woodocrinus macrodactylus
decidedly rounded, and Hall, Meek, Worthen and White placed
under Zeacrinus species with flat, rounded and angular arms.

The species which we arranged in Pt. i, under Pacht/locrinus,
had been originally, with a few exceptions, described under
Zeacrinus. Their arms, like those of the latter, are more or less
closelj' folded up, and they dichotomize in a similar manner. All
are composed of short quadrangular joints, and all have a club- or
elongate balloon-shaped, ventral sa<; ; while the sac in Zeacrinus
magnoliaformis is pyramidal, with sharp lateral edges and concave
sides. In the latter the form of the calyx is disk-like, in the
others bowl-shaped. Mr. Percy Sladen, the only English writer
who advocated the necessity of subdividing the original genus
Poteriocrinus, placed Poteriocrinus 3IcCoi/a7ius, P. calyx, P.
granulosus and F. Phillipsii under Zeacrinus. We fully agree
with him that these four species cannot be retained under Poterio-
crinus, having close affinities with Zeacrinus, but we believe the
three former will prove to be Eydreionocrinus, his Zeacrinus
Phillipsii a Pachylocrinus or Woodocrinus, as also Poteriocrinus
latifrons Austin, which he referred to Scaphiocrinus. Sladen
probably was not acquainted with Troost's type of Zeacrinus. as
he took Z. elegans to be a typical form, an opinion in which we
have shared until quite recently, when we obtained numerous
beautifully-preserved specimens, both of "Zeacrinus " elegans and
Troost's typical species, from the Kaskaskia limestone. The
later- forms differ from the earlier not only in the form of their
ventral sac, but also essentially in the construction of their
calyx. In the typical species the dorsal cup is disk-like, almost

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165

flat, the radials extremely large, touching with their acute lower
angles the underbasals, thereby almost isolating the five basals.
The basals in these species consist of minute trigonal pieces of
irregular form, and also the underbasals are small, and rest
deeply within the columnar concavity (PL 6, fig. 9). In the
earlier form, notably " Zeacrinus " elegans, however, the basal
cup is bowl-shaped, and the basals are comparatively larger. The
arrangement of the azygous pieces upon which DeKoninck
placed so much stress in defining Woodocri7ius, \s, in our opinion,
not diflerent from that of Poteriocrinus or Scaphiocrinus, only
more plates of the ventral sac are exposed to view, owing to the
width of the azygous side, and as we see no other distinction
between Woodocrinus and our Pachylocrinus, we place the
species which we had referred to the latter, including '' Zeacrinus^''
elegans and a few others of the same type, under Woodocrinus^
as this name has priority. Perhaps, if all American species were
as distinct as " Zeacrinus " elegans from Woodocrinus macrodac-
tylus, it might be possible to make the former the type of a
separate group, but as we find all intermediate forms, from
infolding arms to spreading arms, and two to five or more bifur-
cations, flat, angular and rounded arms, any such separation must
be adandoned.

Fhilocriaus, De Koniuck, from Punjaub, India, is probably, to
judge from the figure, a species of Woodocinnus. We think it has
azygous plates, but these were covered by matrix in DeKoninck's
specimen. We also doubt if the arm plates of first and second
order were laterall}' connected b}^ suture ; these evidently were
free as in the Fistulata generally.

Revised Diagnosis. — Calyx sometimes obconical, more fre-
quently depressed-bowl-shaped, and the underbasals bent inward,
forming a concavity. Basals large, constituting a continuous
ring beneath the radials. Az3^gous plates arranged as in Poterio-
ciHnus ; ventral sac slightly inflated. Brachials composed of one
or two pieces, which jointly have the form and size of the radials ;
they are wider than long, and their lateral margins are fitted
closely together as if they were united by suture. This infolding
of the brachials extends also to the arm plates up to the second
bifurcation; and is often found throughout the full length of the
arms. The arm joints are short, quadrangular, rarely cuneate,

166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

the apposed faces, more or lefes parallel and flat, angular or
rounded on their outer face. The arms dichotomize and each
branch gives otf one or more branches to the inner side of the
ray, which either bifurcate again or remain simple. The articu-
lation is the same as in Scaphiocrinus. Column circular, or
obtusely pentangular.

The zoological position of Woodocrinus is probably between
Scaphiocrinus and Zeacrinus.

Geological Position, etc. — The genus occurs only in the Subcar-
boniferoiis, and almost exclusively in the lower portions.

We place under Woodocrinus the following species, all of which
were referred by us. Rev. i, p. 116, to Pachylocrinus : Zeacr'inus
arboreus Worthen, Zeacrinus asper M. and W., Zeacrinus concin-
nus M. and W., Poteriocrinus latifrons Austin, Scaphiocrinus
liliiformis M. and W., Zeacrinus merope Hall, Zeacrinus paternus
Hall, Zeacrinus perangulatus White, Zeacrinus planobrachiatus
M. and W., Pachylocrinus suhsequalis W. and Sp., and the follow-
ing, which in Rev. i, p. 128, were placed under Zeacrinus : Pot-
eriocrinus hursaeformis White, Zeacrinus elegans Hall, Zeacrinus
ramosus Hall, Zeacrinus scohina M. and W., Zeacrinus serratus
M. and W., and Zeacrinus troostanus M. and W.

The following species are to be added : —

*1882. Woodocrinus asperatus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus asperatus, Bull, i, 111. St.
Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 12, also Geol. Rep. Illiuois, vii, p. 280, Pi. 28, fig, 2.—
Keokuk limest. Keokuk, la.

*1882. W. claytonensis (AVorthen), Poteriocrinus claytonensis, Bull, i, 111. St. Mus.
Nat. Hist., p. 18; also Geol. Rep. lUinuis, vii, p. 288, PI. 30, fig. 6.— War-
saw limest. Adams Co., 111.

■»1862. (?) W. cometa (De Koninck), Philocrinus cometa, Quart. Journ. Geol. See.
London, PI. ii, fig. 1. — Suboarboniferous. River Indus, India.
1854. W. macrodactylus De Koninck. Type of the genus, Recherch. Crin. Belg.,
Suppl., p. 6, PI. 8, figs. 1 a-d. — Suboarboniferous. Richmond, England.

*1882. W. richfieldensis (Worthen), Poteriocrinus richfieldensis, Bull, i, HI. St.
Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 15; also Geol. Rep. 111., vii, p. 285, PI. m, fig. 5.—
Waverly (Kinderhook) group. Richfield, 0.

»188.3. W. tentaculatus (Worthen), Poteriocrinus tenuidactylus. Bull., i, III. St.
Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 10 ; Poteriocrinus tentaculatus, Geol. Rep. Ilinois, vii,
p. 277, PI. 28, fig. 11.— Keokuk limest. Keokuk, la.— Prof. AVorthen finding
the former specific name occupied, changed it to the latter. This species is
a typical form of Woodocrinus, and has the heavy rounded arms as De
Koninck's species.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167

ZEACRINUS (Troost MS.) Hall, Rev., i, p. 125.

Revised W. and Sp. (PI. 6, fig. 9, and PI. 9, fig. 3).

Zeacrinus differs from Woodocrinus (Pachylocrinus) in the
form of the ventral sac, which, as described by us, is pyramidal,
sharply angnlar and pointed at the upper end ; while that of
Woodocrinus is club-shaped, inflated above. The two genera
differ also in the construction and form of the dorsal cup, which
in Zeacrinus is much more depressed and disk-like, Basals
exceedingly small, trigonal, deeply notched for the reception of
the radials. The underbasals at the inner floor of the calyx are
generally larger than they appear at the outer side, and the
angles of the radials sometimes touch the underbasals. Plates
of the calj'x massive, especially the radials, their distal faces
sloping outward ; articular facets with muscular extensions.
Arm plates generally flat, except the axillaries, which frequently
are tuberculous. The arms dichotomize toward the inner side of
the ray from each main division, the branches rarely dividing
again. The arm joints are short, transversely arranged, those of
the same rank slightly increasing in width upwards, those of the
next order narrower by one-half than the preceding bifurcating
plate. By this structure, the arms. of each ray, and of the main
divisions of the rays, form laterally a straight line, by means of
which they fit in so closely against the arms of adjoining rays,
that thc}^ often appear as if united by suture. Column round,
comparatively small.

We now recognize under Zeacrinus only the following species,
viz. : Zeacrinus bifurcatus, Z. compactilis Worthen ; Z. magnolia-
formis 0. and N.; .^. ovalis Lyon and Cass.; Z. Wortheni Hall,
and our new species Z. nodosus, all other species which were re-
ferred bj^ us to this genus are found now under Woodocrinus.

Zeacrinus nodosus, nov. sp. (PI. 6, fig. ;!).

The largest known species of the genus. All plates of calyx
and arms nodose, except basals and underbasals ; the nodes on
, all axillaries, and the first plate of each succeeding order of arm
plates, almost covering the entire surface of the plate ; while at
the intermediate plates the nodes have more the shape of small
tubercles, arranged so as to occupy an excentric position, leaning
slightly toward the wider or pinnule-bearing side, thereby forming
along the arms two rows of nodes, alternately arranged.

Underbasals of medium size, extending beyond the column,

168 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

forming a shallow inverted cup, decagonal at the outer side,
Basals trigonal, ver}'' minute, irregular in size, the two anterior
ones smaller than the others. Radials large ; broadly truncate
below ; subquadrangular in outline but hexagonal ; the three
lower faces scarcely as wide as the lateral ones, and narrower by
one-half than the upper side. Brachials 1X5; four of them tri-
angular, giving off two arms each ; the anterior one quadrangular,
with only one primary arm. The arms bifurcate on the fifth
plate, and again on the tenth to fifteenth ; the higher divisions
are not known." In this species, exceptionall}'^, the inner arms
branch again.

Azygous plate elongate, resting upon the underbasals ; the
right lateral face, which is slightly convex, abutting against the
right posterior radial, its upper side supporting the anal plate ;
leaning with its left lateral side against the other radial, and with
its lower sloping side against the adjoining basal.

Geological Position.! etc. — Keokuk limestone. White's Creek
Springs, near Nashville, Tenn.

CCELIOCSINUS White, Rev. I, p. 131.
Syn. Sphreronites Phill., Palseoz. Foss. Cornwall, p. 135.

We have heretofore made Coeliocrinus a subgenus of Hydreio-
nocrinus, owing to slight variations in the form and construction
of the ventral sac, which we thought to be the only distinctive
character. Beautiful specimens, however, which we obtained since
in Kentuck}^, show that the two forms differ in their mode of ar-
ticulation in a similar manner as WooclociHnus and Zeact'inufi,
Scytalocrinus and Eupachycrinus, which we ranked as full genera.
In Coeliocrinus the calyx is conical, in Hydreionoci'inus depressed
— saucer-shaped.

Coeliocrinus is found also in Europe. Phillips, in his work on
the Palseoz. Foss. of Cornwall, gives on PI. 59 a good figure of
what we take to be the balloon-shaped ventral sac of this genus.
His figure was copied from the Geol. Trans, (new ser.), vol. iii,
PI. 20, which had been published with a note by Mr. Broderip,
" calling attention to some analogy between this fossil and
Chelyosoma macleayanum, a species of tunicate Mollusca, which
has a few coriaceous plates on the upper surface ont}^" Phillips,
and apparently Austin, took it to be allied to Echinosphe rites of
Wahlenberg, and called it provisionally Sphseronites tessellafuSj
which we propose to change into Coeliocrinus tessellatus.

*

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169

In its arm structure Cceliocriniis leans decidedly toward Woodo-
crinus, but approaches Eydreionocrinus in the form of its sac-
like appendage.

We have already referred to it Cceliocrinus dilatatus (Hall)

White; G. carr/u/erMS (Worthen) W. and Sp.; G. lyra (Worthen)

W. and Sp. ; G. subspinosus White, and G. ventt^icosus (Hall)

White, and now add further :

»1840. C. tessellatus (Phill.), Spseronites tesseUatus, Pala^oz. Foss. Cornwall, p.
135, PI. 59.— Subcarbon. (?). Locality (?).

HYDREIONOCRINUS De Kon., Rev. I, p. 123.

Wetherby, in a paper on the Crinoids of Pulaski Co., Ken-
tucky, figured and described a new species of Eydreionocrinus,
which he referred with doubt to Eydreionocrinus (Zeacrinus)
armiger (M. and W.). Several fine specimens of this form, which
we obtained lately at Sloan's Yalley, Ky., show it to be specifically
distinct from either E. armiger or E. de23ressus of the same
localit3^ We propose for it the name Eydreionocrinus Wether-
byi, in honor of the discoverer of this interesting locality. The
species, which was figured Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. iii,
figs. 7, 8, 9, 10, difiers from E. depressus, y^ith which it has prob-
ably the closest aflfinities, in the less depressed form of the dorsal
cup, and in the basal concavity, which is shallow and almost re-
stricted to the underbasals ; while in the other the cup is deeply
excavated, and the concavity includes even a portion of the
radials. In our species, every brxichial bifurcates, in the other
only four ; the anterior radial which is quadrangular, supporting
a single primary arm. In the former all five radials are spinifer-
ous, in the latter only four, and the spines are shorter and sharper.
In E. depr^sus the primary arms branch four times, in E.
Wetherbyi only twice, and the arms, which in the former taper to
a small point, remain comparatively heavy in the latter. Again,
in E. depressus the arm joints, from the second bifurcation up-
wards, are biserial, while in E. Wetherbyi they do not pass the
interlocking stage. In the former the ventral sac is armed with
ten spines which join along the centre, the latter has five only,
and these enclose a variable number of small plates.

Eydreionocrinus (?) orbicularis De Koninck will be found

under Cromyoci'inus.

*1884. H. Wetherbyi W. and Sp.— Hydreionocrinus (Zeacrinus) arminger (M. &
W.) Wetherby, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Ilist., iii, p. 5, figs. 7-10. — Kaskas-
kia gr. Pulaski Co., Ky.
12 .

no PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

CROMYOCRINUS Trautschold.

(Eeconstructecl W. and Sp.)

1867. Trautschold, Crin. jiing. Bergkalk bei Moskau, p. 19.
1879. Trautschold, Monogr. Kalkbr. von Mjatschkowa, p. 117.
1879, Zittel, Handb. der Palseont., i, p. 360.

Syn. Eupacliycrinus in part (W. and Sp.), Revision i, p. 133.

Syn. Hydreionocrinus in part (De Koninck); Syn. Agassizocrinus in

part (Worthen); Syn. Poterioerinus in part (McCoy),

Placing Gromyocrinus as a synon^-m under Eupachycrinus, we
found it impossible to uphold the genus upon any of the charac-
ters that had been pointed out by Trautschold. Wetherby has
asserted (Journ. Cincin. Soc. IN^at. Hist., iir, p. 8), that the genus
was " well fitted to embrace all those species having three or more
anals, a body composed of comparatively heavj^, convex plates,
and ten arms composed of a single row of joints," He further
proposed to refer to Eupachycrinus all those species of this
group having one or more anals, heavy rounded calj^x plates, ten
to fourteen arms, and these composed of a double series of inter-
locking plates. The biserial arm structure, which is only a higher
form of the uniserial one, is as closely intermingled with the latter
in the Russian form as in the typical Eupachycrinus, and also
the plates of the calyx are heavy and convex in both groups.
The only distinction of Wetherby upon which perhaps a separa-
tion of the species referred by us to Eupachycrinus might be
established, is the number of azygous plates. We can separate
the species with a single plate from those with three pieces, as
proposed by White. A division of this kind, however, does not
in the least affect Gromyocrinus^yfYaoh, like the typical Eupachy-
crinus, has three azj^gous plates. But Gromyocrinus differs from
the typical form of Eupachycrinus, in the form of the calyx, the
relative size of the various plates, and in their mode of union.
In all American species of Eupachycrinus, the form is de-
pressed, more or less saucer-shaped, and the underbasals, which
are very small and totally covered by the column, rest within a
deep concavity together with the lower portions of the basals.
The latter plates, and also the radials, are comparatively large,
the underbasals small. In Gromyocrinus the calyx is globular,
constricted at the upper "end, the underbasals large, extending
conspicuously beyond the column and forming a shallow cup.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Ill

The basals are so extremely large, the radials so comparatively
small, that the former, together with the imderbasals, frequently
constitute over three-fourths of the cup, while in Eupachycrinus
the same parts occupy not more than half that space. Besides,
the plates of Gromyocrinus are united by syzygy, and not by
ligamentous fossse, as in most species of Eiqjachycrinus.

Our attention was directed to these facts by a species figured
and described by De Koniuck under the name of Eydreionocri-
nus (?) globularis, which in a somewhat higher degree has all the
characters of Gromyocrinus, and at the same time resembles cer-
tain forms described under Agassizocrinus.

To Agassizocrinus have been referred two very distinct groups,
the one almost always without column or even columnar attach-
ment, with a large almost solid, subglobular or semiovoid under-
basal cup, nearly truncate upper side, and small basals. The
other, always attached to a column, with comparatively small
underbasals, stretched out horizontally so as to form a five-rayed
star, and with extremely large basals partly on the same plane
with the underbasals. The latter species, which include Agassizo-
crinus globosus and Agassizocrinus papillatus, both described by
Worthen, agree most closely with Hydreionocrinus (?) globularis
De Koninck; Poteriocrinus nuciformis McCoy ; Gyathocrinus (?)
sangamonensis M. and W., all previously referred by us to Eupa-
chycrinus, and all agree equally well with Gromyocrinus simplex
from Russia. These species, we think, might be arranged under
Gromyocrinus, and the only thing which prevented us from doing
so before, is the similarity with Trautschold's two other species
{Gromyocrinus geminatus and G. orna^ws), which in their arm
structure and general form approach Epachycrinus ; while they
agree in other points with Gromyocrinus sim2')lex.

Gromyocrinus is closely allied to Agassizocrinus, to which it
holds a similar position as Pentacrinus to Antedon. We doubt
if Gromyocrinus QYQx became detached from its column, while all
species of AgassizociHnus lose their column comparatively early.

Generic Diagnosis. — Dorsal cup globular, constricted above;
composed of heavy plates ; sometimes (perhaps always) united
by syzygy.

Underbasals comparatively large, plainly visible beyond the
column, horizontally arranged and forming a sharply delineated
star, or sometimes a very shallow cup with a slight depression for

1'J2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

the attachment of the column ; suture lines well defined. Basals
large ; generally as high or higher than wide ; three of them equal,
hexagonal ; the two adjoining the azygous side heptagonal, larger
and of a different form.

Radials all pentagonal ; the lateral faces often so short as to
give to the plates a trigonal outline ; their outer faces abruptly
depressed or rounded off toward the brachials ; upper side straight,
facing upward ; articular ridge well developed and occupying the
full width of the plate. The right posterior radial narrower than
the others, its lower left side disturbed by the azj-gous piece. The
azygous plate is very large, placed in a sloping position, its two
lower sides resting between two basals, its left side against the
adjoining radial. The small truncate upper side supports the first
plate of the ventral sac, the right side faces the anal plate, which
is always considerably smaller, and extends beyond the limits of
the radials. Brachials one or two ; short ; laterally touching their
fellows of adjoining rays. Arms 5 to 10 or more ; heavy, composed
of short quadrangular joints, which change into cuneate pieces
and in some species interlock. Arm furrows wide ; pinnules
strong. Articulation between radials and brachials and between
the lower arm joints by transverse ridges and fossse.

Ventral sac imperfectly known, but evidently short. Column
small, circular ; axial canal minute.

Geological Position, etc. — Gromyocrinus is found in the upper
portion of the Subcarboniferous of Russia, England, Scotland,
Belgium, and of the United States.

We place here the following species : —

1867. Gromyocrinus geminatus Trautschold. Referred by us, Rev., i, p. 138, to
Eupachycrinus.

*1873. C. globosus (Worthen), Agassizocrinus globosus, Geol. Rep. Illinois, vol. v,
p. 557, PI. 21, fig. 12. — Kaskaskia gr. Chester, Illinois.

*1858. C. globularis (De Koninck), Hydreionocrinus (?) globularis, Memoirs de
Paleont., p. 21, PI. 2, figs. 1-4. — Referred by us. Rev. i, p. 138, to Eupachy-
crinus.— Upper part of Subcarboniferous. Near Glasgow, Scotland.

*1849. C. nuciformis (McCoy), Poteriocrinus nuciformis, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.
(Ser. ii), not P. nuciformis, Goldfuss (Fischer); also 1854, Contrib. Brit.
Palaeont. by Sedgwick, p. 116. — Subcarboniferous. Derbyshire, England.

. 1879. C. ornatus Trautschold. Referred by us, Rev., i. p. 138, to Eupachycrinus.

*1867. C. papillatus (Worthen), Agassizocrinus papillatus, Bull., i. 111. St. Mus.
Nat. Hist., p. 36; also Geol. Rep. 111., vii, PI. 29, fig. 17.— Kaskaskia gr.
Monroe Co., 111.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 173

*186l. C. sangamonensis (M. and W.), Cyathocrinus (?) sangamonensis). Referred
by us, Rev., i, p. 1^8, to Eupachycrinus.
1867. 0. simplex Trautschold (Type of the genus). Formerly referred by us to
Eupachycrinus.

EUPACHYCRINUS M. and W., Rev., i, p. 1.33.
(Restricted, W. and Sp.).

Accepting- the genus Gromyocrinus, we have to consider only
those species in which the cup is depressed or saucer-shaped, with
small underbasals hidden from view and placed at the end of the
basal concavity. These species, however, are divisible again into
two groups : a, species with three azygous plates within the dorsal
cup, i. e., the typical form of Eupachycrinus^ and : b, species with
a small anal plate, partly extending into the equatorial regions,
for which White proposed the genus Geriocrinus. Accepting
also this division (see Geriocrinus), a.nd admitting into Eupachy-
crinus such species as " Gromyocrinus " gracilis Wetherby, which
has but five arms, and Eupachycrinus spartarius, Miller, with
fourteen arms, we must modify our former generic formula so as
to admit species with five to fifteen arms in place of ten, as we
had previously given it. Thus restricted, Eupachycrinus is a
strictly American genus, embracing only the following species :

Eupachycrinus Bassetti Worthen, E. Boydii, E. crassus, Meek
and Worthen, E. formosus Worthen, E. orbicularis (Hall), E.
quatuor-decim-hrachiatus (Lyon), E. subtumidus Worthen, E.
tuberculatus M. and W., and E. verrucosus White, all previously
reported, and perhaps also E. plafybasilis White, which is very
imperfectly known, and may be a Zeacrinus.

We also place here : —

1882. Eupachycrinus asperatus Worthen, Bull, i. 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 34;
also (reol. Rep. Illinois, vii, p. 311, PI. 29, fig. 4. — Kaskaskia gr. Monroe
Co., Illinois.
*1880. E. gracilis (Wetherby), Gromyocrinus gracilis, .Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat.

Hist., p. 4, PI. 16, figs. 2 a, b, c. — Kaskaskia gr. Pulaski Co., Ky.
■•■•1847. E. maniformis (Shum.), Zeacrinus maniformis. This species was referred

by us Rev. i, p. 117, to Scytalocrinus.
* E. Moorei (Whitfield), Zeacrinus Moorei, Palcont. Ohio, vol. iii, PI. 11,

figs. 6, 10. — Coal measures. Hocking Co., 0. (not published).
1882. E. monroensis (Worthen), Bull, i, 111. St. Mus. Nat. Hist., p. 34; also Geol,
Rop. 111., vii, p. 312, PI. 19, fig. 16. — Kaskaskia gr. Monroe Co., Illinois.
1879. E. spartarius S. A. Miller, Journ. Cincin. Soe. Nat. Hist. (April), PI. 8, fig.
2. — Kaskaskia limest. Pulaski Co., Ky.
Syn. E. germanus S. A. Miller, ibid., PI. 8, fig. 3.

n4 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

TRIBRACHIOCRINUS McCoy.

1847. McCoy, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., xx, p. 228.
1859. Pict^t, Traite de Paleont., vol. iv, p. 321.

1884. F. Ratte, Proceed. Linnsean Soc. of New South Wales, vol. ix,
Part 4.

(Diagram, PI. 6, fig. 5).

This genus was originally proposed for a single specimen from
the Subcarboniferous of Australia. According to McCoy, it
differs from Gyathocrinus and allied genera by having only three
arms. The cup is described as cupuliform, large, composed of
three plates in the proximal ring, 5 plates in the succeeding one,
followed by 1 X 3 radials, 3 interradials, and one or two anal
plates. A similar explanation of the plates has been given lately
by Mr. Ratte, who described another species in which " the second
radials," the brachials according to our terminology, were pre-
served. Mr. Ratte had the kindness to send us an excellent cast
of the type specimen, examination of which leads us to infer that
the third ring of plates in the calyx was composed of seven
pieces, of which five were radials, the two others azygous plates,
but that none of them are interradials. In three of the radials,
the articulating faces form a straight horizontal line, and only
these plates are apposed by regular brachials, the two others,
those of the two antero-lateral rays being angular and higher at
their distal ends. The general outline of the two last mentioned
plates, indicates that they are compound plates, each representing
a radial and a bifurcating brachial, which probably became
anchylosed. They evidently supported two arms, one at each
side ; while the three radials with articulated brachials apparently
bear but a single arm like Gr-omyocriyius simplex Trautchold.
Ratte observed in Tribachiocrinus corrugatiis along the ventral
surface between the brachials, " the casts of very small plates,
irregular in shape, which doubtless belong to the so-called voute
(vault), or outer part covering the calyx as in Bhodocrinus, for
instance." We seriously doubt if these plates, which he figures
on PI. 68, fig. 2, are any such thing as vault plates ; we believe if
they are plates at all, that they formed a part of the disk, and as
such were covering pieces. The radials enclose the azygous plate
proper and an anal piece as in most of the Poteriocrinidse,
Tribachiocrinus is not such an aberrant genus, as it was supposed
to be. It is closely allied to Cromyocrinus and Agassizocrinus,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. It5

and like them has large basals, comparatively small radials, and
an unusually large azygous plate, followed by the anal piece and
proximal plate of the ventral tube. It differs, however, from
both genera in the number of underbasals, and the peculiarities
in the radial regions which have been mentioned.

Revised Generic Diagnosis. — Dorsal cup globose ; composed of
heavy plates. Underbasals three, comparatively large ; two of
them larger than the other, but not of equal size ; the smaller
piece placed in a vertical line with the anterior radial (PI. 6, fig.
5). Basals five, extremely large, very irregular in form; the
posterior one heptagonal and larger than any of the rest ; that to
the left pentagonal ; the three others hexagonal. The upper side
in four of the plates is angular, in the other truncate, supporting
the right posterolateral radial.

Radials five ; irregular in form and size, the postero-lateral one
considerably smaller than the others. The two posterior radials
as well as the anterior one pentangular, truncate above, and
they support a short subquadrangular brachial ; the two antero-
lateral ones hexagonal, angular above, supporting on each side an
arm. The line of articulation between the three former radials
and their respective brachials is widely gaping, and the mode of
articulation similar to that of all later Poteriocrinidse. The
brachials, although short, are twice as wide at their union with
the radials as along their upper ends, which are truncate, moder-
ately concave, each supporting a single arm. The two other
radials, which have angular upper faces, are slightly constricted
along their upper ends so as to indicate an anchylosis of
brachials and radials.

Nothing is known of the ventral surface except imperfect
impressions of small pieces. The azygous plate is unusually
large, subquadrangular or trapezoidal ; placed obtusely between
the posterior basal and the right postero-lateral radial ; its upper
angle, which extends almost to the top of the radials, is slightly
truncated and supports the ventral tube, its left upper side abuts
against a large subquadrangular anal plate. Column apparently
small and circular.

1847. Tribrachiocrinus Clarkei (Type of the g^nus) McCoy, Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist., Vol. XX, p. 228, PI. 12, Figs. 2, a.b.c.-Pictet 1857, Traite de Paleont.,

Vol. IV, p. 321. — Carboniferous. — Australia.
1884. T. corrugatus Rs^tte, Proceed. Linnean Soc. of New South Wales, Vol. IX, Pt.

4. — Carboniferous. — Australia.

176 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

b. Oraphiocrinites.
GRAPHIOCRINUS De Koninck, Rev. i, p. 121.

GraphioGi'inus has a bilateral symmetry, and is in some
respects higher developed than the preceding genera, owing to
the absence of the azygous piece. It has onl}' an anal plate, and
this is small and placed between the radials, resting upon the
truncate upper side of the posterior basal. The ventral sac is
cylindrical, and in Graphiocrinus rudis composed of longitudinal'
rows of subquadrangular pieces. We have not been able to
examine the tube in other species, and hence are not aware
whether the arrangement of these plates is of generic value. The
species heretofore referred to Graphiocrinus have but a single
brachial and ten arms ; we have, however, in our collection an
undescribed species with only five arms.

No additional species have been described.

BURSACRINUS M. and W., Rev. i, p. 123.

Syu. Synyphocrinus Trautschold, Bull., 1880.

In a paper " Ueber Symjphocrinus,^^ Trautschold described a
new species from Moscow, for which he proposes the above
generic designation. He asserts that it differs from PoteiHocrinus
and allied genera in having " pentagonal, roof-like second radials,
and these provided along the ventral side with two thorn-like
processes, separated by the tentacle furrow ; " that the third
radials had similar processes and re-entering angles, overlying
and covering the roof of the preceding plate; that the upper
truncate side supported two bifurcating plates ; that the species
had no pinnules, and that the vault rested upon the thorn-like
extensions of the third radials. We think Trautschold misunder-
stood his specimen. From his own figures and descriptions it is
evident that the calyx, as in other Fistulata, contained a single
radial, and that all succeeding plates were free, and true arm plates.
His " second radial " is grooved for the reception of the " tentacle
furrow," and, as shown by its form, a regular bifurcating plate,
his remarkable " third radial " represents the two proximal arm
plates, placed aside of each other, given off from the plate below.
That pinnules were present in this species is shown even by the
figure in which their faces are plainly represented. The processes
at the inner side have no generic value, they are in connection
with the articular faces of the plates, and are found, more or less,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 177

in all later Poteriocrinidse. Prof. Trautschold overlooked the
only important distinction between liis form and Poteriocrinus.
His species has a single anal plate within the dorsal cup, while
Poteriocrinus has three. However, in this character Synypho-
crinus resembles Graphiocrinus, and especially the subgenus
Bursacrinus, which has the same general form, a similar funnel-
shaped underbasal cup, and also branching arms.

It is possible that Poteriocrinus meekianus Shum. (Swallow's
Geol. Rep. Missouri) is a Bursacrinus, but it may be a Barycri-
nus. Only the dorsal cup is known.

Additional species : —

*]881. Bursacrinus cornutus (Trautschold), Synyphocrinus cornutus, Bull. Mos-
cow, Ueber Synyphocrinus. — Berg-Kalk. Mjatschkowa, Russia.

(?) Subgen. PHIALOCRINUS Trautschold, Rev., i, p. 124.

CEKIOCRINUS White (not Koenig). i

(Emend. W. andSp.).

1880. White, U. S. Geol. Surv. under Hayden for 1878. Paleont., Nos.
2-8 (Author's Ed., p. 12).
Syn. Euijachycrinus (in part), "W. and Sp., 1878 ; M. and W., 1873.
Syn. Eriosocrinus (in part), White, 1879.

Ceriocrinus is very interesting as representing a link between
the unsymmetrical Eupachycrinus and the symmetrical Erisocri-
nus. The three are very similar, and some of the species cannot
be separated even specifically, unless the azygous side is exposed.
We were at first inclined to follow Meek and Worthen in placing
species with one and three anal (azygous) plates under Eupachy-
crinus, which has three in its typical form, and to separate those
only which have no azygous plates within the dorsal cup. Our
way of disposing of this question was contrary to the rules laid
down by ourselves among other groups, but we took it to be a case
of rapid and extravagant development, and as such possibly only
of specific value. A similar view, but in a somewhat different
direction, was taken by Dr. White, who placed in his Ceriocrinus
species having an " anal plate " between the radials (none below),
together with species in which a similar plate is supported by the
radials (beyond the limits of the dorsal cup), and he ranked
Ceriocrinus as a subgenus of Erisocrinus.

^ Koenig' s genus has not been accepted (see De Loriol, Monogr. des
Crin. Foss. de la Suisse, 1877, p. 61).

nS PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

We are not satisfied whether the piece resting upon the radials
(White's fig., 5 a) is equivalent to the one between the radials (his
fig., 5 c), it is at least possible that the former is the anal plate,
the latter a plate of the tube, or, as it is generally called, the third
anal plate. We, therefore, cannot agree AA^ith White in consider-
ing the two forms generically identical, and much less specifically.
If the difference in the two specimens was to be explained by
individual development, that perhaps the anal piece had been
resorbed in the adult, the specimens should differ in size, which
is not the case. Throughout the coal-measures we find both
forms side by side and of nearly equal size, a certain proof that
the modification took place in the genus, and not in the individual.
We must therefore either separate the two forms generically, or
unite both with Eupachycrinus.

We stated under Eupachycrinus that we separate from that
genus all species with a single azygous plate, and these we place
under Geriocrinus. Contrary to White, however, we exclude
those species in which that plate rests upon the radials, which we
place under Erisocrinus. Whether EiHsocrinus and Geriocrinus
are full genera or only subgenera of Eupachycrinus^ or the latter
two of Erisocrinus^ is a question which we leave open.

Geriocrinus occupies the same relative position to Graphio-
crinus as Zeacrinus to Woodocrinus, and as Eupachycrinus to
Scytalocrinus, their differences being more of degree than of kind.

We refer to Geriocrinus the following species : —

*]875. C. Craigii (Worthcn), Eupachycrinus Craigii, Rev. i, p. 138.

*1S73. C. fayettensis (Wortlien), Eupachycrinus fayettensis, Rev. i, p. 138.
1866. C. inflexus (Geinitz), Cyathocrinus inflexus, Carbon, and Dj-as in Nebraska,
p. 62, PI. i, fig. 20; White, 1876, Scaphiocrinus carbonarius (not M. and
W.). Powell's Rep. Geol. Uinta Mts., p. 89; AVhite 1880, Geriocrinus
inflexus, 12th Ann. Rep. Terr., by Hayden for 1878 (author's ed., p. 127). —
Carboniferous. Grand and Green River. Utah and Nebraska.

*1858. C. hemisphericus (Shum.), Scaphiocrinus (?) hemisphericus, Trans. St.
Louis Acad. Sci., vol. i, p. 221. Meek 1872, Final Rep. on Nebraska, p.
147, PI. 5, Fig. 4, and PI. 7, fig. 1 ; also Geol. Rep. 111., iii, p. 561, PI. 24, fig.
6. — Carboniferous. This species we took (Rev. i, p. 138) to be a synonym
of Eupachycrinus Craigii, but, if Meek's identification is correct, it is a
good species. The plates, which in the latter are strongly spiniferous, are
in the other but little convex.
1880. C. planus (White), Erisocrinus planus (Type of the genus), Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., vol. ii, p. 257, figs. 6-7. White 1880, Erisocrinus (Geriocrinus)
planus, 12th Ann. Rep. Terr., by Hayden, for 1878, Author's copy, p. 127,
PI. 35, fig. 5 c (not 5 a = Erisocrinus White). — Coal measures. Humbold
River, Ky.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 179

c. Erisocrinites.
ERISOCRINUS Rev. i, p. 1:^9.

Admitting Geriocrinus^ we place under Erisocrinus all species
in which no azygous plates are represented at the dorsal side,
but we also include those in which a plate of the ventral tube
rests upon the radials. In all probability was the latter piece
always present in this genus. The structure of the arms is the
same as in Encrinus and Eupacliycrinus.

The only new species to be added in the list is :

*18S0. Erisocrinus Whitei W. and Sp., Erisocrinus (Ceriocrinus) planus (in part).
White 12th Ann. Rep. Terr, by Hayden for 1878 (Author's copy, p. 127, PI.
35, Fig, 5a (not 5c = Ceriocrinus planus). Distinguishing the specimen Fig.
5c specifically, we projiose the above name for the other to avoid confusion.

STEMMATOCRINUS Trautschold, Rev. i, p. 141. ,

In Part I, we separated Stemmatocrinus from. Erisocrinus only
subgenerically, from the fact that it agrees with that genus in all
its particulars, except that the underbasals consist of a single
plate instead of five in the other, which we explained by anchy-
losis. This explanation was doubted by Carpenter, who in the
Chall. Rep., p. 152, says : " the plate in question appears to me
much more truly represented by the central pentagonal piece on
which the basals rest, and it is obviously what Schultze calls
' eine fiinfseitige aus der Erweiteruug des obersten Siiulen-
gliedes gebildete Platte.' " And again : " the analogue of the
development of the other calyx plates indicates that they (the
underbasals) are primitively five separate plates like their homo-
logues in the apical system of Ophiurids and starfishes ; and a
theory which would homologize them with a plate that first
appears as a simple ring seems to me to run counter all true
notions of morphology." We confess that we do not understand
Carpenter's argument, for we believe Stemmatocrinus had primi-
tively five plates, which were united by anchylosis leaving no
vestige of the sutures. Similar cases of anchylosis among basals
and underbasals have been observed among other Palaeocrinoidea
and even among Neocrinoidea. In one of the two species of the
recent genus Bhizocrinus, the basals are distinctly divided, in the
other united by anchylosis. In Platycrinus it is absolutely impos-
sible to discover a suture between the basals, the anchylosis
between the plates is complete, and only in comparatively few

180 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

species the place of union is still indicated by a depression. Such
is the case also in Dolatocrinus and Stereocrinus. In Agassizo-
crinus an anchylosis takes place between the iinderbasals, all
suture lines disappear in the older specimens. In Eupachycrinus
ornatus and EupachycyHnus gemmiformis, which occur in the
same bed with Stemmatocrinus cernuus, the sutures are fre-
quently not visible, and the plates apparently constitute a solid
disk which in form and proportions resembles that of Stemmato-
crinus.

STEMMATOCRINUS TRAUTSCHOLDI ' nov. sp.

(PI. 9, figs. 7 and 8.)

Of large size. Dorsal cup subglobose ; plates heavy. Under-
basals of medium size, anchylosed, forming a solid pentangular
plate with concave sides, the latter with a somewhat waving
outline.^ The plate is slightly convex, except the columnar
attachment which is rather deeply impressed. There are abso-
lutely no sutures visible either upon the dorsal aspect or upon
the inner floor. The centre is perforated by a minute star-shaped
canal, with raj^s directed radially. Basals about as long as wide,
pentagonal in outline, but really hexagonal, the two lower sides
having together the length of the four others ; their upper sides
convex.

Radials once and a half to twice as long as wide ; concave
along their basi-radial suture, along their distal side slightly
excavated. The articular faces are directed upward and occupy
nearly the full width of the plates. The articulation with the
brachials is by a transverse ridge with a central canal and shallow
fossjfi. Brachials two, both extremel}^ short but deep. They
are followed by several short, cuneate pieces. The upper part of
the arms is not known.

The specimens show traces of interradial plates resting against
the inner edges of two radials, of which the places of attachment
are plainly visible (PI. 9, fig. 8), and detached plates were placed
aside of them.

Geological Position, etc. — From the Keokuk limestone near
Nashville (White's Creek), Tenn. The original specimens, some
thirty in number, are in our collection.

^ In honor of Prof. Tratitschold of Moscow, Russia, the author of the
genus, who had the kindness to send us a beautiful series of the Mjatsch-
kowa Crinoids.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 181

Family XXIII.— ENCRINID^ Pictet.

J. S. Miller refers the genus Encrinus, together with Penta-
crinus, to his Articulata, Poteriocrinus to his Semiarticulata.
Zittel, and after him De Loriol, to the Articulata of Miiller ;
•while they refer the closely allied Poteriocrinus to Miiller's Tes-
sellata. The mode of articulation is identical in Encrinus and
the later Poteriocrinidae, as pointed out in our general remarks
on the Fistulata, and our notes on the Poteriocrinidse. A sepa-
ration, therefore, in the sense of either Miller or Miiller, cannot
be eai-ried out practically. A ventral covering was never found
to be preserved in Encrinus, and as the same thing happens to
be a rule among all fossil Neocrinoidea, it was postulated that
this genus had an open perisome, and as such was a Neocrinoid.
However, the ventral surface is also unknown among the Poterio-
crinida?, which are universally regarded as Palseocrinoids. Neither
is the absence of azygous plates in the dorsal cup exclusively
found among Neocrinoidea — we need only allude to Codiacrinus,
Ceriocrinus and Erisocrinus — nor the presence of two brachials
(three radials), which was pointed out by Carpenter a good dis-
tinctive character. The latter is a very common occurrence among
tlie Poteriocrinidie, among which we failed even to make it a
generic distinction. We are willing to admit that Encrinus con-
stitutes a transition form toward the Neocrinoidea, it is even
possible that in the adult the interradials became partly or wholly
resorbed, but it is otherwise so closely connected with the Poterio-
crinidffi that we must regard it a Palaeocrinoid or place also the
Poteriocrinidge among the Neocrinoidea.

Pictet, and after him Dujardin and Hupe, placed Encrinus
under the Pycnocrinidees, which they subdivided into Encriniens,
Apiocriniens and Pentaci'iniens. This division was accepted by
De Loriol in his work on the Swiss Crinoids, but in his later
monograph on the Crinoids of France he followed Zittel, who
made it the type of a distinct family of the Neocrinoidea. All
writers preceding us, with the exception of Zittel, described En-
crinus with 3X5 radials, although the two upper plates are
laterally free, and morphologically and functionally identical
with the brachials of the Poteriocrinidae.

We agree with De Loriol and Zittel that Yon Meyer's genus
Chelocrinus, which is based on species having a second bifurca-

182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

tion in the arms, cannot be sustained. Ilis Dadocrinus, however,
seems to be a good generic form, and will be treated by us as
such. We separate from the Encrinida3 Picard's Encrinus Bey-
richi, which we refer to the Belemnocrinidae. Von Meyer's genus
Calathocrinus, which some writers assert to be identical with.
Encrinus, is known only from a single imperfect specimen.

ENCRINUS (Lamarck), J. S. Miller.

1816. Lamarck, Descr. des Aiiimaux sans vertebres (Ed. i), vol. ii, p. 435.
1821. Miller, A Natural History of the Crinoidea, p. 37.
1823. Schlotheim, Nachtr. z. Petrefactenkuude, p. 335.
1826-33. Goldfuss, Petrefacta. Germ., vol. i, p. 177.
1857. Pictet, Traite de Paleont. (Ed. ii), vol. iv, p. 337.
1857. Beyrich (in part), Ueber die Criuoid. d. Muschelkalk (Berl. Acad, d.
Wissenschaften).

1876. Quenstedt, Petrefactenk. Deutschlands, vol. iv, p. 455.

1877. De Loriol, Monogr. Grin. Foss. de la Suisse, p. 7.
1879. Zittel, Haudb. d. Palaeontologie, i, p. 383.

1882. De Loriol, Paleont. Francaise (Ser. I), Crinoidea, p. 6.

Syn. Entroclms and Trocldtes Agricola ; CTielocrinus and perhaps
Calathocrinus v. Meyer, (?) Tetracrinm Gotullo, Flabellocrinui
Klippstein, and (?) Gassianocrinus Laube.

Generic Diagnosis. — Dorsal cup regularly pentamerous ; short,
saucer-shaped ; composed of 5 underbasals, 5 basals and 5 radials,
all equal in size and form ; there being no azygous plates.

Underbasals minute, rhomboidal, forming together a five-rayed
star ; entirely covered by the top stem joint. Basals small, hexa-
gonal, for the greater part hidden by the column. They rest with
their lower sides between two underbasals, are laterally united,
support with their sloping upper sides the radials, and form
jointly a pentagon with almost straight sides. The radials are
large, subquadrangular ; their distal sides once and a half as wide
as their lower or proximal sides ; they are thick, heavy, the faces
toward the basi-radial suture somewhat hollowed out, showing
shallow fossae, while their lateral faces indicate a syzygial union.

Brachials two, the first quadrangular, the other pentangular ;
they are heavy plates with straight lateral faces by which they
abut against the apposed faces of adjoining plates. The upper
plate is axillary, supporting two arms, which either remain simple,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 183

or of which one or both from the second plate branch again.
Arms massive, composed of short transverse plates, which in
their upward arrangement change from quadi'angular pieces with
strictly parallel sides to cuneiform and gradually interlocking
plates ; some of them, however, possess a fully developed biserial
arm structure. The union between radials and first brachials,
and also between the axillaries and pi'oximal arm plates is by
articulation, the apposed faces having highly developed facets
with transverse ridges, and a central canal and fossoe. The
two brachials are united by syzygy, as also the two proximal arm
joints.

In Encrinus^ the inner floor of the dorsal cup is grooved by
five primar}^ canals, which, as they pass outward, bifurcate within
the basals, and the ten secondary canals thus formed proceed to
the radials, and thence after dividing again to the arms. These
grooves which are by no means restricted to Encrinus or to the
Neocrinoidea, are, according to P. H. Carpenter (his paper on the
Oral and Apical "system of Echinoderms, Quart. Journ. Microsc.
Sci. London, 1880, p, 362), passages for the fibrillar cords going
out from the interradial angles of the chambered organ.

Nothing is known of the ventral surface, except in a young
specimen in which we thought to observe a few plates of a ventral
tube. The interradial plates, owing to the large size of the artic-
ular facets, must have been small at any time, and possibly were
absorbed in the adult. Column composed of circular joints with-
out cirrhi.

Geological Position^ etc. — Muschelkalk, Trias. Germany and
Switzerland.

We recognize the following species : —

1847. Encrinus aculeatus v. Meyer, Lconh. Bronn's Jahrb., p. 576 ; also Palaeontogr.
i, 1851, p. 2G2, PI 32, fig. 1 ; also Beyrich 1857, Grin, des Muschelk., p. 38,
PI. 1, figs. 16 a, b. — Muschelkalk, Trias. Upper Silurian, Germ.

1850. E, Brahlii Owerweg, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellschaft, vol. ii, p. 6; also
Beyrich, 1857, Grin, des Muschelk., p. 39, PI. 2.— Muschelkalk, Trias.
Rildersdorf, Germ.

1856. E. Carnalli Beyrich (Chelocrinus Carnalli), Zeitsch. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch,
p. 10; also Leonh, Bronn's Jahrb. (1856), p. 28. — Muschelkalk, Trias.
RUdersdorf, Germ.

1877. E. GrepMni De Loriol, Grinoides Foss. de la Suisse, p. 12. — Muschelkalk.
Meyenbiihl, near Basle, Switzerl.

184 PROCEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

1816. E. liliiformis Lamarck, Descr. des Aniniaux sans vertebres, 1 edit., vol. ii, p.
4.'?o, Hchlotheim 1820, Petrefactenk., p. .3.35.— Agassiz, 1835, Prodr. Mem.
?oc. Sci. nat. de Neuchatel, vol. i, p, 195. — Dujardin (in Lamarck), 1840,
Descr. des Animaux sans vertebres, 2me edit., vol. ii, p. 651. — Desor, 1845,
Notice sur les Crinoides Suisses, p. 3; Bull. Soc. Sci. nat. de Neuchatel, vol.
i, p. 211.— Pictet, 1857, Trait6 de Paleont., 2me edit., vol. iv, p. 337, P!. 102,
fig. 4. — Bej'rich, 1857, Ueber die Crin. des Muschelkalkes, p. 1, PI, 1, fig. 1-
12. — Strombeck, 1856, Ueber Missbildimgen von E. liliiformis, Palajonto-
graphica, vol. iv, p. 168, PI. 31. — Dujardin et Hupe, 1862, Suites a BuflFon
Echinoderm.*, p. 164. — Coster, 1865; Syn. des Echin. des Alpes Suisses, p.
10; Moesch, 1867, der Aargauer Jura, pp. 26, 27-30 (Beitriige z. (icol. Karte
der Schweiz, 4te Liefer.); Greppin, 1870, Descr. geol. du .Jura bernois, p. 13. —
Moesch, 1874, der slidliche Aargauer Jura, p. 4, Anbang, p. 6. — Quenstedt,
1876, Petrefactenk. Deutschl., vol. iv, p. 455, PI. 106, figs. 14.3-184.— Bronn,
Klassen des Thierreichs ( Actinozoa), vol. ii, PI. 29, fig. 3. — De Loriol, Crinoid.
Foss. de la Suisse, 1877, p. 9.— Zittel, Handb. d. Palreont., i, p. 383.—
Muschelkalk Trias. Grermany and Switzerland.

Si/u. Lily encrinite, 1808, Lamarck, Organ. Remains, vol. ii, p. 14, figs. 1-3.

Syii. Encrinites moniliformis Miller, 1821, A Nat. Hist, of the Crinoidea, p.
37, PI. 1, 2, 3 ; also Goldfuss, 1826-33, Petrefacta Germ., vol. i, p. 177, PI. 54.

Si/n. Pentacrinus entroclia Blainville, 1834, Manual d'Actinologie, p. 257, PI.
28, fig. 2, and ibid., p. 657.

iS"?/)!. Encrinus entrocha D'Orbigny, 1839, Monogr. des Crinoid., PI. 18; also
D'Orbigny, 1850, Prodrome, vol. i, p. 178.
1835. Encrinites Schlotheimi Quenstedt, Wiegm. Arch., ii, p. 227, vol. 4, fig. 1 ; also
1852, p. 614; also Chelocrinus Schlotheimi H. v. Meyer, 1837, in Leonh.
Bronn's Jahrb., p. 316, and Mus. Senkenb., ii, 1837, p. 262, vol. 16, fig. 9 ;
also Bronn, Lethaja (Edit. 3), Bd. iii, 1851, p. 48, vol. 13, fig. 3. — E. Bey rich.
Ueber die Crinoid. des Muschelk., 1857, p. 34, vol. i, fig. 13. — Muschelkalk,
near Giittingen, Germany.

Sytt. Chelocrinus pentactinus H. v. Meyer, 1837, Leonh. Bronn's Jahrb., p.
316; also 1837, Mus. Senkenb., ii, p. 262, vol. 16, fig. 8; also L. v. Buch,
1848, in Leonh. Bronn's Jahrb., p. 690.

Syn. Encrinus liliiformis, Ueber Missbildungen, Strombeck, 1849, Zeitschr.
d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch., i, p. 163; 1855, Paltpontogr., iv, p. 177.

Syn. Encrinus pentactinus, Bronn, 1837, Leonh. Bronn's Jahrb , p. 30, vol. 2,
1851; also Lethaea Geogn. (Ed. 3), Bd. iii, p. 47, PL 13, fig. 1.— Also
Geinitz, 1838, Leonh. Bronn's Jahrb., p. 530.

DADOCRINUS v. Meyer.
1847. V. Meyer, Leonh, Bronn's Jahrb,, p. 575.
ISol. V. Meyer, Palaeontographica, i, p. 266.

Syn. Encrinus (in part), L. v, Buch, Bericht Berl. Acad., 1845, p.
27 ; also Beyrich, Ueber Criuoideen des Muschelk., p. 42 ; also De
Loriol, 1877, Crin. Foss. de la Suisse, p. 8 ; also Zittel, Handb. d.
Palseont., i, p. 383.

This genus has not been accepted by Beyricli, Zittel, nor De
Loriol. It was proposed by H. v. Meyer for a species previously
described by L. v. Buchi under the name of Encrinus gracilis.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PIITLADELPinA. 185

The latter has a turbinate calyx, underbasals (observed by Bey-
rich not by H. v, Meyer), an apparently round stem; ten arms
which are not very closely folded, composed of cuneiform flat
joints, and pinnules which are alternately arranged. The totally
different form of the dorsal cup seems to us sufficient to warrant
the generic separation. L. v. Buch's t3"pical specimen came from
Recaoro, Italy, and was supposed by Beyrich to be identical with
certain fragments which had been discovered in the Trias of
Upper Silesia, too imperfect, however, for critical comparison.
From this locality a more perfect specimen was found lately by
Mr. n. Kunisch, who figured and described it in the Zeit-
schrift d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. Jahrg., 1883, under the title
" Ueber den ausgewachsenen Zustand von Encrinus gracilis
Buch." We cannot altogether agree with Mr. Kunisch in his
views. The Silesian species is, in our opinion, essentially differ-
ent from the Italian one. The column is pentagonal in place of
circular; the arms rounded, angular at the outer face, and the
pinnules are given off alternately from every second joint, every
other one being united by syzygy ; contrary to the typical species,
which has flat arms, cuneiform joints, and of which every joint is
pinnule-bearing. The distinctions are so obvious that a specific
separation is necessary, and we propose for the Silurian species
the name Dadocrinus Kunischi. To explain the diversity in the
arm-structui-e by individual growth is at variance with the obser-
vations made upon recent as well as fossil Crinoids. We agree
that the arms undergo important modifications in their growth,
but we do not find cuneate arm joints turning into quadrangular
ones, though frequently the opposite is the case ; nor that single
joints are undergoing segmentations and are uniting again by
syzygy. The angles of the column in Dadocrinus Kunischi are
directed interradially, thus proving theoretically the base to be
dicyclic, which could not be ascertained from the specimen.
We propose the following : —

Bevised Generic Diagnosis. — Form of dorsal cup obconical.
Underbasals small, covered by the column ; basals forming an
elongate hexagonal cup. Radials comparatively smaller than in
Encrinus, but yet twice as large as the basals. Brachials in
number, form and articulation as in Encrinus. Arms long, uni-
serial, composed of single or compound joints, the latter united

13

186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

by syzygy ; pinnules long, and placed far apart. Column round

or pentangular, with or without cirrhi.

1845. Dadocrinus gracilis (L. v. Buuh), v. Meyer, Encrinus gracilis, Bericht d.
Ber). Acad., p. 27.— Dadocriuus gracilis H. v. Meyer (Type of the genus),
1847, Leonh. Bronn's Jahrb., p. 675; also Palaeontogr., i, p. 266, PI. 31, fig.
2 and PI. 32, figs. 4, 5, 6 ; PI. 31, figs. 9, 13; PI. 32, fig. 7.— Encrinus gra-
cilis Beyrich, Ueber die Crin. d. Muschelk., p. 42, PI. 1, fig. 15.— Muschel-
kalk Trias. Recaoro, Italy.
»1884. D. Kunischi W. and Sp. Described and figured by Mr. Kuniseh as Encrinus
gracilis, Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. geol. Gesellsoh., Jahrg., 1883, p. 195, with
plate. — Muschelkalk. Upper Silesia.

Family XXIV.— A.STYLOCRINIDJE Roemer.
The Asty locrinidae embrace only the genus Agassizocrinus, vfh\ch.
Pictet referred to the Comatulidse, Zittel to the Poteriocrinidje.
Roemer included in this family Marsupites. We place here pro-
visionally the genus Udriocrinus, which, however, in all proba-
bility, forms a family by itself, being sessile in early life, and
having no underbasals.

AGASSIZOCRINUS Troost.
(PI. 5, fig. 17.)

1850. Troost, Journ. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. Camb. Meeting, p. 69.

1851. Owen and Shum., Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pbila. (n. ser.), vol. ii.
1853. Shumard, Marcy's Rep. Red River Exped., of Louisiana, p. 173.

1852. Owen and Shuin., Geol. Rep. la., Wise, and Minn., p. 597,
1858. Hall, Geol. Rep. Iowa, vol. i, Pt. ii, p. 684.

1873. Worthen, Geol. Rep. Illinois, vol. v, p. 556.

1874. Meek, Amer. Journ. Sci. (Ser. 3;, vol. vii, No. 41, p. 484.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. PaL-eontologie, i, p. 861.

Syn. Astylocrinus, 1854, F. Roemer, Letb. Geogn. (Ausg. 8), p. 229;
also Dujardinand Hupe, 1862, Hist, natur des Zoopb. Ecbin., p. 159.

The name Agassizocrinus appears in Troost's List of the Cri-
noids of Tennessee, but the genus was not defined until 18.53,
when Shumard, in Marcy's Report on the Red River Expedition,
published Troost's MS. of Agassizocrinus dactylifor-mis, which he
accompanied with a short generic description of his own. Asty-
locrinus wa,s proposed by Roemer as late as 1855, when he described
under the name Astylocrinus laevis, a nearly perfect specimen from
a plaster cast, sent to him by Shumard's brother with Troost's
name Agassizocrinus dactyliformis attached. There cannot be
the least doubt as to the priority of Agassizocrinus, but it is
probable that Roemer's specimen, which was Troost's type, is
specifically distinct from the one figured by Shumard under
Troost's name, and hence we recognize Roemer's specific name.

t

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 18T

Detached plates of Agassizocrinus are found in great abundance
throughout the Kaskaskia group, but perfect calices are extremely
rare. The cause of this is perhaps explained by the mode in
which the different plates are'united with one another. Only the
underbasals seem to have been united by common suture, and
these, as a rule, are the onlj^ plates which are not found discon-
nected in the fossil. The apposed faces of the succeeding plates
are vei'tically and horizontally provided with rather conspicuous
ramifying furrows, which enter the surface of the plates (PL 5,
fig. 17). The ramifications vary somewhat, even among corres-
ponding plates, but those of apposed faces correspond with each
other, and together form small tunnels, which branch once or
twice, grrowino- narrower at their outer ends. Between basals and
underbasals there are generally three of these furrows to each
plate ; but they unite to one on entering the underbasal cavity,
where they seem to communicate with certain pits or openings,
which have been overlooked by previous writers.

The underbasals form an almost solid disk, with a shallow, cup-
shaped inner cavity. The latter contains six deep pits or cham-
bers, closed at the bottom, a central one surrounded by five others.
These pits either contained the lower part of the chambered
organ, or they indicate where the vessels extended down from
the chambers into the larval stem. It is possible that the axial
canals which descend from the body cavity were lodged in these
chambers, together with the vessels of the latter, and this might
explain the apparent communication of the pits with the radiat-
ing furrows above mentioned. But it may be possible, also, that
the furrows lodged groups of ligamentous fibres, by which the
union of the plates was rendered firmer and closer than it would
be when only two smooth surfaces were apposed. The plates,
however, as a general rule, are found to be disconnected, and the
radials at their lateral faces possess fossae, thus proving there
existed a certain degree of mobility between the calyx plates
generally. Similar ramifying furrows were discovered by us in
the genus BaryctHnus between the apposed articular facets of
radials and brachials, plates which evidently were not united by
a close suture.

Agassizocrinus in the earlier stages was attached by a column,
but led a free life later on, when the scar to which the stem had
been attached was gradually obliterated, so as to leave no traces
behind. The secretion of calcareous matter extended over the

188 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

greater part of tlie underbasal disk, whicli became more elongate,
until at last the suture lines between the plates disappeared en-
tirely, although in the j'oung Crinoid these are well marked.
Owing to the very considerable clwinges of form, which occur in
the growing animal, it is extremely' difficult to identifj' the species
of this genus, and we fear that several of those described repre-
sent merely different stages of the same species.

Agassizocrinus globosus and A. papillatus Worthen have been
referred by us to Cromyocrinus ; his A. hemispJiericus, in wliicli
the underbasals do not extend beyond the column, is either
Eupachycrinus or Scytalocrinus, probabl3^ the latter.

Generic Diagnosis. — Form of calyx elongate, composed of mas-
sive plates, and containing a comparatively small visceral cavity.

TJnderbasals extremely large ; obconical ; almost solid ; witli a
very small inner cavity. Young specimens have an articuLir scar
for the attachment of a column, pierced by an axial canal ; this,
however, becomes obliterated soon after the Crinoid enters free
life. The inner cavity lodges the chambered organ, and is pro-
vided with six deep pits, a central one surrounded by five others,
which either constitute the chambers of this organ or their lower
extensions.

Basals large, three of them hexagonal, two heptagonal, but they
appear to be pentagonal and hexagonal, owing to the convex form
of the two lower sides. The heptagonal plates enclose, and partly
support, the azygous pieces, consisting of the azygous plate proper,
which has a sloping position and is generally large, a smaller anal
plate, and the first plate of the ventral tube. The size and form
of the tube is not known, but it was evidently small, perhaps
similar to that of Gromyocrinus, with which Agassizocrinus agrees
in the arrangement of its azygous plates.

Radials unusually small ; wider than high ; the upper face trun-
cate ; they are all pentagonal, four of them of nearly equal size,
the fifth one considerably smaller and of irregular form. The
articular facets are on a level with the outer edges of the plates,
they are somewhat extended inward, and pierced by a transverse
axial canal. The articulation between calyx and arms is regu-
larly bifacial, resembling that between the oval stem-joints of
Plalycrinus. The brachials are single, axillary, and abut later-
ally against each other. The arms are long, rather stout, rounded,
and composed of short, cuneate pieces. Pinnules strong.

The mode of union between the plates of the calyx is variable.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 189

The underbasals -were united by a common suture, the lines of
which in the adult Crinoid are completely obliterated. The basals
possess, among each other, and where they meet the underbasals
and radials, ramifying furrows along their faces, which, together
with similar furrows on apposed faces, form tunneled passages,
probably containing ligament ; the lateral faces of the radials,
however, are excavated for fossae.

Geological Position, etc. — Restricted, so far as known, to the
Kaskaskia group of America.

The following species have been described : —

1873. Agassizocrinus carbonarius "Worthen, Geol. Kep, III., v, p. 566, PL 24, fig. 4,
— Coal measures. Shelby Co., III.

1873. A. cliesterensis Worthen, Geol. Rep. 111., v, p. 558, PI, 21, fig. 9. — Kaskaskia
gr. Chester, 111.

1851. A. conicus Owen and Shum., Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (n. ser.), vol. ii, p.
93, PI. xi, fig. 6.— Geol. Rep. Iowa, Wise, and Wmn., p. 697, PI. 5 b, fig. 6.
— Meek and Worthen, 1873, Geol. Rep. Illinois, PI. 21, fig. 8. — Kaskaskia
limest. Chester, Illinois.

1858. A. constrictus Hall, Geol. Rep. Iowa, vol. i, p. 687, PI. 25, fig. 10. — Kaskaskia
gr. Chester, Illinois.

1850. A, dactyliformis Troost, Type of the genus. List Crin. Tenn. Cainbr. Meet.,
p. 6U; Shum. 1853, Marcy's Rep. Red River, p. 173. — Hall 1858, Geol. Rep.
Iowa, vol. i, p. 685, with diagram. — Kaskaskia gr. Chester, III., and Crit-
tenden Co., Ky.

1S58. A gibbosus Hall, Geol. Rep. Iowa, vol. i, p. 686, PL 25, fig. 6.— Worthen 1873,
Geol. Rep. 111., v, PL 21, fig. 11.— Kaskaskia gr. Chester, IlL
A. gracilis Troost is a catalogue name.
*1855. A. laevis (Roemer), A.stylocrinus laevis (Second type of the genus), Leth.

Geogn. (Ausg. 3), p. 229, PL 4, fig. 13.— Kaskaskia gr.
*1852. A. occidentalis Owen and Shum. (Poteriocrinus oocidentalis), Journ. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Phila. (n. ser), vol. ii, p. 92, PL xi, tig. 6; also Geol. Surv. of
Iowa, Wise, and Minnes., p. 596, PL v 6, fig. 4. — (Probably a young speci-
men of A, gibbosus Hall). — Kaskaskia gr. Chester, Illinois.
A. pantagonus Worthen, Geol. Rep. III., v, p. 556, PL 21, fig. 10. — Kaskaskia
gr. Chester, Illinois.

1862. A. tumidus Owen and Shum., Journ. Acnd. Nat. Sci. Phila., vol. ii, p. 90, PL
xi, fig. 3 ; also 1852, Geol. Surv. of luwa. Wise, and Mianes., p. 595, PL v b,
fig. 3. — Kaskaskia gr. Chester, Illinois.

(?) EDRIOCRINTJS Hall.

1859. Hall, Pal. Rep. N. York, vol. ill, pp. 199 and 143.

1832. Hall, loth Kep. N. York. St C.ib. Nat. Hist., p. 115.

183S. Meek au I Worthen, Gaol. Rip. Illluois, vol. ill, p. 119.

1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palaeontologie, i, p. 350.

1883. P. H. Carpenter, Ann and Ma^^ Nat. Hist. (May, 1883), p. 333.

Edriocrinas led a life similar to that of Agassizocrinus, being
attached in its larval state, and free-floating in the adult. It

190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

differs from that genus, however, in having no underbasals and no
stem, being simply attached by the basals. In its sessile state it
resembles the recent genus Holopus, with which it also agrees in
having an undivided base.

Generic Diagnosis, etc. — Sessile in its larval state ; free-floating
in the adult, being attached by tlie lower end of the basals.

Basals unusually large, elongate, closely anchylosed so as to
show no suture lines at the outer face; internally, however, there
are indications that the base might have been bisected. In the
young animal the form of the base is irregular and linear, in the
adult subglobose or deeply bowl-shaped, and the scar by which
the animal was attached, becomes totally obliterated by heavy
deposits of calcareous matter. Owing to this deposit the outer
form of the base differs considerably from the form of the inner
cavity, which grows gradually narrower toward the bottom, and
frequentl}^ ends in a sharp point. The walls are massive at their
lower parts, thin at the upper edge, which shows six excavated
faces for the attachment of five radials and an anal plate.

Radials comparatively small, quadrangular, articular facet but
slightly excavated, occupying the full width of the plates ; pro-
vided with a transverse articular ridge. The anal plate is in line
with, and has the length of the radials, but is narrower ; it sup-
ports a small plate, but beyond that nothing is known of the anal
apparatus. The structure of the ventral surface has not been
observed.

The arms are broad at the base, composed of extremely' short
transverse pieces, of which ten or more occur between the first
bifurcation. Nothing is known of pinnules, nor of the condition
of the ventral furrow.

Geological Position, etc. — Edriocrinus occurs in the Helder-
berg group of America, in which portions of the basal cup are
rather abundant.

1859. Edriocrinus pocilliformis Hall, Pal. Rep. N. York, iii, p. 121, PI. 5, figs. 8-12 ;
also 1868, Geol. Rep. Illinois, iii, p. 370, PI. 7, figs. 5 a, 6.— Lower Helder-
berg gr. Albany, New York and Perry Co., Mo.

1862. E. pyriformis Hall, 15tli Rep. N. Y. St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 116, PI. 1, figs. 23
and 24. — Upper Helderberg gr. Utica, New York.

1859. E. saoculus Hall, type of the genus. Pal. Rep. N. York, vol. iii, p. 143, PI.
87, figs. 1-22. — Oriskany sand.st. Cumberland, Maryland.

I

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191

Family XXV.— CATILLOCRINID^ W. and Sp.

The group of Crinoids for which we propose the name Catillo-
crinidfe consists only of the genera Catillocrinus and 3Iycocrinus,
which have been distinctly separated by all previous writers.
Catillocrinus, which was described by Meek and Worthen as
closely allied to Symbathocrinus, was referred by Zittel and De
Loriol to the Pisocrinidae, which we regard as a mere subdivision
of the S3^mbathocrinid8e. The form, when we include the arms,
is similarly cylindrical, the arms rest likewise directly upon the
first radials, and are composed of a single series of plates. Piso-
crinus even has irregular radials, which is so characteristic of
this family, but beyond that the two groups are quite distinct.
Mycocrinus, according to Schultze, forms a family by itself. He
took it to be a Crinoid without arms, which, in place of arms, he
thought had been provided along the ventral surface with numer-
ous ambulacral grooves. Zittel, and also De Loriol, have placed
Mycocrinus among the genera which were said to be imperfectly
known.

In the Catillocrinidse, the calyx is composed of only two series
of plates, and these are most remarkable for their extremely irreg-
ular form and distribution. The radials are massive, especially
at the upper margins, where they are transversely truncated on
the same plane all round. The radial plates differ in form and
size. Those of the two antero-lateral raj^s, as a rule, are much
larger than the three others, but, while at their upper margin
they are from three to six times as wide as the others, all are at
the basi-radial suture about equal in width. The anterior, and
both postero-lateral rays, rarely possess more than one arm each,
but in the two antero-lateral ones the arms are always numerous.
Every arm articulates directly upon the truncate upper margin
of the radial without the aid of axillary pieces, and remains
simple from the base up. The arms are in contact all around the
calyx, and are composed of a single series of very similar pieces.
They connect with the inner cavity by a peculiar groove, which
follows the truncate upper face of the radials. This groove con-
tains the ambulacral canal and food passage, and there is under-
neath, separated by a solid partition, another groove, which near
the inner margin penetrates the plate, and takes a distinctly down-
ward course toward the inner cavity, which throughout this family
is exceedingly small.

192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

The ventral surface has not been observed, but there is suf-
ficient evidence to prove that it was similar to that of the other
Fistulata.

Catillocrinus has its closest affinities with Galceocrinus. The
radials of the three anterior rays agree in form and distribution
so closel3'^ with the radials of Galceocrinus, that we thoiight at
first that it also possessed but three ra3S, and that the two irreg-
ular plates toward the posterior side were anals and not radials.
This interpretation had to be given up when we found both these
plates to be arm-bearing. In Galceocrinus the postero-lateral
rays are entirely absent or transformed into anal plates ; while in
Gatillocrinus those rays are represented in a rudimentary form.

The Catillocrinidae are meagre in forms and belong to the rarest
Crinoids. The^^ are restricted, so far as known, to the Devonian
of Europe and to the Subcarbouiferous of America.

CATILLOCRINUS Troost.
(PI. 5, figs. 15, 15oandl6.)

1850. Troost, List. Crin. Term. Proc. Amer, Assoc. Ad. Sci., p. 60.

1830. Sliumard, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, vol. ii, p. 358.

1868. Meek aud Wortlien, Geol. Rep. 111., vol. iii, p. 4G5.

1873. Meek aud Wortheu, Ibid., vol. v, p. 504.

1879. Zittel, Handb d. Palseontologie, vol. i, p. 348.

1883. De Loriol, Paleontologie FraiiQaise, Crinoids, vol. xi, p. 46.

Syn. Nematocrinua Meek and Worthen, 1866, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., p. 251.

Troost published the name Gatillocrinus in his List of the
Crinoids of Tennessee, without generic diagnosis. The first de-
scription was given in 1866, by Shumard,.in a foot-note to his
Catalogue of the Palaeozoic Fossils of North America, from
specimens of Gatillocrinus Tennesseae. He described the calj^x
as composed of three series of plates : the "basals " which were
said to be covered by the column, and the " primary " and
"secondary radials."

Through the kindness of the late Dr. James Knapp of Louisville
we have had an opportunity to examine several well preserved
calices of the above species, and can state positively that it has but
two series of plates. It seems tbat Shumard took the proximal
joint of the column, which is generally attached, for basal plates,
and the edges of the basal disk proper for " primary," the true
radials for " secondary" radials.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193

Of Gatillocrinus Wachsmuthi no descriptions were given of the
plates in the calyx, but the arm structure of the genus was here
for the first time described. Meek and Worthen, who had not
seen Shumard's description of Gatillocrinus, and being unac-
quainted with the arrangement of plates, referred their species at
first to Symbathocrinus, not, however, to the typical form, but to a
new subgenus, for which they proposed the name Nematocrinus.
On a republication of the species, in vol. iii, of the Geological
Report of Illinois, the above name was abandoned, and the species
placed under Catillocrinus.

In Catillocrinus Bradleyi, Meek and Worthen undertook to
describe also the plates of the calyx, but without appljang to
them their proper terms. They simply designated them as plates
of a first and of a second series, except a few plates in the second
series which they introduced as " anals (?)." Of the five plates in
this series, three are easily recognized as radials, but also the two
others, although much smaller and very irregular in form, are
radials, as both are arm bearing.

The one toward the right supports at one end an arm, at the
other an elongate naiTow anal plate, which abuts against the sides
of the proximal arm joints, and has nearly their form, being only
somewhat larger. Bigsby (Thesaurus Devonico-Carboniferus, p.
224) places Catillocrinus as a sj'nonym of Calceocrinus.

We propose the following : —

Revised Generic Diagnosis. — General form, when the arms are
folded, elongate-cylindrical. Calyx in form of a shalluw basin or
cup, concave at the bottom, uniformly truncate at the upper
margin. It is composed of two series of plates : the upper one
supporting the arms, which are very numerous. Test exceedingly
thin along the basals, thickening rapidly upwards.

The basal disk is apparently undivided ; the greater part hidden
by the column. It is irregularly pentagonal, three of its sides
being nearly equal, the other two, which are adjoining, equal to
one-half the larger ones. The side opposite the two smaller sides
extends considerably bej'ond the column, while at the other side
the basal disk is either altogether invisible, or reduced to a very
narrow band. This want of regularity has been observed in all
specimens, and seems to be characteristic of the genus.

Radials five, verj' irregular in form, those of the antero-lateral
rays much larger than the rest. The two larger plates, whose

194 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

upper margins constitute fully three-fourths of the periphery at
the top of the radials, occupy together less than one-half of the
circumference of the basal cup. This disproportion is caused b}'-
the peculiar form of the other radials, which, notwithstanding the
great spreading of the calyx, diminish in width upwards. The
anterior radial is much smaller, heart-shaped, with strongl}- con-
vex lateral edges, which converge almost to a point at the top of
the cal^'x. The basi-radial suture is somewhat concave, and fully
as wide as that of the larger plates. The two postero-lateral
radials together are very little larger than the anterior one ; that
toward the right is smaller, very narrow, wider at the bottom
than at the top, and triangular when the sides are straight ; but
when these are curved, which is moi^e frequently the case, it is
somewhat lunate. The other radial is quadrangular, fully twice
as high as wide, and of equal width throughout.

The articular surface of the radials is provided with conspic-
uous grooves and intervening ridges, the former with a depres-
sion near the outer margin of the plate. The grooves along the
surface take a tortuous or undulating course, and near their inner
end turn rather abruptly toward the anterior radial. The latter
plate has generally but one groove, which is deeper than any of
the others and perfectly straight, but when it has two grooves, as
is exceptionally the case in Catillocrinus Tennessese^ these unite
before entering the inner cavity. The two larger radials contain
numerous grooves — the number varying with the species — that
toward the right, as a rule, has more than the one on the left. The
former radial has been observed to have in G. Tennesseae 27 to 31
grooves, in C Wachsmuthi 16 to 20; the plate toward the right
in the former species has from 21 to 23, the opposite one 15
grooves. The two small irregular radials have, so far as observed,
only one groove each.

In perfect specimens, the grooves are lined by two rows of
short, transverse pieces, which partly cover the groove, but leave
underneath a good-sized passage. The plates rest upon the ridges,
whei'e they abut against their fellows from adjoining grooves.
With the exception of the ridges and grooves, the truncated
upper side of the radials forms a uniform plane, interrupted only
by a small elevation along the left side of the quadrangular radial.
This elevation is occupied by a small, elongate anal plate, which
abuts against the two proximal joints of adjoining arms. The

1

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195

plate is placed on a level with the arm joints, has a like width
and, therefore, is easily mistaken for an arm plate.

The anal plate supports a very stout appendage, composed of a
single row of exceedingly large and heavy plates, longitudinally
arranged, which, instead of forming into a tube as in the case of
other Fistulata, are transversely curved like arm joints, leaving
a rather shallow, semicircular furrow on the inner side. These
plates are along their back extremely heav}'', as thick as the radials
at their upper margins, but they thin out toward their ends,
and approaching the furrow become extremely delicate. The
proportions of the plates are well shown by our figure of Gatillo-
crinus Wachsmuthi (PL 5, fig. 16), in which five of these plates
occupy an .inch, while in the same space there are seventeen arm
joints. It must be further mentioned that up to that point the
plates suffered no diminution in height nor in width, nor is there
any decrease in the thickness of the wall, which in Catillocrinus
Wachsmuthi, at the top of the fifth joint, is nearly two thirds of
the whole width of the appendage. The cross section is semilunu-
lar except at the base. The stoutness of the plates on the one
side, and the grooved structure on the other, are perhaps due to
the great thickness of the radial plates upon which the tube rests;
it had to be so necessarily in order to effect a communication with
the inner cavity of the calyx. The groove was probably covered
during life by perisomic plates. No traces either of a vault or a
disk have been observed.

The arms rise directly from the truncated summits of the
radials, without the intervention of axillary plates. There is an
arm to every groove, and, hence, some of the radials, contrary to
the rule in other Crinoids, support a large number of arms from
the same level. The arms are simple, slender, comparatively
long, scarcely rounded outwardly, of almost uniform size, and
when closed they appear as if united into a solid wall. The arm
joints are quadrangular, much longer and somewhat deeper than
wide, with parallel sutures. Arm furrows deep, triangular.

The column is circular, composed of thin joints, the upper part
is very stout but tapers rapidly downward.

Geological Position, etc. — The genus is apparently restricted to
the Upper Burlington and Keokuk divisions of the Subcarbonif-
erous of Aimerica.

196 tROCEEDtNGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

The following species have been described : —

1865. Catillocrinus Bradleyi, Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Phila., p.

;'.42; also 1868, Geol. Rep. Illinois, vol. v, p. 504, PI. 14, figs. 10 a, 6.— Keo-
kuk limest. Crawfordsville, Ind.
ISjO. Catillocrinus Tennesseae Troost (Type of the genus). List Crin. Tenn.,
Proceed. Aiuer. Assoc, p. 60. — Sliumard, 1868, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis,
vol. ii, p. 358. — Keokuk limest.. Button-mould Knob, near Louisville, Ky.

1866. Catillocrinus Wachsmuthi, Meek and AVorthen. (Symbathocrinus [Nemato-

crinus] Wachsmuthi.) Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 251. Catillo-
crinus Wachsmuthi, 1868, Geol. Rep. 111., iii, p. 465, PI. 18, fig. 5. — Upper
Burlington limest. Burlington, Iowa.

MYCOCRINUS Schultze.

1866. Schultze, Monogr. Echin, Eifl. Kalk., p. 223.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. False outologie, voL i, p. 380.

Schultze supposed that Mycocrinus had no arms, but his own
figures and description indicate the contrary. The radials are
provided close to the peripliery, and in Iront of the ambulacral
grooves, with well developed articular facets, pierced by trans-
verse slits.

Mycocrinus resembles the last described genus very closely, but
differs in the bipartite basal disk, the greater symmetry and regu-
larity in the arrangement of the radials, and in the general form.
We offer the following : —

Revised Generic Diagnosis. — Calyx in form of a mushroom,
constructed of two series of plates, the upper series forming the
thallus, the lower the stalk. The plates are massive, of very
irregular form, and without ornamentation.

Basals two, large, unequal ; one of them twice as large as the
other. They are very heavy and form a distinct, subglobose,
knob-like body, slightly truncate below for the reception of the
column. Its upper side rises to form a low five-sided pyramid,
near the outer margins of which there are twelve narrow slits
parallel to the edges. Two of the sides have three slits each, the
three others two each.

Radials five, resting with their inner edges upon the angular
margin of the basal disk, each plate facing one of the five sides of
the pyramid. They spread broadly outward from the edge of
the basals, and extend far beyond their outer margins. Two
of the radials are of equal width, much larger than the rest.
These two are separated from one another at one side by two
equal, much smaller plates, at the other by a single plate some-
what larger than the two others. The single plate is more than

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197

one-balf narrower above than below, owing to an angular exten-
sion at the lower half of its two lateral faces, which fit closely
into the adjoining excavated side of the large radials. Similar
processes arise from the sides of the two smaller plates, but here
only along the suture toward the larger one, the opposite suture
being perfectly straight. B}^ means of the lateral extensions, the
large radials, which at their basi-radial suture have nearlj^ the
same width as the smaller ones, attain at their upper face three
times the width of the other plates.

The articular surface of the radials is truncated, unusually
thick, and closely resembles that of Catillocrinus. Mycocrinus
boletus must have had fifteen arms, for there are fifteen rather
shallow ambulacral grooves, which pass from near the periphery
of the cal3^x to the radial centre. There are six upon each of the
two large radials, and one upon each of the two smaller ones.
The six grooves upon the two larger radials unite into one, and
hence there are but five main trunks entering the inner cavity.
The median part of every groove has a deep linear furrow, which
takes a somewhat downward course, and penetrates the walls of
the radials. Close to the peripliery, outside of each groove, there
is a well-marked slit-like axial canal, making fifteen in all, which
pierce the radials throughout their full length, and enter the upper
margins of the basals. These canals or tunneled passages are
evidently axial canals, which entered through the twelve slit-like
openings at the inner floor of the basals the chambered organ,
and as such communicated with the arms.

The body cavity is very small, its width not equaling the thick-
ness of the radials ; its depth being less even than its width.
Form of the arms, construction of summit and anus unknown.

The column seems to have been circular, with a small, round
central canal. The only species is : —

1866. Mycocrinus boletus Schultze, Monogr. Eehin. Eifl. Kalk., p. 222, PI. 7, fig. 4.
— Stringocephalenkalk, Devonian. — Nollenbach (Eifel), Germany.

Family XXVI.— CALCEOCRINID^ Meek aud W.

1878. Meek and Worthen, Geol. Rep. Illinois, v, p. 443.
1883. De Loriol, Paleont. Franqaise, vi (Crinoides), p. 51.

Syn. ChirocrinidcB, Angelin, 1878, Icon. Criu. Suec, p. 23.

Syn. CheirocrinidcB, Zittel, 1879, Handb. d. Palaeont., i, p. 357.

The only known genus of this family has been variously referred
to Cheirocrinus aud Calceocrinus. As early as 1851, Hall, in

198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

the Geological Report of New York, vol. ii, p. 352, gave notice of
a peculiar Crinoid from the Niagara group, of which he had
obtained what appeared to be a bipartite base or pelvis showing
a columnar attachment, for which he proposed the name Galceo-
crinus. In 1860, in the 13th Regents Report of the New York
State Cabinet of Nat. Historjj the same author described under
Cheirocrinus six new species of American Crinoids having a base
similar to Calceocrinus^ and which evidently belonged to that or
a very closely allied genus. According to Salter (Murchisou's
Siluria of 1859), the name CJieirocrinus had been used by Austin
in MS. for a similar form from the Wenloek limestone, but Eich-
wald had already in 1856 preoccupied the name for a certain type
of Cystidea. Shumard was the first writer to direct attention to
the probable identity of Calceocrinus with Hall's Cheirocrinus,
and in his Catalogue of the Palaeozoic Fossils of North America
he added the name Calceocrinus in parenthesis to all described
species of Cheirocrinus. In this he was followed in 1869 by
Meek and Worthen, and in 1879, Hall himself adopted Calceocri-
nus, while both Angelin and ZiJ-tel have retained Cheirocrinus.
It seems to us the latter name, according to established rules,
cannot be upheld for Hall's type, because it was preoccupied by
Eichwald for a Cystid, and even if it be true, as asserted by F.
Schmidt (Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersburg, Ser. ii, vol. xi, No. 11),
that Eichwald 's Cheirocrinus is identical with Glyptocystites,
which has priority, this would not alter the case. The same view
was evidently taken by Meek and Worthen, who proposed, in case
doubt should arise as to its identity with Hall's tj-pe of Calceo-
crinus, to change the name Cheirocrinus into Eucheirocrinus.

We would accejot the latter name, had not Hall himself, who
had the best opportunity to compare the type specimens, given
preference to Calceocrinus. Bigsby, in the Thesaurus Devouico-
Carboniferus, erroneously placed the genus Catillocrinus as a
synonym under Calceocrinus.

Calceocrinus was made by Meek and Worthen, in 1873, the type
of a distinct family, for which they introduced the name " Calceo-
crinidae.''^ This was adopted by De Loriol, but Angelin and
Zittel in their classification apply the name '''■ Cheirocrinidse.^^

Calceocrinus difi"ers in external appearances so essentially from
all other Crinoids, that Hall introduced for its description a spe-
cial terminology, which was adopted by all succeeding writers.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHTA. 199

In this special names were given to parts of the calyx, which, as
we will presently show, are represented in other genera, and hence
should be designated by the same name, the more since some of
his appellations conflict seriously with terms long ago established.
Hall divided the calj-x into two parts. The one, which he called
the " dorsal side," comprises the anterior side and not, as should
be expected from the name, the aboral part ; the other, which he
designated as the " ventral side," by which are usually under-
stood the oral or summit portions, represents the posterior
side. According to Hall, the " dorsal side " consists of three —
perhaps sometimes five — " basals," of the " upper and lower dor-
sal plate " or the first and second anterior radials, and of the
right and left " dorso-lateral plate " or lateral radials. He further
discriminates between " plates of the dorsal arm," the brachials
of the anterior ray, and those of the " dorso-lateral arms," or arm
plates of the lateral rays. The " ventral " side is described as
being composed of the "ventral arching plate" — which actually
consists of two pieces, and which either are anal plates, or non-
arm-bearing radials — and succeeding these of a row of plates,
longitudinally arranged, which were designated as "plates of the
ventral side," but which are plates of an anal tube. There are
besides summit or vault pieces which, however, were not described
by Hall.

The most remarkable feature of this genus is represented by
the basals, which are located on the posterior side of the calyx.
They connect with the plates of the anterior side, which is trun-
cated, toward the basals, not b}^ suture as in the case of other
Crinoids but by muscles and ligament, thus producing between
basals and radials a marked articulation. There is a widely gap-
ing suture along the articular line, which, as Meek and Worthen
suggested, permitted the basals to be opened out on a line with
the radials and other parts of the calyx. That the calyx was
capable of bending at this point is well shown by a unique speci-
men of Galceocrinus tunicatus Hall, in the possession of Mr.
James Love of Burlington, in which the main body stands out
from the column at an angle of sixty degrees ; while in most of
the specimens which we have examined the crinoid hangs down-
ward, almost parallel with the column. No specimen, however,
shows the calyx in an erect position.

There are in this genus but three rays, which vary considerably

200 rROCEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

in form and size. The two lateral rays are composed of a large
radial, which is followed b}'^ two ver}' small brachials. The an-
terior ray has two radials, which combined are smaller than the
single lateral ones. The two are generally separated by the lateral
radials Avhich join between them, placing one of the plates at the
upper, the other at the lower end of the calyx. This peculiar
structure has evidently' prevented all former writers from recog-
nizing those plates as radials. That the}'- are radials, and were
gradually separated in the course of palseontological times, is
proved by Hall's Silurian species Calceocrinus chrysalis and
Galceocrinus ineequalis Billings,^ by C radiculus Ringueberg and
G. Barrandii Walcott, in all of which the plates are narrowly
elongate, and united by a short suture. In Galceocrinus goth-
landicus of Upper Silurian age, they are separated, but the first
radial extends almost to the second. In Calceocrinus clarus and
Galceocrinus Barrisi from the Devonian, the distance that sepa-
rates them is somewhat greater ; while in all Subcarboniferous
species the two plates stand widely apart.

Galceocrinus agrees with Gatillocrinus in the arrangement
and form of its plates. In both of them the second ring consists
of five extremely irregular pieces, but, while in the latter all five
are arm-bearing, those of Galceocrinus are arm-bearing only in
the three anterior rays. The two posterior ones are small and sup-
port a large tube. The corresponding plates in Gatillocrinus
support upon one end of their upper side an arm, upon the other
a similar tube as Galceocrinus, and in both genera the two antero-
lateral rays are far stronger developed than any of the others.
The two forms resemble each other more closely than might be
expected from Crinoids that ditfer so widely in their general
aspect, as shown by changing Gatillocrinus from its natural posi-
tion into that of a Galceocrinus. This may be done theoretically
by pressing the calyx sideways in such a manner that the basals
are pushed over to one side, and the three arm-bearing radials to
the opposite side. The lateral ones, however, owing to their large
size naturally extend to the basal side, where they join the small
postero-lateral radials, which, as stated, hold a similar position

* It was Mr. Walter R. Billings, of Ottawa, who already in 1883 directed
our attention to Heierocrinus inmqualis as being a Calceocrinus, and he
informed us also that in this species the two anterior radials were joined by
sutures.

I

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 201

as the aral plates in Calceocrinu^, resting like them against the
hasals and supporting a sirailar anal tube. By thus changing
the respective parts into a relative position, the affinities wh'ch
exist between the two genera can be better appreciated. T.he
form of the calyx, however, the articulation between the basals
and radials, and the sloping position of the lateral rays is so
unique, and strikingly different from Catillocrinus and other
genera, that Calceocrinvs must be referred to a distinct family.

The slight variations, which naturally occur in the branching
of the arms, were taken by Hall, and Meek and Wortlien, for
specific distinctions. We fear these differences are too trifling to
be regarded as such, and we have felt obliged to refer some of
their species to our list ©f synonj^ms.

Postscriptum. — While our descriptions upon the Calceocrinidse
were in press, we received a paper from Mr. E. 0. Ulrich (extracted
from the 14tli Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Minn., p. 104): Remarks
upon the names Cheirocrinus and Calceocrinus, with descriptions
of three new generic terms and one new species. • The author sub-
divides the species heretofore known under Galceocrinioi into three
genera : Cremacrinus, Deltacrinus and ffah/siocrinus^ and applies
to them the family name "Cremacrinidse." There is, in our opinion,
no valid reason for discontinuing the names Calceocrinus and Calce-
ocrinidse. The genus Calceocrinus was properly defined by Hall
and others, and several species have been referred to it by them.
Moreover, Meek and Worthen's name Eucheirocrinusyvo\\\^ have
priority, and also Calceocrinidse, as both were proposed in 1873.

Under Cremacrinus Ulrich placed the species in which the two
anterior radials (the two central plates of his) are connected ver-
tically ; under Deltacrinus those in which said plates are sepa-
rated by the two lateral radials (his two large dorso-lateral
pieces). This difference, we admit, exists between the Lower
Silurian and Subcarboniferous species, but in the Upper Silur
and Devonian the two forms pass gradually into one another, so as
to make a generic separation impracticable. Ulrich's statement
on p. 110, that Cremacrinus has " three primary radials," Delta-
crinus " five," Halysiocrinus " eleven," is based altogether upon
incorrect observation. All these species have but three arm-
bearing radials — one of them compound — and the plates which
Ulrich regarded as " eleven primary radials," are axillary bra-
chials of ascending orders. — (May, 1886).
14

202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

CALCEOCKINUS Hall (Revised by W. and Sp.).

1851. Hall, Geol. Rep. N. York, vol. ii, p. 353, PI. 85, figs. 5, 6.

18(16. Shuraard, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, vol. ii, p. 358.

1869. Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 73.

1873. Meek and Worthen, Geol. Rep. Illinois, vol. v, pp. 443 and 502.

1877. S. A. Miller, Cat. Amer. Palajoz. Fossils, p. 73.

1879. Hall, 28th Rep. N. York St. Cab. Nat. Hist. (Ed. ii), p. 146.

1882. De Loriol, Palseont. Francaise, Tome xi (Crinoides), p. 51.

1883. Ringueberg, Journ. Cincin. Soc. Nat. Hist., p. 130.

Syn. Gheirocrinus Hall (not Eicliwald, 18")6); Hall, 1860, I'^th Rep.
N. York St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 123 ; Salter, 1859, Murch. Siluria
(Ed. 3), p. 535 (Catalogue name); Hall, 1862, 15th Rep. N. Y. St.
Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 166 ; Zittel, 1879, Handb. d. Palaeout., i, p. 358.

Syn. Chirocrinus, Angelin, 1878, Icon. Crin. Suec, p. 22.

Syn. Pendulocrinus, Austin MS. (Salter, Siluria, p. 535).

Syn. Eucheirocrmus, Meek and Woithen, Geol. Rep. 111., v, p. 443.

In general form the specimens resemble a wilted flower, owing
to the position of the cal3'x, which hangs downward along the
column. The calyx is laterally compressed, especially at the
juncture of basals and radials, where it is almost linear ; while a
transverse section across the median part of the radials and
through the centre of the basal disk is decidedly triangular.
The anterior side forms a flat body, broadly truncate at the lower
end, constricted in the middle, and composed exclusively of the
radial plates. The basals, which are placed upon the posterior
side, are separated from the radials of the opposite side by a
widely gaping articular line, occupying the lower end of the
calyx. Along this line, probablj^ the upper part of the Crinoid
could be bent upwards and be brought in an erect position. The
posterior side is composed, in addition to the basals, of two non-
arm-bearing plates, which face laterally the incurving sides of the
radials, and support upon their upper side an extremely large
ventral tube.

The basals jointly form a kind of semicircular disk, of which
the straight line faces the truncated lower side of the anterior
radial, and the curved part rests against the infolding lateral
margins of the lateral radials, and against the two non-arm-
bearing plates. The basal disk, which is slightly convex, is com-
posed of three pieces, two of which are equal, the other large and
of a very different shape. The two former taken together are
lunate, and enclose within their arched sides the other plate,
which lies transversely, and occupies almost the entire width of

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203

the truncated side of the basal disk. The articular facet for the
attachment of the column has a lateral position, and is placed
within the centre of the two equal pieces, without touching at
an}^ point the third plate. It is large, somewhat excavated, and
divided vertically by the suture line.

The radials consist of four plates of very irregular arrangement.
The two larger ones, those of the lateral rays, occupy more than
two-thirds of the anterior side of the calyx, and support two small
transverse brachials, of which the upper one is axillary. Two
much smaller and very irregular plates, which are generally sepa-
rated by the large lateral pieces, form the radial of the anterior
ray. The large lateral radials are bent abruptly along their outer
sides, so as to occupy considerable space upon the posterior side
of the calyx. They are hexagonal — rarely pentagonal — angular
at their upper and lower ends ; one of the lower sloping sides
abuts against the first anterior radial, the other against the basal
disk. The sloping upper face connects at one side with the second
anterior radial, the opposite side supports the first brachial plate.
Of the lateral faces one meets the corresponding side of the
opposite radial, the other an anal plate. In the anterior ray, the
first radial is linear, but more frequently triangular, two of its
sides resting within a re-entering angle formed by the lateral
radials. The lower edge is generally wider, and constitutes the
bottom part of the anterior face of the calyx, being on a level
with the truncated edge of the basals, and united with them by
muscular articulation. The articulating surface, near the outer
margin of the component plates, is provided with a deep fossa,
evidentl}^ for the lodgment of elastic ligament. A similar but
narrower fossa is placed close to the inner margin of the plates,
separated from the former by a narrow transverse ridge. The
middle part of this ridge extends somewhat into the large fossa,
and forms a kind of triangular projection which contains a small
axial canal. The second anterior radial has nearly the same form
as the first, but its position is reversed, the truncate side being
directed upwards, the angle downwards, resting between the
sloping upper sides of the adjoining basals. In Calceocrinus
chrysalis, in which the first anterior radial joins the second, both
plates are exceptionally quadrangular, and, therefore, the first
lateral radials pentagonal instead of hexagonal. The plates
above are free. There are two brachials in each lateral ray, a

204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

single one in the anterior one. The articular line between the
lateral radials and brachials is widely gaping, the union between
the two succeeding plates apparently b}- syzygy. They are closely
fitted together in the specimens, and a suture is rarely discern-
ible. The lower one is short and quadrangular, the upper one
axillary. The brachial of the anterior ray is generally twice as
wide as high, and truncate at its upper side.

It has been stated that in the lateral rays the first brachials
are placed obliquely against the radials, in consequence of which
these two rays lean over toward the posterior side. By this
peculiar structure, the outer sloping faces of the bifurcating
brachials are brought into a vertical, the inner ones into a hori-
zontal position. The vertical side supports laterally another
axillar}^ the horizontal side vertically a free arm. The former is
followed again by an axillary on one side, and an arm on the other,
and so on in the same manner to the last bifurcation, the axillary
plates all arranged in a nearly horizontal line, the free arms hav-
ing an upright direction. In species with but few bifurcations
the position of the brachials is more erect.

The arms are composed of single joints, which are generally as
long as wide ; rounded exteriorly and provided with a deep tri-
angular groove at the ventral side ; they are comparatively long,
rather stout at the base, but taper gradually upwards. The
lateral arms, after their first bifurcation, do not branch again, but
give ofi" from every third or fourth joint a large arm-like pinnule,
which extends to the end of the arm. The lower pinnule is less
than half the size of the arm at the place of attachment ; the one
or two succeeding ones have nearly the same size as the arras at
the place of their origin. The pinnule-bearing joints appear to
be somewhat stouter owing to a thick callosity at their upper end,
and their line of articulation is directed obliquely. The interme-
diate joints have parallel sides, which show neither fossae nor
radiations, and probably were united simply by suture. The
anterior ra}^ has but a single arm, which is given ofi" in an upright
direction. It is stouter than the lateral arms, and remains fre-
quently simple throughout, but when it branches occasionally,
the division takes place near the distal end.

Anal plates two, resting against the basals and the incurved
wings of the lateral radials. Their upper side supports a row of
very large and heavy quadrangular plates, which are longitudi-

I

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCK8 OF PHILADELPHIA. 205

nally arranged and form the exterior side of an enormous anal
tube, extending to the tips of the arms and perhaps beyond their
limits, with scarcely an}'^ diminution in size. Like in Calillocrinns,
only the posterior side of the tube is heavily plated, the anterior
side being composed of very small and delicate plates.

The column is comparatively large, near the calyx composed
alternately of shorter and longer segments, which soon turn alto-
gether into long joints. Hall gives the column as very short; it
was, however, of considerable length in some cases, as we have
followed it up to a foot or more without reaching the root.

Geological' Position, etc. — Calceocrinus makes its appearance in
the Lower Silurian, but only in America. It struggled through
the Devonian, and reached its greatest distribution in the earlier
periods of the Subcarboniferous, but without flourishing abun-
dantly. Throughout this long period of time, the species change
but little, less than those of an}' other genus, and it is exceedingly
difficult to point out specific differences, which in most of them
are so slight that they hardly deserve the name. In Europe it
has been found only in the Upper Silurian.

We recognize only the following species : —

188.3. Calceocrinus Barrandii Walcott, 35th Rep. N. Y. St. Mus. Nat. Hist. (Author's
Edit., p. 6), PI. 17, figs. 1, 2.— Upper part of Trenton limest. Trenton Palls,
New Yurk.

1865. C. Barrisi Worthen, Geol. Rep. Illinois, iv, p. 510, with woodcut. — Hamilton

group. Near Davenport, Iowa.

]Sfi9. C. Bradley! Meek and Worthen, Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 7?>; also
1873, Geol. Rep. III., vol. v, p. 502, PI. 14, fig 9.— Keokuk limestone.
Crawfordsville, Indiana.

1860. C. chrysalis Hall (Cheirocrinus chrysali's). Tj'pe of the genus. — 13th Rep. New
York State Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 123, with diagrams. Shumard, 1866, Calceo-
crinus chrysalis, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, vol. ii,- p. 358. — Niagara
group. State of New York.

l862. C. clarus Hall (Cheirocrinus clarus), 15th Rep. New York State Cab. Nat.
Hist., p. 116, PI. 1, fig. 17. — Shumard, 1866, Calceocrinus clarus, Tran.-s.
Acad. Sci. St. Louis, vol. ii, p. 358. — Zittel, 1879, Handb. der Palajont., i, p.
358, figs. 2, 4, 5 a. — Hamilton group. Ontario Co., N. Y.

1878. C. gotlandicus Angelin (Chirocrinus gotlandicus), Iconogr. Crin. Suec, p.
22, PI. 16, figs. 6-14.— Zittel, 1879, Handb. der Palfeont., i, p. 358, figs. 245,
b, c, d. — Upper Silurian. Gothland, Sweden.

1859, C. inaequalis Billings (Heterocrinus inaequalis), Geol. Surv. Canada, De-
cade iv, p. 51, PI. 4, fig. 7 f! ; Wachs. and Spr. Revision i, p. 70. — Trenton
limestone. Ottawa.

1866. C. perplexus Shumard, Trans. Nat. Sci. St. Louis, vol. ii. p. 358. — Keokuk

limest. Button-mould-Knob, Ky.

206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

1882. C. radiculus Ringueberg Journ. Cinein. Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. v, p. 120, PI. 5,

fig. 4. — Niagara group. Lockport, N. Y.
1862. C. stigmatus Hall (Cheirocrinus stigmatus), Trans. Alb. Inst., vol. iv, p. 225
(Abstr. p. 31). — Shumard, 18G6, Calceocrinus stigmatus, Trans. Acad. Sci.
St. Louis, vol. ii, p. .358; also Hall, 1S79, 2Sth Rep. N. York St. Cab. Nat.
Hist., p. 147, PI. 19, figs. 9-11; also 11th Ann. Rep. St. Indiana by Collett,
1881, p. 281, Pi. 19, figs. 9-11.— Niagara group. Waldron, Indiana.
1860. C. tunicatus Hall (Cheirocrinus tunicatus), l.'ith Rep. N. York St. Cab. Nat,
Hist., p. 124, with diagram. — Shumard, 1866, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Loui.s.
vol. ii, p. 359. — Keokuk limestone. Keokuk, Iowa, Niota and Warsaw, 111.
I860. C. ventricosus Hall (Cheirocrinus ventricosus), 13th Rep. N. Y. St. Cab. Nat.
Hist., p. 123. — Shumard, 1866, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, vol. ii, p. 359. —
Burlington limest. Burlington, Iowa.
Spi. Cheirocr. dactylus Hall, 1860, 13th Rep. N. York St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p.

123. ^Burlington limestone.
Si/H. Cheirocr, nodosus Hall, 1860, Ibid. — Keokuk limestone.
Syn. Cheirocr. Wachsmuthi Meek and Wortheu, 1869, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Phila.— Burlington limestone.
Sgn. Calceocr. dactylus Shumard, 1866, Trans. Acad. Set. St. Louis, vol. ii, p.

358.
Syn. Calceocr. Wachsmuthi, Ibid.

APPENDIX.

(January, 1886).
STEPHANOCRINIDiE W. and Spr.

Through the kindness of Prof. R. P. Whitfield, to whom we are
under lasting obligations, we had lately an opportunity to examine
from the collection of the American Museum of Natural History
of New York City, some valuable and unique specimens of the
genus Stephanocrinus. Among these were 25 specimens of Ste-
phanocrinus angulatus Conrad, two of them showing the brachial
appendages — the so-called pinnules — and 18 specimens of Stephan-
ocrinus gemmiformis Hall.

Stephanocrinus is one of those genera which prove to us how
inappropriate it is to make Crinoids, Cystids and Blastoids
distinct classes. The genus has been regarded by F. Roemer,
Johannes Miiller and Pictet to be a Cystid, by Messrs. Etheridge
and Carpenter and S. A. Miller a Blastoid. Dujardin and Hupd
— and apparently (?) Hall — refer it to the Crinoids ; while Prof.
Zittel was in doubt whether he should place it with the Blastoids
or not. That it has certain affinities with either one of the three
groups cannot be denied. It agrees by its oral and anal pj^ramid
with certain forms of the Cystids, while in its general habitus

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 20t

and in the position of the ambulacra it agrees with the Blastoids ;
and j-et it is, as we shall prove, unquestionably a PaljBocrinoid.

It seems Roemer^ had discovered sockets for the reception
of brachial appendages, and probably these sockets and the val-
vular covering of mouth and anus induced him to place the
genus with the Cystidea. Johannes Miiller, who also regarded it
a Cystid, makes the remark: " Nierenformige Warzen am Ende
der Strahlen des sternformigen Feldes deuten auf die Gegenwart
von Armen hin." Hall, in vol. ii, p. 351 , of the New Yoi^k Report,
does not describe the appendages which he had discovered as
Blastoid pinnules, but speaks of tentacula attached to the margin
along a slight groove in the base of the depressions between the
angular processes which ornament the summit of the body.
These tentacula or fingers consist of ten branches, each composed
of a double series of plates above, but uniting below a series of
coalescing plates which have a different arrangement. It seems
to us this description does not apply to ambulacral appendages,
nor do we think that Hall took the genus to be a Blastoid. On
p. 212 of the New York Report he called it a Crinoid, and in
1879 he placed it aside of well-known Pal^eocrinoidea. Pictet
describes the base as composed of " five subradials," and " five
basals," and the mouth as surrounded by " ten tentacles." Du-
jardin and Hupe place it among the Haplocrinidse, between Eaplo-
crimis and Coccocrinus, and also these writers describe within
the radial groove a reniform impression for the reception of an
arm, but thought to observe " lames paralleles " along the grooves.
They regard, like Roemer, the central pyramid, the mouth, and
the lateral aperture an ovarian opening.

Considering that Hall, Roemer, Miiller, and Dujardin and Hupe,
all describe at the outer end of the ambulacral groove a reniform
scar for the attachment of an appendage, it is somewhat surprising
that Etheridge and Carpenter place the genus among the Blas-
toids. They undertake to explain this by Hall's discovery of
" ambulacral appendages .... like those of other Blastoids,"
and give it as their opinion that the reniform scar of Roemer " is
nothing more than an infolded radial lip." We stated already
that we thought Hall never regarded Stephanocrinus a Blastoid,

^ We do not possess Roomer's description of Stephanocrinus which
appeared in Wiegmann's Archiv for 1850, and know it only from the quota-
tions of subsequent writers.

208 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

and he certainly did not describe arabulacral appendages, but
branching fingers, no matter what name he gave to the parts.
We are confident that the depression at the end of the ambula-
cral groove really does exist, and that it is occupied by a second
radial.

Stephanocrinus not onl^^ has two radials to each ray, but
branching biserial arms, given off in a somewhat similar m:inner
as the arms in the Platycrinidse. The second radials are reni-
form, small, bifurcating, and rest within a semi-ovoid or horse-
shoe-shaped depression near the outer end of the ambulacral
groove. They are succeeded b}'^ two or more axillaries of a
higher order, which in the usual way give origin to ten arms to
each ray. That these appendages, although they are equall}'^ thin
and short, are not pinnules, is proved by the fact that all are
supported hy a radial plate, instead of being distributed sepa-
rately along the sides of an ambulacrum. It is further shown by
one of the New York specimens, in which in one of the raj'S the
appendages became disconnected, and were deposited en masse
at some little distance from the radials, without the least disturb-
ance in their arrangement, a case which could not have happened
if they were ambulacral pinnules.

The ambulacra of Stepkanocriiius are constructed very differ-
ently from those of the Blastoids ; they possess no side-pieces,
no transverse furrows, no hydrospire pores, and no sockets for
the reception of pinnules; they simply are covered by two rows
of Saumplattchen, which enclose a tubular canal containing the
food groove. The Saumplattchen or covering pieces of the same
row are so closely anch^dosed to one another, longitudinally, that
it appears even under an ordinary magnifier, and in the most per-
fect specimens, as if there were but two elongate plates, one at each
side. As such they were represented bj^ Hall in his diagramatic
figure. New York Geol. Rep., vol. ii, PI. 48, fig. 1 1, in which the
reniform plates at the outer end of the elongate pieces represent
the second radials. The figure shows excellently the plates of
the ventral side as they generally appear in the specimens ; there
is omitted, however, a suture along the so-called coronal processes,
which Hall, as well as Roemer, thought he observed, but which
were not accurately defined until 1883, b}" Etheridge and Carpenter
(Ann. and Mag. Nat Hist., April, p. 239). They found the pro-
cesses " divided into an outer part formed by the contiguous limbs

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 209

of two adjacent radials, and an inner portion or deltoid/ and
that the calyx consists of three rows of plates — the basals, radials
and deltoids. The canals which contain the food grooves are in
their usual preservation, more or less compressed, and in conse-
quence thereof the two series of covering pieces became separated
longitudinally, and appear in the specimens as if forming a deep
groove upon the surface following the median line. Little of this
groove, however, is seen in plump specimens.

Etheridge and Carpenter, and also Zittel, regard the two rows
of anchylosed covering plates as constituting a single piece, and
this, they think, represents the lancet plate of the Blastoids.
Upon this point they make on p. 240 of their paper the following
statement : " The paired linear plates in the ambulacra we believe
to be single, and to represent the lancet plates of other Blastoids.
They seem to be usually much eroded and to have a strongly
marked median groove, which has been taken for a suture. Even
when these plates are preserved the side plates of the ambulacra
are generallj'^ missing ; but since Hall has discovered specimens
of S. angulatus still attaining ambulacral appendages like those
of other Blastoids, we see no reason to doubt the existence of
side plates and outer side plates. In fact, the former have been
described in S. pulchellus by Miller and Dyer." We doubt if
Etheridge and Carpenter ever saw a Stephanocrinus with either
side pieces or outer side pieces, or ever will see one, and if Miller
and Dyer found such plates in their St. pulchellus, we assert that
their species is not a Stephanocrinus. Aside from the fact that
the " so-called lancet pieces " are compound structures, we think
it utterly impossible from the position which these plates occupy
toward the oral plates, that the^'^ could represent lancet pieces, as
in that case the food grooves would have to run out into the air
in place of entering the interior.

In both of the New York species, the oral plates are on the
same level with the covering pieces ; they meet with each other so
as to leave externally, when both plates are in position, no open-
ing or passage. The only communication with the inner cavity,

^ We have substituted here deltoids for ^^oraJs,^' the latter term being
used by Etheridge and Carpenter in their paper. When they wrote this
they still regarded the deltoids as representing the orals, a mistake which
Dr. P. H. Carpenter explained and corrected in his Challenger Report,
p. 162.

AC

210 PROOEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY Of [1886.

in connection with the ambulacra, is beneath the covering plates
through the canals or tunnels which we have described. These
passages, which are closed at the bottom by the deflected lateral
edges of two adjoining interradials, as in the case of Cyathocrimis,
grow deeper and narrower on approaching the oral plates ; while
toward the arms they widen and divide, transmitting a branch to
each main division of the rays. All this goes to prove that the
passages are tubular canals, such as we find in the Paleeocrinoi-
dea, and that the apparent resemblance between the ambulacra of
Stephanocrinus and those of the Blastoids, to a large extent, is
superficial.

The oral 133-ramid, which is rather symmetrical in outline,
occupies the very centre of the ventral surface. It is composed
of five pieces of nearly equal size, which meet in the centre, and
are so closely connected by suture that the lines of union are
rarely seen in the specimens. A less close union seems to have
existed toward the interradials, for the oral plates are but seldom
preserved, when we find in their place a nearly circular opening.
The radials extend to the full height of the coronal processes,
and resemble in their form closely the forked plates of certain
Blastoids ; while in Hall's figure (N. York Rep., vol. ii, PI. 48,
figs. 1 h and 2/) they appear like the radials of a Platycrinus.
Hall evidently mistook the cracks which so frequently are found
at the base of the interradial processes, for sutures, and supposed
the united limbs of two contiguous radials, formed a deltoid-
shaped interradial plate.

The most interesting fQa.t\xve of Stephanocrinus unquestionably
is the quinque-partite oral pyramid, which, we think, gives us
valuable information regarding the undivided oral plate in other
groups of the Palaeocrinoidea. It was suggested by us on p. 55,
that probably the central or oral plate of the Palteocrinoidea
primitively consisted of five pieces, of which the suture lines
gradually were obliterated by deposition of new material. In
support of this theory we could only refer to the parallel cases of
the basals and underbasals among which similar modifications took
place not only palaeontologically by anchylosis of one or more of
the plates, but also in the growing Crinoid by deposition of lime-
stone at the outer surface of the plates, as in the case of Edrio-
crinus and Agassizocrinus. We were unable at that time to point

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 2ll

out a single Palseocrinoid in which the peristomial area was
closed by five plat^, and therefore regard the case of Stephano-
crinus of the utmost importance, not only as confirming our
suggestions, but as throwing light upon the orals of the Palseo-
crinoidea generall3\ Before, however, we discuss this question
any further, it will be necessarj^ to point out the relations of
Stephanocrinus with other Crinoids.

Stephanocrinus, undoubtedly, is closely allied to Allagecrinus,
Haplocrinus and Pisocrinus, and must be placed with them among
the Larviformia, but, owing to marked difl'erences in the form and
arrangement of the arms, it cannot be arranged either with the
Haplocrinidaa or Symbathocrinidae, and it will be necessary to
establish for it a separate family. Except in the arm structure,
the affinities seem to be particularly close with Pisocrinus, 'which
has similar interradial processes, formed likewise by the extended
limbs of the radials ; but as we know little or nothing of the oral
plates and ambulacral structure in this genus, a critical comparison
is difficult. It differs also from Haplocrinus in the position of the
disk-ambulacra, which in the latter are subtegminal, in the other
exposed to view. This, we explain b}- individual growth, and
assert from palseontological evidence that Stephanocrinus, like
Cyathocrinus and other Palseocrinoidea in its younger state passed
through stages in which it closely resembled Allagecrinus and
Haplocrinus. Admitting this, it will be interesting, and in-
structive, to transform theoretically the lower diffei*entiated
Haplocrinus, so as to conform with the conditions of the adult
Stephanocrinus. To this end we open out the five ventral plates
of Haplocrinus, so as to expose their ambulacral skeleton, and
push the ambulacra and the oral plate, which latter occupies the
central portions of this skeleton, in an outward direction, in such
a manner that the covering pieces fill up the clefts between the
interradial plates, and the oral plate the centre, increasing in size
as the space gradually grows larger. Nothing further is neces-
sary to complete the structure of Stephanocrinus but to extend
the sides of the interradials laterally, so as to close the ambu-
lacral groove from beneath. By these manipulations, in which, we
think, we closely imitated the natural development as it took
place among Palaeocrinoids palgeontologically, we placed the two
genera in the same relative position, in hopes to arrive therebj' at

212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

a satisfactory conclusion as to the morphological resemblance of
the respective plates.

In Stephanocrinus interradials have been admitted, and the
plates which do represent them correspond in our hj-pothetical
Crinoid with the plates which we opened out to receive the ambu-
lacra. The plates have relativel}^ a similar position, both rest
against the upper edges of two adjoining radials, and both support
a small pyramid or disk, which in both cases not only occupies a
strictl}' central position, but covers the peristomial area and closes
the oral pole. Now, if this is true, what makes those plates inter-
radials onl}^ in the one case and not also in the other, and why does
the central disk which they enclose represent the oral pyramid in
the one and something else in the other? That the central pyra-
mid is quinque-partite in Stephanocrinus, coalesced in the other,
is apparent!}' the only structural difference between the two forms,
and simply upon this ground the former has been regarded by
Carpenter (Chall. Rep., pp. 269 to 271) an oral pj'iamid, and the
central plate of Haplocrinus a so-called "orocentral," something
totally unknown in Crinoid morphology and that of Echinoderms
generally.

According to Carpenter the orals of Haplocrinus were repre-
sented by the five large ventral plates, although these, like the
interradials of other Paloeocrinoids, apparently cover the disk and
tentacular vestibule, contrary to the case of the orals and summit
plates generally which close only the peristomial area. If Haplo-
crinus did represent a permanent larval form of the Neocrinoidea
instead of the PaltEOcrinoidea. Carpenter would be justified in re-
garding those five plates as orals, and could assert that the plates
were in the growing animal, and in palaeontological times carried
inward b^^ perisome, as he and Etheridge suggested to have been
probably the case in the growing Allagecrinus, but we cannot find
in the phylogeny of the older Crinoids the least evidence to justify
that supposition. On the contrary, everything points at the con-
clusion that the orals, and other summit plates, had relatively the
same proportions in the younger and lower forms, as in the adult
and higher tj^^es ; and we, therefore, regard the respective plates
in Haplocrinus like those of Sfephanocrinus,Cyatlwcrinus and the
Blastoidea, which Carpenter, likewise, once regarded as orals, as
true interradial plates. If the plates in Haplocrinus really were

18SG.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PUILADELPUIA. 213

orals, and also the honiolognes of the six or more proximals of the
Platycrinidie and Actinocrinidse, and of the five summit plates in
Stephanocrinus, ■which all cover the peristomial area but not also
the tentacular vestibule and the disk, it would follow that in the
three latter the orals were carried inward by the cah- x interradials
b}' which they are surrounded, but not only, as perhaps might be
the case in the Camarata, by their higher orders or upward growth,
but even by the primary interradials. It would further suggest
that in the earliest genera Beteocrinus, Glyptocrinus and allied
forms, which have no proximals, the " orals " were unrepresented
or resorbed. Also Nanocrinus paradoxus (Echin. Eifl. Kalk.,
PI. 12, fig. 7 i) has no proximals, the covering pieces, according
to our interpretation, rest directly against the central plate.
This, we know, is tlie case in two undescribed species of Talaro-
crinus, which we discovered lately in Kentucky. In these species
the central piece is relatively larger than the combined orals of
Stephanocrinus, there are no proximals, and no other interradial
plates touching the central plate. The covering pieces occup}^
here a similar position to the central plate — the coalesced orals —
as in Stephanocrinus to the quinque partite oral pyramid. There
we have actual specimens, which in all essential points conform
with the hypothetical Crinoid which we constructed.

From Carpenter's arguments (Chall. Rep., pp. 268-2T1) we
conclude tliat he regards the hypothetical "orocentral" a kind
of keystone, by which the actinal system is closed in a similar
manner as at the opposite pole the dorsocentral is said to close
the abactinal side. Unfortunately, however, this theory as stated,
is not sustained by embryology. No such plate has ever been
discovered among living Crinoids, not even in their larval state,
before the opening of the tentacular vestibule, which is said
to represent the condition of Haplocrinus morphologically.
This difficulty Carpenter undertook to explain on p. 270 b}' stating,
that if such a plate appeared " it would only be in the way, and
have to undergo resorption to a greater or less extent." A weak
argument considering that orals of recent Crinoids actually
undergo that resorption. But, admitting it, what then became of
the orocentral of Stephanocrinus^ AUagecrinus and Coccocrinus,
and what of the central piece in the oral pj'ramid of certain Cys-
tidea ? He states further " the former (basals) are within the

214 PROCEEDINQS OF THE ACADEMY OF ' [1886.

ring of radials, and next to the dorsocentral ; and it seems there-
fore only natural to regard the six proximal interradial plates
surrounding the central piece (oro-central) in the vault of a Palaeo-
crinoid as representing oral plates." Tliis argument is not quite
correct, in so far as the central piece is frequently surrounded not
only by the proximals — his orals — but also by the radials and
anal plate (see PI. 7) ; contrary to the basals, which form a ring
by themselves. Besides, his argument is based to a large extent,
if not altogether, upon the hypothetical plate which he calls
"oro-central."

Taking everything in consideration, is it not reasonable and
more natural to regard the five orals of the Neocrinoidea, which
in the larva are loosely folded together, and which in some of the
Cystidea and also in Stephanocrimis were united by a close suture,
as gradually becoming anchylosed in a group in which they were
permanently closed, than it is to invoke the existence of a new ele^
ment unknown in Echinoderm morphology, and even then have to
assert that six plates take the place of five ? ! But not only that,
we also have to admit that these so-called "orals " contain in their
midst anal and radial plates contrary to the case of the orals of
the Neocrinoidea, Stephanocrinus and the Cystidea, and contrary
to the basals, the abactinal representatives of the orals as Car-
penter admits.

As a further proof that the central jiiece is the representative
of the orals, we refer to the Cystid genus Caryocrinus^ which
has three in place of five groups of arms, and which, according
to our interpretation, has no proximals. The central piece which
occupies the centre of figure, and which we think represents the
oral pyramid, is surrounded by eight plates, b}"^ five, (not four)
large ones, and three smaller ones, the latter conforming jointly
to one of the other five. Three of the plates have a strictly
radial position, the three others, including the compound one
which takes the azygous side, are interradial. We doubt if
Carpenter will regard these six plates, wholly or partly, as the
representatives of our proximals — his orals — or his theory will
have to undergo further modifications, as he will find it difficult
to restore five primitive pieces from an assemblage of plates as
here exhibited.

188(5.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215

STEPHANOCRINUS Conrad. i

184-2, Conrad, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., vol. 8, p. 278.

1851. Hall, Palaeoiit. N. York, vol. ii, pp. 212 and 351.

1851. F. Roemer, Wiegmann's Archiv f. Naturgesch. Jahrg. xvi, vol. i,

pp. 365-375.
1853. Job. Miiller, Verb. d. Berl. Acad. d. Wissenscli., p. 211.
1855. Lith. Geogu. (Ausg. 8), p. 266,
1857. Pictct, Trait e de Paleoiit., vol. iv, p. 304.
1862, Dujardin and Hupe, Hist. Natur, des Zoopli., p. 266.
1879. Hall, 28tli Rep. N. York St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 146.
1881. Hall, lltb Ann. Rep. of Indiana, p. 279.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Palseont. i, p. 436.
1883. Carpenter, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Apr., p. 237.

Stephanocrinus resembles in many respects certain forms of the
Blastoidea, but has true brachial appendages. The cal3'x is sub-
pyramidal, or deeply cup-shaped, with five spiniform interradial
processes.

The basals form a large semicircular or subturbinate cup, more
or less truncate at the bottom, with a trigonal distal face, which is
slightly excavated for the reception of a column. They consist
of three pieces, almost coequal as to size but not as to form, one
of them being quadrangular, the two others pentangular. The
quadrangular piece takes the position of the smaller basal in the
Blastoidea, to the right of the anterior radial ; contrary to other
Palaeocrinoidea in which it occupies the left side. In one speci-
men, however, exceptionally, it is placed posteriorly, supjjorting
the greater half of two postero-lateral radials.

The first radials are large and resemble to a large extent the
forked plates of certain species of Cadaster and Phaenoschisma,
in which the limbs — the prongs of the fork — of two contiguous
radials extend up between the arms in an almost vertical direc-
tion, but instead of forming, as there, a sort of pyramid, they
are extended in Stephanocrinus frequently into long thornlike
processes, which sometimes attain more than one-half the height
of the calyx up to the arm bases. These processes form radially
a deep gutter, containing the ambulacral groove which leads to
the arms.

The second radials rest within a horseshoe-like depression near
the outer end of the gutter. The plates are reniform, small, short,
axillary, with three conspicuous prong-like projections extending

216 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [188G.

inward. The outer ones of these projections are wing-like, rest-
ing against, and partly upon, the intcrradials ; the inner one
sword-shaped, their sharp point extended deeply into the ambu-
lacra! groove, so as to divide it, and to form a branch groove for
each main division of the rays. Stephanocrinus angiilatus evi-
dentl}'^ had ten arms to the ra}'', but the mode of branching
beyond the second radials is not well known. We found, how-
CA-er, in one instance the second radial succeeded by two other
axillaries. The arms are biserial, thin, short, pinnule-like, and
they cover the whole ventral surface. In length they do not
extend beyond the interradial processes, which apparently were
to protect these delicate organs.

The intcrradials are comparatively large. They resemble in
form and position the deltoids of Codasler, Troostocrinus and
other Blastoids, in which, like here, no part of the plates is visi-
ble in a side view. Tliey extend to the top of the projections and
rest against the inner faces of two limbs, the suture running
downwards so as to divide the processes into an inner and outer
part. The plates are connected laterally with one another, but
not centrally. They leave in the centre a moderately large open
space, which in perfect specimens is filled by oral plates. The
lateral edges of the intcrradials are deflected, curvino; downward,
so as to form a wide and deep ambulacral groove, which on
approaching the inner end becomes deeper and narrower, and
toward the arm bases divides as stated above. The ambulacral
grooves are readily distinguished from the general gutter formed
by the protuberances. The3' contain neither hydrospires, nor
pores, nor other openings, but there seem to be small axial canals
at the arm bases. At each side of the ambulacral groove there is
a sort of depression, which forms a place of attachment for two
series of small, subquadrangular covering pieces, which form a
vault over the groove, leaving underneath a circular, compara-
tively large passage, which at one end communicates with the
arms, at the other enters the calyx beneath the edge of the oral
pyramid. The covering plates of the same series are so closely
anchylosed that they appear in the best specimens, even under a
magnifier, as two single plates, one at each side, as which the}^
were figured by Hall. Their composite nature and alternate

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211

arrangement, however, was ascertained in places where portions
of this integument had been weathered.

The oral pyramid, which occupies the centre of figure, is placed
on a level with the covering pieces to wliich it is closely attached.
It rests against the truncated margins of the interradials, which
for its reception are slightly excavated. It is composed of five
subequal pieces, which are so closely united by suture laterally
and centrally, that the suture lines are rarely visible, and the
plates appear as if forming a single piece.

The anal aperture is located ventrally, near the top of one of
the interradial processes, at the place where two of the limbs meet
with the interradial. In its usual preservation it consists of a
rather large circular opening, which, however, in perfect speci-
mens is closed by a valve of from four to six small pieces.

The Stephanocrinus which Hall described and figured in the
28th Rep. of the N. York St. Cab. Nat. Hist. (Second Edition),
p. 146, PI. 14, figs. 15-20, is in our opinion specifically distinct
from S. gemmiformis, and even generically unless the small inter-
radial plates are very incorrectly outlined.

S. osgoodensis S. A. Miller ( Codaster osgoodensis) , Cincin. Journ.
Nat. Hist., vol. ii, PI. 10, figs. T and T a, which the author in his
Catalogue of the Palseoz. Fossils (Second Edition) referred to
Stephanocrinus is described from internal casts, and too incom-
pletely known for identification. St. pulchellus, S. A, Miller, is
a Codaster.

The column is small, and composed of comparatively long
joints.

Geological Position, etc. — The genus has been found exclusively
in the Niagara group of America.

The following species have been described : —

1842. Stephanocrinus angulatus Conrad. (Type of the genus). Journ. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Phila., vol. viii, p. 279, PI, 15, fig. 8.— Pictet, 1867, Traite de Paleont.,
vol. iv, PI. 99, fig. 23. — F. Roemer, 1851, Wiegmann's Archiv., Jahrgang
xvi, pp. 365-375, PI. 5.— Hall, 1851, Palaeont. N. York, vol. ii, pp. 213 and
351, PI. 48, fis. 1 a-m, and PI. 85, figs. 1-4.— Niagara group. Lockport, N.
York.

1851. St. gemmiformis Hall, Palajont. N. York, vol. ii, p. 215, PI. 48, figs. 2a-t; also
1879, 28th Rep. New York St. Cab. Nat. Hist., p. 146, PI. 14, figs. 15-20 ; also,
1881, 11th Ann. Geol. Rep. Indiana by CoUett, p. 279, PI. 13, figs. 15-20,^
Rochester, N. Y., and Waldron, Indiana (?).

15

218 proceedings of the academy op [1886.

Notes on the Underbasals and Top Stemjoint of Neocrinoidea

AND PaL^EOCRINOIDEA.

On p. 8 we stated that probably many Neocrinoids, heretofore
supposed to be monocyclic, either have small underbasals con-
cealed beneath the column, or that these plates had been repre-
sented in the early larva. We referred to the genera PentacrinuSy
Millericrinus and Apiocrinus, which, according to our generaliza-
tions on p. T, are built decidedl}^ on the plan of dicyclic Palseo-
crinoids. Our investigation, unfortunately, could be extended
only to comparatively few species, as the column and axial canal
of the Neocrinoidea very frequently, and even among the genera
to which we alluded, are not angular, and Pentacrinus among the
three is the only genus that has lateral cirrhi.

Rudimentary underbasals are known to exist in the Pentacri-
noid genus Extracrinus, and similar plates have been discovered
in the ApiocrinidjB by Mr. De Loriol in two species of Millericrinus.
In these species, as in the case of Extracrinus, the angles of the
column, when this is pentangular, are interradial, the canals radial,
exactly as in species in which underbasals are supposed to be
wanting, but contrary to the conditions of monocyclic Palseocri-
noids in which the angles of the column are radial, the axial canals
interradial.

Millericrinus polydactylus, according to Mr. De Loriol (Mono-
graph of the French Crinoids, p. 553, PI. 110, figs. 1 a and 2 ay,
has five minute plates within the basal ring, which were regarded
by him as " infrabasalia," the term which he applies to under-
basals. De Loriol describes these plates as follows : " Je distingue
trfes nettement, sur deux individus, cinq pieces extremement
petites, a peine distinctes a I'oeil nu, qui son logees an centre de
Particle basal, chacune reposant sur le sommet de I'une des
carfenes, dans une direction radiale ; au centre se trouve une
petite depression qui forme le fond de la cavite. Ces petites
pieces, que je n'avais jamais encore observees, jouent evidemment
le role de pieces infrabasales, mais a I'^tat tout a fait rudimen-

1 By an error it was stated on p. 7 in Eule 2 : the five sections of the
column are "radial,^^ the longitudinal sutures " interradial," which should
read: the five sections of the column are "interradial," the longitudinal
sutures "radial."

'^ This and the succeeding- quotations are made from the Palcontologie
Franqaise, Ire Serie, Animaux Invertebres, Terrain Jurassique, Tome xi,
Premiere Partie, Crinoides, par M. P. De Loriol, Paris, 1883-1884,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219

taire." Similar pieces were discovered by him in his MiUericri-
nus Orhignyi (PL 116, figs. 1 b,Cjd), upon which he says on p.
566 : " Elles ne peuvent absolument se voir que lorsque, par un
hasard heureux, Particle basal pent se d^ager du calice. II me
parait indubitable que ce sont la de petites pieces infrabasales
rudimentaires semblables a celles que j'ai signalees dans le Hill,
polydactyhts.''^

We full}^ agree with the distinguished Swiss palaeontologist
that the plates in question in both cases are rudimentary under-
basals, from the very fact that the plates are disposed radially,
the outer angles of the column interradially, as seen in Hill.
Orhignyi^ in which the stem is pentangular.

Admitting these plates to be underbasals, we doubt if all
other species of Millericrinus, which have an interradial pentan-
gular stem, and those with a round stem, and the species of Apio--
C7-inus^ a genus which, according to De Loriol, is closely allied to
Miller icrinus, should be devoid of underbasals. In that case the
two species should be separated from the others, and be placed by
themselves under a very distinct genus.

That small underbasals at least temporarily were represented
in other species of Millericrinus and in Apiocrinus, is indicated
by the fact that the open space within the basal ring, which in
Millericrinus Orhignyi is occupied by the underbasals, is radial,
contrary to the axial canals of monocyclic Palaeocrinoids, which
are interradial. Moreover, the space is not in proportion to the
axial canal in the stem, which in both genera is small and
circular. The space in these species is large enough to have con-
tained, in addition to the axial canal, such small plates as De
Loriol figured in Millericrinus Orbigny, and these, if present,
would talie the same position as the underbasals in that species.

In all dicyclic Crinoids, the column rests either exclusively
against the underbasals, or, when these are very small, also partly
against the basals. The latter is the case in the two species of
Millericrinus where underbasals are known to be present. In
these species they form together with the basals a deep concavity
for the reception of the top stem joint, which occupies the whole
concavity, as beautifully shown by De Loriol in Mill, polydactylus
(PI. 110, fig. 1 a). In other species of Millericrinus in which
no underbasals have been observed, and in the genus ApioctHnus,
the structure is fundamentally the same, except that the columnar
concavity is formed exclusively by the basals, the underbasals

220 PROOEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

being here absent, and the space which they should fill left vacant
in the fossil. In all these species the top stem joint occupies the
same position toward the basals that it does in the two
species in which the underbasals are in place, although the
plate varies considerably in form. In some of them it ap-
pears as if forming a part of the cahx, in others as an ordinary
stem joint. In some species it is much wider than the succeeding
joints, in others of the same width ; but there are all possible
gradations between the extremes. In all of them, however, the
plate rests against the outer walls of the basals as in Mill, poly-
dactylus, not within the basal ring, and in all of them the basal
concavity, whether large or small, is completely filled bj?^ the top
stem joint.

It is very interesting that in the two cases in which De Loriol
accidentally discovered underbasals, these were separated from
the basals, and are closely attached to the column, which goes to
prove that probably already a partial resorption of the plates
took place. It suggests further that the union with the under-
basals was tighter than with the basals, that probably the former
was effected by common suture, the other by S3'Z3^gy or some other
loose way, the apposed faces being either striated or showing
traces of fossae.

A near approach to the structure of Millericrinus polydactylus
we find in Mill. Piletti (PL 63), in which no underbasals were
observed, but the lateral faces of the basals (fig. 8 a) show clearly
that underbasals were once present. The column also here, from
the first joint down, is strictl}^ interradial, the axial canal small
and round, and not in proportion to the large open space between
the basals. The basal concavitj^ is funnel-shaped, very deep,
wide at the outer end. The upper stem joint is large, and extends
in width considerably beyond all succeeding joints.

A similar base exists in Mill. Milleri (PI. 96), in which again
the upper columnar joint is laterally extended and strictly inter-
radial, the columnar canal round, and much smaller than the
open space within the basal ring, which is star-shaped, the rays
directed radiall3^

A very different base is figured by De Loriol in Apiocrinus
magnificus (Pts. 46-48), in which the top stem joint takes the
form of the anchylosed underbasal disk of the Palseocrinoid genus
Stemmatocrinus. A comparison, however, with other species
proves very clearly, that it is a top stem joint of a very extreme

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221

form, and that the plate actually rests against the outer faces of
the basals, and not between the hasals as in the case of the inner
plate in Stemmatocrinus and Cupressocriyius, which Carpenter
(Chall. Rep., p. 152), as we think, erroneously took to be a stem
joint. The plate in Apiocrinus niagnificus is not, as should be
supposed from appearances, disposed radially, but interradiall}',
as shown by comparison with species having a pentangular stem.
It attained its radial angles accidentall}^ by adapting its form to
the basal concavity which is naturally angular. The case is parallel
to that of Eucalyjytocrinus and Bari^andeocrinus, in which the
angles of the upper column are shaped so as to conform with
surrounding plates, which are in that genus the radials.

In Apiocrinus Parkinsoni (Pts. 27 and 28) and in A. roissyanus
(Pts. 41-45), the basal structure is similar to that of Ichthyocrinus,
but, while in the latter the underbasals are persistent through
life, they may have disappeared in the other. The basal concavity is
shallow, and in both species the upper portions of the column taper
abruptlj'^ in a downward direction. The same is the case fre-
quently among the Ichthyocrinida3.

The base of Guettardicrinus and Rhizocrinus is in a similar
condition, but less concave. For Rhizocrinus we refer to the
Challenger Report, PI. x, figs. 5 and 9. The top stem joint
resembles closely that of Ajnocrinus, and also the basal con-
cavity, which also here is filled completely by the top joint. The
columnar canal is circular or ovoid, and much smaller than the
pentangular space within the basal ring, which, contrary to mono-
C3^clic Crinoids, is directed radially. The same is the case in
Guettardicrinus. Both genera are built on the same plan as
Apiocrinus, and if the latter possessed underbasals, these plates
were also present in Rhizocrinus and Guettardicrinus.

In the Pentracrinidffi, and not only in Extracrinus, in which
underbasals have been observed, but also in Pentracrinus and
Metacrinus in which they are said to be absent, the angles of
the column, without exception, are interradial, the lateral cirrhi
radial, but, while the axial canals of Metacrinus, and probably
Extracrinus, are radial ^ in conformity with dicyclic Palseocri-
noids, they are interradial in Pentacrinus,^ as in all monoc}'"-

1 Challenger Report, PI. 12, figs. 1 and 2, and PI. 41, figs. 6 and 7.

2 PI. 12, figs. 15 and 16 ; PI. 20, figs. 1 and 2 ; PI. 22, figs. 1, 2, 7 ; PI. 23,
figs. 1 and 2 ; Pi. 26, fig. 11 ; PI. 27, figs. 2, 3 ; PI. 30, fig. 4 ; PI. 34, figs. 8
and 9 ; PI. 37, figs. 14 and 15.

222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

clic older Ciinoids. This departure from what we discovered to
be the rule in the Palteocrinoidea induced us not to mention the
axial canals in suggesting on p. 71 that perhaps " all Neocrinoids,
or at least many of them, may have possessed in their larval state
rudimentary underbasals hidden by the column," basing our argu-
ments mainly upon the interradial angles of the column and the
radial position of the columnar cirrhi. This forms at present an
objection to our view that the two genera, and especially Penta-
crinus, are dic^xlic. On the other hand it must not be over-
looked that the position of the column, whether radial or inter-
radial, apparently is governed by laws similar to those by which
the underbasals are radial, the basals interradial. The pentapar-
tite stem — and this is found in quite a number of palaeozoic genera,
especially Silurian — alternates always with the proximal ring of
plates, the segments are radial when there are basals only, inter-
radial when also underbasals are present. In Paheocrinoids in
which the column is undivided and pentangular, its position,
whether radial or interradial. is ascertained from its lateral angles,
and hence their direction morphologicallj^ important. In species
in which the underbasals are small, and completely covered by
the column, as sometimes in Barycrinus, the angles of the column
occupy the same relative position toward the basals, as the upper
stem joint of Metacrinus, Pentacrinus, Millericrinus and the cen-
trodorsal of all Comatulge does toward their basals. This led us
to the conclusion that either the rules, which meet with no excep-
tion among Palseocrinoidea, as far as we know, either do not hold
good for the Neocrinoidea, or the genera to which we alluded,
and which are built otherwise upon the plan of dicyclic Crinoids,
really possessed rudimentarj^ underbasals during life as Extracri-
nus and certain species of Millericrinus^ or that perhaps under-
basals were present in their larva.

The ventral surface of the centrodorsal in some species of
Antedon is almost identical with that of the top stem joint of
Millericrinus,t\iQ plate is also interradial (PL 6, fig. 11), and
rests, as in the Apiocrinidse, against the outer face of the basals,
not within the basal ring. It is similar in other Comatulae, in all
of which the centrodorsal is interradial, and upon this mainly, we
base the opinion that perhaps also the Comatulae in their early
larva had rudimentary underbasals. That these plates, if present,
were not observed, is not surprising, as they may have been very
minute and been covered entirely b}' the column.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 223

Zittel suggested (Handb. d. Palseont., i, p. 390), that the plate
which connects with the basals in Apiocrinus probably repre-
sented an anchylosed underbasal disk, composed of five pieces.
That this is impossible is shown by the case of Mill, polydactylus,
which in that case would have two rings of underbasals. We
fully agree with De Loriol and Carpenter that it is an enlarged
stem joint, and believe that the plate represents morphologically
the top joint (the first one beneath the basals) of all Crinoids,
recent or fossil. The plate forms no integral part of the calyx,
but rests in all cases either against the dorsal (outer) face of the
basals, against the underbasals, or against both of them. It is
disposed interradially in the Apiocrinidse, Pentacrinidse and Com-
atulfie, similar to dicyclic Pal^ocrinoids, and undivided ; while in
other groups it is sometimes compound (tripartite or quinquepar-
tite). The underbasals, however, form an integral part of the
calyx, they rest within the basal ring, against the lateral faces of
the plates, and they are composed primarily of five pieces, which
occasionall}' are reduced by anchylosis to three, or coalesced into
a solid disk. If this is correct, it follows that the inner plate of
Stemmatocrinns, Cupressocrinus and allied genera is not a stem
joint, as suggested by Carpenter (Chall. Rep. 153) and others,
but an anchjdosed underbasal disk, as seen by examining the
inner side of the calyx, which shows that the plate forms a part
of the calyx, and rests against the lateral faces of the basals,
within the basal ring, and not against their outer faces.

ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.

Owing to peculiar circumstances preventing a suificiently careful super-
vision of ljublication (although the proofs were carefully examined by one
of the authors), a number of errors have been detected, especially in the first
section of Pt, III. Two or three of these are exceedingly annoying, entirely
changing our meaning. We request our readers to make the changes at
once in their copies as indicated below.

Part I.

On p. 239 (Ex. Ed., p. Ki), 6th line from bottom, for "Palseocrinoids"
read ^'Pcntacrinoids.''^

On p. 251 (Ex. Ed., p. 28), 16th line from top, for "first radials" read
"basals''^ (although the interpretation thus indicated has been modified
by us).

On p. 324 (Ex. Ed., p. 101), 11th and 10th line from bottom, change
twice: "radial" into '^interradial,^^ and " interradial " into "radial'^

224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Part II,

On p. 207 (Ex, Ed,, p. 33), 4th line from bottom, for "inverted" read
^'recumbent.''''

On p. 247 (Ex. Ed., p. 78), 19tli line from bottom, for " ornigranules "
read " ornigranulus.''^

On p, 250 (Ex. Ed,, p, 76), 4tli line from top, for "vesiculus" read
^' vesiculosus.'"

On p. 281 (Ex. Ed., p, 107), 20th line from top, for " elongatulus "
i-ead ' ' elegantulus. ' '

On p. 281 (Ex. Ed., p. 107), IGth line from top, for "comptus" read
"comtus;^' and 20th line from bottom, for " Harbrocrinus " read
" Habrocrinus.^'

On p. 298 (Ex, Ed., p. 124), 2d line from top, for "posterior" read
" superior.''''

On p. 299 (Ex. Ed., p. 125), 7th line from top, for "first" read "second,:''

Onp, 319 (Ex, Ed,, p. 145), 2d line from bottom, for "tennuis" read
"tenuis:^

On p, 320 (Ex. Ed,, p. 146), 1st line from top, for " tennuisculptus "
read " tenuisculptus:'

Onp. 356 (Ex. Ed., p. 182), 12th line from top, for "basals" read
"underiasals.'^

On p. 389 (Ex. Ed., p. 215), 4th and 11th lines from top, for "pendant"
read " pendent: '

On p. 393 (Ex. Ed., p. 219), 14th line from top, for " mammilaris " read
"moAnmiUaris:'

Part III, Sect, I.

Onp. 228 (Ex. Ed,, p. 6), top line, insert after "and" the words "we
think:'

Onp, 229 (Ex, Ed., p. 7), 5th line from bottom, for "radials" read
"interradials:' and 4th line from bottom, for " interradials " read
"radials:'

Onp. 230 (Ex. Ed,, p, 8), 15th line from top, after the word "cirrhi"
insert * ' when present. ' '

On p. 232 (Ex. Ed., p. 10), 10th and 11th lines from top, for "postero-
lateral" read " antero-lateraV

On p. 235 (Ex, Ed., p. 13), 8th and 10th lines from top, for " PI, 6 " read
"PI. 5;" also 4th line from bottom, for " Hoplocrinus " re?id."naplocrinus:'

On p. 241 (Ex. Ed., p. 19) : Our statement in the 16th and 17th lines from
bottom has been made the basis of a criticism by Dr. P. H. Carpenter, which
is well founded. It did not properly express our meaning, and we change
it as follows : Strike out all after the word "present" to the end of the
sentence, and insert : "in others apparently absent externally, either as a
rule or occasionally, but in these cases ice believe them to be represented on the
ventral side, as in the Crotalocrinidce:' In the same connection, on p. 295
(Ex. Ed,, p, 73), m the 12th line from the top, strike out "all," and after
the word "are" insert "generally:^

1886.] NATtJRAL SCIENCES OP tHltADELPHIA. 225

On p. 245 (Ex. Ed., p. 23), 3d line from top, for "Paleeocrinidse " read
' ' Palmocrinoidea. ' '

On p. 249 (Ex. Ed., p. 27), 6th line from bottom of text, for "PI. 2 "
read " PI. 5."

On p. 253 (Ex. Ed., p. 31), 8tli line from top, for "stellatus" read
" stellaris.^^

On p. 254 (Ex. Ed., p. 32), ISth line from top, before "alone" insert
"^er7ia;?s,"

On p. 255 (Ex, Ed., p. 33), 14th line from bottom, for " multiradiatus "
read "multibracMatus,''' and for "fig. 2" read "fig. G ;" also 11th line from
bottom for "Norwordi" read '^ Norwoodii;"' also 5th line from bottom, for
"to each plate" read ''or more.'^

On p. 263 (Ex. Ed., p. 41), 5th line from bottom, for "radials" read
"interradials.''^

On p. 277 (Ex. Ed., p. 55), 14th line from bottom, for "PI. 8" read
"PL 9."

On p. 285 (Ex. Ed., p. 63), 9th line from top, for "PI. 1 " read "Pi. 4."

On p. 287 (Ex. Ed., p. 65), 5th line from bottom, for "lovensis" read
"wwe?i8is."

On p. 291 (Ex. Ed., p. 69), 12th line from top, for "anal" read "oraZ."

On p. 292 (Ex. Ed., p. 70), 14th line from top, read "PakBocri7ioidea."'

On. p. 294 (Ex. Ed., p. 72), last line, for "as a rale" read "always

On p. 295 (Ex. Ed., p. 73), top line, for "Palseozic" read " Palmzoic

On p. 300 (Ex. Ed., p. 78), at top, for " Stellerites " read " Stellerids."

On p. 303 (Ex. Ed., p. 81), 16th line from bottom, for " Palseocrinoidse "
read " Pal(eocrinoidea.'^

On p. 307 (Ed. Ed., p. 85), 15th line from top, for " Beteocrinus " read
"Betcocrinus.''^

On p. 812 (Ex. Ed., p. 90), 6th line from bottom, for " Platynicridse "
read ' ' Pla tycrinidce. ' '

On p. 331 (Ex. Ed., p. 99), under Thylacocrinus, for "Vanuiosti" read
" VanniotV

On p. 327 (Ex. Ed., p. 105), top line, for " mespiliformes " read "mespili-
formis.''^

On p. 336 (Ex. Ed., p. 114), 12th line from bottom, for "simple" read
"singled

On p. 349 (Ex. Ed., p. 127), 18th line from bottom, for " Nebergangs-
geb.," read " Uebergangsgeb.f^ and on the 11th line, for "Dupe" read
"Huper

On p. 359 (Ex. Ed., p. 137), 9th line from top, for "peristjmeal" read
"peristomial;'^ and 12th line, for "were" read " loas.^^

Mr. W. R. Billings discovered underbasals in Olyptocrinus priscus, and
we therefore refer the species to "Ptychocrinug.''' He also did send a dia-
gram of Rhodocrinus (f) asperatus, which leaves but little doubt that it is
a somewhat aberrant form of " AreJiwocrinus.^^

5»

226 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Part III, Sect. II.

On p. 71 (Ex. Ed., in 147), 13tli line from bottom, strike out the word
"constructed."

On p. 79 (Ex. Ed., p. 155), 2d line from bottom, read " Myrtillocriniis"
without an "7t."

On p. 89 (Ex. Ed., p. 165), 10th line from top, for "Austin!" read
"AiistiniV

On p. 90 (Ex. Ed., p. 166), 3d line from bottom, for " Scytalocrinus "
read ' ' Stylocrinus. ' '

On p. 99 (Ex. Ed., p. 175), 11th line from top, for -'T. granulatus" read
" T. pyriformis.^^

On p. 105 (Ex. Ed., p. 181), 14th line from bottom, for "pyrimidalis"
read "pyramidalis."

On p. 115 (Ex. Ed., p. 191), 15th line from top, for " Streblocrinus "
read ' 'S&eptocrinus. ' '

On p. 150 (Ex. Ed., p. 228), 22d line from top, for "subuminus" read
" subtumidm.''^

On p. 157 (Ex. Ed., p. 233), 18th line from top, strike out the brackets
and insert "commas " in their place.

On p. 161 (Ex. Ed., p. 237), 5th line from bottom, for " Dactilocrinus "
read ^'Dactylocriims.'''

On p. 162 (Ex. Ed., p. 238), 13th line from top, for "single" read
"■iimple."

On p. 163 (Ex. Ed., p. 239), 16th line from bottom, for " Parisocrinus "
read ' ' Pachylocrinus. ' '

On p. 166 (Ex. Ed., p. 242), 11th line from bottom, insert: ''*Woodo-
crinus coxanus, Worthen {Zeacrinus coxanus), Oeol. Rep. Illinois, mi, p. 302,
PL 28, fig. 1. Keokuk gr. — Hamilton, III. Syn. Zeacrinus Keokuk, ibid.,
p. 303, fig. 3."

On p. 167 (Ex. Ed., p. 243), 10th line from bottom, for "PI. 6, fig. 3,"
read "PI. 6, fig. 9 and PL 9, fig. 5."

On page 169 (Ex. Ed., p. 245), 5th line from bottom, for "orbicularis"
read "glohularis.''^

On p. 171 (Ex. Ed., p. 247), 12th line from bottom, for " Epachycrinus "
read "Eupachycrinus."

On p. 173 (Ex. Ed., p. 249), 17th line from bottom, for " platybasilis "
read "platyhasalis.^''

On p. 175 (Ex. Ed., p. 251), 15th line from top, add the word " right''
before postero-lateral .

On 177 (Ex. Ed., p. 253), 18th line from bottom, for " Eriocrinus" read
"Erisocrinus.'''

On p. 197 (Ex. Ed., p. 273), 21st line from top, leave out the word
"axial"' before "canal."*'

1886.] natural sciences of philadetphia. 22t

April 6.
Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.

Twenty-five persons present.

Permission having been given, Prof. Heilprin withdrew his
paper entitled " On a Giant Conorbis from the Oligocene of
Florida."

The death of Charles Wilt, a member, was announced.

Fresh-water Sponges from Newfoundland : A new Species. —
Mr. Edward Potts stated that in the latter part of August, 1885,
Mr. A. H. MacKay, of Pictou, Nova Scotia, whose success as a
collector of fresh-water sponges in his own neighborhood has
been already recorded (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1884, p. 215,
etc.), made a scientific visit to the island of Newfoundland. His
explorations were mainl}' limited to the irregular peninsula of
Avalon,the southeasterly extremity of the island, and the record
of his collections beside mentioning the neighborhood of the
city of St. Johns, embraces such familiar names as Trinity Bay,
Harbor Grace, and Heart's Content, the landing place of the
Atlantic cable.

He writes " I was extremely sorry that owing to ray limited
time and the impenetrability of the interior to any ordinary
effort, I could not gain access to the great lakes in the heart and
the western portion of the island. I have merely made a dip into
a few of the ponds on the N. (?) E. coast." These are more par-
ticularly mentioned as Virginia and Ouidi Vidi Lakes, near St.
Johns ; Lady Lake, Bannerman Lake, Rocky Lake and Car-
bonear Lake, small bodies of water near Harbor Grace ; and
other lakelets and brooks upon the rocky ridges and near the
sea level between Harbor Grace and Heart's Content. All this
region is described as "the Canadian Huronian, the equivalent of
the English Cambrian," and the collections were generall}^
limited to the shallow margins of the ponds, where the sponges
were found upon the under sides of splinters of hard slaty
quartzites, in numbers very plentiful, but generally small ; " from
mere points to an inch or more in diameter."

It is to be regretted that the date of Mr. MacKay's visit was
necessarily so early in the year, as the specimens collected were
either immature or contained onl}^ the degenerate statoblasts of
the preceding season. The information gathered as to the range

228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

of temperature upon this island, is valuable as indicating so far
the conditions of the growth of these and other organisms.

He says : " The Island is not extreme in its temperature, and
the frost does not go very deep into the soil. The lakes freeze
in November or December with ice at least a foot in thickness,
and remain closed until the end of April. The average tempera-
ture during eight years, from 1857 to 1864, was 41-2° Fahr.
Average maximum thermometer during the same time 83°,
minimum 7°. In the year 1879, the mean temperature was 40*2°
Fahr,; highest record August 3, 82°; lowest December 22, +4°.
In Nova Scotia, though that is so much further south, the range
is far greater, from +96° to — 20° or — 24° Fahr., with an annual
average of 44°."

The specimens of sponges so kindly forwarded by Mr. MacKay
for examination and report, were more or less minute incrusta-
tions upon small stones, gathered as above indicated, and
belonged to the species SjMngilla lacustris, Auct. ; S. fragilis,
Leidy ; S. mackayi, Carter ; Meyenia Jiuviatilis, Auct., and
Heteromeyenia pictovensis and Tubella pennsylvanica, Potts. Of
these, Spongilla fragilis was by far the most abundant, and our
knowledge of its range is thus extended along the Eastern coast
of North America from Florida to Newfoundland ; whereas it
had previously been traced westwardly to British Columbia
near the Pacific Ocean, and more recently has been discovered in
Russia, Bohemia and England. Beside the familiar species, S.
lacustris, S. fragilis and M. fluviatilis, Tubella pennsylvanica
has been rapidly enlarging its borders beyond the narrow limits
of its original territorial designation ; while S. mackayi and H.
pictovensis had previously been known only from the discoveries
of Mr. MacKa}^ in Nova Scotia.

One other form remains to be described, and at the suggestion
of its discoverer it is hereby designated —

Spongilla Nov^ Terk^, n. sp.

Sponge incrusting ; sarcode of the 3'oung growth, a dense
mass of minute spherical cells, embedding slender curving lines
of fasciculated skeleton spicules, developing later into a very
loose, open tissue, with few connecting spicules.

Gemmules rather numerous, unusually large, spherical ; chitin-
ous coat thin ; " crust " apparentl}'^ wanting.

Skeleton spicules relatively few, slender, cylindrical, smooth
or sparsely microspined ; gradually pointed.

Dermal or flesh spicules very abundant, minute hirotulates of
unequal size ; shafts slender, cylindrical, occasionally spined ;
outer surface of rotules dome shaped ; rays prolonged, termina-
tions acute ; malformations frequent. Mixed with occasional
linear, spined spicules.

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

229

Spicules upon the

gemmulaj

abundant, crossing each other
upon the crustless, chitinous
body. Their shape when
smooth is robust -fusiform,
with pointed terminations ;
the great majority, however,
have from one to six or more
long spines, non- symmetri-
cally placed, but with an
evident tendency to group
themselves at points about
one-fourth the length of the
spicule from one or both of
its extremities.

Measurements : Diameter
of gemmules 0'036 inches ;
skeleton spicules, 0-0068 by 0*0002 inches ; length of average
dermal spicule, 0'00066 inches ; of gemmula spicule, 0*00145
inches.

Habitat. — Encrusting stones in shallow water.
Locality. — Lakes or ponds in the vicinity of Heart's Content,
Newfoundland ; collected by Mr. A. H. MacKay.

All the specimens of this sponge came from the neighborhood
of Heart's Content, but whether they were gathered from a lake
upon the heights or from a brook mentioned by Mr. MacKay near
the sea level, does not seem entirely clear. The accompanying
illustration (magnified 225 diameters) will suggest the peculiari-
ties of its skeleton, dermal and gemmular spiculation. The
striking resemblance of the dermal spicules to the minute
birotulates, heretofore only known in a corresponding position,
in the case of Meyenia evei'etti, will at once impress the student.
These are however more variable in size, are occasionally spined,
and have their rays more prolonged and more delicately ter-
minated.

It is in the singular character of the spicules surrounding the
gemmulae that this sponge must attract peculiar attention. By
the system of H, J. Carter, Esq., the fresh-water sponges are
now classified into six genera, beside some conditional designa-
tions of forms in which the typical features are as yet undis-
covered. These six, Spongilla, Meyenia, Heteromeyenia, Tubella,
Parmula and Carteriiis, may again be associated into two
groups, one of them including only the genus Sj'ongilla, charac-
terized by the linear acerate spicules surrounding the gemmulae ;
and the other comprising all the other genera, where the spicule
of corresponding significance is a hirotulate or some easily recog-
nized derivative of that type. Within this latter and larger
group intermediate forms, connecting the defined genera, are
frequent, and the location of species upon one side or other of

230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

the distinctive line comparatively unimportant. Heretofore,
between tlie genus Spovgilla and those genera comprising the
other group, there has been " a great gulf fixed." One only case
in the past has suggested their possible association, or the
development of one group from the other.

In Meyenia acuminata, Potts (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
1882, p. 69), since regarded as a variety of M. Jluviatilis, the
shafts of the birotulates are prolonged at each extremity, form-
ing acuminate terminations some distance beyond the surface of
the rotules. In position, also, these spicules are abnormal, lying
flat upon the chitinous coat, instead of resting upon one rotule,
their shafts taking the position of radii, as is usual in this form.
In fact we have the spicules of a Meyenia occupying the ordinary
positions, and in degree approximating the forms of those pecu-
liar to the SpongilliB.

In the present instance their intermediate character is still
more striking, and while their form and position probably more
closely associate them with the genus Spongilla in which the
species has now been placed, the grouping of the ray-like species
clearly suggests Meyenia. It has been an altogether unprece-
dented experience with the author to hesitate between these two
genera, and it will be no cause of surprise if the future teacher
shall shift it from its present position.

It must not escape notice that in both of these instances the
gemmuliB are without " crust;" — that it is difficult to understand
how birotulates could be supported in their ordinary i)ositions
without these embedding granules ; and that we may not unrea-
sonably infer that the change in position has induced the modifi-
cation of type that we here find.

This collection of sponges, including the new species, has been
examined coincideutly by H, J. Carter, Esq., F. R. S., and their
identification and this description are believed to meet his
approval.

April 1.3.

Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.

Nineteen persons present.

The death of the Hon. John Welsh, a member, was announced.

April 20.

Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.

Fifteen persons present.

The death of Andrew Nebinger,M.D., a member, was announced.

1886.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 231

April 27.
The President, Dr. Jos. Leidy, in the chair.

On Anthracomai^tus Trilobitus Scud. — Prof. F. L. Harvey re-
marked that the coal field of North Arkansas belongs to the
western interior coal area, which covers the greater part of Mis-
souri, and extends into Iowa, Kansas, Nebraska, Indian Territory,
Arkansas and Texas. This vast field covers 78,000 square miles,
of which about 10,000 are in Arkansas and 12,000 in the Indian
Territory. It belongs to the lowest, the suhconglomerate. The
veins occur in the shales of the millstone grit, less than 100 feet
above the Archimedes limestone. There is only one vein in the
northern limit, which is from eight to eighteen inches .thick. In
the Arkansas River valley there are three veins which often have
an aggregate thickness of over six feet. The veins lie high in the
hills in the Boston Mountains, but the southward dip brings them
in the Arkansas River valley, beneath the drainage of the country.
The veins in north Arkansas are worked in a limited way by
scalping and drifting, but shaft mining is done at Coal Hill,
Spadra and other points and there is at present considerable
coal exported to New Orleans down the Arkansas valley route.

The conditions were most favorable for the preservation of plant
remains. Beautifully preserved plants occur in the shales above
the coal vein of northwest Arkansas and limited research in
Washington County alone yielded the speaker over 100 species
new to the State and fifteen new to science.

While searching for fossil plants in the brash shale near the
coal, a specimen of fossil spider was found. By carefully work-
ing over a few tons of shale several more specimens were procured.
The material was sent to Prof. Scudder for examination and he
named the form Anthracomartus trilobitus, sp. nov. It is believed
to be the only species of the genus found in the coal measures of
the United States. The genus was founded upon a single Euro-
pean species. It is interesting that a second species should be
found so far separated. Fossil insects are scarce in the suhcon-
glomerate, and the three known from Arkansas are, a wing of
Blattina venusta, discovered by Prof. Lesquereux and figured in
Owen's Report of Arkansas, vol. ii, p. 312 ; the species of spider
under consideration and an undescribed Neuropterous larva in
the cabinet of the speaker. The description and figure of this
Anthracomartus, so far as we know, has not been published,
but is enumerated in Mr. R. D. Lacoe's " Check List of
Palaeozoic Insects." Less than a dozen specimens are known and
they are in the cabinets of Prof. Scudder, Mr. R. D. Lacoe and
the speaker, besides the specimen presented to the Academy

232 PROCEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

this evening. The specimens are all imperfect, showing only
the abdomen and a part of the cephalothorax. The most of tliem
were compressed vertically and give a transverse view. Tlie
compressed abdomen reminds one of the pygidium of a trilobite,
hence the specific name. A single specimen compressed laterally
shows well the elevated and rounded abdomen characteristic of
our modern spiders. The cephalothorax is minutely punctate.
The species is interesting as occurring at the base of the coal
measures. The locality is no longer worked and the species may
be considered scarce.

Messrs. Calvin McCormick and Samuel Wagner were elected
members.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233

A REVIEW OF THE AMERICAN GASTER0STEID.5:.
BY CARL H. EIGENMANN.

In this paper I have attempted to give the synonymy of the
American species of G aster osteidae with analytical keys for their
identification, and such notes as my studies of the group seem
to justify. The specimens examined all belong to the Museum
of the Indiana University.

I am indebted to Dr. David S. Jordan for the use of his library
and for many suggestions.

Analysis of Gene7-a of Gasterosteidse.
a. Snout not prolonged ; dorsal spines 3 to 11.
b. Innominate bones joined, forming a median plate on belly
behind ventral fins.
c. Gill membranes joined ; their posterior border free from the
isthmus ; spines small, mostly feeble.
d. Dorsal spines 7 to 11, weak, divergent ; innominate bones
with the outer edge stout and thick; the median part
scarcely ossified ; pubic bones long, weak, widely diver-
gent, leaving a <l-shaped naked area in front of ventral
spines ; body slender. Pygosteus. 1.

dd. Dorsal spines 5, non-divergent, of moderate size; innomi-
nate bones united, forming a short, narrow but strong
ventral plate ; pubic bones weak, short, widely divergent,
leaving a subcircular space in front of ventral spines ;
body rather stout ; skin smooth. Eucalia. 2.

cc. Gill membranes narrowly joined to the isthmus ; innomi-
nate bones large and strong ; spines of fins mostly
strong ; divergent ; dorsal spines 3 or 4 in number ;
pubic bones very broad, long and little divergent,
leaving a lanceolate-shaped, naked area in front of the
ventrals ; form robust ; skin mailed or naked.

Gasterosteus. 3.
66. Innominate bones not joined, but each extending as a strong
process under the skin on outside of insertion of ventrals ;
the area between them flat and not ossified ; pubic bones
short and weak, not visible externally ; dorsal spines
strong, divergent, 4 in number ; gill membrane broadly
joined to the isthmus; body rather stout; the caudal
peduncle very slender ; skin smooth. Apeltes. 4.

16

234 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

aa. Snout projecting, subtubiform ; dorsal spines small, about 15 ;
innominate bones joined only at base ; body elongate ; sides
mailed. Spinachia. 5.

1. PYGOSTEUS.

Pyrjosteus (Brevoort MSS.) Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 39, 1861.

(Not characterized); Canadian Naturalist, ii, 8; August, 1865 {occi-

dentalis).
Oasterostea Sauvage, Revision dcs Epinoches, 29, 1874 {pungitius).

This genus is cbaracterized by the presence ofl to 1 1 divergent
dorsal spines and by the weakness of the innominate bones. It
differs from Gaster-osteus also, in having the posterior margin of
the gill membrane free and by the less development of the spin-
ous armature.

But a single species, variable in its characters, seems to be
known. It is widely distributed in the fresh and brackish waters
of northern regions.

Analysis of Species of Pygosteus.

a. Body extremely elongate and slender, deepest at ventral spines,
decreasing in height towards head and tail. Head long, 4
in length to base of caudal. Mouth large, very oblique ;
maxillary not reaching to anterior margin of orbit. Teeth
small, in a single series. Eye large, its diameter greater
than snout. Caudal peduncle keeled, slender and long,
about 5 in length to base of caudal. No bony plates along
side ; small plates extending along the bases of the anal
and soft dorsal. Post pectoral plate present, large and
faintly granulate. Scapula forming a triangular post oper-
cular plate ; operculum striate. All the surface bones very
weak, bones of scull granulate; innominate bones weak, trans-
lucent, thin in the median part. Gill openings extending to
below posterior edge of preopercle. Vertebrae (pungitius)
14 + 18. Caudal fin lunate, long and narrow.

b. Ventral spines more than one-third of head. I). VII. to
IX-1, 9; A. 1, 8. Pungitius. 1.

66. Ventral spines less than one-third length of head. D. X-
I. 10 ; A. I, 10. Brachypoda. 1 (a.)

1886.] NATURAL SCrENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235

1. PYGOSTEUS.
1. P. pungitius.

Gasterosteus aculeis in dorso decern Artecli, Gen. Pise, 52, 1738.
Oasterosteus pungitius LmnsBua, Syst. Nat., Edit, x, L. 296, 1758 (bastd
on Artedi) (and of European authors generally); Storer, Rept. Fish.
Mass., 32, 1839 (Salem); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 10
(Boston); Goode & Bean, Fish. Essex Co. and Mass. Bay, 5, 1879
(Salem Pond); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 77 (Wood's HoU);
Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 128 (Hudson Bay); Jordan and
Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 393, 1883 ; Steams, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1883, 124 (Labrador).
Pygosteus pungitius Forbes, Bull. 111. Lab. Nat. Hist., iii, 69, 1880
(Calumet R.; Lake Michigan); Jordan, Ohio Geol. Rep., 999, 1882
(Name only); Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 63, 1885.
Gasterosteus pungitivus Walbaum, Artedi Piscum, 446, 1792 (After

Artedi).
Gasterosteus occidentalis Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poissons,
iv, 509, 1829 (Newfoundland); Dekay, Nat. Hist. N. Y., 68, plate
XLH, fig. 135, 1842 (New York) ; Jordan, Cat. Freshwater Fish.
U. S., 441, 1878 (Name only).
Gasterosteus pungitius var. occidentalis Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus.,

i, 6, 1859 (North America).
Pygosteus occidentalis (Brevoort MSS.) Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N.
A., 39, 1861 (East Coast); Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 16,
1873 (Name only); Jordan, Man. Vert., 248, 1876 (Great Lakes);
Goode, Bull., xiv, TJ. S. Nat. Mus., 53, 1879 (Name only); Goode,
Bull, xxi, U. S. Nat. Mus., 31, 1880 (Name only).
Gasterostea occidentalis Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches 30, plate i,

fig. 18, 1874 (Newfoundland).
Gasterosteus concinnus Richardson, "Fauna Bor. America, iii, 57,"
1836 (Saskatchawan and Mackenzie Rivers); Dekay, Nat. Hist. N.
Y., 68, 1842 (Northern regions); Giinther, Cat. Fish, Brit. Mus., i,
6, 1859 (copied).
Pygosteus concinnus Jordan & Copeland, Checklist N. A. Fresh Water
Fish., 40, 1876 ; Jordan, Cat. Fresh Water Fish N. A., 441,' 1878
(Name only).
Gasterostea concinna Sauvage, Revision des EiJinoches, 35, 1874 (Name

only),
Gasterosteus mainensis Storer, Boston Journal Nat. Sci., i, 465, 1837
(Kennebec Co., Maine); Dekay, Nat, Hist. N. Y., 68, 1842 (copied);
Giinther, Cat. Fish, Brit, Mus., i, 6, 1859 (copied); Sauvage, Revi-
sion des Epinoches, 33, 1874 (copied).
Pygosteus mainensis Jordan & Copeland, Checklist N. A. Fresh Water
Fish, 140, 1870 (Name only); Jordan, Cat. Fresh Water Fish N. A.,
441, 1878 (Name only).

236 PROCEEDINQS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Pygosteus occidenialis var. mainensis Jordan, Man, Vert., 348, 1876

(Kennebec Riv.).
Gasterosteus nebulosus Agassiz, Lake Superior, 310, plate iv, fig. 4, 1850

(Lake Superior).
Pygosteus nehulosus Jordan, Fish. Indiana, 31, 1874 (Lake Michigan);

Jordan and Copeland, Checklist N. A. Fresh Water Fish., 140, 1876

(Name only); Nelson, Bull. 111. Lab. Nat. Hist., i, 42, 1877 (Lake

Michigan).
Pygosteus ocndentalls var. nebulosus Jordan, Man. Vert., 248, 1874 ;

Jordan, Bull. Ills. Lab. Nat. Hist., ii, 51, 1877 (Lake Michigan);

Jordan, Cat. Fresh "Water Fish. N. A., 441, 1878 (Name only).
Gasterosteus dekayi Agassiz, "Lake Superior, 311," 1850 (after Dekay);

Putnam, "Proc. Essex Inst., 148, 155 ;" Putnam, Bull. Mus.

Comp. Zool. i, 11, 1863 ; Storer, Hist. Fish. Mass., 91, plate viii, fig.

3, 1867 (Massachusetts).
Pygosteus dekayi Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 39, 1861 (Name

only).
Gasterostea dekayi Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 31, 1874 (New

York).
Gasterostea blancTiardi Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 32, 1874

(New York); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 31 (Boston).

1 ft. P. pungitius brachypoda.

Gasterosteus jmngitius brachypoda Bean, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., xv,
129, 1879 (Oosooadlin — Mountain Streams and Lakes); Bean, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 77 (American Harbor); Bean, Arctic Cruise,
118, 1881 (Elephant Point, near Icy Cape); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1881, 240 (St. Paul, Kodiak ; Unga Island, Shumagins ; Iliu-
liuk Lake, Unalaska ; St. Paul Island, Bering Sea ; St. Michaels ;
Port Clarence ; Elephant Point ; Eschscholtz Bay ; Icy Cape, Arctic
Ocean; Alaska; Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 270 (Pacific
South of Bering Strait); Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. N. A. Fish., 394,
1883; Bean, BuU. U. S. Nat. Mus., xxi, 19, 1883 (St. Michaels, Alaska).
Gasterosteus pungitius Stejneger, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 65
(Commander Islands).

Habitat. — Shores of Northern Europe and Eastern America
South to New York, also in the great Lakes and northward ; var.
brachypoda in the North Pacific, the specimens examined by me
are from Calumet Lake, Ills., and from Massachusetts.

The synonom^^ of this species, as given above, needs a word of
remark.

The pungitivus of Walbaum is of course identical with the
pungitius of Linnaeus.

I cannot see that east coast specimens, representing the occi-
dentalis of Cuvier and Valenciennes, and that of Dekay, differ

1886.] NATURAL SCtENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 237

at all from descriptions of the European pungitius, but I have
had no specimens of the latter for direct comparison. I cannot,
therefore, regard occidentalis as a separate species or variety.
The dekaiji of Agassiz is based on the occidentalis of Dekaj' ;
I have therefore placed it also in the synonymy of pungitius.

The mainensis of Storer is said to differ from pungitius only
in having a " bony serrated plate on the side." This probably
refers to the plate behind the pectorals.

The concinnus of Richardson is said to differ in having seven
dorsal spines, but as the number seems to vary from 7 to 11, this
cannot be considered as a specific character. I have examined
specimens from Calumet, R. Illinois (presumably representing
the form called nehulosus). I can find no difference whatever
between these and Massachusetts examples of pungitius.

The var. hrachypoda seems to differ from pungitius only in the
shorter ventral spines. It is known to me only from the descrip-
tion of Dr. Bean (above cited).

2. EUCALIA.

Eucalia 3ovA.2ia, Man. Vert,, ed. i, 248, 1876 (inconstans) .

This genus is closely allied to Pygosteus, agreeing with it in
the structure of the gill membranes, but differing in having the
dorsal spines few and non-divergent, and in having the innomi-
nate bones more fully united. The species are the most feebly
armed of the Sticklebacks.

Analysis of Species of Eucalia.

a. Body moderately robust, the caudal peduncle not very slender;
depth 4 in length to base of caudal. Head pointed ;
mouth small, very oblique ; maxillary reaching to anterior
margin of eye ; teeth small, stout, in a single series ;
eye large, much longer than snout. Caudal peduncle
moderately compressed, 7^ times in length to base of
caudal. No bony dermal plates ; skin naked ; no post-
opercular (suprascapular) plate ; post-pectoral plate covered
by skin ; skin of head not ossified. Lateral line beginning
at upper angle of preopercle and curved to below fourth
dorsal spine, from where it goes straight to middle of tail ;
a second row of tubes is seen for a small distance along its
origin. A patch of mucous pores at beginning of lateral
line ; a row along the edge of the preopercle and a c-shaped

238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

row at nape. Dorsal spines about equal to one-half diame-
ter of eye, the first just reaching base of second; these
spines are recurved and slightly serrate on their edges ;
the fifth spine is more recurved and higher than the others.
Soft dorsal very high in front, its longest ray about equal
to snout and half the orbit ; the last ray equals half the
orbit ; caudal short and broad ; anal inserted below inser-
tion of second dorsal, similar to and coterminous with it.
Pectorals short and broad, their length equal to their
breadth at tips. Vertebrse (cayuga), 14 + 18. Brownish with
lighter blotches and black points. Males in spring black,
tinged with red on the jaws and snout.
b. Ventral spines equal to f length of innominate bones ; post-
pectoral plate large, variable, mostl}' V-shaped. D. IV-I,
10 ; A. I, 10. Inconstans. 2.

bb. Ventral spines short, but longer than innominate bones ;
post-pectoral smaller than in preceding, mostly f|-shaped.
D. IV-I, 10 ; A. I, 10. cayuga. 2 (a).

bbb. " D. Ill or IV-I, 6. A. I, G." (?). pygmsea. 2 (6).

2. EUCALIA.
2. E. inconstans.

Gaaterosteus inconstans Kirkland, Boston Journal Nat. Hist., iii, 273,
1841 (TmmbuU Co., Ohio); Dekay, Nat. Hist. N. Y., 68, 1842
(Name only); Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pkila., 1865, 81 (Suker-
toppen, Greenland); Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 394, 1883.

Apeltes inconstans Jordan, Fish of Indiana, 31, 1874 (Northern
Indiana).

Eucalia inconstans Jordan, Man. Vert., ed. i, 249, 1876 (Name only);
Jordan & Copeland, Checklist N. A. Fresh-water Fish, 141, 1876
(Name only); Nelson, Bull. Ills. Tab. Nat. Hist., i, 42, 1876 (Copied);
Jordan, Bull. Ills. Lab. Nat. Hist., ii, 58, 1877 (Small Streams of
Northern Ills.); Jordan, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1877, 65;
Jordan, Cat. Fresh-water Fish N. A., 441, 1878 (Name only); Forbes,
Bull. Ills. Lab. Nat. Hist., iii, 68, 1880 (Northern Ills.^.

Gasterosteus microptis Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1865, 81
(Fort Riley, Kansas); Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 28, 1874
(Copied).

Eucalia micropus Jordan & Copeland, Checkli.st N. A. Fresh-water
Fish, 141, 1876 (Kansas).

Oasterosteus gloMceps Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 35, 1874
(North America).

E^icalia inconstans, var. pygmwa Jordan, Geol. Report Ohio, 998, 1882
(Central Ohio ; Trib. of Great Lakes).

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 239

2 a. E. inconstans cayuga.

Eucalia inconstans, var. cayuga Jordan, Man. Vert., ed. i, 249, 1876
(Cayuga Lake) ; Jordan c% Copelaud, Checklist N. A. Fresh-water
Fish, 141, 1876 (Name only); Jordan, Geol. Report Ohio, 998, 1882.

2 b. E. inconstans pygmaea.

Gasterosttus pygmmis Agassiz, Lake Superior, 314, 1850 (Lake

Superior).
Eucalia inconstans, var. pygmcea Jordan, Man. Vert,, ed. i, 249, 1876
(Copied); Jordan & Copeland, Checklist N. A. Fresh-water Fish,
141, 1876 (Name only); Nelson, Bull. Ills. Lab. Nat. Hist., i, 42,
1876 (Lake Michigan).

Habitat — Fresh waters of North America, from Kansas and
Great Lake region northward to Greenland. Var. cayuga in
tributaries of Lake Ontario. Var. pygmseus in Great Lakes.

The specimens of the typical inconstans examined by me are
from Rock River, Illinois.

Those of the var. cayuga are from Syracuse, New York.

The micropus of Cope would seem to differ in its shape, being-
shorter and deeper, and in having a smaller post-pectoral plate
and ventral spines. All of these characters are of doubtful per-
manence.

The globiceps of Sauvage offers no peculiar characters.

The var. cayuga seems to differ from inconstans in having
longer ventral spines and smaller post-pectoral plates ; it is per-
haps identical with it.

The pygmaea of Agassiz is said to differ from inconstans in
having the body shorter and deeper, and in the number of fin
rays. The difference in form is of no importance, and it is not
likely that the alleged difference in the fin rays is real.

3. GASTEROSTEUS.

Oasterosteus Avtedi, Gen. Pise, 52, 1738.

Gasterosteus LinniBus, Syst. Nat. Ed. x, i, 295, 1758 (aculeatus).

G aster acanthus Pallas, "Zoogr. Rosso, Asiatica, iii, 228," 1811 (cata-

phar actus).
Leiurus Swainson, Nat. Hist. Class Fishes, ii, 242, 1839 (gymnurus, etc.).

This genus is distinguished from Pygosteus and eucalia in hav-
ing the posterior margin of the gill membrane joined to the isth-
mus. The body is more robust ; the spines and innominate bones
much stronger ; the pubic bones ver}- broad and little divergent.
Its species are the strongest of the sticklebacks and the most

240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

fully armed. All of them are very variable and very closely
related one to another. The species with the bony plates most
developed are most marine in their habit, while the partl}'^ or
wholly naked forms seem rather to inhabit the rivers. It may
be that a complete gradation exists from the fully armed aciileatus
to the naked williamsoni^ in which case all these forms should
be regarded as varieties of aculeatus. All northern regions seem
to possess full mailed species (aculeatus and vars.) and half
mailed species (allies of gymnurus). The former type seems
identical on both sides of the Atlantic, but the latter type so far
as our specimens can show seems to be different in America from
any described in Europe.

Analysis of Species of Gasterosteus.
a. Sides entirely covered with (28 to 30) bony dermal plates.
Caudal peduncle keeled ; ventral spines each with a large
cusp on outer edge of base. Bones of head striate, the
skin ossified. Mouth large, little oblique ; maxillary not
reaching front of eye ; teeth small, in a single series in lower
and double series in upper jaw. The anterior plates are
joined above to the large bony plates at base of spines ; the
posterior plates are separated from the small plates at bases
of soft dorsal and anal by narrow naked strips. Lateral line
high up, parallel with outline of back and along middle of cau-
dal peduncle, which is strongly keeled. Dorsal spines serrate
on their edges. Origin of soft dorsal far in advance of origin
of anal. Caudal lunate ; anal spine recurved, smaller than
third dorsal spine, the fin similar to soft dorsal. Yentrals
long and slender, serrate. Pectorals narrow. D. I-I-I, 11
to 13; A. I, 9 or 10.
b. Body moderately robust, the depth 4^ in length.

Aculeatus. 3.
bb. Body deeper and stronger ; caudal keel very strong.

cataphractus. 3. (a.)

aa. Sides partly covered with (2 to 15) bony dermal plates, the

posterior part of the body naked. Ventral spines with or

without cusp at base.

c. Sides with 15 bony plates ; caudal peduncle keeled ; body

slender; ventral spine long, almost or quite reaching vent ;

dorsal spines in a straight line. Head 3^ in length to base

of caudal ; depth 5. D. I-I-I, 11 ; A. 1, 8. Silvery below

with dark bands across the body (Bean). Atkinsii. 4.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA, 241

cc. Sides with 2 to 6 bony dermal plates ; caudal peduncle
keeled or not.
d. Yentral spine without cusp at base,
e. Dermal plates 4 to 6 ; body stout, little compi'essed ; head
large, flat above, a small knob at occiput. Mouth large,
maxillary almost reaching front of orbit. Teeth in broad
bands in front. From occiput, two rows of mucous pores
diverge to posterior borders of eye, extending thence
parallel with the orbit to above nasal opening forming an
arrow-shaped figure. Plates on sides imbedded, thin;
striate ; the last one immediately in front of second dor-
sal spine. Post-pectoral plate striate j^-shaped. Scapula
forming a striate post-opercular plate. Caudal peduncle
very thick to a point immediately in front of caudal
where it is much compressed. Innominate bones and
ventrals vaiying much in relative length, so that in some
specimens the one is the longer in others the other.
Dorsal spines short, straight, broad at base, serrate on
outer edges. First spine about f in eye, third very
small. Caudal slightly lunate. Anal inserted under
fifth dorsal ra}^, coterminous with the dorsal. Yentrals
coarsely serrate on outer and finely on inner edges.
Pectorals broad and short, fan-shaped. D. I-I-I, 11 to
13 ; A. 1, 9. Olivaceous, silvery below, thickly punctu-
late. MicROCEPHALUS. 5.

ee. Dermal plates on side 2 or 3, strong, not imbedded. Mouth
large, maxillary reaching to below front of orbit. Mu-
cous pores none. Scapula forming a post-opercular plate.
All bones thicker and stronger than in micr^ocephalus.
Caudal peduncle compressed for its whole length.
D. I-I-I, 10 to 12 ; A. 1, 8. Wheatlandi. 6.

dd. Ventral spines each with a distinct cusp at base. Lower jaw
the longer. Teeth in lower jaw stronger than in upper.
Diameter of orbit 3^ in head. Sides with 1 plates. In-
nominate bones almost reaching vent. Caudal peduncle
with a membranous carina. Caudal fin forked. Ventral
^ in. finely serrate. Pectoral j in. Length of specimen
2^. D. I-I-I, 12 ; A. 1, 8. Uniformly grayish on back,
head and posterior halfof body ; abdomen yellowish.

DiMIDIATUS. 7.

242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

aaa. Sides entirely naked ; no bony dermal plates ; caudal pe-
duncle not keeled. Tip of first dorsal spine not reach-
ing second. Head 3 in length to base of caudal. Depth
5 in total length. D. I-I-I-l, 10; A. 1, 7. Olivaceous
brown, darker above ; sides spotted with black ; belly
yellowish. Williamsoxi. 8.

3. GASTEROSTEUS.
3. G. aculeatus.

Oastcrosteus in dorso tribus. Artedi, Gen. Pise, 52, 1738 (Europe);
Pennant, Arctic Zool., ii, 385, 1793 (No description).

Oastei'osteus aculeatus Linnaeus, Syst. Nat. Ed. X, i, 295, 1758 (after
Arttdi); Fabricius, "Fauna Grcenlandica," 169, 1780 (Greenland);
Bloch, Syst. Nat., plate 53, fig. 3 ; Richardson, Fauna Bor. America,
55, 1836; Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 39, 1861 (Name only;;
Gill, Cat, Fish. East Coast N. A., 16, 1873 (Name only); Sauvage,
Revision des Epinoches, 9, 1874 (Bonneville, near Caen) ; Jordan, Cat.
Freshwater Fish. N, A., 443, 1878 (Name only); Goode & Bean,
Fish. Essex Co. Mass. Bay, 5, 1879 (Essex Co.); Bean, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1880, 77 (Woods Holl, Wilmington, Del. ); Jordan & Gil-
bert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 395, 1883 (East Coast); Stearns, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1883, 123 (Labrador).

Oasterosteus bispinosus Walbaum, Artedi Ichth., 450, 1793 (after Pen-
nant).

Oasterosteus biaculeatus Shaw, Zool., iv, 608, 1839 (after Pennant);
Mitchill, Trans. Lit. and Phil. Soc, 430, 1814 (Salt Water at New
York); Dekay, Nat. Hist. N. Y., 65, plate iii, fig. 8, 1842 (New
York); Storer, Syn. Fish. N. A., 63, 1846; H. R. Storer, Fish.
Labrador, 260, 1849 (Brooks emptying into Gut of Canso); Gill, Cat.
Fish. East Coast N. A., 39, 1861 (Name only); Putnam, Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool., 11, 1863 ; Storer, Hist. Fish. Mass., 87, plate viii, fig.
213, 1867.

Oasterosteus noveboraeensis Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Pois-
sons, iv, 502, 1829 (New York); Storer, Rept. Fish. Mass., 30, 1839
(Massachusetts); Ayres, Fish. Brookhaven, Long Island, 259, 1842
(Old Man's Harbor, Storer, Syn. Fish. N. A., 63, 1846 ; Gill, Cat.
Fish. East Coast N. A., 16, 1873 (Name only); Sauvage, Revision
des Epinoches, 11, 1874 (New York, Newfoundland, Boston); Jor-
dan, Man. Vert., Ed. i, 250, 1876 (Name only); Goode, Bull, U. S.
Nat. Mus., xiv, 53, 1879 (Name only).

Oasterosteus aculeatus var. noveboraeensis Giinther, Cat, Fish, Brit.
Mus., i, 4, 1859 (Greenland).

Oasterosteus w/g-e?* Cuvier, Rogue Animal, 76, 1829 (Based on 6iV/c?<Zea<'/s
of >Iitchill); Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poissons, iv, 503,
1829 (Newfoundland); Dekay, Nat. Hist. N. Y., 68, 1842 (New-
foundland); Storer, Syn, Fish, N. A., 63, 1846; Gill, Cat. Fish.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243

East Coast N. A., 39, 1861 (Name only); Sauvage, Revision des

' Epinoches, 13, 1874 (Newfoundland); Jordan, Cat. Fresh "Water
Fish. N. A., 442, 1878 (Name only).

Oasterosteus irachurus Cuvier, RCgne Animal, 76, 1829 (Based in part
on Bloch); Storer, Syn. Fish. N. A., 62, 1846.

Oasterosteus loricatus Reinhardt, Green, Fauna, 37, 1837 (Greenland);
Reinhardt, "Kong. Danske. Vidensk. Selsk. Nat. Math. Afh., vii,
114," 1838 ; Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 12, 1874 (Newfound-
land).

Oasterosteus neoboracensis Dekay, Nat. Hist. N. Y., 66, plate vi, fig.
17, 1842 (New York).

Oasterosteus dekayi Ayres, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Cal. (based on biacule-
atus of Dekay).

Oasterosteus suppositus Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 11, 1884
(after Dekay).

3. G. aculeatus cataphractus.

0 aster acanthus catapJiracius 'Psdla.s, ''Mem. Acad. Petersb., iii, 825,"
1811.

Oasterosteus cataphractus Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1881, 239
(Kodiak, Cook's Inlet, Sitka, Port Mulgrave, Shumagins, Unalaska,
Amchitka, Kyska Harbor, St. Paul, Bering Sea near Bering Isl.);
Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 270 (Pacific South of Bering
Strait, Puget Sound, San Francisco); Stejneger, Proc. U. 8. Nat.
Mus., 1883, 65 (Commander Island); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1888, 353 (Duncan's Bay, Brit. Col.); Bean, Cat. Fish, in Internat.
Fish. Exhib. London, 19, 1883 (St. Paul Isl.).

Oasterosteus aculeatus var. cataphractus Jordan & Jouy, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1881, 1 (Puget Sound); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1881, 69 (San Francisco to Alaska).

Oasterosteus aculeatus subsp. cataphractus Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish.
N. A., 396, 1883 (West Coast).

Oasterosteus obolarius Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poissons, iv,
500, 1829 (Kamtschatka) ; Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 12,
1874 (Name only).

Oasterosteus inseulptus Richardson, Last Arctic Voy., 10, plate xxv,
fig. 1, 2, 3, 1854 (Northumberland and Puget Sound); Bean, Bull.
U. S. Nat. Mus., XV, 129, 1879 (Northumberland Sound).

Oasterosteus serratus Ayres, Proc. Cal. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1855, 47 (San
Francisco); Girard, Pacific R. R. Survey, 88, 1859 (Shoal Water
Bay: San Francisco); Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 13, 1874
(San Francisco Bay); Jordan, Cat. Fresh Water Fish. N. A., 442,
1878 (Name only); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 1880,
452 (Puget Sound, San Francisco) ; Jordan & Jouy, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1881, 1 (Foot note).

^44 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Gasterostetis intermedius Girard, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1856, 135 ;
Girard, Pacific R. R. Survey, 89, 1859 (Cape Flattery); Jordan, Cat.
Fresh-water Fish N. A., 443, 1878 (Name only).

Habitat — Northern Atlantic Coast of both Continents. Yar.
caiaphractus is found on the West Coast of North America, from
San Francisco to Alaska and Kamtschatka.

This species differs from the others in having the whole sides
covered with (28-30) bony plates.

The hiaculeatus of Mitchill possesses the (33) plates charac-
izing the aculeatus and otherwise agrees with the latter; the
slight variation in the number of lateral plates may perhaps
arise from a different manner of counting them.

The bispinosus of Walbaum and biaculeatus of Shaw are alike
based on Pennant. The description given by the latter author is
of very little importance, but the probabilities all favor that the
species he had in mind was Gasterosteus aculeatus.

The 7ioveboracensis of Cuvier and Valenciennes is said to
differ from aculeatus in the position of the lateral line and in the
stronger caudal keel. Neither of these features is likely to be
of specific value, and I therefore place it in the synonymy of
aculeatus.

The niger of Cuvier is based on the biaculeatus of Mitchill,
which is aculeatus. The trachurus of the same author has the
sides completely covered with plates, and is, of course, the
ordinary European form of aculeatus.

The suppositus of Sauvage is a supposed new species described
by Deka}'^ as neoboracensis, but the neoboracensis of Dekay is
identical with the noveboracensis of Cuvier and Valenciennes,
and suppositus is therefore a synonym of aculeatus. The figure
of Dekay has lateral plates extending from the post-pectoral
plate to the caudal, but as this differs from the nature of the
armature of this group, and as Dekay does not mention the
naked area about the ventral region and gives the number of the
plates as 30 to 33, these discrepancies must be due to a mistake
of the artist.

The Gasterosteus texanus of Sauvage is somewhat different.
It has eleven plates extending to the second ray of the soft
dorsal ; thence to the last ray, the body is naked, the peduncle
being again mailed and strongly keeled. As no sticklebacks
are found much south of the Great Lake region, it is very prob-
able that the type of G. texanus did not come from Texas. At

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245

present I place texanus in the synonymy of aculeatus, the pecu-
liarities above mentioned being perhaps due to mutilation.

The many specimens examined by me are from Wilmington,
Delaware, and from Woods Holl, Massachusetts.

The var. cataphractus differs from aculeatus in its deeper and
shorter form. Northern specimens are larger and more robust
than those found further south, and it is not likely that with a large
series any tangible permanent differences could be maintained.

The names cataphractus and obolarius were given to Alaskan
specimens ; the insculptus from the Arctic is not essentially
different, and the serratus of Ayres and intermedius of Girard,
from further south, are also certainly the same.

The large collections made by Jordan and Gilbert of the West
Coast of the U. S., show conclusively that not more than two
distinct forms of Sticklebacks, cataphractus and microcephalus,
exist on that coast.

4. Gasterosteus atkinsii.

Gasterosteus atkinsii Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 67 (Schoodic
Lakes); Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fisli. N. A., 395, 1883 (Copied).

Habitat. — Schoodic Lakes, Maine.

This species is characterized by the presence of 15 lateral
plates ; it is therefore intermediate between the full armed
aculeatus and the partly mailed gymnurus, etc. The species is
known to me from the description of Bean (loc. cit.). This
description indicates some affinity with the European Gasteros-
teus semiarmatus, which has also 14 (12 to 15) plates.

5. Gasterosteus microcephalus.

Oasterosteus microcephalus Girard, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1854,
133; Girard, Pacific R. R. Survey, 91, 1859 (Tidare Valley); Sau-
vage, Revision des Epinoches, 23, 1874 (Tulare Valley); Joi"dan, Cat.
Fresh-water Fish N. A., 443, 1878 ^Name only); Jordan & Gilbert,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mas., 1880, 453 (Puget Sound ; San Francisco ;
]\Ionterey Bay ; San Pedro); Jordan & Jouy, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1881, 1 (San Francisco); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1881, 69 (Los Angeles to Puget Sound); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1881, 240 (Piseco Lake, Sitka; St. Paul, Kodiak; Chirikoff
Isl. ; Iliuliuk Unalaska); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 370
(Pacific, south of Bering Strait; Puget Sound; San Francisco);
Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 395, 1882 ; Rosa Smith, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 217 (Name only); Rosa Smith, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1883, 333 (Todos Santos Bay); Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1883, 353 (Mountain Lake, Alaska); Bean, Cat. Fish, in
Internat. Fish. Ex. London, 19, 1883 (St. Paul, Kodiak).

246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Giisterosteus plebeins Giranl, "Proc. Ao. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1854, 147;"

Girarrl, Pacific R. R. Survey, 86, 1859 (San Francisco ; San Jose ;

Petaluma) ; Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 18, 1874 (Petaluma) ;

Jordan, Cat. Fresh-water Fish. N. A., 442, 1878 (Name only).
Gasterosiei/x inopinatus Girard, " Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1854, 147;"

Girard, Pacific R. R. Survey, 90, 1859 ^Presidio); Sauvage, Revision

des Epinoches, 19, plate i, fig. 4, 1874 (Presidio Creek, Cal.j;

Jordan, Cat. Fresh-water Fish N. A., 443, 1878 (Name only).
Gasterosteus pugetti Girard, "Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1856, 135;"

Girard, Pacific R. R. Survey, 92 and 354, 1859 (Puget Sound);

Jordan, Cat. Fresh-water Fish N. A., 442, 1878 (Name only).

Habitat. — Pacific Coast North America, from Bering Strait
south to Todos Santos Bay. Ascends rivers.

This species differs from dimidiatus in having no cusp at base of
ventrals and no caudal keel ; it differs from wheatlandi in haA'ing
all its bones much weaker and in the arrangement of the mucous
lucres about the head.

The collection of Jordan and Gilbert shows that all naked-
tailed Sticklebacks {microcephalus, plebeius, inopinatus and
pugetti) belong to one species.

It is possible, as several writers have affirmed, that all these
naked-tailed Sticklebacks {gymnurus, mici^ocephalus, ivheatlandi,
williamsoni) are simple varieties of the ordinary G. acideatus.
It seems to me that the peculiarities of the Californian form are
so constant that we may regard this one at least as presenting
a distinct species. Of G. wheatlandi and gymnurus I am not so
certain, but I have not yet seen any distinctly intermediate
forms, although all these types, like all other Sticklebacks, are
subject to much individual variation. The characters given in
the analysis above are to be regarded as simply provisional, as
representing the differences shown by the material at my disposal.

The specimens examined by me are from San Diego, Cal.

6. Gasterosteus wheatlandi.

Gasterosteus wheatlandi Putnam, "Proc. Essex Inst., v. 4, 1867;"

Storer, Hist. Fish. Mass., 354, 1867 (Nahant).
Gasterosteus trachurus Goode & Bean, Fishes of Essex Co. and Mass.

Bay, 5, 1879 (Nahant, not G. trachurus of G\i\\er).

Habitat. — East Coast United States, northward.

This species difiers from G. microcephalus in having stronger
surface bones, no mucous pores about the head, and the caudal
peduncle compressed.

The specimens examined by me are from the coast of Massa-
chusetts.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 24t

7. Gasterosteus dimidiatus.

Gasterosteus biaculeatus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat Poissons,
iv, 503, 1829 (Newfoundland, not O. biaculeatus of Shaw); Giinther,
Cat. Fish. Brit. Mas., i, 5. 1859 (Coast Newfoundland and Labra-
dor); Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 16, 1873 (Name only);
Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 21, 1874 (Newfoundland); Jordan,
Cat. Fish. N. A., 442, 1878 (Name only); Jordan & Gilbert, 8yn.
Fish. N. A., 395, 1883 ; Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 123
(Labrador).

Gasterosteus dimidiatus Reinhardt, Green. Faun. 37, 1837 (Greenland);
Reinhardt, "Kong. Dansk. Vidensk. Selsk. Nat. og. Math. Afhand.
vii, 193," 1838; Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 28, 1874 (Name
only).

Gasterosteus aculeatus var. dimidiatus Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N.
A., 39, 18G1 (Name only).

Gasterosteus cimeri (Girard MSS.) Storer, H. R. Fish. Nova Scotia and
Labradoi-, 254, plate vii, fig. 1, 1849 (Bras d'Or, Red Bay).

Habitat — East Coast North America, northward.

This species differs from its nearest relations in having a cusi^
at the base of the ventrals and a fleshy caudal carina.

The name biaculeatus cannot be retained for this species, as it
was originally based on a description of Pennant which appar-
ently refers to G. aculeatus.

I have examined no specimens of this species, and I am not
sure that it diffei'S in any important respect from the naked tailed
sticklebacks (G. gi/mnurus Cuvier = G. leiurus Cuv. and Yal.)
of Europe.

8. Gasterosteus williamsoni.

Gasterosteus williatnsoni Girard, "Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 133,"
1854 (Williamson Pass); Girard, Pacific R. R. Survey, 93, 1859
(Williamson Pass); Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 25, 1874;
Jordan, Cat. Fresh Water Fish. N. A., 441, 1878 ; Jordan & Gilbert,
Syn. Fish. N. A., 393, 1883; Rosa Smith, Proc.U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1883, 217 (Artesian well at San Bernardino).

Eucalia williamsoni Jordan & Copeland, Checklist Fresh Water Fish.
N. A., 141, 1876.

Habitat. — Streams of California.

This species differs from the other species of this genus in
having no lateral plates. Miss Rosa Smith records one from an
artesian well in California and pronounces it a true Gasterosteus
and not a Eucalia.

The species is known to me from Girard 's description in the
Pacific R. R. Survey, and from the account given by Miss Smith.

248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

4. APELTES.
Apdten Dekay, Nat. Hist. N. Y., 67, 1842 (quadracus no description).
Apelte$ .Jordan, Man. Vert., 249, 1876 (Characterized).

This geuus is distinguished by the form and position of the
innominate bones, these being separated and forming subdermal
spines on the outer edges of the abdomen. The pubic bones are
small and weak, not visible on surface. It is a more sharply de-
fined group than Eucalia or Pygosleus and its single species has
shown no important variation.

Analysis of Species of Apeltes.

a. Trunk oblong ; head pointed ; caudal peduncle slender, not
keeled. Mouth small, horizontal ; maxillary not reaching
to eye ; teeth slender, in a single series. No bon}^ dermal
plates along sides. Scapula forming a small granulated post-
opercular plate. Innominate bones wide apart ; the area
between them flat so that a section of the fish is triangular.
Gill membrane broadly united to the isthmus. Free dorsal
spines divergent. The spines slender, pointed, slightly
serrate. Distance between first and third spine much less
than that between third and fourth ; the first extending
beyond base of third. Caudal long, narrow ; anal similar
to soft dorsal and coterminous with it ; its spine under third
ray of dorsal. Ventral spines strong, subterete ; serrate on
both edges and covered by skin to near tip. When ventral
spines are set they point almost sidewise, when depressed
they lie along inside of innominate bones. Quadracus. 9.

9. Apeltes quadracus.

Gasterosfeus quadracm Mitchill, Trans. Lit. and Phil. Soc, i, 430, 1814 ;
Cuvier & Valenciennes, iv, 504. 1829 (Newfoundland) ; Storer, Rept.
Fishes Mass., 31, 1839 (Salem); Dekay, Nat. Hist. N. Y., 67, plate vi,
fig. 18, 1843 (New York); Storer, Syn., 63, 1846 ; Baird, Fish, of N.
Jersey Coast, 14, 1855 (Salt Ponds of New .Jersey); Storer, "Mem.
Am. Ac. New Series, ii, 315 ;" Storer, Fish. Mass., 89, plate viii, fig.
4, 1867 (Massachusetts); Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., i, 7, 1859
(copied); Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 27, 1874 (copied).
Apeltes quadracus Putnam, " Proc. Essex lust., 1855, 148," Brevoort in
Gill's Cat. Fish. East Coast N. A., 89, 1861 (Name only); Gill, Cat.
Fish. East Coast N. A., 16, 1873 (Name only); Jordan, Man. Vert.
Ed., i, 249, 1876 (copied); Jordan & Copeland, Checklist Fresh Water
Fish. N. A., 141, 1876 (East Coast); Jordan, Cat. Frtsh Water Fish.
N. A., 441, 1878 (Name only); Goode & Bean, Fish. Essex Co. and
Mass. Bay, 5, 1879 (Salem and vicinity); Goode, Bull, U. S. Nat.
Mus., xiv, 54, 1879 (Name only); Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., xxi,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 249

31, 1880 (Name only); Bean. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 77 (Woods

HoU, Noank); Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 396, 1883.
Oasterosteus apeltcs Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poiss., iv,

505, 1829 (No locality); Storer, Kept. Fish. Mass., 31, 1839 (Salem);

Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 26, plate i, fig. 13, 1874 (New

York).
Oasterosteus millepunctatus Ayres, Boston Journ. Nat. Hist., 259 and

294, 1842 (Old Man's Harbor); Brevoort in Gill's Cat. Fish., East

Coast N. A., 39, 1861 (Name only); Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches,

27, 1874 (copied).

Habitat. — Atlantic Coast of North America ; Northward.

This species is easily distinguished by the separation of the
innominate bones and by the four divergent dorsal spines.

The apeltes of Cuvier and "Valenciennes does not differ from
the quadracus of Mitchill.

The millipunctatus of Ayres is also identical with the quadra-
cus of Mitchill.

The numerous specimens examined by me are from Woods
Holl, Massachusetts.

5. SPINACHIA.

Spinachia Fleming, "Hist. Brit. Animals, 219," 1828 (spinachia).
Polyeanthus Swainson, Fishes 175 and 242, 1839 {spinachia).
Oastrcea Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 7, 1876 {spinachia).

This genus differs from the others in the prolongation of the
snout which approaches in form the snout of Aulorhynchus and
Fistularia. The innominate bones are as in Apeltes ; there are
about 15 free dorsal spines.

Analysis of the Species of Spinachia.

a. Snout prolonged ; dorsal spines about 15; dermal plates, 40 ;
depth 10 in length ; head about 4 ; a carina running entire
length of lateral line ; body five-sided ; tail four-sided. Ver-
tebra 18 + 23 ; D. XV, 6 or 7 ; ventral, i, 2 ; A. I, 6 or 7.

Spinachia. 10.
10. Spinachia spinachia,

Crtisterosteus spinacJiia Linnseus, Syst. Nat. Ed. X., 296, 1758 (based on
Artedi) (and of authors generally).

Oastraa spinachia Sauvage, Revision des Epinoches, 36, 1876 (New-
foundland).

Habitat. — North Atlantic on both continents.
This species has been but once ascribed to America. Sauvage
notes a specimen in the Museum at Paris which he said to be
17

250

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

[1886.

from Newfoundland. This record needs verification, and is prob-
ably the result of an error in labeling.

Comparative Measurements in Hundreds of Length to Base

OF Caudal.

Depth of Body

Caudal Peduncle, • . . . .

Length of Head,

Interorbital space,

Snout,

Operculum, . . '

Orbit,

First Dorsal Spine from Snout,.

Height,

Antecedent Spine,

First ray,

Last ray,

Anal from Snout,

Height of Spine

First ray,

Last ray, ........

Caudal,

Pectoral from Snout, . . . .

Length,

Ventral from Snout, . • . .
Length, ....'....
Innominate bones

17

18

25

4

8

27
6

30

c

eft

c
o

o3
be

22

23

24

16

16

12

29

27

29

4-5

5

5

7

10

8

8

9

7

32

29

36

6

4

9

7

6

11

11

13

3

2

58

59

72

7

7

2

13

13

12

3

1

13

15

middlel2
extern 16

80

31

36

11

11

20

40

41

43

9

7

14

12

5

17

o
o

30
10
34

8
42

15
17

39
15
44

14

26
14
32

7

11
9

40
9
3

14

70

2

12

15
17

3S

17
45
13

0 -
O

■a

s

32
20
25

7
30
11

58
8

16

29
17
33
16

List of Nominal Species of Gasterosteid^, Arranged in
Chronological Order, with Identification.

(Tenable Specific Names are In Italics.)

Nominal Species. Date,

Gasterosteus aculeatus Linnaeus, 1758,

Ga.&teTOstevLS pun(/itius Linnaeus, 1758,

Gasterosteus spinachia Linnseus, 1758,

Gasterosteus pungitius Walbaum, 1792,

Gasterosteus bispinosus Walbaum, 1792,

Gasterosteus cataphracius Pallas, 1811,

Identification.

Gastrosteus aculeatus.
Pygostens pungitius.
Spinachia spinachia.
Pygosteus pungitius.
Gasterosteus aculeatus.
Gasterosteus cataphractus.

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA,

251

Nominal Species. Date.

Gasterosteus quadracus Mitchill, 1814,

Gasterosteus niger Cuvier, 1829,

Gasterosteus trachurus Cuvier, 1829,

Gasterosteus obolarius Guv. & Val., 1829,
Gasterosteus noveboracensisCuv. & Val., 1829,

Gasterosteus biaculeatus Cuv. & Val. 1829,

Gasterosteus apeltes Cuv. & Val. 1829,

Gasterosteus occidentalis Cuv. & Val. 1829,

Gasterosteus coucinnus Richardson, 1836,

Gasterosteus mainensis Storer, 1837,

Gasterosteus loricatus Reinhardt, 1837,

Gasterosteus dimitiatus Reinhardt, 1837,

Gasterosteus biaculeatus Shaw, 1839,

Gasterosteus t/ico/istens Kirtland, 1841,

Gasterosteus millepunctatus Ay res, 1842,

Gasterosteus cuvieri Girard, 1849,

Gasterosteus nebulosus Agassiz, 1850,

Gasterosteus de kayi Agassiz, 1850,

Gasterosteus ^j^grmcEWs Agassiz, 1850,

Gasterosteus insculptus Richardson, 1854,

Gasterosteus mierocephalus Girard, 1 854,

Gasterosteus williamsoni Girard, 1854,

Gasterosteus plebeius Girard, 1854,

Gasterosteus inopinatus Girard, 1854,

Gasterosteus serratus Ayres, 1855,

Gasterosteus intermedins Girard, 1856,

Gasterosteus pugetti Girard, 1856,

Gasterosteus atkinsii Bean, 1859,

Gasterosteus micropus Cope, 1865,

Gasterosteus wheatlandi Putnam, 1867,

Gasterosteus suppositus Sauvage, 1874,

Gasterostea blanchardi Sauvage, 1874,

Gasterosteus globiceps Sauvage, 1874,

Eucalia cayuga Jordan, 1876,

Gasterosteus trachurus Goode & Bean, 1879,

Gasterosteus hrachypoda Bean, 1879,

Identification.
Apeltes quadracus.
Gasterosteus aculeatus.
Gasterosteus aculeatus.
Gasterosteus cataphractus.
Gasterosteus aculeatus.
Gasterosteus dimidiatus.
Apeltes quadracus.
Pygosteus pungitius.
Pygosteus pungitius.
Pygosteus pungitius.
Gasterosteus aculeatus.
Gasterosteus dimidiatus.
Gasterosteus aculeatus,
Eucalia inconstans.
Apeltes quadracus.
Gasterosteus dimidiatus.
Pygosteus ijungitius.
Pygosteus pungitius.
Eucalia inconstans.
Gasterosteus cataphractus.
Gasterosteus mierocephalus.
Gasterosteus vs^illiamsoni.
Gasterosteus mierocephalus.
Gasterosteus mierocephalus.
Gasterosteus cataphractus.
Gasterosteus cataphractus.
Gasterosteus microcei)halus.
Gasterosteus atkinsii.
Eucalia inconstans.
Gasterosteus wheatlandi.
Gasterosteus aculeatus.
Pygosteus pungitius.
Eucalia inconstans.
Eucalia cayuga.
Gasterosteus wheatlandi,
Pygosteus brachypoda.

Recapitulation.

In this review I have admitted 10 species and 5 genera of Gas-
terosteidae as valid. Below I give a list of the species. The gen-
eral distribution of the species is indicated by the letters A.
(America); E, (Europe); W. (West Coast of North America); P.
(East Coast North America and Greenland); G. (Great Lake Re-
gion and Northward); U. (Western Slope of Rocky Mountains;,

252 proceedings op the academy of [1886.

Family GASTEROSTEIDJE.

Genus 1. PYGOSTEUS Brevoort.

1. Pygosteus pungitius Linnaeus (E. A.)- fP. Gr.).

1 a. Pygosteus pungitius brachypoda (W. U.). (Unknown to me).

Genus 2. ETJCALIA Jordan.

2. Eucalia inconstans Kirtland (G. E).

2 a, Eucalia inconstans cayuga Jordan (G.). (Variety of doubtful value).

2 b. Eucalia inconstans pygmma Agassiz (Unknown to me ; characters

assigned perhaps erroneous).

Genus 3. GASTEROSTETIS Liuuwus.

3. Gasterosteus aculeatus (E. A.) (P.).

3 a. Gasterosteus aculeatus cataphractus Pallas (W.). (Variety of doubtful

value).

4. Gasterosteus atkinsti Bean (P.). (Unknown to me ; perhaps local var.

of aculeatus).

5. Gasterosteus microcepJialus Girard (W.). (Possibly variety of ac»Zea^ws).

6. Gasterosteus wheatlandl Putnam (P.). (Perhaps var. of aculeatus).

7. Gasterosteus dimidiatus Reinhardt (P.). (Unknown to me ; perhaps

identical with G, gymnurus).

8. Gasterosteus williamsoni Girard (U.). (Possibly an extreme vai'iety of

microcephalus or aculeatus).

Genus 4. APELTES DeKay.

9. Apeltes quadracus Mitchill (P.).

Genus 3. SPINACHIA Fleming.

10. SpinacMa spinachialAvinddVis, (E. P.). (Probably not American).

1886.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 253

May 4.

Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.
Twenty-pight persons present.

The Railway Gutting at Graifs Ferry Road. — Mr. Aubrey H.
Smith remarked that the Schuylkill River, as is well known,
makes a curve to the westward just below the TJ. S. Arsenal
grounds, returning to its southwardly course at Harmar's wharf,
nearly a mile below. The new iron bridge of the Baltimore and
Ohio R. R. Co. spans the river obliquely from the northern side
of Bartram's Garden to Harmar's at the height of about 23 feet
above tide. The tract of land half enclosed by the river is ele-
vated about 50 feet above tide and is composed of the same
diluvial gravels and clays which form the plain on which stands
the old city of Philadelphia.

The railroad proceeds from the bridge by a deep cut of half a
mile transversely to the streets on the city plan northeastwardly
to the low grounds on the river below the arsenal, thus forming
a chord to the arc of the river bend. The cut is a deep one, as
the railroad company was required by its agreement with the city
to construct its line beneath Wharton Street and the Gray's Ferry
Road.

Soon after leaving the bridge the cutting enters the plateau and
is soon twenty-five or more feet deep. The excavation is through
yellow cla3'^s and river gravels to the depth of about twenty -five
feet. It then discloses a compact bed of dark blue clay, sharply
defined under the gravel, apparently a river deposit. Its thick-
ness is not exactly known but it exceeds six feet. This bed of
blue clay extends from just bej'ond the Harmar house to the
Gray's Ferry Road, a distance of 500 or 600 yards.

It is apparently thickest near the Harmar house, but thins out
at the Gray's Ferry Road, where the excavations show it to be
only about four feet thick and to rest uj^on a bed of yellow gravel
or sand. It does not appear at all northeast of the Gray's Ferry
Road.

Some observations and inquiry in November, 1885, for organic
remains resulted, so far as he was aware, only in showing that
the blue clay contains numerous genera and species of diatoms
and several species of recent woods. The observations on the
diatoms are due to Professor Koenig. The gravels and cla3^s
above the blue clay were barren of all organic forms. The woods
then obtained were apparently birch, maple or oak, and were
neither mineralized or decomposed. They came from the dump
heap where the excavated clay was deposited by the workmen,
but are doubtless from the blue clay bed.

254

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1886.

The specimen of wood exhibited to the Academy to-night is of
some coniferous tree, probably a white cedar, Gupressus thyoides.
This tree, until verj^ I'ccently, was common along the Schuylkill
and Delaware, and isolated specimens may still exist there. The
wood now shown is in no degree mineralized and but slightly
decomposed. It came from a log which lies in the blue clay just
north of the Wharton Street Bridge and is still to be seen there.
No shells, so far as he knew, have been found in the excavation,
but more careful search in this direction might be rewarded.

The blue clay bed appears to mark one of the periods of quies-
cence in the glacial action which, in its torrential course, scooped
out the valleys of the Schuylkill and Delaware and afterwards
filled them up again at the margin of tide-water. It harmonizes
itself with similar beds which have been observed at several points
along the shores of the rivers — notably at the Lazaretto and
Printz Hall, Tinicum, and near Camden, N. J.

There were probably several of these periods of comparative
rest in the course of the retirement of the ice from northern
Pennsylvania.

The artesian well of Mr. Black, at Black's Island, below Fort
Mifflin, which is 456 feet deep, disclosed at the depth of 100 feet
a bed of white beach sand 47 feet in thickness, as well as many
of gravel and clay. The decomposed gneiss rock was reached at
the depth of 240 feet or thereabouts.

Section of the strata of Black's Island, Delaware River below
Fort Mifflin, from the artesian well of E. N. Black, Esq. :

Blue alluvium, .

Sand, ....

Blue alluvium, .

Gravel, ....

White clay,

Beach sand,

Gravel, ....

Clay, ....

Red gravel,

White gravel and sand,

Beach sand and gravel,

Decomposed gneiss (mica),

Gneiss rock,

45]

fee

1

3;^

6

2

47

10

3

6

17

38

20

228

456 feet.

May 11.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty -two persons present.

Fatal Gases of Trichiniasis. — The President read a letter from
Mr. Eugene A. Rah, of Bethlehem, Pennsylvania, giving an ac-
count of recent cases of fatal trichiniasis arising from imperfectly

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255

cooked, measly pork, which had been eaten for a week from
January 6, 1886. The family consisted of a man and wife and
two daughters, aged respectively five and thirteen years. The
older daughter and the mother, aged 37 years, have died ; the
other members of the family, although affected, are recovering.
In the mother, who died March 8, the deltoid muscle showed,
under the microscope, three to nine ; the rectus femoris, two to
six, and the diaphragm, one to three trichinae, in a field view
about one-fifth of an inch in diameter. In the daughter, who
died February 19, trichina? were found imbedded in the deltoid
muscle, in some portions as many as forty-two being counted on
the field of view under the microscope. No other portions of
the daughter were examined, but the lungs, heart, liver, spleen
and kidnej^s of the mother were found to be unaffected.

The pork used was home-raised, and, according to the owner,
the animal did not at any time show signs of ill health. An
examination of two other hogs raised on the premises was made,
but no trichinae were found. As usual in such cases, the meat
was imperfectly cooked or fried, the tenderloin, sausage meat,
spare ribs, etc., all being freely used. For several days while in
water the human trichinae showed signs of life, coiling and
uncoiling when freed from the muscular fibre, but the stage of
development found in the pork showed no activity under the same
conditions. The communication is accompanied by excellent
photographs of portions of human muscle and of the affected
pork, showing a number of the worms imbedded in the tissue.

May 18.
Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.
Seventeen persons present.

May 25.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Nineteen persons present.

Charles P. Sherman was elected a member.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

A REVISION OF THE AMERICAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS GERRES.
BY BARTON W, EVERMANN AND SETH E. MEEK.

In the summer of 1883 we published in the Proceedings of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, pp. 116 to 124, a
*' Review of the Species of Gerres found in American Waters."
In December of the same year, Dr. Jordan made a large collection
of the Atlantic species of this genus at Cedar Keys, Key West
and Havana. A large portion of this collection is now in the
Museum of the Indiana University, and constitutes the material
upon which the present paper is based.

The present collections contain numerous specimens of species
not before examined by us, and, in the light of the new relation-
ships which an examination of them discloses, we have thought
it best to attempt an entire revision of the genus. We have
therefore collected all the synonymy up to date, made an analyt-
ical key by which the species can be determined, and given a
detailed description of all the species now before us. To the
account of the Pacific Coast species, as given in the former
paper, we have now nothing to add, as the very extensive collec-
tion of them studied by us has been since mostly destroj^ed by
fire.

We take this opportunity of acknowledging our indebtedness
to Dr. Jordan for the use of his library, and for other aids.

Genus GERRES Cuvier.

Oerrcs Cuvier. Regne Animal, ed. 2, ii, 104, 1829 (r/iombeus, etc.).
Catoclmnum Cantor. Cat. Malayan Fishes, 55, 1850. (Proposed for

Oerres Cuv., regarded by Cantor as preoccupied by Qerris Fabricius).
Diapterus UauzsLni. Nov. Comment. Acad. Bonom., 1841 {plumieri, etc.).
Eucinostomus Baird and Girard. Ninth Smithsonian Report, 1855, 20

(argenteus = gula).
Synistius Gill. Pioc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, 238 (longirostris).
Mojarra Poey. Enum. Pise. Cub., 50, 1875 {rhombea = olistJiostoma).

Analysis of Species of Gerres.

a. Preorbital and preopercle entire ; body elongate, the depth
2^ to 4 in length to base of caudal (Eucinostomus Baird
and Girard).

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES Of PHILADELPHIA. 257

6. Premaxillary groove naked.
c. Anal rays II, 8 ; body very elongate, its depth 3f in its
length ; eye 2f in head. Lefroyi. 1.

cc. Anal rays III, 7.
d. Premaxillary groove narrow, linear.
e. Eye very large, its diameter much greater than length of
snout, 2§ in length of head. Exposed portion of
maxillary small, triangular. Dowi. 2.

ee. Eye small, more than 3 in head, its diameter about equal
to length of snout. Exposed portion of maxillary
triangular in front, oblong behind.
/. Body elongate, the back little elevated ; greatest depth
3j to 3^ in length. Anal spines small, the second 4^
in length of head. Pseudogula. 3.

ff. Bod}' more compressed, deeper, the back more elevated ;
greatest depth 2f in length. Anal spines larger, the
second 3^ in length of head. Gracilis. 4.

dd. Premaxillary groove broad, oval, naked. Body elevated,
compressed, its greatest depth 2| in its length.
g. Caudal fin shorter than head, sides without dark ver-
tical bars. Second anal spine short, 3 to 4 in head ;
ventrals short, little more than half the length of
head, their tips not reaching vent; dark punctula-
tions on body few or none ; upper part of spinous
dorsal becoming gi-adually blackish ; other fins
nearly plain ; axil faintly dusky. Californiensis. 5.
gg. Caudal fin longer than head. Sides with 7 to 9 dark
bluish vertical bars, about as broad as pupil. Anal
spines longer, the second 2f in length of head.
Ventrals longer, 1| in length of head, scarcel}'
reaching vent. Ginereus. 6.

bb. Premaxillary groove scaled in front, forming a naked pit
behind. Depth 2| in length ; head 3 to B^ in length of
body. Second anal spine about 3^ in head. Gula. 7.

aa. Preopercle distinctly entire.
h. Preorbital entire ; body without distinct dark streaks along
the rows of scales. {Moharra Poej'-).
i. Premaxillary groove broad, triangular or oval, and free from
scales.

258 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

j. Body ovate, the outline somewhat regularly elliptical,
depth 2^ in length. Dorsal spines slender, but little
flexible, the second scarcely stronger than the third, 2 in
length of head. Second and third anal spines subequal,
2 1 in length of head ; second stronger than third.

Aureolus. 8.

jj. Body rhomboidal, short and deep, with angular outlines,

the depth usually more than half the length ; spines long

and slender.

k. Anal rays III, 8 ; second dorsal spine | or more length ol

head ; second anal spine more than half length of head

Peruvianus. 9.
kh. Anal rays II, 9 ; second dorsal spine about § length of
head ; second anal spine If in length of head.

Bhombeus. 10.
ii. Premaxillary groove broad, oval, and covered with scales
(these sometimes deciduous in poorly preserved speci-
mens). Anal rays III, 8 ; second dorsal spine 1;^ in head ;
second anal spine If in head ; teeth rather long and
slender. OUsthostoma. 11.

hh. Preorbital serrate, a distinct dark streak along each row of
scales on back and sides ; body rhomboidal, with angular
outlines; spines very strong; anal ra3'S III, 8 or 9.
(Gerres).

I. Yentrals blackish ; upper margin of dorsal fin falcate ;

depth 2^ in length ; scales 5-38-9. Brasilianus. 12.

II. Yentrals pale.

m. Spines moderate, the second dorsal spine f to | length
of head.
n. Pectorals long, reaching to front of anal ; caudal
longer than head ; lateral stripes numerous ; depth
nearly 2 in length. Lineatus. 13.

nn. Pectorals short, barely reaching vent ; caudal shorter
than head ; lateral stripes few ; depth about 2| in
lenoth. Brevimanus. 14.

mm. Spines very high, the second dorsal spine longer than
head ; second anal spine about equal to length of
head ; lateral stripes very distinct, about 12 in num-
ber; depth of body 2^ in length. Flumieri. 15.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHTA. 259

1. Gerres lefroyi.

Diapterus lefroyi Goode, Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, 123, 1874 ; Goode,

Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1876, 39 (Bermudas).
Oerres lefroyi Giinther, Voyage Challenger, Fishes, 10, 1880 (name

only); Evermann & Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 118;

Jordan, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 130 (Key West); Jordan and

Swain, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 233 (Cedar Keys); Jordan, Cat.

Fish. N. A., 1883, 95.
Eurinostomus productus Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 55, 1875 (Havana);

Poey, Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist. N. Y., 1876 (Havana).

Habitat. — Atlantic coast of tropical America ; West Indies;
Bermudas; Cedar Keys; Key West ; Havana.

The specimens examined by us are from Havana (8 specimens),
Key West "(5 specimens), and Cedar Keys (1 specimen). In size
they range from 2 to 8^ inches in length.

Head 3^ to 3^; depth 3|; scales 5-47-9. D. IX, 10. A. II, 8.
Body elongate, elliptical, not very strongly compressed ; back
little elevated; snout conical, not much pointed; mouth small,
end of maxillary I'eaching scarcely beyond vertical from anterior
margin of orbit, its length 3 in length of head, exposed portion
nearly triangular, its greatest width 2 in its length, which is 5 in
length of head. Top of head flattish. Premaxillary groove long,
linear and naked. Eye large, 2f in head ; snout 3^ in head, inter-
orbital area 3 in head. Gill-rakers weak, small, 7 or 8 below the
angle. Dorsal spines all weak and flexible, second and third sub-
equal, 5^ in length of head ; upper margin of the fin concave.
Second anal spine moderate, its length 4 in head. Least depth
of caudal peduncle 3| in length of head.

Color silvery, darker above, everj'where with fine dusky punc-
tulations and traces of crossbars. Top of spinous dorsal black,
dorsal, anal, and caudal dusky. Yentrals and pectorals paler,
but with dusky punctulations ; axil dusky ; a dark spot on supra-
orbital ; snout dusky ; no distinct stripes along rows of scales.

In form, size and color, this species resembles G. doivi, but is
readil}' distinguished from the latter by the presence of two anal
spines instead of three. This character is apparently a constant
one, observed in many specimens.

2. Gerres dowi.

Diapterus dowi Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 162 (Panama).

Genes doici Giinther, Fish. Ceutr. Amer., 448, 1866 (Description taken
from Gill); Steiudachner, Ichth. Beitriige, iv, 13, 1875 (No descrip-
tion), (Callao, Peru; Galapagos Islands); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull.

2G0 f&OOEEDlNas OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 329 (Panama); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U.
S. Fish Comm., 1882, 111 (Panama); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U.
S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 377 (Panama); Evermann & Meek, Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 120 (Panama).
Gerres aprion Giinther, Fish, Centr. Amer., 391, 1866 (Name only)
(Panama).

Habitat. — Atlantic and Pacific coasts of tropical America ;
Galapagos Islands, Peru; Panama; Havana; Key "West.

The specimens examined b^^ us are from Havana (2 specimens,
5| and 6 inches in length), and Kej' West (5 specimens, 3 to 6
inches in length).

Head 3f ; depth 3 ; scales 5-45-10.

Bodj- rather slender, compressed, elliptical, back littie elevated,
head flat, with a slight depression above front of orbit. Maxil-
lary triangular and small, the width at posterior end being ^ the
length, which is about ^ diameter of e3^e, also ^ length of second
dorsal spine. Preorbital and preopercle entire. Eye large, 2|
in head ; snout 3|-, and interorbital, 3^ in head.

Second and third dorsal spines about equal, the third perhaps
slightly longest, 1^ in head, all weak and flexible. Second anal
spine relatively strong, third weaker but slightly longer, 2| in
head; base of anal 1| to 2^ in length of head. Least depth of
caudal peduncle 2§ in head. Pectorals about | length of head,
their tips reaching vent. Yentrals If in head, reaching about |
distance to vent. Premaxillar3^ groove narrow, linear and naked,
and not extending quite to the vertical of centre of pupil.

Color silvery with bluish reflections, darker above lateral line.
Tips of spinous dorsal black, ventrals dusky (lighter in Key
West specimens) ; a black supraorbital spot, caudal dusky, body
covered with very fine dark pimctulations.

This species has not been hitherto recorded from the Atlantic.

.". Gerres pseudogula.

Eucinostomus pseudogtda Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 53, pi. i, 1875
(Havana).

Gerres jonesi Giinther, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., iii, 1879, 150, 389
(Bermudas) ; Giinther, Voyage Challenger, Fishes, i, 10, 1880
(Bermudas) ; Evermann & Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
1883, 120 (Bermudas); Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 95.

Habitat. — West Indies ; Bermudas ; Cuba.
We have examined eight specimens of this species, all from
Havana. They range from 2f to 7 inches in length.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261

Head 3^ to 3^ ; depth S^ ; scales 5-49-9 ; D. IX-10; A. III-T.

Body elongate, elliptical, not mucli compressed; back little
elevated ; profile evenly convex ; top of* head little convex ;
mouth rather small, end of maxillar}' reaching slightly past
vertical from front of orbit ; length of maxillary 3^ in length of
head, its exposed portion nearly triangular and about i length
of head, its greatest width ^ its greatest length. Preorbital
and preopercle entire. Snout not much pointed, conical ; cheeks
each with three rows of scales ; seven gill-rakers below the angle.
E3'^e 3^ in head, snout 3;^ in head ; interorbital area 3| in head.
Dorsal spines all weak and flexible. Second and third dorsal
spines subequal, 1^ in length of head. Base of anal 2 in length
of head, spines small, the second the stronger, its length 4^ in
length of head, about equal in length to third spine or slightly
the shorter. Least depth of caudal peduncle 3 in length of head.

Tips of pectoral fins reaching vent, their length about 3| in
length of body. Ventrals 1^ in head, their tips reaching | dis-
tance to vent. Premaxillary grooves long, linear and free from
scales.

Color greenish above, with bluish reflections, silvery below ;
snout blackish ; tips of spinous dorsal black ; pectorals pale,
dusky in axil. Yentrals and anal pale. Caudal reddish.

This species has been sometimes confounded with Gerres
gracilis. It can easily be distinguished from the latter b}' its
more elongate form and its comparatively small anal spines.

There seems to be no room for doubt of the identity of G.
jonesi \<[ii\i G. pseudogula.

4. Gerres gracilis.

Biapterus gracilis Gill, Pioc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 246 (Cape
San Lucas).

Gerres gracilis Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 374
(Guaymas); Jordon & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 329
(Guaymas ; Mazatlan ; Panama); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish
Comm., 1882, 108 (Mazatlan; Panama); Jordan, Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 1884, 130 (Key West); Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 95.

Oerres aprion Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., i, 358, 1859 (San Do-
mingo ; Jamaica ; West Indies ; South America); Giinther, Cat. Fish.
Brit. Mus., iv, 255, 1863 (San Domingo ; Jamaica ; Bahia); Bean «&
Dresel, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 154 (Jamaica) (not of Cuv. &
Val.).

262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Eucinostomus Iiarengulus Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879,

133 (Western Florida).
Diapterus harengnlus Goode & Beau, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 339

(Clear Water Harbor, Florida).
Oerres harengulus Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 584, 1883 (Pen-

sacola, Florida); Beau & Dresel, Proc. U. S.Nat. Mus., 1884, 154

(.Jamaica).

Habitat. — Atlantic and Pacific coasts of tropical America, and
the West Indies (Cape San Lucas ; San Domingo ; Jamaica ;
Havana; Bahia ; Western Florida; Panama; Guaymas; Mazat-
lan; Key West).

The numerous specimens examined by us are from Havana and
Key West, and range from 1 to 7^ inches in length. Head 3^ ;
depth 2f to 2| ; scales 5-45-9 ; Dorsal IX-10 ; A. Ill-t.

Body elliptical, compressed, back moderately elevated ; anterior
profile little convex, not very steep ; snout rather pointed, mouth
moderate, maxillary reaching almost to vertical from front of
orbit, its length 3 in length of head ; exposed portion of maxil-
lary triangular in front, oblong behind, its width 2 in its length,
which is 4| in length of head. Preorbital and preopercle entire.
Eye not very large, its diameter 3^ in length of head, snout 3i in
head. Premaxillary groove long, linear, and naked, Gill-rakers
small and weak, t below the angle.

Dorsal spines weak and flexible, the longest 4| to 2y^o in head ;
anal spines rather short, the second the stronger, its length 3^ in
length of head ; ventral fins short, their tips reaching about half-
way to anal, their length If in head.

Pectorals slender, their tips reaching about to vent; length of
pectorals about equal to head ; ventrals and caudal mostly covered
with small scales ; other fins naked, color in life silver}', greenish
above ; snout and upper part of caudal dusky ; spinous dorsal
punctate at base, usually abruptly black at tip ; the dark areas
are separated by a transparent horizontal bar (these markings
wanting in some specimens, perhaps females); soft dorsal punc-
tate ; caudal with a faint dusky margin ; ventrals pale.

This species is very common at Kej' West and Havana. There
seems to be no difference between the " harengulus " of the East
Coast and the West Coast ^'■gracilisy

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 263

5. Gerres californiensis.

Diapterus calif ornienm Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 18G2, 245
(Cape San Lucas).

Gerres californiensis Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881,
274 (Guaymas); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish. Comni., 1881,
319 (Guaymas); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1882,
108 (Mazatlan); Evermann & Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
1888, 120 (Guaymas ; Mazatlan); Jordan, Cat. Fislies N. A., 1885, 95.

? Gerres gnla Steindachner, Ichth. Beitriige, iii, 60, 1875 (name only ;
nee Cuv. & Val.); (Magdalena Bay).

Habitat. — Pacific Coast of Mexico (Mazatlan ; Guaj^mas ;
Cape San Lucas).

This species is certain!}^ close to G. cinereus, and it may
eventually prove to be a variety of the latter.

6. Gerres cinereus.

Tardus cinereus peltatus Catesby, Nat. Hist., pi. ii, fig. 2, 1750
(Florida Keys ; Bahamas).

Mugil cinereus Walbaum, Artedi Piscium, 228, 1792 (After Catesby).

Gerres cinei-eus Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1882, 108
(Mazatlan); Jordan & Gilbert, Syn, Fish. N. A., 935, 1883; Ever-
mann & Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 120 ; Jordan, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 130, 148 (Key West); Jordan, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1881, 194 (identification of Catesby's figure); Jordan,
Cat. Fishes N. A., 1885, 95.

Gerres zebra Miiller & Troschel, Schomburgk Hist. Barbadoes, 668,
1848 (Barbadoes); Gimther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., i, 349, 1859
(copied); Gihather, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., iv, 254, 1862 (copied);
Steindachner, Ichthyol. Notizen, iv, ii, 1867 (Surinam); Steindachner,
Zur Fisch-Fauua des Magdalenen-Stromes, 9, 1878 (Rio Magdalena.
Identified with Gerres squamipinnis Giinther ; Jordan & Gilbert,
Bull. U. S. Fish. Comm., 1881, 329 (Mazatlan); Bean & Dresel,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 154 (Jamaica).

Gerres aprion Cuvier, Regne Animal, ed. 2, 104, 1829 (Based on
Catesby) ; Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 461, 1830
(Martinique).

Diapterus aprion Voej, Enum. Pise. Cuba, 51, 1875 (Havana).

Eucinostomus aprion Poey, Enum. Pise. Cuba, 328, 1877 (Havana).

Gerres squamipin7iis Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., i, 349, 1859
(Jamaica; Guatemala); Gimther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., iv, 254,
18G2 (Jamaica; Guatemala); Steindachner, Ichthyol. Notizen, iv,
12, 1867 (Surinam); Gimther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 39, 18G9 (Jamaica;
Chiapam ; Panama).

Eucinostomus zebra Poey, Enum. Pise. Cuba, 51, 1875 (Havana).

Habitat. — Both coasts of Tropical America, and the West
Indies (Havana ; Jamaica ; Chiapam ; Panama ; Guatemala ;
Martinique ; Bahamas ; Florida Keys ; Barbadoes ; Mazatlan.)

264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

The specimens before us are from Key West and Havana.
They range from 6^ to 13 inches in length. This species seems
to reach a larger size than any of the others here mentioned.

Head 3^ ; depth 2^ to ^ ; scales 6-45-10.

Body compressed, elongate, back moderately elevated, the
dorsal profile being evenly convex. Mouth moderate, the maxil-
lary extending but slightly beyond the vertical at anterior margin
of orbit, its exposed portion triangular in form, and twice as long
as wide, its length being contained five times in that of the head.

Preorbital and preopercle entire ; premaxillary groove broad
and free from scales ; gill-rakers weak, 7 below the angle. Eye
moderate, about 3^ in head ; snout 3:^, and interorbital space 3j,
in head. Distance from end of snout to dorsal fin 2^ in length
of body. Second dorsal spine longest, about 1^ in head, and not
much stronger than the others ; all the dorsal spines are weak
and flexible ; general outline of the upper margin of the spinous
dorsal falcate. Second and third anal spines subequal, second
2f to 2| in length of head, the pectorals scarcely reaching anal,
their length being contained three times in that of the body.
Ventrals contained If times in head, and scarcely reaching the vent.

Color silvery with bluish reflections above. Sides with 7 or 8
broken, bluish vertical bars, about equaling pupil in width. No
dark stripes along the scales. Dorsal and caudal fins dusk^^ and
slightly so ; other fins pale, ventrals with a few dark punctula-
tions ; axil dark.

7. Gerres gula.

Oerres gula Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., vi, 464, 1830
(Martinique; Brazil); Jenyns, Zool. Beagle, Fishes, 58, 1843;
Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., i, 346, 1859 (Bahia ; San Domingo ;
Jamaica); Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., iv, 255, 1862 (Bahia; San
Domingo; Jamaica); Poey, Rep. Pise. Cub., 316, 1865 (Havana);
Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mas., v, 1876, 39 (Bermudas) ; Jordan &
Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 934, 1883 ; Evermann & Meek, Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 122 (Bermudas; Beaufort, N. C; Charleston,
S. C; Aspinwall ; Peusacola); Jordan, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,

1883, 289 (Notes on original type); Jordan, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus ,

1884, 130 (Key West); Jordan & Swain, Pioc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884,
233 (Cedar Keys); Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 95.

Diapterus gula Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 323, 1868 (Havana).

Eudnostomus argenteus Baird & Girard^ Ninth Smith. Rept., 1855, 345
(New Jersey Coast); Girard, U. S. andMex. Bd. Survey, Fishes, 17,
PI. ix, figs. 9-12, 1859 (Brazos Santiago, Indianola, and St. Joseph's
Island, Texas).

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265

? Gerres argenteus Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 25G, 1863 (Texas).
Eucinostomus gulula Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 54, PI, 2, 1875 (Havana).
Diapterus liomonymus Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 340,
(Clear Water Harbor, Fla.).

Habitat. — Atlantic coast of America from New Jersey to Brazil,
and the West Indies.

(New Jersey ; Beaufort, N. C. ; Charleston, S. C. ; Clear Water
Harbor, Fla.; Cedar Keys; Key West ; Brazos, Indianola, and
St. Joseph's Island, Texas ; Aspinwall ; Brazil; Bahia ; Martin-
ique; Jamaica, San Domingo ; Havana; Bermudas.)

We have examined numerous specimens of this species from
Cedar Kej's, Key West, and Havana, varying in size from 1^ to
6^ inches in length.

Head 3J ; depth 2|; D.IX, 10; A. Ill, 8; scales 5-42-9.

Body elliptical, compressed, back moderately elevated, mouth
small ; end of maxillary reaching slightly past vertical from front
margin of orbit ; exposed portion of maxillary nearly oblong, its
width about 2 in its length, which is from 4 to 5 in the length of
the head.

Preorbital and preopercle entire. Gill-rakers small and weak,
1 below the angle. Eye 3 in length of head, snout 3^ in head.
Interorbital area 3 in head. Premaxillary groove scaled in front,
the posterior part naked, forming a sort of pit ; longest dorsal
spine 1^ in head ; second anal spine shorter and stronger than
third, its length about 3^ in head ; ventrals reaching nearly to
vent ; their length If in length of head. Pectorals reaching front
of anal, their length about 3 in length of body.

Color silvery, greenish, darker above; no distinct longitudinal
lines except in ver}' young ; upper margin of spinous dorsal more
or less black.

Dorsal and anal fins dusky, other fins pale.

The form of this species resembles that of G. gracilis^ but the
body is always less elongate than in the latter. The form of its
premaxillary groove differing from that of any other species,
aff"ords the best character for distinction.

The many specimens of this species which we have examined
present no marked diff"erences or variations. They also agree
very well with the description and drawing of Encinostomus gulula
of Poey.

We have no doubt of the identity of gula, argenteus^ gulula and
homonymus.
18

266 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

8. Gerres aureolus.

Oerres aureolus Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish. Comm., 1881, 328

(Panama); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish. Coram., 1882, 111

(Panama); Everman & Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 123

(Panama).

Sabitat.—B&j of Panama. Only the original type of this

strongly marked species is yet known.

9. Gerres peruvianus.

Gerres peruvianus Cuvier «fe Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., vi, 467,
1830 (Payta, Northern Peru); Lesson, Voyage Coquille, Poiss., 180,
1828 ; Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 330 (Mazat-
lan; Panama); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U, S. Fish Comm., 1882,
108, 111, 113 (Panama; Mazatlan ; Punta Arenas); Evermann &
Meek, Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 123 ; Jordan, Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 289 (Notes on original type); Jordan, Cat.
Fish. N. A., 1885, 95.

Gerres rhomieiis Giinther, Fish Centr. Amer., 391, 1866 (Name only\
(Chiapam); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 232
(Salina Cruz), (not of Cuv. & Val.).

Habitat. — West Coast of Tropical America (Mazatlan ; Salina
Cruz; Chiapam; Panama; Peru).

Dr. Jordan has examined the type of this species, of which he
says : " The type of this species is apparently identical with the
common west-coast species called by this name by Jordan and
Gilbert (Bull. 17. S. Fish Comm., 188, 330), and later by Ever-
mann and Meek (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 123)."

10. Gerres rhombeus.

Stone bass Sloane, Nat. Hist. Jamaica, ii, pi. 2.:3, fig. 1, 1727
(Jamaica).

Gerres rhombeus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss , vi, 459,
1830 (Martinique ; San Domingo); Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus ,
1, 341, 1859 (Cuba; Jamaica; Puerto Capello ; South America; in
part G . olisthostoma Goode & Bean); Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus.,
iv, 253, 1862 (Cuba; Jamaica ; Puerto Capello); Steindachner, Zur
Fisch-Fauna ]Magdalenen-Stromes, 9, 1878 (Eio Magdalena^; Jordan
& Gilbert, Proc. TJ. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 383 (AspinwalD; Evermann
& Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 123 ; Jordan, Proc
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 290 (Notes on original type); Eean &
Dresel, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 154 (Jamaica).

Habitat. — West Indies and Atlantic Coast of Tropical America
(Jamaica ; San Domingo ; Martinique ; Puerto Capello ; Havana ;
Aspinwall ; Rio Magdalena).

1886,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELrHTA. 26t

We luive examined a number of specimens from Havana,
ranging from 2f to 10 inches in length.

Head 3^ ; depth If ; scales 5-38-10. D. IX, 10 ; A. II, 9.

Body much compressed, rhomboidal in form, the back much
elevated ; profile evenly convex to supraorbital where there is a
slight depression ; snout somewhat pointed ; mouth rather large ;
end of maxillary reaching to vertical from centre of pupil, its
length 3 in head. Exposed portion of the maxillary oblong, its
width about 2| in its length, which is 4^ in head. Ej-e 3j in head ;
snout 4 in head ; interorbital area 3;^ in head. Gill-rakers stronger
than in gida or olisthostoma 18 below the angle. PremaxilJary
groove broad, oval and free from scales. Pectoral fins reaching
to front of anal, their length 3 in length of body ; ventral fins
reaching be3'ond vent, their length 4^ in length of bod3^ Second
dorsal spine stronger, but shorter than third and fourth, its length
about i^ in length of body ; margin of fin falcate. Suborbital
entire ; preopercle entire. Caudal peduncle 2§ in length of head.
Anal spine constantly two in number. Second anal spine 1| in
length of hea(J.

Color silvery, with bluish reflections, darker above ; margin of
dorsal fin black ; fins rather pale ; ventrals and anal with dusky
punctulations ; snout dusky ; no distinct dark lines along the rows
of scales.

11. Gerres olisthostoma.

Gerres rJtombeus'Poey, Kep. Pise. Cub., 316, 1865 (Havana); Poey, Syn.

Pise. Cub., 331, 1868 (Havana).
Mojarra rTiomhea Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 51, 1875 (Havana); Poey,
Enum. Pise. Cub., 327, 1877 (Havana) (not Oerres rhonibeus

C. & v.).

Oerres olisthostoma Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 423
(Indian River, Florida); Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 934,
1883 ; Eveimann & Meek, Proe. Acad. Nat. Sei. Phila., 1883, 123 ;
Jordan, Proe. U. S. Nat. Mas.. 1884, 130 (Key West); Jordan, Cat.
Fish. N. A., 1885, 95.

Habitat. — Coast of Florida and Quba (Key West; Indian River,
Fla.; Havana ; San Matheos).

We have examined specimens from Key West, Havana and San
Matheos. They range from 5 inches to a foot in length.

Head 3^ ; depth 2^ ; scales 5-38-9. D. IX, 10 ; A. Ill, 8.

Body compressed, rhomboidal in form, back very much ele-
vated. Mouth large, maxillary extending to vertical from ante-

268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [188G.

rior portion of pupil, its length 2| in head ; exposed portion
oblong, its width 2^ in its length, which is 4 to i^ in head.

Preorbital entire ; preopercle serrate ; premaxillary groove
broad, closely covered with small scales (an important diagnostic
character); gill-rakers weak, 11 below the angle. Eye 3^ in head ;
interorbital space 3^, and snout about 3^ in head. Distance from
snout to dorsal fin about 2^ in length. Second dorsal spine 1^ to
1^ in head ; third about equal to second, the others decreasing in
length, the sixth being but one-half length of second — the general
outline of upper margin of spinous dorsal being sickle-shaped.
Pectorals reaching slightly beyond front of anal, and equal a little
less than one-third length of body. Yentrals reaching just beyond
vent and are one-fourth length of body. Anal spines always 3.
Second anal spine stout, about If in head. Least depth of caudal
peduncle about 2^ in head.

Color silvery with bluish reflections, darker above. No distinct
dark lines along rows of scales. Dorsal, ventrals and anal dusk}^,
other fins paler. A dark supraorbital spot ; snout dusky.

This species has, until lately, been confounded with(r. rhombeus.

12. Gerres brasilianus.

Oerres brasilianus Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., vi, 458,
1830 (Brazil; Porto Rico); Poey, Rep. Pise. Cub,, i, 315, 1865
(Havana); Poey, Syn. Pise. Cub., 320, 1868 (Havana); Poey, Enum.
Pise. Cub., 50, 1875 (Havana); Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 327, 1877
(Havana); Evermann & Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883,
124 ; Jordan, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliila., 1883, 289 (Notes on type).
Oerres patao Poey, Memorias Cuba, ii, 192, 1858 (Havana); Poey, Syn.
Pise. Cub., 320, 1868 (Havana); Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 50, 1875
(Havana); Glinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., iv, 253, 1862 (Copied);
Evennann & Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 123.

We have examined a veiy large specimen of this species col-
lected at Charleston, South Carolina, by Mr. Charles C. Leslie,
as well as numerous smaller ones from Havana.

Head 8f ; depth 2i ; scales 5-38-9; D. IX-10; A. Ill-t or 8.

Body compressed, rhombojjdal ; back very much elevated ;
profile nearly straight from spinous dorsal to premaxillary
groove, where there is a slight depression. Snout conical, bluut-
ish ; mouth rather large ; maxillary reaching slightly beyond
the vertical from anterior margin of pupil, its length 2| in
length of head. Exposed portion of maxillary oblong, its width
2^ in its length, its length 4^ in length of head.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 260

Preorbital and preopercle serrate ; premaxillary groove broad,
narrowed posteriorly, entirely free from scales. Gill-rakers
short and weak, 11 below the angle; eye small, 3| in length of
head ; snout 3| in length of head. Dorsal spines rather strong
and stiff, second and third subequal in length, the second much
the stronger, its length If in length of head, upper margin of
dorsal fin falcate. Second and third anal spines subequal, the
second much the stronger, its length 1| in length of head.
Least depth of caudal peduncle 2^ in length of head.

Color silvery gray, with bluish reflections, darker above, a dark
streak along each row of scales, most conspicuous on upper part
of bod}^ ; tins all dusky except pectorals, which are pale ; dorsal
and anal blackish on their margins, A dark supraorbital spot;
axil dusky.

The description of Gerres hrasilianus Cuv. and Yal, is very
poor indeed, Dr, Jordan has examined the type, and we here
give a copy of his notes : " The type of this species is in very
bad condition, unfit for detailed description. Sides apparently
with dark stripes along the rows of scales. Preorbital and pre-
opercle serrate. Frontal groove broad, naked. Longest dorsal
spine 5 in body. Second anal spine 5^. Anal spines 3 in number.
Caudal fin long. This species is allied to G. plumieri, but the
back is less elevated and the spines smaller than in the latter."

The above agrees very well with our specimens from Charles-
ton and Havana, the latter being evidently identical with the
Gerres patao of Poey.

i;^. Gerres lineatus.

Smaris lineatus Humboldf, Observ, Zool., i=, 185, PI. 43, 1807-1834

(Acapulco).
Oerres lineatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., vi, 470,

1830 (Description from Humboldt); Jordan «fe Gilbert, Bull. U. S.

Fish Comm., 1881, 330 (Mazatlan ; San Bias); Jordan & Gilbert,

Bull. U. S. Fist Comm., 1882, 108 (Mazatlan); Jordan & Gilbert,

Bull. U, S, Nat, Mus., 1882, 377 (Fresh-water Lake at Acapulco);

Evermann & Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat, Sci. Phila., 1883, 123 ; Jo: dan,

Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 95.
Gerres axillaris Giinther, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1864, 102 ; Giinther,

Fish. Cent. Amer., 448, 1866 (Chiapani); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc.

U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 233 (Name only) (San Bias).

Habitat. — West Coast of Mexico (Acapulco ; Mazatlan ; San
Bias ; Chiapam).

270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

14. Gerres brevimanus.

Gerres brevimanus Giintlier, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1864, 153 ;
Giinthcr, Fish. Centr. Amer., 448, 1869 (Cbiapam); Evermann and
Meek, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 124 ; Jordan. Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 290 (Notes on type).

Habitat. — Pacific Coast of Tropical America.

Concerning this species, Dr. Jordan observes : " This species
is distinct from G. lineatus (Humboldt), although closely allied
to it. Only the original type is yet known. On this I have the
following notes : —

" Head 3j in length ; depth 2^ ; eye 3^ in head. Coloration of
Gerres lineatus. Back much lower than in the latter, and pectoral
fins very much shorter; their length 1^ in head; their tips not
reaching nearly to tips of ventrals, which are 1^ in head ; caudal
3 in body, Preorbital very little serrate, almost entire. Pre-
opercle weakly serrate. Second dorsal spine If in head; second
anal spine If. Teeth small and short. No black on base of
pectoral, or on lower fins. Spinous dorsal dusky above. Frontal
groove broad and naked, as in G. lineatus.''^

15. Gerres plumieri.

Gerres phtmieri Ciivier & Valenciennes, list. Nat. Poiss., vi, 452, 1830,
(Antilles; Porto Puco); Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., i, 340, 1859
(San Domingo; Guatemala; Pemambnco ; Bahia); Cat. Fish,
Brit. Mus., iv, 253, 1862 (San Domingo ; Guatemala; Pemambuco;
Bahia); Poey, Rep. Pise. Cub., 315, 1865 (Havana); Poey, Syn.Pisc.
Cub., 321, 1868 (Havana); Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 49, 1875 (Ha-
vana); Poey, Enum. Pise. Cub., 327, 1877 (Havana); Steindachner,
Zur Fisch-Fauua des Magdalenen-Stromes, 9, 1878 (RioMagdalena);
Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 583, 1883 ; Evermann & Meek,
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.. 1883, 124 (Aspinwall ; Indian River,
Florida); Jordan, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 290 (Notes on,
type); Bean & Dresel, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 153 (Jamaica);
Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 95.

Habitat. — West Indies and Atlantic Coast of Tropical America
(Antilles; Havana; Porto Rico ; San Domingo; Jamaica; In-
dian River, Fla. ; Pernambuco ; Bahia ; Aspinwall ; Guatemala).

We have examined six specimens from Havana. They range
from 5^ to 6 inches in length.

Head 3 ; depth 2^ ; scales 5-3T-11. D. lY, 10 ; A. Ill, 8.

Body compressed, rhomboidal in form, back yery much ele-
vated. Mouth rather large, maxillary extending slightly beyond

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

2T1

vertical from anterior margin of pupil, its length 2f in head ;
exposed portion of maxillary oblong, its width 2^ in its length,
which is 4| in length of head.

Preorbital and preopercle serrate ; premaxillary groove broad
and entirely free from scales. Gill-rakers small, weak, 13 below
the angle. Eye rather large, 3 in head ; snout 4 in head. Dis-
tance from tip of snout to dorsal fin equals the greatest depth of
fish. Upper margin of dorsal fin is sickle-shaped. Second dorsal
spine very strong and long, its length 2| in length of body ; the
other spines rather weak and flexible. Second anal spine very
long and strong, its length equals length of head ; third anal
spine shorter and much weaker than second. Pectoral fins
reaching beyond the front of anal, their length 2f in length of
body ; ventral fins reaching past vent, almost to front of anal,
their length 3§ in length of body.

Color bluish-silvery above, silvery below ; distinct dark longi-
tudinal lines along each row of scales. Dorsal caudal and anal
fins dusky ; margin of dorsal fin black ; a dark supraorbital spot.
Pectoral and ventral fins pale.

The following is a list of the nominal species referred to in the
foregoing paper, arranged in chronological order, with our iden-
tification of each. Tenable specific names are printed in italics.

Nominal Species.
Mugil cinereus Walbanm,
Smaris lineatus Humboldt,
Gerres jjlumieri Cuvier and Valenciennes,
Gerres hrasilianiis Cuv. and Val.,
Gerres rJiombeus Cuv. and Val.,
Gerres aprion Cuv. and Val.,
Gerres gula Cuv, and Val.,
Gerres peruvianus Cuv. and Val.,
Gerres zebra jMiiller and Troschel,
Eucinostomus argeuteus Baird & Girard,
Gerres patao Poey,
Gerres squamipinnis Giinther,
Diapterus californiensis Gill,
Diapterus gracilis Gill,
Diapterus dowi Gill,
Gerres axillaris Gihitlicr,
Gerres brevimartus Giinther,
Gerres lefroyi Goode,
Eucinostomus pseudo-gula Poey,
Eucinostomus gulula Poey,

Year.

Identification.

1792,

Gerres ciuereus.

1830,

Gerres lineatus.

1830,

Gerres plumieri.

1830,

Gerres brasilianas.

1830,

Gerres rliombeus.

1830,

Gerres cinereus.

1830,

Gerres gula.

1830,

Gerres peruvianus.

1848,

Gerres cinereus.

1855,

Gerres gula.

1858,

Gerres brasilianus.

1859,

Gerres cinereus.

1862,

Gerres californiensis,

1862,

Gerres gracilis.

1863,

Gerres dowi.

1884,

Gerres lineatus.

1864,

Gerres brevimanus.

1874,

Gerres lefroyi.

1875,

Gerres pseudo-gula.

1875,

Gerres gula.

272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Nominal Species. Year. Identification.

Eucinostomus productus Poey, 1876, Gerres lefroyi.

Gerres jonesi Giinther, 1879, Genes pseudogula.

EucinostorausharengulusGoode and Bean, 1879, Gerres gracilis.

Diapterus homonymus Goode and Bean, 1879, Gerres gula.

Gerres avreolus Jordan and Gilbert, 1881, Gerres aureolus.

Gerres olisthostoma Goode and Bean, 1882, Gerres olistliostoma.

Recapitulation.

We have in this paper admitted 15 species of the American
Gerridae, and repeat here the list of species. The distribution
of the species is indicated by the letters W. (West Indies and
adjacent coasts), U. (Southern Atlantic coast of the United
States), and P. (Pacific coast of Tropical America).

1. Genus GERRES Cuvier.

1. Gerres lefroyi Goode (W.).

2. Qerres dowi Gill (U. ; W. ; P.).

3. Gerres pseudogula Poey (W.).

4. Gerres gracilis Gill (U. ; W. ; P.).

5. Gerres ealifomiensis Gill (P.).

6. Gerres einereus Walbaum (U. ; W. ; P.).
7 Gerres gula Cuv. and Val. (U. ; W.).

8. Gerres aureolus Jordan & Gilbert (Panama).

9. Gerres peruvinnus Cuv. & Val. (P.).

10. Gerres rhomheus Cuv. & Val. (W.).

11. Gerres olisthostoma Goode & Bean (W. ; U.).

12. Gerres brasilianus Cuv. & Val. (W. ; U.).

13. Gerres lineatus Humlioldt (P. ).

14. Gerres hrevimanus Giinther (P.).

15. Gerres plumieri Cuv. & Val. (W. ; U.).

1886.] natural sciences op philadelphia. 273

June 1.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-five persons present.

The deaths of C. J. Hoffman, a member, and of C. U. Shepherd,
a correspondent, were announced.

Trapa bicornis, L. — Mr. Meehan called attention to the Ling
nut of the Chinese, of which a specimen on the table was four-
horned, as in the European species T. riatans, and another with
three. It showed that the calj'cine horns were little more than
bracts, and that the European species was one more highly
developed than the Asiatic species.

Formation of Crowds Nest Brandies in the Cherry Tree — In
regard to fasciated branches, or as they were familiarly called
"crow's nests," in trees, Mr. Meehan remarked that they might
be classed as different species, and perhaps each species might
have its own peculiar law of development. In former contribu-
tions to the Academy, he had explained some of the phenomena
attendant on fasciation in trees and plants, which gave clues as
to their origin. In the cherry there was a species of fasciation
distinct from that prevailing in most trees. In a portion of the
mass of branches cut from the main mass, very little of an
abnormal character could be noted. But on the tree itself a
huge mass of small branches proceeding from one common
branch might be noted, in striking contrast with the prevailing
character. The specimens exhibited were from a mass of about
four feet in diameter. In this there were about two hundred
branchlets. In one of the thickest growths of a normal charac-
ter, only about twenty branchlets could be counted in a similar
space. The weight of these fasciations was so great that the
masses hung like pendulums from the trees. The garden cherry
had for more than a century been naturalized near Philadelphia,
and he knew of three of these fasciations, one on each wild tree,
within a half mile of each other. He had not seen any on culti-
vated trees. They had been under his observation for years.
The}^ might be said to never flower. On one he had seen two
weak flowers last year. There were none this. The leaves are
attacked by a species of fungus, which Professor Farlow, of
Cambridge, had kindly worked out for him, and found to be
Exoascus Wilsneri, an European species closely allied to E.
deformans, the species well known as causing the disease called
the " curl " in the peach. Prof. Farlow states that the specimens
sent by Mr. Meehan gave him the first knowledge of the existence
of the species in America.

274 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

As in the peach leaf-curl, the first leaves that push in the
spring are attacked, and are soon destroj-ed, the blistered and
browned leaves all falling by the first of June. New leaves, free
from the fungus, and weak shoots follow the attack. The absence
of flowers led to the discovery of the method by which the
fasciation is formed. In the normal condition of the cherry tree,
the weak shoots become fruit-bearing spurs. From these spurs
leaves annually appear, leaving an axillary bud, which becomes
the flower bud of the next season. The leaf continues healthy
throughout the growing season, and the parts that, morphologi-
cally speaking, might make a weak growth of wood, remain in
a kind of microcosm as sepals, petals, stamens, and carpels, fed
by the leaf for another year. But when this leaf is injured or
destroyed, instead of the bud remaining quiescent, or the
theoretical leaves changing into floral parts in the bud, a new
growth of leaves and the weak shoot are produced instead. It
is indeed so clear when once observed that the fasciation is
simply the development to weak branches of what would nor-
mally'be blossom spurs, that it was provoking to reflect that it
had taken so many years to discover it.

An interesting observation was that the fungus should confine
itself to the fasciated mass for so many years, and show no dis-
position whatever to spread to any other part of the tree. In
practical gardening we were taught when these fungus pests
appeared on orchard trees it was highly important to cut off
the branches or leaves, and burn them, in order to check the
spread. In the absence of actual demonstration in this case, one
might with good reason assume that the mycelium of the para-
site had obtained an entrance into the tissue and propagated
itself continuously as the branches grew, and that a crop of
spores in myriads must be produced annually. Only in rare
instances were the circumstances favorable to their germination.
The careful cutting away and burning of a few thousand spores
would be a matter of small importance in comparison with the
immense number that must escape the eff'ort of the cultivator for
their destruction. Safety lies evidently rather in the difficulty
these minute bodies experience in finding the exact conditions
necessarj^ for their growth and development, than from the
destruction of the germs themselves.

Distribution of Modiola tulipa. — Mr. John Ford reported the
finding by him of a half-grown specimen of Modiola tulipa Lam.,
near Cape May, N. J., on the 16th ult. As the species is essen-
tially a southern one, it was at first supposed that the specimen
had been carried north on the bottom of a vessel, or in some
other artificial manner. The discovery two weeks later, by Mr.
Ford, of a dozen or more adult specimens, at Anglesea, ten
miles further north, seems to prove that the species has entered

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 275

upon its new conditions in large numbers, and with the purpose
of making its new home a permanent one.

There is no record of the species having been found north of
South Carolina before.

Toxodon and other Remains from Nicaragua^ G. A. — Prof.
Leidf directed attention to some fossils, and remarked that they
were part of a collection which he had been invited to examine
b}^ Mrs. Dr. B. F. Guerrero, now residing in this city- The collec-
tion was obtained from the northern part of Nicaragua, but
nothing further had been learned about it. It mostly consisted
of uncharacteristic fragments of bones, but among them were
many interesting specimens referable to Megatherium, Elephant,
Mastodon, Horse, Ox, Toxodon, and Capybara. The association
of these animals is another illustration of the extension of the
early South American quaternary fauna into North America.
Among the remains of Ilegatheriinn there is the greater part of
the distal extremity of a femur and a fragment of the mandible
with two teeth. Of the Elephant there is a portion of a molar
tooth. Of the Mastodon there is a molar tooth and portions of
several others apparently of the M. andium. Of the Horse there are
two upper molar teeth, with no well-marked difference distinguish-
ing them from those of ordinarj' varieties of the Domestic Horse.
Perhaps they may pertain to one or other of the species indicated
by Prof. Owen with the names of Equiis curvidens or E. tau. Of
the Ox, the collection contains several horn-cores of different
sizes; one, double the size of that of the Domestic Ox.

The Capybara is indicated by a fragment of the left ramus of
a mandible with the first molar alveolus containing the greater
part of the tooth. The specimen conforms to the corresponding
portion of the jaw of the living Cap3bara, but indicates a con-
siderably larger and more robust animal. Considering the dif-
ference in size and age of the fossil, it was
probably a different species from the Cap}-
isara, and regarding it as such he proposes
for it the name of EydrocJwerus 7^obustiis.
The first molar tooth complete would have
the appearance represented in figure 1, and,
^- except in size, does not differ from that of

the Capybara. Comparative measurements of the fossil are as
follows : —

Depth of mandible at ^irst molar,
Length of first molar.
Fore and aft diameter,
Transverse diameter of last dental

|H3.tG^ • • • • •

Diameter of incisive alveolus, .
Dr. Lund, in his Fossil Fauna of Brazil (An. Sc. Nat., 1839,

H

H. robustius.

Capj'bara.

5fi mm.

33 mm.

55 "

36 "

25 "

17 "

13 "

9 "

20 "

10 "

276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

214) refers to remains of Hydrochoerus, which he refers to two
species, one as H. affine Capybarae, not diflferent from the living
Capybara, and another which he calls H. sidcidens^ of a size inter-
mediate to the latter and the Tapir, and having the incisors
deeply grooved in front. He remarks the former differs in having
the incisors smooth in front as in the living species, which sajung
is obscure, for in the living Capybara the incisors are con-
spicuously grooved in front.

Prof. Owen (Yoyage of the Beagle 110), speaks of a decom-
posed molar tooth of Hydrochoerus, found with remains of Mega-
therium, Toxodon, etc., by Mr. Darwin at Bahia Blanca, S. A.
He remarks that the fossil differs from the corresponding tooth
of the Capybara, in the greater relative breadth of the component
laminse.

Prof. Gervais (Rech. Mara. Fos. de I'Amerique Meredionale,
1855, 12), describes remains of Hj'drochoerus, found with those
of Megatherium, Toxodon, etc., at Tarija, Bolivia. They con-
sisted of portions of upper jaws, which are regarded as pertaining
to a species but little different in size and in the form of the teeth
from the recent Capybara. They are referred to the E. affinis
Capybarae of Dr. Lund. A specimen of a maxilla with the last
two molar teeth, figured in Plate xiii, fig. 3, of the work, indicates
a more robust animal than the living Capybara, and the last
molar tooth is composed of fourteen plates, a greater number
than exists in the recent animal. In four skulls of the latter he
found the last upper molar to have twelve plates, while in the fossil
described by Gervais there are fourteen plates. Couiparative
measurements of the latter fossil with the recent animal are as
follows : —

Capybara. Tarija fossil.

Last molar, fore and aft diameter, 33 to 34 mm. 50 mm.
Last molar, transverse diameter, 12 to 13 " 20 "
Penultimate molar, fore and aft, 9 to 10 " 14 "

He thought it probable that the remains of Hydrochoerus.^
referred by Lund and Gervais to H. affinis Capybarse, and those
mentioned by Owen, as above noted, probably also belong to the
species he had named H. robustus. He formerly described some
remains of Hydrochoerus, which were found in association with
those of 3Iegatheriu7n, etc., in the Ashley Phosphate Beds of
South Carolina (Post-pleiocene Fossils of South Carolina, 18G0,
112, pi. xxi, figs. 3-6). These consist- of teeth, which agree in
size with those of the recent Capybara, and were referred to a
probably extinct species, with the name of H. ^sopi.

The most interesting fossils of the collection are those of Toxo-
don,as being evidence of the former existence of this remarkable
animal in North America. The best preserved and best marked
specimens consist of a nearl}^ complete lower molar tooth, and
two portions of a lower incisor. These in their form and size best

I

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211

agree with the corresponding teeth of Toxodon Burmeisteri^
described and figured by Dr. Burmeister, in the Annals of the
Museum of Buenos Aires, 1869, 256, pi. xi.

The molar tooth is the penultimate of the left side. Its length,

when complete, has approxi-
mated five inches, and it mea-
sures 43 mm. fore and aft, and
18 mm. transversely at its fore
part. An outline of the tritu-
rating surface is represented in
figure 2. Enamel invests the
outer surface extending about half way round the corners in front
and behind. On the inner surface enamel invests the middle
extending furthest behind. The inner angles of the tooth are
both destitute of enamel. The outer enamel layer forms a single
inflection about the anterior third of the tooth ; the inner enamel
layer forms two inflections nearly equidistant behind the position
of the outer one ; the posterior inflection being the deepest.

The incisor, apparently the second lower of the right side, is
broken into two about the middle, and when complete has been
over six inches long. The transverse section, as seen in figure 3,

viewed from below, is triangular, with
the apex directed outward, and the
base inward or mesially. The front
surface is transversely convex, and
the back surface in the same direction
concave. The inner surface, extending
around the corners, further in front
than behind, is destitute of enamel.
The triturating surface is worn away in a slope from the outer
border inward and backward. The measurement of the section
in front and behind is 37 mm., and internally fore and aft 23 mm.

June 8.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-one persons present.

A paper entitled " On the Histology of Salpa (S. runcinata-
fusiformis)," by Dr. Chas. S, Dolley, was presented for publi-
cation.

Oa the Expansion of the Crystalline lens. — Dr. Benjamin Sharp
remarked that it is well known that accommodation in the eye,
for distance, is effected by the contraction of the ciliary muscle,
drawing on the point of attachment of the capsular ligament of
the lens, the lens widening its optical axis as soon as the tension

218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

of the ligament is released. The lens is flattened, or its optical
axis is shortened, as soon as the ciliar}^ muscle is relaxed; the
ligament being drawn upon by the elasticity of the sclera, and
perhaps it is somewhat aided by the intraocular pressure. Dr.
Sharp stated that as far as he knew the mechanism of the
" lenticular expansion " had not been described. This action is
easily seen on turning to the development of the lens. The
lens is formed by an invagination of the external ectoderm soon
closing, and as a result we have a spherical vesicle, soon enclosed
in the mouth of the secondary optic vesicle. When this has
taken place, the posterior wall of the lens-vesicle thickens, that
is, the posterior cells commence to elongate, and grow toward
the anterior wall of the vesicle, the cells of which remain,
generally speaking, of the same size, and later form the so-called
epithelium of the lens. Keeping this structure in view, we see
that when pressure is brought to bear on the lens, these elongated
cells of the posterior wall are compressed in their longitudinal
axis, so that as soon as the pressure is removed, they simply
straighten out. This will also account for the fact, that the
anterior face of the lens is the onl}^ portion that moves in the
act of accommodation for distance. In the adult lens this
structure is to a certain extent lost, and the lens is generally
described as being made up of layers concentrically arranged.
This is true, but the embryonic " impression " still remains. If
we supposed that the lens were made up of layers concentrically
arranged and so formed^ when the capsular ligament " slacked
up " the tendency of the lens w^ould be to shorten its optical
axis instead of lengthening it.

The Opal Mines of Queretaro^ Mexico. — Dr. A. E. Foote
remarked that the localit}^ referred to is particularly interesting
as being the only one in North America that is being worked
solely for the production of gems.

The opals of Mexico have been celebrated since 1820, when
Karsten and Del Rio referred to the opals of Zimapan and that
neighborhood as being in many respects equal and in some
respects superior to the Hungarian. There are quite a number
of fine localities from which considerable quantities have been
exported to Europe, so that among the lovers of the beautiful,
Mexico is as well known for its brilliant opals as for the soft and
exquisite tints of the tecali or Mexican onyx.

As in the case of diamonds from Brazil and Africa, there is a
jeweler's prejudice against the new locality, and they are con-
sidered even more unluck}^ and liable to break than those of
Hungary, I have, however, seen in the possession of Senor
Cosio magnificent specimens that had been taken out over ten
years, and were without a flaw.

The locality in Queretaro is the only one in Mexico that is
being worked to any extent now.

1886.] • NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPniA. 279

The principal mines are on the hacienda of Esperanza, where
the opal was discovered, by a servant, ten years ago. No mines
were taken up until 1870, when Di\ Jose Maria Siurob located
the mine of Santa Maria Iris. The fine specimens secured during
the next few years created so much excitement that a large
number of mines were located, most of which are now abandoned.
The district is quite extensive, having been traced over a region
about twenty leagues long by thirty-one leagues wide. At
Ciervo, fourteen leagues from Esperanza, the opal is quite
abundant, though none of the precious variety of good quality
has been found.

The mines of Esperanza can only be reached on horseback,
and the ride from Qneretaro is a very hard one. San Juan del
Rio, said to be the nearest large town where one can get accom-
modations for the night, is ten leagues to the S. E.

Leaving the Mexican Central Railroad and crossing a rich
alluvial plain, covered with fields of corn and the so-called cen-
tury plant, surrounded by fences of Gereiis giganteus, we came
to the foot hills. Here at once abundant evidences of volcanic
action were seen. Round nodules of obsidian, large masses of
agate, milk opal, and other siliceous products, Avere mixed with
the cacti on every side. The rough trail soon led into the dry
bed of a barranca, where porph3-ritic trachyte carrying tlie
common varieties of opal were quite abundant ; the trend of
these porphyritic banks was from S. E. to N. W. The color of
the rock is reddish gray. As the barranca terminated in a
narrow valley, on the mountains on each side were seen the red
dumps standing out conspicuously upon the gray surface.

Of the mines that he visited only one, the Jurado, was being
Avorked. The deposits of opal-bearing trachyte are so irregular
that the mines are soon exliausted.

The Jurado is an immense excavation about 150 feet deep
several hundred feet long, and about 100 feet wide. At the
bottom, the porphyritic rock seemed to be thoroughly impreo--
nated with hydrated silica, even occasionally being converted
into common opal.

The general appearance of the rock furnishes a very good clue
to the character of the opals that it may contain. Thus if the
rock is less red in color and close and compact in texture, fire
opals and related forms abound, while if the rock is deep red in
color or clayey and pockety, the Hungarian, harlequin, and milky
opals are much more abundant.

There is no locality of which he had ever heard where such
an extraordinary variety of opals can be found in a sino-le
matrix. The same small piece of rock will show fire opal, fire
opal showing green and blue reflections, the Hungarian, harlequin
girasol, h3'alite, milk, and almost every vai-iety. The harlequins
showing a mosaic of brilliant minute spangles of color in a
milky base, vie with the broad sheets of dazzling blue, red and

280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

green. Perhaps, like Ruskin, we should give the palm to the
"Milky opals tliat gleam and shine like sullen fires in a pallid
mist.""'

Vitality of Mollusca. — Prof. Heilprin called attention to a
remarkable case of vitality among certain members of the fauna
of the New Jersey coast. Specimens of Nassa obsoleta collected
by Miss Emma Walter, at Atlantic City just one year ago, and
i-etained dry during the entire j'ear of their accidental captivity,
were stated to be still alive, although subjected for several months
to the abnormal temperature occasioned b}'^ proximity to a heated
wall surface. This, the speaker contended, was perhaps the most
extraordinary instance of vitality known among the marine mol-
lusca, although among the terrestrial and freshwater forms,
especially among those which undergo a partial hibernation,
longer periods of semi-adaptation to imposed conditions have
been noted. Instances of such survivals were cited by the speaker
and Prof. Leidy.

June 15.
Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.
Twenty-two persons present.

June 22.

Mr. Thos. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.

Thirteen persons present.

A paper, entitled " Notes on the Paspali of Le Conte's Mono-
graph," b}^ Geo. yasey,was presented for publication.

Note on Quercus dentata. — Mr. Thomas Meehan exhibited
specimens of Quercus dentata with female flowers, from a speci-
men raised from an acorn received from Japan ten }■ ears ago. It
is of very rapid growth, being now eighteen feet high, and six
inches in circumference. So recently as the issue of the volume
of De GandolWs Prodromits, it was noted that the fruit was un-
known. Some account of these female flowers might have an
interest. Like our annual fruited oaks the flowers appear at the
end of the young growth, in pairs on peduncles about half an

^ The speaker had collected at the opal mines a number of specimens of
minute bright white rhombohedrons showing the basal planes ; these have
been examined by Prof. E. S. Dana, who pronounces them alunite. Well
crystallized alunite is not common, and he believed this is the first time its
appearance has been noted in North America.

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA.

281

inch long, the peduncles of course springing from the axils of the
upper leaves. Early in June a second growth occurs, on which

are also female flowers.
On many of the stronger
a third growth is made
before autumn. The sev-
eral growths during the
season on this tree, have
no doubt had much to do
with its great size in so
short a time. The in-
volucre is a mass of loose
scales, in the centre of
which the four blackish
ligulate stigmas are seen.
Bisecting the flower verti-
cally, the usually minute
calyx segments, immediately beneath the stigmas are represented
here by numerous brown scale-like hairs, which simulate the scales
of the involucre, and are at the apex of a slender stipe or beak
four lines long, that seems to spring from the true ovarium as if it
were a true style, and the real pistils represent a four-cleft stigma
at the apex. He did not remember any American species that
had so long a beak in this early stage of growth, though there
were some species that he had not had an opportunity of dis-
secting. From those that he had had the opportunity of exam-
ining the differences in this feature were striking, and the
character could certainly be made more useful than it had been
in enabling us to discriminate species in this very difficult genus.
A horizontal section of the ovarium shows it to be four-celled,
with each cell two-ovuled.

1. Peduncle with flowers, Quercus denfata, natural size

2. Beak of the ovarium with stigmas enlarged.

3. Beak of the ovarium with stigmas enlarged, Quer-

cus macfDcarpa.

June 29.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Eighteen persons present.

A paper entitled " Notices of Nematoid Worms," by Dr.
Joseph Leidy, was presented for publication.

Mineralogical Notes. — Composition of Stromeyerite. — Professor
George A. Kcenig placed on record the identification of Stro-
meyerite from Zacatecas, Mexico. At this locality the miners
designate the various silver minerals by their colors as black
silver, red silver, green silver, and blue silver. Under the
latter name — plata azul— several minerals are undoubtedly com-
prehended, but probably the most prevalent is the mineral
here identified as Stromeyerite. One
19

large specimen is com-

282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

posed of numerous prismatic crystals, the terminations broken
off — sitting on well-crjstallized quartz, and from several smaller
specimens it would appear that quartz is the ordinary com-
panion of Stromeyerite at Zacatecas, whilst the other silver
minerals — Proustite, Polybasite, Stephanite, Argentite — are more
commonl}^ associated with Calcite. The faces of the crystals are
rough, not admitting close measurements ; the prismatic angle is
near r20°-119°. The mineral has no cleavage. Its fracture is
uneven to flat subchonchoidal and very splintery. The lustre
is brilliantly metallic and the color iron-gray with a strong bluish
purple admixture. The color of the powder is nearly the same.
It is not sectile, but mild, and has a hardness of 3, 5.

Spec, gravity = 6*2303, made upon 1-623 grams of fragments
from several crystals. Before the blowpipe it melts verj"^ readily
to a globule, emitting sulfurdioxide, and changing to a gray
globule of silver-copper. Gives no sublimate on charcoal, nor
in open or closed tube, and dissolves in nitric acid to a blue solu-
tion, in which hydrochloric acid precipitates flocculent silver
chloride.

A preliminary anal3'^sis made with a fragment from one cr3'^stal
(02346 gram) gave the result I ; a second analysis made upon
the mixed fragments used in the determination of specific gravity
(0"5 gr.) gave the result II.

I. AgCl = 0-1615 ; Cu^S = 0-0958 ; BaSO, = 0-2837.
II. AgCl = 0-2509; Cu^S = 0 2105 ; BaSO^ = 0-5758.

I.

II.

026

51-66

50-18

32-67

33-69

16-64

15-81

From this we calculate :

Insoluble

.d.1^ • • • • • •

v/U. • • • • • •

o ••••••

100-97 99-94

Analysis having been made with twice the quantity of sub-
stance and with greater care, deserves alone to be taken as basis
for the atomic ratio. Dividing the percentages by the atomic
weights, we obtain :

Ag : Cu : S = 0-4661 : 0-5322 : 0-4975
Ag+ Cu : S = 0-9983 : 0-4975
= 2-007 : 1
Hence, 47 Ag^S + 53 Cu^S

It is seen that Ag and Cu are not exactly in the ratio 1:1,
but very near. Undoubted Strome3'erite has been described
heretofore only from two localities, Schlangenberg, in Siberia,
and Rudelstadt, in Silesia, and from the latter place only in

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 283

crystals. The analj-ses of the mineral from these places do not
give the ratio of 1 : 1 for Ag and Cu either, but a little closer than
the present locality of Zacatecas. Since Ag.^S and Cu.^S may
replace each other isomorphically in all proportions without
question, we may look upon such a ratio as Stromeyerite demands,
1 : 1 , as quite an exception, owing no doubt to peculiar condi-
tions present at the time of crystallization.

The material for this investigation was obtained from Dr. A. E.
Foote, who collected it during his recent visit to Zacatecas and
other mineral localities in Mexico.

Christian E. Metzler and Charles H. Marot were elected
members.

The following was ordered to be published : —

284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

NOTES ON THE PASPALI OF LE CONTE'S MONOGRAPH.
BY GEORGE VASEY.

Tlie monograph of U. S. species of the genus Paspalum, by
Capt. (since Major) Le Conte, was published in the Journal de
Physique, Paris, vol. 91 (1820). It contains descriptions of
eighteen species.

Through the kindness of Mr. J. H. Redfield, all the Lecontean
specimens of Faspalum in the Herbarium of the Philadelphia
Academy of Natural Sciences, have been placed in my hands for
examination, and I have given them as careful a revision as I find
possible. The result is expressed in the following notes. I have to
premise that autograph specimens of some of these species are
wanting, and of some others are mixed in the sheet with other
species, making it doubtful which was the typical plant. But in
most cases the specimens and descriptions enable us satisfactorily
to determine the species indicated.

1. Paspalum praecox, Walter.

The specimen to which Le Conte's ticket is attached is a form
of P. Iseve, Mich., not answering, however, to all the characters
given, as the sheaths and leaves are not "m7osmmt<s" and the
number of spikes is four instead of three. In the same sheet,
however, is another specimen which has hairy leaves and sheaths.
Le Conte evidently thought he was describing the plant of Walter,
but the description does not answer for the plant which is now
accepted as the P. praecox of Walter, nor does it agree with the
description either of Michaux or Elliott.

2. P. setaceum, Michx.

The ticket bearing this name is in a sheet with another bearing
the name of the next species, and the plants are all the common
erect hairy form of P. setaceum^ Michx., except one specimen,
ticketed P. ciliatifolium, from Georgia, and marked " Baldwin."
Mr. Le Conte's description answers well to the commonly ac-
cepted plant of Michaux, and he gives after his description this
reference, " P. setaceum et debile Michaux, Nova Cesarea ad
Floridam," with the mark 0 for annual, which latter point is
open to doubt.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 285

3. P. ciliatifolium, Miehx.

As above stated, the ticket for this is in the same sheet with
the preceding, and if it has not been changed, must apply to the
same plant, as the description does not at all apply to the smooth
long-leaved specimen of P. ciliatifolium from Georgia. Some of
the specimens have " spica unica," and some have " spicis 1 sive
2," and some with the usual lateral peduncled ones.

4. P. longepedunculatum, Le Conte.

The specimen to which this name is attached is commonly
referred to P. setaceum, Michx., but is a difterent form from Nos.
2 and 3, more like the southern P. ciliatifolium^ but having the
leaves shorter and narrower. There are several long peduncled
lateral spikes which are not mentioned in the description, the
name being based on the " very long peduncled common spike."
In Herb. Scribner is a specimen, collected by Mi\ Isaac Burk, on
the ballast grounds of Philadelphia, which is almost exactly like
the Le Contean one, and if P. ciliatifolium is considered a species
this might be called variety brevifolia. At the close of his de-
scription Le Conte says " P. debile, Muhl. Gram."

5. P. Floridanum, Michx.

There are two tickets with this name, one of which is attached
to a specimen of P. racemulosum, Nutt., which specimen does not
agree with Le Conte's description ; the other is attached to a
much smaller plant, very well answering the description of Le
Conte but not of Michaux. The specimen is not different appar-
ently from the one to which Le Conte's ticket " P. prsecox " is
attached, which we take to be Paspalum Iseve, Michx., the short
broad-leaved form which is perhaps the typical one.

In Herb. Torrey is a specimen of Paspalum Floridanum with a
note, "not of Le Conte, which is P. Iseve. Ell. i, p. 106, non
Michx. ? " We see from this note not only that Dr. Torrey
referred Le Conte's P. Floridanum to P. Iseve, Ell., but also that
he had doubt if Elliott's plant was the same as Michaux's.

6. P. laeve, Michx.

Le Conte's ticket with this name is loose in a sheet with the
preceding, the three specimens being apparently all alike except
as to the pubescence of the leaves. There is also in another sheet
a specimen with the ticket attached, which specimen is the form

286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

of P. laeve, with long, smooth leaves, not as No. 6 is described
with " foliis latiusculis, brevibus."

7. P. difForme, Le Conte.

The name as printed is " cliflbrme," evidently a tj^pographical
error. The specimen is intermediate between P. laeve and P.
Floridanum, and different from either. Le Conte says, " Refert
P. Floridanum sed spicis erectis, glumisque majoribus facile dis-
tinguitur." This comparison was evidently made with his No. 5,
which was not the P. Floridanum, Mx. He also refers Paspalum
No. 7 of Muhlenberg's Gram, to this plant, but the description is
too obscure to be of any value. We have specimens in the II. S.
Herbarium from N. C, and from Florida, which are apparently
the same as Le Conte's plant. They have been referred to P.
Floridanum, but are clearly different in the smaller size of the
plant, in the shorter spikes, and in the much shorter leaves. We
have the same plant, also, from Dr. Charles Mohr, Mobile, Ala.,
who noted that it differed from the P. Floridanum. He says P.
Floridanum blooms from the middle of June to the middle of
July, while the other kind begins to flower six or eight weeks
later. Altogether it seems that for these specimens Le Conte's
name should be recognized and added to our list.

8. P. undulosum, Le Conte.

The specimen over this name is apparently a form of P. laeve,
Michx., with wider and smoother leaves, more numerous and
shorter spikes than in the common form. I have seen no other
specimens quite matching it, and it may very well be called P.
laeve, variety undulosum. The undulate margin of the leaves is
also shared by other species. Schultes subsequently published
this as P. Leconteanum (Mant. 2, 168), probably because Le
Conte's name was too much like P. undulatum, Poir.

9. P. latifolium, Le Conte.

The specimen with this name looks like a very exuberant P.
ciliatifolium, with equally small spikelets, but in three or four
series. The leaves are about an inch wide, and eight to ten
inches long. I have seen no other such specimens, but the
general appearance and habit is that of P. ciliatifolium, of which
it is probably a luxuriant form.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287

10. P. virgatum, Walt.

The ticket bearing this name is loose in a s]\eet which contains
two specimens of P. plicatulum, Michx., and two specimens of
P. praecox, Walt., one of which is ticketed, " Herb. Schw., P. pli-
catulum, Georgia, Hermann." The description seems to refer to
what we call P. praecox, Walt., " spicis 5-6, alternis, erectis,
glumis biseriatis, rachi latiuscula, non flexuosa, dentibus bifloris."
Le Conte apparently mistook his No. 1 for P. praecox, Walt., and
this for P. virgatum, Walt. The true P. virgatum, Walt., is prob-
ably P. purpurascens, Ell. Le Conte adds to his description this
note, " Calicis valvulse omnium paspalorum, cuve semina matures-
cent juxta margines transversse plicatas fiunt." If this means that
the glumes of all Paspalums when mature have transverse plica-
tions such as mark the P. plicatulum, Michx., it is a great error.

11. P. angustifolium, Le Conte.

The specimen bearing this name is evidently one of the forms
commonly called P. laeve, Michx., having long, narrow and smooth
leaves, and three slender spikes three to four inches long. It is
quite different from No. 5, which represents a form with much
shorter and wider leaves, and which is possibly the typical plant,
as Michaux says " foliis breviusculis." No subsequent writer
except Elliott, however, quotes these words of Michaux. Gray says
" the pretty large and long leaves ;" Chapman says " leaves and
sheaths smooth or the latter hairy ;" Elliott quotes Michaux's
words, " leaves short," but does not recognize the plant. It is,
therefore, difficult to say precisely what was Michaux's type, and
some botanists will prefer to consider this species of Le Conte as
a distinct one. Otherwise, it may be distinguished as variety
angustifolium.

12. P. gracile, Le Conte.

The two specimens bearing this name, one ticket marked " Pas-
palum gracile mihi, P. laeve, Schweinitz," the other " Paspalum
tenue, Kth., P. gracile, Le Conte, 'Durand,'" are clearly what
is commonly understood as P. plicatulum, Michx., or P. undula-
tum, Poir. Kunth published P. tenue, evidently based either on
Le Conte's specimens or on the description to which he refers. If
Kunth saw the specimens, and they were the same as these in the
Herb. Acad. Phil., it is not easy to understand how he should
make a new species of them, unless, as may be the fact, Michaux's
plant is the P. purpurascens, Elliott, in which case indeed another

288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

name would be needed for Le Conte's plant, and as the name P,
gracile had been earlier appropriated by Rudge for a S. American
plant, Kuuth distinguished this by the name of P. tenue. An
inspection of the Le Contean specimens in the Herb. Mus. Paris
•will probably settle this question. Kunth, however, refers
Michaux's P. plicatulum not only to P. pitrpurascens, Ell., but
also to P. undulatuvi, Poir, as if Michaux had confused two
species, which is very likely to be the case. On the other hand,
if Kunth saw Le Conte's specimens, and they were like these of
the Herb. Acad. Phila., he should have recognized them as the
P. undulatum, Poir.

Le Conte, at the end of his description of this species, sa3^s,
" Muhlenberg Gram, sub Paspalo,No. 8," with the description of
which Le Conte's does not agree. Furthermore, there is in Herb.
Torrey a specimen of Paspalum setaceum, Michx., which is also
referred to '' Pasp. No. 8, Muhl. Gram.," and which agrees suffi-
ciently well with the description.

i;5. P. altissimum, Le Conte.

The single specimen to which this name is attached is evidently
what is commonly called P. Floridanum, Michx., for which,
according to Kunth, the earlier name of P. macrospermum^
Flugge, must be adopted. Le Conte's specimen has only two
spikes, although his description says " spicis 4-5." The species,
however, or some forms of it, often have 4 to 5 spikes. One
form has pubescent leaves or sheathes, and one form is quite
glabrous. Le Conte mistook his No. 5 for P. Floridanum^ Michx.

11. P. confertum, Le Conte.

The specimen to which this name is attached is evidently P.
purpurascens^ Ell. Mr. Durand recognized this and attached a
ticket marked " resembling P. purpurascens, and I believe iden-
tical, E. D." On the same sheet is another specimen of the same
species, ticketed "P. putyurascens, Ell., Georgia, Dr. Baldwin."
Kunth gives both P. purpurascens, Ell., and P. confertum,
Le Conte, as if they were distinct plants. Probably he did not
see Le Conte's specimens.

15. P. distichum, Linn.

I find no specimens with a ticket in Le Conte's writing, but
there are in a sheet marked P. distichum, specimens noted as
coming from Le Conte, and others, Georgia, Baldwin. The

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289

description of Le Coute seems to refer to P. distichum, Linn.,
but at the end he gives, as a synonym, Digitaria paspalodes,
Michx,, which is understood b}^ Elliott and by Dr. Chapman as
appl3'ing to Paspaluvi Digitaria, Poir, which seems not to have
been known to Le Conte, unless he agreed with Elliott in referring
it to the genus Milium^ in which case it would not appear in a
revision of Paspalum.

16. p. tristachyum, Le Conte.

The specimen bearing this name is apparently a three-spiked
form of P. vaginatum, Swz. The description also conforms to
that species, and Mr. Le Conte adds the remark, " Refert prius
sed primo obtuto facile distinguitur, foliis angustis glaberrimus.
Habitat in subsalsis, Georgia."

Mr. Bentham considers P. vaginatum, Swz., as sj'non^'mous with
P. distichum, Linn., but the two are well defined by Le Conte,
and I think are clearly distinct, although with poor or imperfect
specimens it is not always easy to discriminate. Although this
species commonly has but two spikes, it sometimes occurs with
three.

17. P. membranaceum, W;ilt.

I find no specimen of this species with Le Conte's ticket, but
from the description, and the reference to P. vaginatum, Ell., it
is pretty clearly the P. Walterianum, Schultes.

18. P. natans, Le Conte.

I find no specimen with Le Conte's ticket, but from the descrip-
tion and reference to P. mucronatum, MuhL, and the additional
notes, it can hardly be doubted that this is the P.Jiuitans, Walt.
(Ceresia Jiuitans, Ell,).

Mr. Le Conte undoubtedly observed and collected many of the
species of Paspalum in Georgia, where he spent many 3'ears of
his early life ; he was also acquainted with Baldwin and Elliott.
The latter had already published the earlier numbers of his
" Sketch of the Botany of S. Carolina" before the appearance of
Le Conte's Monograph, and Elliott is referred to in Le Conte's
Paspalum, No. 17. Reference is several times made to Pursh
and Muhlenberg, whose works had been published but a short
time. Michaux described seven species of Paspalum, all of
which are referred to by Le Conte. Muhlenberg describes ten
species, including two to which he gave numbers without specific

290 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

names, and to these Le Conte makes reference, No. *l under his
P. diforme, and No. 8 under his P. gracile, but a comparison of
the descriptions does not afford much satisfaction. Elliott
described eleven species of Paspalum, or thirteen, if we include
his Milium paspalodes and Ceresia fluitans. The monograph of
Le Conte enumerates eighteen species, of which four or five had
not been previously described and m^y be counted new species
or varieties. All these are indigenous to the Atlantic States ;
the additional ones of the Southwest had not, probably, been
collected at the time of this monograph.

1886.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 291

July 6.
Mr. UsELMA C. Smith in the chair.
Seven persons present.

July 13.
Mr. Thos. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Ten persons present.

On Torsion in the Hollyhock, with some observations on cross-
fertilization. — Mr. Meehan observed that the torsion of the
opening flowers of the hollyhock was towards the sun ; but after
the expanded flower had become fertilized, and the flower closed
for fading, the torsion was in the contrary direction. The same
thing occurred in Hibiscus rosa-sinensis. He had no opportunity
to this date to note the facts in other Malvaceae.^ As a general
rule the spiral revolutions of plants are uniform through every
stage of growth, at least this is the general teaching of botanists.
Prof. Goodale notes (" Bot. Text Book," vol. ii, p. 407), that in
the Tropics, some plants twine indifferently from right to left.
If we had given thought to the manner in which secund inflores-
cence is arranged, we might have seen that the torsion is anything
but uniform throughout the same plant, for a secund raceme
could only be formed by the twisting of each succeeding flower
in an opposite direction. This alternation of convolution is
indeed necessarj' in a branch with a horizontal direction in order
that each flower along the spiral should assume an erect attitude.
When a horizontal or geotropic branch assumed an upright posi-
tion, the inflorescence was necessarily secund. One might almost
infer that secund inflorescence had its origin in geotropic plants
which had retained the power of alternate torsion after assuming
the erect form. So little is known of the laws operating in
connection with the turning habits of plants and flowers, that
every fact is of value, and this one relating to the reversal of the
direction in these two malvaceous plants, and probably in others
of the same order, must be worth placing on record.

Mr. Meehan farther noted that the hollyhock, notwithstanding
its gaudy coloring and general attractions to insects, is a self-
fertilizer, and that insects I'ather aided than otherwise in this

^ The author has since noted that in Palava flexuosa the flower twists
also in the direction of the sun, and in the contrary direction when fading,
but in Gallirhcea involucrata the flower is twisted against the sun, when
fading as when opening.

292 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

self-fertilization. The flower is strongly proterandrous. The
stamens are mature and shed their pollen co-incident with the
expansion of the corolla. The fasciculus of pistils at this time,
have not reached half their growth, and is completely covered
hy the stamens, which form a dense mass in the centre of the
flower. During the day, and the one succeeding, humble and
honey bees make this crown of stamens their resting-place.
During these two days the pistils have not yet thrust their
stigmas above the stamens that crown them. If now we cut a
flower through longitudinally, we shall find that a very large
quantity of pollen has fallen down within the bundle of pistils —
this gathering of pollen being evidently aided by the feet of
insects that made a landing-place of the staminal crown. Up
to this time, however, the pistils not having come to maturity,
the pollen thrust in among them would have no physiological
significance. But on the morning of the third day, the pistils
protrude and are in receptive condition, and they bring up with
them large quantities of pollen, so completely covering the
surface of each pistil that it would seem almost impossible for
any grains of foreign pollen to find any lodgment for effective
use ; and though a grain of foreign pollen should get an oppor-
tunity to perform its function, it must be evident that the
flower's own pollen has the earliest opportunities for usefulness,
and must in almost every case be the fertilizing agent. An
interesting note may be here recorded in reference to the
power of own-pollen over fertilit}-. Mr. Darwin in his " Cross-
and Self-Fertilization," page 141, referring to his single experi-
ment among malvaceous plants. Hibiscus Africanus^ found a
larger number of cx'ossed flowers produced capsules than among
the self-fertilizing ones ; but in the case of these evidently self-
fertilized flowers, no one seemed to fail in producing seed —
every pistil, indeed, producing a perfectly fertile carpel. At the
end of the third day the flowers closed, twisting in the opposite
direction, as already noted.

On Projection of Pollen in the Flowers of Indigof era. — Exhib-
iting some flowers of Indigofera Dosua, Mr. Meeiian remarked
that the peculiar bending back of the carina in the flowers
of Indigofera has been long known. Referring to the whole
genus, Don, in the General History of Dichlamydeous Plants,
published in 1837, says, " Keel furnished with a subulate spur on
both sides, at length usually bending back elastically." In 1863
Decandolle and Treviranus, in Botanische Zeitung, page 3, refer
to this bending back of the keel and say it is not an elastic
motion, but simply a falling down on the full development of the
flower ; and the latter remarks, as quoted by Henslow, that " all
these movements occur in the natural development of the parts,
and only after self-fecundation takes place." Dr. Hildebrand, in
the same magazine for 1866, seems to admit that finally the keel

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293

will fall dow from sheer maturity, but thinks insects in the search
for honey may anticipate this natural development. The Rev.
Geo. Henslow, in the ix vol. (1868) of the Journal of the Lin-
nsean Society^ pfige 357, commenting on these statements, suggests
that though self-impregnation ma}^ be possible, the jerkings of the
stamens when the carina falls away, causes the pollen to scatter
over the insects, which then carry the pollen to other flowers. In
the X vol. (1869), p. 468, he notes that when the carina is liberated
it falls back with a jerk, as noted by Don, and that the stamens
fly up and closely press the vexillum. But no opportunity oc-
curred to him of observing what insects effected this process
which he accomplished artificially. In Mr. Meehan's grounds the
East Indian Indigofera Dosiia is a hardy shrub, and for the past
two years, he said, he had watched the behavior of the flowers,
and the insects that visited them. The carina is arched and
hooded, and extends so far over the apex of the stigma, against
which it presses, that both the stigma and column of stamens are
borne down to a right angle with the vexillum. The effort of the
stamens and pistil to rise, and of the carina to recurve, keeps
these portions in an exactly horizontal position. The anthers
burst while thus enclosed in the carina, but the pollen does not
escape, nor does it reach the stigma, for the pistil extends beyond
the anthers, and its apex is pressed strongly against tlie carina,
and no pollen can possibly reach the apex. The two wings of
the flower are caught in the subulate spurs, and are borne down
to the horizontal plane with the carina, and together form a level
platform on which insects in search of honey alight. Humble-
bees, hone3''-bees, and numerous species of sand wasps visit the
flowers, but in no instance was an insect's visit found to be effectual
in liberating the stamens and pistil from the gi'asp of the carina.
This was only accomplished by slitting the upper portion of the
carina with a penknife. Then the divided carina would instan-
taneously fall back, and the stamens and pistil jerk upwards,
scattering a little cloud of pollen in every direction. In some
cases pollen so scattered would light on a stigma, but in many
cases the pollen would be so completely projected that none
could be ti'aced to the stigma, and these probably received
pollen from the upper flowers where they in turn projected their
pollen. Possibly many were by this time too mature to profit by
the pollen they received, at any rate only a very small pro-
portion of the flowers matured seed vessels. In the older
flowers, the carina evidently became separated from the stamens
and pistil only when withering away.

Mr. Meehan remai'ked in conclusion, that, as noted by authors
quoted, so far as his observations in this part of the world
(Philadelphia) with this single species goes, the behavior of the
flowers were neither favorable to self-fertilization nor cross-
fertilization. If insects had pollen scattered on them, there is
no way by which it could be communicated to the pistils of

294 PROCEEDINGS OF tHE ACADEMY OP [1886.

other flowers. The stamens were not liberated naturally till the
flower had lost all attractions for insects, and the act of
liberating and scattering the pollen gave the pistil its first chance
for pollinization. The great probability is that in the majoiity of
instances the flowers are self-fertilized.

On rarallelism in Distinct Lines of Evolution. — Exhibiting
some oak and chestnut leaves, Mr. Meehan remarked that the
fact and the theory of evolution are distinct lines of thought.
There seems no difficulty about the fact. That one form may
and has been born of a pre-existing, and often very distinct form,
cannot be disputed. What induces this change is another matter.
It is here that science desires more light. A popular belief is
that change of circumstances leads to change of form. This
theory is embodied under the word " environment." In other
words, plants, in their changes, are the " creatures of circum-
stances." In some sense .this must be true. A seed will not sprout
unless there be a necessary " environment " of heat and moisture,
but this is not the sense in which " environment," as the term is
here used, is generally'- understood. If one were to say that under
a torrid temperature, endured for ages, a light-skinned, fair-haired
Caucasian, might have descendents that were like woolly-headed,
dark-skinned negroes, it would come nearer the general understand-
ing of the term " environment," than some would limit it to. The
speaker's observations and studies had led him to what might,
perhaps, be regarded as the minority view. Circumstances —
" environment " — seemed to have no further influence than to
incite to action a change already ripe for development. In a
paper read before the Amet'ican Association for the Advancement
of Science, 1874 (See Proceedings Hartford Meeting, p. 6, Natural
History), he presented a number of facts to show that "change
by gradual modification is not the universal law." New forms
"jumped " into existence, and frequently these new forms were
diverse from each other, under precisel}^ the same " environment "
so far as human knowledge had j-et reached, as had been the sur-
rounding circumstances of the parent form. Since that time he
had contributed numerous observations to the Proceedings of the
Academy and elsewhere, confirming these views.

To-night he would offer to the Academy some thoughts in a
new line, but confirmatory of the same views. He exhibited some
different forms of the American Quercus Prinus — the chestnut
oaks, and a dwarf species from China, Quercus Chinensis of
Bunge. Also some specimens of various forms of Castanea Vesca
— the chestnut, and of Castanea pumila, 3Ix., the chinquapin. It
would be conceded by any evolutionist conversant with plant
forms, that the chestnut and the oak are not remotely descended
from the same parent. We may suppose, for the sake of argument,
that " use or disuse," or some other item in the general catalogue
of " environment " had affected some portion of the structure of
the original parent, and resulted in a slight modification, leading

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 295

towards an ultimate oak or a chestnut, as the case may have been.
But when we take the subsequent changes — the evolution of the
species of oak, and the species of chestnut, each class from its
primordial oak or chestnut, and observe the same parallel lines
of change in each, it is difficult to conceive how this exact paral-
lelism could have come about except under a fixed law of change,
which provides that when changes occur they shall be in strict
accordance with a prior plan by which nature herself is bound —
laws by which, if we could only ascertain them, we could ourselves
foresee and define the forms that are yet to be a thousand years
beyond our time, and which no mere accidents of environment
could alter or delay.

The oaks exhibited, though when we have the fruit we can see
they are oaks, have the foliage so like the chestnut that it is
difficult to determine them. The dwarf species from China is so
nearly like a chestnut, that only by the absence of the setaceous
teeth that edge the chestnut leaf, can we see any difference. But
the leaves are of a thicker texture than the other chestnut oaks —
the serratures are finer and closer together, and the undersurface
of the leaf is cinereous, while the chestnut oaks exhibited in com-
parison are of the same tint on both sides.

Now we take the chestnuts. We have the larger growing
species as we have the larger growing chestnut oaks — the leaves
are light green on both sides, and vary in the toothing, just as
the chestnut oaks do — variation in each class is exactly parallel.
The parallelism extends to the formation of a dwarf species. We
have a dwarf chestnut, Castanea pumila,]nst as we have a dwarf
chestnut oak, Quercus chinensis, and the parallelism extends to
the sub-characters, for the dwarf chestnut, the chinquapin, has
leaves of a thicker texture, the serratures are finer, and the under-
surface of the leaf is cinereous, while the chestnuts exhibited are
of the same tint on both sides.

Mr. Meehan finally remarked that the facts seemed to him
stronger arguments in favor of evolution than many usually
offered. That the changes in two very distinct genera that we
only assumed to be syngenital, should be so nearly of a parallel
character in each, is proof they were carrying out a plan originally
common to both. While the fact that these original provisions,
as we must regard them, for these special forms have been so
faithfully carried out — the one on the American continent, the
other in Eastern Asia — despite the varying conditions of mere
" environment," shows how light a factor external circumstances
are in the evolution of forms.

July 20.

Mr. Thomas Meehan, Yice-President, in the chair.
Thirteen persons present.

296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

July 27.

Dr. J. Bernard Brinton in the chair.

Thirteen persons present.

A paper entitled " Histor}- and Biology- of Pear Blight," by J.
C. Arthur, was presented for publication.

August 3.
Mr. Thos. Meehan. Yice-President, in the Chair.
Eleven persons present.

Oriskany Sandstone in Lycoming Co., Pa.— Mr. Lewis Wool-
man remarked that, accompanied by a resident of Lycoming Co.,
Pa., he had recently made a tour through that and the adjoining
county of Sullivan', with an eye to the geological features of the
resion, using as a guide the most recent publications of the
Second Survey. In" Hand Atlas X, the Oriskany formation is
omitted from the map of Lycoming County, while the text speaks
of it as " being absent."' It is also omitted from the larger map
accompanying'the Second Survey. He was, therefore, surprised to
find on the roadside, at the village of Pennsville. Mimcy Town-
ship, blocks of the sandstone, containing its characteristic fossils.

Further examination resulted in finding a belt of this forma-
tion ; not. however, making the bold, elevated ridge it so often
does elsewhere in the State, but existing as a prominence upon
the lower slope of the hill that rises from the north side of the
village, the ascent beyond being over the lower members of the
Hamilton group. Time at command being limited, the formation
was traced only about a mile, but without finding it to disappear.
The Friends' meeting house at one end of the village, and the
schoolhouse at the other end, both stand upon this ridge. The
former has its comers pointed with this sandstone, from an old
quarry in sight, while all around the latter are strewn weather-
worn fragments, beautifully exhibiting the fossils. Several of the
houses and barns intermediate are also situated upon this forma-
tion, and for some of these it has furnished building material.

The location of the belt is within the area shown on the maps
as Hamilton, and a few hundred feet from the division there
marked as separating that group from the Lower Helderberg.
Along the lawn leading to the country residence of William
EUicott, the rock was seen in place, pointing upward over the
anticlinal forming Bald Eagle Mountain. A letter from his com-
panion states that he has since found this rock upon the other
side of the mountain, in Clinton township.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29t

Upon careful comparison of fossils in fragments brought home,
the following were identified as exactly agreeing with those
figured by Hall, from the Oriskany of New York, viz. : Spirifer
arenosus, Spirifer arrectus and Bensselaeria ovoides.

August 10.
Mr. Tiios. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.

Notes on Lilium tigrinum, Gaul. — Mr. Meehan remarked that
on the Tth of August he was attracted by the large number of
honey bees (Italian) among the flowers of Lilium tigrinum.
There were hundreds of flowers, and every flower had from one
to six bees in them. They were not coming and going with the
usual expedition of honey-seeking or pollen-collecting workers,
but were taking things leisurely, as when feasting on a ripe peach,
or some other soft, sweet, and spongy fruit. It was found that
they were feeding or sucking the juices from the papillae that
form a ridge at the base of each division of the perianth. These
papillje are very numerous, minute and transparent, under a lens
resembling ice crystals. They are formed in two lines, but ap-
proximate till they resemble a single gray line, extending from
the base upwards for an inch in the centre of the segment.
Several sj^ecies of butterflies — notably some large Papilios, and
some smaller Eudasmias, were sharing the repast with the bees.
An examination showed that the papillse had been pretty well
" chewed " up — the term " chewing " being used notwithstanding
the seeming impossibility from the structure of the bee's mouth,
that it 'can chew in the ordinary acceptatioii of the term. A
quantity of this papillose matter, gathered together on the point
of a penknife, did not indicate any sweetness, or anything beyond
moisture that would be popularly supposed to prove attractive
to bees. Inside a flower just ready to expand, a considerable
amount of moisture is excreted from the surface of the perianth.
In this liquid no sweetness, but some slight astringency could be
detected. Not even at the base, where in flowers nectar is usu-
ally secreted, could any sweetness be detected. It has been
broadly stated that color and fragrance are of use to flowers only
as they may serve to attract insects for purposes of poUinization ;
and that gaudy flowers have no fragrance. But some gaudy lilies
are very sweet, and here we have a gaudy flowered species that
seems to have nothing in the way of sweets after an insect has
been attracted. Though feasting on the cellular matter, the bees
in no way assist in pollination. It is difficult to imagine what
relation the bees can have to any good economy in plant life in
this instance. The plant produces no fruit in this part of the
20

298 PROCEEDINaS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

world ; but this is evidently from some failure of nutrition, for
when it is served with its own pollen, or the pollen of other plants
or other species, it is alike barren.

At pages 412, 413 in the Proceedings of the Academy for IStS,
he had called attention to the fact that in many species of lily,
where the flower is cernuous, the point of bending straightened
after fertilization; and the ovarium, pendulous in flower, became
erect. There are some in which the flowers are always erect, and
they seem to be just as successful in their several economies, as
those that are at first cernuous, and afterward erect. At that
time, with this reflection, it seemed to him reasonable to suppose
that the bending down of the flowers in some species was not a
matter of choice with the flower — if one might metaphorically use
this expression — but was the result of a curving of the stem made
for some other reason in plant economy than for good to the
flower or its special objects alone. But here were some specimens
of Lilium tigrinum that had blown over when young. The
pedicles from these stems went straight down towards the earth
and bore the expanded flower without the slightest curve. The
flowers on the erect stems are all on recurved pedicels. Though
we are still without light as to what advantage the recurved forms
gain over the erect ones, this little incident teaches us, at least,
that it is the flower that demands the curve, and not a case of a
curve demanding a pendulous flower.

Fishing Lines and Ligatures from the Silk-glands of Lepi-
dopterous Larvae. — A communication was received from Miss
Adele M. Fielde, stating that in the locality from which she
wrote, Swatow, China, the silk-glands are taken from the larvjie
of several species of large lepidopterous insects just before tiiey
enter the pupa stage, and are made into fishing lines. At this
period in the life-history of the insect, the glands are full of the
viscid white substance from which the cocoon is to be spun. The
silk-glands of a species of Atlas were found to be one yard long,
a tenth of an inch in diameter at the free, posterior end, and a
hundredth of an inch in diameter at its anterior end. The two
glands extend nearly the whole length of the body cavity, on
either side of the alimentary canal, lying in loops of varying
length, and uniting in a single duct under the mouth, as in the
silk-worm, Bomhyx mori. The Cliinese make a transverse cut
across the back of the caterpillar, take hold of one of the loops
of the silk-gland, draw it out entire, drop it in vinegar to take
off its external coat, then stretch it to double or treble its
original length, and dry it. A durable filament is thus formed,
strong as catgut, and much cheaper. The tenacit}' of the fila-
ment is constantly restored by soaking it for a few minutes in
warm rice-water, that is, in the water in whicli rice has been
boiled for food. The fishermen say that when thus prepared a

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299

line will hold the largest fish taken on the coast. It was found,
however, that a single filament would not sustain more than
four and a half pounds. Dr. Causland, in charge of the Hospital
in the English Presbyterian Mission at Swatow, had successfully
used these filaments for tying arteries in surgical operations.
It was suggested that the cocoon-spinning lepidoptera of the
United States might furnish in their silk-glands, for the joining
of wounds, a thread which would have all the virtues of spun
silk, without its objectionable traits. Silk-worms have been
successfully reared in the neighborhood of Swatow, on lettuce,
the silk from such caterpillars being coarser than that from
those fed on mulberry leaves.

August It.
Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.
Twelve persons present.

On the Effect of Scorpion Stings. — The following communica-
tion was read from Mr. Edw. H. Thompson, United States Consul
at Merida, Province of Yucatan : —

" I am advised of an interesting letter from Dr. Gonzalez, of
Durango, read by Dr. Leidy before the Academy, in which men-
tion was made of the extremely venomous character of the
Mexican Scorpion.

" I would state that while many cases of scorpion stings have
occurred within the range of my personal observation, I have yet
to record one that has even approached a fatal termination.
During the month of January last, while exploring some of the
ruined cities of the interior, two of my men, native Mayas, were
stung by scorpions dislodged from the ruined walls, one receiving
a sting upon his shoulder, while the other was punctured directly
upon his naked back, and very close to the spine.

" The man receiving the sting upon his shoulder was soon
relieved by a few applications of strong ammonia. The other
complained for some time of a numbness almost approaching
paralysis. This feeling, however, was not sufficient to prevent
him from keeping upon his horse. After I had applied the
ammonia, and when at the end of a hard day's ride we dismounted,
he had practically recovered.

" Of thirteen cases noted by me within a short while, but two
were of a serious nature. One was the case of my native boy,
and the other was that of a young Englishman who, stung upon
the thumb, remained in an almost paralyzed state for several
hours, eventually recovering. It may be well to state, in relation

300 rROCEEDINQS OF TIIE ACADEMY OP [1886.

to this case, that the 3"0ung man had been in the country but a short
while, and was at the time exhibiting the phj^sical effects of such
a radical change of climate.

" In making the above statements I do not wish it to be under-
stood that I impugn the truth of the statements of Dr. Gonzalez.
Durango and Yucatan are two States in the Mexican Republic
widely separate, and circumstances governing as facts in the one
may not so govern in the other."

Tlie Form of the Pupil in Snakes. — Mr. Lockington stated
that amongst the colubriform snakes, the Boidje, a familj^ which
has its headquarters in South America, and has representatives
in the West of this country, have elliptical vertical pupils, like
those of rattlesnakes. At least, this is the case with Boa con-
strictor^ B. eqiies, Eunectes muriniis (the anaconda), Xijjhosoma
caninum, and Xomolochirus multisectus. The Acrochordidse, or
wart-snakes of eastern Asia, have circular pupils. The ven-
omous snakes with fixed fangs are usualh' classed in three
families : Elapidse, Naiidse, or cobras, and Hydrophidse, or sea-
snakes. Some herpetologists unite the first two families. As
far as the shape of the pupil goes, they seem to agree. Naja
tripudians, the cobra, Naja haje, the African asp, Pseudechis
porphyriacus, Sipedon haemachates, have circular pupils, as well
as the species of Bungarus and Elaps. The sea-snakes, so far as
examined, have circular pupils. This is the case with the com-
mon and well-known Pelamys bicolor, with Hydrophis palami-
doides, H. gracilis, H. nigrocinctus, Disteira dumerilii, and Pla-
turus fasciatus.

Among the snakes with movable fangs, the Crotalidse (rattle-
snakes), and among the Yiperidse, examples of the genera Clothe^
Pelias, Vipera and Cerastes, have elliptical pupils, but Causus
rhombeatus (Causidse) has rounded ones. It is thus evident that
the form of the pupil has no relation to the venomous or non-
venomous character of the snake.

August 24.
Mr. Thos. Meehan, Yice-President, in the chair.

Nine persons present.

A paper entitled " On the Fertilization of Cassia Marylandica,"
by Thomas Meehan, was presented for publication.

The death of Wm. R. Cruice, M. D., a member, August 15,
1886, was announced.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 30l

August 31.
The President, Dr. Jos. Leidy, in tlie chair.

Fifteen persons present.

The death of Roger Sherman, a member, was announced.
C. L. Kilburn was elected a member.
The following were ordered to be printed :

302 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

REVERSE VISION.
BY CHARLES MORRIS.

The fact that we perceive objects in their correct position,
while their impression upon the retina is a reversed one, forms a
problem which has given rise to much speculation, often unprofit-
ably metaphysical, in the effort to explain it. None of these
theories of the older writers now remain current. More modern
authors give explanations which are little more satisfactory.
Giraud Teulon says : " The retina sees or localizes objects where
they are; that is what we call ' erect;' if the picture be reversed
it is a mere matter of geometry." Helmholtz says: "Our
natural consciousness is completely ignorant even of the exist-
ence of the retina and of the formation of images ; how should
it know anything of the position of images formed upon it ? "
It cannot be claimed that these remarks are explanations, and we
may proceed to the more elaborate theory advanced by LeConte,
in his work on " Sight." He remarks that " the retinal image
impresses the retina in a definite way. This impression is then
conveyed by the optic nerve to the brain, and determines changes
there. . . . And then the brain or the mind refers or projects
the impression outward into space as an external image, the sign
or facsimile of an object producing it." He proceeds: "The
law may be thus stated : When the rays from any radiant strike
the retina, the impression is referred back along the ray line
{central ray of the pencil) into space, and therefore to its proper
placed

It cannot be said that his arguments are suflSicient to establish
this theory. That we mentally refer an impression to the nerve
extremity that received it is unquestionable, and where a limb
has been lost, impressions seem to be referred to the location of
the original nerve termination. But this is very probably a
result of long-continued hereditary influences, through which
each nerve becomes adapted to give a mental picture of the loca-
tion of its impressions, and continues to do so even if touched
at some intermediate point. In the case of sight, no localized
reference to the nerve extremity exists. In this sense the source
of our impression seems external to the body. And yet this is
in all probability equally a result of hereditary accommodation.

1886,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303

What we really perceive is the impression produced upon the
retina, which is transmitted by the optic nerve to the brain. The
theory that the brain o.r mind, by some secondary action, physically
refers this sensation back again to the nerve extremities, or even
projects it beyond them into space, along reversed lines, has no
warrant in known physiological facts. Far more probably the
seeming projection is a mental action only. Natural selection
may have adapted each nerve to yield a sense of the distance
and direction of its impressions and, therefore, of their external
location. An animal destitute of such sense would be unable to
estimate the exact point of a threatened danger, and only those
capable of localizing their sense impressions could survive. Yet
if the brain estimates the distance from which any sensation
comes only through conditions hereditarily existing in the trans-
mitting nerve, the idea of referred sensations, with all theories
based upon it, falls to the ground. The reference of a pain to
the natural location of an amputated foot would form a constituent
portion of the impression conveyed to the brain by the nerve
which formerly passed to that foot. In like manner the optic
nerve may, among its hereditaril3'-gained powers, have that of
refei'ring its impressions to a point beyond the nerve extremity —
or in external space, the locality from which danger from visible
objects comes. But this would have no bearing upon the ques-
tion of the character of its impression, the retinal image as a
whole being mentally transferred to an external region, but in no
sense changed in character. The question seems to be solely one
of a certain power or strength possessed by the nerves, through
which each of them indicates that location of its impressions best
adapted to the efficiency of protective activity. In the case of
sight this distance would necessarily be beyond the actual posi-
tion of the retina, and external to the body. The same rule
holds good in the case of sound. In every case it is very prob-
ably a resultant of long-continued natural selection.

We do not actually see objects. We simply perceive the
images of them which are impressed upon the retina. This
stands as a picture-plane between our mind and the universe.
We perceive the impressions with which it is affected — incor-
rectly, if this affection is in any sense an incorrect one. But the
conception gained from these impressions is subject to mental
accommodations, the result of experience and of hereditary influ-

304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

ences ; and wc may, therefore, gain a correct idea from au impres-
sion -which is physically incorrect.

Though the retinal image seems to be referred by the optic nerve
to a position external to the eye, j^et it is certainly not exactly
located by the sense of sight, and the mental accommodations
above mentioned are the locating influences. It is said that to a
blind man suddenly restored to sight, the surrounding objects
seem like the details of a picture, and within easy reach. He
appears to see the retinal picture, somewhat projected, but with
no correction except that the reversal of the image does not
appear. Our perception of roundness or solidity is, then, a
result of experience. This is followed by a knowledge of rela-
tive distance, comparative location being one of the most appar-
ent relations between objects. But the actual distance of objects
which are somewhat removed from the body is learned by experi-
ence, aided by several of the senses. Of more distant objects,
we seldom properly estimate the actual distance. All this, how-
ever, is a result of the action of the reasoning powers, guided by
the senses. The evidence of the blind man assures us that what
we actually see is the retinal image, somewhat projected into
space, and differing from an ordinary picture mainly in that it is
perfect in its lights and shades, and thus forcibly tends to pro-
duce that illusion of solidity which is the effect sought in all
pictures. The only correction is that of the reversal of the
image. This correction, therefore, seems a natural one, inherent
in the sense or the mind.

In attempting an explanation of this phenomenon, in view of
the considerations above taken, the question may be asked : In
what way can the mind discover that there is anything incorrect
in the direction of the retinal image? To do so it must have
some standard of direction with which the impressions upon
the retina can be compared, and their agreement or disagree-
ment observed. If there be any such standard, it must exist in
one of three locations : on the retina itself, in external nature, or
in the mind. If on the retina, it could only be some line, or
group of lines, apparent to sight, and serving as directive guides
with which to compare retinal impressions. It need not be said
that nothing of the kind exists.

The standard of comparison, therefore, by whose aid alone we
can discover that the retinal image is reversed, if it exists.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305

must do so either in the mind or in external nature. If it be
internal, it must be of the nature of an idea — an innate sense of
absolute direction, a mental power by which we can at once
distinguish the truth or falsity of any apparent direction. That
we have any such idea of the absolute, is in itself highly improb-
able. It may, in fact, be readily disproved. We are aware that
the revolution of the earth on its axis reverses the absolute direc-
tion of all the objects upon its surface every twelve hours. And
yet this reversal is not perceptible to us. The direction of all
objects, as related to that of our bodies, remains unchanged, and
this relation is all that we perceive. Indeed, we must have
remained forever ignorant of the revolution of the earth but from
the fact that the spheres of space do not revolve with it. These
retain their positions in space, while those of all objects upon the
earth change. They, therefore, serve us as standards of compari-
son by whose aid we intellectually discover the earth's motion.
We never become sensibly aware of it, for the only motion
apparent to us is that of the spheres of space. We impute
motion to objects at rest, and rest to objects in motion. This
error could not arise, had we any innate idea of absolute direc-
tion, or an internal standard of comparison. Therefore the mind
in itself is incapable of perceiving that there has been a reversal
of the retinal image. It has no faculty of deciding on questions
of direction, and what is relatively correct is absolutely correct
to its perceptive powers.

If we have no internal or retinal standard of direction, have we
any external one ? No object upon the earth's surface will serve
this purpose. The images of all objects alike are reversed upon
the retina. The same is the case in regard to the spheres of space.
They do not retain their true positions in this case, as in the
former case considered, but are reversed in direction, and the
whole universe is turned upside down by the crystalline lens of
the eye, and is perceived by the mind thus reversed. Though
nothing is absolutely correct, everything is relatively correct in
direction, and we have no guide to teach us that such a reversal
has taken place.

The fact is that in this, as in the other case, we involuntarily
take our body as the measuring rod of the universe. Distance is
at first estimated by the length of the arm, dimension by the
spread of the fingers and the sweep of the arm, and direction by

30fi PROCEEDINGS OE THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

that of the body. Our knowledge that the retinal image is
reversed is not gained by perception, but by our study of the
laws of optics. We conceive of a picture upon the retina whose
direction is reverse to that of tlie body, and are puzzled to under-
stand why the mind does not perceive it thus reversed. In this
we are comparing sensations with ideas. The image of the body
is also reversed upon the retina, and thus its direction, as optically
recognized, agrees with that of all other objects. Our accepted
standard of direction therefore fails us in this particular. The
universe, as perceived by the mind through the medium of the
e^^e, is relatively in harmony in all its particulars of direction
and position, and unless the mind had some innate conception of
absolute direction, it would be impossible for it to discover that
a reversal of the image had taken place. We have already shown
that it has no such innate ideasof direction, and is entirely depend-
ent upon its perceptions in this particular. The body, our accepted
standard of direction, is perceived to be erect as compared with
our perception of the earth's surface. All other objects upon
this surface bear the same relation to it, and we have no means
of discovering that we are optically deceived, except by a second-
ary process of reasoning, based upon the laws of optics. No
tree, for instance, could seem to us upside down unless the earth's
surface seemed upside down, which is impossible.

The mystery in which this question has been so long involved,
therefore, vanishes when considered from this point of view.
The mind fails to discover that its optical image is reversed
simpl}' from the fact that this reversal includes all things, nothing
retaining its erect position to serve as a standard of comparison,
and from the second fact that the mind has no innate idea of
direction to make it aware of its error. There is no error in our
perception. Relatively it is in ever}- particular correct, and of
the absolute we have no knowledge except through the process of
reasoning.^

^ Since forming these theoretical views, the writer has become aware that
the same theory has been previously presented. Dr. William Mackenzie —
"Physiology of Vision," London, 1841 — says: "In the image on the
retina, the relative position of the parts of the object remain unchanged,
as well as its relations to surrounding objects. The images of all objects,
even those of our own bodies, are equally inverted on the retina, and there-
fore maintain the same relative position. Even the image of our hand,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 30?

while used in touch, is inverted. Hence, the notion is evidently absurd,
that infants at first see objects upside down, and learn to see things in their
proper positions, by comparing the erroneous information acquired by sight
with the accurate information acquired by touch. Many of the lower
animals manifest a perception of the true position of objects by means of
the sense of sight from the very first, and before any experience derivable
from touch can have had time to operate. To some philosophers, then,
there appears no difiiculty respecting erect vision, so long as all things
equally, and not some objects only, are seen by means of impressions coin-
cident with inverted images." He further says : "The mind neither views
the images on the retina, nor is in any way conscious of their existence."

This theory is so identical with the one we have given, as to render the
latter, in a considerable sense, a repetition. Yet Mackenzie's views do not
seem well known, and are worth restating. Moreover, his theory is far
from being fully argued out, and no theoretical views can be held as in any
sense substantiated until they have been shown to be logically defensible.
This we have attempted to do. The hypothesis we have given of the prin-
ciple through which nerve impressions are mentally localized in position
has, we believe, not been previously advanced, but is here first presented.

308 PROCEEDINGS OP *flE ACADEMY OP [1886.

NOTICES OF NEMATOID WORMS.

BY PROF. JOSEPH LEIDY.
Filaria scapiceps.

Body cylindrical, nearly equally tapering at the ends. Cephalic
extremity abruptly narrowing, cylindric, rounded at the summit
and smooth. Mouth a terminal pore without labia, papillfe or

inner armature. Caudal extremity
of female nearly straight, conical,
obtusely rounded, smooth, without
appendages ; of the male curved,

Side view of the caudal extremity of conical, obtusely rounded alatc and
the male. 125 diameters. papillate ; alse half oval ; papillae

five pairs, pyriform, successively decreasing to the last at the
end of the tail. Genital aperture opening between the ante- and
penultimate papillae ; penal spicules short, curved.

Female 25 to 30 mm. long; 0*75 wide at middle; head O'ltS
wide. Male 12 mm. long ; 0-'6lb wide at middle.

Eight females and five males were obtained from beneath the
skin of the hind foot of a rabbit, Lepus sylvaticus.

Filaria obtunsa.

Body cylindrical, nearly uniform ; head conical, obtusely
rounded, or rounded truncate, smooth ; mouth a minute central
pore, devoid of lips, papillje, or internal armature ; caudal end of
female straight, conical, obtusely rounded, devoid of papillse ; of
male abruptly narrowed, a length about equal to the breadth of
the body, nipple-shaped, obtusely rounded and devoid of papillte.
Female genital aperture near the head end. Male aperture ter-
minal ; penis of a longer curved spicule and a spiral one of half
the leligth.

Female 4 inches or more long, 0*625 mm. wide. Male 2 inches
long, 0*5 mm. wide. Abundant in the visceral cavity of the
snow bird, Junco kyemalis.^= Filaria obtusa, Leidy, Pr. A. N. S.,
1885, 10.

In the meadow lark, Sturnella magna. = F. obtusa. Ibidem.
Chester Co., Pa. Obtained by Dr. B. H. Warren.

Many specimens from the visceral cavity of the meadow lark
in the collection of the Army Medical Museum, Washington.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309

Female from 4^ to 1| inches long, mostly to 6 inches ; width
0-625 mm. Male 2^ to 3^ inches.

Four females and a male from the crow black bird, Quiscahis
purpureus. They are proportionately more robust than the
preceding. Female 4 inches long and 0-875 wide. Male 1\ inches
long and 0-5 mm. wide. Florida, Dr. B. H. Warren.

I at first viewed this species as the Filaria obtusa, Rudolphi
(Diesing, Syst. Hel., ii, 267). The caudal extremity of the male,
with its penal armature, accords with Dujardin's figure of that
species (Hclminthes, Pt. iii, fig. i, 2). In F. obtiinsa I can detect
no buccal armature such as exists in F. obtufia, according to
Dujardin ; and later, Molin (Yersuch einer Monographic der
Filarien, Sitzungsb. Wien. Akad. Wis., 1858, 397).

Filaria cirrura.

Body c^dindrical, nearly equal, cephalic end conical, rounded
truncate, smooth ; mouth a m^inute funnel-like orifice without
papillae or interior armature ; caudal end of female slightly
curved or nearl}' straight, conical, obtusely rounded, without
appendages ; of male closely rolled inward, conical, blunt,
without alse or papillae ; penal spiculae strongly curved, with the
points projecting from the prominent genital aperture situated
above the tail end.

Length of female 16 mm., breadth 0*5 mm. Length of male
10 mm., breadth 0-375 mm.

Four females and two males from the orbit of the jackdaw,
Quiscahis major. Florida. Dr. B. H. Warren.

Filaria nodulosa. Rudolphi. Diesing, Syst. Hel., ii, 274.

Body cylindrical, nearly uniform, slightly more narrowed
behind ; head conical, obtusely rounded, with a circle of minute
tubercles. Caudal extremity of the female straight, conical,
obtuse ; of the male slightly curved, obtuse ; genital aperture a
little in advance of the tail end ; penal spicules short, curved.

Female 3 inches long, 1 mm. wide. Male 1^ inches long, 0*5
mm. wide.

One of each sex from beneath the skin of the head and neck
of a shrike, Collurio ludovicianus. Florida. Dr. B. H. Warren.

Filaria stigmatura.

Body filiform, nearly uniform c^dindrical, but attenuated at the
cephalic extremity ; head rounded truncate, smooth ; mouth

310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

large, bordered by two or three ? minute, conical papillae, unarmed
•within ; integument smooth throughout, not annulate. Female :
caudal extremity straight, smooth ; tail straight or sliglitly bent
back from tlie distinct anal aperture, conical, blunt. Male :
caudal extremity spirally enrolled two or three times, furnished
with narrow band-like granular alae sustained by twelve pairs of
ribs or cylindroid papillae, of which seven pair are preanal ; tail
curved conical, subacute ; penal spicules, one four times the
length of the other.

Length of female 40 to 55 mm., breadth 0-5 mm. ; tail 0-3 long.
Length of male 24 to 30 mm. ; breadth 0.3Y5 mm. ; tail 0-25 from
genital aperture. Long penal spicule 0*88 mm. ; short one 0-2
mm.

Pharynx cylindrical, 0-25 mm. long; oesophagus cylindrical,
slightly expanded at lower end, 3 mm. long ; intestine nearly same
diameter. Eggs thick shelled, oval, 0*04 long, 0*024 broad.

A multitude of individuals obtained from the swimming blad-
der of the lake trout, Salvelinus namaycuah. Lake Superior.
Dr. James H. Bissel.

The species bears considerable resemblance to Ancyracanthus
cystidicola (Rud, Schneider, Mon. d. Nematodon, 105), from a
like position of Salmo furio of Europe, but it possesses distinct
characters even generic. It also resembles Filaria denticulata
(lb. 102), but is devoid of the tegumentary spines and other char-
acteristic marks of that species.

Filaria helecina. Molin, Sitzungsb. Wien. Akad. Wiss., lSo8, xxviii, 391.
Filaria aiihiufjir. AVyman, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 1868, 100.
Enstroniji/li(s. Packard, Hayden's Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv., 1873, 735.
Filaria Wymani. Leidy, Proc. A. N. S., 1882, 109.

Numerous additional specimens from the brain of a dozen indi-
viduals of Plotus anhinga. Florida. Dr. B. H. Warien.

Trichosomum tenuissimum. Diesing, Syst. Helm., ii, 256.

Body cylindrical, obtuse at both ends, viviparous. Four females,
1 lines long by 0*25 mm. thick. Intestine of the dove, Zenaidura
carolinensis. From two birds. Florida. Dr. B. H. Warren.

■? Monopetalonema eremita.

Body cylindrical, slightly narrowest anteriorly ; head with an
annular expansion of the integument, which is more dilated
below ; mouth with a pair of half-conical lips, divided into four
papillae at the apex ; tail short, straight, conical, obtuse.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 311

A single female 19 lines long and nearly 1 line thick at the
middle. Obtained by Dr. J. Van A. Carter, from the masseter
muscle of a badger, Melea labradorica, at Ft. Bridger, Wj'oming.

The head and mouth have the characters of Physaloptera. Two
apertures are visible in advance of the end of the tail, one at the
distance of 025 mm., the othei- 0"625 mm.

Ascaris simplex. Rudolphi, Diesing, Syst Ilel., ii, 155.

A large quantity, from the stomach of a dolphin, Lagenorhyn-
chus? Pacific ocean. Dr. Wm. H. Jones, U. S. N.

Ascaris compar. Schrank, Diesing, Syst. Hel., ii, 170.

One male. If inches long. Intestine of the quail, Ortyx vir-
ginianus. Florida. Dr. B. H. Warren.

Ascaris vesicularis. FroliHeh, Diesing, Syst. Hel. ii, 118.

Two females and two males. Intestine of the quail, Ortyx
virginianus. Florida. Dr. B. H. Warren.

Ascaris depressa. Rudolphi, Diesing, Syst. Hel., ii, 156. Intestine of Strix nivea,
Leidy, Pr. A. N. S, 1858, 112.

Two females 2^ inches by 3 mm. Intestine of Sirix brachy-
otiis. Florida. One female 1| inches. Bubo virginianus. Chester
Co., Pa. Dr. B. H. Warren.

Ascaris ensicaudata. RuJolphi, Diesing, Syst. Hel., ii, 184.

Labia large and prominent ; apex of tail defined as a short
ensiform appendage. Five females, to 3 inches long, by 1 mm.
broad. Ejected from the mouth of a mocking bird, Mimus poly-
glottus. Jacob Geismer.

Ascaris microcephala. Rudolphi, Diesing, Syst. He!., ii, 155.

Numerous specimens from the stomach of the night-heron,
Nyctiardea grisea. Chester Co., Pa. G. W. Roberts, through
Dr. B. H. Warren. Specimens from Ardea herodias, Hydro-
nassa tricolor and Botaurus mugitans. Florida. Dr. Warren.

Ascaris spiculigera. Rudolphi, Diesing, Syst. Hel., ii, 157.

From Graculus dilophus, Plotus anhinga, Pelicanus trachy-
rhynchus and P. fuscus. Leidy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1858,
110; 1882,109. Numerous additional specimens from the former
two birds. Florida. Dr. B. H. Warren.

Ascaris tenuicollis. Rudolphi, Diesing, Syst. Hel., ii, llJO.

Numerous specimens, all females, up to 1^ inches long, and 2
mm. thick. From the Alligator mississippiensis.

312 rROCEEDiNas of the academy of [1886.

Asoaris auoura. Dujardin, Diesing, Syst. ITel., ii, 161.

Numerous females, 3 and 4 inches long to 2 mm. thick. These
were all suspended in the stomacli, through double apertures of
the mucous membrane, and thus tightl}^ retained in position. From
a snake, which, from the description, is supposed to be the milk-
snake, Opliiholus. Obtained by Dr. James Bissell, in the vicinity
of Harrisburg, Pa.

Ascaris penita.

Body cylindrical, tapering at the extremities, and most attenu-
ated in front ; mouth trilabiate. Tail of female, long, straight,
conical, subulate; of male of same form, strongly curved, with
the point brought near the genital aperture ; provided at the pos-
terior third with four pairs of papillae. Penal spiculte remark-
ably robust.

Length of female 5 to 7 lines, by ^ line in width ; of male, to
5 lines, by O'SIS mm. in width. Numerous specimens from the
intestine of Trachemys scabra. Generative aperture of the
female at the posterior third of the body. QSsophagus long cyl-
indrical, followed by an oval or spherical gizzard. Commence-
ment of intestine dilated. CEsoph'agus 1'75 mm. long, by 0"125
wide : gizzard about 0'25. Tail of female r25 mm. lon<j;.
Breadth of penal spicules 0*08 mm.

Physaloptera torquata.

Body c^'lindrical, most attenuated anteriorly ; head with a con-
spicuous narrow annular fold or collar ; mouth bilabiate, labia
half conical with a pair of lateral papillse and the apex provided
with a group of four, of which one is external to the other. Tail
short, conical, obtuse, recurved from the anal aperture.

Numerous specimens, all females, from 3 to 6 lines wide and
one-fourth of a line thick. Worms all more or less spirally coiled.
From the stomach of the badger, 3Ieles labradorica.

Physaloptera turgida. Rudolphi, Diesiug; Syst. Helm., ii, 2o3. Leidy, Pr A. N. S.,
1866, 53.

From stomach of the opossum, Didelpliis virginiana. Collec-
tion of the Army Medical Museum, Washington. Also received
from Dr. Benjamin Sharp.

Physaloptera abbreviata. Rudolphi, Diesing; .Syst. Helm., ii, 2.'i5.

Numerous females from 3 to 8 lines, and three males about 2
lines. From the visceral cavity of Phrynosoma regale. Collec-

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 313

tion of the Armj' Medical Museum, Washington. Nose, mouth,
and throat of Phrynosoma hernandezi ; Souora, Mexico. Dr. T. H.

Streets.

Hedruris androphora. Nitzsch, Diesing ; Syst. Hel., ii, 205.

Sijiiplectapeiidula Leidy, Pr. A. N. S., 1851, 2J:0 j 1856, 52. Diesing, Sitzungsb.
Wien. Akad. Wis., xlii, 1861, 647.

Stomach of Nanemys guttatus.

Cuculanus roseus. Leidy, Pr. A. N. S., 1851, 155 ; 185G, 54.
Intestine of 3Ianouria fusca, Java.

Tropidocerca certa.

.? Filaria diibia. Leidy, Pr. A. N. S., 1856, 55.

Female subglobular, broader than long, divided into zones ; tail
abruptly projecting and conical. Male of the ordinary nematoid
shape, cylindrical, most attenuated in front. Mouth trilabiate.
Caudal extremity strongW rolled inwardly, sigmoid at the end,
which is conical, recurved from the genital aperture, mucronate
and alate ; alae half oval, narrowing to the end of the mucro,
which is truncate. Female 7 mm. long by 7 and 8 mm. broad.
Male 12 to 18 mm. long, and 0"375 to 0-5 wide. The specimens
of this curious parasite were contained in two spherical cysts in
the wall of the stomach of the albatross, Diomedia exulans.
Each cyst contained a corpulent female with severally four and
five males. Obtained by Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.

31

314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

ON THE FEETILIZATION OF CASSIA MARILANDICA,
BY THOMAS MEEHAN.

The relation of insects to flowers continues to be a question of
profound interest. It lias never been clear to my mind that
insects are any material aid to plants through the pollinization
which they often undoubtedly accomplish. There has been little
to prove that in-and-in or close breeding is an injurj^; and it has
been assumed that cross-breeding among plants must be a benefit,
solely because arrangements for its accomplishment surely exist.
I have shown in various papers (see chiefly Proceedings of
American Association for the Advancement of Science^ Detroit
meeting), that in a scheme of nature for progressive development
there must be provided arrangements for the removal of old as
well as for the introduction of new forms, and /rom the facts ad-
duced we have as much right to look on them in the light of
agencies for removal as for the strength and preservation of a
race. In my mind, the facts rather show that instead of any
material aid to the propagation of the race being gained, the
dependence of a plant on insect aid for fertilization is rather an
indication that its race is nearly run, and that it is on the down-
ward track in the order of nature.

The assumption that cross-fertilization is a factor in develop-
ment instead of in degradation, has, I believe, been an injury to
the study of the main question, as it has led to generalizations
that cannot be sustained, and to assertions regarding facts that I
think would not have been made had not the observers been pre-
possessed in favor of this hypothesis. The followers of those
who have done so much to advance this branch of science, have
gone much further in their speculations than those who first
originated the line of thought ; and even the leading minds in
that path have often been the victims of an enthusiasm of which
their cooler moments would not approve. Here and there we
meet with statements by even such eminent naturalists as Darwin
and Asa Gray, that would seem to sustain the wide genralizations
of Grant Allen or Sir John Lubbock ; but a careful study of their
writings will show that they look on cross-fertilization as a fact,
and as a measure of race utility, from a much more limited field

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 315

than the supporters of the wider speculations seem to believe.
It is not the most eminent writers who assert that " cross-fertiliza-
tion is the general rule," "the greater number of flowers are
cross-fertilized," etc. (see Popular Science Review^ 18Y3), though
the casual expression of Dr. Asa Gray, in his papers of 1877,
that " many flowers freely self-fertilize," certainly might imply
self-fertilizers to be a minority of the whole ; but the same eminent
botanist has also said " it is a common case that flowers cross-
fertilize when duly served by insects or wind, and self- fertilize
when not," and this by no means bears the impression that he
regards self-fertilizing flowers as composing a particularly limited
class. Indeed no one is more severe than Dr. Gray on theory-
makers who run off in haste on one line of facts. The true
sentiments of Dr. Gray are that " cross-fertilization, we may well
believe, is a very risky affair," and in view thereof very few plants
have become wholly dependent on this mode, but act on the rule
to prefer cross-fertilization " if they can," but failing in this, to
self-fertilize, " if they must." And, though it is not so generally
understood, I think a careful study of Mr. Darwin's works will
show that this is essentially his view also.

Though unwilling to concede that any material benefit comes
to the races of plants from the aid which insects give to plants
by cross-fertilization, the fact that some species are evidently
wholly dependent on this agency for fertility, is no less interest-
ing, and any original observations must have value to the student
of this branch of science.

Cassia, in a general way, has been a subject of study. In 1875
Dr. Leggett writes (Bull. Torr, Club, p. 171) that Dr. Torrey had
noticed the difficulty Cassia niclitans had in rejecting its pollen.
Dr. Torrey believed, however, that though the anthers seemed to
provide a pore at the apex for the emission of pollen, they finally
slit longitudinallj'^, and thus permitted the pollen to escape. Dr.
Leggett does not seem satisfied of this. In 1882, however, Prof.
J. E. Todd published some extremely interesting observations on
this species, and on Solarium rostratum, which has a similar
staminal arrangement (see Am. Naturalist. Ap. 1882, p. 281-287).
C. Marilandica is referred to as one that would probably behave
in the same way. Before noting what Mr. Todd saw in these, I
will note the observations I have made on this species.

As nothing seems to have been placed on record in relation to

316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Cassia Marilandica, and I having a good opportunity for daily-
observation, I undertooli its close investigation this year. In
Cassia Marilandica the flower consists of five petals, as in other
leguminosae; but the two which usually unite and form the carina
are here distinct and spread widel}^, talking the place apparently
often occupied by the wing-petals. The two actual wing-petals
are somewliat erect and lap under the upper or vexilliim. This
arrangement gives the flower a "somewhat two-lipped appear-
ance." The style curves gradually, but more rapidly at the apex,
curving there so much that the stigmatic surface can scarcely be
closely examined without breaking the style. If the petals be
opened just before the natural time for their expansion, a globule
of liquid is pendant from the surface. Tlie stamens are arranged
in separate sets. Tliere are three beneath the pistil — the two
lateral ones are very strong and equal the pistil in length — the
central one immediately beneath the pistil is as long as those on
each side, but more slender. Immediately above tlie pistil are
four stamens, with short, stout filaments, the anthers being per-
fectly formed, and nearly as long as in the lower set. Above are
three petaloid stamens, which we can only see are staminal efforts,
by noting the intermediate stages of the several parts between
the stamens and petals. The only use for them seems to be to
afi'ord a good morphological lesson to the student.

The most interesting feature of this Cassia is that the stamens,
not mono or diadelphous as in manj- leguminosae, have long,
black anthers, full of pollen, but which seem never to burst the
anther cases. The only " opening is at the apex," and this " open-
ing " is covered by a membrane — never opening, as I believe,
except by insect agency.

As soon as the flower expands it is freel}^ visited by humble
bees, and, as their loaded thighs evidence, for the pollen. To
collect this, they alight on the anthers of the long and lower
stamens, as on a platform — make an opening in the apex of each
of the four shorter ones, and then rifle them of their contents. I
watched a mass of plants containing eight3'-eight flower stems, on
the 30th of July, and the same lot for an hour on 6th of August,
but saw no attempt to get pollen from the longer anthers, or to
use them in any way but as a platform. It would, indeed, be
hardly possible for the bee to stand anywhere so as to get power
to pierce the apical membranes of the longer stamens. When the

1880.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 317

flower matured, and the anthers were ready to fall, thej' were exam-
ined— the four short ones were empty sacs — the three lower ones
proved they had not served any purpose to the bees, for they
were full of pollen. There could be no doubt that, perfect and
full of pollen as thoj^ were, they served no purpose that I could
see either to the flower or to its insect visitors. Hive bees on
honey-collecting expeditions hunted around among the base ot
the petals, but were not, apparently, well rewarded for their work.
No pollen could be detected on the stigmatic surface; but as about
three out of every twelve flowers yielded a pod, they were evi-
dently fertilized in some way. On the 30th of July I covered
one panicle that had not yet opened a blossom, with a gauze bag
twelve inches wide and eighteen inches deep, tied at the bottom
to prevent ingress. Not one of these enclosed flowers produced
a seed vessel, nor could I see that any one anther " opened at the
apex." The membrane covered it as completely as it did in the
unopened flower.

Now all these observations confirm those of Mr. Todd in the
other plants except in the following particulars : As in my
case, he found that the bees never attempted to collect pollen
from the longer and lower anthers, but " b}'' the movement of
her feet the larger stamen is repeatedly sprung backward, and
as often throws a cloud of pollen on one side of her body." I
am sure no pollen was ejected in this way from Cassia Marilan-
dica, for the membrane at the apex was not even ruptured when
the stamens were ready to fall. In regard to the manner in which
the pollen is extracted, he found that " this she does by seizing
each anther near its base between her mandibles, and, with a sort
of milking motion, crowds the pollen out of the terminal pore."
If this were the general way there would be no necessity for any
pollen being ejected from the long stamens, for the stigma would
certainly receive some during the " milking " process ; and the
pore at the apex in the long anther is beyond the line of the
stigma, so that on ejection from the pore the pollen would go
still further beyond. At any rate I am satisfied that in this
species the anther cases did not under my observation ultimately
split longitudinally, as stated by Dr. Torrey in an allied species,
nor was there any drawing out of the pollen, as observed by Prof.
Todd. It is abstracted solely through the pores; and although I
could see no evidence that such was actually the case, I suspect

318 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

fertilization could only occur through some of this extracted
pollen escaping from the insect to the stigma.

However, the fact was clearly demonstrated that Cassia Mari-
landica, in this experiment, does not produce a single seed, when
the flowers are protected from the visits of insects.

This plant is the more interesting as it belongs to an order
-which the enthusiasts to whom I have referred, see " from its struc-
ture " to be so well " arranged for cross-fertilization,'' but which
those who, like the following author, have followed results, see
just the reverse. " To the casual observer of tj^pical structures
the papilionaceous plants must present the most difficult nut to
crack for a student of cross-breeding. * * * As might be expec-
ted from the structure of the flowers, we have in these plants
persistent examples of self-fertilization, and hence the constancy
of garden varieties " (Gard. Mag., Feb. 3, ISTT).

1886.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 319

September 7.
Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.
Thirteen persons present.

September 14.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-four persons present.

September 21.

Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.

Twenty-four persons present.

The death of Wm. P. Jenks, a member, was announced.

Chinese Women and Spiritism. — The following communication
was read from Miss Adele M. Fielde: — In the eighth month
of the year, early in autumn, when the full moon is worshipped ;
when the gods of grain are rewarded with gifts ; when friends
exchange many souvenirs ; when the upper and nether worlds
are thought to touch boundaries, then the Chinese women meet
privately and fall into trances. Nearly all women are interested
in these secret sessions, but many are prevented from being
present by necessary occupations elsewhere, or by fear of rebuke
from the men of their households. These conclaves are entered
by women only, and are regarded by men with great disfavor.
The women assemble in an apartment where they- may be for a
few hours secure from interruption. From three to a dozen or
more gather around a table in the centre of the room. Incense-
sticks, spirit-money and bamboo-roots, bought by a previous con-
tribution of farthings, are distributed among all present. A
fetich of some sort, a decayed splint hat, an old broom, a chop-
stick, or possibly a more uncleanly object, taken from a rubbish
heap, is brought in, and spirit-money is burned before it, with
obeisances. Then those who desire to fall into trance sit down
at the table, throw a black cloth over the head, hold a sheet of
spirit-money and a lighted incense-stick between the palms before
the face, shut the eyes, and remain motionless and silent. Of the
other women, some light incense-sticks and whirl them around the
heads of the sitters ; some rap constantly, gently and rapidly, with
the bamboo-roots on the edge of the table ; some chant invoca-

320 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

tions, petitioning the gods to admit these their children to their
aliode. Man3^ and diverse incantations are iterated. One, given
to rae by a woman who appeared to be an expert, may be trans-
lated as follows :

Sister spirit, ghost of nun, Spirit, spiiit, come and reach

Body take bv sharing one ; Hand to lead us ; vouchsafe speech ;

Twu or three await tliee here. Be incarnate in us here ;

Choo.-e in which thou wilt appear. Choose in whom thou wilt appear.

Two or three of the women, perhaps, fall into trance. Their
doing so is indicated by their trembling violently, dropping the
incense-sticks they were holding, beginning to beat the table with
the palms of their hands, and to discourse incoherentl}'. They
speak of meeting their own lost friends, or those of other women
who are present. They weep bitterly while they appear to con-
verse with tlie dead. They describe streets, shops and houses
and say that certain person are engaged in agriculture or ti'ade.
Sometimes they, by request, make inquiry concerning the where-
abouts of a dead person, and then give the information that he
has been born into the human family for the second time. Some-
times they report that a dead neighbor is shut up in Hades with
nothing to eat but the salted flesh of the infant daughters she
destroyed when she was alive.

Many women go to these meetings merely as observers ; many '
more go in order to avail themselves of what the}' believe to be
an opportunity to hear from dead relatives ; a few go with the
hope that they may themselves fall into trance, and see the spirit
of some recently deceased friend. It is said that those who wish
to enter Elysium and see the dwellings of the gods and geni,
must make the attempt in the forenoon, while those who wish to
visit lower spheres get admittance only in the afternoon.

As no pecuniary benefit accrues, directly or indirectly, to the
actors in these scenes, there is less reason for suspecting conscious
deception than in the case of the public interpreters for the gods.

No foreign lady can get access to these sittings, and no native
Christian woman is admitted to them. It is said that no one falls
into the trance-state, if a Monotheist be within sight or hearing.
My knowledge is gained wholly from a score of Chinese women,
now my pupils, who in former years attended these sittings, and
who have described to me the scenes of the eighth month.

Throughout the whole there is indication that the minds of the
women are, during these trances, moving in customary grooves.
They evidently see what they expect to see. The gardens of
Elysium are laid out in Chinese style; the architecture of the
buildings is Chinese ; the punishments are those made familiar to
the imagination by Buddhism and Tauism ; the costumes, the
implements, and the paraphernalia are such as are common in
Swatow. These seekers after truth in the land of shades bring

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 32l

back no ideas save those which the}- took with them when starting
on tlieir quest; and this leniils one to doubt, in spite of their dis-
heveled hair, paUor and exhaustion, whether they have after all
really been away from home.

At nightfall the supposed traveler is lured back by incantations,
and then she slips slyly back into her accustomed duties, with no
chance, for another whole year perhaps, to take a jaunt either
with body or soul,

Swatow, China, August 1, 1886.

September 28.

Mr. W. W. Jefferis in the chair.

Seventeen persons present.

The death of Charles Baeder, a member, was announced.

Richard H. Day was elected a member.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

322 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY Of [1886.

HISTORY AND BIOLOGY OF PEAR BLIGHT.
BY J. C. ARTHUR.

To the American orchardist or nurserj'man the name of pear
blight, or fire blight, as it is often called, brings to mind a serious
malady of fruit trees, which has been the theme of incessant dis-
cussion by horticultural writers and speakers since the earliest
days of fruit culture in this country. The most marked featui'es
of the disease were admirably characterized bj^ William Coxe^ at
the beginning of the present century, in the following words :
" That species of blight which is sometimes called the fire blight,
frequently destroys trees in the fullest apparent vigor and health,
in a few hours, turning the leaves suddenly brown, as if they had
passed through a hot flame, and causing a morbid matter to exude
from the pores of the bark, of a black ferruginous appearance ;
this happens through the whole course of the warm season, more
frequently in weather both hot and moist." The disease occurs
from Canada and Minnesota on the north, to Georgia and Louis-
iana on the south, and from the eastern limit of the Rockj-
Mountains to the Atlantic ocean. No part of this vast extent of
country is exempt, although it does not appear with the same
frequency and power in all localities, and is usually rai^e in the
immediate vicinity of the sea-coast.

So far as at present known, it is exclusively confined to this
part of North America. This is partly inferred from the absence
of any distinct mention of such a disease in the horticultural
literature of other regions, and partl^^ from direct testimony.
Prof. Dwindle, late of the University of California, has told the
writer that it does not occur on the Pacific coast. Dr. De Bary,^
whose word carries great weight, says, after giving a brief
description of the disease, "this phenomenon is not to my knowl-
edge known in Europe." A long account of the disease has been
published by Dr. Wakker,^ in a gardening journal of Holland, in
order to learn if it occurs in that country, but up to the present

1 Cultivation of Fruit Trees, Philadelphia, 1817, p. 174.

^ Vorlesungen liber Bacterien, 1885, p. 137.

3 Nederlandsche Tuinbouwblad, II (Jan. 9, 1886), p. 9.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 323

time no one has intimated any knowledge of it. In a recent
letter Dr. Masters, editor of the Gardeners' Chronicle of England,
says that no such disease has been recognized in the British Isles.
The testimony of one of our own horticulturists. Prof. Budd,' of
Iowa, who is familiar with the disease in this countrj'', and has
inspected the orchards of the old world far into Russia, is especi-
ally valuable ; he says " no trace of blight of pear- or apple-trees
can be seen in Europe." From these statements, and the infer-
ences to be drawn from other sources, it appears highly probable
that the disease does not extend to Europe. An account of the
principal diseases of fruit-trees of New Zealand, by Prof. T. Kirk,^
has been published, which describes a disease of the pear known
in that country aspire blight, due to a fungus, and another of the
apple, the American blight, due to an insect. No true pear blight,
as recognized in the United States, is mentioned, and in a recent
communication the author has definitely stated that it is not
known in the colony. Whether it occurs in other parts of the
world is not yet ascertained, if some slight testimony regarding
its absence in Japan be excepted.

It is only within a year or so that Eui'opean writers have become
aware of its existence, and this only through American authors.
It is remarkable that a disease of such virulence and so easily
transported should not have found its wa}' across the ocean, when
one remembers the number of destructive plant maladies that
America has ah'eady involuntarily foisted upon European culti-
vators. It will not be profitable to speculate much at this time
upon the reasons for this, but we may suppose that the small
exportation of American fruit-trees, or of scions,^ has been a
factor in keeping it in check. The influence of climate, and some
less evident factors, need not be discussed in this connection.

Amount of Loss. — It has already been intimated that pear
blight is a frequent and destructive affection ; it will tend to give
a fairer appreciation of the subject if it be stated how frequent
and how destructive it is. Coxe,* as early as 181T, in the oldest
pomological work by an American author, says it " frequently

^ Trans. Minn. Hort. Soc. for 1883, p. 281.

* Fruit Blights and Diseases of Fruit-trees in New Zealand, 1885.

' For an account of the destruction of stored scions by blight, see Rep.
Hort. Soc. of Mich, for 1881, p. 137. * L. c, p. 174.

324 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

destroys trees in the fullest apparent vigor and health, in a few
hours ; I have in twenty years lost upwards of fifty trees." The
years 1826 and 1832 were notable in horticultural circles for the
increased prevalence of the disease; but it was in 1844 that the
most widespread and fatal epidemic, that the country has yet
known, occurred. Few, if any, pear-orchards escaped at that
time without the pai'tial or total loss of many trees, and some
orchards, even large ones, were quite destroj-ed. The following
year the epidemic was much lighter, and had fully disappeared
by 1846. Although it had subsided as an epidemic, it still
occurred in localities here and there, and has continued to do so
until the present time. Judging from the communications in the
horticultural press, the whole country, or various sections of it
independently, have been subject at various times to epidemic
visitations, but none have equaled in severity that of the memor-
able year of 1844.

It is often maintained that a certain periodicitj' of occurrence
is observable, the periods usually being placed at five, ten, or
twenty years. A careful examination of the literature of the
subject, however, gives little support to these views, and makes
it more probable that the intervals are irregular, and that they
vary for different sections of the country. The year of maximum
prevalence may or may not be preceded by one in which the
disease is noticeably common, but it is quite invariably followed
by a year or two of successive decadence.

In the absence of exact statistics, which it has not been prac-
ticable to obtain, something of the important nature of the disease
may be gathered from the statements of horticultural writers and
the phraseology which they employ in speaking of it.

The renowned horticulturist, A. J. Downing,' called it the
"monstrous malady of the pear." Chas. R. Baker ^ saj^s it is
" the worst malady with which the cultivator of the pear-tree has
to contend." In southern Pennsylvania "the'pear is so generally
destroyed by the blight," according to J. B. Garber^ writing in
1850, "that very few trees are to be found." At Philadelphia,
however, the disease has been rarely observed, according to

1 Horticulturist, vol. i, 1846, p. 62.

' Practical and scientific Fruit Culture. Boston, 1866, p. 476.

» U. S. Patent Office Report for 1850, pt. ii, p. 418.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 325

Thomas Meelian.^ T. T. Lyons,^ of Michigan, states as the
opinion of many cultivators in that State, that the pear-tree can-
not be grown with financial success on account of the blight.
Illinois has always been much subject to the disease, and Prof J.
B. Turner,^ in 1868, gave expression to the genei'al feeling of his
region by describing it as " that deadly Upas of the pear-tree
known par excellence as the pear-blight." In 1882 Dr. J. L.
Hallum,^ speaking for southern Illinois, says, " pears have failed,
utterly failed, so that none are now cultivated for market, the
blight has destroyed the trees —branch and root," and S. G.
Minkler,^ in the northern part of the State, observes that it is a
very uncommon thing to see pear-trees without dead branches or
other signs of the ravages of blight. Wm. A. Nourse,^ of the
same State, is led to " doubt if one-tenth of the pear-trees tliat
are set, live ten years," on account of this one destructive agent.
Geo. M. Dewey ,^ of Missouri, says that " with good cultivation
and rich soil the pear generally dies of blight before the eighth
year." In Minnesota the severe climate has not permitted the
cultivation of pears, and almost the only apples grown for many
years were the hardy crab-apples. The latter have been rapidly
improved, and together with the hardier varieties of the common
apple would now furnish this part of the country with an abundant
supply of fruit, were it not for this same disease, which elsewhere
most conspicuously preys upon the pear-tree. E. H. S. Dartt ^
held the opinion in 1874 that the severity of winter was not so
much to be dreaded as the ravages of blight. He had at that
time one or two thousand trees affected. Dr. P. A. Jewell,^ up to
1876, had lost ten thousand Tetofsky apple-trees by it. P. G.
Gould '" says that " only for this scourge every family living on a
farm in Minnesota could have a supply of apples."

1 Rep. Penn. Fruit-Grower's Soc. for 1877, p. 77.

2 Rep. Pomol. Soc. of Mich., for 1878, p. 368.
' Trans. 111. Horfc. Society for 1868, p. 43.

* Same for 1882, p. 118.

* Same for 1880, p. 30.

« Trans. 111. Hort. Soc. for 1880, p. 63.
' Proc. Mo. Hort. Soc. for 1870, p. 18.
8 Trans. Minn. Hort. Soc. for 1874, p. 32.
'Samefor 1876, p. 73.
'" Same for 1884, p. 127.

326 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Citations enough have doubtless been given, although several
pages of equally strong ones might be added, to show that fruit-
growers, who have the best opportunities for observation, con-
sider it a disease greatly to be dreaded and one of special economic
importance. Other sections of the country, notably those of
Ohio, western New York and Georgia, could furnish equally im-
portant proof of these propositions. All that is desired in this
connection, however, is to give those not familiar with the subject
some idea of the disease and its effects as ordinarily observed

Early Records. — The oldest mention of the disease, that gives
a good and reasonably full description of it, is in Coxe's work on
fruit-trees, bearing the date of 1817. The manner of the author
leaves no doubt that it was well known at that time, and the
reference to his losses during twenty years makes it reasonably
certain that he had observed the disease as early as the opening
of the century. The earliest notice, however, which has yet come
to hand, is in a letter written by Wm. Denning,^ describing the
disease in apples, pears, and quinces. He speaks of first observ-
ing it on the Highlands of the Hudson in 1780.

There is no interest, however, in tracing chronologically the
various notices found in different publications, for without excep-
tion they have the tone of treating a familiar theme, and show no
evidence that the disease in the first part of the century was in
any respect different from to-day.

Conjectures Regarding its Cause. — A brief treatment of this
topic will be all that is required for the purposes of this paper ;
and only those hypotheses will be touched upon which received
such careful presentation as to attract the favorable attention of
the public.

Few writers appear to ascribe the disease to a single agency,
but regard it as resulting from several causes, either acting to-
gether or brought about by dissimilar circumstances. Little dis-
crimination is made between predisi)Osing conditions and active
aoents. In fact sharply defined treatment could not be expected
when all was conjecture, and when the shrewdest observers did
not hesitate to avow that after years of loss under all kinds of
experimentation, and after interminable discussions, the cause
still lay shrouded in impenetrable obscurit3^

1 Trans. Soc. for Prom, of Agric, vol. 15, 1794, p. 219.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 321

Coxe,^ who has had many followers, thought that the hot rays
of the sun when acting through a misty or saturated atmosphere
deranged the vital activities of the plant and brought about the
disease. He considered old varieties more subject to it, on
account of having lower constitutional vigor, than new varieties,
of which the St. Germain and Seckel were respectively conspicu-
ous instances.

The insect theory, as it was called, was promulgated at this
time. It was started upon firm facts by the discovery of a small
brown beetle, about two millimeters long, which penetrated the
branch, and caused the part beyond to die. The beetle received
the name of Scolylus pyri Peck, now changed to Xyleborus pyri
Pk., and is still known as the blight beetle. The effect of its
attack appears to the casual observer similar to that of the true
blight — the branch in June or July rapidly withers, and the leaves
and fruit turn black. The beetles being minute and inconspicuous
escape attention, and the ftict that the branch does not die below
a definite point is sometimes overlooked. It is not difficult to
see how many persons came to connect this comparatively rare
affection with the common fire blight, and to believe that insects
of some sort were to be held accountable for all — their supposed
minuteness and wary habits being sufficient reasons for the failure
to find them, and the spread of the disease along the limbs of a
tree being ascribed to a poison which the insects were supposed
to emit. Among the prominent supporters of this view was the
" Genesee Farmer," ^ published at Rochester, N. Y., with Patrick
Barry as the horticultural editor. It has not, however, been so
strongly advocated for the last decade or two.

The next hypothesis that attracted general attention was known
as the frozen-sap theory. This was based upon the supposition
that the autumn or winter freezing of unripe wood produced a
poison which the moving currents of sap the next spring and
summer distributed, causing the death of the parts. It was first
published in 1844 b^^ Rev. H. W. Beecher,^ of Indiana, in a long
and able article in " Hovey's Magazine." In the following j^ear

1 L. c, p. 175.

^ See Genesee Farmer, vol. vii, 1846, p. 216; vol. viii, 1847, pp. 122,
218, etc.

^ Magazine of Horticulture, vol. x, p, 441.

328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

it was independently elaborated by A. J. Downing' in Ms work
on Fruits and Fruit-trees of America, who first called it the
frozen-sap theory, and who is usually spoken of as the author of
it. This view has probably had more firm adherents than any
other, as it explained many phenomena connected with the dis-
ease in a fairly satisfactory manner. It was especially well
received in the western States.

The next hypothesis which gained the attention of the public
was the fungus theory. Its first successful presentation was in
1863 by Dr. J. H. Salisbury ,2 who figured the fungus which he
decided to be the specific cause of this kind of blight, and ven-
tured to give it a name, although he was sadly in error in most that
he did. Thomas Meehan,^ editor of the " Gardener's Monthly,"
has ably championed this explanation, and done much to keep it
in favor. In 1875, Dr. J. G. Hunt,* by Mr. Meehan's request,
undertook a microscopical examination of blighted pear-twigs,
and confirmed the opinion that it was due to a fungus, without,
however, deciding upon the specific character of it.

Blighted trees often attract attention immediately after a
thunder storm, and from this and other circumstances the belief
that the malady is due to electricity has gained many adherents,
but the argument has not had a full and connected presentation.

The last hypothesis of historical importance is the bacterial
theory. Although hinted at by a number of horticultural writers,
yet the credit of it is due to Prof. T. J. Burrill,^ who in 1878 dis-
tinctly stated his belief that the cause resides with the bacteria
which he found in great abundance in the tissues of afiected
branches. In 1880 he performed a series of experiments^ by
inoculating healthy branches with the juices of diseased ones, the
results of which were presented to the American Association at
its Boston meeting, thus first bringing the subject clearly to the

• Fruits and Fruit-trees of America, p. 594 ; same, 2d Revision by Chas.
Downing, p. 646.

=* Ohio Agric. Rep. for 1863, p. 450.

^Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. for 1867, p. 59 ; and elsewhere.

* Gardener's Monthly, vol. xvii, 1875, p. 245.

^ Trans. 111. Hort. Soc. for 1878, p. 80.

" Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. xxix, 1880, p. 583 ; Rep. of 111.
Industrial Univ., for 1880, p. 62 ; Trans. 111. Hort. Soc. for 1880, p. 157 ;
Amer. Naturalist, vol. xv, 1881, p. 527.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 329

attention of the scientific world. Although this was now the
popular hypothesis, it cannot be said to have received more sub-
stantial credence than those which had gone before, either from
the horticulturists or the scientists. The experimental results
gained b}^ Prof. Burrill were confirmed and extended by the
writer ^ during 1884, by means of a similar series of inoculations.

Of the multitude of minor hypotheses which were put forth in
explanation of phenomena connected with pear-blight, and which
were variously received, and of all degrees of plausibilit}^, it is
Impossible to speak at this time without carrying this paper to
undue length.

Beginning of Experimental Research. — The question of the
cause of pear-blight was finally removed from the domain of
speculation to that of established fact by a series of crucial
experiments performed by the writer ^ a year ago, and recorded
in a paper before the American Association at the Ann Arbor
meeting. These consisted in showing that the bacteria when
removed from the tree and passed through a series of artificial
cultures would generate the disease when again introduced into
the tree, and that the juices accompanying blight when cleared
of bacteria by filtration will not produce the disease.

Having now come to a firm basis for scientific advancement, let
us look over the historical ground again to see if some one did
not hit upon the true explanation of the disease, although he may
not have been aware of its sisfnificance. In a connection like
this, facts derived from experiment have greater weight than
statements of opinion ; the latter acquire importance in propor-
tion as the}'^ are logically derived from correct and close observa-
tion. Bearing this in mind, we need not give much heed to the
not uncommon inference that pear-blight was in some way inti-
mately related to the epidemic diseases of man, e. g. cholera.
This view is said to have been quite frequently entertained in the
early part of the century, but was not sanctioned by the learned.
The. use of such phrases as " first cousin to the cholera," " a spe-
cies of vegetable ferment," etc., surely does not entitle the author
to any priority in way of discovery.

1 Rep. N. Y. Agric. Exper. Station for 1884, p. 357.

^ Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. xxxiv, 1885, p. 295 ; Bot. Gazette, vol.
X, 1885, p. 343 ; Gardeners' Chronicle, vol. xxiv. 1885, p. 586.

22

330 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

We turn from these slight hints to the record of an experiment
in inoculation, made in 1845 and published the following year.
We are told by S. B. Gookins/ of Indiana, that visiting Mr.
Ragan (the same person who furnished Mr. Beecher with many
of the facts on which he founded the theory to which we have
already referred) he was shown a thrift}' young pear-tree in the
nurser}', which had been " inoculated " " by way of experiment "
with " the sap of a blighted tree," " a few days previous." " He
made an incision about three feet from the ground, lifted the
bark as in the process of budding, and injected a small quantity
of the diseased sap." " We found the leaves of the patient chang-
ing color, and emitting that peculiar odor which is always present
in cases of blight, and upon appl3'ing the knife, the inner bark
was found to be black from the root to the top, while nothing of
the kind appeared elsewhere in the nursery."

This admirable experiment was combined with a no less admir-
able interpretation of the cause of blight. The writer cites facts
to disprove the hypothesis of Mr. Beecher, and then says : " I
strongly incline to the belief, that the pear-blight is an epidemic,
that it prevails like other epidemics, and will pass off like them.
The atmosphere is, I believe, generally admitted to be the medium
by which they prevail, and are carried from place to place. What
that subtle principle may be, which pervades our atmosphere, by
which infection is retained and transmitted, human science has
not discovered ; but that such a principle exists is sufficiently
obvious from its effects."

This clearly conceived elucidation of the matter could onlj'
have been improved by a knowledge of the germ theory of disease,
and when we remember the date at which it was uttered, we do
not feel that the writer was guilty of any lack of acuteness in not
perceiving the relation which we now know to exist between his
theory and his facts. He seems to have been a modest man, for
he only signs his initials, and does not defend his views when the
editor, A. J. Downing,^ opposes the opinion that " an epidemic
conveyed by the atmosphere is too slightly supported by facts to
weigh at all against the observations of cultivators," which
" strongly point to the freezing of the sap as the cause."

' Horticulturist, vol. i, 1846, p. 253.
' Horticulturist, vol. i, 1846, p. 255.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP JPHILADELPHIA. 33l

Another interesting experiment was performed by Dr. E. S.
Hull,^ of Illinois, in 1868. Having received some blighted apple
twigs from a correspondent, he cut pieces from them with which
he " inoculated several succulent pear shoots by tying in the pieces
as in budding." This was done the middle of June, and no ob-
servation taken for thirty-four days, when the blight was found
to have extended several inches into the healthy tissues. From
this he very justly concludes that the blight in apples and pears
is but one disease, but seems to take it for granted that in both
it is due to " vitiated sap."

The fact that the disease may be transferred to healthy trees
by the pruning knife has been observed by several persons. H.
Wendell,^ of New York, says in 1849, "I am also careful that the
blade of the knife is perfectly clean, and that it has none of the
sap of a diseased tree adhering to it, because I have known many
valuable trees destroyed by having been inoculated in this man-
ner." Prof. Turner,^ of Illinois, makes a similar statement : " I
found that this disease is exceedingly contagious, for if I used
my knife to prune a healthy tree after having used it in shaving
the diseased one, I communicated the disease to that tree."

Prof. Burrill first observed the bacteria of blight in 1877,^
but did not recognize them as such till the following year,^ when
he avowed his belief that they were the cause of the disease.
His first inoculation experiments were made in 1880, as already
stated. In 1882 he characterized the organism under the name
of 3Iicrococcus amylovorus.^

Description of Micrococcus amylovorus Bur. — The form of
this species of bacteria is very constant, under all conditions.
The single cells are from oval to roundish-ovoid, and only vary
by slight changes in the ratio between their length and breadth

1 Trans. 111. Hort. Soc. for 1868, p. 320.

2 U. S. Patent Office Rep. for 1849, pt. 11, p. 446.

3 Trans. 111. Hort. Soc. for 1878, p. 81.
* Same for 1877, page 114.

^ Same for 1878, page 79.

^ The Bacteria (a reprint from Rep. of 111. Industrial Univ. for 1882),
p. 42 ; Amer. Naturalist, vol. vii, 1883, p. 319. In the last publication,
by a typographical error, tiie name was made to read M. amylivorus, a
mistake wliich has been copied into other works — see Grove's Bacteria
and Yeast Fungi, London, 1884, p. 10.

332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY Olr [1886.

(PI. Ill, figs. 1, 2, 6). They are 1 to 1;^ ,a long, by i to | ,a broad,
and quite colorless. For the most part, they exist as single inde-
pendent cells, but may often be found in pairs, especially when
still multiplying, and in rare instances are united into a series of
four or even more, but never extend into chains.

During rapid vegetation, in rich nutritive media, the move-
ments reach a stage of extreme activity. The appearance is
what is termed swarming, in which the bacteria move rapidly
back and forth, in and out among each other, but never in a
straight line to any distance. As the rate of growth becomes
less from any cause the movements are retarded. Taken directly
from the tissues of a blighting tree, the movements of transla-
tion are usually sluggish or imperceptible, although the universal
Brownian movement is likelj' to give a misleading appearance of
activity. Under speciall}'^ favorable conditions, as when grown
during hot weather in very succulent shoots, or from artificial
inoculation in unripe fruit, the movements are much increased
and may become quite rapid. When taken from the tree in
winter, or when grown in solutions that are too acid or too alka-
line, or which are deficient in the proper nutritive substances,
there is no perceptible locomotion.

When in active growth, the cells present a uniformly dull
appearance. By conditions which are unfavorable to normal
growth, yet do not entirely check it, such as strongly acid or
alkaline solutions, deficient nutriment, or exhaustion b}'^ keeping
the cultures several months, the cells become highl}^ refractive,
and to some extent take on the appearance of the spores of
other species of bacteria. Whether in this state the}^ possess
any of the characteristic powers of resistance which belo^ig to
spores, has not been ascertained.

Formation of Zoogloea. — By far the most characteristic feature
in the life history of Micrococcus amylovorus is the formation of
zoogloea (figs. 2, 3, 5). These have never been observed in the
tissues of the tree under an 3- conditions, or in or upon any sort
of solid media, but they occur with much regularity in fluid
cultures, when placed under favorable conditions for rapid
growth.

Thej'^ are produced to some extent throughout the fluid, but
are most abundant in the thin pellicle which forms upon the
surface, appearing within forty-eight hours from the beginning

1886.] NATDRAL SCIENCES OE PHILADELPHIA. 333

of the culture. The substance of the pellicle consists of a color-
less matrix uniformly filled with motionless bacteria, and against
this the zoogloea are sharply defined. They are often brought out
yet more distinctly by being surrounded by a colorless layer, free
of bacteria, which is doubtless an extension of the ground sub-
stance of the zoogloea mass (fig. 4).

The masses are far more dense than the pellicle, and are com-
pactly filled with refractive bacteria. They possess a definite
outline, and are recognizable when verj'^ small ; and although
they may reach 80 to 40 // long by 20 to 80 p. wide, they rarely
lose their distinctness. When below 10 ,« in length, their usual
form is oblong, varying to globular. They occur singly, or united
more or less intimately end to end in pairs, and sometimes several
form a short chain. At this stage they possess a uniformly even
and unbroken surface, which now becomes uneven and wrinkled,
and is finall}^ thrown into folds, giving some resemblance to the
external aspect of the brain. Zoogloea more than 20 ij. in length
have the folds of somewhat unequal height, and the sinuses deeper,
giving a stronger cerebric look, or when the folds are small and
circular, they are better described as mulberry-like. The elon-
gated forms, which at some stage of growth might doubtless have
been composed of two or more distinct masses, often take on a
vermiform appearance. But whatever the variations may be, the
distinctness of outline, the general form, and the cerebric surface
are unfailing characters, which so far as my knowledge extends,
are not found in any other species of bacteria.

Cultivation in Fluid Media. — The range of substances which
may serve as culture media for this organism is very wide. An
infusion of almost any vegetable substance containing a fair
amount of soluble carbohj'drates is likely to be sufficient to enable
growth to take place, even if not ver}'^ luxuriantly.

The substance which on the whole has proved most satisfactor}''
is an infusion of potato. This is prepared by paring a potato and
slicing it into three or four times its bulk of water. This is kept for a
couple of hours at about 70° C, by placing it over a water-bath,
during which time it is occasionally stirred. It is then filtered,
and is ready to be placed in the culture vessels for sterilizing and
use. If the heat is allowed to rise much above 70°, the starch is
gelatinized, and it is only with diflficulty that the solution can be
filtered. The resulting liquid is clear and watery, but is often

1334 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

liffht brown from coloring matter contained in the potato, which
does not, however, materially interfere with observations on the
growth of bacteria in it. Iodine gives a blue coloration to this
liquid, showing that it contains starch, probably in the form of
amylon. Another equally good culture fluid is made by treating
corn (maize) meal in a similar manner. The solution is colorless,
but it is very apt to throw down a troublesome sediment, which
makes it less desirable to use than the potato solution.

Test-tube or flask cultures with these liquids, when kept at a
temperature of 25° to 30°C., usually show some turbidity in
twenty-four hours after being infected, and if the growth is very
rapid, bubbles of gas (CO2) will be given oflf, which collect at the
surface into a slight froth. In forty-eight hours the liquid has
become thoroughly turbid. By this time a thin whitish pellicle
has formed on the surface, which does not increase much in thick-
ness up to the end of active growth, and rarely becomes wrinkled.
With the formation of the pellicle, a sediment gathers at the bot-
tom of the liquid, often a centimeter in depth, but which is so
light that it only apparently diflfers from the liquid above by being
whiter. In the course of some weeks this sediment will mostly
gather upon the bottom of the vessel. No difierence has been
observed in the appearance of the bacteria taken from diflferent
parts of the culture. Those imbedded in the pellicle are not
ari'anged in any recognizable order.

In proportion as liquids are less suitable to the growth of
the organism, the visible changes are less. The pellicle may not
be formed, and there may be no turbidity, but if any growth at
all takes place there will be some evidence of it by formation of
a slight sediment. But the occurrence of a precipitate does not
necessarily imply growth, for it not infrequently separates from
a liquid containing organic matter, although remaining perfectly
sterile.

An infusion of hay, and also of dead, partly decomposed
grass from a marsh, gave nearly a normal growth of blight
bacteria, but the cells were considerably more refractive than
usual.

A solution of starch, having one part of starch to fifty of
water, gave but a slight growth of highly refractive bacteria,
without a pellicle, turbidity, or zooglosa. A strong decoction of
old barnyard manure acted in the same manner. A solution of

18S6.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 335

one part of glucose to fifty of water gave no growth of the
bacteria.

In testing the effect of acids upon the development of blight
bacteria, a ^ per cent, of malic acid was added to the usual infu-
sion of potato. This prevented the formation of a i>ellicle, tur-
bidit}^ or zoogla3a, but gave a very considerable cloudj^ sediment,,
largely made up of loosely aggregated groups of blight bacteria,
which were brilliantly^ refractive. A similar solution with 2 per
cent, of malic acid gave a slightly less abundant sediment, but with
otherwise the same results. Some of the latter was transferred
to a corn-meal solution, producing the characteristics of a pear-
blight culture, except the formation of zooglcea. After some
days this was introduced into a pear tree, which in due course of
time gave the true blight, showing that the bacteria of the acid
solution were really blight bacteria. Attempts to grow them in
a nutrient 5 per cent, solution of citric and tartaric acids have
not been successful.

Testing the nature of the bacteria in cultures producing
limited growth, by inoculating directly into the tree, has not, as a
rule, proved successful, as for some reason they seem unable to
gain a footing in the living tissues. It is therefore necessary to
transfer them first to richly nutrient cultures, from which, after
a time, they may be introduced into the tree, and, if the blight
bacteria are present, will start the disease.

Cultivation in Solid Media. — In test-tube cultures with nutrient
gelatine the most characteristic results have been obtained by
adding a drop containing blight bacteria to the gelatine while
liquid, and thoroughly distributing the germs by shaking the
tube. In from two to three days the gelatine contains numerous
small white dots, which, upon examination under the microscope,
prove to be a mass of bacteria of the usual appearance. The
dots are globular or oval, and increase to about .5 mm. in
diameter. No further growth or change takes place, and in this
condition they remain for weeks, without liquefying or otherwise
atlecting the gelatine.

When sown upon the surface of the gelatine by drawing a
needle or glass rod over it, or by placing a drop on it, the growth
is feeble and does not amount to more than a slight shining
appearance of the surface.

A nutrient solution made from an unripe pear, in which blight

336 PROCEEDINaS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

germs wei'e well distributed by shaking and then left undis-
turbed for two days, gave the same isolated white dots as in
gelatine; but they dropped to the bottom of the liquid upon
being jarred. The bacteria were evidently prevented from
moving freely by the jelly, which was not, however, thick
enough to keep the groups in place when its cohesion was
once disturbed. Fruit jellies, doubtless, may be found to be
convenient media for the cultivation of this species of bac-
teria.

No success has been attained in the use of agar agar, but
whether due to a want of adaptability in the substance, or to
wrong manipulation, must be left to future experiments to
determine.

The opaque solid cultures proving most successful have been
conducted upon freshly gathered unripe pears. Slices of these
are placed under a moist bell-jar, and infected by touching with
a needle that has been dipped in some substance containing the
bacteria. In two or three days fine milk}^ drops, like beads of
dew, will appear scattered over the surface for 5 mm. or more
about the infected spot. These will become somewhat lai-ger
after a time, while the spot which received the infection will turn
slightly brown, the tissues gradually wasting away and forming
a small depression.

If, however, the slices, having freshly cut surfaces both above
and below, are laid upon a plate with a little water, and placed
under a bell-jar, the result is not the same. The dew-like drops
appear within forty-eight hours, as in the other case, but increase
rapidly in size, while a drop is also formed at the point of infec-
tion. Drops finally appear over the whole surface of the slice.
They remain more or less distinct, and soon become as large as
a pea, retaining the globular or rounded form to a remarkable
degree. Microscopically the}'^ ai-e composed of the usual form
of blight bacteria, suspended in a colorless fluid. After about a
week, the drops coalesce and the tissues of the pear begin to
break down. This sort of culture requires no precautions of
sterilizing, as no other bacteria can multiply upon it till after the
cells of the pear begin to die.

When blight bacteria are sown upon slices of baked or boiled
potato, they spread out over the surface in a thin, slightly moist
layerj which is usually somewhat yellowish, but do not grow

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA,, 1886.

PLATE

'^^

{

n

U !'0

■^ 3

i.';_)

4

o ^

O Co ^

8 Or,
oo

<i

•>.J .--v

t

■■-x*.

(i

y

^„>'

z

o O

a

J. C. ARTHUR Del

MICROCOCCUS AMYLOVORUS bur.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 337

readily, or produce a characteristic appearance. Under the
microscope the cells are strongly refractive.

A boiled potato was infected by thrusting a platinum wire,
smeared with blight bacteria, into one end. After sixteen days
it was cut open. No external change had taken place, and, to
the unaided eye, no internal change either ; the odor and texture
were still those of a freshly boiled potato. The microscope, how-
ever, revealed the blight bacteria in every part of the potato, in
irregular motionless masses, and with more than the usual
refractiveness.

These opaque solid cultures have brought out one fact verj'-
distinctly, which is, that Micrococcus amylovorus requires a
large supply of water for its best development — a fact which has
an economic bearing.

Behavior toward Staining Fluids. — So far as trial has been
made, nothing especially characteristic has been detected to dis-
tinguish this form of bacteria from the majority of micrococci.
The most successful results have been obtained with a watery
solution of Bismarck-brown, especially in cover-glass prepara-
tions. These make excellent specimens when mounted in
Canada balsam.

The zoogloea are inclined to be too deeply stained by this pro-
cess, and for most purposes they are best studied unstained.
They may be well preserved by mounting in glycerine.

Hematoxylin has also given good results, but has not been
found particularly useful.

Chemical Products. — The chemical changes brought about by
the activity of the blight bacteria have not yet been fully and
carefully worked out. The most obvious product is carbon
dioxide, which often passes off so freely from a cultivation as to
produce a slow effervescence. Butyric acid and alcohol are
formed in very small quantities, if at all. The tests by which
these facts have been determined have already been published,^
and need not be repeated here. Vigorous cultures of the bacteria
in infusion of potato give no reaction for glucose with Fehling's
solution ; and blighting tissues from the tree give no indication
by the same test of more than the normal amount of glucose to
be found in healthy tissues. On the other hand a quantitative

^ Rep. N. Y. Agric. Exper. Station for 1885, p. 247 ; and less fully in
Amer. Nat., vol. xix, 1885, p. 1181.

23

c

338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

determination of sound and blighting pears, taken from the tree
at the same time, shows considerably less sugar in the latter.

A favorite explanation with horticulturists of the action of fire-
blight upon the pear-tree, has been to say that the sap is poisoned.
This poison was supposed to be introduced by insects, or to be
due to some disorganization of the tissues. Although it is now
known that specific bacteria are directlj'^ answerable for the dis-
ease, it is yet worth while to see if the old idea of a poison has
not some foundation in fact.

It has been ascertained that certain bacteria produce, during
their growth, characteristic poisons which are classed under the
name of ptomaines. Most of the ptomaines are non-volatile, and
readily soluble in water or alcohol. The chemical tests which
are applied for their detection cannot be considered conclusive
except when taken collectively. The tests tried below are among
the most satisfactory known at present.^

A cultivation in infusion of potato, giving about 200 cc. of liquid
was filtered, and the filtrate evaporated to a syrup. This was
treated with alcohol, and the solution tested with the most char-
acteristic test for ptomaines — the reduction of potassic ferric-
cyanide. Other portions of the solution were successively tested
with phospho-molybdic acid, potassio-mercuric iodide, and iodine
in potassic iodide, all of which failed to give any distinctive
reactions.

Another trial was made with about 200 cc. of material prepared
by cooking a potato in just enough water to cover it, sterilizing,
and cultivating the bacteria in it as usual. In four days from
beginning of the culture it was filtered ; the residue upon the
filter was treated with 100 cc. of distilled water, slightly acidulated
with hydrochloric acid, heated to 70°C. and filtered. The two
filtrates were united and evaporated to a syrup. This was digested
in the cold with alcohol containing a little sodic hydrate. This
solution was tested as before, and also with platinic chloride and
concentrated sulphuric acid, and all with no distinctive reactions.

A third trial was made with a boiled potato, which had been
permeated with the blight. The extract was made by the Stas-
Otto method, and the same reagents used as in the last case, with
equally negative results.

1 Cf. Brieger, Ueber Ptomaine, 1885, p. 33, et seq.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 339

These tests do not cover the possibility of the ptomaine being
volatile, which is really not very great. It is yet necessary to
make tests of freshly blighted tissues from the tree, which can
only be done during the hot months.

Action of the Organism in the Living Plant. — The bacteria of
blight have the power of growth and multiplication in the pres-
ence of the living cells of the pear, and in this one important
respect differ essentially from other species of bacteria. By arti-
ficial inoculation into growing unripe pears, which give most
marked and certain results, it is found that other bacteria are
entirely innocuous, at once disappearing without having made
any growth or induced any changes in the tissue of the pear. If
blight bacteria in active condition are intermixed with the other
forms, they penetrate the cells, multiply, and finally bring about
the disorganization and death of the tissues which marks the pro-
gress of the disease, but the associated forms disappear the same
as when introduced alone, and the product is a mass of practically
pure blight bacteria.

This result is rendered possible on account of the fact already
stated, that the blight bacteria penetrate the tissues, and main-
tain their normal growth for some time (days or weeks), before
the life of the cells is sufficiently interfered with to permit the
growth of other forms. The bacteria always extend beyond the
visible location of the disease — in small branches, often to the
distance of a third of a meter or more.

One of the properties which enables this species to successfully
penetrate the pear-tree is evidently its unusual indifference to
acids, which prevents most other forms from making any
growth; the juices of the pear give a strong acid reaction with
test paper.

What chemical changes are brought about by its activity in
the plant cannot be definitely stated, further than to say that a
mucilage or gum, which is soluble in water, is produced in abun-
dance, with the disengagement of carbon dioxide. The contents
of the cells, together with the cell- walls which have not been
liquefied or changed into stony tissue, pass over into this viscous
product.^

^ Rep. N. T. Agric. Exper. Station for 1885, p. 248 ; Araer. Nat., vol,
xix, 1885, p. 1181.

340 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

It was early observed by cultivators, being recorded by Coxe,
that succulent shoots blight the most readily, and any process of
cultivation which as far as possible prevents succulency has
always been considered an aid in keeping the disease in check.
The avidity of the blight bacteria for water has been well demon-
strated in the cultures on slices of pears. There seems to be
some connection between these facts and the well-known fact
that the disease shows different degrees of virulence in different
varieties of fruit trees, especially in different varieties of the
pear. The variation, or at least part of it, to be observed in
pears, apples, quinces, hawthorns, etc., may be due to some inhe-
rent difference in the nature of the host, not readily formulated ;
for we find that the blight bacteria will grow to only a slight
extent in the succulent peach shoots, and not at all in most
other plants.^ But in varieties of the same fruit it may reason-
ably be inferred that to a considerable extent the difference in
the progress of the disease is due to physical causes.

To determine what relation the hydration of the tissues holds
to this question, a series of determinations of the percentage of
water in the parts of the tree most subject to blight has been
begun. These are yet incomplete, and can only now be referred
to briefly.

The Bartlett and Seckel pears very well represent the extremes,
the first being most affected by the disease and the second least.
Twigs taken from the tree in February were found to contain 50'2
per cent, and 50"85 per cent, of water respectively. Twigs taken
in the same way April 30, bearing flower buds, but with the
leaves removed, gave 68"7 per cent, and 67*3 per cent, of water.
The half-grown fruit, taken the first week in July, gave '79*3 per
cent, of water for the Bartlett and 71 per cent, for the Seckel.
According to these figures the amount of water in the Bartlett
and Seckel twigs during the winter is practically the same, but
during growth both the twigs and fruit of the Bartlett contain
more water than those of the Seckel. These numbers give some
support to the view that succulency and the strength of the dis-
ease are directly related, but the data are yet too incomplete to
warrant a definite statement.

1 Rep. N. Y. Agric. Exper. Station for 1884, pp. 362, 377 ; Amer. Nat.,
vol. xix, 1885, p. 1182.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341

EXPLANATION" OF PLATE IIL

The drawings were made with a camera lucida and a Spencer's y'o-objec-
tive, homogeneous immersion, of 125° balsam angle. They are unifoimly
magnified 890 diameters.

Fig. 1. — Micrococcus amylovorus Bur., grown upon a slice of boiled

potato, stained with Bismarck-brown and mounted in Canada balsam.
Fig. 2. — From a cultivation in hay infusion : a, separate bacteria ; 6, zoo-

gloea. The large mass, only part of which is shown, is made up of

smaller masses more or less united.
Fig. 3. — Small zoogloea from a potato infusion, drawn from a preparation

in Canada balsam, stained with Bismarck-brown.
Fig. 4. — Poition of a zooglcea mass from the same culture, showing an

envelope free from bacteria. Drawn from an unstained preparation

mounted in glycerine.
Fig. 5. — Three zoogloea from the same culture.
Fig. 6. — From another culture in hay infusion.

342 proceedings of the academy op [1886.

October 5.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-four persons present.

A paper, entitled " Observations on Multiplication in Amoeba;,"
by Lillie E. Holman, was presented for publication.

October 12.

Mr. Chas. Morris in the chair.

Twenty-two persons present.

Notes on the Lichens in the Herbarium of the Academy. — At a
meeting of the Botanical Section, held October 11, Dr. J. W.
Eckfeldt, to whom had been committed the task of examining
and arranging the Lichens in possession of the Academy, reported
the result of his work, which had extended over two years.
Besides the collections upon the shelves, made by Schweinitz, and
by him bequeathed to the Academy, and that received from the
late Prof Tuckerman, he had found stowed away among miscel-
laneous packages : 1st, a collection made by Thomas G. Lea, of
North American species, many without names, or incorrectly
named ; 2d, a small collection made by H. W. Ravenel, chiefly from
the vicinity of Aiken, or along the Santee Canal in South Carolina,
in all about 60 to 70 species ; 3d, a small collection of Arctic spe-
cies made by Dr. Hayes ; 4th, a small collection of European
species made by Parmentier at a very earl}^ date; 5th, a set of
Scotch Lichens from Mr. Manghen ; and a few scattered species
from various American collectors. To each of these collections
he had given a careful microscopic examination, and had named
and classified them on the basis of Prof. Tuckerman's Genera
Lichenum. He had also added to these from his own private
herbarium more than 400 species, both North American and
foreign. All these collections had been incorporated in one, and
occupy one of the cases in the lower room, as a nucleus for the
Academy's general collection of Lichens.

For obvious reasons it had been deemed advisable to maintain
apart and undisturbed the t3'pe collections of Schweinitz and
Tuckerman, but a general catalogue has been prepared including
all, by which proper reference to the contents of each is facilitated.
He had, moreover, gone carefullj^ through the Schweinitzian col-
lection, and, while leaving the original names unchanged, had
indicated upon the outside of each packet such changes as are
required by the present state of knowledge.
The total number of species of Lichens now in the Academy's

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343

Herbarium is 736. In the general collection are 570 species, and
in the Schweinitzian are 462. The general collection contains
244 species not found in the Schweinitzian, and the latter has
282 species not found in the former. In all, 65 genera are well
represented.

In regard to the Schweinitzian collection he remarked that the
same species often there appeared under several names, being
simply in different stages of development. Genera too were
founded upon juvenescent stages or gonidial conditions which, from
the time of Acharius to that of Schweinitz and later, were con-
sidered sufficient to establish generic distinctions. For example,
such genera as Leparia, Isidium and By^tsus, were then deemed
valid, but are now considered to be, some of them young and
irioid states of plants mostly belonging to the section Lecanora ;
others, sterile states of Omphalaria, Ceenogonia, or other Colle-
matous Lichens.

He spoke of several rare and interesting specimens in the col-
lection. Of these, in the Schweinitz Herbarium, is a crustaceous
Lichen found in 1812 at Salem, N. C, on a granitic rock, and
called by the collector Gyalecta Candida^ and by this name known
only to a few up to the year 1866. At this period Prof. Tucker-
man described the plant in an Appendix to his Lichens of Cali-
fornia as Opegrapha ontocheila, thus placing it permanently in a
well-established genus of gymnocarpous Lichens. This specimen
was the only one known until 1885 when Mr. Green found upon high
projecting schist rocks along the Catawba River at Landsford,
Chester Co., S. C, a lichen which was supposed to be new, until
Prof Tuckerman, just previous to his last illness, identified it
with that found by Schweinitz as above. Dr. Eckfeldt also re-
ferred to a remarkable foliaceous Lichen found near Cincinnati by
Mr. T. G. Lea in 1889, formerly known as Parmelia Ohionis (Lea,
Catal. PI. Cincinnati, p. 45), but since described by Tuckerman
as Physcia Leana. So far as Dr. Eckfeldt was aware, this rare
species had not since been found. He also referred to the diffi-
culties encountered in the examination of much of the material,
many of the types being old and fragile, having lost the parts
most important for study, for want of proper care. Only a prac-
ticed eye, aided by constant use of the microscope, and by com-
parison with authentic specimens, can surely determine the doubt-
ful and difficult forms present in this section of cryptogamic
botany.

October 19.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-seven persons present.

A paper entitled " The Genera Mesonyx and Pachygena Cope,"
by Wm. B. Scott, was presented for publication.

344 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

On the Interdependence of Plants. — Mr. Thomas Meehan called
attention to the well-known fact in geographical botanj', that
species of plants which once had evidently a wide dispersion now
existed only as separate colonies often of a few plants only, the
intermediates between these widely separated colonies having
evidently disappeared. The cause of these disappearances had
not been definitely determined. It was found that the still exist-
ing individuals were evidently in good health ; they flowered
freel}-, and perfected seeds, but still the plants did not spread.
He gave a number of illustrations within his own observation of
a few rare plants that had maintained their existence for over a
quarter of a century, with about the same number of individuals
now as at the beginning of the term. As the seeding was regular
and perfect, why was dispersion arrested ? There could be but
one answer. Something prevented the germination of the seeds,
or of subsequent growth after germination. No doubt there may
be other causes, but this one must have a leading influence.

It then becomes an interesting branch of study to inquire why
these seeds do not germinate, and thus aid the plant to recover
the ground lost through destructive agencies ?

An observation extending over about six 3'ears led him to con-
clude that there was much in the interdependence of plants. What-
ever afi'ected the existence of individuals of one species might
lead to the extermination of numerous others, and the successful
endeavor of one to establish itself in one locality gave the neces-
sary opportunity to follow and sustain themselves. This obser-
vation was as follows : A wood, chiefly of chestnut and oak, of
about an acre in extent, was turned into a picnic ground — a place
for summer pleasure parties. All the shrubby undergrowth was
cut away. The plants which might have grown up, were kept
tolerably well trodden down by the numerous visitors to the
wood, except one solitary blackberry plant (Bubus villosus),
which, being thorn}', led to its avoidance by human feet. After
the second summer, some change in railroad arrangements led to
the abandonment of the wood for picnic purposes, and plants had
a chance to grow up again without disturbance from human
beings. The blackberry plant, by the aid of its creeping roots
now forms a thicket of about thirty feet in diameter. The follow-
ing list of plants growing among the blackberries, that were not
found in any part of the wood, except the last two, which were
in small quantities here and there, was made in October of this
year : —

Eupatorium perfoliatum^ Bubus occidentalis, Liriodendron
tulipiferum, Cornus alternifolia, Smilacina racemosa, Ambrosia
artemisisefoUa, Laurus sassafras, Polygonum Persicaria, Achillea
millefolium, Solidago canadensis, Mulgedium acuminatum, Bidens
frondosa, Silene verticillata, Fragaria virginiana, Aster longi-
folia, Eupatorium album, Circsea lutetiana, Geranium maculatum,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 345

Acer rubriim, Phytolacca decandra, 3Iuhlenbergia diffusa, Poten-
tilla canadensis, the last two to some extent in the wood.

All the kinds, however, o;rew in the vicinity of the acre of
woodland, though not within its limits, and it was eas}' to note
that they had grown from seeds falling or brought to the black-
berry patch during the last three or four years. Those who are
familiar with the seeds of these plants will understand that there
is nothing special about the seeds of these species that would
easily lead to their being brought there by birds that might
rendezvous in the thickets. We must look to the wind as the
chief agent in transporting them there. This being the case, we
should look for the plants from wind-sown seeds in other por-
tions of the wood, as well as in the blackberrj^ patch. That they
are not in the wood elsewhere permits us to say that the shade,
moisture, preservation of decaying leaves, or of some other inci-
dent not acceptable to other plants in the wood, but favorable to
these strangers, gave them the chance to sprout and grow.
They were, in fact, dependent on the blackberry for their
first start in life. This conclusion was further evidenced
by the fact that, though some of the annuals had evidently
seeded and reproduced plants for several successive seasons, no
plants were found spreading out of the protecting area of the
blackberry thicket. Certainly these species were all dependent
here on this plant, as this plant would probably be dependent on
others in some other instances.

How some plants can exist, grow healthily, produce seed, and
not spread, Mr. Meehan illustrated in the case of Shortia galaci-
folia, the original locality of Michaux having a few months ago
been rediscovered b}'^ Professor C. S. Sargent. Though it had
maintained itself for the best part of a century, it had existed
without spreading. Some circumstance had evidently prevented
the seed from germinating, and these circumstances would
undoubtedly be controlled by the presence or absence of some
friendly plant. He offered the facts as a contribution to the
study of the interdependence of plants.

October 26.
Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.
Thirteen persons present.
The following was ordered to be printed : —

346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

OBSERVATION ON MULTIPLICATION IN AMCEB^.
BY LIIiLIE E. HOLMAN.

On the 4th of July, 1886, I was examining the forms of life
contained in a Holman life-slide, which had been filled for
several hours. It contained different Infusoria, and among
other animals, specimens of JEolosoma. But it seemed for some
time as if there were no amoebae in the slide, until I discovered
a small one near the channel. In shape it seemed like an elon-
gated triangle, and was rather torpid, or at least moved but little.
While I was examining it, it moved up closer to the line of the
channel, and another amo3ba, about twice the size of the first
one, came gliding on the scene. It moved up very close to the
other, and in a few moments I noticed that it looked as if it were
trying to swallow the smaller amoeba, in the same manner that
it does its ordinary prey. As I had watched many amoebae and
had never seen anything like this, and as I knew that they did
not prey on each other, and the question of their conjugation
was a very doubtful one, I dismissed the idea of the larger
absorbing the smaller, and concluded it was merel}' the fact that
they were in too tight a place to allow of their passing each other
which gave them this appearance. I watched them constantly
for about half an hour, in course of which time I became con-
vinced that something unusual was going on.

The larger amoeba had entirely surrounded the smaller one,
which, however, did not seem to lose its vitalit3^ First it seemed
to be under the endosarc of the larger, and then above it.
Somertimes it would project a pseudopod out from beyond the
ectosarc of the larger animal. All the time it was distinctly
visible in its own individuality, if one may so call it, and did not
at all seem to be trying to escape. I called Mr. Holman's atten-
tion to the singularity of their behavior, and expressed my
belief that it was a case of either cannibalism or conjugation.
He expressed his disbelief in either of these cases, and observ-
ing that the water in the slide was evaporating, we allowed a
little to creep in under the closed edge of the cover-glass. This
seemed to relieve the large amoeba from the constrained position
and flat contour which it had assumed, and it immediately com-

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 347

menced to put out pseudopods and move away ; and the smaller
one moved off with it, evidently engulfed in the larger one, and
quiescent in that position.

The small amoeba occupied a position in the upper part of
the larger one. As this last moved on, it seemed to push
the small one in an opposite direction from that which its gran-
ules were taking, till it reached about the centre of its body.
Then it commenced an evident effort to expel the smaller one.
It reached out its pseudopods in every direction, graduall}- ex-
pelling the smaller one until it was completely discharged. The
smaller one, by this time, assumed an almost spherical shape.

At last the large amoeba ceased moving, and commenced to
expel refuse matter such as is common with them. It had
anchored itself near some other refuse matter, probably vege-
table, and really looked as if it was using it as a sort of grapple
for the purpose of ridding itself of the rejected smaller amoeba.
It was successful ; for in a few moments it moved away to the
upper part of the field, leaving the round ball, looking in every
respect like an encysted amoeba, near the little group of refuse.
It went on in the field, and we followed it for some time, when it
became quiet, and we went back to the encysted one. I watched
it to see what would happen next, for it seemed as if there must
be some strange sequel to our remarkable observation, and the
watching was not in vain. The flat disk commenced by a sort
of contractile movement, to throw out particles or granules, as if
it were laying eggs. I can think of no other expression, although
the particles, while approximate in size, had no regularity of
shape. This continued till the amoeba again assumed its clear
and transparent appearance, and at last, seeming to fully regain
its activity, put out a pseudopod and moved in the field, leaving
behind it a group of the particles or granules. Only for a little
while, however, did it move ; in a few moments it lost its anima-
tion, seemed to become transparent, and at last faded into one of
those disks which seem to be merely the shells of once active
forms. I did not see it move again.

This observation was carried on continuously during two
hours and a half, and every stage watched most closely. I was
at a loss what to call it, if not a clear case of conjugation and
separation.

348 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

The most convincing proof to my mind that this was a pro-
ceeding which was for a purpose, was given when, two nights
after, this slide, which was laid carefully aside for future exami-
nation, was found to be full of young amoebae. They literally
swarmed ; I counted in the field at one time twenty-four of uni-
form size, while I have no hesitation in saying that there were
between one and two hundred in the slide, which had before held
but two. The worn-out disc was recognized, and also what
seemed to be the remains of the larger amoeba.

1886.] NAttniAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA.. 349

November 2.

The President, Dr. Jos. Leidy, in the chair.

Nineteen persons present.

The death of Dr. Geo. Martin, a member, October 28, 1886,
was announced.

November 9.
Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.

Twenty-two persons present.

The death of Chas. C. Phillips, a member, November 5, 1886,
and that of John S. Haines, a member, November 4, 1886, were
announced.

The Publication Committee reported that the paper entitled
" The Genera Mesonyx and Pachyaena, Cope," by Wm. B. Scott,
would be published in Vol. IX, Part 2, of the Journal of the
Academy.

November 16.

Mr. Thos. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.

Twenty -five persons present.

A paper entitled " On an XJndescribed Meteoric Iron from East
Tennessee," by F. A. Genth, Ph. D., was presented for publication.

*

On Petiolar Glands in some Onagraceae. — Mr. Thomas Meehan
remarked that stipules were unknown in Onagracese, but in Lud-
wigia (Isnardia) palustris there were two minute conical gelatin-
ous glands that appeared to be stipular. They existed in series of
specimens representing the Atlantic and Pacific coast, and from
Europe, those from California being larger than in specimens
from other locations. They are found in all the species of Lud-
wigia and Jussieua that he had been able to examine. In these
they appeared petiolar rather than stipular. In the dried speci-
mens of Circeea a dark spot indicated the position occupied by
the glands in other species. They mostly varied in form and
exact position with the species, and only for having been wholly
overlooked by describers might have afibrded some good specific
characters. The discovery he regarded as interesting, as con-
firming the views of those botanists who had brought Turnera-
cese^ in which the petiolar glands were known to exist, in close
relation with Onagraceae.

In the specimens of Lxidwigia palustris, dried to exhibit with
this communication to the Academy, a single capsule only, cut

350 1>R0CEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

across for examination, projected the seed into his face while the
capsule was being examined with a lens, indicating a projecting
power not before known to exist in the species.

November 23.
Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.
Nineteen persons present.

Manganese Zinc Serpentine from Franklin, N. J. — Prof.
George A. Koenig placed on record the determination of a man-
ganese zinc serpentine from Franklin, N. J. The material was
collected in summer, 1885, as a very peculiar Willemite, so called
at the mine. It is a very compact mineral substance, having a
dark brown dull color and subconchoidal fracture, the splinters
resembling horn chips. It is translucent on the edges, and when
ground into a thin plate transmits a uniform brown-j'ellow light.
Under the microscope this section of the purest material shows
strings of minute black grains. Between two crossed nicol
prisms the section appears light, proving a crystalline structure
other than isometric. But a few grains, a light yellow in ordi-
nary light, behave like an isometric substance, and are probably
grains of yellow garnet, which is one of the associate minerals.
Spec. gr. := 2*635. It is decomposed by sulphuric acid like
Serpentine.

The mean of two well-agreeing analyses gave

Si02 = 42-20 (including 0-298 MgO,0-2 ZnO).

Fe203= 2-80

MnO = 7-44

ZnO = 3-90

MgO = 29-24

H2O = 14-04

99-62
Let Fe^O^ be supposed to be present as Franklinite, requiring
0*8 ZnO and 0-53 ZnO, then we have 4-15 per cent, of Franklinite
mixed with the silicate, and the composition is now

1-390
1-462)
0-194 > 1-733
0-077)
1-533

100-16
This gives the ratio, SiO^ : RO : H^O

1 1-25 1-1

Si02

41-70

MgO

29-24

MnO

6-91

ZnO

■ ■■ -■

3-10

H^O

14-04

Franklinite

4-15

Pyroxene

1-02

1886.] NAtURAI, SCIENCES OF 1>HILADEL1>HIA. 351

Under the circumstances, that is, in view of the microscope
showing the admixture of an isometric or amorphous body, this
ratio is sufficient to establish the material as a Serpentine.

Associated with the Serpentine, besides the minerals already
mentioned, is a light grayish fibrous mineral. This is composed
of Calcite and two Silicates, a silicate decomposable by Hcl
(probably equal to the above serpentine), and a silicate insoluble
in Hcl, which is probably a pyroxene. Several analyses have
been made without establishing the nature satisfactorily.

On Miocene Fossils from Southern New Jersey. — Prof. Heilprtn
called attention to a limited collection of fossils from near Bridge-
ton and Jericho, Cumberland Co., New Jersey', representing the
Miocene formation of that State. The species identified were :
Terehra curvilirata, Turritella aequistriata, Turritella Gumher-
landia, Trochita centralis, Fissurella Griscomi, Ghama congre-
gata, Astarte distans {^indulata), Grassatella mehna, Area cen-
tenaria, Nucula obliqua (proxima), Perna maxillata, Pecten
Madisonius^ Pecten sp. ? Orbicula luguhris.

A number of these forms — nearly one-half — had not been
identified in the State before, although fairly abundant in the
Miocene tract of the region to the south. They are therefore
interesting as bearing directl}^ upon the question of horizon
which the scantily-represented Miocene fauna of New Jersey
indicates. The speaker stated that in his work, " Contributions
to the Tertiary Geology and Paleontology of the United States"
(1884), he had suggested that the probable position of the
deposits in question would be found to be in the " Marylandian "
series — Lower Atlantic Miocene — a view sustained by the addi-
tional fossils that have now been brought to light.

On the Eelictites of Luray Gave. — Dr. Charles S. Dollet
remarked that during a recent visit to the celebrated Luray
Caverns his attention was called to the peculiar branching stalac-
tites known as helictites (e/J?, a spiral), and the question arose as
to the method by which a stalactite gives oflF a horizontal branch
at right angles ; this branch in its turn perhaps sending out twigs
at greater or lesser angles, and at varying degrees of inclination.

For a better opportunity of studj-ing this interesting phe-
nomenon he was permitted to visit in company with Dr. Leidy a
chamber seldom opened to inspection, and which, from the deli-
cate and fantastic character of its limy deposits, has been called
the " Toy Shop." Here the stalactites were found to be of very
recent formation, small, hollow, and increasing rapidly. Many
branching specimens, or helictites, in all stages of growth, were
to be seen. After some time spent in a vain search for an expla-
nation of this anomalous structure, he happened to notice two
specimens, the incipient branches of which were directed towards
each other ; stretched tightly between the branches, and entering

362 PROCEEDmGS OP THE ACADEMY 01* [1886.

the hollow tip of each, was a delicate thread, bearing a string of
dew-like drops glistening brightly in the candle-light. Further
search revealed numerous specimens in which the lime-water
trickling down the stalactite met a similar filament, and being
partially diverted bad formed a drop at the point of junction;
about this drop beautiful aragonite spicules were forming the
hollow horizontal branch, the drop of water in the end being
retained in position by the filament piercing it, and upon which
it is gradually pushed along as evaporation deposits the lime
behind it. The length of the branch depends, of course, upon
the length of time in which the filament remains intact.

These filaments, which are thus seen to be the cause of the
formation of lateral offshoots to stalactites, are the products of a
small cave spider.

November 30.

The President, Dr. Jos. Leidy, in the chair.

Thirty-three persons present.

A paper entitled " On Schorlomite as a variety of Melanite,"
by Geo. A. Koenig, M. D., was presented for publication.

On Hsematoxylin in the Bark of Saraca Indica. — Miss Helen
C. De S. Abbott stated that De Candolle ^ and Linnseus describe
Saraca Indica as a member of the famil}- Leguminosse. Accord-
ing to De Candolle it belongs to the genus Jonesia, Saraca Linn.,
and is separated by five genera from the genus Hsematoxylon or
the logwood.

In an article on certain drugs indigenous to India, Dr. Waring^
gives an account of the medicinal uses of the bark of Saraca
Indica. The attention of Messrs. Parke, Davis & Co., Detroit,
Michigan, was called to this drug, and through their correspond-
ents in India they secured a supply, samples of which have been
submitted to the speaker for a chemical analysis. The full
results of this analysis will appear elsewhere, but it is now
desired to announce a discovery of practical and scientific
interest in this connection.

A coloring principle, identical with logwood dye, has been
isolated by her from the bark of Saraca Indica^ where it existed
in two conditions, as hsematoxylin and an oxidized product.
The former was separated as yellow crystals, analogous in form
to haematoxylin crystals from the true logwood, Hsematoxylon
campechianum. The alcoholic extract of the bark contained
about 18 per cent, of a red colored substance, which agreed in
color and dye tests with a like constituent found in logwood.

' Pro. Sys. Nat. Reg. Vegetabilis, vol. ii, p. 487.
^ British Med. Jour., June 6, 1885, p. 1145.

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA.

353

Mordanted cotton fabric was dyed with hsematoxylin, extracted
by ether from the Saraca bark, and presented the characteristic
logwood dye colors.

The following is a table of dye wood colors with reagents,
yielded by Brazil wood and logwood :^

Reagents.

Brasilin.

Hematoxylin.

Alkalies,

Claret-red sol., . .

Reddish pui-ple sol.

Acids (dilute),

Orange ppt., . .

Pink solution.

" (strong),

Yellow " . .

Alum sol.,

Crimson-red ppt.,

Yellow then violet sol.

Lime-water, .

<( (

Bluish purple ppt.

Ferrous salts,

Purplish bl'k '

" black ''

Ferric "

Brownish red '

Black "

Copper "

U (t <

Purple sol.

Lead

Crimson-red '

Violet "

Mercuric "

Yellow •

Yellow "

Silver

u <

Gray ppt.

Tartar emetic.

Rose-colored '

Purple sol.

Stannous chloride.

Red

" ppt.

Sodium aluminate,

Claret-red '

<< a

The extracts of Saraca Indica bark, containing the coloring
principle, were tested with these reagents, arid it was observed
that the reactions agreed with the hsematoxylin colors, and in no
case with those of brasilin. However, the colors produced by
different alkalies varied in tints as she had found in both the
logwood and Saraca extracts, but the general term " reddish
purple solution " is comprehensive. A rose-violet precipitate
was yielded by stannous chloride solution with the neutralized
acidified extracts of the barks.

The bark of the logwood-tree is not used for making the com-
mercial logwood extracts, the wood of the tree being employed
for this purpose. The presence of a small quantitj^ of hsema-
toxylin was determined in the specimens of logwood-bark which
she examined, and with the bark extracts the same reactions with
reagents were obtained as with the logwood extracts, but owing
to the smaller percentage of dye in the bark the colors were less
intense. In the case of the Saraca Indica bark the colors were
very brilliant and indicated the presence of a larger proportion of
the coloring matter than in the logwood bark. These results
should encourage investigators to secure specimens of the wood
of the Saraca^ in order to determine if it contains the coloring
principle, and should this be ascertained affirmatively, whether it
exists in sufficiently large quantities to warrant its introduction
as a new source of this commercial product.

To exhibit the colors produced by alkalies upon the dye from

1 S. P. Sadtler and Wm. L. Rowland, Am. Jour, of Phar., Feb., 1881.
24

354 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

logwood bark and Saraca Indica bark, the powdered material
was macerated over the water-bath with distilled or filtered river
water acidulated with dilute sulphuric acid (1 part to 50), the ex-
tract was filtered and the process repeated until no more color
was removed. This extract was treated directly with the reagents.
Excess of reagents produced darker tints, and after a time the
solutions were decolorized.

Keagents.

Hccmatoxylon Campechianum. \ ^^

Saraca Indica.
yxylon Campechi

Acidified Extract.

Sodium Carbonate.
Sodium Hydrate.
Potassium Hydrate.
Ammonia.

Pale purple to reddish violet sol.
Blue violet ppt. and sol.
Red-colored solution.
Pinkish-purple solution.

Among other constituents contained in the Saraca bark, catechin
and saponin were determined. Their presence along with haema-
toxylin is significant as showing the chemical position of Saraca
in relation to the genera Acacia and Hsematoxylort ; catechin and
saponin being found, as is well known, in Acacia. The evolutionary
position of the order Leguminosae, to which these genera belong,
was pointed out in a former paper ,^ and it was stated that all
orders containing saponin came under the middle division of M.
Heckel's botanical scheme,^ or multiplicity of floral elements.
The facts accumulated from recent researches, since the publica-
tion of her article in the Botanical Gazette, and the discovery
of saponin in many plants of widely diflferent genera and families,
seem to justify and confirm what was stated in the article
referred to above, " saponin is invariably absent where the floral
elements are simple ; it is invariably absent where the floral
elements are condensed to their greatest extent. Its position is
plainly that of a factor in the great middle realm of plant life
when the elements of the individual are striving to condense, and
thus increase their physiological action and the economy of parts. '"^

George McClellan, M. D., and George L. English were elected
members.

Prof. E. Selenka was elected a correspondent.
The following was ordered to be printed : —

' Certain chemical constituents of plants considered in relation to their
morphology and evolution, by H. C. De S. Abbott. Botanical Gazette,
vol. xi, 1886, p. 270.

* Les plantes et latheoriede revolution, Revue Scieniifique, 13 Mars, 1886.

^ Loc cit. Botanical Gazette.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 355

ON SCHORLOMITE AS A VARIETY OF MELANITE.
BY GEO. A. KOENIG, PH. D.

On the basis of a titanium Melanite from a new locality in
Southwestern Colorado, the hypothesis is proposed that Schor-
lomite from Magnet Cove, Arkansas, may be considered as a
Melanite in which Titanium replaces both Silicon and Aluminum.
By a series of analyses of Schorlomite and Melanite, it is pro-
posed to establish the above hjqoothesis beyond doubt. The
following results are merely given as preliminary information.

The material from Colorado, obtained through Moritz Stockder,
Mining Engineer at Lake City, shows the Melanite as black
masses imbedded in a greenish yellow, fine granular matrix, with
undefined boundaries. No crystal planes were observed. The
color is deep black, brownish at thin edges, and in thin plates.
It has an uneven fracture, rather resinous lustre. Sp. gr. = 3" 689.

Thin sections under microscope show the homogeneous charac-
ter and optical indiflerence of the substance.

B. B. several splinters fused at 3 with slight formation of
bubbles (CO^). Hydrochloric acid decomposes the mineral very
slowly. The analysis gave in two determinations :

Si02 =30-n

Ti02 = 8-11

APO^ = 2-26

Fe^O^ = 22-67

CaO =34-29

MgO = 0-304

C02 = 1-48 (loss by fusion).

9982

0'5 gr. decomposed in sealed tube required 2*2 cc. of per-
manganate (titre = 0-0058 Fe). TiO^ + APO^ were separated
from Fe^O^ by (NH^'S in tartaric solution, and APO^ from TiO^
by acetic acid according to Gooch.

Assuming that Ti replaces Si the ratio is obtained (Si, Ti)02 :
(Fe, Al)203 : CaO = S-T28 : 1 : 3-49. But assuming that Ti re-
places the sesquioxides in part as Ti^O' under the hypothesis that
the permanganate was reduced by Ti-0^ we obtain 3*28 Ti-0^ as
replacing alumina = 3*64 TiO'^ It having been ascertained that

356 PROCEEDTNaS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

the loss by ignition is owing to CO^ and not to water, its equiva-
lent of CaO was subtracted. Tlius corrected the composition of

60 = 0-5120 )

80 = 0-0560 j ^'^^^
144 =0-0230^
160 = 0-1420 >0-187

the mineral is :

SiO^

— 30-71 :

TiO-

— 4-47 ;

Ti^O^

— 3-29 ;

Fe^'O^

— 22-67 ;

AFO^

— 2-26 ;

CaO

— 32-41 ;

MgO

— 0-30 I

MnO

r— trace

CaCO^

— 3-36

56 = 0-5730
40 = 0 0070

0-580

99-47
This gives the ratio

(Si, Ti)0^ : (Fe, Ti, A1)^0' : (Ca, Mg)0^
3-03 : 1 : 3-102

quite satisfactory to the formula of Garnet

Ca'(Fe, Al)^ Si^O^^

The greenish yellow matrix shows under the microscope an
intimate mixture of three minerals, one of which is Calcite, one
a green and one a white Silicate. Its composition is given with-
out at present expressing an opinion as to its mineral nature.

Spec. Gr. 3-137

SiO^

— 40-76

TiO^

— 1-21

APO'

— 8-20

CaO

= 29-60

FeO

— 3-98

MgO

— 5-62

K^O

— 0-89

Na^O

— 0-96

Co^^+H^O

— 6-96

98-18

A specimen of Schorlomite from Arkansas was analyzed with

great care to test the hypothesis that Schorlomite is simply a

titanium Melanite. The material was like anthracite in lustre

and color, quite opaque, even in thinnest sections. It decomposes

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35T

readily with HCL. Tlie reduced permanganate was calculated as
Ti^O^.

Spec. Gr. = 3-876 at 23°C.

Si02 = 25-80 : 60 = 0-430 "I ^.^gg
Ti02 = 12-46 : 80 = 0-156 j
Ti203= 4-44:144 = 0-031^
AP03= 1-00 : 103 = 0-009 > 0-185
Fe^O^— 23-20 : 160 = 0-145 j
CaO =31-40 : 56 = 0-561^
MgO = 1-22 : 40 = 0-030 V 0-597
MnO = 0-46 : 11 =0-006)

99-98
This gives the ratio —

(Si, Ti)02 : (Fe, Ti, Al)203 : (Ca, Mg, Mn)0
3-16 1 : 3-22

While not so near to the normal ratio, it is near enough, espe-
cially considering the difficulty of estimating Ti'O^, in warranting
the hypothesis that Schorlomite has the formula of garnet, is
isomorphous with it, and exists, as the writer hopes to establish,
in a complete series of intermediate members; so much so, that
it will be impossible to say where Melanite stops and Schorlomite
begins, even though every titanium Melanite be not called Schor-
lomite.

358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

December 1. ^

Mr. Wm. W. Jefferis in the chair.

Seventeen persons present. J

A paper entitled, " Observations on the upper Triassic mam-
mals Dromatherium and Microconodon," by Henry F. Osborn,
So. D., was presented for publication.

December 14.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twent3'-one persons present.

The death of Isaac Lea, LL. D. was announced.

The following was ordered to be printed :

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 359

OBSERVATIONS UPON THE UPPER TRIASSIC MAMMALS, DROMATHE-

RIUM AND MICROCONODON.

BY HENRY F. OSBORN, SC. D.

In 1857 Prof. Emmons ^ described portions of three small mam-
malian jaws from the Upper Triassie (Chatham Coal Fields) of
North Carolina, which he assigned to the new genus Dromathe-
riuvi. The type-specimen is now in the Geological Museum of
Williams College. Another specimen is in the collection of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. I cannot ascertain
the whereabouts of the third fragmentary specimen mentioned by
the author. I am indebted to Prof. Samuel F. Clarke, of Williams
College, for an opportunity of stud3dng the type specimen.
Although slightly injured in the original removal of the matrix,
this fossil is in beautiful preservation, and gives the complete
mandibular dentition, with the exception of two molar crowns. I
soon observed that my drawing, made under a camera, did not

Microconodon and Dromatherium. Natural size.

agree with that given by Emmons, in his American Geology, Part
YI, p. 94, which has since been copied by Owen, Dana and others.
This discrepancy was apparently explained later by a comparison
of the Williams College specimen with that in the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. In the latter, although the
mandible is nearly complete, two molars and two premolars only
are preserved, but these indicate a distinct genus. As Emmons
referred both jaws to the same genus, it is not unlikely that he
supplemented the rather obscure characters of the teeth in his
type-specimen with the very obvious tooth patterns of the less
perfect specimen. Thus, while the number of the molars in
Emmons' drawing follows the type-specimen, their form resem-
bles that observed in the Microconodon molars, which will pre-
sently be described.

Those familiar with the works of Professors Owen and Marsh
upon the Mesozoic mammalia are aware that sharp distinctions

1 American Geology, Part VI, pp. 93 and 94. •

3G0

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1886.

in the molar series of the mammals of this period do not exist.
That is, the only distinction drawn between molars and premolars
is one of form ; we have no data as to permanent and deciduous
dentition, except possibly in the genus Triconodon. The rule
adopted is that, where the post-canine teeth are not all alike, the
series of like form following the canine are called premolars ;
and those behind these, of another form, are called molars.
This rule has been applied to all genera, excepting Phascolo-
therium and Diplocynodon, where all the post-canine teeth are
practically alike.

DROMATHERITJM.
Dromatherium sylvestre Emmons.

Generic Characters. — Incisors and canines erect. Molars and
premolars unlike. Molar-premolar series compact, leaving a
wide diastema between the canine and first premolar. Premolars

Dromatherium sylvestre Em. Magnified.

high, styloid and procumbent, with no cingulum and probably
single fanged. Molars bifanged with high pointed crowns and
minute sometimes bifid cusps on the anterior slope and distinct
pointed cusps on the posterior slopes. The dental formula is

Pm.

M.

The incisors are nearly erect, and are separated by interspaces
equaling the diameter of their crowns, which indicates that the
superior incisors interlocked with them. Ij is low and small ; Ij
is larger and more erect ; I3 is very high, slender and slightly
recurved, resembling the canine. The canine is tall, stout and
recurved, and in form is similar to the canine of Peralestes.
There is no indication of a double fang. A wide diastema sep-
arates this tooth from the premolars. These teeth are styloid
in ^hape, and strongly procumbent. The two anterior are appar-

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361

ently supported on single fangs. The crowns are subcylindrical,
with obtuse tips. The third premolar is larger, more tapering
from base to summit, and has an indication of a double fang.
The first molar in general outline is transitional between the
molars and premolars. On the anterior slope of the main cone,
near the summit, is a fine accessory cusp ; while near the base of
the posterior slope is a more distinct cusp. The second molar
has two accessory cusps on the anterior slope of the main cone,
and one on the posterior slope placed half way down. The
third molar differs from the others in the large size of the poste-
rior cusp. On the anterior slope there is an indication of a
small accessory cusp. In the fourth molar the crown tip is de-
tached, but there is an indication of the usual anterior and posterior
accessor}^ cusps. The fifth molar, besides the anterior and poste-
rior cusps, has the trace of a posterior cingulum and possibly of a
postero-external cusp. The sixth molar is like the fourth. The
seventh molar is the most complex tooth in the series ; like the
second, it has two accessory cusps on the anterior slope of the
main cone, the uppermost of which is distinctly bifid. The
posterior slope also has a bifid accessory cusp, and a faint basal
cingulum. The anterior cusps throughout rise like needle-points
on the sides of the teeth ; the posterior cusps are more distinct.
All the molars are compactly placed with high, rather narrow
crowns, and deep depressions above the double fangs. The char-
acters of these crowns were made out with the greatest diflSculty,
and a more perfect specimen may show slight difference of
detail.

The mandible of Dromatherium is heavy and well-rounded in
section. It is marked on its inner face by a deep mylohj'oid
groove, widening posteriorly into a broad pterygoid fossa.
The upper border rises behind the molars into the coronoid pro-
cess, cr. The summit of this process is broken, but a faint impres-
sion on the matrix shows that it had a high, slightly recurved
outline. A small portion of the hind border seems to be pre-
served just above the angle which would indicate that the condyle,
cr?, was placed midway between the coronoid and angle, somewhat
as in Amblotherium. The thick lower border has a gentle double
curvature. There is no trace of the symphysial surface.

The unique character of the dentition separates Dromatherium
widely from any known fossil or recent genus.

362

rROCEEDINQS OP THE ACADEMY OP

MICEOCONODON.

[1886.

Microconodon tenuirostris, gen. et sp. nov.

This genus is founded upon the specimen in the collection of
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, which was
described by Emmons as Dromatherium.

Generic Characters. — A wide diastema between the canine
and first premolar. Molars and premolars unlike. Premolars
simple, erect cones with a faint posterior cinguliim and partly
bi-fanged. Molars bi-fanged with broad crowns supporting a large
median cusp, at the sides of which are anterior and posterior
conical cusps, sub-equal in size, and a distinct posterior cinguliim.

The ramus is about two-thirds the length of that of Droma-
therium. Its general lower curvature is single. There is a de-
pression extending beneath the molar-premolar series, but this is
shallower than the mylohyoid groove, and I infer that the outer

Microconodon tenuirostris Osb. Magnified.

surface of the jaw is the one exposed. The coronoid rises by a
gentle curvature above the molars and the fractured portion seems
to have left a faint impression on the matrix, which indicates a
low rounded contour. The posterior half of the lower border is
marked by a downward process, somewhat similar to that in
Peramus. The surface of the process bears a shallow fossa.
Above this the crotaphyte fossa is faintly marked. The sym-
physial portion of the jaw is partly fractured. The matrix bears
an impression which may have been left by a tooth, but more
probably is accidental. Altogether, the delicate character of this
ramus indicates an animal of feebler masticating power than Dro-
matherium.

The molars probably extended backward to the rise of the
upper border. If so, the molar-premolar series covered a greater
proportional space than those of Dromatherium. This arose
from the comparatively broader crow^ns of the molars. By
analogy with several other Mesozoic genera, we may suppose
that the foremost molar preserved is the second, and that behind

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PBILADELPHIA- 363

the hindermost were two other molars. This would give four
premolars and six molars. Or there may have been three pre-
molars and seven molars as in Dromatherium. Unfortunately no
casts are preserved to settle this point, and the restoration of the
missing teeth is purely conjectural.

The molars are somewhat like those of Amphitherium except
that the crowns are higher and the anterior and posterior cusps
arise from the sides of the main cusp instead of from the base of the
crown. The posterior basal cusp which may be the continuation of
an internal cingulum is well marked, as is the depression between
the two fangs. The third premolar is much larger than the
first, and has an indication of two fangs. There is a trace of
the fang of the intermediate premolar. These teeth, unlike
those of Dromatherium^ are erect and do not rise to the level of
the molar crowns. The simple premolars differentiate the genus
from Amjjhitherium.

Princeton, N. J., December 20t7i.

§64 proceedings op the academy op [|1886.

December 21.
Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.
Fourteen persons present.

A New Species of Aplysia. — Prof. Heilprin exhibited speci-
mens of a new species of Aplysia^ or sea-hare, from Little Gas-
parilla Bay, west coast of Florida, The animal in general
appearance was probably most nearly related to the European A.
depilans (leporina), but differed in several well-marked points of
structure, notably in color, the position of the buccal aperture,
and in the character of the pore connecting with the shell cavity.
While in A. depilans the mouth is placed beneath the tentacular
lobes — i. e., the latter are superior — in the Florida species it is
central with regard to these organs, the lobes being circumferen-
tially connate, and completely encircling the aperture. The pore
leading to the shell-sac is minute, and raised on a small papilla;
the stellate markings radiating from the base of the papilla are
very feeble, and can barely be discerned without close examina-
tion. The shell, which is about an inch and three-quarters in
length, is horny-calcareous, deeply emarginate, and striated
longitudinally and transversely. General color of the animal
sea-green, tinged with purple, and irregularly blotched and
speckled with spots of lighter color. Length, 7-8 inches. The
animal emits a brilliant crimson fluid. It was proposed to name
the species Aplysia Willcoxi.

ALBERT DOD BROWN.

Announcement having been made that the collection of shells
formerly belonging to Albert Dod Brown had been presented to
the Academy by his mother, Mrs. Susan D. Brown, Dr. A. E. Foote
stated that Mr. Brown, who was formerly Curator of the Prince-
ton College Museum, died April 30, 1886, aged 45 years. He had
a well-recognized reputation as a student of conchology, botany,
and horticulture, the latter years of his life having been devoted
to the last-named pursuit. He was one of the founders of the Con-
cbological Section of the Academy, and was for jT^ears associated
with it as a member.

The collection now given to the Academy is to be known by
his name, but no other condition accompanies the generous gift.
A valuable portion of the collection consists of the cabinet of
the late Mr. Thomas Bland, including his tj^pes of "West Indian

1
I

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 365

shells. By this valuable accession about five thousand species of
shells represented by perhaps thirty-five thousand specimens
have been added to the already unrivaled Conchological cabinet
of the Academy.

December 28.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Thirty-five persons present.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

ON AN UNDESCKIBED METEORIC IRON FROM EAST TENNESSEE.

Plates IV and V.

BY F. A. GENTH.

The history of this interesting meteoric iron is very meagre.
In August, 1867, I received from the late Dr. Isaac Lea a small
fragment, weighing about five grams, with the request to deter-
mine whether or not it was meteoric iron. The analysis (1),
finished August 11, 1867, proving it to be meteoric iron, induced
Dr. Lea to purchase the specimen.

Under date of May 11, 1868, the lite Julius E. Raht, of Cleve-
land, Tenn., wrote me : "I send you to-day a small piece (it
weighed 44 grams. — F. A. G.) of meteoric iron, which was broken
off from a mass, weighing fifty pounds, which fell about eight
5'^ears ago near the State line of Georgia, ten miles from here
(Cleveland, Tenn.). The piece has been sold into Mississippi."

In the fall of the year 1868, the late Dr. James L. Smith, of
Louisville, Ky., the celebrated investigator of meteorites, on his
return from Europe, wrote to Dr. Isaac Lea, congratulating him
on the acquisition of the Mississippi meteorite, regretting at the
same time that his absence in Europe had prevented him from
securing it for his own cabinet.

It now remained in the possession of Dr. Lea, until he presented
it to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. The
Museum record of the Academy simply notes the date of its
reception, on October 24, 1876, that it was from the mountains
of East Tennessee, and that it weighed 254 pounds. All my
efforts to obtain fuller information about its fall and discovery
have proved unsuccessful.

The discrepancy between the weight given by Mr. Raht and
the actual weight of the mass, must be charged to incorrect
information received by Mr. Raht; this is insignificant, however,
compared with the proof which Dr. Smith's letter gives to the
fact that his Mississippi meteorite is identical with the one which
Mr. Raht stated to have been sold into that State.

The mass shows on one corner the place where the 44 grams
which Mr. Raht sent me had been broken off.

It is an irregularly shaped, somewhat triangular mass, the
largest diameter being about 45 cm,, the height about 40 cm. and
its greatest thickness about 22 cm.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 36T

Its crust is very thin and mostly free from rust, only here and
there covered with small spots of the same. It shows one fracture,
which, however, cannot be seen on the photographic representa-
tion on Plate IV, as it is on the opposite side near the indentation,
and extending for about 15 cm, ; its widest part is about 10 mm.
in size.

This meteoric iron appears to be an original whole mass, and
not a fragment torn off from a larger one ; its surface is pitted
all over and shows numerous depressions and excavations, from
a few centimetres in diameter and depth to about 15 cm, in length,
8 cm. in width and nearly 5 cm. in depth. The photograph shows
beautifully the pitted appearance of the mass.

Its original weight was nearly 115"5 kilos.; probably 25 kilos,
have been cut off in slabs which have been distributed amongst
learned societies and individuals.

The crystalline structure of this meteorite is beautifully shown
on three etched slabs which are represented in their natural size
on Plate Y, 1 from my cabinet, 2 in the Vaux Collection, and 3 in
the general collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences. All
three show the very perfect octahedral structure of this meteorite.
The specimen presented to me by Mr. Raht gave on etching
exactly the same crystalline structure, which adds another proof
that both came from the same piece.

The usual constituents of this class of meteorites are quite
perceptible: the Kamacite (Balkeneisen) largely predominating
and forming bands from 1 to 3 mm. in width. The Taenite
(Bandeisen) enveloping the Kamacite, frequently subdividing in
narrow lines the broader bands of the latter. The length of the
Kamacite individuals is from 1-5 cm. to 2 cm. It has a dull gray
color; when magnified, it can be seen to be intersected in every
direction by very fine lines, probably of Schreibersite. The Pies-
site, somewhat darker than the Kamacite, mostly shows a very
fine crystalline, mottled structure (moire metallique) and a
glittering lustre ; a small portion, however, is quite dull and
much darker. ^

On my specimen, fig. 1, Plate Y, there is in two places a remark-
able admixture of an iron which is a great deal smoother and
hardly shows any crystalline structure. One begins about 9 mm.
below the right-hand corner, fii-st forming a somewhat oval mass
of 2 to 3 mm. in diameter and then extending in a dagger-shaped

3G8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

form for 1 mm. ; the other is 15 mm. from the right edge and 8 or
9 mm. below the border, about 12 mm. long, on both ends 1-5 mm.
and in the centre about 1 mm. wide. This iron is brighter than
any other portion of the edged surface and has a slight!}^ yellow-
ish hue. The patches are not perfectly smooth, however, but
show many very minute depressions. In the centre where this
iron is narrowest and on some portion of the unetched surface of
my slab, small spots of rust have made their appearance. An
examination proved the presence of considerable quantity of
chlorine, from which it is evident that they are the result of the
oxidation of ferrous chloride, which this meteorite contains in
small quantities.

The so-called " alteration zone " next to the hrandrind is quite
distinct and from 1 to 1'5 mm. in width.

I have made three analyses of this meteoric iron, the first nearly
twenty j^ears ago, of the slightly rusty fragment, sent by Dr. Lea
(1), the second of a perfectly fresh fragment of that portion cut
off for specimens (2), and the third of the carefully purified saw-
dust obtained by this operation, which represents the average
composition of the whole mass where it was cut (3).

They gave the following results :

1. 2. 3.

Specific gravity = T"521

Iron = 88-92 89-940 89.93

Copper = 0-28 0-080 0-06

Nickel = 9-82 8-507 8-06

Cobalt = 0-77 0-690 0-56

Phosphorus = 0-19 0-109 0-66

Sulphur = not det'd. 0-006 not det'd.

99-93 99-332 99*27

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369

The following annual reports were read and referred to tlie
Publication Committee : —

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

The Recording Secretary respectfully reports that during the
year ending November 30, 1886, twelve members and four corres-
pondents have been elected.

Resignations of membership have been received and accepted
on the usual conditions, from Dr. Charles Harrod Vinton and
Jerome B, Gray.

The deaths of seventeen members and one correspondent have
been announced.

Eighteen papers have been presented for publication, as
follows: — Prof. Angelo Heilprin, 2; Chas. Morris, 2 ; S. Frank
Aaron, 1 ; Calvin McCormick, 1 ; W. D. Hartman, 1 ; C. Rominger,
1 ; Chas. D. Dolley, 1 ; Geo. Yasey, 1 ; Jos. Leidy, 1 ; J. C.
Arthur, 1 ; Thos. Meehan, 1 ; Lillie E. Holman, 1 ; John W.
Eckfeldt, 1 ; Wm. B. Scott, 1 ; F. A. Genth, 1 ; Geo. A. Koenig, 1.

One of these has been withdrawn ; one will be printed in the
Journal ; one has been deferred in consequence of the inability
of the Publication Committee to provide the required illustrations,
and the others have been reported on favorably and form part
of the current volume of the Proceedings.

One hundred and twenty-eight pages of the Proceedings for
1885, and three hundred and twenty-eight pages of the volume
for 1886 have been printed, together with three plates.

Four foreign societies have been added to the list of exchanges
to which the Academy publications are sent, making the entire
number at present 379.

The average attendance at the meetings has been 21. Yerbal
communications have been made and for the most part reported
for the Proceedings by Messrs. Meehan, Koenig, Heilprin,
Woolman, Moody, Morris, Potts, Leidy, McCormick, Holman,
A. H. Smith, Seiss, Holstein, Allen, Brooks, Sharp, Harvey,
Willcox,U, C. Smith, Foote, Gibbons, Horn, Lockington, McCook,
Lewis, Ryder, Dolley, Redfield, Tryon, S. R. Roberts and Miss
Abbott.
25

370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

At the meeting held June 22, the Academy, by resolution,
joined with other scientific societies in an invitation to the
International Congress of Geologists, to hold in America, the
meeting after that provided for in London.

On November 2, a committee consisting of Messrs. U. C. Smith,
Thos. Meehan, Angelo Heilprin, Rev. Henry C. McCook and
T. D. Rand, was appointed to solicit aid from the Legislature
in the erection of an addition to the present building. No result
has as yet been reported to the Academy.

All of which is respectfully submitted.

Edw. J. Nolan,

Recording Seci^etary.

REPORT OP THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.

During the year the duties of the Corresponding Secretary
have been unusually light, and have consisted in great part of
the reception of acknowledgments from corresponding societies
of publications sent by us and the usual letters of transmittal
from them. As many of our exchanges are now sent through
the mail, the acknowledgments are in the form of postal cards,
which indicate by their dates how much earlier our publications
are brought to the notice of the scientific world.

The four corresponding members elected during the year have
been promptlj'' notified, and letters in return have been received
from them and read to the Academy.

The donations to the Museum have been many and important,
as will appear in the Curators' report. It is one of the duties
of my office to send receipts for these, but to the Curator-in-
charge I must acknowledge my indebtedness for the fulfillment
of a duty of which I ofl^icially know nothing, having merely affixed
my signature in former years.

Very little correspondence of a miscellaneous nature has been
received, the Bureau of Scientific Information having apparently
been communicated with directly.

Acknowledgments of the receipt of our publications have
been received by postal card, in total, 56 ; representing foreign
societies, etc., 12 ; American, 15 ; Canadian, 3.

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

371

Letters of acknowledgment, numbering
From British and Colonial Societies, etc., .
From Continental European Societies, etc.,
From American Societies, etc.,
Letters of transmittal, number in total,

Representing twentj'-eight foreign societies

etc., and but two American.
Letters asking deficiencies and desiring exchange

number

Miscellaneous letters,

105
16
18
15
36

11
11

The number of societies with which we exchange publications
shows an annual increase greatly to the advantage of those who
use the library.

Respectfully submitted,

George H. Horn, M. D.,

Corresponding Secretary.

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

I have the pleasure of reporting to the Academy that 3765
additions have been made to the Library from December 1, 1885,
to November 30, 1886, These consist of 481 volumes, 3245
pamphlets and parts of periodicals, and 39 maps.

We are indebted to the following for the additions, a detailed
list of which accompanies the report : —

Societies, 1513

Editors 915

Isaiah V. Williamson Fund, 648

Authors, 333

C. H. Hitchcock, , . . . 46

Department of the Interior, , 30

University of Kiel, . . • , 30

Wilson Fund, 24

War Department 24

Geological Survey of Sweden, 23

University of Wurzburg, , . 14

Stuart Wood, 13

Thos. Meehan, 11

Geological Survey of Belgium, 11
Geological Survey of Pennsyl-
vania, 10

British Museum, 9

Dr. Jos. Leidy, 7

Chas. M. Betts, 7

Geological Survey of India, , 7

Her Majesty's Government, .

Treasury Department, . . .

Engineer Department, U.S.A.

Australian Museum, . . .

Geological Survey of New

Jersey

■ George Vaux,

Geological Survey of Russia,

Cambridge Scientific Instru-
ment Company, . , , .

Geological Survey of Rouma-
nia,

United States Commission of
Fish and Fisheries, . . .

Geological Survey of Canada,

Smithsonian Institution, , ,

Hon. Charles O'Neil, . , ,

J, Stockton Hough, . . .

George W, Tryon, Jr., . .

E. Indian Government, . .

6
6
5
5

5
4
4

3

3

3

2

2

2
o

372

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1886.

Wm. John Potts, . . .
Minister of Public Works

France,

S. R. Roberts

J. Fletcher Williams, . .
Royal College of Surgeons,
Bureau of Ethnology. . .

Isaac Lea,

Charles C. Abbott, . . .
University of Pennsylvania,
Department of Agriculture,

m

2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Geological Survey of Portu-
gal, 1

Adele M. Fielde, .... 1
Department of Agriculture,

Canada, 1

Geological Survey of New

Zealand, 1

S. H. and H. Chapman, . . 1
In Exchange (other than peri-
odicals), 18

They were distributed to the several departments of the
Library as follows : —

Journals, 2696

Geology, 315

General Natural History, . 130

Botany, 92

Conchology, 74

Anatomy and Physiology, . 62

Chemistry, 62

Mineralogy, 58

Physical Science, .... 47

Medicine, 36

Voyages and Travels, ... 35

Entomology, 24

Bibliography, 15

Encyclopedias, 18

Agriculture, 13

Mammalogy, 13

Anthropology, 12

Ornithology, 12

Helminthology, 10

Ichthyology, 7

Languages, 6

Geography, 5

Herpetology, 2

Miscellaneous, 23

It will be seen from the above summary that our main depend-
ence for increase during the year has been, as heretofore, upon
our exchanges and the I. Y. Williamson Fund.

Through the kindness of friends of the Academ}^ I have been
again enabled to avail mj^self of the assistance of Sig. Emanuele
Fronani during the four months from June 14 to October 14,
inclusive. Besides helping me with the routine work of the
Library, especially during my vacation, he has completed the
copying of more than half of the card catalogue. This work
has progressed slowly, as it is only during the engagement of
the assistant that time can be devoted to it. It is, however,
desirable that means should be provided for placing the cards
now prepared at the service of those using the Library.
Additional cases for the reception of journals, also, are now
absolutely necessary, and it is hoped that an appropriation may
be made earl}'' in the jea.Y for their erection. No other depart-
ment of the Library grows so rapidlj^, and it is impossible to
maintain the geographical arrangement which has been found
convenient without more room.

For the I'eason that I have had to refer to so often before,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 373

namely, lack of funds, I have been able to have but 168 volumes
bound since the last report. These have been for the most part
Williamson books, the work being paid for from the I. V. Wil-
liamson fund. Nearly all our exchanges and accumulated pam-
phlets remain unbound, thereby not only exposing the Library to
loss, but causing serious inconvenience to readers and students.
A liberal appropriation for binding, therefore, is one of our
immediate and pressing needs. It will be seen by the accompany-
ing list of journals and periodicals received, that our exchanges
have been kept up and increased. The applications made for
deficiencies last year have been productive of their full result,
and the gaps still existing will probably have to be supplied by
purchase.

The shelf list begun last year has been carried forward as
rapidly as my other duties would permit. Four or five sections
of the Library j^et remain to be included, but even in its incom-
plete condition the catalogue has proved useful in locating
accessions, detecting displacements and facilitating reference to
the shelves.

AH of which is respectfully submitted.

Edw. J. Nolan,
Librarian.

REPORT OF THE CURATORS.

The Curators present the following statement of the Curator-
in-Charge, as their report for the year 1886 : —

The Curator-in-Charge respectfully reports that during the
past year the work of arranging, classifying and preserving
the collections of the Academy has made considerable progress,
for which, as heretofore, the institution is largely indebted to
volunteer labor. The special thanks of the Academy are due to
Mr. George W. Tryon, Jr., Conservator of the Conchological
Collections, to Mr. John H. Redfield, Curator of the Herbarium,
and to Mr. Jacob Binder, Curator of the Collection of Minerals
covered by the Wm. S. Yaux Trust, for their disinterested labors
in their several departments. To the Entomological Section,
likewise, acknowledgment is due for work done in connection
with the caring of the collection of insects.

In the departments other than those here indicated, the work has

374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

been done under the immediate superintendence of the Curator-
in-Charse and his assistant. Almost the entire collection of recent
Invertebrata contained in the Museum — barring the Mollusca —
has been re-arranged and re-classified, and the different groups
have been so placed as to follow one another serially according
to their position in the natural scale. The very extensive series
of crabs, which have heretofore occupied the window spaces on
the first gallery, filling some twenty-four cases, have been inter-
calated with the general collection of Invertebrata on the top
floor, where they occupy practically the entii'e western wall. A
re-arrangement of the Carcinological groups, following Ger-
staecker, has been eff"ected. B}^ this shifting of the collections, the
first gallery will be relegated exclusively to ornithology, the
vacated window cases having been removed to the main floor to
relieve the crowded condition of the geological and paleontologi-
cal collections. Despite this large accession of table cases, and
the addition of an equal number from other parts of the hall, the
collections of Invertebrate Paleontology will barely find accom-
modation. Roughl}" estimated the fossils of the difi'erent geo-
logical formations fill some 20,000-22,000 trays, and in point of
individual numbers probably do not fall short of 15,000-80,000
specimens, or about one-half the number that is registered in the
department of recent conchology. The work of arranging the
American series of fossils is now practically complete, and con-
siderably over three-quarters of the collection is permanentl}*
labeled. The re-labeling of the entire series of fossils collected
by the late Wm. M. Gabb in Santo Domingo and California
has been effected during the year, and much has been done
toward re-determining the type fossils of the first New York
survey, collected b}^ Mr. T. A. Conrad. The largest and most
important accession to this department is a collection of
fossils from the Miocene and Pliocene formations of the State of
Florida, collected in the early part of the year by the Curator-
in-Charge, to whom leave of absence had been granted by the
Academy for the purpose of prosecuting researches and collect-
ing, in conjunction with the Wagner Free Institute of Science.
This collection, together with an extensive series of inver-
tebrates dredged in the Gulf of Mexico and in the inland waters
of the State, have not yet been placed in the Museum proper, but
are temporarily deposited in a side room, where the specimens

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 3T5

may be conveniently studied and determined. This work is now
accomplished in great part.

Some attention has been given during the year to the re-
arranging of the collections of Yertebrata. The lizards have'
been removed from the south wall of the second gallery to the
east wall, and the amphibians to the north wall, thereby placing
the collection of reptiles in a continuous series. In the depart-
ment of Ornithology, beyond a general oversight of the collec-
tions, no work has been accomplished. Some four or five
Dermestes-eaten specimens, which had apparently not been
properly cured, have been permanently removed from the cases,
being no longer fit for exhibition. Barring such sporadic cases
of destruction the collection is in a fairly good condition ; never-
theless, it is absolutely necessary that an early examination of
all the specimens be made by an expert taxidermist, and such
steps be taken as will insure the collection from further loss.

Work in the department of Vertebrate Paleontology has been
almost exclusively restricted to the collections of mammals and
fishes ; both of these have been entirely re-arranged, and are
now much more accessible than they have been heretofore. The
large specimens of fossil reptiles from the Lias of England, the
valuable gift of Dr. T. B. Wilson, which had been built up into
cases on the main floor of the Museum, have been permanently
placed on the wall surface of the vestibule, where they are dis-
played to good advantage. It is designed to cover the remainder
of the wall-space with two large maps, respectively illustrative
of the geology of the national domain and of the zoogeographi-
cal regions of the earth's surface. The undersigned has charged
himself with the preparation of this work.

The collection of alcoholics is in good condition, the entire
series having been overhauled as in previous years. Consider-
able alteration has been made in the disposition of the cases
throughout the Museum hall, and much floor space has been
gained thereby ; but such gains are far from sufficient to satisfy
the wants of the institution, the future usefulness of which will
be largely impaired unless immediate aid toward the erection of
an extension to the present building is aff'orded. It is well within
the truth to say that the existing collections, if properly displayed,
would completely fill a building of twice the dimensions of the
present one. The large and very valuable collections of the

316 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Pennsylvania Geological Survey, contained in upwards of 200
cases, still remain in the cellar, boxed, for want of exhibition
space. The types of the greater number of the fossil plants
described by Lesquereux in his Coal Flora of the United States,
probably one of the most valuable collections of fossil plants in
the world, have been added to this collection during the year,
but, for similar reasons, still remain boxed. The report of the
Professor of Ethnology and Archaeology indicates that accessions
to this department of the Academy's Museum could readily be
had were proper exhibition space provided, but that under present
conditions the same is impossible. In view of these facts the
necessity for an extension to the Academy's building cannot be
too strongly insisted upon.

Of equal importance to the future welfare of the institution is
a fund designed for the purposes of zoogeographical exploration.
As suggested in our last report, the interest derived from a princi-
pal fund of $50,000 would fairly equip an annual expedition to any
of the largely unexplored regions lying about our domain, such
as Mexico, Central America, the Bahamas, Labrador, etc. Only
through this method of research can it be hoped to bring in large
accessions of new material to the working naturalist, and thereby
place him in direct relation with the problems of nature. The
success attending the Florida Expedition of the Wagner Free
Institute of Science of this city, which was organized with the
co-operation of the Academy in the winter of the present year,
fully demonstrates the wisdom of such a plan of explorations, at
the same time that it proves its ready feasibility and possible
economic character.

Specimens have been loaned for study during the year to Profs.
Whitfield and Britton,of New York, to Profs. Osborn and Scott,
of Princeton, and to Messrs. Ridgeway and Yasey, of Washing-
ton, all of whom have rendered service to the institution in the
determination and description of its specimens. The Academy
has also profited through the studies of three Jessup Fund bene-
ficiaries, who have at various times rendered service to the
Curator-in-Charge; to these persons the Curator-in-Charge begs

to tender his thanks.

Very respectfully,

Angelo Heilprin,

Curator-in- Charge.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 3tt

REPORT OF THE CURATOR OF THE WILLIAM S.
YAUX COLLECTIONS.

The Curator of the William S, Yaux collections respectfully
submits his fourth annual report to the Council of the Academy
of Natural Sciences : —

The collections are in good order and condition, no change
having been made since the report of 1885, except the introduc-
tion of one hundred and fourteen mineral specimens, purchased
by the approval of the Curators of the Academy, during the year
ending November 30, 1886.

No. of mineral specimens as by report of Nov. 30, 1885, 6,516
Purchased between Nov. 30, 1885, and Nov. 30, 1886, . 114

Total, ........ 6,630

Archaeological specimens (same as noted in report of

1885), no additions, 2,940

The growth of the collection since it came into possession of
the Academy is as follows : —

Nov. 30, 1884, specimens purchased, .... 60

Nov. 30, 1885, specimens purchased, .... 104

Nov. 30, 1886, specimens purchased, . . . . 114

In all, ........ 2*18

These 278 specimens have been purchased at an aggregate cost
of $1448.70.

It will be conceded that the new material added to the mineral-
ogical collection since 1883 has very materially improved its
character, not only in beauty, but for scientific study.

Among the specimens most worthy of special note which
have been added are a number of fine transparent crystals of
Topaz from Siberia. One of these is a crystal 1^ inches square,
2^ inches in height, on a matrix of Feldspar, coated with Albite;
it is a well terminated rhombic prism, showing the basal cleavage
planes with great beauty. Also worthy of mention are a fine
specimen of Zircon from Canada, weighing 12^ pounds, made
up of a group of square prismatic crystals, measuring 3^x4
inches and 9^ inches in height ; a specimen of Stibnite from
Japan, a cluster of long, well terminated crystals, with interesting

378 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

modifications 2| by 3i inches, 18 inches long; specimens of
Vanadinite, Wulfenite, and Descloizite, from Arizona ; emerald
and Hiddenite from North Carolina. The Tourmalines, Rutiles
and Molybdenites, already well illustrated, have received rich
addition.

A number of new species, not before represented in the collec-
tion, have been obtained together with many varieties from new
localities.

All the income of the fund has been expended on the collec-
tion, except a balance in hand of $513.54, applicable to the pur-
chase of new specimens and of books. As the cases are now
paid for and no other expense anticipated, the entire income can
be used for the purchase of additional specimens and books,
which will — unless some unforeseen accident occui's — always keep
the collection up to a high standard of importance. From a
scientific point of view it is one of the best public collections in

our country.

Respectfully submitted,

Jacob Binder,
Curator.

REPORT OF THE RECORDER OF THE BIOLOGICAL
AND MICROSCOPICAL SECTION.

During the year the Section held fourteen meetings, with an
average attendance of twelve persons.

At these meetings a great variety of objects was shown.
Especial notice should be made of the observations on embry-
ology at various meetings by Messrs. Sharp, Wingate and Ryder ;
upon the fungi, by Dr. Rex, and upon the different methods
of mounting, by Drs. Hall and Brinton.

The following are some of the more important events occurring
during the year : —

December 21, 1885. Lecture by Dr. Thomas Taylor, of the
Agricultural Department, Washington, upon " The Work and
Results in the Investigation of Butter and other Fats."

February 1, 1886. Communication by Mr. H. Wingate, upon
" The So-Called Visual Organs of the Amphioxus."

February 15, 1886. Communication by Dr. M. B. Hartzell,
upon "Glycerine as a Mounting Fluid."

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319

Four lectures were delivered in course by Dr. Benjamin Sharp,
upon the " Special Senses," October 18.

Communication by Prof. J. A. Ryder, upon " The Eggs of
Pelagic P'ishes ;" by Mr. H. Wingate, upon " Cribraria purpura."

November 1. Communication by Dr. L. B. Hall, upon the
''Comparative Merits of Demar and Canada Balsam mounts;"
by Prof. J. A. Ryder, upon the " Moulting of the Lobster," also
on a " New Section Cutter;" by Dr. J. B. Brinton, upon a " New
Cell for Opaque Objects."

November 15. Communication by Dr. George A. Rex, upon
" The Use of the Brass Cell."

Two new members were elected : Dr. Charles S. Dolley, Prof.
John A. Ryder.

Mr. E. S. Campbell resigned as a contributor.

The Section passed a resolution of respect upon the death of
Dr. J. G. Richardson, who, although not connected with the
Section at the time of his death, had been at one time an active
and useful member.

Very respectfully,

Robert J. Hess,

Recorder.

REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION.

The Recorder of the Conchological Section respectfully re-
ports that during the year ending December 1 , 1886, the Academy
has continued the publication of conchological papers as hereto-
fore. The death of one member has occurred, that of Mrs. Lucy
W. Sa.y, the venerable and esteemed widow of the eminent
naturalist, Thomas Say, which occurred November 15th last, at
the advanced age of 86 years.

No new members or correspondents have been elected, nor has
there been any change in the By-Laws of the Section.

Mr. George W. Tryon, Jr., Conservator, reports as follows : —

" During the past year, thirty-nine donations and purchases of
shells have been received from twenty-six persons, aggregating
1252 trays and 7506 specimens. A detailed list of these acces-
sions is appended (see 'Additions to Museum ').

"Among them may be especially mentioned the purchase of

380 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

nearl}^ 500 species from Greece and the eastern portion of the
Mediterranean Sea, collected by Mr. Conemenos; and another
purchase of 2*17 species from southern France and the western
part of the Mediterranean, collected by M. Dollfus.

" From the Poljmesian and Australian regions we have re-
ceived important collections from Mr. John Brazier, of Sydney,
Australia, Mr. Andrew Garrett, of Papeete, Taheiti, and Mr.
W. F. Petterd, of Hobart, Tasmania; these collections, num-
bering about 200 species, were mostly new to our museum.

" Shells of our own country have been received from Messrs.
Binney, Dall, Dore, Ford, Hermann, Heilprin, Jefferis, Leidy,
Mazyck, Morrison, Morse, Orcutt, Pilsbry, Quintard, Redfield,
Rush, Sharp, Singley, Stearns, Thompson. These collections
embrace some of the new and rare species needed to complete
our series, but for the most part add new localities for species
alread}'^ possessed by us. Your Conservator purchased from
Mr. Sowerby, of London, and presented about 100 species, all
new to us, and filling some important gaps in the collection.

" The Conchological Museum now contains 45,184 trays and
written tablets, and 165,858 specimens.

"Mr. Frank Stout has, as usual, mounted and labeled the
accessions of the year, and they have been distributed to the
cases in the museum by Mr. Wm. B. Marshall.

" The work of redetermining the collection, in connection with
the preparation t)f monographs of the genera for the ' Manual
of Conchology,' progresses steadily. Our species of the fami-
lies Calyptrseidse, Xenophoridae, Turritellidse, Csecidse, Verme-
tidae, Pyraraidellidse, Turbonillidae and Scalariidaj, have been
carefully studied by your Conservator; the Solariidse by Mr.
Marshall. In the land shells, the Zonitidse have been completed,
and a commencement made upon the Helicidse.

" In accordance with the new plan of arrangement of the
Museum sketched in the last Annual Report, a considerable por-
tion of the marine gastropods have been classified, both in the
Systematic and Geographical Series, and the Synoptical Collec-
tion (a representation of the principal generic types, with printed
descriptions of their characters) has been finished. It is believed
that for completeness, beauty of arrangement and adaptability to
the needs of students, these several collections will compare
favorably with similar ones in any other museum. An index is

188G.] iJATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 38t

intended to be added to the Synoptical Series, by the aid of
which the student, after determining the genus of any specimen,
will be referred to the case containing the species ; in the latter
he will find represented, either by specimens or colored illustra-
tions, all the (figured) species of the genus known to science,
arranged in the order of their natural relationships.

"Much of the success of these features of arrangement is due
to the efficient co-operation of my assistant, Mr. Marshall.

" Messrs. J. H. Redfield, S. R. Roberts and Wm. L. Mactier,
have contributed to the Section's collection of autograph letters
of conchologists."

The officers of the Section for 1887 are —

Director, .... W. S. W. Ruschenberger.

Vice-Director,
Recorder,
Secretary ,
Treasurer , .
Librarian, .
Conservator,

. John Ford.

. S. Raymond Roberts.

. John H. Redfield.

. Wm. L. Mactier.

. Edward J. Nolan.

. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

All of which is respectfully submitted by

S. Raymond Roberts,

Recorder.

REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SECTION.

(American Entomological Society.)
The Entomological Section of the Academy has experienced
an improvement this 3'ear, in comparison with preceding ones.
The meetings, which have been regularly held, have been better
attended, and a more general interest taken in the proceedings.

One member and five associates have been elected. During
the 3'ear the Section has lost two members by death. Mr. Cbas.
Wilt, one of the deceased members, was one of the founders of
the American Entomological Society, and had been very active
in all the work of the Section. His valuable collection of Coleop-
tera has been given by his son, Mr. H. C. Wilt, to the American
Entomological Society, while the Lepidoptera were purchased at
an almost nominal price by the same society. The custodian of
the societ}'' is now engaged in arranging these collections. All
duplicates will be set aside for placing in the public exhibition of

382

IfROCfiEDlNaS OP THE ACADEMY Of

[1886.

the AcjUleni}'. This collection for public view is now assuming
a more definite form than heretofore, through the earnest efforts
of Mr. G. B. Cresson, the Custodian.

During the year twelve written communications have been
accepted by the American Entomological Society for publication
in its Transactions, which still continue to maintain their stan-
dard of previous years. In addition to these, a work entitled
" Synopsis of the Hymenoptera of North America," by Mr. E. T.
Cresson, is being published by the society, in separate form, as
an intercalary volume. The display made b}^ the Section at the
exhibition of the Microscopical Section was of great interest to
those present.

At the meeting held in December, the following officers were
elected for the year 1887 :

Director,
Vice-Director,
Recorder, .
Treasurer, .
Conservator,

. Geo. H. Horn, M.D.

. Rev. H. C. McCook, D. D.

. J. H. Ridings.

. E. T. Cresson.

. H. Skinner, M. D.

Respectfully presented,

J. H. Ridings,

Becorder.

REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION.

The Vice-Director of the Botanical Section respectfully reports
that the prosperity noted in past 3^ears still continues, chiefly
through the voluntary work of its active members. The Con-
servator's account, adopted as part of this report, shows a very
gratifying growth in the Herbarium, which is one of which the
Academy may be proud. The membership, with some few
additions and losses, remains about the same as last year. The
Section is wholly free of debt, and has a balance in the treasury.
Meetings have been held regularlj'- on the second Monday evening
in each month, except during the summer recess, and manj^ new
or interesting facts in botany have been brought to the notice of
members — some of which have been thought worth}" of recording
in the Proceedings of the Academj^

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES Of PHILADEtrHtA. §83

The oflficers elected for the ensuing year are : —

Director, . . . W. S, W. Ruschenberger, M. D.

Vice-Director^ . . Thomas Meehan.

Recorder, . . . Chas. Schaffer, M. D.

Treasurer, . . . Isaac C. Martindale.

Conservator, . . . John H. Redfield.

Respectfully submitted,

Thomas Meehan,

Vice-Director.

Conservator's Report for 1886. — The Conservator of the Bo-
tanical Section reports that the donations to the Herbarium,
during the year just closed, consist of 2452 species of plants, of
which 2433 are of phanerogams and vascular cryptogams, and 19
of lichens. Of these, T26 species are new to the collection, and
among them are representatives of 40 new genera. Of the 2452
species, 847 are North American, 858 are from Tropical and South
America, and 747 are from the Old World. The total number of
species of phanerogams and vascular cryptogams now in the
Herbarium is estimated at 26,189.

A list of the donations for the year is appended to this report.
Among them may be specified 232 species of North American
grasses from the U. S. Department of Agriculture at Washington,
embracing 73 new species. These, with a collection of 54 species,
made b}^ F. Tweedy in the Yellowstone Park, make our series of
N. American grasses unusuall}^ complete. From Dr. A Gray, of
the Harvard University Herbarium, we have received about 300
species from the Old and the New World, embracing many
novelties. Members of our Section have presented two fine
collections made by Pringle and by Palmer in the Mexican
province of Chihuahua, consisting of 710 species, of which 267
are new to us, and a very choice collection of South African
plants made b}- Miss M. E. Cummings, nearly one-half of which
were not in our Herbarium. Mr Aubrey H. Smith has presented
us 154 species which he collected in Colorado, New Mexico, and
California (see Additions to Museum).

The work of mounting the specimens in the North American
Herbarium is still continued, and considerable progress has been
made during the past year with the assistance of Mr. Burk.

^S4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

During this period the N. America species of Gyperus have been
carefully revised by Prof. Britton, of Columbia College, New
York ; and the perplexing species of Paspalum, bj' Dr, Vasej'^, of
Washington. Dr. John W. Eckfeldt has continued his special
care of the lichens of the Academy, adding to their number,
and has so arranged and catalogued the several collections of
this order, as greatly to facilitate reference. Similar work is
greatly needed for the remaining order of the lower Cryptogams.

John H. Redfield,

Conservator.

REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND GEO-
LOGICAL SECTION.

The Director of the Mineralogical and Geological Section of
the Academy of Natural Sciences would respectfully report that
meetings have been held regularly during the year, but that
owing to the enforced absence of several of the more active
members the attendance has not been as great as formerly. The
additions to the cabinet, while not as numerous as in former
years, have been considerable and valuable. A number of them
have been purchased with the funds of the Section.

Respectfully submitted,

Theo. D. Rand,

Director.

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF INVERTEBRATE

PALEONTOLOGY.

The Professor of Invertebrate Paleontology respectfully reports
that during the 3'ear he has delivered a course of lectures, with
practical demonstrations, on geology and paleontology, which
course was supplemented by a number of field excursions in
the surroundings of Philadelphia. A special excursion, designed
for the purposes of original investigation, and extending over a
period of two weeks, was conducted during the month of July to
Nantucket and Martha's Vine3'ard, resulting in valuable acquisi-

1886,] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 385

tions of both zoological and geological material. Special atten-
tion was directed to the study of the fossiliferous deposits of
the Island of Nantucket, with the result of demonstrating the
erroneousness of the hitherto described sections of those deposits.
The data obtained during this trip will be published in the
Proceedings of the Academy.

The collections of the Academy in the department of Inverte-
brate Paleontology have been, as far as arrangement and classifi-
cation are concerned, materially improved during the year ; the
entire series of fossils pertaining to American geology is now
readily accessible, and in a condition for easy reference. More
than three-fourths of this collection are permanently labeled.
Roughly estimated, the collections in this department, embracing
both foreign and American fossils, occupy upwards of 20,000
trays, and are probably second to no other collection in import-
ance in this country. Special importance attaches to the series
of Cretaceous and Tertiary fossils, especiall}' the latter, in which
are included probably four-fifths of all the types that have been
described from this country. The Paleozoic fauna is, on the
other hand, very inadequately represented, although the collec-
tions of the Pennsylvania Geological Survey, now deposited with
the institution, will add very materiall}'' to this section when
displayed.

Further reference to the collections in the department of
Invertebrate Paleontology is contained in the report of the
Curators of the Academy.

Very respectfully,

Angelo Heilprin,
Trof. of Invertebrate Faleontology.

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF INYERTEBRATE

ZOOLOGY.

The Professor of Invertebrate Zoology respectfully reports
that during the past year he has delivered a course of ten lectures
on the " Special Senses."

He further reports that the collections under his charge have
somewhat increased.
36

386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

There is a good collection of marine invertebrates, not yet
officially presented to the Academy, from the West Coast of
Florida, collected in the spring of this year by Prof. Angelo
Heilprin.

A course of ten or twelve lectures will be given in the spring
of the coming year (March and April), the subject being " Sense
Organs in the Animal Kingdom."

Very respectfull}-,

Benjamin Sharp,
Professor of Invertebrate Zoology.

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF ETHNOLOGY AND

ARCHEOLOGY.

During the last year two short courses of lectures were deliv-
ered in the rooms of the Academy, one on the General Principles
of Ethnology, the second on the special topic of American Archae-
ology. The latter was illustrated by numerous specimens from
the collections of the Academy. Both were reasonably well
attended, and it is believed that an increasing interest is shown
in these subjects.

Som'e material was added to the collections in this department
during the year, but the same difficulty mentioned in the last
report, has interfered with obtaining as manj^ specimens as would
be practicable — that is to say, a lack of space for their proper
accommodation and display.

Respectfullj- submitted,

D. G. Brinton, M. D.,
Professor of Ethnology and Archaeology.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 387

SUMMARY OF THE REPORT OF WM. C. HEJ^SZEY,

TREASURER,

For the Year Ending Nov. 30, 1886.

Cr.

By Salaries, Janitors, etc $3265 76

Printing and Binding Proceedings, etc 1431 87

Printing and Stationery , 154 79

Repairs 86 36

Plates and Engravings 71 75

Gas 9140

Postage 142 44

Coal 775 00

Paper Boxes and Trays 73 43

Glass 6 35

Insurance 55 00

Freight 68 41

Alcohol 70 50

State Taxes on Mortgage Investments 123 48

Examination of Title to West Virginia Lands 100 00

Water Rents 33 35

Miscellaneous 635 65

Inspection of Boiler 10 20

Prof. Angelo Heilprin. Lecture Fees 62 50

Benjamin Sharp, M. D. " " 15 00

D. G. Brinton, M. D. " " 38 00

Life Memberships transferred to Life Membership

Fund 150 00

Dr.

To Balance from last account |892 15

Initiation Fees 120 00

Contributions ( semi-annual) 1489 97

Life Memberships 150 00

Admissions to Museum 259 54

Publication Committee — Sales of Proceedings, Jour-
nal, etc 645 40

Microscopical and Biological Section — Donation.... 50 00

State Taxes on Mortgages 113 09

Interest (Joshua T. Jeanes' Legacy) 900 00

17460 73

Freights returned

11 11

Miscellaneous

1 05

Prof. Angelo Heilprin. Lecture Fees

62 50

Benj. Sharp, M. D. "

(<

15 00

D. G. Brinton, M. D. "

((

38 00

Wilson Fund. Toward Salary of Librarian

.. 300 00

Publication Fund. Interest

on Investments

.. 340 00

Barton Fund. "

(( u

. 240 00

Life Membership Fund. "

(( ((

.. 165 00

Maintenance Fund. *'

<( ((

.. 205 00

Eckfeldt Fund. "

ii ( <

.. 125 00

Stott Legacy Fund. "

(( ((

.. 100 00

Balance overdrawn. . .

6222 81
$1237 93

388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

LIFE MEMBERSHIP FUND. (For Maintenance.)

Income from Investments $ 1 G5 00

Life Membership transferred from General Account 150 00

$315 00

Balance overdrawn last statement 1100 00

Transferred to General Account 165 00

2G5 00

Balance $50 00

BARTON FUND.

Interest from Investments $ 240 00

Transferred to General Account 240 00

JESSUP FUND. (For Assistance of Students.)

Disbursements $ 795 00

Balance per last statement $234 01

Interest from Investments 560 00

794 01

Balance overdrawn 99

MAINTENANCE FUND.

Income from Investments $ 205 00

Legacy of Jno. L. Neill, deceased, on account 5100 00

$5305 00
Transferred to General Account 205 00

Balance for Investment $5100 00

ECKFELDT FUND.

Income from Investments $ 125 00

Transferred to General Account 125 00

MUSEUM FUND.

Balance per last statement $ 55 00

Income from Investments 50 00

$105 00
I. V. WILLIAMSON LIBRARY FUND.

Balance last statement $2016 50

Rents collected 1013 92

Ground-rents collected 841 55

$3871 97

Books $1192 12

Repairs to Houses 241 09

Taxes and Water-rents 202 01

Binding 120 40

Collecting 92 77

1848 39

Balance (Principal, awaiting investment, $1750.00) $2023 58

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389

THOMAS B. WILSON LIBKARY FUND.

Balance overdrawn as per last statement $ 272 33

Cash paid George N. Lawrence, New York 96 40

Cash paid B. Westermann & Co., New York, Books 100 04

Cash transferred to General Account toward Salaiy of Librarian, 300 00

1768 77

Less Henry Sothem & Co., London $ 96 69

Interest on Investments 525 00

621 69

Balance overdrawn $147 08

PUBLICATION FUND.

Balance per last statement $ 225 00

City of Philadelphia Loan, July 10, 1868, No. 2945 paid off. 500 00

Interest from Investments 340 00

$1065 00
Transferred to General Account 340 00

Balance for investment $725 00

STOTT LEGACY FUND.

Income from Investments $100 00

Transferred to General Account 100 00

WM. S. VAUX FUND.

Balance per last statement , $512 08

Interest on Investments 600 00

$1,112 08
Cash paid for Minerals . . . , 599 54

Balance $512 54

H, N. JOHNSON FUND.

Balance overdravim last statement $ 221 81

Disbursements 1800 85

$2022 66

Interest on Mortgage $ 26 84

Cash received, to entering satisfaction on Mortgage. . 50

Rents Collected 1441 96

Ground Rents Collected 189 00

$1658 30

Balance overdrawn $364 36

The H. N. Johnson Estate was indebted for -^^ of a mortgage of
$6000 to Charles J. Wister, the proportion being $1600, which was
settled by W. N. Johnson's mortgage to Academy, $1500, and the pay-
ment of §100 in cash, and both mortgages were satisfied of Record.

390

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1886.

The election of OflScers, Councillors and Members of the
Finance Committee, to serve during 1887, was held, with the
followina: result : —

President,
Vice-Preside7its,

Recording Secretary,

Corresponding Secretary,

Treasurer,

Librarian,

Curators,

Councillors to serve three
years, ....

Finance Committee,

M.D.

Joseph Leidy, M. D.
Thomas Meehan,
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D.
Edward J. Nolan, M.D.
George H. Horn, M. D.
William C. Henszey.
Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
Joseph Leid}'^, M. D.
Jacob Binder,
W. S. W. Ruschenberger
Angelo Heilprin.
George Y. Shoemaker,
Aubrey H. Smith,
George A. Koenig, Ph. D.
George A. Rex, M. D.
Isaac C. Martindale,
Aubrey H. Smith,
S. Fisher Corlies,
George Y. Shoemaker,
Wm. W. Jefferis.

ELECTIONS DURING 1886.

MEMBERS.

January 25. — Roland D. Jones, M.D.

February 23. — Miss Mary A. Campbell, F. L. Harvey.

April 27. — Calvin McCormick, Samuel Wagner.

May 25. — Charles P. Sherman.

June 29. — Christian E. Metzler, Charles H. Marot.

August 31. — C. L. Kilburn.

September 28. — Richard H. Day.

November SO. — George McClellan, M. D., George L. English.

CORRESP ONDENTS.

January 26. — Alfred M. Mayer of Hoboken, N. J. ; Charles
Wachsmuth of Burlington, Iowa.

March 30.— J. C. Arthur of Geneva, N. Y.
November 30. — Emil Selenka of Erlangen.

1886.] NATmiAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 391

ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM.

Archaeology and Ethnology.— Stuart Wood. Lapp baby-basket.
AV. S. W. Ruscbenberger. Spear-bead from Zanzibar, obtained in 1835.
Adele M. Fielde. Product from the silk-gland of Cecropia, Swatow, China.
W. H. Jones. Collections of Peruvian pottery, Esquimaux implements,

shoes, fur suit, etc. Indian mask and figure-head, Alaska.
J. Collins. Shells from Indian mound, Tennessee.

Mammalia.— "W. P. Gibbons. Sciurus fossor, Thomomys talpoides from

California.
M. Mattson. Lynx, Colorado.

Birds.— S. M. Brice. 81 North American birds, principally from the

neighborhood of Philadelphia.
W. P. Gibbons. 5 species of California birds.
A. J. Garrett. Grex Tabuensis if), Pacific Islands.

Eeptiles. — W. W. .Tefferis. Vertebrae of snake.
H. C. Chapman. Bothrops airox, Martinique.

Fishes (Recent and Fossil). — A. S. Rowan. Vertebrae of Portheus (?),

Cretaceous of Fort Randall, Dakotah.
A. M. Smith. Dicerobatis Japonica.

"W. E. Meek. Petromyzon (male and female), from Cayuga Lake, N. Y.
W. P. Gibbons. Two uteri of viviparous fishes.
J. D. Casey. CarcJiarias Americanus, Townsend's Inlet, N. J.

Mollusca. — Wm. G. Binney. Helix HemphilU, Oregon ; PlanorUs Ucari-

natus, N. Mexico ; Helix Cantiana, Quebec ; three species of Land

Shells from the New Hebrides, Tennessee and Lower California ; Pom-

jyholix costata, Oregon.
John Brazier. Twenty-eight trays of Land Shells from Australia and

New Guinea.
C. Conemenos. 497 trays of land, fresh-water and marine shells from

Greece and the Mediterranean Sea. (Pu.rchased by the Conchological

Section. )
William H. Dall. Operculum of Fasciolaria princeps.
M. Dollfus. 277 trays, Mediterranean shells, principally from the coast of

France, at Roussillon, etc. (Purchased by the Conchological Section.)
Harry E. Dore. 26 species California marine shells.
John Ford. 3 marine species, Atlantic City, N. J. ; Ostrea horealis, Lam.,

Greenwich Bay, R. I. ; Area pexata, Say, Atlantic City, N. J. ; Ostrea

Viiginica, Area pexata and Modiola tulipa, from Cape May, N. J.; nidus

of Natica, and variety of Mactra aolidissima, Atlantic City, N. J. ; Helix

hyroides and Succinea obliqua, Wissahickon Creek, Philadelphia ; Area

pexata, Greenwich Bay, R. I.
Andrew Garrett. 96 trays of land, fresh-water and marine shells, mostly

of the Society Islands ; 69 trays of Polynesian shells, 228 specimens.

(The above both purchased by the Conchological Section.)
Wm. D. Haitman. Photographs of three new species of Partula; Veroni-

cella Moridana, in alcohol.
Theodore Hermann. Five specimens of Spondylus princeps and 8. leuca-

cantha from the Gulf of California ; Eburna lutosa, China.
Angelo Heilprin. Spondylus princeps, Var.
W. W. Jefferis. Vermetus lumbricoides, Florida,
Joseph Leidy. Modiola modiola, Kennebunkport, Me.
Wm. G. Mazyck. Helix terrestris, Charleston, S. C. (naturalized).

392 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Prof. J. H. Morrison. Helix nemoralis, Lexington, Va. (introduced).

S. R. Morse. 9 marine species, Atlantic City, N. J.

C. R. Orcutt. Chlamydoconcha Orcutti and tliree other marine species,

San Diego, Cal.
W. T. Pettard. 21 species land and fresh-water shells, Tasmania.
H. A. Pilsbry. 7 species land and fresh-water shells, Louisiana and Texas.
J. B. Quintard. 27 trays fresh-water shells, from Kansas.
John H. Redfield. Pecten Magellanicus, Mt. Desert Isl., Me.
"Wm. H. Rush. 2 species of Nudibranchs, from Florida and the Bahamas.
Beuj. Sharp. Dry preparation of Limax agrestis, Philadelphia.
J. A. Singley. 27 species of land and fresh-water shells from Texas.

(Purcliased by the Conchological Section.)
R. E. C. Steams. 3 species of marine shells from the W. Coast of America.
Rev. J. M. Thompson. Bulimus scalariformis.
Geo. W. Tryou, Jr. 115 species marine, land and fresh-water shells, new to

the collection.

Invertebrates (recent) generally, excluding MoUusca.— J. Ford. Micro-

sciona prolifera, Atlantic City,N. J.
P. C. Tucker, Jr. Renilla Dame, Galveston Beach, Texas.
G. H. Parker. Tubuluria indivisa, Atlantic City, N. J.
H. M. Smith. Mithrax spinosissimus, West Indies.
B. Sharp. Cymothoa (from Crenilabrus), Villefranche, France.
A. Orr. Oecarcinus lateralis, Jamaica.
W. A. Stewart. Libinia canaliculata, Arkadelphia, Arkansas.

Invertebrate Fossils. — A. D. Durbishire. 30 species of British Plio-
cene and Post-Pliocene fossils (in exchange).

T. H. Aldrich. 23 trays Eocene and Oligocene fossils, from Alabama and
Mississippi ; 9 species of Alabama Eocene fossils.

E. T. Dumble. 15 trays Eocene fossils from Texas.

A. G. Wetherby. 9 trays Oligocene fossils from Florida.

F. L. Harvey. Anthracomartus trilobitus, Subcarboniferous of Arkansas ;
Ostrea larva, Cretaceous of Arkansas.

G. W. Ti-you, Jr. 95 species of Eocene fossils from the Paris Basin, col-
lected by M. Antheaume ; 46 species of Tertiary fossils from the same
region ; 5 species of French Cretaceous fossils.

A. Heilprin. Pygidium of Phacops, Upper Silurian of Walpack Bend, Pa.
J. M. Hodgin. Calymene Blumenbachii, Easton, O.
H. B. Abbott. Collection of Miocene fossils from Southern New Jersey.
A. F. Gentry. 4 trays Miocene fossils from Southern New Jersey.

Plants (Recent). — Aubrey H. Smith. 156 species of plants collected
chiefly by himself in Colorado, New Mexico, and California, in May and
June, 1884.

J. Bernard Brinton. 4 species of plants from Louisiana and Lower
California.

J. H. Sandberg, Red Wing, Minnesota. 22 species of plants collected
by him in Nez Perce Co., Idaho, in 1885.

Chas. S. Sargent, of the Arnold Arboretum, Mass. 21 species of trees
and shrubs, mostly from the Southern United States. Shortia galacifolia
Gr., from Michaux's original locality, Toxauay R., S. Carolina.

Horace J. Smith. Pinus Tada L., from Aiken, S. C.

Frank Tweedy, through F. L. Scribner of the Agricultural Department,
Washington, D. C. 54 species of grasses collected in the Yellowstone
Park in 1885.

Wm. M. Canby. 255 species of plants from Southern Europe and North-
em Africa, mostly from the herbarium of John Ball, London.

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 393

Asa Gray. 43 species of plants collected in British America by J. M.
Macoun ; 65 species collected by Gaumer at Cozumel I., on the coast of
Yucatan; 88 species from Northern, Western, and Central Asia and
Japan, by various collectors ; 76 species, mostly from Northern Africa
and Asia ; 52 species, mostly from Porto Rico.

Isaac C. Martindale. Dalea plumosa Wats., new species from Chihuahua,
Mexico.

Geo. Vasey.— U. S. Department of Agriculture. 233 species of North
American grasses, many of them new.

Thomas Meehan. 55 species of plants, mostly cultivated, and many of
tliem new to the collection.

Thomas Meehan and John H. Redfield. 308 species of plants collected by
Dr. E. Palmer, inS. W. Chihuahua, Mexico, Aug.-Nov, 1885 ; 315 species
of South African plants, collected by Miss M. E. Cummings.

Helen C. De S. Abbott. Trunk of Fouquiera splendens, from Lake Valley,
New Mexico.

Mrs. E. H. Williams. 18 species of Chilian plants.

F. W. Harvey. 18 species of plants from S. W. Arkansas.

Thos. C. Porter. 24 species of plants from New Jersey and Pennsylvania.

Joseph Leidy. Omitliogalum nutans, Wissaliickon, Phila., Garden scape.

John W. Eckfcldt. 19 species of N. Ameiican Lichens.

Miss Harrison, through Mrs. M.L. Owen, Springfield, Mass., Myriophyl-
lum Mppuroides Nutt. , from California.

Isaac Burk. 4 species of New Jersey plants.

H. C. McCook. Agave Sisalana, fine living plant in flower, from Florida.

Josiah Hoopes. Flowers, leaves, and ascidia of Nepenthes distillatoria.

Miss Fisher. Polygala incarnata, near Charleston, S. C.

John H. Redfield. 402 species of plants collected by C. G. Pringle in 1885
in the border provinces of Mexico, mostly in Chihuahua ; 55 species,
mostly from Washington Territory and California ; 76 species from the
coast of New England ; 86 species, mostly southern and western, to
supply desiderata in the collection.

Plants (Fossil). — W. D. Hartmann. Fern (?) stems from the Triassic of

Pennsylvania.
F. L. Harvey. Whittleseya micropliylla, sub-Carboniferous of Arkansas.
A. F. Gentry. Quatenary leaf im])ressions, Bridgeton, N. J.
S. D. Button. Plant impressions {Vexillumf), from the Devonian of the

Catskill Mountains, N. Y.

Minerals and Rocks. — H. N. Dubois. Gibbesite. Poughkeepsie, N. Y. ;
Slickensided Medina sandstone, Delaware Water Gap, Pa.

C. H. McCormick. Zoisite, Leiperville, Pa. ; kyanite, Chester Co., Pa.;
peacock-coal, Philadeliihia, Pa.

J. D. Button. Sider te nodule, Sligo Junction, Pa.

W. W. Jeflferis. Smithsonite, Mineral Point, Wis.; sphalerite, Joplin,
Mo.; bioiite, Delaware Co., Pa.; phlogopite, Burgess, Can.; moonstone,
Delaware Co., Pa.; euphyllite, Unionville, Chester Co., Pa.; selenite,
Lebanon Co., Pa.; aurichalcite, Laurium ('?), Greece; chesteitite, Ches-
ter Co., Pa.; siderite and hematite, Antweri), N. Y.

J. T. Morris. Boulders from the Muir Glacier, Alaska ; garnet schist,
Stickeen River, Alaska.

T. D. Rand. Concretionary weathering in gneiss, Radnor, Pa.; tiaji,
Radnor, Pa.

S. Durliorow. Ferruginous earth, Bartram, Fla.

H. Derousse. Rock from McElwain's oil well, Duke Centre, Pa.

M. Hannah. Irish turf.

W. B. Eltonhead. Limestone, N. C.

394 PROCEEDINGS OF ^HE ACADEMY Of [I886.

F. L. Harvey. Carboniferous rock, Siloam Springs, Ark.

C. S. Bement. Meteorite, Alfianello, Italy ; garnet crystal, Colorado.

G. F. Kunz. Meteorite, Jenny's Creek, W. Va.

C. U. Shepard. Meteorite, Dalton, Ga.

E. J. Nolan. Hematite ore, Bessemer, Mich.
M. Russell. Concretionary nodule, Woodbury, N. J.
J. Edgerton. Stalactitic quartz, Belmont Creek, O.
L. Woolman. Fossiliferous boulder, Tacony, Pa.
A. Heilprin. Cambrian pebble, Glassboro, N. J.

D. Mickle. Boiler incrustation.

A. Brezina. Glorietta meteorite (fragment).

D. P. Williams. Gneiss, with enclosure of feldspar, Aldham, Chester
Co., Pa.

E. C. Hine. Magnetic iron and iron ore, fragment of trap-dike, Potsdam
sandstone, and glaciated boulder, from Chateaugay, N. Y.

C. P. Perot. Ferro-manganese, Edgar Thompson Steel Works, Pittsburg,

Pa. ; coke, same locality.
W. H. Jones. Silver ore, Oroya, Peru; silver ore (no loc); silver ore,

Triumfu Mines, L. California; cinnabar, St. John's Mine, California;

cinnabar. New Almaden, California; copper ore, Coquimbo, Chili.
J. Rather. Devonian shale, Lycoming Co., Pa.
J. M. Birkey. Camelian (no Inc.).
Editor PhiladelpJiia Public Ledger. Fissure products from the Carolina

earthquake.
U. S. National Museum. Meteorite, Grand Rapids, Mich.

Additions to the Wm. S. Vaux Collection. — Turquoise, New Mexico ;
Molybdenite. Canada ; 3 Spinel Ruby, St. Petersburg ; 2 Sphalerite, Mis-
souri ; 2 Calcite on Sphalerite, Missouri ; 2 Astrophyllite, Colorado ; 2
Topaz, Colorado ; Sphalerite, Missouri ; Orthoclase, Missouri ; 3 Azuvite,
Arizona ; 2 Malachite, Arizona ; 2 Malachite and Cuprite ; 3 Ouvarovite.
Canada ; 3 Prehnite, Hartz ; 2 Rutile and Mica, North Carolina ; 2
Vanadinite, Arizona ; 2 Cut Aqua-marine, Brazil ; 2 Garnet, Ceylon ;
2 Wulfenite, Arizona ; 2 Opal, Mexico ; 2 Yellow garnet, Siberia ; 2
Calcite, Chihuahua ; 2 Jlhodochrosite, Colorado ; Gypsum, Chihuahua ;
Quartz; 2 Amethyst, Geimany; Celestite, Lake Erie; 2 Celestite,
Texas ; 4Marcasite, Missouri ; Sphalerite, Missouri ; 3 Obsidian, Mexico;
Opal, Mexico; Tridymite, Mexico; Valentinite, Mexico ; Quartz. Mexico ;
Calcite, Mexico ; 6 Geodes, Florida ; Diamond in Bort, Brazil ; Quartz,
New Jersey ; Silver Amaloam, Peru ; Garnet, cut spe. ; 4 Phlogopite,
New York ; 2 Phlogopite, Canada ; 3 Muscovite ; Apophyllite, Pennsyl-
vania ; Emerald, North Carolina ; Microcline, Colorado ; Silicified Wood,
Colorado ; Five-pound Garnet, Colorado ; Stromyerite, Mexico ; 3 Topaz,
Siberia ; Kyanite, Pennsylvania ; Dog Tooth Spar, New York ; Coi-undum,
North Caiolina ; Pyrargyrite, Saxony; Celestite, Tumerlee ; Cairngorm ;
Specular Iron, Elba ; Smoky Quartz, Colorado ; Witl-erite, England ;
Aragonite, Pennsylvania ; Milarite, Tavetch ; 2 Hyalosiderite, Germany ;
Steatite ; 3 Chalcopyrite, Pennsylvania ; Tetrahedrite, Pennsylvania ;
Magnetite, Pennsylvania ; Crystal of Limonite, Pennsylvania ; 3 Calcite,
England ; 3 Tourmaline, New Jersey; Rhodochrosite, New Jersey; Fossil
Coral, Iowa ; Hiddenite, North Carolina ; Alabandite, Mexico ; Iridescent
Bknde, Mexico.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 395

ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY.

1886.

Aaron, S. Frank. The North American Chrysididse. 8vo, T.

On some new Psocidse. 1886, 8vo, T. The Author.

Adami, Giov. Battista. MoUuschi dei dintomi di Sassari in Sardegna.
8vo, T.
Elencodei moUuschi terrestre e fluviatili viventi nella Valle dell' Oglio.

8vo, T.
MoUuschi postpliocenici della Torbiera di Polada presso Lonato. 1881.

8vo, T.
Novita malacologiche recenti. 1885. 8vo, T. The Author.

Abbott, Charles C, M. D. Upland and meadow, a Poaetquissings Chron-
icle. 8vo. New York, 1886. The Author.
Abbott, Helen C. De S. Preliminary analysis of the bark of Fouquiera
splendens. 1884. 8vo, T.
Yucca angustifolia, a chemical study. 4to, T. Philada., 1886

The Author.
Acharius, Erik. Lichenographia Universalis. Gottingse, 1810.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Adams, Lionel Ernest. The collector's manual of British land and fresh-
water shells. 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Alabama, Geological survey of. Bulletin No. I, 1 and 2. The Authors.
Albrecht, P. Sur la non-homologie des poumons des vertebres pulmones
avec la vessie natatoire. 8vo, T. Paris, 1886.
Ueber die Wirbelkorperepiphysen und Wirbelkorpergelenke zwischen
dem Epistropheus, Atlas undOccipitale der Saugthiere. 8vo, T. 1884.
Zur Zwischenkieferfrage. 8vo, T. 1885.

Ueber die morphologische Bedeutung der Pharynxdivertikel. Ueber
die Shepherd' schen Frakturen des Astragalus. Ueber kongenitalen
Defekt der drei letzten Sakral- und sammtlicher Steiszwirbel beim
Menschen. Ueber sechsschneidezahnige Gebisse beim normalen
Menschen. Ueber zweiwurzelige Eck- und Schneidezahne beim
Menschen. Svo, T. 1885.
Epiphyses entre I'occipital et le sphenoide chez I'homme ; Os trigone
du pied chez I'homme. Epihallux chez I'homme. 8vo, T. 1885.

The Author.
Vergleichend anatomische Uutersuchungen. I, 1. 8vo. Hamburg,
1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Allgemeine Naturkunde. Lief. 2-54. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Amann, Rud. De Cor ppo priorum poetarnm latinorum imitatore. Dissert.
Inaug. Acad. Kilieiisi. 8vo, T. 1885. University of Kiel.

American Ornithologists' Union. The Code of Nomenclature and Check-
list of North American birds. 8vo. New York. 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ancey, M. C. F. Nouvelles contribu.tions malacologiques. 8vo. Juillet.

1885. The Author.

Andre, Ernest. Devixieme supplement au species des Formicides d' Europe

et des Pays limitrophes. Dec, 1885. 8vo, T. The Author.

Suitplement au species des Formicides d'Europe et des Pays limitrophes.

8vo. T. 1885. The Author.

Andree, Richard. Die Anthropophagie. Svo, T. Leipzig, 1887.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Appellof, A. Japanska Cephalopoder. Stockholm, 1886. 4to. T.

The Author.

396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Argentine Republic. Stelzner's BeitrJige zur Geologic und Palseontologie.
8vo,

Arnold Arboretum. Annual report of the Director for 1884-85, Cam-
bridge, Mass., 1886. 8vo, T. The Author.

Arnold, Julius. Beitrage zur Entwicklungsgeschichte des Auges. Hei-
delberg. 1874. 8vo. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ashbumer, Chas. A. The product and exhaustion of the oil regions of
Pennsylvania and New York, 8th September, 1885. 8vo, T.
The geology of natural gas in Pennsylvania and New York, 8th Sep-
tember, 1885. 8vo, T. The Author.

Astor Library, 37th annual report of the trustees of the, 1885. 8vo, T.

The Trustees,

Aurivillius, Carl W. S. Oversigt ofver de af Vega-Expeditionen insam-

lade arktiska HafsmoUusker. II, Placophora och Gastropoda. 4to,

T. 1885.

Hafseverteb rater fran norrlligaste Tromso anat och Yestfinmarken.

Stockholm, 1886. 8vo, T. The Author.

Australian Museum. Ramsay's Catalogue of the Echinodermata. Part
I. 8vo. Sydney, 1885. The Museum.

Autograph Letters of Conchologists. 2 vols. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Baculo, Bartolomeo. Nuove ricerche intorno I'apparato gauglionare in-
trinseco dei cuori linfatici. 8vo, T. Napoli, 1885. The Author.

Balfour, Francis Maitland, Memorial Edition. The Works of Francis
Maitland Balfour, 8vo, 4 vols. London, 1885,

Cambridge Scientific Instrument Co.

Baillon, M. H. Dictionnaire de Botanique. Fasc. 19 and 20.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Barcena Mariano and Miguel Perez. Estudios de Meteorologia comparada.
I. The Authors.

Bargum, .Josias. Ein Fall von Actinomykosis hominis unter dem Bilde
eineracuten Infectionskrankheit verlaufend. Inaug. -Dissert, medic,
Facultat zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1884. University of Kiel,

Barral, J, A,, et Louis Passy, Soc, Nat, d'Agric. de France, Enquete sur
le Credit Agricole. II. 8vo, T. Paris, 1885. The Society.

Barton, E. H., M. D. Report to the Louisiana State Medical Society on
the Meteorology, Vital Statistics and Hygiene of the State of Loui-
siana. 8vo, T. New Orleans, 1857. Wm. John Potts.

Bastian, A. Die Culturlander des alten America. 111,1. Berlin, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bauer, Max. Lehrbuch der Mineralogie. 8vo. Berlin, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Beauchamp, W. M. Land and fresh-water shells of Onondaga County.
8vo, T. Baldwinsville, N. Y., 1886. The Author.

Becker, Ernst F., Ph. Zur Aetiologie der Darmeiuschiebunsen. luaug.-
Dissert. medicin. Facultiit in Kiel. 8vo, T. 1885. University of Kiel.

Belgium. Musee Royal d'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Service dela
Carte geologique du royaume. Explication de la feuille de Meix-
Devant-Virton, Wacken, Thourout, Roulers, Marche, Sautour,
Durbuy, with Maps. The Survey.

Bentham, George. Catalogue des Plantes Indigenes des Pyrenees et du
Bas Languedoc. A Paris. 8vo. 1826. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Berg, C. Ueber die Lepidopteren-Gattung Laora, Walk. 8vo, T. 1885.
Observaciones sobre los estados preparatorios de algunos lepidopteros

Argentines. 1886. 8vo, T.
Notas sinonimicas acerca de algunos Cerambicidos de la Fauna Ar-
gentina, 1886. 8vo, T, The Author,

Berghaus' Pliysikalischer Atlas, Lief. 1-4, I. V. Williamson Fund.

Berlese, Aug. Napoleone. Fungi Moricolse, F. II and III.

I. V. Williamson Fvmd.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 397

Berthoud, E. L. A Sketch of the Natchez Indians. 8vo, T. Golden, 1886.

The Author.
Bessaritsch, Johann. Die Bandwiirmer des Menschen, 8vo, T. 1885.

University of Wiirzbiirg.

Binney, W. G. A manual of American land shells. (Bui. U. S. Nat.

Mus. 28). 1885. The Author.

Blass, Fred. Dissertatio de PhaBthontis Euripidt a; fragmentis claronion-

tanis. Mar. 22, 1885. Univ. Christian, Albert Kiliensis.

Die socialen zustande Athens im 4. .lahrhundert v. Chr. Rede,

Christian- Alb rechts-Univer., 8vo, T. Kiel, 1885. University of Kiel.

Bock, Carl. Temples and Elephants. 8vo. London, 1884.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bohemia. Naturwissenschaftliche Landesdurchforschung von Bohmen,

Archiv., v, 4-6. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bolton, H. Carriugton. Report of the Committee on indexing chemical

literature. 8vo, T. The Author.

Bombicci, L. Sul giacimento e sulle forme cristalline della Diatolite della

Serra dei Zanchetti (Alto Api^eunino Bologuese). 24 Gen., 1886.

4to, T.

Sulla contorsione di tipo elicoide nei fasci prismatic! di antimonite d^^l

Giappone. 24 Gennaio, 1886. 4to, T. The Author,

Borre, A. Prendhomme. Analyse de deux travaux recents de MM. Scudder

et Ch. Brongniart sur les Articules fossiles. 8vo, T. Nov. 1, 1885.

The Author.

Boulenger, George Albert. Catalogue of the Lizards in the British

Museum (Natural History). 2dEd.,ii. London, 1885. The Trustees.

Bourguignat, M. J. R. Mollusques terrestres et fluviatiles recueillis par

M. Paul Soleillet, dans son voyage au Choa (Ethiopie meridionale).

8vo, T. 1885.

Especes nouvelles et genres nouveaux decouverts par les Rev. Peres

Missionnaires dans les grands Lacs Africains Oukeiewe et Tan-

ganika. 8vo, T. Paris, 1885.

Nouveautes Ulalacologiques. I. Unionidse et Iridinidse du Lak Tan-

ganika. 8vo, T. 1886. The Author.

Brandis, Julius. Ein Fall von Dickdarmsyfilis. Inaug. Dissert, medicin.

Facultat in Kiel. 8vo, T. 1884. University of Kiel.

Branner, John C. Glaciation of the Wyoming and Lackawanna Valleys.

8vo, T. Feb. 19, 1886. The Author.

Braun, M. Das Zootomische Practicum. 8vo. Stuttgart, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Brauns, Julius. Ueber Quelle und Entwicklung der altfranzosischen

(JanQun de Saint Alexis. Inaug. -Dissert, philos. Fakultat Univ.

zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1884. The University.

Brazier, J. Synonymy of some land mollusca from Papua or New Guinea.

8vo, T. 1884.

Synonymy of and remarks upon the specific names and authorities of

four siiecies of Australian marne shells, originally described by Dr.

John Edward Gray, in 1825 and 1827. 8vo, T. June, 1885.

The Author.
Bredichin, Th. Sur les Oscillations des jets d' Emission dans les cometes.
Moscou, 1885. 8vo, T.
Les syndynames et les synchrones de la comete Pons-Brooks (1883-

1884). 8vo, T. (15, Oct. 1884).
Sur les Anomales apparentes dans la structure de la grande Comete

de 1744. 8vo, T. Moscau, 1884.
Quelques remarques coucemant mes recherches sur les Comets. 8vo,

T. Moscau, 1884.
Sur la queue du premier type de la Comete de 1744. Svo, T. Nico-
lajeff, 1884. The Author.

398 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Brezina. A. and E. Cohen. Die Structur und Zusammensetzun<T der Mete-

oreisen. Lief. I, Stuttgart, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Brinton, D. G. (Iconograpliic Encyclopedia, II), Prehistoric Archaeology.

1886. The Author.

Ikonomatic Writing. 1886. 8vo, T. Phila. The Author.

British Association for the advancement of Science. Montreal Meeting,

1884. Canadian economics. 8vo. Montreal, 1885.

The Montreal Committee.
British Museum (Nat. Hist.). An Introduction to the Study of Meteorites.
8vo.
Richard Lydekker's Catalogue of Fossil Mammalia. III.
Arthur Gardiner Butler's Illustrations of Typical Specimens of Lepi-
doptera Heterocera in the Collection of British Museum. Part VI.
Etheridge and Carpenter's Blastoidea, 1886.
Philij) Lutley Sclater's Catalogue of Birds, Part 11.
Boulenger's Catalogue of Lizards. Second Ed., II, 1885.
A guide to the exhibition galleries of the deparment of geology and
palaeontology in the British Museum (Natural History) (Woodward),
1886. The Trustees.

Brocchi, P. Traite de Zoologie Agricole. Svo. Paris, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Brockhaus, Fried. Nikolaus Falck. Eine akad. Gedachtnissrede. 8vo, T.

Kiel, 1884. University of Kiel.

Bronn's Klassen und Ordnungen des Thierreichs. 5er Bd., II Abth/, 16,

17 ; 6er Bd., Ill Abth., 48-53, IV Abth., 11-15, V Abth., 28.

Wilson Fund.
Brooks, Charles Walcott. Early Migrations, Arctic Drift and Ocean Cur-
rents. 8vo, T. San Francisco, 1884. The Author.
Brown, Robert. Prodromus Florae Novse Hollandise et Insulae Van Diemen.
Vol. I. Londini, 1810. I, V. Williamson Fund.
Buckler, Wm. The Larvae of the British Butterflies and Moths, edited by
H. T. Stainton, F. R. S. Vol. I, The Butterflies. Svo. London, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bucquoy, E., Ph. Davitzenberg and G. Dollfuss. Les mollusques marins

du Roussillon. F. 10-12. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Budapest. Exposition National de 1885. Catalogue raisonne. Redige par

Joseph Korosi. Berlin, 1885. 8vo, T.
Buffalo Library. Finding-List, Part II. Svo, T. Buffalo, 1886.

The Trustees.
Bureau of Education. Circulars of Information. Nos. 3 and 4, 1885.

Department of the Interior.
Bureau of Ethnology. 3d annual report, 1881-82, by J. W. Powell, 1884.

The Bureau.
Another copy of same. Smithsonian Institute.

Bureau of Statistics. Quarterly reports, June 30, 1885-June 30, 1886.

Treasury Department.

Burnham, S. M. Precious Stones in Nature, Art, and Literature. Svo.

Boston, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bush, Katherine J. List of Deep-water Mollusca dredged by the U. S.

Fish Commission Steamer Fish Hawk in 1880, 1881 and 1882, with

their range in depth. Svo. Washington, 1885. The Author.

California. Geol. survey of Cal., J. D. Whitney, State Geol. The Yose-

m.te Gu'.de-book. l'2mo. 1874. In Exchange.

California State Mining Bureau. Henry G. Hanks, State Mineralogist.

Fifth annual report. May 15, 1885. The Author.

Call, R. Ellsworth. On certain recent, quaternary and new fresh-water

mollusca. Feb. 26, 1886.

Fifth contribution to a knowledge of the fresh-water mollusca of

Kansas. The Author.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399

Call, E. Ellsworth and Harry A. Pilsbry. On Pyrgulopsis, a new genus

of Rissoid mollusks, with descriptions of two new forms. 8vo, T.

Feb. 26, 1886. The Authors.

Cambridge, Rev. O. P. Scientific results of the second Yarkand Mission.

Araneidea. Calcutta, 1885. The East India Government.

CambridgHi University Library. Report of the Library syndicate, June 2,

1886. 4to, T. The Library.

Canada. Department of Agriculture. Report of the Entomologist (James

Fletcher), 1885.
Esquisse Geologique du Canada pour servir a 1' intelligence de la carte

geologique et de la collection des mineraux economiques envoyees a

I'Exposition Universelle de Paris, 1855. Par W. E. Logan et T.

Sterry Hunt. 13mo. Paris, 1855. Geo. Vaux.

Geological and Natural History Survey. Alfred R. C. Selwyn, Di-
rector. Summary report of operations to 31st Dec, 1885. Ottawa,

1886.
Colonial and Indian exhibition. London, 1886. Descriptive catalogue

of a collection of the economic minerals of Canada, by the Geological

Corps, Alfred R. C. Selwyn, Director. 8vo, T. London, 1886.

The Survey.
Carpenter, P. H. Review of de Loriol and "Wachsmuth and Springer on

Crinoids. 8vo, T, March, 1886. The Author.

Carus, J. V. Prodromus Faunae JVIediterranese. Part II, Arthopoda.

Stuttgart, 1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Carvalho, Maximiano Marques de. Terremoto no Rio de Janeiro conduc-

tores electro-telluricos deduzidos dos Para-Raios de Franklin. 1886.

8vo, T. The Author,

Casey, Thos. L. New genera and species of California Coleoptera. 8vo.

1885. The Author.
Castillo, Antonio del y Mariano Barcena. Antropologia Mexicana. E.

Hombre del Peiion. Mexico, 1885. The Authors.

Challenger, Report of the scientific results of the Exploring Voyage of.

Zoology. Vols. XII-XVI. ^ H. B. M. Government.

Chaper, M. Description de quelques especes nouvelles de coquilles vivantes

provenant de 1 Afrique Australe et d'Assinie. 8vo, T. 1885.
Note sur une Peg mat.te diamautif ore de I'Hindoustan. 8vo, T. Feb.

15, 1886.
Constatation de I'existence du terrain glaciaire dans 1' Afrique equator-

iale, 8vo, T. 11th Jan., 1886. The Author.

Chapman, S. H. and H. See Dohrmann, A.
Chevreul, M., Seance du Centenaire de. Par M. Louis. 8vo, T. Passy.

1886. The Author.
Chief of Engineers, United States Army. Annual report of the, 1885.

Pts. I-IV. Engineer Department, U. S. A.

Chief of Ordnance. Annual report, for the year ended June 30, 1885. 8vo.

Washiniiton, 1885. War Department.

Chief Signal Officer of the Army. Annual reports for the years 1884 and

1885. 8vo. Washington, 1884-85. War Department.

City Hospital, Boston. 21st report of the trustees of. 8vo. 1884-85.

The Trustees.
Claus, C. Lehrbuch der Zoologie. 8vo. 1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Cohn, F. Kryptogamen-Flora von Schlesien. 8vo, 3er, Bd., 2e Lief.

Beitrage zur Biologie der Pflanzen. IV, 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Colin, G. Traite de physiologic comparee des animaux. 8vo, 3me ed..

Tome I. Paris, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Colquhoun, Archibald R. Across Chryse, being the narrative of a journey

of exploration through the South China Border Lands from Canton

toMandalay. 3 vols., 8vo. New York, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

400 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Columbia College. School of Library Economy. Circular of Information.
8vo, T, 1886-7. Columbia College.

Second and third annual reports of the Chief Librarian, June 30, 1886.
New York, 1886. The Author.

Commissioner of Education. Report for the years 1883 84. 8vo. "Wash-
ington, 1885. Department of the Interior.
Commissioner of Labor. First annual report, March, 1886. Industrial
Depressions. 8vo. Washingtim, 1886. Department of the Interior.
Conn, H. W. Evolution of To-day. 8vo. New York, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Cope, Edw. D. Origin of Man and the other vertebrates, and the energy
of life evolution. 8vo, T. 1885.
Repoit on the Coal Deposits near Zacualtipan in the State of Hidalgo,

Mexico. 8vo, T. 1885.
On the structure of the brain and auditory apparatus of a Theromor-

phous reptile of tlie Permian epoch. 8vo, T. 1885.
On the Intercentrum of the terrestrial Vertebrata. 8vo, T. 1886.
The Vertebrata of the Swift Current Cieek region of the Cypress
Hills. 8vo, T. 1885. The Author.

Cornell University. Proceedings at the unveiling of the tablet to the memoi y
of Louis Agassiz, and at the formal opening of the Sibley College
extension and the unveiling of the portrait of the Hun. Hiram
Sibley. June 17, 1885. 8vo, T. Ithaca, 1885. Prof. J. S. Newberry.
Coulter, John M. Manual of the Botany ( Phsenogamia and Pteridophyta)
of the Rocky Mountain Region, from Mexico to tlie British Bound-
ary. 1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Revision of the North American Hypericacese. 1886. The Author.
Cowan, Frank. Australia : a charcoal sketch. 8vo. Greensburi;, Pa.,
1886. Tlie Author.
Cross, Whitman and L. G. Eakius. On Ptilolite, a new mineral. Aug.,
1886. 8vo, T. The Author.
Dahl, Fried. Beitriige zur kenntnisse des Banes tind der Funktionen der
Insektenbeine. Inaug.-Dissert. philos. Fakultiit. 8vo, T. 1884.

University of Kiel.

Dall, Wm . H. On Turbinella pyrum Lamarck, and its dentition. 8vo, T.

List of the marine mollusca comprising the quaternary fossils and

recent forms from American localities between Cape Hatteras and

CapeRoque, including the Bermudas (Bui. U. S. Nat. Mus., 24). 8vo.

Report on Behring Island Mollusca collected by Mr. Nicholas Greb-

nitzki. 1886. 8vo, T. The Author.

Dames, W. and E. Kayser. Paleontologische Abhandlungen. HI, 1-3.

I. V. Williamson Fmid.

Dampier, Wm. The Voyage of the Roe-Buck. Dampiers Voyages, Vol.

III. A Voyage to Terra Australis. 8vo (no title-page). Isaac Burk.

Dana, J. D. On Lower Silurian fossils from a limestone of the original

Taconic of Emmons. 8vo, T. 1886. The Author.

De CandoUe, Aug. Pyr. Regni Vegetabilis Systema Naturale. Vols. 1

and 3. 8vo. Parisiis, 1818, 18-.I1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Deichmiiller, J. V. Ueber Urnenfunde in Uebigau bei Dresden. 8vo, T.

. The Author.

Delgado, J. F. N. Terrains paleozoiques du Portugal. Etudes sur les

Bilobites et autres fossiles des Quartzites de la base du systeme silur-

ique du Portugal. Lisbonne, 1886. The Survey.

D'Invilliers, Edw. V. The Cornwall Iron Ore Mine, Lebanon Co., Pa.

8vo, T. 1886. The Author.

Derby, Orville A. On the flexibility of Itacolumite. September, 1886.

8vo, T.

The geology of the diamantiferous region of the Province of Parana,

Brazil. May 16, 1879. 8vo, T.

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 401

Peculiar modes of occurrence of gold in Brazil. 8vo. December,

1884.
A contribution to the geology of the Lower Amazonas. February 21,

1879. 8vo, T.
ContribuiQao para o estudo da geographia physica do Valle do Rio

Grande. 8vo, T.
Relatorio apresentado ao Exm. Sr. Conselheiro Manvel Alves de
Araujo acerca dos estudos geologicos pratikados nos valles do Rio das
Vilhas e Alto S. Franciso. 1882. 4to, T. The Author.

Dobson, George Edward. Catalogue of the Chiroptera in the collection
of the British Museum. 8vo. London, 1878.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Dodel-Port, Arnold. Biologische Fragmente, 8vo, T. 1885.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Doehle, P. Ein Fall von eigentiimlicher Aortenerkrankung bei einem
Syfilitischen. Inaug.-Dissert. medic. Facultat in Kiel. 8vo, T.
1885. University of Kiel.

Dohrmann, A. Catalogue of the magnificent collection of minerals ex-
tremely rich in crystallized gold and silver. Catalogue by S. H.
and H. Chapman. December 13, 14, 15, 1886. 8vo, T.

S. H. and H. Chapman.

Donn, James. Hortus Cantabrigiensis. 6th Ed. Cambridge, 1811.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Eakins, L. G. On Allanite and Gadolinite. 8vo, T. 1885. The Author.

Ecole Polytechnique, Catalogue de la Bibliotheque. 8vo. Paris, 1881.

The School.

Ehrenbaum, Ernst, Untersuchungen ueber die Strviktur imd Bildung der
Schale der in der Kieler Bucht haufig vorkommenden Muscheln.
Inaug.-Dissert. 8vo, T. Kiel, 1884. University of Kiel.

Encyclopaedia Britannica. Vol. XX, 4to. 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Encyklopaedie der Naturwissenschaften. I Abth. 44-48 ; II Abth. 33-38.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Erichson, W. F. Katurgeschichte der Insecten Deutschland. le Abth.,
Coleoptera ; 6er Bd., 4e Lief. 8vo. Wilson Fund.

Emi, Henry. Mineralogy simplified. 12mo. 1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ernst, A. Biologische Beobachtungen an Eriodendron anfractuosum, DC.
8vo, T. 1885. The Author.

Etheridge, Robert, and P. Herbert Carpenter. Catalogue of the Blas-
toidea in the geological department of the British Museum (Natural
History). 4to. London, 1886. The Tmstees.

Everhart, B. M. Ellis, North American Fungi. Alphabetical index,
Centuries I-XV. The Compiler.

Fenton, James J. Royal Society of Victoria. Fuller's calculating slide-
rule. 8vo, T. Dec. 28, 1885. The Society.

Fahnestock, George W. Eflects of Carbureted Hydrogen Gas on a Col-
lection of Exotic Plants. 8vo, T. Philadelphia, 1858. Geo. Vaux.

Farini, G. A. Durch die Kalahari-Wiiste Streif-und Jagdziige nach dem
Ngami-See in Siidafrika. 8vo'. Leipzig, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fimd.

Farlow, W. G. The development of the Gymnosporangia of the United
States. 8vo, T. 1886. The Author.

Filhol, H. Bibliotheque d. 1. Nat. La Vie au Fond des Mers, les Explora-
tions sous-marines et les Voyages dvi Travailleur et du Talisman.
8vo. Paris, n. d. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Fischer, P. Manual de Conchyliologie, Fasc. x. The Author.

Fletcher, James. Report of Entomologist, Dep. of Agriculture, Canada.
8vo, T. 1885.

Flower, William Henry, An Introduction to the Osteology of the Mam-
malia. By William Henry Flower 3d Ed,, revised with

37

402 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

the assistance of Hans Gadow, Ph. D., M. A, 12mo. London,

1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ford, S. W. and W. B. Dwight. Preliminary report upon fossils obtained

in 1885 from the metamorphic limestones of the Taconic series of

Emmons at Canaan, N. Y. Svo, T. 1886. J, D. Dana.

Forel, Aug. Indian Ants of the Indian Museum, Calcutta. Svo, T. 1885.

Especes nouvelles de Fourmis Americaines. Svo, T. 1886.

Einige Ameisen aus Itajahy (Brasilien). Svo, T. The Author.

Fourquignon, L. Les Champignons superieurs. Svo, T. 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Frazer, Persifor. Geologorum Conventus. Mente et Malleo. The VFork of

the International Congress of Geologists, and of its Committees.

Svo, T. 1886. Angelo Heilprin.

General notes on the Geology of York County, Pennsylvania. Svo, T.

Dec. 4, 1885.
The application of composite photography to hand-writing and
especially to signatures. Svo, T. Jan. 16, 1886. The Author.

Friede, Hermann. Zur Aetiologie der Polypen an der Conjunctiva.
Inaug.-Dissert. medicin. Faciiltat zu Kiel. Svo, T. 1885.

University of Kiel.

Fritsch, Ant. Fauna der Gaskohle und der Kalksteine der Permformation

Bohmens., II, 2. 1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Garrison, F. Lynwood. The microscopic structure of car-wheel Iron.

Svo, T. 1886.

Notes on the constitution of cast-iron. Svo, T. Feb. 1886.

The Author.

Gaudry, Albert. Materiaux pour 1' histoire des temps quaternaires. 2d

Fasc. Paris, 1880. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Geinitz, H. B. Nachtrage zu den Funden in den Phosphat-lagem von

Helmstedt, Buddenstedt u. a. Svo, T. The Author.

Geinitz, H. B. Zur Dyas in Hessen. Svo, T. 1886. The Author.

Genth. F. A. and G. vom Rath. Ueber Vanadate und Jodsilber von Lake

Valley, Sierra County, New Mexico. Svo, T. Dr. F, A. Genth.

Georgia. Janes' Handbook. 1876. In Exchange.

Gibbes, Heneage. Practical Histology and Pathology. 3d Ed. 12mo.

Philadelphia, 1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Gilbert, Jos. H. Introduction to the study of the scientific principles of

Agriculture. Svo, T. London, 1884.

Note on some conditions of the development and the activity of

chlorophyl. Svo, T. London, 1885.
Results of experiments at Rothamsted on the growth of Barley, for
more than thirty years in succession on the same land. 1886. Svo, T.

The Author.
Gilpin, E. Feather-Alum (Halotrichite) from Glace Bay, Cape Breton.
Svo, T. March 9, 1885.
The Nova Scotia Gold Mines. Svo, T. February, 1886.
The Iron Ores of Pictou County, Nova Scotia. Svo, T. May, 1885.

The Author.

Godman, F. Ducane, and Osbert Salvin. Biologia Centrali-Americana.

Zoology, Parts 40-50 ; Botany, 19-21. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Godwin-Austen, H. H. Land- and Fresh-water Mollusca of India. Part

V. Svo. London, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Goebel, K. Grundziige der systematik und speciellen Pflanzenmorphologie

nach der vierten Auflage des Lehrbuchs der Botanik von J. Sachs,

Svo. Leipzig, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Goeders, Christian. Zur Analogiebildung im Mittel- und Neuenglischen,

ein Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Sprachgeschichte. Inaug.-Dessert.

philos. Fakultat der Chr. -Alb. -Univ. zu Kiel. Svo, T. 1884.

University of Kiel.

188C.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403

Goodale, G. L. Gray's Botanical Text-Book (6th edition), II. Physiolog-
ical Botany. 8vo, 1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Goode, George Brown. The Fisheries and Fishery Industries of the United
States. Section I, text and plates, 2 vols. Washington. 4to. 1884.

Tlie U. S. Commission of Fish and Fisheries.

Govi Gilberto. L'Ottica di Caudio Tolomeo, da Eugenio, Ridotta in Latino
sovra la Traduzione Araba di un Testo Greco imperfetto, per la
prima volta sotto I'autorita della R. Accad, di Torino. 8vo. Torino,
1885. The Academy.

Graber, Vitus. Die auszeren mechanischen Werkzeuge der Thiere. I
Wirbeltiere ; II Wirbellose Tiere. 1 vol. 8vo. Leipzig, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Graff, L. v. Turbellarien von Lesina. 8vo, T. The Author.

Gray, Asa. Botanical Contributions, 1886. I, A revision of the North
American Ranunculi ; II, Sertum Chihu.ahuense ; III, Miscellanea.
8vo, T. May 4, 1886.
Supplements and Indexes. Synoptical Flora of North America. The
Gamopetalse, being a second edition of Vol. I, Part II, and Vol. II,
Part I, collected. 8vo, T. New York, 1886. The Author.

Synoptical Flora of North America. The Gamopetalse, being a second
edition of Vol. I, Part II, and Vol. II, Part I, collected. 8vo. New
York, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Gregorio, Antonio de. Fossili del Giura-Lias (Alpiniano de Greg. ) di Segan
e di Valpore (Cima d'Asta e Monte Grappa). 4to, T. 1885.

The Author.

Grosner, Karl. ITeber die Einwirkung von Natriumsethylat auf Citracon-
Mesacon- und Itaconsaeuresethylester. 8vo. 1885.

University of Wurzburg.

Gruber, August. Ueber nord-amerikanische Papilioniden- und Nymphali-
deu-Raupen. 8vo, T. Dr. J. Stockton-Hough.

Gruber, Wenzel. Beobachtungen aus der menschlichen und vergleichenden
Anatomic. H. 6 und 7. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Giinther, Siegmund. Lehrbuch der Geophysik und physikalischen Geo-
graphic, I, II. 8vo. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Guntz, Max. Untersuchungen iiber die anatomische Structur der Grami-
neenblatter. 8vo. Leipzig, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Haeckel, E. Gesammelte populare Vortrage aus dem Gebiete der Ent-
wickelungslehre. 2e Heft. 8vo. Bonn, 1879.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Hager, Albert D. Report on the Geology of Vermont. 2 vols. 8vo. Clare-
mont, 1861. In Exchange.

Hale, Horatio. The Origin of Languages and the Antiquity of Speaking
Man. 8vo, T. Cambridge, 1886. The Author.

Hampden, John. Letter to Professor Huxley. 8vo, T. 1886.

The Author.

Hansen, Jorgen A. Ein Beitrag zur Persistenz des Ductus omphaloenteri-
cus. Inaug.-Dissert. medicin. Facultiit zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1885.

University of Kiel.

Hartlaub, G. and A. Dubois. Description de trois nouvelles especes
d'oiseaux rapportees des environs du Lac Tanganyka. Suivie de la
liste des Oiseaux recueillis par M. le Capitaine Em. Storms dans la
Regione du Lac Tanganyka (1882-84). 8vo, T. The Authors.

Harvey, F. L. Photograph of doubleheaded snake. Mr. Harvey.

Hawes, G. W. Catalogue of mineral localities in New Hampshire. 8vo, T.

The greenstones of New Hampshire and their organic remains. 8vo,

T. Prof. C. H. Hitchcock.

Hector, James. Indian and Colonial Exhibition, London, 1886. Catalogue
of geological exhibits. 8vo, T.
Handbook of New Zealand. 4th Ed. 8vo. 1886. The Author.

404 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Heesch, Gustav. Ueber Sprache und Versbau des halbsiichsischen Ge-
diclits. "Debate of the body and the soul." (Miitzner's Sprach-
probenl, 92ff.). Inaug. -Dissert. Univ. Kiel. 8vo, T. 1884.

University of Kiel.
Heim, Albert. Handbucb der Gletscherkunde. 8vo. 1885.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Helland, Amund. Lakis kratere og Lavastromme. 4to, T. Christiana,

1886. University of Christiana.

Helmholtz, H. von. Handbuch der physiologischen Optik. 2e Aufl., Lief.

1-3. 8vo. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Hernandez, Franc. Francisci Hemandi medici atque historici Philippi II.

Hisp, et Indiar. Regis, et totuis novi orbis Archiatri, Opera, cum

edita, tum inedita, ad autograph! fidem et integritatem expressa,

impensa et jussu regio. 3 vols. 4to. Matriti, 1790. Thos. Meehan.

Hennessy, Henry. On the comparative temperature of the northern and

southern hemispheres of the earth. Nov., 1885. 8vo, T.

On the winters of Great Britain and Ireland, as influenced by the

Gulf stream. Nov., 1885. 8vo, T.
On the physical structure of the earth. Sept., 1886. 8vo, T.
On the geometrical construction of the cell of the honey bee, 1886.

8vo, T.
Note on the annual precession calculated on the hypothesis of the
earth's solidity. Oct., 1886. 8vo, T. The Author.

Herting, Adolf. Der Versbau Etienne Jodelle's Abhand. phil. Fakultat
Chr, Alb. Univ. zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1884. The University of Kiel.
Heude, R. P. Conchyliologie fluviatile de la Province de Nanking et de
la Chine Centrale, 7-10. Fasc. 4to. Paris. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hicks, Henry and W. Davies. Results of recent researches in some bone-
caves in North Wales (Ffynnon Beuno and Cae Gwyn). With a
note on the animal remains. 8vo, T. Feb., 1886. The Authors.
Hinde, Geo. Jennings. On beds of sponge remains in the Lower and Upper
Greensand of the south of England. 1885. 4to, T.
Hystricrinus, Hinde, versus Arthroacantha, Williams. 8vo, T. 1886.

The Author.
His, Wilhelm. Unsere Korperform und das physiologische Problem ihrer
Entstehung. 8vo, T. Leipzig, 1875.
Untersuchungen liber die erste Anlage des Wirbelthierleibes. Die
eiste Entwickelung des Hiinchens im Ei. 8vo. Leipzig, 1868.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hitchcock, C. H, The geology of Portland. 8vo, T. 1873.

Existence of glacial action upon the summit of Mt. Washington. 8vo.

T. 1875.
On Helderberg rocks in New Hampshire. 8vo, T.
The lithology of New Hampshire. Preliminary catalogue of 250 typi-
cal specimens. 8vo, T.
Norian rocks in New Hampshire. 8vo, T. 1872.
Classification of the rocks of New Hampshire. 8vo, T. 1873.
Geological History of Winnipiseogee Lake. 8vo, T. 1873.
Note upon the Cretaceous strata of Long Island. 8vo, T. 1873.
Recent geological discoveries among the White Mountains. 8vo, T.
The distribution of the marine plants of North America a proof of

organic submergence in the Champlaiu period. 8vo, T.
Description of a new reptilian bird from the Trias of Massachusetts.

8vo, T. 1866.
Petroleum in North America. 8vo, T. 1867.
The relations of geology to theology. 8vo, T. 1867.
The religion of geology. 8vo, T.

Dr. Hitchcock and Dr. Deane. Who first scientifically investigated and
described the fossil footmarks of the Connecticut Valley '? 8vo, T.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 405

The Albert coal, or Albertite of New Brunswick. 8vo, T,

The Visitors' Guide to Amherst College. 8vo, T. 1862.

Review of Lyell's Geological evidences of the antiquity of man. 8vo,

T. 1863.
The elevation of mountains. 8vo, T. 1870.
The earlier forms of life. 8vo, T.

The world before the introduction of life. 8vo, T. 1874.
Report on the Ammonoosic gold fields. 8vo, T. 1879.
First and second annual reports upon the geology and mineralogy of
the State of New Hampshire, 1867, 1870. Report during the year
1870 (imperfect), 1871, 1872. 8vo, T.
The geology of New Hampshire, Vol. HI, 1878, with folio Atlas.

8vo, T.
Lenticular hills of glacial drift. 8vo, T. 1876.
Geological explorations in New Hampshire. 8vo, T. 1874.
The geology of the Ammonoosic mining districts. 8v6,*T. 1878.
The geology of northern New England, Maine, 1885 ; New Hampshire,

1874 ; Vermont, 1872. 8vo, T. 1882.
The early history of the North American Continent. 8vo, T. 1883.
Description of geological sections crossing New Hampshire and Ver-
mont. 8vo, T. 1884.
Geological sections across New Hampshire and Vermont. 8vo, T.

1884.
Geology of the White Mountains. 8vo, T.
Physical history of New Hampshire. 8vo, T. 1877.
The glacial flood of the Connecticut River Valley. 8vo, T. 1882.
The geological position of the Philadelphia gneisses. 8vo, T.

The Author.

Hitchcock, C. H., and J. H. Huntington. Geology of the northwestern

part of Maine. 8vo, T. 1873. Prof. C. H. Hitchcock.

Hoemes, R., und M. Auinger. Die Gasteropoden der Meeres-Ablagerungen

der ersten und zweiten miocauen Mediterran-Stuife in der Oster-

reichisch-Ungarischen Monarchic. 8vo, 1-3. 1879-81.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hugounenq, L. Les Alcaloides d'origine animale. 8vo. Paris, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hoofe, Aug. Lautuntersuchungen zu Osbem Bokenam's Legenden.
Inaug.-Dissert, phil. Facult. der Univ. zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1885.

University of Kiel.
Hooker, J. D. The Flora of British India. Part XIII. 8vo. London,
1886. E. Indian Government.

Homaday, Wm. T. Two years in the Jungle. 8vo. New York, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Hough, Franklin B. Historical sketch of the Universities and Colleges of

the United States. 8vo, T, 1883. Department of the Interior.

Hoy, P. R. How and by whom were the copper implements made ? Who

built the mounds'? 8vo, T. Racine, 1886. The Author.

Howes, G. B. An atlas of practical elementary biology. 4to. 1885.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hubrecht, A. A. W. Proeve eener Ontwikkelingsgeschiedenis van Linens

obscurus Barrois 4to, T. Utrecht, 1886. The Author.

Hudson, C. T., and P. H. Gosse. The Rotifera ; or wheel-animalcules.
8vo, Pts. 1-5. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Huergo, Luis A. Examen de la propuesta y projecte del Puerte del Sr.
D. Eduardo Madero. Discusion Franca, la and 2a Parte. Buenos
Aires, 1886. • The Author.

Humphrey, James Ellis. On the anatomy and development of Agarum
Turneri, Post, and Rupr. 8vo, T. June 16, 1886. The Author.

406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Hunt, Thomas Sterry. Mineral physiolop:y and physiography. A second
series of chemical and geological Essays, with a general introduc-
tion. 8vo. Boston, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hurlbut, Henry H. Samuel de Champlain. 8vo, T. Chicago, 1885.

The Author.
Hussak, E., and E. G. Smith. The determination of rock-forming min-
erals. By Dr. Eugene Hussak. . . . Authorized translation from
the first German edition by Erastus G. Smith. . . . 8vo. New York,
1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Huygens, Christian. Liste alphabetique de la Correspondance de Christian
Huygens qui sera publiee par la societe HoUandaise des Sciences a
Harlem (n. d.). 4to, T. The Society.

Hyatt, Alpheus. Larval theory of the origin of cellular tissue. 8vo, T.

The Author.
Imperial Russian Geographical Society. Report on the Aralo-Kaspic
Leveling, made in 1874.
W. Konner. Literature of Anthropology, Ethnology and the Sciences

of Antiquity, 1878.
Expedition to the Holy Land. By Prince Ladislav-Syrotka, 1583-

1584.
Kaskharia. By A. N. Kuropatkine. 1879.
Information of the Countries of the Upper Amu Darja River. By J.

Minajew. 1879.
Investigations of the Glacial Period. By P. Kropotkine. 1876.
Materials for the Geology of Turkestan. By H. D. Romanowsky,

1884.
Labors (Results) of the Siberian Expedition. T. I ; II ; III, 1, 2, and

Mathematics, 1864-1878.
Labors (Results) of the Amu Darja Expedition, 3d, 4th and 5th Series.
Beobachtungen gesammelt von der meteorologischen Abtheilung der
wissenschaftlichen Expedition an den Amu-Darja, 1874-75.

The Society.

India, Geological Survey of. Memoirs, Palseontologia Indica. Ser. X,

Vol. Ill, Pts. 7, 8 ; Vol. IV, Pt. I ; Supl. 1 ; Ser. XIII, I, 5 ; Ser.

XIV, L 3. Records, Vol. XVIII, 4 ; XIX, 1-3. The Survey.

Indiana. Owen's Report of a geological reconnoissance. 8vo. 1862.

In Exchange.

International Geographical Congress and Exhibition : Report upon the

Third Congress, at Venice, Italy, 1881, prepared and submitted by

Capt. Geo. M. Wheeler. 4to. Washington, 1885. War Department.

International Polar Expeditions, Observations of the, 1882-83. Fort Rae.

4to. London, 1886. H. B. Majesty's Government.

Iowa. White's Report of the Geological Survey. Vols. I and II. 8vo.

1870. In Exchange.

Janes, Thos. P. Handbook of the State of Georgia. 8vo. Atlanta, 1876.

In Exchange.
Jardine, Sir Wm. A catalogue of the valuable collection of bird-skins

formed by. Auction list. 8vo, T. June 17, 1886.
Johannssen, Hermann. Der Ausdruck des Concessivverhaltnisses im Alt-
franzosischen. Inaug.-Dissert. philos. Fakultiit Chr. Alb. Univ.
zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1884. The University.

Jordan, Karl Dr. Die Schmetterlingsfauna, ISTordwest Deutschlands ins-
besondere die Lepidopterologischen Verhiiltnisse der Umgebung von
Gottingen. Jena, 1886. (^Spengel's Zool. Jahrb. Suppl. I).

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Jousseaume, F. Etude sur la Famille des Cyprseidse. 8vo, T.

S. R. Roberts.

Coquilles du Haut-Senegal. 8vo, T. 1886. The Author.

Juhl, Christen. Beitriige zur Casuistik des primaren Carcinoms des

1886.] NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 407

Corpus viteri. Inaug. -Dissert, medizin. Fakultat zu Kiel. 8vo, T.

1884. University of Kiel.
Jukes-Brown, A. .J. The students' handbook of historical geology. Svo.

London, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kallsowsky, Ernst. Elemente der Lithologie. Svo. 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Karsten, G. Ueber die Anlage seitlicher Organe bei den Pflanzen. Svo.
Leipzig, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Keyserling, E. Die Spinnen Amerikas. Theridiidae. II H., 2er Bd. 4to.
Nurnberg, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kidston, R. Catalogue of the palaeozoic plants in the Department of
Geology and Paleontology, British Museum (Natural History). 8vo.
London, 1886. The Trustees,

Kihlman, A. Osw. Beobachtungen ueber die periodischen Erscheinungen
des Pflanzenlebens in Finnland, 1883. 4to, T. Helsingfors, 1886.

Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica.

Kilbum, C. L. Notes on preparing stores for the United States Army,
2d Ed., 12mo. Cincinnati, 1863. The Author,

Kirchholf, Alfred. Unser Wissen von der Erde. ler Bd., Allgemeine
Erdkunde. Svo. Prag, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kirchner, O., F. Blochmann und O, Butschli. Die mikroskopische Pflan-
zen und Theirwelt des Susswassers. II, 4to. Braunschweig, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Klein, E mil. Ueber das elektrische Leituugsvermogen. Svo, T. 1885.

University of Wiirzburg.

Klostermann, Aug. Die Gottesfrucht als Hauptstiick der Weisheit Rede
K. Chris.-Alb. Univ. zu Kiel. Svo, T. 1885. University of Kiel.

Kobelt, W. Reiseerinnenmgen aus Algerien und Tunis. Svo, Frank-
furt a. M, Svo. 1885. Senckenberg Natural History Society.

Konig, Gyula. A Masodrendii es ket Fiiggetlen Valtozot Tartalmazo
Parczialis Difierenczialegyenletek Elmelete, Svo, T, Budapest,

1885. Royal Hungarian Academy of Sciences,
Kohl, F. G. Die Transpiration der Pflanzen und ihre Einwirkung auf die

Ausbilduug pflanzlicher Gewebe. Svo. Braunschweig, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Kokscharow. Nikolai v. Materialen zur Mineralogie Russlands. VIII, Bg,

21-27 ; IX, Bg. 1-17. 4to, I. V. Williamson Fund,

Konner, W. Literature of Anthropology, Ethnology and the sciences of

Antiquity. Svo, T. 1878. Imp. Russian Geographical Society,

Kosegarten, Wilhelm, Uebei- eine kiiutsliche Gehorsverbesserung bei

grossen Trommelfellperforationen. Abhandl. medicin, Facultat zu

Kiel, 4to, T. 1884. University of Kiel,

Kreichgauer, D. Zur Bestimmung von Tragheitsmomenten durch

Schwingungsversuche. 4to, T. 1885. University of Wiirzburg,
Kropotkine, P, Investigations on the glacial period. Svo, T. 1876.

Imp. Russian Geographical Society,
Kriimmel, Otto. Der Ozean. Eine Einluhrung in die allgemeine Meeres-

kunde. Svo. Leipzig, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fimd.

Krukenberg, C. Fr. W. Vergleichend-physiologische Vortriige. Grund-

zuge einer vergleichenden Physiologie der contractilen Gewebe. Svo.

Heidelberg, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kiichenmeister, F. Die Finne des Bothriocephalus und ihre Uebertragung

auf den Menschen. Svo, T. Leipzig, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Kunz, Geo. F, American Gems and Precious Stones, Svo. Washington,

1883.
Precious Stones. 1885. The Author.

Extracts from the notes on the Bement Collection of Minerals by Prof.

Gerhard vom Rath. Translated by Geo. F. Kunz. Svo, T. New

York, 1886, The Translator.

408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

On three Masses of Meteoric Iron from Glorieta Mountain, near

Canoncito, Santa Fe Co., New Mexico. 8vo, T. Sept., 1885.
On Remarkable Copper Minerals from Arizona. 8vo, T. 1885.
Meteoric Iron from Jenny's Creek, Wayne Co., "W. Virginia. 8vo, T.

Feb., 1886.
Native Antimony at Prince William, York Co., N. B. Oct., 1885.

Svo, T.
Meteoric Iron from Jenny's Creek, Wayne Co., W. Virginia. Svo, T.

Feb., 1886.
The Washington Co. Penna. Meteorite. Svo, T. 1885.
On Remarkable Copper Minerals from Arizona. Svo, T. Oct. 5, 1885.

The Author.
Kuropatkine, A. N. Kaskharia. An historico-geographical sketch of this
land, its military force, industry and trade. 1879.

Imp. Russian Geographical Society.
Langner, Otto. Ueber Gastrostomie. Inaug.-Dissert. medicin. Fakviltat
zu Kiel. Svo, T. 18S4. University of Kiel.

Lamed, Edwin Channing. In memory of. Svo, T. Chicago, 1886.
Latchford, F. R. Observations of the terrestrial mollusca of Ottawa and
vicinity. Svo, T. Ottawa, 1886. The Author.

Lawes, Sir J. B. On some points in the composition of soils ; with results,
illustrating the sources of the fertility of Manitoba prairie soil.
Svo, T. London, 1885.
Memoranda of the origin, plan and results of the field and other
experiments conducted on the farm and in the laboratory of Sir John
Bennet Lawes. June, 1885. Svo, T. 1886.
On the composition of the Ash of wheat-grain, and wheat-straw,
grown at Rothamsted, in different seasons, and by different manures.
Svo, T. London, 1884.
Report of Experiments on the growth of wheat for the second period
of twenty years in succession on the same land. Svo, T. London,
1885. The Author.

Lawes, J. B. and J. H. Gilbert. Supplement to former paper, entitled.
Experimental inquiry into the composition of some of the animals
fed and slaughtered as human food. 1883.
Experiments on Ensilage, conducted at Rothamsted ; season 1884-5.
Svo. London, 1886.
Lawes, Sir J. B., J. H. Gilbert and R. Warrington. The nitrogen as
nitric acid, in the soils and subsoils of some of the fields of Roth-
amsted. Svo, T. London, 1883.
New determinations of Ammonia, Chlorine and Sulphuric Acid in
the rain-water collected at Rothamsted. Svo, T. London, 1883.

The Authors.
Lawrence, Geo. N. Description of a new species of bird of the genus
Engyptila, with notes on two Yucatan birds. Svo, T. 1885.
Descriptions of new species of birds of the family Columbidse. Svo,

T. 1885.
Characters of two supposed new species of birds from Yucatan. Svo,

T. 1885.
List of a few species of birds new to the fauna of Gaudeloupe, West
Indies, with a description of new species of Ceryle. Svo, T.

The Author.
Le Conte, Joseph. Sight : an exposition of the principles of monocular
and binocular vision. Svo, T. New York, 1881.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Leidy, Jos. Remarks on Parasites and Scorpions. Svo, T.

An address on evolution and the pathological importance of lower
forms of life. 13m o, T. 1886. The Author.

1886,] NATURAL SCIENCES OP rHILADELPHIA. 409

Lemoine, Er. Elevage des Animaiix de Basse-Cour. 8vo, T.

I. Y. Williamson Fund.
Lespiault, M. Rapport sur les orages de 1883 et 1884. 8vo, T.

Society des Sciences physiques et naturelles de Bordeaux.
Levasseur, E. L'Europe (moius la France) geographic et statistique.
12mo. Paris, 1873.
La France (avec ses colonies) geographic et statistique. 8me Ed,,

12mo. Paris, 1873.
La Terra (moins 1" Europe) geographic et statistique. 12mo. Paris,
n. d.
Levasseur, E., and Ch. Perigot. Atlas de la Geographic physique, politique
et economique. 8vo. Paris, 1873. Stuart Wood.

Lewis, T. H. Effigy Mounds in Iowa. 8vo, T. 188.1. The Author.

Light House Board. Annual report for year ended June 30, 1885. 8vo.

Treasury Department.
Lindermeyer, A. Die Yogel Griechenlands. 8vo. Passau, 1860.

Natural History Society of Passau.
Lonkaschewitch, Platon. Etymology of the Greek language. I, II.
8vo, T. Kiew, 1873.
Explanation of Assyrian Names. 8vo, T. Kiew, 1868.
Etymology of the Hebrew Language. 8vo, T. Kiew, 1883.
Etymology of the Latin Language. 8vo, T, Kiew, 1883.
Imaginary Indo-Germanic World, or the true beginning and formation
ot language, German, English, French and other West-European
languages. 8vo, T. Kiew, 1874.
An Inquiry into the solar large year and the calculations of the year.

8vo, T. Kiew, 1882.
Explanation of the principal laws of the natural and descriptive
microscopical astronomy and astronomical meteorology. I, II. (In
Russian.) 8vo, T. Kiew, 1884-85. The Author.

Lildors, Richard. Zur Kenntuisse der Undecolsiiure. 8vo, T. 1884.

University of Wiirzburg.
Lydekker, Richard. Catalogue of the fossil mammalia in the British
Museum (Natural History). Part II. 8vo. London, 1885.

The Trustees.

McComiick, C. The Inclusions in the Granite of Craftsbury, Vt. 8vo, T.

1886. The Author.

MacGillivray, P. H. Royal Society of Victoria. Descriptions of new, or

little known polyzoa. Part IX. 8vo, T. Feb. 8, 1886. The Society.

McMurrick, J. P. A contribution to the embryology of the Prosobranch

Gasteropods, n. d. 8vo, T. The Author.

Macomb, M. M. Eng. Dep. U. S. A. Tables of geographic positions,

azimuths and distances, 1883. 4to. Washington, 1885.

The Department,

Maes, Christian. Ein Beitrag zur Aetiologie der Myopic. Inaug. -Dissert.

medicin. Facultiit zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1884. University of Kiel.

Magnussen, Lorenzo. Beitriige zur Diagnostik und Casuistik der Actino-

mycose, Inaug.-Dissert. medicin, Facul, in Kiel. 8vo, T. 1885.

University of Kiel,
Malchin, Joannes. De Choricii Gazaei veterum Grsecorum scriptorum
studiis. Dissert, inaug. Acad. Kiliensi. 8vo, T, 1884.

The University of Kiel.
Martens, E. von. Conchologische Mittheilungen, II, 5, 6. 8vo. Wilson Fund.
Martini und Chemnitz. Systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet. L. 335e-339e.

Wilson Fund.

Massachusetts. Report on a re-examination of the Economical Geology of,

by E. W. Hitchcock, 8vo. Boston, 1838. In Exchange.

Report of the Commissioners of the Zoological Survey of the State.

8vo, T. Boston, 1838. In Exchange.

410 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Melvill. J. Cosmo. Notes on the Subgenus Cylinder (Montfort) of Conus.

8vo, T. London, 1886. The Author.

Metzgar, Sismund. Pyridin, Chinolin und deren Derivate. 8vo, T. 1885.

Ueber Paradibromchinolin. 8vo, T. 1884. University of Wvirzburg.

Meyer, Wilhelm. Ein Beitrag zur Behandlung der Rachitis mit Phosphor.

Inaug.-Dissert. medicin. Facultiit zu Kiel. 8vo, T, 1885.

University of Kiel.
Meynert, Theodor. Psychiatry, a clinical treatise on diseases of the Fore-
Brain based upon a study of its structure, functions and nutrition.
Translated by B. Sachs, M. D. Part I. The anatomy, physiology
and chemistry of the brain. Bvo. New York, 1885.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Meyer, Otto. The Genealogy and Age of the species in the Southern Old-
Tertiary. 8vo, T.
Insectivoren und Oaleopithecus geologisch alte Formen. 8vo, T.

The Author.

Michigan. Commissioner of Mineral Statistics. Reports for 1880, 1881,

1883, 1884. 8vo. The Author.

Minnesota. Geological Reconnoissance of the northern, middle and other

counties of. By Henry H. Fames. 8vo. 1866.

J. Fletcher Williams.
Mississippi. Report on the Geology and Agriculture of the State of Mis-
sissippi, by Eugene W. Hilgard. 8vo. Jackson, 1850. In Exchange.
Morlet, L. Diagnoses de MoUusques terrestres et fluviatiles du Tonkin.
8vo, T. The Author.

Morris, Charles. The relations of mind to matter. 8vo, T. 1885.

The Author.
Morse, Edw. S. Ancient and modern methods of Arrow-release. Salem,

1886. 8vo, T.

Mueller, F. v. The plants of New South Wales according to the Census

of 1885. 8vo. The Author.

Nageli, C. v. and A. Peter. Die Hieracien Mittel-Europas, II, 1. 8vo.

Miinchen, 1886. I, V. Williamson Fund.

Nansen, Fridtjof. Bergens Museum. Bidrag til Myzostomemes anatomi

og histologi, 8vo. Bergen, 1885. The Museum.

Nasse, Dietrich. Beitra<;e zur Anatomic der Tubificiden. Inaug.-Dissert.

8vo, T. Bonn, 1882. ^ I. V. Williamson Fund.

Netto, Ladislau. Conference faite au Museum national en presence de

L.L., M.M. Imperiales le 4 Nov., 1884. 8vo, T. The Author.

Lettre a Mons. Emest Renan a propos de 1' inscription Phenicienne

apocryphe soumise en 1872 a I'institut historique, geographique et

ethnographique du Bresil. Rio de Janeiro, 1885. 8vo, T.

The Author.
Neumann, C. Ueber die Kugelfunktionen Pn. and Qu. 8vo, T. Leipzig,
1886. The Author.

Newberry, J. S. Earthquakes. 8vo, T. October, 1886.

North America in the Ice Period. 8vo, T. New York, 1886.
Notes on the geology and botauy of the country bordering the North-
em Pacific Railroad. 8vo, T.
Uneducated reason in the Cicada. 8vo, T. Jan., 1886.
On the origin and drainage of the Basin of the Great Lakes. 8vo, T.
Nov. 4, 1881. The Author.

New Hampshire. Report of the Geological Survey of the State of, show-
ing its progress during the year 1870. By C. H. Hitchcock. 8vo.
Nassau, 1871. In Exchange.

Annual reports upon the geology and mineralogy of. 1st, 2d, 1870, 1871
and 1872. 8vo. Bound copy. C, H. Hitchcock.

See Hitchcock, C. H.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHTA. 411

New Jersey. First annual report of the Geological Survey of, for the year

1854. 8vo. Trenton, 1855.
Third annual report on the Geological Survey of, for the year 1866.

Svo. Trenton, N. J., 1867. In Exchange.

Geology of the County of Cape May, State of New Jersey. 8vo.

Trenton, 1857. Dr. Chas. C. Abbott.

Geological Survey of. Annual report of the State Geologist for the

year 1885. Svo. Trenton.
Geological Survey. Maps, sheets 1, 9, 13, 17. The Survey.

New South Wales. Australian Museum, report of the Trustees for 1884,

1885, The Trustees.
Department of Mines. Annual report for the year 1885. Sydney,

1886. The Department.
New York Free Circulating Library. 6th annual report. 8vo, T. 1885.

The Author.

New York. Geological Survey of. Palseontology, V, 1 ; Lamellibranch-

iata, I and II. 4to. Prof. James Hall.

A geological and agricultural survey of Rensselaer Co. By Amos

Eaton. 8vo.
A report of the Geological Structure of the County of Saratoga. By

Dr. John H. Steel. Svo. Pp. 44-84.
State Museum of Natural History. 27th and 29th annual reports,
1874, 1876. lu Exchange.

New Zealand. Colonial Museum and Geological Survey Department.
James Hector, Director. Manual of the New Zealand Coleoptera.
By Capt. Tlios. Broun. Parts III and IV. Svo. 1886. The Survey.
Indian and Colonial Exhibition, London, 1886. New Zealand Court,
New Zealand Geological Survey Department. Detailed Catalogue
and Guide to the Geological Exhibits. By James Hector. Svo.
Wellington, 1886. The Author.

Nordenskiold, A. E. Vega-Expeditiones Vetenskapliga Jakttagelser, III.
Svo. Stockholm, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

North Carolina. Geological and Natural History Survey of. Part III.
Botany. By Rev. M. A. Curtis. Svo. Raleigh, 1867. In Exchange.
35th Congr. 2d Ses. Ex. Doc. No. 26. Senate. Report of the Secre-
tary of the Navy communicating the report of officers appointed by
him to make the examination of the iron, coal and timber of the
Deep River country, in the State of North Carolina, required by a
resolution of the Senate (Wilkes), 1886. Svo. In Exchange.

Nova Scotia, Report of the Department of Mines, for the year 1885. Svo.
Halifax, N. S.. 1886. The Department.

Nyman, C. F. See Roth, E.

O.iio. Report of the Geological Survey of. Vol. V, Economic Geology.
Svo. Columbus, 1884. With Map. The Author (Edw. Ortou).

Oken, Loienz. Elements of Physiophilosophy. By Lorenz Oken, M. D.,
from the German by Alfred Tulk. Svo. London, 1847. Ray So-
ciety. I- V. Williamson Fund,

Omaha Public Library, The ninth annual report, May 31, 1886. Svo, T.

The Directors,

Onufrowicz, Br. Experimenteller Beitrag zur Kenntniss des Ursprungs
des Nervus acusticus des Kaninchens, 8vo. The Author,

Orcutt, Chas. R. Notes on the mollusks of the vicinity of San Diego,
Cal., and Todos Santos Bay, Lower California. Svo, Tlie Author.

Osborn, Henry L, Development of the gill in Fasciolaria. Svo, T.

The Author.

Owen, David Dale. Report of a geological reconnoissance of Indiana.
Indianapolis, 1862. Svo. In Exchange.

Packard, A. S. On the structure of the brain of the sessile-eyed Crustacea,
8v0j T. The Author.

412 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Paleontologie FranQaise, Ire ser., Ter. Jur. L. 79, 80, 81 ; Ter. Tert. I, f.
1-9 ; Ter. Cret. L. 31 et 33. 2me ser. Veget. Ter. Jur, L. 31, 33, 34.

Wilson Fund.

Palaontographica. XXXII, 1-4 ; XXIII. 1-7 ; XXIV, 1 ; Suppl. I, 5, 6 ;
III, I, 1 ; Title and Index to Vols. 13 and 19. Wilson Fund.

Parker, G. H. On the morphology of Ravenelia glandulseformis. Sept.
1886. 8vo, T. The Author.

Parrish, S. B. and W. F. Supplementary list of plants of Southern Cali-
fornia. 8vo, T. The Author.

Parry, C. C. Lastarrisea, Remy, conformation of the genus, with char-
acter extended. Nov. 1, 1886. 8vo, T. The Author.

Peale, A. C. Mineral waters. 8vo, T. 1885. The Author.

Pennsylvania, Second Geological Survey of. Annual report, 1885, with
atlas. Grand atlas, Div. II, Part II ; Div. IV, Part I ; Div. V, Part
I. Reports of Progress R. R., Pt. II ; A. A., Atlas Pt. I, C. 5, Pt.
I, T. 3. A. A., 2d Rep., Pt. I. The Survey.

Pennsylvania, Second Geological Survey of. Reports A. 2, 2d report of
progress in the Anthracite coal region. Part I ; Atlas to second
middle Anthracite field. A. 2, Pt. I, C. 5, T. 3 ; Grand Atlas, Div.
Ill, Pt. I. Annual report, 1885, with Atlas. Chas. M. Betts.

Pennsylvania. Third annual report of tlie geological survey of the State
of Pennsylvania, by Henry D. Rogers, State Geologist. Read in the
Senate, Feb. 19, 1839. 8vo. Harrisburg. Geo. Vaux.

Peres de la Compagne de Jesus. Memoires concemant I'histoire naturelle
de I'Empire Chinois. 3me Cahier. 4to. Chang-Hai, 1885.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Phillips, George. The seaports of India and Ceylon, described by Chinese
voyagers of the 15th century, together with an account of Chinese
navigation. 8vo. 1885. Adele M. Fielde.

Phillips, John. Manual of Geology theoretical and practical. Edited by
Robert Etheiidge and Harry Govier Seeley. I, II. 8vo.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Plambeck, Christian. Ein Beitrag zur Statistik und Verbreitung der
Tuberkulose im Alter von 16-90 Jahren. Inaug.-Dissert. medicin.
Facultiit in Kiel. 8vo, T. 1885. University of Kiel.

Poore, Ben. Perley. A descriptive catalogue of the Government publica-
tions of the United States, Sept. 5, 1774— March 4, 1881. 4to.
Washington, 1885. Hon. Chas. O'Neil.

Portugal. Delgado's Etude sur les Bilobites. 1886. 4to. The Author.

Potts, Edw. Fresh-water sponges from Mexico. 8vo, T. The Author.

Prantl, K. Lehrbuch der Botanik fiir mittlere und hohere Lehraustalten.
6e Aufl. 8vo. Leipzig, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Prestwich, Joseph. Geologv; chemical, physical and stratigraphical. Vol.
I. 8vo. Oxford, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Prieto, C. F. de Landero y Raiil. Dinamica-Quimica. 8vo., T. Giiada-
lajara, 1886. The Author.

Providence City Library. Catalogue, 1886. 8vo, T. The Librarian.

Provident Life and Trust Company, mortality experience of the, 1866-

1885. Prepared by Asa S. Wing. 8vo, T. 1886. The Company.
Putnam, F. W. On Jadeite ornaments from Central America. January,

1886. 8vo, T. The Author.
Queen's College and University, Kingston, Can., Calendar, 1885-86.

8vo, T. The Trustees,

Quelet, L. Enchiridion Fungoram in Europa media et prsesertim in

Gallia vigentium. Lutetise, 1886. 8vo. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Quenstedt, Fried. Aug. Die Ammouiten des Schwabischen Jura. H.

8-12. Text and atlas. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Rabenhorst, Dr. L. Kryptogamen-Flora. 2e Auti., I, ler, Abth. 10-23

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHiA. 413

Lief; 2er Abth., 21-24; II ; III, 1-8 Lief. ; IV, 1-4 Lief.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Rach, Carl. Ueber die Einwirkung von nascirender Blausiiure auf den
Acetbemsteinsaureeste. 8vo, T. 1885. University of Wiirzburg.
Ramsay, B. P. Catalogue of the Echinodermata in the Australian
Museum. Part I. 8vo. Sydney, 1885. The Trustees.

Rath, G. von. Worte der Erinnerung an Professor Dr. A. von Lasaulx.
8vo, T. 1886.
Mineralogische Notizen, 1866 : 1, Einige neue Flachen am Quarz ; 2,
Ueber den Andesin vom Berge Arcuentu, Insel Sardinien. 8vo, T.
1886.
Vortriige und Mittheilungen. Bonn, 1886. 8vo, T. Jan. 11-Juli 7.
Ueber den Ausbruch des Tarawera auf Neu-Seeland. 10 Juni, 1886,
8vo, T. The Author.

Mineralogische Mittheilungen, n. F. 22. Quarze aus Burke County,
Nord-Carolina. 8vo, T. Dr. F. A. Genth.

Ratte, A Felix. Descriptive Catalogue (with notes) of the general collec-
tion of minerals in the Australian Museum. Sydney, 1885. 8vo, T.

The Trustees.

Ray, Lieut. P. H. Report of the International Polar Expedition to Point

Barrow, Alaska, 1885. War Department.

Rayet, M. Observations pluvismetriques et thermometriques faites dans

le departement de la Gironde de Juin 1883 a Mai 1884. 8vo, T.

The Author.
Reher, Heinrich. Beitrage zur Casuistick der Oesophagus-Erkraukungen.
Inaug. -Dissert, medicin. Facultat zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1885.

University of Kiel.

Renevier, E. Resultats Scientifiques du Congres geologiques international

de Berlin. 8vo, T. Lausanne, 1886. The Author.

Richon, Charles et Ernest Roze. Atlas des Champignons comestibles et

veneneux de la France et des Pays circonvoisins. le Fasc.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Richter, P. E. Verzeichniss von Forschern in Wissenschaftlicher Landes
vmd Volkskunde Mittel Europas. 8vo, T. Dresden, 1886.

Geograi^hical Socieiy of Dresden.

Riedel, Otto. Die monadologischen Bestimmungen in Kants Lehre vom

Ding au Sich. Inaug.-Dessert. philos. Fakultiit der Chris.-Alb.

Univer. zu Kiel. 8vo, T. 1884. The University of Kiel.

Riley, C. V. Annual address, as President of the Entomological Society

of Washington for the year 1884. 8vo, T.

The Mildews of the Grape-Viue. An effectual remedy for Perono-

spora. 8vo, T. February 6, 1886. The Author.

Roberts, W. Wilson. Relatorio sobre o exame do Rio S. Francisco desde

o Mar Ate a Cachoeira de Pirapora feito em 1879-1880. 1880.

4to, T. Prof. O. A. Derby.

Rogers, Henry Raymond. A new philosophy of the Sun. 8vo, T.

Buffalo, 1886. The Author.

Romanowsky, H. D. Materials for the geology of Turkestan. 4to. 1884.

Imp. Russian Geographical Society.

Rossmassler's Iconographie der Europaischen Land und Susswasser-

Mollusken, n. F., II, 1-4. Wilson Fund.

Roth, E. Additamenta ad Conspectum Florae Europsese editum a. CI.

C. F. Nyman. Berlin, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Roumania. Ministerulu Lucrariloru publice. Anuarulu Biuroului Geo-

logicii. Anulu 1883-1884, No. 2. An. II, 1884, No. 1. Ed. Fran-

caise 1883-83, Nos. 1, 2.

Harta Geologica generala a Romaniei, sub-directuinea domnului Gr.

Stefanescu. Judetele, Mehedintu Gorjiii, Vilcea (parte), Doljiu

(parte). 4to. Sheets 7-9. The Survey.

414 PEOCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Royal College of Surgeons of England. Descriptive Catalogue of the
Pathological Specimens contained in the Museum of. 2d Edition,
iv. 8vo. 1885. The Council.

Riiekert, J. Zur Keimblattbildung bei Selachiem. 1885.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ruschenberger, W. S. W. Sketch of the life of Robert E. Rogers, M. D.,
LL. D., with biographical notices of his father and brothers. 8vo.

The Author.

Russ, Karl. Die fremdliindischen Stubenvogel, IV, 7. 8vo. Magdeberg,
1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ryder, John A. Observations on the absorption of the yelk, the food,
feeding, and development of embryo fishes, comprising some investi-
gations conducted at the Central Hatchery, Armory Building,
Washington, D. C, in 1882. 8vo, T. 1883.
Embryology. Reviews from the American Naturalist, June, July,

Aug. and Sept., 1886. 8vo, T.
On the value of the fin-rays and their characteristics of development
in the classification of the fishes, together with remarks on the
theory of degeneration. 1886. 8vo, T.
On the development of osseous fishes, including marine and fresh-water

forms. 8vo, T. Washington, 1886.
An exposition of the principles of a rational system of oyster culture,
together with an account of a new and practical method of obtain-
ing oyster sprat on a scale of commercial importance. 8vo, T.
Washington, 1886. The Author.

Sabrin, Celen. Science and Philosophy in Art. 8vo, T. Philadelphia,
1886. The Author.

Saccardo, P. A. Sylloge Fungonmi omnium hucusque cognitorum. Voh
IV. Hyphomycetes. 8vo. Patavii, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Sachs, Julius. Vorlesungen iiber Pflanzen-Physiologie. 8vo. Leipzig,
1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Saint-Lager, Dr. Histoire des Herbiers. 8vo, T. Paris, 1885.

The Author.

Sargent, C. ■ S. Some additional notes upon trees and tree planting in
Massachusetts. 8vo, T. Boston, 1886. The Author.

Schiiflf Ernst. Untersuchungen iiber das Integument der Lophobranchier.
Inaug.-Dissert. Kiel, 1886. 8vo, T. I. V. Williamson Fond.

Schaflfranek, Dr. The Flora of Palatka and Vicinity. 8vo, T.

The Author.

Schmidt, Adolf. Atlas der Diatomaceen-Kunde. H, 23-26.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Schomburgh, R. South Australia. Report on the progress and condition
of the Botanic Garden and Government Plantations during the year
1885. 4to. Adelaide, 1886. The Author.

Schottliiiider, P. Uber das salpetersaure-Goldnitrat und einige neue
Derivate desselben. 1884. 8vo, T. University of Wiirzburg.

Schrader, Ludwig. Ueber Isopropylderivate des Pyridins und Reduction-
sproducte derselben. Inaug.-Dissert. philosoph. Facultat in Kiel.
8vo, T. 1884. University of Kiel.

Schiibeler, F. C. Viridarium Norvegicum. Iste Bind. 4to. Christiania,
1885. University of Christiania.

Schweizerische Geodatische Commission Das Schweizerische Dreiecknetz.
II. Band, Die Netzausgleichung und die Auschlufsnetze der Stern-
warten imd astronomisclien Punkte. Zurich, 1885.

The Commission.

Scudder, Newton Pratt. Bibl. of Am. Naturalists. II, The published
writings of Isaac Lea, L.L. D. (Bui. U. S. Nat. Mus. 23). 8vo, T.
Washington, 1885. Isaac Lea.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415

Scudder, S. H. Memoir of John Lawrence LeContc, 1825-1883. 8vo, T.
Washington, 1884.
Systematische Uebersicht der fossilen Myriopoden, Arachnoideen und

Insekten. 8vo. Miinchen und Leipzig, 1885.
The cockroach of the past. 8vo, T. liondon, 1886. The Author.

Second Yarklaud Mission. Scientific results. Araneidea, by Rev. O. P,
Cambridge. Memoir of Frederick Stoliczka, by V. Ball,

East Indian Government.
Seebohm, Henry. A history of British Birds, Part VI. 8vo.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Seemann, Berthold. Reise um die Welt. Two volumes in one. 8vo.

Hanover, 1853. Thos. Meehan,

Selenka, E. Studien iiber Entwickelungsgeschichte der Thiere. 4es H.

le Hiilfte. Das Opossum. 4to. Wiesbaden, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Semper, C. Reisen im Archipel der Philippinen. 2er Th. II, Suppl. H. 3.

leH.;in, 7;IV, 3;V, 1.
Severin, Fried. Untersuchungen iiber das Mundepitbel bei Saugethieren
mit Bezug auf Verhomung. Regeneration und Art der Nerven-
endigung. Inaug.-Dissert. medic. Facultiit zu Kiel. 8vo, T, 1885.

University of Kiel.
Shepherd, Francis .1. Sketch of the early history of anatomy. 8vo, T.

1885. The Author,
Silliman, B., Jr. A description of the recently discovered petroleum region

in California. 8vo, T. New York, 1865. Wm. John Potts,

Simpson, George B. Anatomy and Physiology of Anadonta fluviatilis.
8vo, T. Albany, N. Y., 1884. James Hall.

Socoloflf, A. Sur la queue du I Type de la Comete de 1858. 8vo, T. 1884,

The Author.

South African Museum, Cape Town. Report of Trustees, 4to. 1885.

The Trustees,

Sowerby, G. B. Thesaurus Conchyliorum, or figures and descriptions of
recent shells. Part XLIII, 1886.

Spelsberg, Eduard. Weitere Untersuchungen iiber Alpha-Aethyliden-
Valerolakton. 8vo, T. 1884. University of Wurzburg.

Stahr, J. S, Local Geology, Plant impressions in slate. 1886. News-
paper slip. The Author,

Standard Natural History, Parts 53-60, I. V. Williamson Fund.

Stelzner, Alfred. Beitrage zur Geologic und Palseontologie der Argentini-
schen Republik. I Geologischer Theil. 8vo. Cassel u, Berlin, 1885.

The Author.

Stirling, James. Royal Society of Victoria. The Cryptogamia of the Aus-
tralian Alps. Part I. 8vo. December 9, 1885. The Society.

Stockton- Hough, John, M. D. The influence of sex of fetus-in-utero on
length of intergestation period immediately following its birth. 8vo,
T. New York, 1886. The Author,

Streeter, Edwin W. Precious Stones and Gems, 4th Ed. 8vo. London,
1884, I. V. Williamson Fund.

Surgeon General's Ofiice, U. S. Army, Index-Catalogue, VII, 4to. 1886,

War Department,

Sweden. Sveriges Geologiska Undersokning. Afhandlingar och uppsats'er.
(Ser. Aa. Nos. 87, 93, 95, 96. Ab, 8, with maps), Ser C. Nos,
67-77. The Survey.

Syrotka, Radislav. Expedition to the Holy Land. 8vo. 1582-1584.

Imp. Russian Geographical Society.

Taczanowski, L, Ornithologie du Perou. Tome 3me. 8vo. Remus,

1886. Tables, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Taylor, Henry D'Esterre, Royal Society of Victoria. International

statistical uniformity. 8vo, T. Dec. 12, 1885. The Society.

4i6 PKOCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Taylor, Thos. The crystals of butter and fat. 8vo, T. 1885. The Author.

Teall, J. J. Harris. British Petrography, Pts. 1-8. I. V. Williamson Fund,

Thomson, John H. The Land Mollusca of Bristol County, Mass. 8vo, T.
Oct., 1885. The Author.

Thiirach, Hans. Ueber das Vorkommen mikroskopischer Zirkone und
Titan-Miueralien in den Gesteinen, 8vo, T. 1884.

University of Wurzburg.

Tillo, Alexis. Report on the Aralo-Kaspic Leveling, made in 1874, 1877.
8vo. Imp. Russian Geographical Society.

Tischner, Aug. The fixed idea of astronomical theory. 8vo. 1885.

The Author,

Tovpnsend, Chas, H. An account of recent captures of the California Sea-
elephant and statistics relating to the present abundance of the
species. 8vo, T. 1885. The Author,

Tracy, S. M. Catalogue of the phiBuogamous and vascular cryptogam-
ous Plants of Missouri. 8vo, T, Jefferson City, 1886. The Author.

Tryon, Geo. W., Jr. Jlanual of Conchology; structural and systematic.
Pts. 29-32 h ; 2d ser., Pts. 5-8. The Author.

Turkestan Russe. Romanovsky and Mouchketow's Carte Geologiqr.e, edi-
tion 1885. Six sheets in folio. The Geological Survey of Russia,

Uhlworm, O., und F, H. Haenlin. Bibliotheca Botanica, H. 1. 4to.
Cassel, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ulrich, E. O. Contributions to American Palaeontology. Vol. I, 8vo.
1886. The Author.

United States Civil Service Commission. 3d annual report, Jan. 16, 1885—
Jan. 16, 1886 (3d Ed.). 8vo. Washington, 1886. The Commission.

United States Coast and Geodetic Survey Report, fiscal year ending June,

1884. 8vo. Treasury Department.
United States Commission of Fish and Fisheries, The fisheries and fishery

hidustries of the United States By George Brown Goode, Sec-
tion I, text and plates, 2 vols., 4to, Washington, 1884.
Report for 1883. 8vo. Washington, 1885, The Commission.

United States Department of Agriculture. Division of Entomology. In-
sects affecting the Orange. By H. G. Hubbard. 8vo. Washington,

1885. The Department.
United States Geological Survey, J. W. Powell, Dir. Mineral Resources

of the United States. Calendar years 1883 and 1884. Albert J.

Williams, Jr. 8vo. Washington, 1885.
Monographs, Vol. IX. Whitfield's Brachiopoda and Lamellibran-

chiata of the Raritan Clays and Greensand Marls of New Jersey.

4to. 1885,
Bulletin, Nos. 7-29.

5th annual report. Department of the Interior.

United States, Tenth Census of. Vols, XIII, XIV, XVI, Pt. 1, XX. 4to,

Department of the Interior.
United States, Joint Commission to consider the present organizations of

the signal service, geological survey, coast and geodetic surveys, and

the hydrographic office of the Navy Department. Testimony before

the. 8vo. Washington, 1886. Hon. Chas. O'Neill.

United States, War Department, Weather Maps, 1886. Jan, 6, 3 P, M.,

to Jan. 10, 11 P. M. 14 maps. The Department,

University of Kiel. Eighty literary, medical and scientific theses, 1885-6.

8vo. ' The University.

University of Pennsylvania, Annual reports of the Provost and Treasurer,

October 1, 1885. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1886. The Trustees.

University of Wiirzburg. Twenty-six medical and chemical theses. 8vo,

1885-6, The University,

Velenovsky, Josef. Die Gymnospermen der bohmischen Kreideformation.

4to. Prag, 1885. The Author.

i886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 41 T

Verrill, A. E. Results of the explorations made by the steamer Albatross
off the northern coast of the United States in 1883. 8vo. Wash-
ington, 1885. The Author,

Vines, S. H, Lectures on the physiology of plants. 8vo. Cambridge,
1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Vogdes, Anthony W. Description of a new Crustacean from the Clinton
Group of Georgia, with remarks upon others. 8vo, T, New York,
1886. The Author.

Wachsmuth. C, and F. Springer. Revision of the Palaeocrinoidse. Pt.
Ill, 2d Section. 1886. Same, Pts. I ; II ; III, 1st Section and
Index. 8vo. The Authors.

Wahnschafte, F. Die Susswasser-Fauna und Susswasser-Diatomen-Flora
im unteren Diluvium der Umgegend von Rathenow. 8vo, T. 1885.

The Author.

Wakker, J. H. Algemeinfe Vereeniging voor BloemboUencultuur te Haar-
lem. Onderzock der Ziekten van Hyacinthen en andere Bol- en
Knolgewassen. Verslag over het Jaar, 1884. The Society.

Wattebled, G. Description de Mollusques inedits de I'Annam, recolte du
Capitaine Dorr, aux environs de Hue. 8vo, T. 1886.

Weber, Carl Ludwig. Ueber galvanische Leitungsfahigkeit im zusani-
menhang mit der Veranderlichkeit der Structur. 8vo, T.

University of Wtirzburg.

Weiler, Julius. Die Bildungsanomalien der Nebennieren und deren path-
ologische Bedeutung. Inaug. -Dissert, medicin. Fakultat in Kiel.
8vo, T. 1885. University of Kiel.

Weinnoldt, Ernst. Ueber Funktionen welche gewissen Difierenzengleich-
ungen n. Ordnung Geniige leisten. luaug.-Dissert. phil. Fakult.
z. Kiel. 8vo, T. 1885. University of Kiel.

Westerlund, Carl Agardh. Fauna der paliiarctischen Region lebenden
Binnenconchylien. I, IV, V.
Fauna Europsea Molluscorum Extramarinorum prodromus. Fasc.
1, 2. Luudffi, 1876-78. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Wheeler, Geo. M. See International Geogi'aphical Congress and Exhibition.

White, Chas. A. Report on the Geological Survey of the State of Iowa.
Vols. I and II. 8vo. 1870. In Exchange.

Whiteaves, .J. F. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. of Canada. Contributions

to Canadian Paleontology. Vol. I, Parti. 8vo. 1885. The Author.

The same. The Survey.

Whitfield, Robert P. Geol. Surv. of N. .1. Brachiopoda and Lamelli-

branchiata of the Raritan Clays and Greeusand Marls of New

.Jersey. 4to. Geo. H. Cook.

Monogr. U. S. Geol. Sui'v. IX. Brachiopoda and Lamellibranchiata of

the Raritan Clays and Greensand Marls of New Jersey. 4to. 1885.

Department of the Interior.

Wiedersheim, R., and W. N. Parker. Elements of the comparative ana-
tomy of vertebrates. 8vo. London, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Williams, Alb., Jr. U. S. Geol. Surv., Mineral Resoui-ces of the United
States, 1883 and 1884. 8vo. Department of the Interior.

Williams, S. G. Applied Geology. 8vo. New York, 1886.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Wisliceuus, Wilhelm. Ueber die Einwirkung von Cyankalium auf Phtalid.
8vo, T. 1885. University of Wiirzburg.

Wood, Robt. W., M. D. Memorial of Edward Jarvis, M. D. 8vo, T.
Boston, 1885. Am. Statistical Ass.

Woodhead, G. Sims and Arthur W. Hare. Pathological Mycology. Sec-
tion I, Methods. 8vo. Edinburgh, 1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Wortmau, Jacob L. The Comparative anatomy of the teeth of the verte-
brata. 8vo. 1886. " The Author.

28

418 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Wright, Carroll D. A manual of distributive co-operation. 8vo, T. 1885.

The Author.
Yale College, catalogue of the officers and students. 8vo, T. 1885-86.

The Trustees.
Zigno, Achille de. Flora fossilis formationis oolithicse, IT, 2-5.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zimmermann, Dr. O. E. R. Atlas der Pflanzenkrankheiten welche durch
Pilze hervorgerufen werden. H. 2-4. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Zincken, C. F. Die Fortschritte der Geologic der Tertiiirkohle, Kreidec-
kohle, Jurakohle und Triaskohle oder Ergiinzungen zu der Physio-
graphic der Braunkohle. 8vo. Leipzig, 1878. The Author.
Zittel, Karl A, Handbuch der Palseontologie. I Abth. II Bd., 4. und 5.
L. I. V. Williamson Fund.
See Palaeontographica.
Zoologisches Station von Neapel. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel
und der angienzenden Meeres-Abschnitte. XIII. Monog. 4to.
1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zwanziger, Georg. Ueber Sulfo-phenylamidoessigsaure und Phenylimido-
essigsiiure. 8vo, T. 1885. University of Wiirzburg.

Journals and Periodicals.

Adelaide. Royal Society. Transactions, VIII. Society.

Albany. 'New York State Museum of Natural History. Annual Reports,

33d-38th. Preliminary Notice of Lamel. Shells, I (from 35th Rep.).

The Trustees.

Alnwick. BervFickshire Naturalists' Club. Proceedings, X, 8. Society.

Altenburg. Mittheilungen aus dem Osterlande. N. F., III. Editor.

Amsterdam. Het Genootschap Natura Artis Magistra. Bijdragen tot de

Dierkunde, 3, 4, 12 and 13 Afl. Society.

K. Akademie van Wettenschappen. Verslagen en Mededeelingen,

Afd. Letterkunde, 3 R. II D. Afd. Natuurkunde, 2 R. XX.

Jaarboek, 1884. Verhandeliugen, D. XXIV; Afd. Letterkunde, Deel

XVI. Processen Verbaal, Afd. Natuurkunde, 1885. Society.

Angers. Societe d'Etudes scientifiques, 14me Annee. Society.

Societe nationale d'Agriculture, Sciences et Arts. Memoires, XXVII.

Society.

Anvei's. Societe Royale de Geographie. Bulletin X, 3-6 ; XI, 1, 2.

Memoires, III. Society.

Auch. Societe Francjaise de Botanique. Revue de Botanique, Nos.

41-48. Society.

Augsburg. Naturhistorischer Verein, 28er Bericht. Society,

Auxerre. Societe des Sciences historiques et naturelles de I'Yonne.

Bulletin, XXXIX, 2 ; XL. Society.

Baltimore. American Chemical Journal, VII, 4-VIII, 5.

Johns Hopkins University.
American Journal of Mathematics, pure and applied. VII f, 2-IX, 1.

Johns Hopkins University.

Johns Hopkins University. Studies from the Biological Laboratory,

III, 5-8. University circulars, Nos. 45-53. The University,

Peabody Institute, 19th annual report. The Trustees.

Barcelona. Real Academia de Ciencias Naturales y Artes. Acta, 20 Die.

1885. Society.

Basel. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, VII, 3. Society.

Schweizerische paliiontologische Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen XII.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Batavia. Natuurkundig Vereen in Nederlandsch Indie. Natunrkundige

Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indie, 8e Ser. VI, 3-VII, 1. Society.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419

Bath. Postal Microscopical Society. Journal of Microscopy and Natural
Science. Nos. 1-20, vols. I-Y. Society.

Belfast. Naturalists' Field Club. Annual Report, II, 5. Society.

Bergen. Bergens Museum. Aarsberetning, 1885. The Director.

Berlin. Arcliiv fiir Naturgeschichte, 51er Jahrg. 2-4, C ; 52er Jahrg. II, 2.
Botanischer Jahresbericht (Just) X, 2 Abth., 2 H. ; XI, Abtli. 1 and
2 H.; 2 Abth., 1 H. I. V. AVilliamson Fund.

Deutscher Fischerei-Verein. Haupt-Sachregister, 1886, No. 4. Mitt-
heihmgen, 1886, Nos. 6-9. Society.

Deutsche geologische Gesellschaft. Zeitschrift, XXXVII, 8-
XXXVIII, 2. Society.

Entomologischer Verein. Deutsche entomologische Zeitschrift,
XXIX, 1-XXX, 1. Society.

Entomologischer Verein in Berlin. Berliner entomologische Zeit-
schrift, XXIX, 2. Society.
Gartenflora, XXXIV, 1-3, 5-7. Thos. Meehan.
Garten-Zeitung (Wittmack), IV, 1-52. Editor.
Gesellschaft Naturfoi'schender Freunde. Sitzungs-berichte 1885, Nos.
8-10 ; 1886, Nos. 2-8. Society.
Jahrbucher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik (Pringsheim), XVI, 3-
XVII, 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naturae Novitates, 1885, No. 22 ; 1886, No. 22. The Publishers.
K. Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, physi-
kalische, 1885. Anhang zur Abhandlungen, 1885. Sitzuugsber-
ichte, 1885, Nos. 1-52 ; 1886, Nos. 1-39. Society.
Der Naturforscher, XVII, 27-39 ; XVIII, 27-52. Editor.
Repertorium fiir Anatomic und Physiologie (Valentin), I, 1886-VIII,
1843, I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, Nos. 1092-1101, 1103-
1142. ^ ' Society.
BesanQon. Academic des Sciences, Belles Lettres et Arts, 1884. Society.
Birmingham. Philosophical Society. Proceedings, IV, 2; VI, 1. Society.
Bonn. Archiv fiir mikroskopische Anatomic, XXV, 4-XXVIII, 4.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Naturhistorischer Verein. Verhaudlungen, XLII, XLIII. Society.

Bordeaux. Academic nationale des Sciences, Belles-Lcttres et Arts,

Actes, 3c Ser. XLIV, XLV. Recueil des Actes, XL VI, 1-4. Society.

Societe Linneenne. Actes, XXXVIII, Society.

Societe des Sciences physiques et naturelles. Memoires, 3e Ser. I ;

II, 1, Society,

Boston, American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Proceedings, XXI.

1 and 2. Memoirs, XI, Pt. 3, Nos. 2-4. Society.

Commissioners of Inland Fisheries, 20th annual report.

The Commissioner.
Library notes (Dewey). I, 1, 2. The Editor.

Society of Natural History. Memoirs, III, 12 and 13. Proceedings,
XXIII, pp. 193-304.
Braunschweig. Archiv fiir Anthropologic, XVI, 1-3,

I, V, Williamson Fund.
Naturwissenschaftliche Rundschau, I, 1-47. The Editor.

Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Mikroskopie, II, 3 — III, 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund,
Bremen, Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Abhandlungen, IX, 2, 3.

The Society,

Bristol, Naturalists' Society. Proceedings, V, 1. The Society,

Brockport, The Naturalists' Companion, I, 12. The Editor,

Brooklyn. Entomologica Americana, I, 9 — II, 8. The Editor.

Library Bulletin of new books. No. 24, Annual report, 28th.

The Librarian,

420 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Brookville. Society of Natural History. I5ulletiu No. 2. The Society.
Briinu. K. K. Miihrisch-Schlesisclae Gesellschaft zur Befiu-derung des
AckerbaueSj der Natur- uud Landeskuude. Mittheihmgen, 1885,

The Society.

Naturforschender Verein. Verhandhingen, XXIII, 1, 2. Bericht

der meteorologischen Commission, 1883. The Society.

Bruxelles. Academic Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts.

Annuaire, 1886. Bulletin, 3e ser. X, 9— XI, 8. The Society.

Musee Royale d'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique. Bulletin, IV, 1-3.

The Director.

Societe Royale de Botanique. Bulletin, XXIV; XXV, 1. The Society.

Socicte Beige de Microscopie, Bulletin, XII, 1-10.

Societe Entomologique de Belgique. Comptes-Reudus, ser. 3me,

Nos. 61-68. The Society.

Societe Beige de Geographic, 1885, No. 4 — 1886, No. 1. Proces-Verbaux

Aout, 1885— Jul. 4, 1886. The Society.

Buda-Pest. Tudomanyos Akademia. Almanach, 1885. Ertekezesek a

mathematikai Tudomanyok Korebol, XI, 1-9 ; Termeszettudoman-

yok Korebol, XIV, 1-8 ; Legtiineti Eszleletek, II K.; Mathematikai

es Termeszettudomanyi Ertesito, III, 1-5. Mathematikai es Ter-

meszettudomanyi Kozlemenyek Vonatkozolag.a hazai Viszonyokra

XVIII, XIX. Mathematische und naturwissenschaftliche Berichte

aus Ungarn, II. III. Osztalyanak Kiilon Kiadoanya, 1884, II.

The Society.
Ungai'ischer Landes-Gartenbauverein. Gedenkenblatt, len, 1886.

TheSociety,

Ungarisches National-Museum. Termeszetrajzi Fiizetek, IX, 3 — X,

2. Gazette de Hongrie II, 27-32. The Director.

Buenos Aires. Sociedad Cientifica Argentina. Auales, XX, 1 — XXII, 3.

The Society,

Sociedad Geografica Argentina. Revista, III, 33— IV, 39. TheSociety.

Buffalo, Society of Natural Sciences. Bulletin, V, 1 and 2. The Society.

Caen, Academic nationale des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres, Memoires,

1885, The Society.
Calcutta. Asiatic Society of Bengal. Journal LIV, Pt. 1, No. 3, Pt. 2,

No. 3 ; LV, Pt. 2, Nos. 1 and 2. Proceedings, 1885, Nos, 6-10 ;

1886, Nos. 1-3, 5-7, The Society.
Cambridge, Mass. Appalachian Mountain Club. Appalachia, IV, 3.

The Society.
Harvard University. Library Bulletin, Nos, 83-35. The Librarian,
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Report, 1885-86. Bulletin XII,
2-6, Memoirs X, 2, The Director.

Peabody Museum of American Archaeology and Ethnology, 18th and
19th annual reports. The Director.

Cambridge, England. University. Studies from the Morphological La-
boratory I, 1, 2 ; II, 1. The University.
Canada. Royal Society. Proceedings and Transactions, 1885, III.

The Society,

Cape Town. South African Philosophical Society. Transactions III,

1, 2. The Society.

Cap Rouge. Le Naturaliste Canadien, XV, 2 — XVI, 5. The Editor.

Cardiff. Naturalists' Society. Report and Transactions, XVI,

The Society,
Catania, Academia Gioenia di Scienze Natural!, Atti, 3e Ser., XVIII.

The Society,
Cassel, Malakozoologische Blatter. N, F., Ill, VIII, 1— IX, 1,

I, V. Williamson Fund,
Verein fiir Naturkunde. Festschrift fiir 50jahr, Jubil. The Society,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 421

Charleston. Elliott Society of Science and Ai-t. Proceedings, II, pp.

41-80. The Society.

Chicago. Academy of Sciences. Bulletin I, 6. The Society.

American Antiquarian, VII, 6— VIII, 6. The Editor.

Historical Society. Constitution and By-laws, 1885-6. The Librarian.

Christiania. Archiv for Mathematik og Naturvidenskab, X, 3, XI, 4.

The Editor.
Norwegisches Meteorologisches Institut. Jahrbuch, 1882-84.

The Institute.
Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne, XXVIII, 3 ; XXX, 2.

The Editor.
Videnskab-Selskab. Forhandlingar, 1885. The Society.

Cincinnati. Society of Natural History. Journal, VII, 4-IX, 3.

The Society.

Copenhagen. K. D. Videnskaberues Selskab. Oversigt, 1885, No. 3 ;

1886, Nos. 1, 2. Skrifter, 6e, R. II, 8, 9, 10 ; III, 1-3. The Society.

Societe Royale des Antiquaries de Nord. Tillaeg, 1885. The Society.

Botaniske Forening. Tidsskrift, XV, 1-4. Meddelelser, 1886, Nos.

8, 9. The Society.

Cordoba, Academia nacional de Ciencias exactas. Actas, Y, 2. Boletin,

VIII, 2-4. The Society.

Crawfordsville. Botanical Gazette, X, 12-XI, 11 ; Index to Vols. I-X.

The Editor.
Danzig, Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Schriften, N. F., VI, 2,

The Society.
Davenport. Academy of Natural Sciences. Proceedings, IV. The Society.
Denver. Colorado Scientific Society. Proceedings, II, 1. The Society.
Dijon. Academic des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres, Memoirs, 1883-84.

The Society.
Dorpat. Naturforsher Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte, VII, 2, Archiv
fur die Naturkunde Liv-Ehst und Kurlands, 2e Ser., X, 2, 3.

The Society.
Dresden. K. Leop. -Carol. -Deutscher Akademie der Naturforscher.
Nova Acta, XLVII and XLVIII. Leopoldina, H, 20, 21,

The Society.
K. mineralogisch-geologisches und prsehistorisches Museum. Mitt-
heilungen, 6es, H. The Director.

Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft Isis. Sitzungsberichte und Ab-
handlungen, 1885 and 1886, Jan. -June. The Society.

Verein fiir Erdkunde, Jahresbericht, XXI. The Society.

Dublin. Royal Dublin Society. Proceedings, IV, T, 8, 9 ; V, 1. 2. Trans-
actions, III, 7-10. The Society.
Royal Geological Society of Ireland. Journal, XVI, 3; XVII, 1.

The Society.

Royal Irish Academy. Proceedings, Science, Ser., II, Vol. 14, Nos.

3 and 4 ; Polite Literature and Antiquities, Ser. II, Vol. 2, No. 6 ;

Todd Lecture Series, Vol. 2, Pt. 1. Transactions, XXVIII, 17-20.

The Society.
Dunedin. Nevs^ Zealand Journal of Science, I, 1, 3-12 ; II, 1-12.

In exchange.

Edinburgh. Botanical Society. Transactions and Proceedings, XV, 2 ;

XVI, 2. The Society.

Royal Physical Society. Proceedings, 1884-85. The Society.

Scottish Naturalist, new series, Nos. 11-13. The Editor.

Emden. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, 70er. Jahresbericht. The Society.

Erlangen. Biologisches Centralblatt, I-VI, 17. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Pbysikalisch-medicinische Societiit. Sitzungsberichte, H. 17.

The Society.

422 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Florence. R. Accademia Petrarca di Scienze, Lettere et Arti in Arezzo.
Pellizzari, Archivio, 1881. Rovighi e Santini, Sulle Convulsioni
epilettiche, 1882. The Society.

Florence. Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale. BoUettino, 1886, Nos. 1-21.

The Library.

Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano (Caruel), XVIIT, 1-4, The Editor.

Societa Entomologica Italiana. BoUettino, XVII, 3, 4 ; XVIII, 1, 2

and 3. The Society.

Societa Italiana di Antropologia, Etnologia e Psicologia comparata.

Archivio, XIV, 1, 2 ; XV, 1-3 ; XVI, 1. The Society.

Folkestone. Natural History Society. 2d Series, Oct., 1884. Jan., 1S86.

The Society.
France. Association Francjaise pour 1' Avancement des Sciences. Comptes-
Rendus, 1884. The Society.

Frankfurt a, M. Aerztlicher Verein. Jahresbericht, XXVIII.

The Society.

Deutsche malakozoologische Gesellschaft. Nachrichtsblatt, 1885, Xos.

1-12 ; 1886, 1, 2, 7-10. Jahrbiicher, XII, 4-XIII. 3. The Society.

Frankfurter Verein fiir Geographie und Statistik. Jahresberichte, XI,

VIII, XLIX. The Society.

Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, XIV,

1. Bericiit, 1885. The Society.

Frankfurt a. O. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Monatliche Mitthei-

lungen, III, 10, 11. The Society.

Frauenfeld. Thurganische Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen,

H. 7. The Society.

Frieburg i. B. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Berichte liber die Ver-

handlungen, VIII, 3. The Society.

Gand. Archives de Biologie (Van Beneden et Van Bambeke), VI, 1, 2.

T. V. Williamson Fund.
Geneva. Institut National Genevois. Bulletin, XXVI. The Society.

Recueil Zoologique Suisse (Fol.), Ill, 1-4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Societe Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle. Memoires, XXIX, 1.

The Society.

Genoa. Eeale Accademia delle Scienze Mediche. Rendicouto sommario,

1, 1885. The Society.

Societa di Letture e Conversazioni scientifiche. Giornale, IX, 1 a,

Sem. 1-8. The Society.

Museo civico di Storia Natural!. Annali, I-VI, XVIII-XXII.

The Society.
Giessen. Jahresbericht iiber die Fortschritte der Chemie (Fittica), 1883,
No. 5—1884, No, 3. The Editor.

Oberhessische Gesellschaft fllr Natur- und Heilkunde. 24er Bericht.

The Society.

Glasgovr. Natural History Society. Proceedings, New Series, I, 2. Index,

Vols. I-V, The Society.

Gorlitz. Oberlausitzische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Neues lausit-

cisches Magazin, LXI, 2 ; LXII, 1, The Society,

Gotha. Dr, A. Petermann's Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes' geographi-

scher Anstalt, XXXI, 11— XXXII, 10, Ergilnzungsheft, Nos. 80-83,

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Granville, Ohio. Denison University. Bulletin of the Scientific Labora-
tories, I. The University.
s'Gravenhage. Nederlandsche entomologische Vereeniging. Tjjdschrift
voor Entomologie, XXVIII, 1-4 ; XXIX, 1, 2. The Society.
Graz. Botanisches Institut (Leitgeb,). Mittheilungen, H, 1,

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Steiermark, Mittheilungen, 1885,

The Society.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 423

Verein der Aerzte in Steiermark. Mittheilungen, 1884, 1885.

The Society.

Zoologisches Iiistitnt. Arbeiten, I, 1, 2. I, V. Williamson Fund.

Groningen. Naturkundig Genootschap. Verslag, 1885. The Society.

Halifax, Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Science. Proceedings and

Transactions, VI, 3. The Society.

Halle a. S. Verein fur Erdkunde. Mittheilungen, 1885. The Society.

Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissensohaften, 4e F., IV, 4— V, 3. The Editor.

Hamburg, Geographische Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, 1885, No. 2.

The Society.
Hamilton. Hamilton Association. Journal and Proceedings, I, 2.

The Society.
Haarlem. Musee Teyler. Archives, 2de Ser. II, 3. The Director.

Societe Hollandaise des Sciences. Archives XX, 8— XXI, 1.

The Society.
Heidelberg. Naturhistorisch-medicinischer Verein. Verhandlungen, n.
F., Ill, 5 ; Festschrift zur Feier des 500 jahr. Jubilaums.

The Society.
Helsingfors. Siillskapet pro Fauna et Flora Fennica. Acta, II. Medde-
landen 12, 13. The Society.

Hermannstadt. Siebenbiirgischer Verein fiir Naturwissenschaften. Ver-
handlungen und Mittheilungen, Jahresberichte, 1884-85.

The Society.
Iowa City. State Historical Society. Iowa Historical Record, 1885, Oct. —
1886, Oct. The Society.

Ithaca, N. Y. Cornell University. Bulletin (Science), I, 1, 2.

The Trustees.
Jena. Medicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Zeitschrift XII,
2-4, Suppl. 1, 2. Sitzungsberichte, 1883. The Society.

Zoologische Jahrbiicher (Sprengel), I, 1-4 ; Suppl. I.

I, V. Williamson Fund.
Kansas City. The Kansas City Review of Science and Industry, IX, 5.

the Editor.

Kharkow. Societe des Naturalistes a I'Universite Imperiale (In Russian)

Travaux, XVIII. . The Society.

Kiel. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Schriften, VI, 1, 2. The Society.

Universitiit. Verzeichniss, 1885, Nos. 1, 3 ; 1886, No. 1. Chronik,

1884-5, 1885-6. The University,

Klagenfurt, Landesmuseum von Karnten. Jahrbuch XVII. Bericht,

1884, Carinthia, 1885, Nos. 9-12; 1886, Nos, 1-11. Diagramme

der magn. u. meteor. Beobachtuugen, 1884, The Director,

Konigsburg. Physikalisch-okonomische Gesellschaft. Schriften, XXVI.

The Society.
Landshut. Botanischer Verein. Bericht, 1881 85. The Society.

Lausanne. Societe Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin, Nos. 92, 93.

The Society.
Leeds. Geological and Polytechnic Society of the West Riding of York-
shire. Proceedings, n. s., IX, 1. The Society.
Philosophical and Literary Society, Annual report, 1885-86,

The Society,

Yorkshire Naturalists' Union, Transactions, 1883, Pt. 8. The Society,

Leipzig, Archiv fiir Anatomie und Physiologie, Anatomische Abhand-

lungen, 1885, Nos. 5, 6 ; 1886, Nos, 1-4. Physiologische Abhand-

lungen, 1885, Nos, 5, 6, Suppl, B. ; 1886, Nos, 1-6, Suppl, Bd,

I, V. Williamson Fund.
Botanisches Institut zu Tubingen. Untersuchungen, I, 3 ; II, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Botanische Jahrbiicher (Engler), VII, 1— VIII, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Fiirstlich Jablonowski'sche Gesellschaft. Preisschriften, XXVI. '

The Society.
Jahresberichte iiber die Fortschiitte der Anatomie imd Physiologie
(Hofmann und Scliwalbe), XIII, 1 and 2 Abth., XIV., 1 Abth.

I. V. Williamson Fund-
Journal fiir Ornithologie, XXXIII, 3 -XXXIV, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Morpbologisches Jahrbucb, XI, 2-XII, 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Naturforscheude Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte 1884, 1885. Society.
K. Siichsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschafteu. Berichte ueber die
Verhandlungen, 1884, No. 3. Society.

Zeitschrift fiir Krystallographie und Mineralogie (Groth), XI, 1-XII,
3; Repertorium, Bd. I-X. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, XLII, 4-XLIV, 2.

I. V. William.son Fund.

Zoologischer Anzeiger, Nos. 208-236. The Editor.

Zoologische Station zu Neapel. Mittheilungen VI, 3 and 4. Jahres-

bericht, 1884, Nos. 1, 3, 4 ; 188.5, No. 3. The Director.

Leyden. Leyden Museum. Notes, VII, 1-4. The Director.

Nederlaudsche Dierkundige Vereeniging. Tijdschrift, 2de Ser. I, 2.

The Society.
Liege. Societe Royale des Sciences. Memoires, 2me Ser. XL The Society.
Lille. Societe Geologique du Nord. Annales XII. The Society.

Bulletin scieutifique du Departement du Nord, VII ; VIII, 1-12.

The Society.

Associacao dos Engenheiros Civis Portuguezas. Revista da Obras

publicas e Minas. Nos. 191-194. The Society.

Liverpool. Free Public Library, Museum and Walker Art Gallery. 33d

annual report. The Directoi",

Geological Society. Proceedings, V, 2. The Society.

Naturalists' Field Club. Proceedings, 1885-86. The Society.

London. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 5th Ser., Nos. 96-107.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Anthropological Institute. Journal, XV, 2-XVI, 2. The Society.

Astronomical Register, Nos. 276-287. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Chemical Society. Abstract of the Proceedings, Nos. 13-27. Journal,

Nos. 277-288 ; Suppl. to Vols. 47 and 48. Catalogue of the Library.

The Society.
Curtis' Botanical Magazine, Nos. 1185-1197. I. V. Williamson Fund.
The Earth, Nos. 1-3. The Editor.

The Electrician, XVI, 2-XVII, 2. The Editor.

Entomological Society. Transactions, 1885, Nos. 4 and 5 ; 1886, Nos.
1-3. The Society.

Gardener's Chronicle, Nos. 621-673. The Editor.

Geological Magazine, Nos, 258-269. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Geological Society. Quarterly Journal, Nos. 160-167. List.

The Society.
Geologists' Association. Proceedings, VIII, 7-IX, 6. The Society.
Hardwicke's Science Gossip, Nos. 252-263. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ibis, 5th Ser., Nos. 13-16. I. V. AVilliamson Fund.

Journal of Anatomy and Physiology, XX, 2 ; XXI, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Botany, British and Foreign, Nos. 276-287.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Conchology, V, 1-3. The Editor.

Journal of Physiology (Foster), VI, 6-VII, 6. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Science, 3d Ser., No. 144. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Knowledge, Nos. 174-196 ; IX, 1-7 ; X, 10. The Editor.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 425

Liuneau Society. Journal — Botany, Nos. 138-150; Zoology, 109-113.
Transactions, 2d Ser.— Zoology, II, 12-17 ; III. 3-4. List, 1885-6.

The Society.
London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, 5th Ser.,
Nos. 127-138. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Mineralogical Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Mineralogical
Magazine, Nos. 31 and 32. I. V. Williamson Fund.

The Naturalist, Nos. 125-136. The Editor.

Nature, Nos. 838-890. The Editor.

Paleontogi-aphical Society. Publications, XXXIX. Wilson Fund.
Physical Society. Proceedings, VII, 3-VIII, 2. The Society,

Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, n. s. Nos. 100-106.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Royal Geographical Society. Proceedings, VII, 12- VIII, 11.

The Society.
Royal Horticultural Society. Journal, VII, 1. The Society.

Royal Institution of Great Britain. Proceedings, XI, 2. List, 1885.

The Society.
Royal Microscopical Society, V, 6, 6 a ; VI, 1-5. The Society.

Royal Society. Proceedings, Nos. 239-246. Philosophical Trans-
actions, vol. 176, Nos. 1 and 2. The Society.
Scientific Enquirer, I, 1-10. The Editor.
Society of Arts. Journal, XXXIII. The Society.
Society of Psychical Research. Proceedings, I, 9. The Society.
Statistical Society. Jubilee volume, June 22-24, 1885. The Society.
Tri.ibner"s Literary and Oriental Literary Record. Nos. 217, 218, 221,
222, 225-228. The Publishers.
Zoological Record, 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zoological Society. Proceedings, 1885, IV ; 1886, I-III. Trans-
actions, XII, 1-3. The Society.
Zoologist, 3d Ser., No. 108-119. I. V. Williamson Fund.
London, Ca. Canadian Entomologist, XVII, 11-XVIII, 9. The Editor.
Lucca. Reale Accademia Lucchese di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Atti,
XXIV. The Society.
Lund. University. Acta, XXI. Katalog, 1885. The University.
Lyon. Academic des Sciences, Belles- Lettres et Arts. Memoires, Classe
des Lettres. XXIII. The Society.
Societe d' Agriculture, Histoire Naturelles et Arts utiles, 5me ser.
Annales, VI— VIII. The Society,
Societe Linneenne. Annales, n. s., XXX, XXXI. The Society.
Madison. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Lettres. Trans-
actions, VI. The Society.
Madrid. Observatorio, Resumen de las Observaciones, 1881.

Real Academia de la Historia. Boletin VIII, 4. The Society.

Revista de los progressos de las ciencias exactas, fisicas y naturales,
XXI, 7-9 ; XXII, 1. The Society.

Sociedad Geografica, Boletin XIX, 4-6 ; XX, 2-6 ; XXI, 1, 2.

The Society.

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Jahresbericht und Abhandlungen,

1885. The Society.

Manchester. Biological Laboratories of the Owens College. Studies, I.

The Trustees.

Geological Society. Transactions XVIII, 11— XIX, 1. The Society.

Literary and Philosophical Society. Proceedings, XXIII, XXIV.

Memoirs, 3d ser., VIII. The Society.

Marburg. Gesellschaft zur Beforderung der gesammten Naturwissen-

schaften. Sitzungsberi elite, 1884, 1885. Schriften, 8vo, XII. 1.
Metz. Academic. Memoires, 1882-83. The Society.

Verein fiir Erdkunde. 8er Jahresbericht. The Society.

426 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Mexico. Ministerio de Fomento. Boletin Nos. 134-146. The Editor.

Museo Nacional. Anales, III, 9. The Director.

Sociedad Mexicana de Ilistoria Natural, La Naturaleza, VII, 11-15.

The Society.

Sociedad cieutifica "Antonio Alzate." Reseua sobre el estableci-

raiento, etc., 1885. Memorias I, 1. The Society.

Middelburff. Zeeuwsch Genootschap der Wetenschappen. ArchiefVI, 1.

Naamlijst, 1880-84. The Society.

Middletown. Wesleyan University Museum, 14th annual report.

The Director.

Milan. R. Institute Lombaido di Scienze e Lettere. Rendiconti, ser. 2,

• XVIII, 17— XIX, 13. Memorie, XIV, XVI ; XIX. The Society.

Regio Institute technico superiore. Programma 1866-67. The Society.

Milwaukee. Public Museum, 3d annual report. The Director.

Modena. R. Accademia di Scienze, Lettre ed Arti. Memoire, ser. 2, III.

The Society.
Societa dei Naturalist!. Atti, serie 8, II, pp. 139-178; IV, pp. 89-138.

The Society.

Montreal. Canadian Record of Science, II, 1-4. The Editor.

Canadian Record of Natural History and Geology. I, 2, 3. The Editor.

Numismatic and Antiquarian Society. Canadian Antiquarian, XII,

3. The Society.

Moscow. Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes. Bulletin, 1884, No.4— 1886,

No. 1. Nouveaux Memoires, XV, 1-4. The Society.

Munich. Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologic, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte,

Beitrilge zur Anthropologie und Urgeschichte Bayerns, VII, 1, 3.

The Society.
K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte der math.-
phys. Classe, 1863, I, 1, 3, 4 ; II, 1-4. 1864, I, 3 ; II, 3. 4. 1865, I,
1-4. 1885, 1-4. Abhandlungen, math.-phys. Classe, XV, 3.

The Society.
Miinster. AVestfiilischer Provinzial-Verein fiir Wissenschaft und Kunst.
Jahresbericht, XIII. The Society,

Zcitschrift fiir Biologic, I- XXI ; XXII, 1— XXIII, 3.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Nancy. Societe des Sciences. Bulletin, ser. 3me, Fasc. 18. The Society.
Naples. R. Accademia delle Scienze fisiche e matematiche. Rendiconto
XXII— XXV, 3. The Society.

R. Istituto d' Incoraggiamento alle Scienze Naturali economiche e
technologiche. Atti, 2e ser. IV. The Society.

Neubraudenburg. Verein der Freunde der Naturgeschichte in Mecklen-
burg, Archiv, 39er Jahrg. The Society.
Newcastle-upon-Tyne. Natural History Society of Northumberland, Dur-
ham and Newcastle-upon-Tyne. Transactions VII, 2. The Society.
New Haven. American Journal of Science, 3d ser, Nos, 180-191.

The Editor.

New York, Academy of Sciences. Annals, III, 9, 10. Transactions, V,

1-6. The Society.

American Bookseller, XIX, 5 ; XX, 3. The Editor.

American Entomologist, new series, I, 1 ; III, 3, 5-11.

Entomological Section.
American Geographical Society. Bulletin, 1885, Nos. 3, 3 ; 1886,
Nos. 1, 5-7. The Society.

American Museum of Natural History. Annual report, 1885-86.
Bulletin, No. 7. The Director.

The Auk, III, 1-4. The Editor.

Cooperative Index to Periodicals, I, 4. The Editor.

Forest and Stream, XXV, 18— XXVII, 18, The Editor,

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 427

Library Journal, X, 11 — XI, 11. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Literary News, VI, 11— VII, 11. ' The Editor.

New York Medical Journal, XLII, 22— XLIV, 22. The Editor.

Mercantile Library Association, 6oth Annual Report. The Librarian.
New York Microscopical Society. Journal, I, 8, 9 ; II, 3-5.

The Society.
Popular Science Monthly, 1886, Jan.-Dec. The Editor.

Science, Nos. 147-199. I. V. Williamson Fund.

New York State Phaimaceutical Association. Proceedings, 8th An-
nual Meeting. The Society.
Torrey Botanical Club. Bulletin, XII, 9— XIII, 11. The Society.
Nijmegen. Nederlandsche Botanische Vereeniging. Nederlandsche
Kruidkundig Archief, 2e, Serie., IV, 4. The Society.
Niirnberg. Natudiistorische Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, VIII.

The Society.

Odessa. Societe des Naturalistes de la Nouvelle Russie. Memoirs, IX,

1-XI, 1. ^ The Society.

Societe des Naturalistes a I'Universite Imperiale de Kharkow. Tra-

vaux, XIX. The Society.

Orleans. Societe d' Agriculture, Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts. ]Me-

moirs, 2me, Ser., XXV, 1, 2 ; XXVI, 1, 2. The Society.

Ottawa. Ottawa Field-Naturalists' Club. Transactions, 1-6. The Society.

Padova. Societa Veneto-Trentina di Scienze Naturali. Atti, IX, 2,

BoUettino, III, 4. The Society.

Reale Accademia di Scienze. Letter e Belle Arti. BoUettino, II, 1-6.

The Society.
II Naturalista Siciliano, I, 2— II, 11 ; V, 2— VI, 2. The Editor.

Paris. Academic des Sciences. Comptes Rendus, Vols. 99 and 100.

The Society.
Annales des Mines, 7me, Serie, VII, 4— IX, .3.

Minister of Public Works in France.
Annales des Sciences Geologique.s XVIII. The Editor.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Zoologie et Paleontologie, 6me, Serie,
XIX, 1-6 ; XX, 1-6. Botanique, 7me, Ser., II, 2 -IV, 4.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Archives de Zoologie experimentale et generale, 2me Ser., IV, 1-3.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
La Bibliophile, Nos. 1-24, 1881-82 ; Nos. 1-10, 13-31, 1882-86 ; 1886,
, Nos. 32-35. The Editor.

Ecole Polytechnique. Journal, 55e Cab. The Director.

Journal de Conchyliologie, 3e Ser., XXV, 1— XXVI, 3. The Editor.
Journal de Micrographie, IX, 11 — X, 10. The Editor.

Museum d' Histoire Naturelle. Nouvelles Archives, 2me Ser., VII,
1, 2 ; VIII, 1. The Society.

Le Naturaliste, 1885, No. 22—1886, No. 46. The Editor.

Revue d' Ethnographie, IV, 4— V, 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Revue Geographique Internationale, 8me Annel, Nos. 120-123, 126,
128-131. The Editor.

Revue Scientifique, 3e Ser., V, 20— VI, 21. The Editor.

Societe d' Acclimatation. Bulletin, 1885, No. 9-1886, No. 8-10.

The Society.
Societe de Biologic. Compte Rendu des Seances, 6me Ser., 1885, No.
38—1886, No. 39. The Society.

Societe Eutomologique de France. Annales, 5me Ser., V, 1-4.

The Society.

Societe Geologique de France. Bulletin, 3me Ser., XIII, 7, 8 ; XIV,

1-5. The Society.

Societe Malacologique de France. Bulletin, No. 2, Dec, 1885 ; No.

1, Juillet, 1886. Annales de Malacologie, II, 3. The Society.

428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1886.

Sociote Mineralogique de France. Bulletin, VIII, 8— IX, 6.

The Society.

Societe Nationale d' Agriculture de France. Bulletin, 1885, No. 8 —

1886, No. 8. The Society.

Societe Pliilomathique. Bulletin, 1864-1884; '85, 7me Ser., X, 1, 2.

The Society.
Societe Zoologique. Bulletin, 1885, No. 4—1886, No. 3. The Society.
Passau. Naturhistorischer Verein. Bericht, 1, 2, 4, 5, 7-9, 10, 13.
Penzance. Royal Geological Society of Cornwall. Transactions, X, 8.

The Society.
Philadelphia. Academy of Natural Sciences. Proceedings, 1885, No. 3 —
1886, No. 2. Publication Committee.

College of Pharmacy. Alumni Association, 22d annual report.

The Society.
Dental Cosmos, XXVII, 12— XXVIII, 11. The Editor.

American Entomological Society. Transactions, XI, 1 ; XII, 2-4 :

XIII, 1, 2
American Pharmaceutical Association. Proceedings, 33d annual
meeting. The Society.

Engineers' Club. Proceedings V, 3 and Suppl. 4, 5. The Society.

Franklin Institute Journal, 3d Ser., Nos. 720-731. The Society.

Gardener's Monthly, Dec. 1885-Nov., 1886. The Editor.

Historical Society of Pennsylvania. Pennsylvania Magazine of History
and Biography, IX, 4 — X, 3. The Society.

American Journal of the Medical Sciences, Jan.-Oct., 1886 and Supple-
ment. The Editor.
American Journal of Pharmacy, 4th Ser., LVII, 12— LVH, 11.

The Editor.
Library Company of Philadelphia. Bulletin, Jan. and July, 1886.

The Librarian.
American Naturalist, 1878-Oct., 1886, incl., except Jan., 1883.

Stuart Wood.
Same, XIX, 1— XX, 11. The Editor.

The Microscopic Bulletin, II, 6— III, 5. The Editor.

Naturalists' Leisure Hour, Jan. -Sept., 1886. The Editor.

Pennsylvania Forestry Association. Forest Leaves, No. 1.

The Society.

American Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Nos. 121-123. List of

Members, 1886. The Society.

Polyclinic, I, 4 ; III, 8— IV, 5. The Editor.

Zoological Society, 14th annual report. The Society.

Pisa. Societa Malacologica Italiana. BoUettino, XI, Foglie8-17, XII,

1-4. > The Society.

Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali. Atti V, pp. 1-39, 43-55, 80-93,

95-117. Memorie VI, 2 ; VIL The Society.

Port of Spain. Trinidad official and commercial Register and Almanack,

1886. The Editor.

Providence. Random Notes on Natural History, II. The Editor.

Quebec. Literary and Historical Society. Transactions, Sessions 1883-

1886. The Society.

Raleigh. Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society. Journal, 1883-84, 1884^85.

The Society.
Regensburg. K. B. Botanische Gesellschaft. Flora, n. R., 43er Jahrg.

The Society.
Zoologisch-mineralogischer Verein. Correspondenz Blatt, 39er Jahrg.

The Society.
Richmond. The Industrial South, VI, 6, 7, 10-14, 16-23. The Editor.

Riga. Naturforscher- Verein. Correspondenzblatt, 28er Jahrg.

The Society.

1886.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 429

Rio de .Janeiro. Escola de Minas de Ouro Preta. Annaes No. 4.

The Director.
Museu Nacional. Archives, I, 2-4 ; II, 1-4 ; III, 1-4 ; VI.

The Director.

Ubservatoire Imperial. Revista, I, 1-10. The Director.

Rochester. Ward's Natural Science Bulletin, May 1, 1886. The Editor.

Rome. R. Accademia dei Lincei. Atti, Serie Quarta, Rendiconti, I, 24 —

II, 7. Atti, Ser. 2, I— III, 1, 2. The Society.

Archives Italiennes de Biologic (Emery et Mosso), I, 1882 — ^Vll, 2.

Catalogue des Travaux, 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale Vittorio Emanuele. Bollettino Nos. 1-4.

The Librarian.
Societa Geografica Italiana. Bollettino, Ser. II, An. XIX, 11 — XX, 10.

The Society.
Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiani. Memorie XIV, 9 — XV, 7.

The Society.
St. Gallen. St. Gallische Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Bericht,
1883-84. The Society.

St. John. Natural History Society of New Brunswick. Bulletin, 5.

The Society.
St. Petersburg. K. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Repertorium fiir
Meterologie, IX. Memoires, XXXII, 14-XXXIV, 3. Bulletin,
XXX, 1-3. The Society.

Bulletin of the same, VI, Ser. IV, 2e Partie, 1. Dr. Asa Gray.

Comite Geologique Russe. Bulletin, 1885, No. 8—1886, No. 6. Me-
moires, II, 2. The Survey.
Hortus Petropolitanus. Acta, IX, 2. Catalogus Syst. Biblioth., Ed.
Nov., 1886. The Director.
Physikalisches Ceutral-Observatorium. Annalen 1884, I, II.

The Director.

Russian Physico-Chemical Society of the University of St. Petersburg.

Journal, XVII, 7-9 ; XVIII, 1-7. The Society.

Societas Entomologica Rossica. Horae, XIX. The Society.

Imp. Russkoye Geografitcheskoye Obschtchestvo. Izviestiya, XXI,

5— XXII, 3. Zapiski, 1885.

Salem. Essex Institute. Bulletin, XVII, 4— XVIII, 6. The Society.

Peabody Academy of Sciences, 18th annual report. Memoirs, II.

The Society,

Salzburg. Deutscher und Oesterreichischer Alpenverein. Mittheilungen,

1885, No. 1-2. The Society.

San Francisco. California Academy of Sciences. Bulletin Nos. 4 and 5.

The Society.

Mercantile Library Association, 38d annual report. The Librarian.

Semur. Societe des Sciences Historiques et Naturelles. Bulletin 2e ser.,

No. 1. The Society.

Staunton. The Virginias, VI, 1 2.

Stockholm. Entomologisk Tidskrift, VI, 1-4. The Editor.

Geologiska Forening. Forhandlingar, VII, 13— VIII, 5. The Society,

Svenska Sallskabet for Anthropologic och Geografi. Ymer, 1885, Nos.

5-8. The Society.

K. Vetenskaps Akademien. Ofversigt, 1885, No. 5—1886, No. 8.

Bihang, X, 1, 2.

Stuttgart. Humboldt, IV, 11— V, 11. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kosmos, 1885, No. 5—1886, No. 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geologic und Palseontologie, III.

Beil. 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Verein fiir vaterliindische Naturkunde in Wiirtemberg. Jahreshefte,

42er Jahrg. The Society.

430 JPROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1886.

Switzerland. Socicte Helvetique des Sciences Naturelles, 68me session.

The Society.
Sydney. Linnean Society of New Soutli Wales. Proceedings X, 3, 4.

Proc. Linnean Hall, Oct. 31, 1885 ; 2d ser. I, t.
Tasmania. Royal Society. Papers, Proceedings and Reports, 1885.

The Society.
Tokio. Sei i Kwai. Transactions, Supplement IV, 11 — V, 10. The Society.
Topeka, "Washburn Laboratory of Natural History. Bulletin, I, 3-7.

The Directoi'.
Toronto. Canadian Institute. Proceedings, new series, III, 3— IV, 1.

The Society.

Entomological Society. Annual report, 1886. The Society.

Toulouse. Academic des Sciences, Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Me-

moires, 8me ser., VII, 1, 2.

Revue Mycologique, VII, 29-32. The Editor.

Societe d'Historie Naturelle. Bulletin, XIX. Apr.— Sept. Compte-

rendu sommaire Jan. 6— Mai 19, 1886. The Society.

Trenton. Natural History Society. Journal I, 1. The Society.

Trieste. Societa Adriatica di Scienze Naturali. Bollettina IX, 1, 2.

The Society.
Truro. Royal Institution of Cornwall. Journal VIII, 4 ; IX, 1.

The Society.

Tiibingen. Der Naturforscher, XIX, 1-26. The Editor.

Turin. Accademia Reale delle Scienze. Atti, XX, 1-6. Memoria, serie

2a, XXXVI.

Musei di Zoologia ed Anatomia comparata della R. Universita. Bol-

letino I, 1-15. The Director.

Regio Osservatorio della Regia Universita. Bollettino, XIX.

The Director.
United States. American Association for the Advancement of Science.
Proceedings, XXXIII, 1, 2 ; XXXIV. The Society.

American Society of Microscopists. Proceedings, 8th annual meet-
ing. The Society.
Upsal. Observatoire de I'Universite. Bulletin Meteorologique, XVII.

The Director.
Regia Societas Scientiarum. Nova Acta, XIII, 1. The Society.

Utrecht. K. Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Institut. Jaarboek, 1885.

The Director.

Provincial Utrechtsch Genootschap van Kunsten en Weteuschappen.

Verslag, 1885. Aanteekeningen 1884 and 1885. The Society.

Valparaiso (Indiana). The Hoosier Naturalist, I, 5, 12. The Editor.

Valparaiso (Chili). Wisseuschaftlicher Verein zu Santiago. Verhand-

lungen, 3 H., 1886. Dr. L. Darapsky.

Venice. L'Ateneo Veneto, Ser. IX, Vol. II, 6 -Ser. X, Vol. II. 2.

The Editor.
R. Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Atti, S. VI, T. II, 1 —
HI, 9. The Society.

Notarisia, I, 1-4. The Editor,

Vienna. K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte, mathem.-
naturw. Classe, LXXXIX, 3e Abth. 1-5 ; XC, ler Abth. 1-5 ; 2e
Abth. 1-5 ; 3e Abth. 1-5 ; XCI, le Abth. 1-4 ; 2e Abth. 1-3. Reg-
ister, 86-90 Bd. Denkschriften, XLVII. The Society.
Anthropologische Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, XV, 1-3. The Society.
K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt. Jahrbuch, XXXV, 4 ; XXXVI, 1.
Verhandluugen, 1885, No. 13—1886, No. 12. The Society.
Mineralogische und petrographische Mittheilungen (Tschermak).
Neue Folge, VII, 3-6. I. V. Williamson Fund.
K. K. Naturhistorisches Hofmuseum. Annalen I, 1, 2. The Director.

1886.] NATDRAL SCIENCES OE PHILADELPHIA. 431

Ornis, I, 1— II, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Verein zur Verbreitung Naturwissenschaftlicher Kenntnisse. Schrif-
ten, XXVI. The Society.

Wiener Illustrirte Gai-ten-Zeitung, 1885, No. 10—1886, No. 5.

The Editor.
K. K. Zoologisch-botanisclie Gesellscbaft. Verhandlungen, XXXV, 2 ;
XXXVI, 1, 2. Tbe Society.

Zoologisches Institut. Arbeiten, VI, 1— VII, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Washington. American Monthly MicroscopicalJourual, VI, 12— VII, 11.

The Editor.
Anthropological Society. Abstract of Transactions, III. The Society.
Chemical Society. Bulletin No. 1. The Society.

National Academy of Sciences. Constitution and membership, June
10, 1885. Memoirs, III, 1. Proceedings, I. 2. Report of Proceed-
ings during the year 1882. Dr. Jos. Leidy.
Philosophical Society. Bulletin, VIII. The Society.
Smithsonian Institution. Report, 1884, I, II. The Institution.
United States Department of Agriculture. Division of Entomology.
Bulletin, No. 11. The Department.
United States Fish Commission. Bulletin, V, VI, 1-14.

The Commission.
United States National Museum. Proceedings, VIII, 37, et seq., IX,
pp. 1-288. The Director.

United States Publications Monthly Catalogue, I, 9 — II, 6.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Wellington. New Zealand Institute. Transactions, XVIII. The Society.
Westeras. Redogorelse for Hogre Allmanna Liiroverket, 1885-86.

Westeras Gymnasium,

Wiesbaden. Nassauischer Verein fiir Naturkunde. Jahrbucher, XXXVIII,

XXXIX. The Society.

Wilmington, Wilmington Institute, 29th annual report. The Society.

Worcester. American Antiquarian Society. Proceedings, IV, 1, 2.

The Society,
Wiirzburg, Physikalisch-medicinische Gesellscbaft. Verhandlungen, n,
F., XIX. Sitzungsberichte, 1885. The Society.

Unterfninkischer Kreisfischereiverein, Bericht, 1882-1885,

The Society.
Zoologisch-zootomisches Institut. Arbeiten, VIII, 1. The Society.
Yokohama. Asiatic Society of Japan, Transactions, XIII, 3; XIV, 1.

The Society.

Seismological Society of Japan, IX, 1, 2. The Society.

York. Natural History Journal, LXXII. The Editor.

Zurich-Hottingen. Societas Entomologica. Organ, I, 1. The Society.

Zwickau. Verein fiir Naturkunde. Jahresbericlit, 1885, The Society.

INDEX TO GENERA, ETC.

1886.

PAGE.

Acacia 354

Acer 61, 344

Achai'docrinus 151, 152

Acliatinella 35

Achillea 344

Achradocrinus 115

Aeolosoma 346

Agassizocrinus. . . 116, 186-189, 210

Allagecrinus..78, 79, 82, 87-89, 211

Alligator 311

Alveolites 44, 55

Amblotherium 361

Ambtosia 344

Amia 62

Amoeba 346

Ampheristocrinus 115, 143

Amphientomum 17

Amphioxus 25

Amphitherium 363

Ancyracanthus 310

Ancyrocrinus 79, 80

Anisocrinus 65, 67

Anomalocrinus. .110, 111, 117,

128, 135, 136

Anomia 57

Antedon 120, 222

Anthocrinus 66, 71, 74

Anthracomartus , 231

Apeltes 233, 248, 251, 252

Apiocrinus...74, 137, 218-221, 223

Aplysia 364

Arachnocrinus 115, 148, 151

Area 351

Archseocrinus 142

Ardea 311

Ascaris 311

Astarte 351

Aster 344

Astylocrinidae. 116,118, 186

Atelestocrinus 115, 145, 147

Atlas 298

Aucbenia 12

38 (433)

Bterocrinus.
Barrandeocr

110,

tnus

112,

119

-122,

126,

PAGE.

133
221

Barycrinus .
Batocrinus. .

113,

115,

148,

222

75

Belemnocrinidse
Belemnocrinus. .

Bidens

ill,*

136

116,'
-139,

117,
146,

136

149
344

Blattina. . . .

231

Boa

300

Bombyx ....

298

Botaurus . . .

311

Botryocrinus
Bubo

• • • •

112,

115,

148
311

Buccitriton .

57

Bungarus . . .

300

Bursacrinus
Byssus

.115,

176,

• * • •

177
343

Cfecilius .13, 14

Csenogonia 343

Calceocrinidae 118, 197

Calceocrinus 116, 192, 202, 205

Calpiocrinus 67

Carabocrinus..ll2,115, 140-143, 149

Cardita 57

Carterius 229

Cassia 314-318

Castanea 294

Catillocrinidse 118, 191

Catillocrinus 89, 116, 192-196

Catochccnum 256

Caunopora 50, 52

Causus 300

Ceramocriuus 83, 107, 108

Cerastes 300

Ceriocrinus 115, 153, 154 177

Chama 351

Cbeirocrinus 197

Circaja 344, 349

Clathrodictyon 48-52, 56

Cleiocrinus 65, 66, 76

434

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1886.

PAGB,

Clidochirus 65

Clothe 300

Coccocrinus 82-84, 207

Codaster 215, 216, 217

Codiacriuus 115, 152, 155

Ca3nostroma....43, 47, 115, 153, 168

Collurio 309

Corbula 57

Cornus 344

Ci-assatella 57, 351

Cromyocrinus 115, 153, 170-172

Crotalocrinites 70

Crotalocrinus. .64, 65, 66, 69, 70,

73, 75, 77

Cuculanus 313

Cupressocrinus 80, 81, 89,

100-108, 157, 221

Cyatliocrinidse 117, 139

Cyathocrinus. .67, 70, 71, 73, 74,
112, 113, 115, 140, 148-150,

155, 157, 161

Cyrtidocrinus 65, 68

Cystipbyllum 46, 49

Dactylocrinus 65, 156, 157, 162

Dadocrinus 184

Decadocrinus 114, 115, 156,

158, 162

Dendrocrinites 139, 140

Dendrocrinus. ...115, 116, 142,

143, 149

Diapterus 256, 271

Dictyostroma 54, 55, 56

Didelphis 312

Dimerocrinus 65, 68

Diomedia 313

Diphyphyllum 44, 50

Diplocynodon 360

Diplomorpha 35

Disteira 300

Dolatocrinus 80

Dromatherium 359-363

Echmepteryx 17

Edriocrinus 116, 189, 210

Elipsocus 16

Eucrinidse 181

Encrinus..ll6, 139, 153-155, 182-184

Enallocrinus 64-66, 74, 76

Encrinidse , 118

Epactocrinus 83, 107, 108

Equus 275

Erisocrinus..lll, 114, 115, 127,

153-155, 179

Eucalia 233, 237, 238, 239,

251, 252
Eucalyptocrinus 221

PAGE.

Eucinostomus 256, 271

Eugeniacrinites 83

Eunectes 300

Eupachycrinus. .105, 114, 115,

153, 154, 157, 158, 173

Eupatorium 344

Euspirocrinus 112, 143

Eustrongylus 310

Eusyodon 38

Exoascus 273

Extracriuus 218, 221

Filaria 209,808, 310, 813

Fissurella 851

Fistulata 110

Foibesiocrinus 65, 68, 69

Fragaria 344

Gasterocoma...83, 106, 108-110, 151

Gasterosteidse 233

Gasterosteus 62, 233, 239,

242-247, 250, 252

Geranium 344

Gissocriims 65, 67, 115, 151

Gerres 256, 259-272

Gnorimocriuus ^ 69

Gi'aculus 311

Graphiocrinus. .90, 111, 114, 115,

127, 153, 154. 158, 176

Guettardicrinus 221

Gyalecta. 343

Hsematoxylon 352, 354

Haplocrinus. .78-89, 94, 95, 110,

131, 207, 211-213

Hedruris 318

Hermannia , 10

Heterocrinidae 116, 127

Heterocrinus Ill, 127-130, 148

Heteromyenia 228, 229

Heterostegina' 57

Hibiscus 291, 292

Hippopotamus 88

Hippotlierium 11

Hybocrinidse 116

Heybocrinus. .110, 119, 121, 124,

126, 133

Hybocystites 110, 123-126

Holocrinus , Ill, 139

Holopus 104

Homalocrinus 65, 67

Homocrinus 115, 116, 122,

143-145, 149, 158

Hoplocrimis 120-122, 126, 133

Hydractinia 40

Hydreionocrimus 105, 115,

153, 157, 158, 169

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

435

PAGE.

Hydrochoerus 375

Hydronassa 311

llydropMs 300

Ichthyocrinus 65, 67, 75, 221

Inadunata 78

Indigofera 292, 293

locrinus 127, 128, 131, 133, 134

Isidium 343

Isnardia 349

JuDco 308

Jonesia 352

Jussieua 349

Koniga 60

Lageniocrinus 89, 99

Lagenovhynchus 311

Laurus 344

Lecanocrinus 65, 67, 68, 125

Lecanora 343

LecytMocrinus 65, 115,152, 155

Leda 58

Lepai'ia 343

Lepus 308

Libonia 59

Lilium 297, 298

Llmaria 55

Liriodendron 344

Lithocrinus 69

Ludwigia 349

Macrostylocrinus 149

Magnolia 59

Mahernia 10, 11

Manouria 313

Marsupiocrinoidea 70, 71, 75

Mastodon 12,37, 38

Megatherium 12, 275, 276

Melanite 355

Meles 311, 312

Mephitis 36

Merocrinus 115, 133, 139, 140

Mespiloerinus 65, 68

Metacrinus 221, 222

Meyenia 228, 229, 230

Micrococcus 331, 332, 337

Microconodon 359, 362

Millericrinus 218, 219, 220

Mimus 311

Modiola 274

Mojarra 256

Monopetalonema 310

Mugil 271

Muhleuburgia 345

Mulgedium 344

PAGE.

Mycrocrinus 116

Myelodactylus 65

Myocrinus 196

Myrthillocrinus...79, 106, 109, 110

Mysia 58

Naja 300

Nanocrinus 106, 108, 109, 213

Nassa 280

Nipterocrinus 69, 112

Nucula 58, 351

Nummulites 57

Nyctiardea 311

Ohiocrinus..lll, 127, 128, 130, 132

Omphalaria 343

Ouychocrinus 65, 68, 69

Opegrapha 343

Operculina 57

Ophibolus 313

Ophiocriuus 112, 148

Orbicula 351

Orbitoides 57

Ornithogalum 59, 60

Ortyx 311

Ostrea 57

Pachylocrinus 153, 156, 157

Pachyocrinus 113

Pachystroma 47, 48, 54

Palseocrinus 112, 149

Parisocrinus 115, 145, 156, 157

Parmelia 343

Parmula 229

Partula 30-35

Paspalum 284-290

Pecten 57, 61, 62, 351

Pelamys 300

Pelias 300

Pelicanus 311

Peutremites . 103

Pentacrinus 218, 221, 222

Peralestes 360

Perientomum 17

Perna 351

Phsenoschisma 215

Phascolotherium 360

Phialocrinus 115, 177

Philocrinus 156

Phimocriuus 79, 89, 93, 100,

102, 105, 111

Phrynosoma 312

Physaloptera 311, 212

Physcia 343

Phytolacca 345

Pisocrinus 78, 83, 89, 96,

100, 110, 211

436

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

[1886.

PAGE.

Platurus 300

Platycrinus 81, 91, 95, 96, 149

Polygonum ; 344

Poteutilla 345

Poteriocrinidse 117, 153

Poteriocrinus..,.68, 88, 114, 115,

151, 155-163

Platycrinus 210

Plotus 311

Potereociinus 144, 145

Pseudechis 300

Psocus 14-17

Pycuosaccus 65, 68

Pygosteus 233, 234, 235, 250,

251, 252

Quercus 280, 281, 294

Quiscalus 309

Renselaeria 297

Rhinoceros 11

Rhizocrinus 112, 137, 221

Rhopalocrinus ICO, 110

Rubus 844

Salmo 810

Salvelinus 310

Saraca 352, 353, 354

ScaphiocriHus..88, 115, 153, 156-159

Scalaria 57

Schoriomite 355

Scolytus 327

Scytalocrinus...90, 114, 115, 153,

156, 161

Setaria 60

Shortia 345

Sicyocrinus 112, 115, 148

Silene 344

Sipedon 300

Smaris , 271

Smilacina , 344

Solanum 315

Solidago 344

Spbserocrinus 112, 115, 150, 151

Spinachia 234, 249, 250, 252

Spiraea 60

Spirifer 297

Spongilla 228, 229, 230

Stemmatocrinus 111, 115, 154,

155, 179, 180, 221
Stenocrinus..lll, 127, 128, 131, 132
Steplianocrinidse 206

FAOK.

Stephanocrinus 83, 84, 206-217

Stereocrinus 80

Storthiugocrinus 79, 89,95, 96

Streblocrinus 115

Streptocrinus ,148

Strix 311

Stromatocerium 46, 48. 54

Stromatopora 39-58

Stromeyerite 281

Sturnella 308

Stylocrinus 79, 89, 90, 94

Stylodictyon 43, 51, 52, 54, 56

Syllysis 17

Symbathocrinus 78, 79, 81, 83,

87, 89, 90, 93, 94, 97-105, 155

Synistius 256

Synplecta 313

Syringopora 40, 44, 50

Taenia 62

Taxidea 36

Taxocrinus 65-69, 125

Terebra 351

Toxodon 275, 276, 277

Trachemys, 312

Trapa 273

Triacrinus 83, 89, 96-100

Tribrachiocrinus il5, 174

Trichosomvini 310

Triconodon 360

Trilophodon 12

Trochita 351

Troostocrinus 216

Tropidocerca 313

Tubella 228, 229

Tmritella 58, 351

Ursus 36

Vasocrinus 115, 148

Vipera 300

Willemite 350

Woodocrinus 115, 163, 166

Xiphosoma 300

Xomolochirjis 300

Xyleborus 327

Zeacrinus 115, 158, 156, 157,

161-164, 167
Zenaidura 310

1886.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

437

^

GENERAL INDEX.

1886.

,;«Mc

(* r

Aaron, S, Frank. On some New
Psocidse, 13.

Abbott, Helen C. De S. On Haema-
toxylin in the Bark of Saraca In-
dica, 352.

Additions to Library, 395.

Additions to Musevim, 391.

Allen, Harrison, M. D. On a Post-
tympanic Ossicle in Ursus, 36.

Arthur, J. C. History and Biology
of Pear Blight, 296, 322.

Bseder, Charles. Announcement of
death of, 321.

Binder, Jacob. Eeport on the Wil-
liam S. Vaux Collections, 377.

Biological and Microscopical Sec-
tion, report of, 378.

Botanical Section, report of, 382.

Brinton, D. G., M. D. Report of
Professor of Ethnology and Ar-
chaeology, 386.

Brown, Albert Dod, notice of, 364.

Couchological Section, report of, 379.

Corresponding Secretary, report of,
370.

Cruice, Wm. R., M. D. Announce-
ment of death of, 300.

Curator of the Wm. S. Vaux Col-
lections, report of, 377.

Curators, report of, 373.

Dolley, Chas. S., M. D. On the
Histology of Salpa (S. runcinata-
fusiformis), 277 ; On the Helic-
tites of Luray Cave, 351.

Eckfeldt, J. W., M. D. Notes on
the Lichens in the Herbarium of
the Academy, 342.

Eigenmanu, Carl H. A review of
the American Gasterosteidse, 233.

Elections of Members and Corres-
pondents, 390.

Election of Officers, etc., 390.

Entomological Section, report of,
381.

Evermann, Barton W., and Seth E.
Meek. A revision of the Amer-
ican species of the genus Gerres,
256.

Fielde, Adele M. Fishing Lines
and Ligatures from the silk-glands
of Lepidopterous Larvae, 298 ;
Chinese Women and Spiritism, 319.

Foote, A. E., M. D. The Opal
Mines of Queretaro, Mexico, 278.

Ford, John. Distribution of Mo-
diola tulipa, 274.

General Index, 437.

Genth, F. A., Ph. D. On an Unde-
scribed Meteoric Iron from East
Tennessee, 349, 366.

Hartman, Wm. D., M. D. New
species of Partula from the New
Hebrides and Solomon Islands, 9,
30.

Harvey, F. L. On Anthracomartus
Trilobitus Scud., 231.

Haseltine, Ward B. Announcement
of death of, 59.

Heilprin, Angelo. On a giant Con-
orbis from the Oligocene Deposits
of Florida, 12, 227 ; Notes on the
Tertiary Geology and Paleontol-
ogy of the Southern United States,
12, 57 ; Vitality of MoUusca, 280 ;
On Miocene Fossils from Southern
New Jersey, 351 ; A new species
of Aplysia, 364 ; Report of Cura-
tors, 373 ; Report of Professor of
Invertebrate Paleontology, 384.

Henszey, Wm. C. Summary of
Report of Treasurer, 387.

Hess, Robert J., M. D. Report of
the Biological and Microscopical
Section, 378.

Hoffman, C. J. Announcement of
death of, 273.

Holman, Lillie E. Observations on
multiplication in Amoebae, 342, 346.

438

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1886.

Horn, Geo. H., M. D. Report of
Corresponding Secretary, 370.

Index to Genera, 433.

Jenks, Wm. P. Announcement of
death of, 319.

Koenig, Geo. A., Ph. D. Mineral-
ogical Notes ; Composition of
Stromeyerite, 281 ; Manganese
Zinc Serpentine from Franklin, N.
J., 350 ; On Schorlomite as a vari-
ety of Melanite, 352, 355.

Lea, Isaac. Announcement of death
of, 358.

Leidy, Jos., M. D. Mastodon and
Llama from Florida, 11 ; An Ex-
tinct Boar from Florida, 37; Caries
in the Mastodon, 36 ; On Amia
and its probable Taenia, 63 ; Tox-
odon and other Remains from Ni-

caragua, C. A., 275

Notice
308.

of

Nematoid Worms, 281

Librarian, report of, 371.

Library, additions to, 395.

Lippincott, J. B. Announcement of
death of, 9.

Lockington, W. N. The Form of
the Pupil in Snakes, 300.

McCormick, Calvin, The Inclusions
in the Granite of Craftsbury, Vt.,
19.

Martin, Geo., M. D. Announcement
of death of, 349.

Meehan, Tliomas. On the Morphol-
ogy of superimposed Stamens, 9 ;
Botanical Notes : Secretion of
Nectar in Libouia, Production of
Nectar in Ornithogalum coarcta-
tum, Seeds on Depauperite Plants,
Of Bracts in Ci'uciferse, The Co-
ronal Disk in Spirjea, 59 ; Trapa
bicornis, 273; Foimation of Crow's
Nest Branches in the Cherry-tree,
273 ; Note on Quercus dentata,
280 ; On Torsion in the Hollyhock,
witli some observations on Cross-
fertilization, 291 ; On Projection
of Pollen in the Flowers of Indigo-
fera, 292 ; On Parallelism in Dis-
tinct Lines of Evolution, 294 ;
Notes on Lilium tigrinum, 297 ;
On the Fertilization of Cassia
Marylandica, 300, 314; On the
Interdependence of Plants, 344 ;
On Petiolar Glands in some Ona-
gracese, 349 ; Report of Botanical
Section, 382.
Mineralogical and Geological Sec-
tion, report of, 384.

Morris, Chas. Methods of Defense
in Organisms, 25 ; Reverse Vision,
302.
Museum, additions to, 391.
Nebingei", Andrew, M. D. An-
nouncement of death of, 230.
Nolan, Edw. J., M.D. Report df
Recording Secretary, 369 ; Report
of Librarian, 371.
Officers, Councillors and Members of
Finance Committee for 1887, 390.
Osborn, Henry F., Sc. D. Observa-
tions upon the Upper Triassic
Mammals, Dromatherium and Mi-
croconodon, 358, 359.
Phillips, Chas. C. Announcement

of death of, 349.
Potts, Edw. Fresh-water Sponges
from Newfoundland, a new spe-
cies, 227.
Professor of Ethnology and Archae-
ology, Report of, 386.
Professor of Invertebrate Paleon-
tology, report of, 384.
Professor of Invertebrate Zoology,

report of, 385.
Rand, Theo. D. Report of Mineral-
ogical and Geological Section, 384.
Rau, Eugene A. Fatal Cases of

Trichiuiasis, 254.
Recording Secretary, report of, 369.
Redfield, John H. Report of Bo-
tanical Section, 383.
Report of the Biological and Micro-
scopical Section, 378.
Report of Botanical Section, 382.
Report of the Conchological Section,

379.
Report of Corresponding Secretary,

370.
Report of Curators, 373.
Report of the Curator of the Wm.

S. Vaux Collections, 377.
Report of the Entomological Sec-
tion, 381.
Report of Librarian, 371.
Report of the Mineralogical and

Geological Section, 384.
Report of Professor of Ethnology

and Archaeology, 386.
Report of Professor of Invertebrate

Paleontology, 384.
Report of Professor of Invertebrate

Zoology, 385.
Report of the Recording Secretary,

369.
Report of Treasurer, Summary of,
887.

1886.]

NATtTEAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA.

439

Ridings, J. H. Report of Entomo-
logical Section, 381.

Roberts, S. R. Report of the Con-
chological Section, 379.

Rominger, Dr. C. On the Minute
Structure of Stromatopora and its
allies, 36, 89.

Scott, Wm. B. The Genera Meso-
nyx and Pachysena Cope, 343, 349.

Sharp, Benj., M. D. Fermentation
in Perenji's Fluid, 61. On the
Eye of Pecten, 61. On the Ex-
pansion of the Crystalline Lens,
277. Report of Professor of In-
vertebrate Zoology, 385.

Shepherd, C. U. Announcement of
death of, 273.

Sherman, Roger. Announcement of
death of, 301.

Smith, Aubrey H. The Railway
Cutting at Gray's Ferry Road, 253.

Starr, Jesse W. Announcement of
death of, 59.

Thompson, Edw. H. On the Effect
of Scorpion Stings, 299.

Treasurer, Summary of Report of,
387.

Vasey, Geo. Notes on the Paspali
of Le Conte's Monograph, 280, 284.

Wachsmuth, Charles, and Frank
Springer. Revision of the Palaeo-
crinoidea. Part III, Section II, 64.

Welsh, John. Announcement of
death of, 230.

Wilt, Charles. Announcement of
death of, 227.

Woolman, Lewis. Oriskany Sand-
stone in Lycoming Co., Pa., 296.

PROC. ACIIO. NAT. SCI.. PHILAD'll. IBBB.

PLATE IV.

iiST

I I I M I I M : I

hb

120

1 1 1 1 1 1
130

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

40

EEliTII, METEOmC IRON FRIM EIST TENIIESSEE.

PRIG. ACAD. NAT. SGI., PHILAD'A, 1886.

PLATE V.

GENTH. METEDfilC IRON FROM EAST TENNESSEE.

V'^'

PROCIEEDINGS

OF THE

I

OF

PHILADELPHIA.

PABT I.—JAXUARY to 3IABCJI, 1880,

y-

3>f

PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redfield.

EDITOR: Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

LOGAN SQUARE.
1886,

'^

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF PHILADELPHIA.

Eight volumes of the New Series of the Joubnal and Part I of Volume IX (Quarto)
have been issued — 1847 to 1884. The price per volume of four parts is $10, or $3 per part, to
subscribers; and to others, $12.60 per volume, or $3.75 per part. Vol. VII contains "The
Extinct Mammalian Fauna of Dakota and Nebraska, with a Synopsis of the Mammalian
Remains of North America." Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D.

The First Series op the Jocrnal, 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public, $48.

The First Series op the Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1866, of which eight volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series of the Proceedings, commencing January 1, 1857 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $3
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.76 per volume.

The Third Series of the Proceedings, Illustrated, commencing January 1, 1871,
(of which fifteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1885), is published at $5 per annum, payable
in advance, to subscribers ; single volumes, $6.25.

^^^ A life subscription to either the Proceedings or Journal has been placed at
$40, or $75 for both.

American Journal op Conchology, 1865-71. Seven vols., Svo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred and fifty plates, many of them colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volumes, $10 each.

The Academy has the following works for sale at the prices aflBxedr

Description of Shells op North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thomas Say.

1830-34. $10.60.
Monograph op the Terrestrial Mollusca op the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20; colored edition, $13.50; plain edition, $8.50. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph of the Fresh Water Univalve Mollusca of the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continuation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, duplicate plates, $40 ; with colored

plates, $25; with plain plates, $18,

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Synonymy of the Species op StrepomatiDjE (Melanians) of the United States. By

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List op American Writers on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Monograph op the Order Pholadacea and other Papers. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Cloth, $2; paper, $1.75.
Complete Writings on Recent and Fossil CeNCHOLOGY of C. S. Rafinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G. W. Tryon, Jr. $2.50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred fine lithographic

plates. $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis op Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition. $6.
Contributions to Geology. By Isaac Lea. $3.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 60 cents.

Notice to Booksellers. — All the publications of the Society will be sup-
plied to Booksellers at a discount of 20 per cent, on the prices charged to the public.

Application to be made to Edward J. Nolan, M.D., at the Hall of the
Academy, comer of Nineteenth and Race Streets.

June, 1S8G.

COTSTTENTS.

Meehan, Thomas, On the Morpholog}' of superimposed
Stamens,

Leidy, Jos., M. D. Mastodon and Llama from Florida,

Aaron, S. Frank. On some new Psocidai (Plate I),

McCoRMiCK, Calvin. The Inclusions in the Granite of Crafts-
bury, Vt.,

Morris, Chas. Methods of Defense in Organisms, .

Hartman, Wm. D., M. D. New Species of Partula from the
New Hebrides and Solomon Islands (Plate II), .

Allen, Harrison, M. D. On a Post-tympanic Ossicle in IJrsus,

Leidy, Jos., M.D. An Extinct Boar from Florida, .

Leidy, Jos., M. D. Caries in the Mastodon, ....

Rominger, Dr. C. On the Minute Structure of Stromatopora
and its Allies, .........

Heilprin, Angelo. Notes on the Tertiary Geology and Paleon-
tology of the Southern United States, ....

Meehan, Tiios. Botanical Notes : — Secretion of Nectar in
Libonia ; Production of Nectar in Ornithogalum coarc-
tatum ; Seeds on Depauperite Plants ; Of Bracts in Cru-
ciferse ; The Coronal Disk in Spiraea, ...

Sharp, Benjamin, M.D. Fermentation in Perenji's Fluid,

Sharp, Benjamin, M. D. On the Eye of Pecten,

Leidy, Jos., M.D. On Amia and its probable Tjienia,

Wachsmutii, Charles and Frank Springer. Revision of the
Palffiocrinoidea. Part III, Section II, . ...

PAQB.

9
11
13

19

25

30
36
37
38

39

57

60
61
61
62

64

"ILOARE'S PRINTINO HOUSE, 734 & 736 SANSOM ST., PHILADELPHIA.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THR

^

kmlm^ 4 ^ntotal ^tkwm

OF

PHILADELPHIA .

rART II, APRIL—SEPTEMBBB, 1886.

PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redfield.

EDITOR: Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

LOGAN SQUARE.

1886.

^^•t^^s

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF PHILADELPHIA.

Eight volumes of the New Series of the Joupnal and Part I of Volume IX (Quarto)
have been issuid — 1847 to 1884. The price per volume of four parfs is $1(1, or $3 per part, to
Bubfcriberg; and to others, $12.50 per volume, or $S.T5 per part. Vol. VII contains "The
Extinct Mammalian Fauna of I>akota and Nebraska, with a Synopsis of the Mammalian
Remains of North America." Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidv, M.D., LL.D.

The First Series op the Joprnal. 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public. $48.

The First Series of the Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1856, of whicli eight volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members ; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series of the Proceeptngs, commencing January 1, 1857 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $3
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.75 per volume.

The Third Series of the Proceemngs. Ii.lpstrated, commencing January 1, 1871,
(of which fifteen volumes were completed Di c. 31, 1885), is published at $5 per annum, payable
in advance, to subscribers ; single volumes, $6.25.

^^S** A life subscription to either the Proceedings or Journal has been placed at
$40, or $75 for both.

American Journal op Conchologt, 1865-71. Seven vols., 8vo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred and fifty plates, many of them colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volumes, $10 each.

The AcADEHT has the following works for sale at the prices affixed;

Descpiption of Shells op North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thomas Say.

1830-34. $10.50.
Monograph of the Terrestrial Mollusca op the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By Oeo. W. Tryon, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20: colored edition, $13.50; plain edition, $8.50. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph of thh Fresh Water Tmvalve Moi xr sca or the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continvation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, duplicate plates, $40; with colored

plates, $26; with plain plates, $18.

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Synonymy* of the Species of Strkpomatipjk (Melanians) of the United States. By

Geo. W. Tryon. Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List of American Writers on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Monograph of the Order Pholadacea and other Papers. By Geo. W. Tryok, Jb.

Cloth, $2; paper, $1.75.
Complete Writings on Recent and Fossil CeNCHOLOGY op C. S. Rapinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G W. Tryon, Jr. $2 50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred fine lithographic

plates. $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis op Gknus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition. $5.
Contributions to Geology. By Isaac Lea. $3.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 50 cents.

Notice to Booksellers. — All the publications of the Society will be sup-
plied to Booksellers at a discount of 20 per cent on the prices cliarged totlie piiblib.

Application to be made to Edward J. Nolan, M.D., at the Hall of the
Academy, comer of Nineteenth and Race Streets.

October, 1886.

,.;^^'

PROCEEDINGS

OV THB

.^c^ri^mg 0f l^alurnl ^ti^nr^$

I

OF

PHILADELPMIA.

PART III. OCTOBER— DEC E3IBEIi, 1880.

PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D,,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redpield.

EDITOR: Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

LOGAN SQUARE.
1887.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF PHILADELPHIA.

Eight volumes of the New Series of the Joubnal and Part I of yolume IX (Quarto)
have been issued — 1847 to 1884. The price per volume of four parts is $10, or $3 per part, to
subscribers; and to others, $12.60 per volume, or $3.75 per part. Vol. VII contains "The
Extinct Mammalian Fauna of Dakota and Nebraska, with a Synopsis of the Mammalian
Remains of North America." Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D.

The First Series of the Journal, 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public, $48.

The First Series of tbe Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1856, of which eight volumes were completed-Dec. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series op the Proceedings, commencing January 1, 1857 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $3
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.75 per volume.

The Third Series of the Proceedings, Illcstrated, commencing January 1, 1871,
(of which sixteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1886), is published at $5 per annum, pay-
able in advance, to subscribers; single volumes, $6.25.

^^* A life subscription to either the Proceedings or Journal has been placed at
$40, or $75 for both.

American Journal of Conchology, 1865-71. Seven vols., 8vo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred and fifty plates, many of theiu colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volumes, $10 each.

The Academy has the following works for sale at the prices a£Sxed;

Description of Shells of North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thomas Say.

1830-34. $10.60.
Monograph op the Terrestrial Mollusca of the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20; colored edition, $13.50; plain edition, $8.50. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph of the Fresh Water Fnivalve Mollusca op the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continuation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, duplicate plates, $40; with colored

plates, $25; with plain plates, $18.

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Synonymy op the Species op Strepomatid^ (Melanians) op the Ukited States. By

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List op American AVriters on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. AV. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Monograph of the Order Pholadacea and other Papers. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Cloth, $2; paper, $1.75.
Complete Writings on Recent and Fossil CeNCHOLOGY of C. S. Rafinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G. W. Tryon, Jr. $2.50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred fine lithographic

plates. $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis of Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition. $5.
Contributions to Geology. By Isaac Lea. $3.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 50 cents.

Notice to Booksellees. — All tbe publications of tbe Society will be sup-
plied to Booksellers at a discount of 20 per cent, on tbe prices cbarged to tbe public

Application to be made to Edward J. Nolan, M.D., at tbe Hall of tbe
Academy, comer of Nineteentb and Kace Streets.

February, 1S87.

COISTTJENTS.

fi om Sast

Ten-

AuTHUu, J. C. History aiul Hiology of Pear Blight (Conclasion), .
EcKKEi.DT, J. W., M. D. Notes on the Lichens in the Herbarium of the
Academy, ............

Meehan, Thomas. On the Interdependence of Plants, ....

HoLMAN, LiLLit; E. Observations on the Multiplication in Amojbie,
Meehan, Thomas, On Petiolar Glands in some Onagracese, .
KoEsiG, GEOKaE A., Ph. D. Manganese Zinc Serpentine from Franklin.

HEiiiPRiN, Angelo. On Miocene Fossils from Southern New Jersey,

DoF-iiEY, Chas. S., M. D. On the Helictites of Luray Cave,

Abbott, Miss Helen C. De R. On HtematoxyliQ in the Bark of Saraca
Indica, .............

KoENiG, Geo. A., Ph. D. On Schorlomite as a variety of Melanite,

OsBORN, Henrt F., So. D. Observations upon the Upper Triassic Mam-
mals, Dromatheriura and Microconodou,

HeilpriiX, Angelo. A New Species of Aplysia,

Brown, Albert Dod, Notice of, .

Genth, F. a.. Ph. D. On an Uudescribed Meteoric Iron
nessee. (Plates IV and Vi

Report of the Recording Secretary,

Report of the Corresi)onding Secretary, ...

Report of the Librarian, ......

Report of the Curators, . '

Report of the Curator of the Wm. S. Vaux Collections,

Report of the Biological and Microscopical Section, .

Report of the Conchological Section, . . .

Report of the Entomological Section, ....

Report of the Botanical Section,

Report of the Miueralogical and Geological Section, .

Report of the Professor of Invertebrate Paleontology,

Report of the Professor of Invertebrate Zoology,

Report of the Professor- of Ethnology and Archaeology,

Report of the Treasurer, Summary of,

OflBcers, Councillors, and Members of the Finance Committee for 188^

Elections during ISSCi,

Additions to the Museum,

Additions to the Library,

Index to Genera, etc.,

General Index,

PAGB.

329

342

344
34(3
849

3r)0
351
351

353
355

359
364
364

366
369
370
371
373
377
378
379
381
382
884
384
885
386
387
390
390
391
395
433
437

'_0*Re-S P«INT(N0 HOUSE, 7a< & 736 SANSOM ST., PHI L A OEuPHI »*

^